7SJ66 Manual AB Us

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC 4 Functions 2
Multi-Functional Protec-
tive Relay with Local
Mounting and Commissioning 3
Control 7SJ66 Technical Data 4
Ordering Information and Accessories A
B
V4.36
Terminal Assignments
Manual
Connection Examples C
Current Transformer Requirements D
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent
Functions E
Functions, Settings, Information F
Literature
Glossary
Index
C53000-B1140-C383-B
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Subject to changes and errors. The information given in Copyright © Siemens 2021. All rights reserved.
this document only contains general descriptions and/or The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
performance features which may not always specifically document, or utilization and communication of the content
reflect those described, or which may undergo modifica- are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
tion in the course of further development of the products. including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
The requested performance features are binding only when utility model or a design, are reserved.
they are expressly agreed upon in the concluded contract.
Document version: C53000-B1140-C383-B.03 Trademarks
Edition: 09.2021
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGRA, SIGUARD, SIMEAS, SAFIR, SICAM,
Version of the product described: V4.36 and MindSphere are trademarks of Siemens. Any unauthor-
ized use is prohibited.
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of devices 7SJ66. In partic-
ular, one will find:
• Information regarding the configuration of the scope of the device and a description of the device func-
tions and settings → Chapter 2;
• Instructions for Installation and Commissioning → Chapter 3;
• Compilation of the Technical Data → Chapter 4;
• As well as a compilation of the most significant data for advanced users → Appendix.
General information with regard to design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices are set out in
the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Target Audience
Protection-system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of selective protection, automation and control equipment, and operating personnel in electrical
installations and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to: SIPROTEC 4 Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control 7SJ66; Firmware-
Version V4.36.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within
specified voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 2006/95 EC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with the Council
Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for EMC
directive, and with the standard EN 60255-27 for the low-voltage directive.
The device has been designed and produced for industrial use.
The product conforms with the international standards of the series IEC 60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Additional Support
For questions about the system, contact your Siemens sales partner.
Customer Support Center

Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual 3

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Preface
Siemens AG
Smart Infrastructure – Digital Grid Phone: +49 911 2155 4466
Customer Support Center E-mail: energy.automation@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD Phone: +49 911 9582 7100
Humboldtstrasse 59 E-mail: poweracademy@siemens.com
90459 Nuremberg Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Germany
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given attention.
4 SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Preface
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this document are
people who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
Selection of Used Symbols on the Device
Nr. Symbol Description
1 Direct current, IEC 60417, 5031
2 Alternating current, IEC 60417, 5032
3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417, 5033
4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417, 5017
5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417, 5019
6 Caution, risk of electric shock
7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000, 0434
8 Protective Insulation, IEC 60417, 5172, Safety Class II devices

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Preface
Nr. Symbol Description
9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices
10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market
Typographic and Symbol Conventions

The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the
text flow:
Parameter Names
Designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-word in the display of the
device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are marked in bold letters in
monospace type style. The same applies to titles of menus.
1234A
Parameter addresses have the same character style as parameter names. Parameter addresses contain the
suffix A in the overview tables if the parameter can only be set in DIGSI via the option Display additional
settings.
Parameter Options
Possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the
screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are additionally written in italics. The same
applies to the options of the menus.
Indications
Designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the
switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation marks.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously derived
from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Device-internal logical input signal
Device-internal logical output signal
Internal input signal of an analog quantity

External binary input signal with number (binary input,
input indication)
External binary output signal with number
(example of a value indication)
External binary output signal with number (device indication) used as
input signal
Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with address

1234 and the possible settings ON and OFF
Besides these, graphical symbols are used in accordance with IEC 60617-12 and IEC 60617-13 or similar.
Some of the most frequently used are listed below:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Preface
Analog input variable
AND-gate operation of input values
OR-gate operation of input values
Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the

inputs is active
Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive

at the same time
Dynamic inputs (edge-triggered) above with positive, below with

negative edge
Formation of one analog output signal from a number of analog input

signals
Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and

parameter designator (name)
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
Static memory (SR flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R),
output (Q) and inverted output (Q), setting input dominant
Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R),
output (Q) and inverted output (Q), resetting input dominant
OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in OpenSSL Toolkit (http://
www.openssl.org/).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................19
1.1 Overall Operation..............................................................................................................20
1.2 Application Scope............................................................................................................. 23
1.3 Characteristics.................................................................................................................. 26
2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................... 31
2.1 General.............................................................................................................................32
2.1.1 Functional Scope......................................................................................................... 32
2.1.1.1 Description............................................................................................................ 32
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 32
2.1.1.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 34
2.1.2 Device, General Settings.............................................................................................. 36
2.1.2.1 Command-dependent Messages.............................................................................36
2.1.2.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 37
2.1.2.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 37
2.1.2.4 Information List..................................................................................................... 38
2.1.3 Power System Data 1................................................................................................... 40
2.1.3.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 40
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 40
2.1.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 46
2.1.4 Oscillographic Fault Records........................................................................................ 48
2.1.4.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 48
2.1.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 49
2.1.5 Settings Groups........................................................................................................... 49
2.1.5.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 50
2.1.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 50
2.1.6 Power System Data 2................................................................................................... 51
2.1.6.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 51
2.1.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 54
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N.......................................................................... 56
2.2.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 56
2.2.2 Definite Time, High-set Elements 50-3, 50-2, 50N-3, 50N-2..........................................57
2.2.3 Definite Time Overcurrent Elements 50-1, 50N-1......................................................... 59
2.2.4 Inverse Time Overcurrent Elements 51, 51N ................................................................62
2.2.5 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection 51V (Voltage-controlled / Voltage-restraint)......... 65

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
2.2.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function............................................................................. 67

2.2.7 Inrush Restraint .......................................................................................................... 68
2.2.8 Pickup Logic and Tripping Logic................................................................................... 69
2.2.9 Two-phase Overcurrent Protection (Only Non-Directional) ...........................................70
2.2.10 Fast Busbar Protection Using Reverse Interlocking ....................................................... 71
2.2.11 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................72
2.2.12 Settings.......................................................................................................................79
2.2.13 Information List........................................................................................................... 81
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N....................................................................... 84
2.3.1 General....................................................................................................................... 84
2.3.2 Definite Time Directional High-set Elements 67-2, 67N-2, 67-3, 67N-3......................... 86
2.3.3 Definite Time, Directional Time Overcurrent Elements 67-1, 67N-1...............................87
2.3.4 Inverse Time, Directional Time Overcurrent Elements 67-TOC, 67N-TOC ...................... 90
2.3.5 Interaction with Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM).................................................................91
2.3.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function............................................................................. 92
2.3.7 Inrush Restraint........................................................................................................... 92
2.3.8 Determination of Direction.......................................................................................... 92
2.3.9 Reverse Interlocking for Double End Fed Lines..............................................................96
2.3.10 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................97
2.3.11 Settings.....................................................................................................................104
2.3.12 Information List......................................................................................................... 107
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup...............................................................................................110
2.4.1 Description................................................................................................................ 110
2.4.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................112
2.4.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................114
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection................................................................................116
2.5.1 Functional Description............................................................................................... 116
2.5.2 High-impedance Ground Fault Unit Protection........................................................... 117
2.5.3 Tank Leakage Protection............................................................................................ 119
2.5.4 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................120
2.5.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................125
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59................................................................................................126
2.6.1 Measurement Principle.............................................................................................. 126
2.6.2 Overvoltage Protection 59......................................................................................... 127
2.6.3 Undervoltage Protection 27....................................................................................... 128
2.6.4 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................131
2.6.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................134
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46.................................................................................... 136
2.7.1 Definite Time characteristic .......................................................................................136
2.7.2 Inverse Time characteristic 46-TOC............................................................................ 137
2.7.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................139
2.7.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................141

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
2.8 Motor Protection.............................................................................................................143

2.8.1 Motor Starting Supervision 48................................................................................... 143
2.8.1.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 143
2.8.1.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 146
2.8.2 Motor Restart Inhibit 66............................................................................................. 147
2.8.2.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 148
2.8.2.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 152
2.8.3 Load Jam Protection (51M)........................................................................................ 156
2.8.3.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 158
2.8.4 Motorprotection (Motor Starting Protection 48, Motor Restart Inhibit 66, LoadJam)....160
2.8.4.1 Settings............................................................................................................... 160
2.8.4.2 Information List................................................................................................... 161
2.9 Frequency Protection 81 O/U...........................................................................................162
2.9.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................163
2.9.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................164
2.10 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection........................................................ 166
2.10.1 Description................................................................................................................ 166
2.10.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................168
2.10.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................169
2.11 Thermal Overload Protection 49...................................................................................... 171
2.11.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................174
2.11.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................178
2.12 Supervision Functions..................................................................................................... 180
2.12.1 Measurement Supervision......................................................................................... 180
2.12.1.1 General................................................................................................................180
2.12.1.2 Hardware Monitoring .......................................................................................... 180
2.12.1.3 Monitoring of the Hardware Modules................................................................... 182
2.12.1.4 Software Monitoring ........................................................................................... 183
2.12.1.5 Monitoring of the Transformer Circuits................................................................. 183
2.12.1.6 Measurement Voltage Failure Detection............................................................... 185
2.12.1.7 Broken Wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits....................................... 189
2.12.1.8 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 190
2.12.1.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 191
2.12.2 Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC..................................................................................... 193
2.12.2.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 196
2.12.2.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 197
2.12.3 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions.................................................. 197
2.12.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 197
2.13 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s).........................................................200
2.13.1 Ground Fault Detection for cos-φ / sin-φ Measurement (Standard Method)................ 200
2.13.2 Ground Fault Detection for V0/I0-ϕ Measurement.......................................................206
2.13.3 Ground Fault Location............................................................................................... 211

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
2.13.4 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................212

2.13.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................221
2.14 Admittance Ground Fault Protection................................................................................225
2.14.1 General..................................................................................................................... 225
2.14.2 Description of the Non-Directional Admittance Protection Y0..................................... 225
2.14.3 Description of the Directional Admittance Protection Y0 with G0 or B0 Measurement. 226
2.14.4 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................230
2.14.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................232
2.15 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection...............................................................................236
2.15.1 Description................................................................................................................ 236
2.15.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................239
2.15.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................240
2.16 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection............................................................................ 242
2.16.1 Description................................................................................................................ 242
2.16.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................245
2.16.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................246
2.17 Automatic Reclosing System 79.......................................................................................247
2.17.1 Program Execution.................................................................................................... 247
2.17.2 Blocking.................................................................................................................... 251
2.17.3 Status Recognition and Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker........................................... 253
2.17.4 Controlling Protection Elements.................................................................................254
2.17.5 Zone Sequencing / Fuse Saving Scheme..................................................................... 256
2.17.6 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................257
2.17.7 Settings.....................................................................................................................262
2.18 Fault Locator...................................................................................................................271
2.18.1 Description................................................................................................................ 271
2.18.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................272
2.18.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................273
2.19 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF....................................................................................... 274
2.19.1 Description................................................................................................................ 274
2.19.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................277
2.19.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................279
2.20 Flexible Protection Functions...........................................................................................281
2.20.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................284
2.20.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................289
2.21 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function...........................292
2.21.1 Description................................................................................................................ 292

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
2.21.2 Implementation of the Reverse Power Protection....................................................... 295

2.21.3 Configuring the Reverse Power Protection in DIGSI.....................................................297
2.22 Synchronization Function................................................................................................300
2.22.1 SYNC Function group 1..............................................................................................300
2.22.1.1 General................................................................................................................300
2.22.1.2 Synchrocheck.......................................................................................................303
2.22.1.3 De-energized Switching....................................................................................... 304
2.22.1.4 Direct Command / Blocking.................................................................................. 305
2.22.1.5 Interaction with Control, AR and External Control................................................. 305
2.22.1.6 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 307
2.22.1.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 310
2.23 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes..............................................................................313
2.23.1 Description................................................................................................................ 313
2.23.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................314
2.23.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................315
2.24 Phase Rotation................................................................................................................ 321
2.24.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................321
2.25 Function Logic................................................................................................................ 322
2.25.1 Pickup Logic of the Entire Device................................................................................322
2.25.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device............................................................................. 322
2.25.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................323
2.26 Auxiliary Functions..........................................................................................................324
2.26.1 Message Processing...................................................................................................324
2.26.1.1 LED Displays and Binary Outputs (Output Relays).................................................. 324
2.26.1.2 Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or Personal Computer....................... 324
2.26.1.3 Information to a Substation Control Center...........................................................326
2.26.2 Statistics....................................................................................................................326
2.26.2.2 Circuit-Breaker Maintenance.................................................................................327
2.26.2.3 Motor Statistics.................................................................................................... 333
2.26.2.4 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 333
2.26.3 Measurement............................................................................................................ 336
2.26.3.1 Display of Measured Values.................................................................................. 337
2.26.3.2 Transfer of Measured Values................................................................................ 338
2.26.4 Average Measurements............................................................................................. 341
2.26.4.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 341
2.26.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 341
2.26.5 Min/Max Measurement Setup.................................................................................... 342
2.26.5.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 342
2.26.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 342
2.26.6 Set Points for Measured Values.................................................................................. 344
2.26.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 344

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
2.26.6.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 345

2.26.7 Set Points for Statistic................................................................................................ 346
2.26.7.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 346
2.26.8 Energy Metering........................................................................................................346
2.26.8.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 346
2.26.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 347
2.26.9 Commissioning Aids.................................................................................................. 347
2.26.10 Web Monitor............................................................................................................. 348
2.26.10.1 General................................................................................................................349
2.26.10.2 Functions.............................................................................................................349
2.26.10.3 Operating Modes ................................................................................................ 353
2.26.10.4 Display Example................................................................................................... 354
2.27 Protection for Single-phase Voltage Transformer Connection........................................... 356
2.27.1 Connection................................................................................................................356
2.27.2 Impacts on the Functionality of the Device................................................................. 356
2.27.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................358
2.28 Breaker Control............................................................................................................... 360
2.28.1 Control Device........................................................................................................... 360
2.28.2 Types of Commands.................................................................................................. 362
2.28.3 Command Sequence..................................................................................................362
2.28.4 Switchgear Interlocking............................................................................................. 363
2.28.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 363
2.28.5 Command Logging.................................................................................................... 369
2.29 Communication.............................................................................................................. 371
2.29.1 General..................................................................................................................... 371
2.29.2 Parameter Settings in DIGSI....................................................................................... 371
2.29.3 Security Features....................................................................................................... 379
2.29.3.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 379
2.29.3.2 Password Definition............................................................................................. 380
2.29.3.3 Configuration via User Interface........................................................................... 381
2.29.3.4 DIGSI 4 DTLS Connection......................................................................................384
2.29.3.5 Secure TCP/UDP Ports Used...................................................................................384
2.29.4 Setting on IEC 61850 Station in DIGSI........................................................................ 384
2.29.5 IEC 61850 System Configurator................................................................................. 385
2.29.6 Integration into Networks.......................................................................................... 385
2.29.7 Parameterization....................................................................................................... 385
2.29.8 Additional Information.............................................................................................. 385
2.30 Security Logging............................................................................................................. 386
2.30.1 Overview...................................................................................................................386
2.30.2 Structure of Security Events....................................................................................... 386

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
2.30.3 Configuration............................................................................................................ 386

2.30.4 Viewing Audit Logs....................................................................................................389
3 Mounting and Commissioning................................................................................................................. 391

3.1 Mounting and Connections............................................................................................. 392
3.1.1 Configuration Information......................................................................................... 392
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications.............................................................................................396
3.1.2.1 General................................................................................................................396
3.1.2.2 Environmental Protection Hints............................................................................ 397
3.1.2.3 Disassembly......................................................................................................... 398
3.1.2.4 Jumper Settings of Binary Input Board (Only Available with MLFB Position 8 =
5 or 6)................................................................................................................. 400
3.1.2.5 Jumper Settings of Binary Input Board (Only Available with MLFB Position 8 = 4)...401
3.1.2.6 Jumper Settings of VT/CT Board............................................................................ 403
3.1.2.7 Extension BIO Board............................................................................................. 405
3.1.2.8 BIO Board.............................................................................................................406
3.1.2.9 Communication Board..........................................................................................408
3.1.2.10 Reassembly.......................................................................................................... 410
3.1.3 Installation................................................................................................................ 411
3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting...........................................................................................411
3.1.3.2 Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting.................................................................. 412
3.2 Checking Connections.....................................................................................................415
3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Time Synchronization and Communication Interfaces.. 415
3.2.2 Checking the System Connections............................................................................. 416
3.3 Commissioning............................................................................................................... 418
3.3.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block............................................................................. 419
3.3.2 Testing the System (SCADA) Interface ....................................................................... 419
3.3.3 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs...................................................... 421
3.3.4 Tests for Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................ 423
3.3.5 Testing User-Defined Functions..................................................................................425
3.3.6 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing............................................................. 425
3.3.7 Test for High Impedance Protection........................................................................... 426
3.3.8 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme....................................................................426
3.3.9 Direction Check with Load Current............................................................................. 426
3.3.10 Polarity Check for Voltage Input V4.............................................................................427
3.3.11 Ground Fault Check................................................................................................... 429
3.3.12 Polarity Check for Current Input ΙN..............................................................................430
3.3.13 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD‑Box................................................ 432
3.3.14 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices................................................ 434
3.3.15 Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests.............................................................. 434
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device........................................................................................ 436
4 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 437

4.1 General Device Data........................................................................................................438
4.1.1 Analog Inputs............................................................................................................ 438
4.1.2 Auxiliary Voltage....................................................................................................... 438
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs......................................................................................... 439
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces......................................................................................... 440
4.1.5 Electrical Tests...........................................................................................................441
4.1.6 Mechanical Tests....................................................................................................... 443

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests.................................................................................................. 443

4.1.8 Service Conditions..................................................................................................... 444
4.1.9 Constructive Designs................................................................................................. 444
4.1.10 Flammability of Materials...........................................................................................444
4.2 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection............................................................................... 446
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection................................................................................ 448
4.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection.................................................................................. 459
4.5 Inrush Restraint...............................................................................................................461
4.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup...............................................................................................462
4.7 Single-phase Overcurrent Protection............................................................................... 463
4.8 Voltage Protection.......................................................................................................... 464
4.9 Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time characteristic).............................................466
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)............................................ 467
4.11 Motor Starting Time Supervision..................................................................................... 473
4.12 Motor Restart Inhibit....................................................................................................... 474
4.13 Load Jam Protection........................................................................................................475
4.14 Frequency Protection...................................................................................................... 476
4.15 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)...............................................477
4.16 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 479
4.17 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)................................................................. 481
4.18 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection...............................................................................490
4.19 Directional intermittent ground fault protection.............................................................. 491
4.20 Automatic Reclosing....................................................................................................... 492
4.21 Fault Locator...................................................................................................................493
4.22 Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................................... 494
4.23 Flexible Protection Functions...........................................................................................495
4.24 Synchronization Function................................................................................................498
4.25 RTD Box for Temperature Detection.................................................................................500
4.26 User-defined Functions (CFC).......................................................................................... 501
4.27 Additional Functions....................................................................................................... 507
4.28 Switching Device Control................................................................................................ 512
4.29 Dimensions.....................................................................................................................513
4.29.1 Panel Flush Mounting and Cabinet Flush Mounting (Housing Size 1/3).........................513
4.29.2 Panel Flush Mounting and Cabinet Flush Mounting (Housing Size 1/2).........................514
4.29.3 Varistor..................................................................................................................... 515
A Ordering Information and Accessories.....................................................................................................517

A.1 Ordering Information ..................................................................................................... 518
A.2 Accessories .................................................................................................................... 523
B Terminal Assignments.............................................................................................................................. 525

B.1 7SJ66_Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation...................................... 526
B.2 Connector Assignment.................................................................................................... 530
C Connection Examples............................................................................................................................... 531

C.1 Connection Examples for Current Transformers, all Devices............................................. 532

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table of Contents
C.2 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers 7SJ662................................................... 536

C.3 Connection example for high-impedance ground fault differential protection.................. 540
C.4 Connection Example for RTD Box.....................................................................................541
D Current Transformer Requirements......................................................................................................... 543

D.1 Accuracy limiting factors................................................................................................. 544
D.2 Class conversion............................................................................................................. 545
D.3 Cable Core Balance Current Transformer..........................................................................546
E Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions............................................................................... 547

E.1 LEDs............................................................................................................................... 548
E.2 Binary Input.................................................................................................................... 549
E.3 Binary Output................................................................................................................. 550
E.4 Function Keys................................................................................................................. 551
E.5 Default Display................................................................................................................552
E.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts....................................................................................................555
E.7 Protocol-dependent Functions.........................................................................................557
F Functions, Settings, Information..............................................................................................................559

F.1 Functional Scope............................................................................................................ 560
F.2 Settings.......................................................................................................................... 563
F.3 Information List.............................................................................................................. 599
F.4 Group Indications............................................................................................................646
F.5 Measured Values.............................................................................................................648
Literature.................................................................................................................................................. 655
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................... 657
Index.........................................................................................................................................................667

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
1 Introduction
The device family SIPROTEC 7SJ66 devices is introduced in this section. An overview of the devices is
presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions.
1.1 Overall Operation 20
1.2 Application Scope 23
1.3 Characteristics 26

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation

The numerical SIPROTEC 7SJ66 multifunction protection devices are equipped with a powerful microprocessor.
It allows all tasks to be processed digitally, from the acquisition of measured quantities to sending commands
to circuit breakers. Figure 1-1 illustrates the basic structure of the 7SJ66 device.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs (MI) convert the currents and voltages coming from the instrument transformers and
adapt them to the level appropriate for the internal processing of the device. The device provides four current
inputs. The device is also equipped with four voltage inputs. Three current inputs serve for input of the phase
currents. Depending on the model, the fourth current input (ΙN) may be used for measuring the ground fault
current ΙN (current transformer neutral point) or for a separate ground current transformer (for sensitive
ground fault detection ΙNs and directional determination of ground faults).
[Hw_Structure_7SJ66, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-1 Hardware Structure of the Numerical Multi-functional Device 7SJ66
Voltage inputs can either be used to measure the three phase-to-ground voltages, or two phase-to-phase
voltages and the displacement voltage (VN voltage). It is also possible to connect two phase-to-phase voltages
in open-delta connection.
The 4 voltage transformers of the 7SJ66 can either be applied for the input of 3 phase-to-ground voltages, one
displacement voltage V0 or a further voltage for the synchronization function.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
The analog input quantities are passed on to the input amplifiers (IA). The input amplifier IA element provides
a high-resistance termination for the input quantities. It consists of filters that are optimized for measured-
value processing with regard to bandwidth and processing speed.
The analog-to-digital (AD) element consists of a multiplexor, an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter and of
memory components for the transmission of digital signals to the microcomputer system.
Microcomputer System
Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system (μC) also executes the actual protec-
tion and control functions. They especially include:
• Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities
• Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities
• Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protective functions
• Interrogation of limit values and sequences in time
• Control of signals for the logic functions
• Output of control commands for switching devices
• Recording of messages, fault data and fault values for analysis
• Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data recording, real-time
clock, communication, interfaces, etc.
• The information is distributed via output amplifiers (OA).
Binary Inputs and Outputs

The computer system obtains external information through the binary input/output boards (inputs and
outputs). The computer system obtains information from the system (e.g remote resetting) or from external
equipment (e.g. blocking commands). These outputs include, in particular, trip commands to circuit breakers
and signals for the remote indication of important events and conditions.
Front Panel
Information such as messages related to events, states, measured values and the functional status of the
device are visualized by light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD enable interaction with the remote device.
These elements can be used to access the device for information such as configuration and setting parame-
ters. Similarly, setting parameters can be accessed and changed if needed.
In addition, control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the front panel of the device.
Serial Interfaces
The Front USB Interface is provided for local communications with a personal computer using the DIGSI soft-
ware. This facilitates a comfortable handling of all device functions.
The Rear Service Interface can also be used to communicate with the relay from a PC running the DIGSI soft-
ware. This interface is especially well suited for a permanent connection of the devices to the PC or for opera-
tion via a modem. The service interface can also be used to connect an RTD box (= resistance temperature
detector) for obtaining external temperatures (e.g. for overload protection).
All data can be transferred to a central control center or monitoring system via the serial System Interface.
This interface supports various protocols and physical transmission schemes to suit the particular application.
A further interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external synchronization
sources.
A range of communication protocols are available according to the MLFB structure.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
Power Supply
A power supply unit (Vaux or PS) delivers power to the functional units using the different voltage levels.
Voltage dips may occur if the voltage supply system (substation battery) becomes short-circuited. Usually,
they are bridged by a capacitor (see also Technical Data).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
1.2 Application Scope

The numerical SIPROTEC 4 7SJ66 multifunction protection relays are versatile devices designed for protection,
control and monitoring of busbar feeders. The devices can be used for line protection in networks that are
grounded, low-resistance grounded, isolated, or of a compensated neutral point structure. They are suited for
networks that are radial or looped, and for lines with single or multi-terminal feeds. The devices are equipped
with motor protection applicable for asynchronous machines of all sizes.
The devices include the functions that are necessary for protection, monitoring of circuit breaker positions,
and control of the circuit breakers in straight bus applications or breaker-and-a-half configurations; therefore,
the devices can be universally employed. The devices provide excellent backup facilities of differential protec-
tive schemes of lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars of all voltage levels.
Protective Functions
Non-directional overcurrent protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N) is the basis of the device. There are 3 definite time
overcurrent protective elements and one inverse time element for the phase currents and the ground current.
For inverse time overcurrent protective elements, several curves of different standards are provided. Alterna-
tively, user-defined characteristic can be programmed.
Depending on the version of the device that is ordered, the non-directional overcurrent protection can be
supplemented with directional overcurrent protection (67, 67N), breaker failure protection (50BF), and sensi-
tive ground-fault detection for high-resistance ground faults. The highly sensitive ground fault detection can
be directional or non-directional.
In addition to the fault protection functions already mentioned, other protective functions are available. Some
of them depend on the version of the device that is ordered. These additional functions include frequency
protection (81O/U), overvoltage protection (59), and undervoltage protection (27), negative sequence protec-
tion (46), and overload protection (49) with start inhibit for motors (66/68), motor starting protection (48),
and load jam protection as well as automatic reclosing (79) which allows different reclosing cycles on over-
head lines. An automatic reclosing system may also be connected externally. To ensure quick detection of the
fault, the device is equipped with a fault locator.
A protection feature can be ordered for the detection of intermittent ground faults which detects and accumu-
lates transient ground faults.
External detectors account for ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures (by means of an external
RTDbox).
Before reclosing after 3-pole tripping the 7SJ66 can verify the validity of the reclosure by means of voltage
check and/or synchrocheck. The synchronization function can also be controlled externally.
Control Functions
The device features a control function for activating and deactivating switchgears via the integrated operator
panel, the system interface, binary inputs, and the serial port using a personal computer with DIGSI.
The status of the primary equipment can be transmitted to the device via auxiliary contacts connected to
binary inputs. The present status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed on the device, and
used for interlocking or alarm condition monitoring. The number of operating equipments to be switched is
limited by the binary inputs and outputs available in the device or the binary inputs and outputs allocated for
the switch position indications. Depending on the primary equipment being controlled, one binary input
(single point indication) or two binary inputs (double point indication) may be used for this process.
The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associated with switching
authority (Remote or Local), and by the operating mode (interlocked/non-interlocked, with or without pass-
word request).
Processing of interlocking conditions for switching (e.g. switchgear interlocking) can be established with the
aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions.
Messages and Measured Values; Recording of Event and Fault Data

The operational indications provide information about conditions in the power system and the device. Meas-
urement quantities and values that are calculated can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial
interfaces.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
Device messages can be assigned to a number of LEDs on the front cover (allocatable), can be externally
processed via output contacts (allocatable), linked with user-definable logic functions and/or issued via serial
interfaces.
During a fault (system fault) important events and changes in conditions are saved in fault protocols (Event
Log or Trip Log). Instantaneous fault values are also saved in the device and may be analyzed subsequently.
Communication
The following interfaces are available for the communication with external operating, control, and memory
systems.
A standard USB type A interface on the front panel serves the purpose of local communication with a PC. By
means of the SIPROTEC 4 operating software DIGSI, all operational and evaluation tasks can be executed via
this operator interface, such as specifying and modifying configuration parameters and settings, configuring
user-specific logic functions, retrieving operational messages and measured values, inquiring device condi-
tions and measured values, issuing control commands.
Depending on the individual ordering variant, additional interfaces are located at the rear side of the device.
They serve to establish extensive communication with other digital operating, control, and memory compo-
nents.
The service interface can be operated via electrical data lines and also allows communication via modem. For
this reason, remote operation is possible via personal computer and the DIGSI operating software, for
example, to operate several devices via a central PC.
The system interface (serial module) ensures the central communication between the device and the substa-
tion controller. It can also be operated via data lines. Standard protocols are available to transmit data
according to IEC 60870-5-103/Modbus/DNP via system port. The integration of the devices into the automa-
tion systems SINAUT LSA and SICAM can also take place with this profile.
The system interface (Ethernet module) allows integrating the devices into 100-Mbit Ethernet communica-
tion networks of the process control and automation system using IEC 61850/DNP protocol. Besides the link
with the process control and automation system, this interface also processes DIGSI communication,
inter‑relay communication via GOOSE and connection of a SICAM I/O unit.
Compared to 7SJ62 communication manuals SIPROTEC Communication Module DNP 3.0 (C53000-L1840-
A001-03) and SIPROTEC Communication Module DNP3 IP (C53000-L2040-C354-1), one new parameter
UnsolConTimeout is added to the communication profile of the 7SJ66 device. The parameter is used for
setting the confirmation delay time for unsolicited response, the default value is 5 second.
7SJ66 device supports 2 types of redundant operating modes: Line and Switch. RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol) and PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) can be configured under Switch mode. For more information
about RSTP and PRP, refer to EN100 manual (C53000-G1140-C167-12).
[sc_Operating mode, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-2 Operating Mode

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
[sc_Redundary type in switch mode, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-3 Redundary Type in Switch Mode

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
1.3 Characteristics
General Characteristics
• Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system
• Complete digital processing and control of measured values, from the sampling of the analog input quan-
tities to the initiation of outputs, for example, tripping or closing circuit breakers or other switchgear
devices
• Total electrical separation between the internal processing stages of the device and the external trans-
former, control, and DC supply circuits of the system because of the design of the binary inputs, outputs,
and the DC or AC converters
• Complete set of functions necessary for the proper protection of lines, feeders, motors, and busbars
• Easy device operation through an integrated operator panel or by means of a connected personal
computer running DIGSI
• Continuous calculation and display of measured and metered values on the front of the device
• Storage of min./max. measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term mean values
• Recording of event and fault data for the last 8 system faults (fault in a network) with real-time informa-
tion as well as instantaneous values for fault recording for a maximum time range of 20 s
• Constant monitoring of the measured quantities, as well as continuous self-diagnostics covering the
hardware and software
• Communication with SCADA or substation controller equipment via serial interfaces through the choice
of data cable, or modem
• Battery-buffered clock that can be synchronized with an IRIG-B (via satellite) or DCF77 signal, binary input
signal, or system interface command
• Motor Statistics: Recording of important statistical motor data (operation and startup information)
• Switching statistics: Counting the number of trip commands initiated by the device, logging the currents
of the last switch-off operation initiated by the device, and accumulating the eliminated short-circuit
currents of each breaker pole
• Operating hours counter: Counting the operating hours of the protected object under load
• Commissioning aids such as connection check, direction determination, status indication of all binary
inputs and outputs, easy check of system interface and influencing of information of the system interface
during test operation
Time Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
• Three definite time overcurrent protective elements and one inverse time overcurrent protective element
for phase current and ground current ΙN or summation current 3Ι0
• Two-phase operation of the overcurrent protection (ΙA, ΙC) is possible
• Different curves of common standards are available for 51 and 51N, or a user-defined characteristic
• Blocking is possible, e.g. for reverse interlocking with any element
• Instantaneous tripping by any element is possible when switching onto a fault
• In-rush restraint with second harmonic current quantities.
Ground Fault Protection 50N, 51N
• Three definite time overcurrent protective elements and one inverse time overcurrent protective element
applicable for grounded or high-resistance grounded systems
• Different Curves of common standards are available for 51 and 51N, or a user-defined characteristic

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
• In-rush restraint with second harmonic current quantities
• Instantaneous tripping by any overcurrent element upon switch onto fault is possible.
Directional Time Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
• Four elements for both phase and ground operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent protec-
tion elements. Their pickup values and time delays can be set independently
• Direction determination with cross-polarized voltages and voltage memory and dynamically unlimited
direction sensitivity
• Fault direction is calculated phase-selectively and separately for phase faults, ground faults and summa-
tion current faults.
Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function 50C, 50NC, 51C, 51NC, 67C, 67NC
• Dynamic changeover of time overcurrent protection settings, e.g. when cold load conditions are recog-
nized
• Detection of cold load condition via circuit breaker position or current threshold
• Activation via automatic reclosure (AR) is possible
• Activation also possible via binary input.
Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
• Evaluation of the measured current via the sensitive or insensitive ground current transformer
• Suitable as differential protection that includes the neutral point current on transformer side, generator
side or motor side or for a grounded reactor set
• As tank leakage protection against abnormal leakage currents between transformer tanks and ground.
Voltage Protection 27, 59
• Two element undervoltage detection via the positive-sequence system of the voltages, phase-to-phase or
phase-to-ground voltages
• Choice of current supervision for 27-1 and 27-2
• Two-element overvoltage detection via the positive sequence system voltages, negative sequence system
voltages, phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltages
• For a single-phase connection, the connected single-phase phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage is

evaluated
• Settable dropout ratio for all elements of the undervoltage and overvoltage protection.
Negative Sequence Protection 46
• Evaluation of the negative sequence component of the currents
• Two definite-time elements 46-1 and 46-2 and one inverse-time element 46-TOC; curves of common
standards are available for 46-TOC.
Motor Starting Protection 48
• Inverse time tripping characteristic based on an evaluation of the motor starting current
• Definite time delay for blocked rotor.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
Motor Restart Inhibit 66, 86
• Approximate computation of the rotor overtemperature
• Startup is permitted only if the rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete startup
• Disabling of the start inhibit is possible if an emergency startup is required.
Load Jam Protection for Motors 51M
• Protection of motors during sudden rotor blocking
• Evaluation of the positive sequence system of phase currents
• Evaluation of the circuit breaker switching state
• Blocking of function during motor standstill and during motor startup
Frequency Protection 81 O/U
• Monitoring of falling below (f<) and/or exceeding (f>) with 4 frequency limits and time delays that are
independently adjustable
• Insensitive to harmonics and abrupt phase angle changes
• Adjustable undervoltage threshold.
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
• Detection of critical power system situations
• Disconnection of power supply facilities from the grid
• Reconnection under stable power system conditions
Thermal Overload Protection 49
• Thermal profile of energy losses (overload protection has full memory capability)
• True r.m.s. calculation
• Adjustable thermal warning element
• Adjustable alarm level based on current magnitude
• Additional time constant setting for motors to accommodate the motor at standstill
• Integration of ambient temperature or coolant temperature is possible via external temperature sensors
and RTD-Box.
Monitoring Functions
• Reliability of the device is greatly increased because of self-monitoring of the internal measurement
circuits, the auxiliary power supply as well as the hardware and software
• Monitoring of the current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits using summation and
symmetry check techniques
• Trip circuit monitoring possible
• Phase rotation check.
Ground Fault Detection 50N(s), 51N(s), 67N(s), 59N/64
• Displacement voltage is measured or calculated from the three phase voltages
• Determination of a faulty phase on ungrounded or grounded systems
• Two-element Ground Fault Detection: 50Ns-1 and 50Ns-2
• High sensitivity (as low as 1 mA)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
• Overcurrent element with definite time or inverse time delay
• For inverse time overcurrent protection, characteristics according to IEC or ANSI standards, one userde-
fined and two logarithmic inverse current/time characteristics are available
• Direction determination with zero sequence quantities(I0, V0), wattmetric ground fault direction determi-
nation
• Any element can be set as directional or non-directional — forward sensing directional, or reverse
sensing directional
• Directional characteristic curve adjustable
• Optionally applicable as additional ground fault protection.
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
• Detects and accumulates intermittent ground faults
• Tripping after configurable total time.
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
• Detects intermittent ground faults
• Direction determination
• Tripping after settable number of intermittent restrikes
Automatic Reclosing 79
• Single-shot or multi-shot
• With separate dead times for the first and all succeeding shots
• Protective elements that initiate automatic reclosing are selectable. The choices can be different for
phase faults and ground faults
• Separate programs for phase and ground faults
• Interaction to time overcurrent protection element and ground fault elements. They can be blocked in
dependence of the reclosing cycle or released instantaneously
• Synchronous reconnection is possible in combination with the integrated synchronization function.
Fault Location
• Initiation by trip command, external command or dropout of pickup
• Calculation of the fault distance and output of the fault location in ohms (primary and secondary) and in
kilometers or miles
• Up to three line sections can be configured.
Breaker Failure Protection 50 BF
• By checking the current and/or evaluating the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts
• Started by any integrated protection function that trips
• Initiation possible via a binary input from an external protective device.
Flexible Protective Functions
• Up to 20 customizable protection functions with three-phase or single-phase operation
• Any calculated or directly measured quantity can be evaluated on principle
• Standard protection logic with definite time characteristic

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
• Internal and configurable pickup and dropout delay
• Modifiable message texts.
Synchrocheck
• Verification of the synchronous conditions before reclosing after three-pole tripping
• Fast measurement of the voltage difference ΔV, the phase angle differenceΔφ and the frequency differ-
ence Δf
• Alternatively, check of the de-energized state before reclosing
• Setable minimum and maximum voltage
• Verification of the synchronous conditions or de-energized state also possible before the manual closing
of the circuit breaker, with separate limit values
• Measurement also possible via transformer without external intermediate matching transformer
• Measuring voltages optionally phase‑to‑phase or phase‑to‑ground
RTD box
• Detection of any ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures by means of an external RTD box and
external temperature sensors.
Phase Rotation
• Selectable ABC or ACB by setting (static) or binary input (dynamic).
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance
• Statistical methods to help adjust maintenance intervals for CB contacts according to their actual wear
• several independent subfunctions have been implemented (ΣΙ-procedure, ΣΙx-procedure, 2P-procedure

and Ι2t-procedure)
• Acquisition and conditioning of measured values for all subfunctions operates phase-selective using one
procedure-specific threshold per subfunction.
User Defined Functions
• Freely programmable linking of internal and external signals in order to implement user-defined logic
functions
• All standard logic functions (AND, OR, NOT, EXCLUSIVE-OR, etc.)
• Time delays and limit value interrogations
• Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee curve for a transducer input,
and live-zero monitoring.
Breaker Control
• Circuit breakers can be opened and closed via specific process control keys (models with graphic displays
only), the programmable function keys on the front panel, via the system interface (e.g. by SICAM or
SCADA), or via the front PC interface using a personal computer with DIGSI)
• Feedback of switching states via the switch auxiliary contacts
• Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and check of interlocking conditions.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
2 Functions
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC 4 device 7SJ66. It shows the setting
possibilities for each function in maximum configuration. Information with regard to the determination of
setting values as well as formulas, if required, are also provided.
Based on the following information, it can also be determined which of the provided functions should be
used.
2.1 General 32
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N 56
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N 84
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup 110
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection 116
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59 126
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46 136
2.8 Motor Protection 143
2.9 Frequency Protection 81 O/U 162
2.10 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection 166
2.11 Thermal Overload Protection 49 171
2.12 Supervision Functions 180
2.13 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s) 200
2.14 Admittance Ground Fault Protection 225
2.15 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 236
2.16 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection 242
2.17 Automatic Reclosing System 79 247
2.18 Fault Locator 271
2.19 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF 274
2.20 Flexible Protection Functions 281
2.21 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function 292
2.22 Synchronization Function 300
2.23 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes 313
2.24 Phase Rotation 321
2.25 Function Logic 322
2.26 Auxiliary Functions 324
2.27 Protection for Single-phase Voltage Transformer Connection 356
2.28 Breaker Control 360
2.29 Communication 371
2.30 Security Logging 386

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
2.1 General
The settings associated with the various device functions can be modified using the operating or service inter-
face in DIGSI on a PC. Some parameters may also be changed using the controls on the front panel of the
device. The detailed procedure is described in the SIPROTEC System Description /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System
Description.
2.1.1 Functional Scope
The 7SJ66 relay contains protection functions as well as auxiliary functions. The hardware and firmware is
designed for this scope of functions. Additionally, the control functions can be matched to the system require-
ments. Individual functions can be enabled or disabled during the configuration procedure. The interaction of
functions may also be modified.
2.1.1.1 Description
Configuration of the Functional Scope

Example for the configuration of the functional scope:
A protected system consists of overhead lines and underground cables. Since automatic reclosing is only
needed for the overhead lines, the automatic reclosing function is not configured or Disabled for the relays
protecting the underground cables.
The available protection and additional functions must be configured as Enabled or Disabled. For indi-
vidual functions, a choice between several alternatives may be presented, as described below.
Functions configured as Disabled are not processed by the 7SJ66. There are no messages, and corre-
sponding settings (functions, limit values) are not queried during configuration.
NOTE
i Available functions and default settings depend on the ordering code of the relay (see A Ordering Informa-
tion and Accessories).
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes
Setting of the Functional Scope

Configuration settings can be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI and transferred via the front
serial port or the rear service interface. The operation via DIGSI is explained in the SIPROTEC 4 System Descrip-
tion.
For changing configuration parameters in the device, password no.7 is required (for parameter set). Without
the password, the settings can be read but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device.
The functional scope with the available options is set in the Functional Scope dialog box to match plant
requirements.
Special Features
Most settings are self-explanatory. The special features are described below.
If you want to use the setting group change function, set address 103 Grp Chge OPTION to Enabled.
Simple and fast changeover between up to four different setting groups is possible in service. Only one setting
group can be selected and used if this option is Disabled.
For the overcurrent elements of the time overcurrent protection (separately for phase currents and ground
current), various tripping characteristics can be selected at address 112 Charac. Phase and 113 Charac.
Ground. If only the definite characteristic is desired, then Definite Time should be selected. Additionally,
depending on the version ordered, various inverse time characteristics, based on either IEC (TOC IEC) stand-
ards or ANSI (TOC ANSI standards), or user-defined characteristics are available for selection. The dropout
behaviour of the IEC and ANSI characteristics will be specified later with settings (addresses 1210 and 1310).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
But for the user-defined characteristic, you can choose in address 112 and 113 whether to specify only the
pickup characteristic (User Defined PU) or the pickup and the dropout characteristic (User def.
Reset).
Additionally, the superimposed high-current elements 50-2 and 50-3 are available in all these cases. Time
overcurrent protection may be set to Disabled during configuration.
For directional time overcurrent protection, the same information that was entered for the non-directional
time overcurrent protection (except the 50-3 element) can be entered under addresses 115 67/67-TOC and
116 67N/67N-TOC.
For the (sensitive) ground fault detection, the methods of measurement cos φ / sin φ or V0/I0 φ mea.
for direction determination can be set via the parameter 130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch The cos φ / sin φ
method (via residual wattmetric current detection) is set by default. If the cos φ / sin φ measurement
method is set, select between a definite time (Definite Time) characteristic, inverse time characteristics
TOC IEC or TOC ANSI, one User Defined PU and two logarithmic inverse characteristics at address 131
Sens. Gnd Fault. The setting V0/I0 φ mea. provides the definite time characteristic Definite Time.
When selecting the setting Disabled, the entire function is disabled.
For the intermittent ground fault protection, you can specify the measured quantity (with Ignd, with 3I0
or with Ignd,sens.) to be used by this protection function at address 133 INTERM.EF.
At address 134 Dir. Interm. EF you can set the directional intermittent ground fault protection to
Enabled or Disabled.
For negative sequence current protection, address 140 46 is used to specify whether the tripping characteris-
tics should be Definite Time, TOC ANSI, or TOC IEC, or whether the function is to be Disabled.
For overload protection, address 142 49 allows you to specify whether the thermal replica of the overload
protection will account for a coolant temperature or ambient temperature (With amb. temp.) or not (No
ambient temp), or whether the entire function is Disabled.
At address 155 27/Q-Protection you can set the QU protection to Enabled or Disabled.
7SJ66 provides one synchronization function group for the function SYNCHROCHECK.
For the circuit-breaker maintenance function, several options are available under address 172 52 B.WEAR
MONIT Irrespective of this, the basic functionality of the summation current formation (ΣΙ procedure) is always
active. It requires no further configurations and adds up the tripping currents of the trips initiated by the
protection functions.
When selecting the ΣIx procedure, the sum of all tripping current powers is formed and issued as a reference
value. The 2P procedure continuously calculates the remaining lifespan of the circuit breaker.
With the Ι2t procedure, the square fault current integrals are formed via arc time and are issued as a reference
value.
For more detailed information about the circuit breaker maintenance procedures, see Section 2.26.2 Statistics.
At address 181 L-sections FL you can set the number of different line sections (max. three) to be taken
into consideration by the fault locator.
When using trip circuit supervision, address 182 74 Trip Ct Supv allows you to select whether this func-
tion should work with two (2 Binary Inputs) or only one binary input (1 Binary Input) or if the func-
tion is Disabled.
If you want to detect an ambient temperature or a coolant temperature and send the information e.g. to the
overload protection, specify the port to which the RTD-box is connected in address 190 RTD-BOX INPUT. In
7SJ66 port C (service port) is used for this purpose. The number and transmission type of the temperature
detectors (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) can be specified in address 191 RTD CONNECTION: 12
RTD HDX or 12 RTD ETH. Implementation examples are given in the Appendix (under "Connection Exam-
ples"). The settings in address 191 have to comply with those at the RTD-box (see Section 2.23.2 Setting
Notes, side title “RTD-box Settings”).
The flexible protection functions can be configured via the FLEXIBLE FUNC. parameter. Up to 20 functions
can be created. This is done by setting checkmarks at the functions (see the example in Section 2.21 Reverse-
Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function). If the checkmark of a function is removed, all
settings and configurations made previously will be lost. After re-selecting the function, all settings and
configurations are in default setting. Setting of the flexible function is done in DIGSI under “Parameters”,
“Additional Functions” and “Settings”. The configuration is done as usual under “Parameters” and “Configura-
tion”.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.1.3 Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Enabled Oscillographic Fault Records
Enabled
112 Charac. Phase Disabled Definite Time 50/51
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
User def. Reset
113 Charac. Ground Disabled Definite Time 50N/51N
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
User def. Reset
115 67/67-TOC Disabled Definite Time 67, 67-TOC
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
User def. Reset
116 67N/67N-TOC Disabled Definite Time 67N, 67N-TOC
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
User def. Reset
117 Coldload Pickup Disabled Disabled Cold Load Pickup
Enabled
122 InrushRestraint Disabled Disabled 2nd Harmonic Inrush Restraint
Enabled
127 50 1Ph Disabled Disabled 50 1Ph
Enabled
130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch cos φ / sin φ cos φ / sin φ (sens.) Ground fault dir. character-
V0/I0 φ mea. istic
131 Sens. Gnd Fault Disabled Disabled (sensitive) Ground fault
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
Log. inverse A
Log. Inverse B
133 INTERM.EF Disabled Disabled Intermittent earth fault protection
with Ignd
with 3I0
with Ignd,sens.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General

134 Dir. Interm. EF Disabled Disabled Dir. Intermittent earth fault
Enabled protection
135 Adm.E Fault Disabled Disabled Admittance Earth Fault Protection
Enabled
140 46 Disabled Disabled 46 Negative Sequence Protection
TOC ANSI
TOC IEC
Definite Time
141 48 Disabled Disabled 48 Startup Time Supervision for
Enabled Motors
142 49 Disabled Disabled 49 Thermal Overload Protection
No ambient temp
With amb. temp.
143 66 #of Starts Disabled Disabled 66 Startup Counter for Motors
Enabled
144 LOAD JAM PROT. Disabled Disabled Load Jam Protection
Enabled
150 27/59 Disabled Disabled 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protec-
Enabled tion
154 81 O/U Disabled Disabled 81 Over/Underfrequency Protec-
Enabled tion
155 27/Q-Protection Disabled Disabled 27 / Q dir. con. Protection
Enabled
161 25 Function 1 Disabled Disabled 25 Function group 1
ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK
170 50BF Disabled Disabled 50BF Breaker Failure Protection
Enabled
enabled w/ 3I0>
171 79 Auto Recl. Disabled Disabled 79 Auto-Reclose Function
Enabled
172 52 B.WEAR MONIT Disabled Disabled 52 Breaker Wear Monitoring
Ix-Method
2P-Method
180 Fault Locator Disabled Enabled Fault Locator
Enabled
181 L-sections FL 1 Section 1 Section Line sections for fault locator
2 Sections
3 Sections
182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled Disabled 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
2 Binary Inputs
1 Binary Input
190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input
Port C
191 RTD CONNECTION 12 RTD HDX 12 RTD HDX Ext. Temperature Input Connec-
12 RTD Eth tion Type

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.2 Device, General Settings
The device requires some general information. This may be, for example, the type of annunciation to be
issued in the event of an occurrence of a power system fault.
2.1.2.1 Command-dependent Messages
Spontaneous Fault Indications

After a fault, the most important fault data are spontaneously displayed on the device. Address 610
FltDisp.LED/LCD allows to select whether the spontaneous fault indications will be updated on every fault
(Target on PU) or only in the case of faults involving a trip (Target on TRIP).
For devices with graphic display, use address 611 Spont. FltDisp. to specify whether or not a sponta-
neous fault message should appear automatically on the display (YES) or not (NO). For devices with text
display such messages will appear after a system fault in any event.
[logik-spondanmeld-display-081024, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-1 Generation of Spontaneous Fault Messages on the Device Display
Reset of Stored LEDs/Relays

A new pickup of the protection function normally resets all stored LEDs / relays, so that only information about
the last fault is displayed. The reset of the stored LEDs / relays can be prevented for a settable time under
address 625 T MIN LED HOLD. All information generated during this time is in this case linked with logical
OR.
Under address 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD, the setting Target on TRIP allows to reset also the information
about the last fault stored in the LEDs and relays, provided that this fault has not caused a device trip
command.
NOTE
i Setting the address 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD to (Target on TRIP) only makes sense if address 625 T
MIN LED HOLD is set to 0.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
[logik-ruecksetz-gesp-led-081024, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Generation of the Reset Command for Stored LEDs/Relays
Fault Messages
A new pickup of a protection function generally turns off any previously set light displays so that only the
latest fault is displayed at any one time. It can be selected whether the stored LED displays and the sponta-
neous messages on the display appear after the new pickup or only after a new trip signal is issued. In order to
select the desired mode of display, select the Device submenu in the SETTINGS menu. Under address 610
FltDisp.LED/LCD the two options Target on PU and Target on TRIP ("No trip – no flag") can be
selected.
For devices with graphic display, use parameter 611 Spont. FltDisp. to specify whether a spontaneous
fault message should appear automatically on the display (YES) or not (NO). For devices with text display such
indications will appear after a system fault in any case.
Default Display Selection

In devices with 4-line displays and depending on the device version, a number of predefined image pages are
available. The start page of the default display appearing after startup of the device can be selected in the
device data via parameter 640 Start image DD. The available image pages are listed in E Default Settings
and Protocol-dependent Functions.
IEC60870-5-103 Measured Value Telegrams

Via parameter T103 with 16 MV, address 617, the scope of measured values to be transmitted to a master
can be influenced.
Normally (setting = NO) the maximum scope of measured values is transmitted using several measured value
telegrams.
If set to YES, the transmission is restricted to one measured value telegram containing 16 measured values.
This setting (YES) is used to create a status that is compatible with a legacy Siemens LSA.
IEC 61850 GOOSE Function

At address 700 GOOSE-Stop you can set the GOOSE function of the IEC 61850 protocol to active or not. If
GOOSE-Stop is set to YES, you can release the GOOSE function again via a binary input during operation.
2.1.2.3 Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General

610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Target on PU Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD
Target on TRIP
611 Spont. FltDisp. YES NO Spontaneous display of flt.annun-
NO ciations
617A T103 with 16 MV YES NO T103-transfer limeted to 16 meas.
NO values
OFF
625A T MIN LED HOLD 0 .. 60 min; ∞ 0 min Minimum hold time of latched
LEDs
640 Start image DD image 1 image 1 Start image Default Display
image 2
image 3
image 4
image 5
image 6
image 7
image 8
image 9
image 10
700 GOOSE-Stop YES NO GOOSE-Stop
NO
2.1.2.4 Information List
No. Information Type of Comments

Informa-
tion
– >Light on SP >Back Light on
– Reset LED IntSP Reset LED
– DataStop IntSP Stop data transmission
– Test mode IntSP Test mode
– Feeder gnd IntSP Feeder GROUNDED
– Brk OPENED IntSP Breaker OPENED
– HWTestMod IntSP Hardware Test Mode
– SynchClock IntSP_Ev Clock Synchronization
– Error FMS1 OUT Error FMS FO 1
– Error FMS2 OUT Error FMS FO 2
– Distur.CFC OUT Disturbance CFC
1 Not configured SP No Function configured
2 Non Existent SP Function Not Available
3 >Time Synch SP_Ev >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock
5 >Reset LED SP >Reset LED
15 >Test mode SP >Test mode
16 >DataStop SP >Stop data transmission
51 Device OK OUT Device is Operational and Protecting
52 ProtActive IntSP At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active
55 Reset Device OUT Reset Device
56 Initial Start OUT Initial Start of Device
67 Resume OUT Resume

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
68 Clock SyncError OUT Clock Synchronization Error
69 DayLightSavTime OUT Daylight Saving Time
70 Settings Calc. OUT Setting calculation is running
71 Settings Check OUT Settings Check
72 Level-2 change OUT Level-2 change
73 Local change OUT Local setting change
110 Event Lost OUT_Ev Event lost
113 Flag Lost OUT Flag Lost
125 Chatter ON OUT Chatter ON
140 Error Sum Alarm OUT Error with a summary alarm
144 Error 5V OUT Error 5V
145 Error 0V OUT Error 0V
146 Error -5V OUT Error -5V
147 Error PwrSupply OUT Error Power Supply
160 Alarm Sum Event OUT Alarm Summary Event
177 Fail Battery OUT Failure: Battery empty
178 I/O-Board error OUT I/O-Board Error
181 Error A/D-conv. OUT Error: A/D converter
183 Error Board 1 OUT Error Board 1
191 Error Offset OUT Error: Offset
192 Error1A/5Awrong OUT Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting
193 Alarm NO calibr OUT Alarm: NO calibration data available
194 Error neutralCT OUT Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB
220 CT Ph wrong OUT Error: Range CT Ph wrong
301 Pow.Sys.Flt. OUT Power System fault
302 Fault Event OUT Fault Event
303 sens Gnd flt OUT sensitive Ground fault
320 Warn Mem. Data OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Data exceeded
321 Warn Mem. Para. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter exceeded
322 Warn Mem. Oper. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Operation exceeded
323 Warn Mem. New OUT Warn: Limit of Memory New exceeded
335 >GOOSE-Stop SP >GOOSE-Stop
502 Relay Drop Out SP Relay Drop Out
510 Relay CLOSE SP General CLOSE of relay
545 PU Time VI Time from Pickup to drop out
546 TRIP Time VI Time from Pickup to TRIP
17565 >Blk.offset s. SP >Blocking of the offset supervision
17566 Dist.CFC Src VI Disturbance CFC Source
18480 Error +/- 12V OUT Error +/- 12V

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.3 Power System Data 1
2.1.3.1 Functional Description

The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment so that the device can adapt to its
desired application. These may be, for instance, nominal power system and transformer data, measured quan-
tity polarities and their physical connections, breaker properties (where applicable) etc. There are also certain
parameters that are common to all functions, i.e. not associated with a specific protection, control or moni-
toring function. The following section discusses these parameters.
General
The data for parameters 209 PHASE SEQ., 210 TMin TRIP CMD, 211 TMax CLOSE CMD and 212
BkrClosed I MIN can be entered directly at the devicel: Press the MENU key to open the main menu. Apply
the ▼ key to select SETTINGS and then press the ► key to navigate to the SETTINGS display. To enter the
Power System Data, select the P.System Data 1 in the SETTINGS menu.
Double-click Parameters under DIGSI to display the relevant selection. In doing so, a dialog box with tabs will
open under P.System Data 1 where individual parameters can be configured. The following descriptions
are therefore structured according to these tabs.
Rated Frequency (Power System)

The nominal frequency of the system is set under the Address 214 Rated Frequency. The factory pre-
setting in accordance with the model need only be changed if the device will be employed for a purpose other
than that which was planned when ordering.
Phase Rotation (Power System)

Address 209 PHASE SEQ. is used to change the default phase sequence (A B C for clockwise rotation) if
your power system permanently has an anti-clockwise phase sequence (A C B. A temporary reversal of rota-
tion is also possible using binary inputs (see Section 2.24.2 Setting Notes).
Temperature Unit (Power System)

Address 276 TEMP. UNIT allows displaying the temperature values either in degrees Celsius or in degrees
Fahrenheit.
Polarity of Current Transformers (Power System)

At address 201 CT Starpoint, the polarity of the wye-connected current transformers is specified (the
following figure applies accordingly to two current transformers). This setting determines the measuring
direction of the device (forward = line direction). Changing this parameter also results in a polarity reversal of
the ground current inputs ΙN or ΙNS.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
[Polarity of current transformers, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-3 Polarity of Current Transformers
Current Connection Ι4 (Power System)

Here, it is communicated to the device whether the ground current of the current transformer neutral point is
connected to the fourth current input (Ι4). This corresponds to the Holmgreen connection, (see connection
example in C Connection Examples). In this case, parameter 280 Holmgr. for Σi is set to YES. In all other
cases, even if the ground current of the own line is measured via a separate ground current transformer, enter
the setting NO. This setting exclusively affects the function “Current Sum Monitoring” (see Section
2.12.1 Measurement Supervision).
Current Connection (Power System)

Via parameter 251 CT Connect. a special connection of the current transformers can be determined.
The standard connection is A, B, C, (Gnd). It may only be changed if the device is set to measure one or
more ground currents via two current inputs. The standard connection applies to all other cases.
The following diagram illustrates a special connection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
[Measurement of Two Ground Currents, Example, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-4 Measurement of Two Ground Currents, Example
The phase currents ΙA and ΙC must be connected to the first current input (terminals Q1, Q2) and to the third
(terminals Q5, Q6). At the fourth input (terminals Q7, Q8) the ground current ΙN or ΙNS is connected as usual,
in this case the ground current of the line. A second ground current, in this case the transformer neutral point
current, is connected to the second current input ΙN2 (terminals Q3, Q4).
The settings A,G2,C,G; G->B or A,G2,C,G; G2->B must be used here. Both define the connection of a
ground current ΙN2 at the second current input (terminals Q3, Q4). The settings only differ in the calculation of
ΙB. In case of A,G2,C,G; G->B, the phase current ΙB is determined by phase currents ΙA and ΙC as well as the
measured ground current ΙN or ΙNS at the fourth current input. In case of A,G2,C,G; G2->B, the phase
current ΙB is determined by phase currents ΙA and ΙC as well as the measured ground current ΙN2 at the second
current input. The setting must be set according to system requirements.
The assignment of the protection functions to the ground current inputs in special connections is set out in
the following table.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
Current Input Function

ΙN2 Time overcurrent protection ground (Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N,
51N)
Directional time overcurrent protection ground (Section 2.3 Directional Overcurrent
Protection 67, 67N)
Important!
The function “Directional time overcurrent protection ground” may only be operated if
the ground current of the protected line is measured via ΙN2. This is not the case for the
example shown in Figure 2-4. Here, the ground current of the protected line is meas-
ured via ΙN. The function must be deactivated. A connection in which the function can
be enabled is illustrated in C Connection Examples Figure C-5.
ΙN or ΙN sens. Ground fault detection (sensitive / not sensitive) (Section 2.13 Ground Fault Protection
64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s))
Single-phase time overcurrent protection (Section 2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protec-
tion)
Intermittent ground fault protection (Section 2.15 Intermittent Ground Fault Protec-
tion)
The settings for address 251 are only possible with DIGSI under Additional Settings.
NOTE
i The settings under address 251 CT Connect. affect the time overcurrent protection with regard to the
evaluation of phase currents only if address 250 50/51 2-ph prot has been set to OFF.
Voltage Connection (Power System)

Address 213 determines how the voltage transformers are connected.
VT Connect. 3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn means that three phase voltages are wye-connected.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) and
VGnd are connected. The latter setting also has to be selected when only two phase-to-phase voltage trans-
formers are used or when only the displacement voltage (zero sequence voltage) is connected to the device.
Vab, Vbc, Vx if two phase-to-phase voltages (open-delta connection) and any third voltage Vx are
connected. Vx is used exclusively for the flexible protection functions. The transformer nominal voltages for Vx
are set at address 207 and 208.
The device contains 4 voltage measuring inputs which enable further options in addition to the above-
mentioned connection types.
VT Connect. 3ph = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn is selected if the three phase voltages in wye-connection and VN
are connected to the fourth voltage input of the device.
Select VT Connect. 3ph = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy in case the fourth voltage input is used for the synchroniza-
tion function. This is recommended even if two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) are available on
the primary side (because the voltages are connected to the device in such a way that the device measures
phase-ground voltages under symmetrical conditions).
Van,Vbn,Vcn,Vx is selected if in addition to the three phase voltages any fourth voltage Vx is connected. Vx
is used exclusively for the flexible protection functions. The transformer nominal voltages for Vx are set at
address 207 and 208.
Parameter 240 VT Connect. 1ph is set to specify that only one voltage transformer is connected to the
devices. In this case, the setting defines which primary voltage is connected to which analog input. If one of
the available voltages is selected, that is a setting unequal NO, setting of address 213 is not relevant anymore.
Only the setting of parameter 240 is relevant. If on the contrary parameter240 VT Connect. 1ph is set to
NO, parameter 213 applies.
Chapter 2.27 Protection for Single-phase Voltage Transformer Connection describes the effect of the single-
phase voltage transformer connection on the individual protection functions.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
For devices with single-phase voltage transformer connection, the voltage applying at voltage input V4 is
generally interpreted as the voltage to be synchronized.
NOTE
i If the synchronization function is used in a connection of two phase-to-phase voltages in open delta
voltage (see above), the device is unable to determine a zero sequence voltage. The functions “Directional
Time Overcurrent Protection Ground”, “Directional Ground Fault Detection” and “Fuse Failure Monitoring
(FFM)” must be either removed or switched off.
Distance Unit (Power System)

Address 215 Distance Unit allows you to specify the distance unit (km or Miles) for the fault locator. In
the absence of a fault locator or if this function has been removed, this parameter is of no importance.
Changing the distance unit does not imply an automatic conversion of the setting values that are dependent
on the distance unit. These have to be re-entered at the respective addresses.
ATEX100 (Power System)

Parameter 235 ATEX100 enables meeting the requirements for protecting explosion-protected motors for
thermal replicas. Set this parameter to YES to save all thermal replicas of the 7SJ66 device in the event of a
power supply failure. After the supply voltage is restored, the thermal replicas will resume operation using the
stored values. Set the parameter to NO, to reset the calculated overtemperature values of all thermal replicas
to zero if the power supply fails.
Nominal Values of Current Transformers (CTs)

At addresses 204 CT PRIMARY and 205 CT SECONDARY, information is entered regarding the primary and
secondary ampere ratings of the current transformers. It is important to ensure that the rated secondary
current of the current transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will calculate
incorrect primary data. At addresses 217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 218 Ignd-CT SEC, information is entered
regarding the primary and secondary ampere rating of the current transformer. In case of a normal connection
(neutral point current connected to ΙN transformer), 217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 204 CT PRIMARY must be set
to the same value.
If the device features a sensitive ground current input, parameter 218 Ignd-CT SEC is set to 1 A by default.
In this case, the setting cannot be changed.
If address 251 has been set so that ground currents are measured by two inputs (setting options A,G2,C,G;
G->B or A,G2,C,G; G2->B), you have to set the primary rated current of the second ground transformer
connected to ΙN2 at address 238. secondary ampere rating must conform with the phase current transformer.
To calculate the phase current ΙB correctly, the primary rated current of the ground current transformer, which
is used to calculate ΙB (address 217 or address 238), must be smaller than the primary rated current of the
phase current transformer (address 204).
Nominal Values of Voltage Transformers (VTs)

At addresses 202 Vnom PRIMARY and 203 Vnom SECONDARY, information is entered regarding the primary
nominal voltage and secondary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) of the connected voltage transformers.
Transformation Ratio of Voltage Transformers (VTs)

Address 206 Vph / Vdelta informs the device of the adjustment factor between the phase voltage and the
displacement voltage. This information is relevant for the processing of ground faults (in grounded systems
and ungrounded systems), for the operational measured value VN and measured-variable monitoring.
If the voltage transformer set provides open delta windings and if these windings are connected to the device,
this must be specified accordingly in address 213 (see above margin heading “Voltage Connection”). Since the
voltage transformer ratio is normally as follows:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
[fo_uebersetzung-spannungswandler, 1, en_US]
the factor Vph/VN (secondary voltage, address 206 Vph / Vdelta) must be set to 3/ √3 = √3 = 1.73 which
must be used if the VN voltage is connected. For other transformation ratios, i.e. the formation of the
displacement voltage via an interconnected transformer set, the factor must be corrected accordingly.
Please take into consideration that also the calculated secondary V0-voltage is divided by the value set in
address 206. Thus, even if the V0-voltage is not connected, address 206 has an impact on the secondary
operational measured value VN.
Trip and Close Command Duration (Breaker)

In address 210 the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is set. This setting applies to all protec-
tion functions that can initiate tripping.
In address 211 the maximum close command duration TMax CLOSE CMD is set. It applies to the integrated
reclosing function. It must be set long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has securely closed. An exces-
sive duration causes no problem since the closing command is interrupted in the event another trip is initiated
by a protection function.
Current Flow Monitoring (Breaker)

In address 212 BkrClosed I MIN the pickup threshold of the integrated current flow monitoring function
can be set. This parameter is used by several protection functions (e.g. voltage protection with current crite-
rion, overload protection, load jam protection, restart inhibit for motors and circuit breaker maintenance). If
the set current value is exceeded, the circuit breaker is considered closed.
The threshold value setting applies to all three phases, and must take into consideration all used protection
functions.
The pickup threshold for the breaker failure protection is set separately (see 2.19.2 Setting Notes).
When using the device as motor protection and using the overload protection, load jam protection and restart
inhibit, the protective relay can distinguish between a running motor and a stopped motor, as well as take into
account the different motor cooldown behavior. For this application, the set value must be lower than the
minimum no-load current of the motor.
Circuit-breaker Maintenance (Breaker)

Parameters 260 to 267 are assigned to CB maintenance. The parameters and the different procedures are
explained in the setting notes of this function (see Section 2.26.2 Statistics).
Two-phase Time Overcurrent Protection (Protection Operating Quantities)

The two-phase overcurrent protection functionality is used in grounded or compensated systems where inter-
action of three-phase devices with existing two-phase protection equipment is required. Via parameter 250
50/51 2-ph prot the time overcurrent protection can be configured to two or three-phase operation. If the
parameter is set to ON, the value 0 A instead of the measured value for ΙB is used permanently for the
threshold comparison so that no pickup is possible in phase B. All other functions, however, operate in three
phases.
Ground Fault Protection (Protection Operating Quantities)

Parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w. defines whether ground fault protection, breaker failure protection or Fuse
Failure Monitor is either to operate using measured values (Ignd (measured)) or the quantities calculated
from the three phase currents (3I0 (calcul.)). In the first case, the measured quantity at the fourth
current input is evaluated. In the latter case, the summation current is calculated from the three phase current
inputs. If the device features a sensitive ground current input (measuring range starts at 1 mA), the ground
fault protection always uses the calculated variable 3I0. In this case, parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w. is not
available.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
Voltage Protection (Protection Operating Quantities)

In a three-phase connection, the fundamental harmonic of the largest of the three phase-to-phase voltages
(Vphph) or phase-to-ground voltages (Vph-n) or the positive sequence voltage (V1) or the negative sequence
voltage (V2) is supplied to the overvoltage protection elements. In three-phase connection, undervoltage
protection relies either on the positive sequence voltage (V1) or the smallest of the phase-to-phase voltages
(Vphph) or the phase-to-ground voltages (Vph-n). This is configured by setting the parameter value in
address 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 and 615 OP. QUANTITY 27. With single-phase voltage transformer
connection, a direct comparison of the measured quantities with the threshold values is carried out and the
parameterization of the characteristic quantity switchover is ignored.
2.1.3.3 Settings
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
201 CT Starpoint towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
towards Busbar
202 Vnom PRIMARY 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECONDARY 100 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
(L-L)
204 CT PRIMARY 10 .. 50000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary
5A Current
206A Vph / Vdelta 0.10 .. 3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To
Open-Delta-VT
207 Vnom-PRI VT V4 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV VT Rated Primary Voltage
V4
208 Vnom-SEC VT V4 100 .. 225 V 100 V VT Rated Secondary
Voltage V4
209 PHASE SEQ. ABC ABC Phase Sequence
ACB
210A TMin TRIP CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Duration
211A TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN 1A 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min.
5A 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A Current Threshold
213 VT Connect. 3ph Van, Vbn, Vcn Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection, three-
Vab, Vbc, VGnd phase
Vab, Vbc, Vx
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy
Van,Vbn,Vcn,Vx
214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz
215 Distance Unit km km Distance measurement
Miles unit
217 Ignd-CT PRIM 1 .. 50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary
current

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General

218 Ignd-CT SEC 1A 1A Ignd-CT rated secondary
5A current
235A ATEX100 NO NO Storage of th. Replicas w/o
YES Power Supply
238 Ignd2-CT PRIM 1 .. 50000 A 60 A Ignd2-CT rated primary c.
(conn. to I2)
240 VT Connect. 1ph NO NO VT Connection, single-
Van phase
Vbn
Vcn
Vab
Vbc
Vca
250A 50/51 2-ph prot ON OFF 50, 51 Time Overcurrent
OFF with 2ph. prot.
251A CT Connect. A, B, C, (Gnd) A, B, C, (Gnd) CT Connection
A,G2,C,G; G->B
A,G2,C,G; G2->B
260 Ir-52 10 .. 50000 A 125 A Rated Normal Current (52
Breaker)
261 OP.CYCLES AT Ir 100 .. 1000000 10000 Switching Cycles at Rated
Normal Current
262 Isc-52 10 .. 100000 A 25000 A Rated Short-Circuit
Breaking Current
263 OP.CYCLES Isc 1 .. 1000 50 Switch. Cycles at Rated
Short-Cir. Curr.
264 Ix EXPONENT 1.0 .. 3.0 2.0 Exponent for the Ix-
Method
265 Cmd.via control (Setting options depend on none 52 B.Wear: Open Cmd. via
configuration) Control Device
266 T 52 BREAKTIME 1 .. 600 ms 80 ms Breaktime (52 Breaker)
267 T 52 OPENING 1 .. 500 ms 65 ms Opening Time (52 Breaker)
276 TEMP. UNIT Celsius Celsius Unit of temperature meas-
Fahrenheit urement
280 Holmgr. for Σi NO NO Holmgreen-conn. (for fast
YES sum-i-monit.)
613A 50N/51N/67N w. Ignd (measured) Ignd (measured) 50N/51N/67N Ground
3I0 (calcul.) Overcurrent with
614A OP. QUANTITY 59 Vphph Vphph Opera. Quantity for 59
Vph-n Overvolt. Prot.
V1
V2
615A OP. QUANTITY 27 V1 V1 Opera. Quantity for 27
Vphph Undervolt. Prot.
Vph-n

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
5145 >Reverse Rot. SP >Reverse Phase Rotation
5147 Rotation ABC OUT Phase rotation ABC
5148 Rotation ACB OUT Phase rotation ACB
2.1.4 Oscillographic Fault Records
The Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control 7SJ66 is equipped with a fault record memory. The
instantaneous values of the measured quantities
iA, iB, iC, iN or iNS and vA, vB, vC, vN or 3 · v0 and vSYN
(voltages depending on connection) are sampled in a 1.25 ms grid (for 50 Hz) and stored in a ring buffer (16
sampled values per period). In the event of a fault, the data are recorded for a set period of time, but not
longer than 5 seconds. The total duration of recording amounts to up to 20 seconds. A minimum of 8 faults
can be recorded in this buffer. The fault record memory is automatically updated with every new fault, so no
acknowledgment for previously recorded faults is required. In addition to protection pickup, the fault record
buffer can also be started via a binary input or the serial interface.
The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer and evaluated with the
protection data processing program DIGSI and the graphic analysis software SIGRA 4. The latter graphically
represents the data recorded during the system fault and also calculates additional information from the
measured values. Currents and voltages can be presented as desired as primary or secondary values. Signals
are additionally recorded as binary tracks (marks), e.g. "pickup", "trip".
If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on to a central device via this
interface. The evaluation of data is done by appropriate programs in the central device. Currents and voltages
are referred to their maximum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic representation.
Signals are additionally recorded as binary tracks (marks), e.g. "pickup", "trip".
Transfer to a central device can be polled automatically, either after each fault detection by the protection, or
only after a trip.
NOTE
i The signals used for binary tracks can be configured in DIGSI.
NOTE
i If via parameter 251 CT Connect. one of the current transformer connection types A,G2,C,G; G->B or
A,G2,C,G; G2->B has been selected, the measured ground current ΙN2 measured by the second current
transformer is indicated under track “iN”. The ground current detected by the fourth current transformer is
indicated under track “iNs”.
Configuration
Fault recording (waveform capture) will only take place if address 104 OSC. FAULT REC. is set to Enabled.
Other settings pertaining to fault recording (waveform capture) are found in the Osc. Fault Rec.
submenu of the SETTINGS menu. Waveform capture makes a distinction between the trigger instant for an
oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record (address 401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER). Normally, the

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
trigger is the pickup of a protection element, i.e. the time 0 is defined as the instant the first protection func-
tion picks up. The criterion for saving may be both the device pickup (Save w. Pickup) or the device trip
(Save w. TRIP). A trip command issued by the device can also be used as trigger instant (Start w.
TRIP), in this case it is also the saving criterion.
A fault event starts with the pickup by any protection function and ends when the last pickup of a protection
function has dropped out. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (address 402 WAVEFORM DATA =
Fault event). If automatic reclosing is performed, the entire system fault — with several reclosing attempts
if necessary — can be recorded until the fault has been cleared for good (address 402 WAVEFORM DATA =
Pow.Sys.Flt.). This facilitates the representation of the entire system fault history, but also consumes
storage capacity during the automatic reclosing dead time(s).
The actual storage time begins at the pre-fault time PRE. TRIG. TIME (address 404) ahead of the reference
instant, and ends at the post-fault time POST REC. TIME (address 405) after the storage criterion has reset.
The maximum storage duration of each fault record (MAX. LENGTH) is entered at address 403. Recording per
fault must not exceed 5 seconds. At least 8 records can be saved altogether with a maximum total time of
20 s.
An oscillographic record can be triggered by a status change of a binary input, or from a PC via the operator
interface. Storage is then triggered dynamically. The length of the fault recording is set in address 406 BinIn
CAPT.TIME (but not longer than MAX. LENGTH, address 403). Pre-fault and post-fault times will add to this.
If the binary input time is set to ∞, the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated
(static), but not longer than the MAX. LENGTH (address 403).
2.1.4.3 Settings

401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER Save w. Pickup Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture
Save w. TRIP
Start w. TRIP
402 WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Pow.Sys.Flt.
403 MAX. LENGTH 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Capture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
407 Flt.Rec.Points 16 16 Fault Record Points Per Cycle
32

Informa-
tion
– FltRecSta IntSP Fault Recording Start
4 >Trig.Wave.Cap. SP >Trigger Waveform Capture
203 Wave. deleted OUT_Ev Waveform data deleted
30053 Fault rec. run. OUT Fault recording is running
2.1.5 Settings Groups
Up to four different setting groups can be created for establishing the device's function settings.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
Applications
• Setting groups enable the user to save the corresponding settings for each application so that they can
be quickly called up when required. All setting groups are stored in the device. Only one setting group
may be active at a time.
Changing Setting Groups

During operation the user can switch back and forth setting groups locally, via the operator panel, binary
inputs (if so configured), the service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. For
reasons of safety it is not possible to change between setting groups during a power system fault.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as Enabled during
configuration (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes). In 7SJ66 relays, four independent setting groups (A to D)
are available. While setting values may vary, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same.
General
If setting group change option is not required, Group A is the default selection. Then, the rest of this section is
not applicable.
If the changeover option is desired, group changeover must be set to Grp Chge OPTION = Enabled
(address 103) when the function extent is configured. For the setting of the function parameters, each of the
required setting groups A to D (a maximum of 4) must be configured in sequence. The SIPROTEC 4 System
Description gives further information on how to copy setting groups or reset them to their status at delivery
and also how to change from one setting group to another.
Section 3.1 Mounting and Connections of this manual tells you how to change between several setting groups
externally via binary inputs.
2.1.5.3 Settings

302 CHANGE Group A Group A Change to Another Setting Group
Group B
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol

Informa-
tion
– P-GrpA act IntSP Setting Group A is active
– P-GrpB act IntSP Setting Group B is active
– P-GrpC act IntSP Setting Group C is active
– P-GrpD act IntSP Setting Group D is active
7 >Set Group Bit0 SP >Setting Group Select Bit 0
8 >Set Group Bit1 SP >Setting Group Select Bit 1

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.6 Power System Data 2

The general protection data (P.System Data 2) include settings associated with all functions rather than a
specific protection or monitoring function. In contrast to the P.System Data 1 as discussed before, they
can be changed with the setting group.
Applications
When the primary reference voltage and the primary reference current of the protected object are set, the
device is able to calculate and output the operational measured value percentage.
For purposes of fault location, a maximum of three different line sections can be considered.
For utilization in motors, detection of the motor start represents an important feature. Exceeding a configured
current value serves as a criterion.
Definition of Nominal Rated Values

At addresses 1101 FullScaleVolt. and 1102 FullScaleCurr., the primary reference voltage (phase-to-
phase) and reference current (phase) of the protected equipment is entered (e.g. motors). If these reference
sizes match the primary nominal values of the VTs and CTs, they correspond to the settings in address 202 and
204 (Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes). They are generally used to show values referenced to full scale.
Ground Impedance Ratios (only for Fault Location)

The adjustment of the ground impedance ratio is only important for the utilization of the line fault location
function. This is done by entering the resistance ratio RE/RL and the reactance ratio XE/XL.
The values under addresses 1103 and 1104 apply if only one line section is available and to all faults that
occur outside the defined line sections.
If several line sections are set, the following shall apply:
• for line section 1, addresses 6001 and 6002

Resistance ratio RE/RL and reactance ratio XE/XL are calculated formally and do not correspond to the real
and imaginary components of ZE/ZL. No complex calculation is required! The ratios can be obtained from the
line data using the following formulas:
[fo_fehlerorter, 1, en_US]
Where
R0 – Zero sequence resistance of the line
X0 – Zero sequence reactance of the line
R1 – Positive sequence resistance of the line
X1 – Positive sequence reactance of the line
This data can be used for the entire line or line section, or as distance-related values, since the quotients are
independent of the distance.
Calculation example:
20 kV free line 120 mm2 with the following data:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
R0/s = 0.88 Ω/km (1.42 Ω/mile) Zero sequence resistance

X0/s = 1.26 Ω/km (2.03 Ω/mile) Zero sequence reactance
R1/s = 0.24 Ω/km (0.39 Ω/mile) Positive sequence resistance
X1/s = 0.34 Ω/km (0.55 Ω/mile) Positive sequence reactance
For ground impedance ratios, the following results:
[fo_formfehl, 1, en_US]
Reactance per Unit Length (only for Fault Location)

The setting of the reactance per unit length is only important for the utilization of the line fault location func-
tion. The reactance setting enables the protective relay to indicate the fault location in terms of distance.
The reactance value X' is entered as a reference value x', i.e. in Ω/mile if set to distance unit Miles (address
215, see Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes under "Distance Unit") or in Ω/km if set to distance unit km. If, after
having entered the reactance per unit length, the distance unit is changed under address 215, the reactance
per unit length must be reconfigured in accordance with the new distance unit.
The values under address 1106 (km) or 1105 (Miles) apply if only one line section is available and to all faults
that occur outside the defined line sections.
• for line section 1, addresses 6004(km) or 6003 (Miles)
• for line section 2, addresses 6014 (km) or 6013 (Miles),
• for line section 3, addresses 6024 (km) or 6023 (Miles).

When setting the parameters in DIGSI, the values can also be entered as primary values. In that case the
following conversion to secondary values is not required.
For the conversion of primary values to secondary values the following applies in general:
[fo_zsekundaer, 1, en_US]
Likewise, the following applies to the reactance per unit length of a line:
[fo_xsekundaer, 1, en_US]
with
NCTR — Transformation ratio of the current transformer
NVTR — Transformation ratio of the voltage transformer
Calculation example:
In the following, the same line as illustrated in the example for ground impedance ratios (above) and addi-
tional data on the voltage transformers will be used:
Current Transformers 500 A/5 A
Voltage Transformers 20 kV/0.1 kV
The secondary reactance per unit length is calculated as follows:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
[fo_secondary_reactance_per_unit_length, 1, en_US]
Line Angle (only for Fault Location)

The setting of the line angle is only important for the utilization of the line fault location function. The line
angle can be derived from the line constants. The following applies:
[fo_allg-ltgdaten-1-oz, 1, en_US]
with RL being the ohmic resistance and XL being the reactance of the line.
The value under address 1109 applies if only one line section is available and to all faults that occur outside
the defined line sections.
• for line section 1, address 6005

This data can be used for the entire line or line section, or as distance-related values, since the quotients are
independent of the distance. It is also irrelevant whether the quotients were derived from primary or secon-
dary values.
Calculation Example::
110 kV free line 150 mm2 with the following data:
R'1 = 0.31 Ω/mile
X'1 = 0.69 Ω/mile
The line angle is calculated as follows:
[fo_line_angle, 1, en_US]
The respective address must be set to Line angle = 66°.
Line Length (only for Fault Location)

The setting of the line length is only important for the utilization of the line fault location function. The line
length is required so that the fault location can be given as a reference value (in %). Furthermore, when using
several line sections, the respective length of the individual sections is defined.
The values under address 1110 (km) or 1111 (Miles) apply if only one line section is available and to all faults
that occur outside the defined line sections.
• for line section 1, addresses 6007 (km) or 6006 (Miles)

The length set for the entire line must correspond to the sum of lengths configured for the line sections. A
deviation of 10% max. is admissible.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General
Recognition of Running Condition (only for Motors)

When the configured current value at Address 1107 I MOTOR START is exceeded, this will be interpreted as
motor starting. This parameter is used by the start-up time monitoring and overload protection functions.
For this setting the following should be considered:
• A setting must be selected that is lower than the actual motor start-up current under all load and voltage
conditions.
• During motor start-up the thermal replica of the overload protection is "frozen", i.e. kept at a constant
level. This threshold should not be set unnecessarily low since it limits the operating range of the over-
load protection for high currents during operation.
Inverting Power Measured Values/Metered Values

The directional values (power, power factor, work and related min., max., mean and setpoint values), calcu-
lated in the operational measured values, are usually defined a positive in the direction of the protected
object. This requires that the connection polarity for the entire device was configured accordingly in the
P.System Data 1 (compare also "Polarity of the Current Transformers", address 201). But it is also possible
to make different settings for the "forward" direction" for the protection functions and the positive direction
for the power etc., e.g. to have the active power supply (from the line to the busbar) displayed positively. To
do so, set address 1108 P,Q sign to reversed. If the setting is not reversed (default), the positive
direction for the power etc. corresponds to the "forward" direction for the protection functions. Section
4 Technical Data provides a detailed list of the values in question.
2.1.6.3 Settings
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secon-
dary nominal current of the current transformer.
1101 FullScaleVolt. 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV Measurem:FullScale-
Voltage(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. 10 .. 50000 A 100 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-
rent(Equipm.rating)
1103 RE/RL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. compensating
factor RE/RL
1104 XE/XL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. compensating
factor XE/XL
1105 x' 1A 0.0050 .. 15.0000 Ω/mi 0.2420 Ω/mi feeder reactance per mile:
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 Ω/mi 0.0484 Ω/mi x'
1106 x' 1A 0.0050 .. 9.5000 Ω/km 0.1500 Ω/km feeder reactance per km: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0300 Ω/km
1107 I MOTOR START 1A 0.40 .. 10.00 A 2.50 A Motor Start Current (Block
5A 2.00 .. 50.00 A 12.50 A 49, Start 48)
1108 P,Q sign not reversed not reversed P,Q operational measured
reversed values sign
1109 Line angle 10 .. 89 ° 85 ° Line angle
1110 Line length 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km Line length in kilometer
1111 Line length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles Line length in miles
6001 S1: RE/RL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S1: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor RE/RL
6002 S1: XE/XL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S1: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor XE/XL
6003 S1: x' 1A 0.0050 .. 15.0000 Ω/mi 0.2420 Ω/mi S1: feeder reactance per
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 Ω/mi 0.0484 Ω/mi mile: x'

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.1 General

6004 S1: x' 1A 0.0050 .. 9.5000 Ω/km 0.1500 Ω/km S1: feeder reactance per
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0300 Ω/km km: x'
6005 S1: Line angle 10 .. 89 ° 85 ° S1: Line angle
6006 S1: line length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S1: Line length in miles
6007 S1: Line length 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km S1: Line length in kilometer
sating factor RE/RL
sating factor XE/XL
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 Ω/mi 0.0484 Ω/mi mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0300 Ω/km km: x'
6016 S2: line length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S2: line length in miles
sating factor RE/RL
sating factor XE/XL
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 Ω/mi 0.0484 Ω/mi mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0300 Ω/km km: x'
6026 S3: line length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S3: line length in miles

Informa-
tion
126 ProtON/OFF IntSP Protection ON/OFF (via system port)
356 >Manual Close SP >Manual close signal
501 Relay PICKUP OUT Relay PICKUP
511 Relay TRIP OUT Relay GENERAL TRIP command
533 Ia = VI Primary fault current Ia
534 Ib = VI Primary fault current Ib
535 Ic = VI Primary fault current Ic
561 Man.Clos.Detect OUT Manual close signal detected
2720 >Enable ANSI#-2 SP >Enable 50/67-(N)-2 (override 79 blk)
4601 >52-a SP >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open)
4602 >52-b SP >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed)
16019 >52 Wear start SP >52 Breaker Wear Start Criteria
16020 52 WearSet.fail OUT 52 Wear blocked by Time Setting Failure
16027 52WL.blk I PErr OUT 52 Breaker Wear Logic blk Ir-CB>=Isc-CB
16028 52WL.blk n PErr OUT 52 Breaker W.Log.blk SwCyc.Isc>=SwCyc.Ir

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N

Overcurrent protection is the main protection function of the 7SJ66 relay. Each phase current and the ground
current is provided with four elements. All elements are independent from each other and can be combined as
desired.
If it is desired in grounded or compensated systems that three-phase devices should work together with
twophase protection equipment, the overcurrent protection can be configured in such a way that it allows
twophase operation besides three-phase mode (see 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes).
The high-set elements 50-3 and 50-2 as well as the overcurrent element 50-1 always operate with definite
tripping time, the fourth element 51 always with inverse tripping time.
Applications
• The non-directional overcurrent protection is suited for radial systems with single-side infeed or open
ring systems, for backup protection of all kinds of comparison protection equipment for lines, trans-
formers, generators, motors, and busbars.
2.2.1 General
Depending on parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w. the overcurrent protection for the ground current can either
operate with measured values ΙN or with the quantities 3Ι0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices
featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, generally use the calculated quantity 3Ι0.
All overcurrent elements enabled in the device may be blocked via the automatic reclosing function
(depending on the cycle) or via an external signal to the binary inputs of the device. Removal of blocking
during pickup will restart time delays. The Manual Close signal is an exception in this case. If a circuit breaker
is manually closed onto a fault, it can be re-opened immediately. For overcurrent elements or high-set
elements the delay may be bypassed via a Manual Close pulse, thus resulting in high speed tripping. This pulse
is extended up to at least 300 ms.
The automatic reclosure function 79 may also initiate immediate tripping for the overcurrent and high-set
elements depending on the cycle.
Pickup of the definite-time elements can be stabilized by setting the dropout times. This protection is used in
systems where intermittent faults occur. Combined with electromechanical relays, it allows different dropout
responses to be adjusted and a time grading of digital and electromechanical relays to be implemented.
Pickup and delay settings may be quickly adapted to system requirements via dynamic setting changeover
(see Section 2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup).
Tripping by the 50-1 and 51 elements (in phases), 50N-1 and 51N elements (in ground path) may be blocked
for inrush conditions by utilizing the inrush restraint feature.
The following table gives an overview of the interconnections to other functions of the devices 7SJ66.
Table 2-1 Interconnection to other functions
Overcurrent Connection to Manual Dynamic Cold Load Inrush Restraint

Protection Automatic CLOSE Pickup
Elements Reclosing
50-1 • • • •
50-2 • • •
50-3 • • •
51 • • • •
50N-1 • • • •
50N-2 • • •
50N-3 • • •
51N • • • •

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.2.2 Definite Time, High-set Elements 50-3, 50-2, 50N-3, 50N-2
For each element, an individual pickup value 50-3 PICKUP, 50-2 PICKUP or 50N-3 PICKUP, 50N-2
PICKUP is set. For 50-3 PICKUP and 50N-3 PICKUP, it is possible to measure the Instantaneous in
addition to Fundamental and True RMS. If set to Instantaneous, the element picks up at 2 · √2 · setting
value (rms). Each phase and ground current is compared separately per element with the common pickup
values 50-3 PICKUP, 50-2 PICKUP or 50N-3 PICKUP, 50N-2 PICKUP. If the respective pickup value is
exceeded, this is signaled. After the user-defined time delays 50-3 DELAY, 50-2 DELAY or 50N-3 DELAY,
50N-2 DELAY have elapsed, trip commands are issued which are available for each element. The dropout
value is roughly equal to 95% of the pickup value for currents > 0.3 ΙNom. If the measurement of the instanta-
neous values has been parameterized for the 50-3 or 50N-3 element, the dropout ratio is set to 90 %.
Pickup can be stabilized by setting dropout times 1215 50 T DROP-OUT or 1315 50N T DROP-OUT. This
time is started and maintains the pickup condition if the current falls below the threshold. Therefore, the func-
tion does not drop out at high speed. The trip delay time 50-3 DELAY, 50-2 DELAY or 50N-3 DELAY,
50N-2 DELAY continues running in the meantime. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is
reported OFF and the trip delay time is reset unless the threshold 50-3 PICKUP, 50-2 PICKUP or 50N-3
PICKUP, 50N-2 PICKUP has been exceeded again. If the threshold is exceeded again during the dropout
delay time, the time is canceled. The trip delay time 50-3 DELAY, 50-2 DELAY or 50N-3 DELAY, 50N-2
DELAY continues running in the meantime. If the threshold value is exceeded after this time has elapsed, the
trip command is issued immediately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at this time, there is no reaction. If
the threshold value is exceeded again after expiry of the trip command delay time while the dropout delay
time is still running, tripping is initiated immediately.
These elements can be blocked by the automatic reclosing function (79 AR).
The following figures give an example of logic diagrams for the high-set elements 50-2 PICKUP or 50N-2
PICKUP. They also apply analogously to the high-set elements 50-3 PICKUP and 50N-3 PICKUP.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x-hochstromst-i-fuer-ph-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Logic diagram for 50-2 high-set element for phases
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50-2 instant. or 50-3 instant. and manual close detection is
used, a pickup causes instantaneous tripping, even if the element is blocked via binary input. The same applies
to 79 AR 50-2 inst.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x-hochstromst-ie-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-6 Logic diagram for 50N-2 high-set element
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50N-2 instant. or 50N-3 instant. and manual close detection is
used, a pickup causes instantaneous tripping, even if the element is blocked via binary input. The same applies
to AR 50N-2 inst.
2.2.3 Definite Time Overcurrent Elements 50-1, 50N-1
For each element an individual pickup value 50-1 PICKUP or 50N-1 PICKUP is set. Apart from Funda-
mental, the True RMS can also be measured. Each phase and ground current is compared separately with
the setting value 50-1 or 50N-1 for each element. If the respective value is exceeded, this is signaled. If the
inrush restraint feature (see below) is applied, either the normal pickup signals or the corresponding inrush
signals are output as long as inrush current is detected. After user-configured time delays 50-1 DELAY or
50N-1 DELAY have elapsed, a trip signal is issued if no inrush current is detected or inrush restraint is disa-
bled. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled and an inrush condition exists, no tripping takes place but a
message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcurrent element time delay elapses. Trip signals
and signals on the expiration of time delay are available separately for each element. The dropout value is
approximately 95% of the pickup value for currents > 0.3 INom.
Pickup can be stabilized by setting dropout times 1215 50 T DROP-OUT or1315 50N T DROP-OUT. This
tion does not drop out at high speed. The trip-command delay time 50-1 DELAY or 50N-1 DELAY continues
running in the meantime. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is reported OFF and the trip
delay time is reset unless the threshold 50-1 or 50N-1 has been exceeded again. If the threshold is exceeded
again during the dropout delay time, the time is canceled. However, the trip-command delay time 50-1
DELAY or 50N-1 DELAY continues running. If the threshold value is exceeded after its expiry, the trip

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
command is issued immediately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at this time, there is no reaction. If the
threshold value is exceeded again after expiry of the trip-command delay time, while the dropout delay time is
still running, tripping occurs immediately.
Pickup stabilization of the overcurrent elements 50-1 or 50N-1 by means of settable dropout time is deacti-
vated if an inrush pickup is present since an inrush does not represent an intermittent fault.
The following figures show the logic diagrams for the current elements 50-1 and 50N-1.
[7sj6x-ueberstromst-i-fuer-ph-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Logic diagram for the 50-1 overcurrent element for phases
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50 -1 instant. and manual close detection is used, a pickup causes
instantaneous tripping, even if blocking of the element via binary input is present.
The same applies to 79 AR 50-1 inst.
The dropout delay only operates if no inrush was detected. An incoming inrush will reset a running dropout
delay time.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_rueckfallverzoegerung_i_gr_ph_260803_he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-8 Logic diagram of the dropout delay for 50-1
[7sj6x-ueberstromst-ie-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Logic diagram for the 50N-1 overcurrent current element
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50N-1 instant. and manual close detection applies, the trip is initi-
ated as soon as the pickup conditions arrive, even if the element is blocked via a binary input.
The same applies to 79 AR 50N-1 inst.
The pickup values of each 50-1, 50-2 element for the phase currents and 50N-1, 50N-2 element for the
ground current and the valid delay times for each element can be set individually.
The dropout delay only functions if no inrush was detected. An incoming inrush will reset a running dropout
time delay.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_rueckfallverzoegerung_i_gr_erde_260803_he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-10 Logic of the dropout delay for 50N-1
2.2.4 Inverse Time Overcurrent Elements 51, 51N
The inverse-time elements depend on the ordered variant. They operate with an inverse-time characteristic
either in accordance with the IEC or the ANSI standard or with a user-defined characteristic. The characteristics
and the equations they are based on are given in the Technical Data.
When configuring one of the inverse-time characteristics, the definite-time elements 50-3, 50-2,and 50-1 are
also active (see Section "Definite-time High-set Current Elements 50-3, 50-2, 50N-3, 50N-2 " and "Definite-
time Overcurrent Elements 50-1, 50N-1 ").
A voltage restraint can optionally be set (see Section “Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection (Voltage-
controlled / Voltage-restraint”).
Pickup Behavior
For each element, an individual pickup value 51 PICKUP or 51N PICKUP is set. Apart from Fundamental,
the True RMS can also be measured. Each phase and ground current is separately compared with the setting
value 51 or 51N per element. If a current exceeds 1.1 times the setting value, the corresponding element picks
up and is signaled individually. If the inrush restraint function is used, either the normal pickup signals or the
corresponding inrush signals are issued as long as inrush current is detected. If the 51 element picks up, the
tripping time is calculated from the actual fault current flowing, using an integrating method of measurement.
The calculated tripping time depends on the selected tripping curve. Once this time has elapsed, a trip signal is
issued provided that no inrush current is detected or inrush restraint is disabled. If the inrush restraint function
is enabled and an inrush condition exists, no tripping takes place but a message is issued indicating when the
overcurrent element time delay elapses.
These elements can be blocked by the automatic reclosing feature (79 AR).
For ground current element 51N, the characteristic may be selected independently of the characteristic used
for phase currents.
Pickup values of elements 51 (phase currents) and 51N (ground current) and the relevant time multiplicators
may be set individually.
The following two figures show the logic diagrams for the inverse time overcurrent protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x-abhueberstromzeit-phase-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-11 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection Element for Phases
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 51 instant. and manual close detection applies, the trip is initiated
as soon as the pickup conditions arrive, even if the element is blocked via a binary input. The same applies to
79 AR 51N inst.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x-abhueberstromzeit-erde-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-12 Logic diagram of the inverse-time overcurrent protection element for ground
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 51N instant. and manual close detection applies, the trip is initiated
as soon as the pickup conditions arrive, even if the element is blocked via binary input. The same applies to 79
AR 51N inst.
Dropout Behavior
For the ANSI or IEC characteristics, you can select whether an element drops out instantaneously after a
threshold has been undershot or whether dropout is performed by means of disk emulation. "Instantaneous"
means that the picked-up element drops out when 95 % of the pickup value is undershot. For a new pickup,
the time delay starts at zero.
The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (timer counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energiza-
tion. This process corresponds to the reset of a Ferraris disk (explaining its denomination "disk emulation"). In
case several faults occur in succession, the "history" is taken into consideration due to the inertia of the
Ferraris disk and the time response is adapted. Reset begins as soon as 90 % of the setting value is undershot,
in accordance to the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. In the range between the dropout value (95
% of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and the decrementing processes are in
idle state.
Disk emulation offers advantages when the overcurrent relay elements must be coordinated with conven-
tional electromechanical overcurrent relays located towards the source.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
User-defined Characteristics
When user-defined characteristic are used, the tripping curve may be defined point by point. Up to 20 value
pairs (current, time) may be entered. The device then approximates the characteristic, using linear interpola-
tion.
The dropout curve may be user-defined as well. See dropout behavior for ANSI and IEC curves in the function
description. If no user-defined dropout curve is required, the element drops out as soon as the respective
current falls below approx. 95% of the set pickup value. When a new pickup is evoked, the timer starts at zero
again.
2.2.5 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection 51V (Voltage-controlled / Voltage-

restraint)
Undervoltage Consideration
The inverse time overcurrent protection is provided with an undervoltage detection that can be disabled
(address 1223 VOLT. INFLUENCE). This function can influence overcurrent detection by means of two
different methods:
• Voltage-controlled: If a set voltage threshold is undershot, the overcurrent element is released.
• Voltage-restraint: The pickup threshold of the overcurrent element depends on the voltage magnitude.
A lower voltage decreases the current pickup value (see Figure 2-13). In the range between V/VNom = 1.00
to 0.25 a linear, directly proportional dependence is realized, and therefore the following applies:
[Voltage influence of the pickup value, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-13 Voltage Influence of the Pickup Value
The 51 PICKUP value is decreased proportional to the voltage decrease. Consequently, for constant current Ι
the Ι/ 51 PICKUP ratio is increased and the tripping time is reduced. Compared with the standard curves repre-
sented in Section “Technical Data” the tripping curve shifts to the left side as the voltage decreases.
Switching to the lower pickup value or decreasing the pickup threshold is carried out phase-selectively. The
assignment of voltages to current-carrying phases is shown in the following table.
Table 2-2 Controlling voltages in relation to the fault currents
Current Voltage
ΙA VA – VB
ΙB VB – VC
ΙC VC – VA

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
In order to avoid an unwanted operation in case of a voltage transformer fault, a function blocking is imple-
mented via a binary input controlled by the voltage transformer protection breaker as well as via the device-
internal measuring voltage failure detection ("Fuse Failure Monitor").
The following two figures show the logic diagrams for the inverse time overcurrent protection with under-
voltage consideration.
[7sjx_logic_51-phase-schleife-aktiv, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-14 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-controlled Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sjx_logic_51-phase, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-15 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-restraint Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
2.2.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function
It may be necessary to dynamically increase the pickup thresholds of the overcurrent protection if certain
system components exhibit an increased power consumption when they are switched on after a long period
of zero voltage (e.g. air-conditioning systems, heating installations, motors). Thus, a general increase of
pickup thresholds can be avoided taking into consideration such starting conditions.
This dynamic pickup value changeover fuction is common to all overcurrent elements and is described in
Section 2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup. The alternative pickup values can be set individually for each element
of the time overcurrent protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.2.7 Inrush Restraint
When the multi-functional protective relay with local control 7SJ66 is installed, for instance, to protect a
power transformer, large magnetizing inrush currents will flow when the transformer is energized. These
inrush currents may be several times the nominal transformer current, and, depending on the transformer size
and design, may last from several tens of milliseconds to several seconds.
Although pickup of the relay elements is based only on the fundamental harmonic component of the meas-
ured currents, false device pickup due to inrush is still a potential problem since, depending on the trans-
former size and design, the inrush current also comprises a large component of the fundamental.
The 7SJ66 features an integrated inrush restraint function. It prevents the “normal” pickup of 50-1 or 51 relay
elements (not 50-2 and 50-3) in the phases and the ground path of all directional and non-directional overcur-
rent relay elements. The same is true for the alternative pickup thresholds of the dynamic cold load pickup
function. After detection of inrush currents above a pickup value, special inrush signals are generated. These
signals also initiate fault annunciations and start the associated trip delay time. If inrush conditions are still
present after the tripping time delay has elapsed, a corresponding message („....Timeout.“) is output,
but the overcurrent tripping is blocked (see also logic diagrams of time overcurrent elements, Figure 2-7 to
Figure 2-12).
Inrush current contains a relatively large second harmonic component (twice the nominal frequency) which is
nearly absent during a fault current. The inrush restraint is based on the evaluation of the 2nd harmonic
present in the inrush current. For frequency analysis, digital filters are used to conduct a Fourier analysis of all
three phase currents and the ground current.
Inrush current is recognized if the following conditions are fulfilled at the same time:
• The harmonic content is larger than the setting value 2202 2nd HARMONIC (minimum 0.125 * ΙNom,sec);
• the currents do not exceed an upper limit value 2205 I Max;
• an exceeding of a threshold value via an inrush restraint of the blocked element takes place.
In this case an inrush in the affected phase is recognized (annunciations 1840 to 1842 and 7558 InRush
Gnd Det, see Figure 2-16) and its blocking being carried out.
Since quantitative analysis of the harmonic components cannot be completed until a full line period has been
measured, pickup will generally be blocked by then. Therefore, assuming the inrush restraint feature is
enabled, a pickup message will be delayed by a full line period if no closing process is present. On the other
hand, trip delay times of the time overcurrent protection feature are started immediately even with the inrush
restraint being enabled. Time delays continue running with inrush currents present. If inrush blocking drops
out after the time delay has elapsed, tripping will occur immediately. Therefore, utilization of the inrush
restraint feature will not result in any additional tripping delays. If a relay element drops out during inrush
blocking, the associated time delay will reset.
Cross Blocking
Since inrush restraint operates individually for each phase, protection is ideal where a power transformer is
energized into a single-phase fault and inrush currents are detected on a different healthy phase. However,
the protection feature can be configured to allow that not only this phase element but also the remaining
elements (including ground) are blocked (the so-called CROSS BLOCK function, address 2203) if the permis-
sible harmonic component of the current is exceeded for only one phase.
Please take into consideration that inrush currents flowing in the ground path will not cross-block tripping by
the phase elements.
Cross blocking is reset if there is no more inrush in any phase. Furthermore, the cross blocking function may
also be limited to a particular time interval (address 2204 CROSS BLK TIMER). After expiry of this time
interval, the cross blocking function will be disabled, even if inrush current is still present.
The inrush restraint has an upper limit: Above this (via adjustable parameter 2205 I Max) current blocking is
suppressed since a high-current fault is assumed in this case.
The following figure shows the inrush restraint influence on the time overcurrent elements including cross-
blocking.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_einschaltstabilisierung-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-16 Logic diagram for inrush restraint
2.2.8 Pickup Logic and Tripping Logic
The pickup annunciations of the individual phases (or ground) and the individual element are combined with
each other in such a way that the phase information and the element that has picked up are issued.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Table 2-3 Pickup Indications of Overcurrent Protection
Internal indication Figure Output indication FNo.

50-3 A PU
50-2 A PU Figure 2-5
50/51 Ph A PU 1762
51 A PU Figure 2-11
50-3 B PU
50-2 B PU Figure 2-5
50/51 Ph B PU 1763
50-1 B PU Figure 2-7
51 B PU Figure 2-11
50-3 C PU
50-2 C PU Figure 2-5
50/51 Ph C PU 1764
51 C PU Figure 2-11
50N-3 PU
50N-2 PU Figure 2-6
50N/51NPickedup 1765
50N-1 PU Figure 2-9
51N PU Figure 2-12
50-3 A PU 50-3 picked up 1767
50-3 B PU
50-3 C PU
50N-3 PU 50N-3 picked up 1768
50-2 B PU Figure 2-5 50-2 picked up 1800
50N-2 PU Figure 2-6 50N-2 picked up 1831
50-1 B PU Figure 2-7 50-1 picked up 1810
50N-1 PU Figure 2-6 50N-1 picked up 1834
51 A PU Figure 2-11
51 B PU Figure 2-11 51 picked up 1820
51 C PU Figure 2-11
51N PU Figure 2-12 51N picked up 1837
(All pickups) 50(N)/51(N) PU 1761
In the trip signals, the element which initiated the tripping is also indicated.
2.2.9 Two-phase Overcurrent Protection (Only Non-Directional)
The 2-phase overcurrent protection functionality is used in isolated or grounded systems where interaction
with existing 2-phase protection equipment is required. As an isolated or grounded system remains opera-
tional with a 1-phase ground fault, this protection serves to detect double ground faults with high ground
fault currents. The respective feeder must be switched off only in this case. A 2-phase measurement is suffi-
cient for this purpose. In order to ensure selectivity of the protection in this section of the system, only phases
A and C are monitored.
If 250 50/51 2-ph prot (settable in P.System Data 1) is set to ON, ΙB is not used for threshold compar-
ison. If the fault is a simple ground fault in B, the element will not pick up. A double ground fault is assumed
only after pickup on A or C, causing the element to pick up and trip after the delay time has elapsed.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
NOTE
i With inrush detection activated and inrush only on B, no cross blocking will take place in the other phases.
On the other hand, if inrush with cross blocking is activated on A or C, B will also be blocked.
2.2.10 Fast Busbar Protection Using Reverse Interlocking
Application Example
Each of the current elements can be blocked via binary inputs. A setting parameter determines whether the
binary input operates in the normally open (i.e. actuated when energized) or the normally closed (i.e. actu-
ated when de-energized) mode. This allows fast busbar protection to be applied in star systems or open ring
systems by applying "reverse interlocking". This principle is often used, for example, in distribution systems,
auxiliary systems of power plants and similar systems, where a station supply transformer supplied from the
transmission grid serves internal loads of the generation station via a medium voltage bus with multiple
feeders (Figure 2-17).
The reverse interlocking principle is based on the following: Time overcurrent protection of the busbar feeder
trips with a short time delay T 50-2 independent of the grading times of the feeders, unless the pickup of the
next load-side overcurrent protection element blocks the busbar protection (Figure 2-17). Always the protec-
tion element nearest to the fault will trip with the short time delay since this element cannot be blocked by a
protection element located behind the fault. Time elements T 50-1 or T51 are still effective as backup
element. Pickup signals output by the load-side protective relay are used as input message >BLOCK 50-2 via
a binary input at the feeder-side protective relay.
[rueckwverr-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-17 Reverse interlocking protection scheme

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.2.11 Setting Notes
General
When selecting the time overcurrent protection in DIGSI, a dialog box appears with several tabs for setting the
individual parameters. Depending on the functional scope specified during configuration of the protection
functions under addresses 112 Charac. Phase and 113 Charac. Ground, the number of tabs can vary. If
address FCT 50/51 was set to Definite Time, or Charac. Ground was set to Definite Time, then
only the settings for the definite time elements are available. The selection of TOC IEC or TOC ANSI makes
available additional inverse time characteristics. The superimposed high-set elements 50-2, 50-3 or 50N-2,
50N-3 are available in all these cases.
Parameter 250 50/51 2-ph prot can also be set to activate two-phase overcurrent protection.
Under address 1201 FCT 50/51, overcurrent protection for phases and under address 1301 FCT 50N/51N,
the ground overcurrent protection can be switched ON or OFF.
Pickup values, time delays, and characteristics for ground protection are set separately from the pickup values,
time delays and characteristic curves associated with phase protection. Because of this, relay coordination for
ground faults is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and more sensitive settings can often be
applied to directional ground protection.
Depending on the setting of parameter 251 CT Connect., the device can also be used in specific system
configuration with regard to current connections. Further information can be found under Section
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes, “Current Connections”.
Measurement Methods
The comparison values to be used for the respective element can be set in the setting sheets for the elements.
• Measurement of the fundamental harmonic (standard method):

This measurement method processes the sampled values of the current and filters in numerical order the
fundamental harmonic so that the higher harmonics or transient peak currents remain largely unconsid-
ered.
• Measurement of the true RMS value

The current amplitude is derived from the sampled values in accordance with the definition equation of
the true RMS value. This measurement method should be selected when higher harmonics are to be
considered by the function (e.g. in capacitor banks).
• Measurement with instantaneous values

This procedure compares the instantaneous values to the set threshold. The element picks up at 2 · √2 ·
setting value (rms). It does not perform a mean-value calculation and is thus sensitive with regard to
disturbances. This measurement method should only be selected if an especially short pickup time of the
element is required. In this measurement procedure, the operating time of the element is reduced
compared to the measurement of effective values or fundamental harmonics (see “Technical Data”).
The type of the comparison values can be set under the following addresses:
50-3 element Address 1219 50-3 measurem.
51 element Address 1222 51 measurem.
50N-3 element Address 1319 50N-3 measurem.
51N element Address 1322 51N measurem.
High-set Current Elements 50-2, 50-3 (phases)

The pickup current of the high-set element 50-2 PICKUP or 50-3 PICKUP can be set at address 1202 or
1217. The corresponding delay time 50-2 DELAY or 50-3 DELAY can be configured under address 1203 or

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
1218. It is usually used for purposes of current grading intended for large impedances that are prevalent in
transformers or generators. It is specified in such manner that it picks up faults up to this impedance.
Example of the high-set current element 50-2 PICKUP: Transformer used for busbar supply with the
following data:
Rated apparent power SNomT = 16 MVA
Transformer impedance ZT = 10 %
Primary nominal voltage VNom1 = 110 kV
Secondary nominal voltage VNom2 = 20 kV
Vector groups Dy 5
Neutral point Grounded
Fault power on 110 kV-side 1 GVA
Based on the data above, the following fault currents are calculated:
Three-Phase High Voltage Side Fault Current at 110 kV = 5250 A
Three-Phase Low Voltage Side Fault Current at 20 kV = 3928 A
On the High Voltage Side Flowing at 110 kV = 714 A
The nominal current of the transformer is:

ΙNomT, 110 = 84 A (High Voltage Side) ΙNomT, 20 = 462 A (Low Voltage
Side)
Current Transformer (High Voltage Side) 100 A/1 A
Current Transformer (Low Voltage Side) 500 A/1 A
Due to the following definition
[fo_hochstrom, 1, en_US]
the following setting applies to the protection device: The 50-2 high-set current element must be set higher
than the maximum fault current which is detected during a low side fault on the high side. To reduce fault
probability as much as possible even when fault power varies, the following setting is selected in primary
values: 50-2 /ΙNom = 10, i.e. 50-2 = 1000 A. The same applies analogously when using the high-set element
50-3.
Increased inrush currents, if their fundamental component exceeds the setting value, are rendered harmless
by delay times (address 1203 50-2 DELAY or 1218 50-3 DELAY).
For motor protection, the 50-2 relay element must be set smaller than the smallest phase-to-phase fault
current and larger than the largest motor starting current. Since the maximum occurring startup current is
usually below 1.6 x the rated startup current (even with unfavourable conditions), the following setting is
adequate for the fault current element 50-2:
1.6 x ΙStartup < 50-2 Pickup < Ιfault,2pol,min
The potential increase in starting current caused by overvoltage conditions is already accounted for by the 1.6
factor. The 50-2 element can be tripped without delay (50-2 DELAY = 0.00 s), since saturation of the shunt
reactance occurs in a motor, unlike in a transformer, for example.
The principle of the "reverse interlocking" utilizes the multi-element function of the time overcurrent protec-
tion: Element 50-2 PICKUP is applied as a fast busbar protection with a shorter safety delay time 50-2
DELAY (e.g. 100 ms). For faults at the outgoing feeders, element 50-2 is blocked. The elements 50-1 or 51
serve as backup protection. The pickup values of both elements (50-1 PICKUP or 51 PICKUP and 50-2 PICKUP)
are set equal. The delay time 50-1 DELAY or 51 TIME DIAL is set in such manner that it overgrades the
delay for the outgoing feeders.
The selected time is an additional delay time and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However,

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
pickup, will be signaled. If the 50-2 element or the 50-3 element is not required at all, the pickup threshold
50-2 or 50-3 is set to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
High-set Current Elements 50N-2, 50N-3 (ground)

The pickup current of the high-set element 50N-2 PICKUP or 50N-3 PICKUP can be set at address 1302 or
1317. The corresponding delay time 50N-2 DELAY or 50N-3 DELAY can be configured under address 1303
or 1318. The same considerations apply to these settings as they did for phase currents discussed earlier.
pickup, will be signaled. If the 50N-2 element or 50N-3 element is not required at all, the pickup threshold
50N-2 or 50N-3 should be set to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
50-1 Element (phases)

For setting the 50-1 element, it is the maximum anticipated load current that must be considered above all.
Pickup due to overload should never occur since in this mode the device operates as fault protection with
correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. For this reason, a setting equal to 20% of
the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and a setting equal to 40% is recommended for
transformers and motors.
The settable time delay (address 1205 50-1 DELAY) results from the grading coordination chart defined for
the system.
pickup, will be signaled. If the 50-1 element is not required at all, then the pickup threshold 50-1 should be set
to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
50N-1 Element (ground)

The 50N-1 element is normally set based on minimum ground fault current.
If the relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint feature of
7SJ66 may be used for the 50N–1 relay element. It can be enabled or disabled for both the phase current and
the ground current in address 2201 INRUSH REST.. The characteristic values of the inrush restraint are listed
in Subsection "Inrush Restraint".
The settable delay time (address 1305 50N-1 DELAY) results from the time coordination chart defined for the
system. For ground currents in a grounded system a separate coordination timer with short time delays can be
applied.
pickup, will be signaled. If the 50N-1 element is not required at all, the pickup threshold 50N-1 PICKUP should
be set to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
Pickup Stabilization (Definite Time)

The configurable dropout times 1215 50 T DROP-OUT or 1315 50N T DROP-OUT can be set to implement a
uniform dropout behavior when using electromechanical relays. This is necessary for a time grading. The
dropout time of the electromechanical relay must be known to this end. Subtract the dropout time of the
device (see Technical Data) from this value and enter the result in the parameters.
51 Element (phases) with IEC or ANSI characteristics

Having set address 112 Charac. Phase = TOC IEC or TOC ANSI when configuring the protection func-
tions (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes), the parameters for the inverse time characteristics will also be available.
If address 112 Charac. Phase was set to TOC IEC, you can select the desired IEC characteristic (Normal
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse) at address 1211 51 IEC CURVE. If
address 112 Charac. Phase was set to TOC ANSI, you can select the desired ANSI characteristic (Very
Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Defi-
nite Inv.) at address 1212 51 ANSI CURVE.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already
been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a
current of about 1.1 times the setting value is present. If Disk Emulation was selected at address 1210 51
Drop-out, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as described before.
The current value is set in address 1207 51 PICKUP. The setting is mainly determined by the maximum
anticipated operating current. Pickup due to overload should never occur since in this mode, the device oper-
ates as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection.
The corresponding time multiplier for an IEC characteristic is set at address 1208 51 TIME DIAL and in
address 1209 51 TIME DIAL for an ANSI characteristic. It must be coordinated with the time coordination
chart of the system.
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However, pickup
will be signaled. If the 51 element is not required at all, address 112 Charac. Phase should be set to Defi-
nite Time during protection function configuration (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes).
If highly sensitive settings close to the load current are required in weak power systems or transformers, the
element can be stabilized via the undervoltage as an additional criterion for the power system fault. The oper-
ating modes can be set in address 1223 VOLT. INFLUENCE. In a voltage-controlled operation, the voltage
threshold is defined via parameter 1224 51V V< below which the current element is released
51N Element (ground) with IEC or ANSI Characteristics

Having set address 113 Charac. Ground = TOC IEC when configuring the protection functions (Section
2.1.1 Functional Scope), the parameters for the inverse time characteristics will also be available. Specify in
address 1311 51N IEC CURVE the desired IEC characteristic (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse,
Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse). If address 113 Charac. Ground was set to TOC ANSI, you can
select the desired ANSI characteristic (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse,
Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1312 51N ANSI CURVE.
current of about 1.1 times the setting value is present. If Disk Emulation was selected at address 1310 51
Drop-out, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as described before.
The current value is set in address 1307 51N PICKUP. The setting is mainly determined by the minimum
anticipated ground fault current.
The corresponding time multiplier for an IEC characteristic is set at address 1308 51N TIME DIAL and at
address 1309 51N TIME DIAL for an ANSI characteristic. This has to be coordinated with the grading coordi-
nation chart of the network. For ground currents with grounded network, you can often set up a separate
grading coordination chart with shorter delay times.
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However, pickup
will be signaled. If the 51N-TOC elementt is not required at all, address 113 Charac. Ground should be set
to Definite Time during configuration of the protection functions (see Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope).
User-defined Characteristics (phases and ground)

Having set address 112 Charac. Phase or 113 = Charac. Ground = User Defined PU or User def.
Reset when configuring the protection functions (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes), user-defined curves will
also be available. A maximum of 20 value pairs (current and time) may be entered at address 1230 51/51N or
1330 50N/51N in this case. This option allows point-by-point entry of any desired curve. When setting address
112 = User def. Reset or 113 = User def. Reset, additional value pairs (current and reset time) may
be entered in address 1231 MofPU Res T/Tp or1331 MofPU Res T/TEp to represent the dropout curve.
Since current values are rounded in a specific pattern before they are processed in the device (see Table 2-4),
we recommend to use exactly the same preferred current values you can find in this table.
The current and time value pairs are entered as multiples of addresses 1207 51 PICKUP and 1208 51 TIME
DIAL for the phase currents and 1307 and 1308 for the ground system. Therefore, it is recommended that
these addresses are initially set to 1.00 for simplicity. Once the curve is entered, the values at addresses 1207
or 1307 or/and 1208 or 1308 can be modified later to allow moving the curve in a different direction.
The default setting of current values is ∞. They are, therefore, disabled and no pickup or tripping of these
protection functions will occur.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The following must be observed:
• The value pairs should be entered in increasing sequence. If desired, fewer than 20 pairs can be entered.
In most cases, about 10 pairs is sufficient to define the characteristic accurately. A value pair which is not
used has to be made invalid by entering "∞” for the threshold! The user must ensure that the value pairs
produce a clear and constant characteristic .
The current values entered should be those from the following table, along with the matching times.
Deviating values MofPU (multiples of PU-values) are rounded. This, however, will not be indicated.
Currents smaller than the current value of the smallest curve point will not lead to an extension of the
tripping time. The pickup curve (see Figure 2-18, right side) runs parallel to the current axis, up to the
smallest current value point.
Currents larger than the largest current value entered will not lead to a reduction of the tripping time.
The pickup curve (see Figure 2-18, right side) runs parallel to the current axis, beginning with the
greatest current value point.
Table 2-4 Preferential values of standardized currents for user-defined tripping curves
MofPU = 1 to 1.94 MofPU = 2 to 4.75 MofPU = 5 to 7.75 MofPU = 8 to 20

1.00 1.50 2.00 3.50 5.00 6.50 8.00 15.00
1.06 1.56 2.25 3.75 5.25 6.75 9.00 16.00
1.13 1.63 2.50 4.00 5.50 7.00 10.00 17.00
1.19 1.69 2.75 4.25 5.75 7.25 11.00 18.00
1.25 1.75 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 12.00 19.00
1.31 1.81 3.25 4.75 6.25 7.75 13.00 20.00
1.38 1.88 14.00
1.44 1.94
[anwenderkennl-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-18 Using a user-defined curve
The value pairs are entered at address 1231 MofPU Res T/Tp or 1331 MofPU Res T/TEp to recreate the
reset curve. The following must be observed:
• The current values entered should be those from the following Table 2-5, along with the matching times.
Deviating values of MofPU are rounded. This, however, will not be indicated.
Currents larger than the largest current value entered will not lead to an extension of the dropout time.
The dropout curve (see Figure 2-18, left side) runs parallel to the current axis, up to the largest curve
value point.
Currents which are smaller than the smallest current value entered will not lead to a reduction of the
dropout time. The dropout curve (see Figure 2-18, left side) runs parallel to the current axis, beginning
with the smallest curve value point.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Table 2-5 Preferential values of standardized currents for user-defined reset curves
.MofPU = 1 to 0.86 MofPU = 0.84 to 0.67 MofPU = 0.66 to 0.38 MofPU = 0.34 to 0.00
1.00 0.93 0.84 0.75 0.66 0.53 0.34 0.16
0.99 0.92 0.83 0.73 0.64 0.50 0.31 0.13
0.98 0.91 0.81 0.72 0.63 0.47 0.28 0.09
0.97 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.61 0.44 0.25 0.06
0.96 0.89 0.78 0.69 0.59 0.41 0.22 0.03
0.95 0.88 0.77 0.67 0.56 0.38 0.19 0.00
0.94 0.86
When using DIGSI to make settings, a dialog box opens where you can enter up to 20 value pairs (measured
quantity and trip time) (see Figure 2-19).
In order to represent the characteristic graphically, the user should click on "characteristic". The previously
entered characteristic will appear as shown in Figure 2-19.
The characteristic curve shown in the graph can be modified later on. Placing the mouse cursor over a point
on the characteristic, the cursor changes to the shape of a hand. Press and hold the left mouse button and
drag the data item to the desired position. Releasing the mouse button will automatically update the value in
the value table.
The respective upper limits of the ranges of value are indicated by dotted lines in the right-hand and upper
area of the system of coordinates. If the position of a data point lies outside these limits, the associated value
is set to infinity.
[sc_ausloesekennl, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-19 Entry and visualization of a user-defined tripping characteristic in DIGSI — example
Inrush Restraint
When applying the protection device to transformers where high inrush currents are to be expected, the
7SJ66 can make use of an inrush restraint function for the overcurrent elements 50-1, 51, 50N-1 and 51N.
Inrush restraint is only effective and accessible if address 122 InrushRestraint was set to Enabled. If this
function is not required, then Disabled is set. In address 2201 INRUSH REST., the function is switched ON
or OFF jointly for the overcurrent elements 50-1 PICKUP,51 PICKUP, 50N-1 PICKUP and 51N PICKUP
The inrush restraint is based on the evaluation of the 2nd harmonic present in the inrush current. Upon
delivery from the factory, a ratio Ι2f/Ιf of 15 % is set. Under normal circumstances, this setting will not need to
be changed. The setting value is identical for all phases and ground. However, the component required for
restraint may be adjusted to system conditions in address 2202 2nd HARMONIC. To provide more restraint in
exceptional cases, where energizing conditions are particularly unfavorable, a smaller value can be set in the
aforementioned address, e.g. 12 %. Irrespective of parameter 2202 2nd HARMONIC, rush blocking will only
occur if the absolute value of the 2nd harmonic is at least 0.125 * INom,sec.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The effective duration of the cross-blocking 2203 CROSS BLK TIMER can be set to a value between 0 s
(harmonic restraint active for each phase individually) and a maximum of 180 s (harmonic restraint of a phase
blocks also the other phases for the specified duration).
If the current exceeds the value set in address 2205 I Max, no further restraint will take place for the 2nd
harmonic.
Manual Close Mode (phases, ground)

When a circuit breaker is closed onto a faulted line, a high-speed trip by the circuit breaker is usually desired.
For overcurrent or high-set element the delay may be bypassed via a Manual Close pulse, thus resulting in
instantaneous tripping. To enable the device to react properly on occurrence of a fault in the phase element,
address 1213 MANUAL CLOSE has to be set accordingly. Correspondingly, address 1313 MANUAL CLOSE is
considered for the ground path address. Thus, the user determines for both elements, the phase and the
ground element, what pickup value is active with what delay when the circuit breaker is closed manually.
External Control Command

If the manual close signal is not sent from a 7SJ66 device, i.e. neither via the built-in operator interface nor via
a serial interface, but directly from a control acknowledgment switch, this signal must be passed to a 7SJ66
binary input, and configured accordingly (>Manual Close), so that the element selected for MANUAL
CLOSE can become effective. The alternative Inactive means that all elements operate as per configuration
even with manual close and do not get special treatment.
Internal Control Function

If the manual close signal is sent via the internal control function of the device, an internal connection of
information has to be established via CFC (interlocking task level) using the CMD_Information block (see
Figure 2-20).
[handein-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-20 Example for the generation of a manual close signal using the internal control function
NOTE
i For an interaction between the automatic reclosing function (79 AR) and the control function, an extended
CFC logic is necessary. See margin heading “Close command: Directly or via Control” in the Setting Notes of
the automatic reclosing function (Section 2.17.6 Setting Notes).
Interaction with the Automatic Reclosing Function (phases)

If reclosing follows, high-speed and simultaneous protection against faults with 50-2 or 50-3 is usually
desired. If the fault still exists after the first reclosing, the 50-1 or the 51 element will be initiated with graded
tripping times, that is, element 50-2 or 50-3 will be blocked. You can use the parameters 1214 50-2 active
or 1216 50-3 active active for this purpose to define whether or not the 50-2 or the 50-3 element is
impacted by a release signal of the internal or an external automatic reclosing system. The setting with 79
active means that the 50-2 or the 50-3 element will only be released if automatic reclosing is not blocked. If
this is not desired, the setting Always is selected so that the 50-2 or the 50-3 element is always active.
The integrated automatic reclosing function of the 7SJ66 also provides the option to individually determine for
each overcurrent element whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously or unaffected by
the AR with the set time delay (see Section 2.17 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
Interaction with the Automatic Reclosing Function (ground)

When reclosing occurs, it is desirable to have high-speed protection against faults with 50N-2 or 50N-3. If the
fault still exists after the first reclosing, the 50N-1 or the 51N element will be initiated with coordinated trip-

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
ping times, that is, element 50N-2 or 50N-3 will be blocked. At address 1314 50N-2 active or 1316 50N-3
active active it can be specified whether the 50N-2 or the 50N-3 element should be influenced by the
release signal of an internal or external automatic reclosing system. Address with 79 active determines
that the 50N-2 or the 50N-3 element will only operate if automatic reclosing is not blocked. If not desired,
select the setting Always so that the 50N-2 or the 50N-3 element will always operate, as configured.
each overcurrent element whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously or unaffected by
the AR with the set time delay (see Section 2.17 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
2.2.12 Settings
1201 FCT 50/51 ON ON 50, 51 Phase Time Overcur-
OFF rent
1202 50-2 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 50-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1203 50-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50-2 Time Delay
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1207 51 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1208 51 TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51 Time Dial
1209 51 TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51 Time Dial
1210 51 Drop-out Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-out characteristic
Disk Emulation
1211 51 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
1212 51 ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
1213A MANUAL CLOSE 50-3 instant. 50-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
50-2 instant.
50 -1 instant.
51 instant.
Inactive
1214A 50-2 active Always Always 50-2 active
with 79 active
1215A 50 T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50 Drop-Out Time Delay

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

1216A 50-3 active Always Always 50-3 active
with 79 active
1217 50-3 PICKUP 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 50-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞A
1219A 50-3 measurem. Fundamental Fundamental 50-3 measurement of
True RMS
Instantaneous
True RMS
True RMS
1222A 51 measurem. Fundamental Fundamental 51 measurement of
True RMS
1223 VOLT. INFLUENCE NO NO 51V Voltage Influence
Volt. controll.
Volt. restraint
1224 51V V< 10.0 .. 125.0 V 75.0 V 51V V< Threshold for
Release Ip
1230 51/51N 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞ 51/51N
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1231 MofPU Res T/Tp 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1301 FCT 50N/51N ON ON 50N, 51N Ground Time
OFF Overcurrent
1302 50N-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 50N-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
1303 50N-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50N-2 Time Delay
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1307 51N PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A 51N Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1308 51N TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 51N Time Dial
1309 51N TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51N Time Dial
1310 51N Drop-out Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
Disk Emulation
1311 51N IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
1312 51N ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

1313A MANUAL CLOSE 50N-3 instant. 50N-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
50N-2 instant.
50N-1 instant.
51N instant.
Inactive
1314A 50N-2 active Always Always 50N-2 active
With 79 Active
1315A 50N T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50N Drop-Out Time Delay
1316A 50N-3 active Always Always 50N-3 active
with 79 active
1317 50N-3 PICKUP 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 50N-3 Pickup
1319A 50N-3 measurem. Fundamental Fundamental 50N-3 measurement of
True RMS
Instantaneous
True RMS
True RMS
1322A 51N measurem. Fundamental Fundamental 51N measurement of
True RMS
1330 50N/51N 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞ 50N/51N
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1331 MofPU Res T/TEp 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <->
0.01 .. 999.00 TD T/TEp
2201 INRUSH REST. OFF OFF Inrush Restraint
ON
2202 2nd HARMONIC 10 .. 45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of
fundamental
2203 CROSS BLOCK NO NO Cross Block
YES
2204 CROSS BLK TIMER 0.00 .. 180.00 sec 0.00 sec Cross Block Time
2205 I Max 1A 0.30 .. 25.00 A 7.50 A Maximum Current for
5A 1.50 .. 125.00 A 37.50 A Inrush Restraint
2.2.13 Information List

Informa-
tion
1704 >BLK 50/51 SP >BLOCK 50/51
1714 >BLK 50N/51N SP >BLOCK 50N/51N
1718 >BLOCK 50-3 SP >BLOCK 50-3
1719 >BLOCK 50N-3 SP >BLOCK 50N-3
1721 >BLOCK 50-2 SP >BLOCK 50-2
1722 >BLOCK 50-1 SP >BLOCK 50-1
1723 >BLOCK 51 SP >BLOCK 51

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
1726 >BLOCK 51N SP >BLOCK 51N
1751 50/51 PH OFF OUT 50/51 O/C switched OFF
1752 50/51 PH BLK OUT 50/51 O/C is BLOCKED
1753 50/51 PH ACT OUT 50/51 O/C is ACTIVE
1756 50N/51N OFF OUT 50N/51N is OFF
1757 50N/51N BLK OUT 50N/51N is BLOCKED
1758 50N/51N ACT OUT 50N/51N is ACTIVE
1761 50(N)/51(N) PU OUT 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP
1762 50/51 Ph A PU OUT 50/51 Phase A picked up
1763 50/51 Ph B PU OUT 50/51 Phase B picked up
1764 50/51 Ph C PU OUT 50/51 Phase C picked up
1765 50N/51NPickedup OUT 50N/51N picked up
1767 50-3 picked up OUT 50-3 picked up
1768 50N-3 picked up OUT 50N-3 picked up
1769 50-3 TRIP OUT 50-3 TRIP
1770 50N-3 TRIP OUT 50N-3 TRIP
1787 50-3 TimeOut OUT 50-3 TimeOut
1788 50N-3 TimeOut OUT 50N-3 TimeOut
1791 50(N)/51(N)TRIP OUT 50(N)/51(N) TRIP
1804 50-2 TimeOut OUT 50-2 Time Out
1805 50-2 TRIP OUT 50-2 TRIP
1814 50-1 TimeOut OUT 50-1 Time Out
1815 50-1 TRIP OUT 50-1 TRIP
1820 51 picked up OUT 51 picked up
1824 51 Time Out OUT 51 Time Out
1825 51 TRIP OUT 51 TRIP
1832 50N-2 TimeOut OUT 50N-2 Time Out
1835 50N-1 TimeOut OUT 50N-1 Time Out
1837 51N picked up OUT 51N picked up
1838 51N TimeOut OUT 51N Time Out
1839 51N TRIP OUT 51N TRIP
1840 PhA InrushDet OUT Phase A inrush detection
1841 PhB InrushDet OUT Phase B inrush detection
1842 PhC InrushDet OUT Phase C inrush detection
1843 INRUSH X-BLK OUT Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY
1851 50-1 BLOCKED OUT 50-1 BLOCKED
1853 50N-1 BLOCKED OUT 50N-1 BLOCKED

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
1855 51 BLOCKED OUT 51 BLOCKED
1856 51N BLOCKED OUT 51N BLOCKED
1867 51N Disk Pickup OUT 51N Disk emulation picked up
7551 50-1 InRushPU OUT 50-1 InRush picked up
7552 50N-1 InRushPU OUT 50N-1 InRush picked up
7553 51 InRushPU OUT 51 InRush picked up
7554 51N InRushPU OUT 51N InRush picked up
7556 InRush OFF OUT InRush OFF
7557 InRush BLK OUT InRush BLOCKED
7558 InRush Gnd Det OUT InRush Ground detected
7559 67-1 InRushPU OUT 67-1 InRush picked up
7560 67N-1 InRushPU OUT 67N-1 InRush picked up
7561 67-TOC InRushPU OUT 67-TOC InRush picked up
7562 67N-TOCInRushPU OUT 67N-TOC InRush picked up
7563 >BLOCK InRush SP >BLOCK InRush
7564 Gnd InRush PU OUT Ground InRush picked up
7565 Ia InRush PU OUT Phase A InRush picked up
7566 Ib InRush PU OUT Phase B InRush picked up
7567 Ic InRush PU OUT Phase C InRush picked up

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N

The directional overcurrent protection comprises four elements each for the phase current and the ground
currents. All elements are independent of each other and can be combined as desired.
The high-current elements 67-2 and 67-3 and the 67-1 overcurrent element always operate with a definite
tripping time, the fourth element 67-TOC operates with an inverse tripping time.
Applications
• The directional overcurrent protection allows the application of multifunctional protection devices 7SJ66
also in systems where protection coordination depends on knowing both the magnitude of the fault
current and the direction of power flow to the fault location.
• The non-directional overcurrent protection described in Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N,
51N may operate as overlapping backup protection or may be disabled. Additionally, individual elements
(e.g. 67-2 and/or 67N-2) may be interconnected with the directional overcurrent protection.
• For parallel lines or transformers supplied from a single source, only directional overcurrent protection
allows selective fault detection.
• For line sections supplied from two sources or in ring-operated lines, the overcurrent protection has to be
supplemented by the element-specific directional criterion.
2.3.1 General
For parallel lines or transformers supplied from a single source (see Figure 2-21), the second feeder (II) is
opened on occurrence of a fault in the first feeder (I) if tripping of the breaker in the parallel feeder is not
prevented by a directional measuring element (at B). Therefore, where indicated with an arrow (Figure 2-21),
directional overcurrent protection is applied. Please ensure that the "forward" direction of the protection
element is in the direction of the line (or object to be protected). This is not necessarily identical with the
direction of the normal load flow, as shown in Figure 2-21.
[ueberstromzeitschutz-bei-paralleltransformatoren-020626-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-21 Overcurrent protection for parallel transformers

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
For line sections supplied from two sources or in ring-operated lines, the overcurrent protection has to be
supplemented by the directional criterion. Figure 2-22 shows a ring system where both energy sources are
merged to one single source.
[zweiseitig-gespeister-leitungszug-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-22 Transmission lines with sources at both ends
Depending on the setting of parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w., the ground current element can operate
either with measured values IN or with the values 3I0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices
featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, use the calculated quantity 3I0.
The directional orientation Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional can be set individually for each
element (Non-Directional from V4.81 on).
For each element the time can be blocked via binary input or automatic reclosing (cycle-dependent), thus
suppressing the trip command. Removal of blocking during pickup will restart time delays. The Manual Close
signal is an exception. If a circuit breaker is manually closed onto a fault, it can be re-opened immediately. For
overcurrent elements or high-set elements the delay may be bypassed via a Manual Close pulse, thus resulting
in high-speed tripping.
Furthermore, immediate tripping may be initiated in conjunction with the automatic reclosing function (cycle
dependant).
Pickup stabilization for the 67/67N elements of the directional overcurrent protection can be accomplished by
means of settable dropout times. This protection comes into use in systems where intermittent faults occur.
Combined with electromechanical relays, it allows different dropout responses to be adjusted and a time
grading of digital and electromechanical relays to be implemented.
Pickup and delay settings may be quickly adjusted to system requirements via dynamic setting switching (see
Section 2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup).
Utilizing the inrush restraint feature tripping may be blocked by the 67-1, 67-TOC, 67N-1, and 67N-TOC
elements in phases and ground path when inrush current is detected.
The following table gives an overview of these interconnections to other functions of the 7SJ66 devices.
Table 2-6 Interconnection to other functions
Directional Time Connection to Auto- Manual CLOSE Dynamic Cold Inrush Restraint
Overcurrent Protec- matic Reclosing Load Pickup
tion Elements
67-1 • • • •
67-2 • • •
67-3 • • •
67-TOC • • • •
67N-1 • • • •
67N-2 • • •

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Directional Time Connection to Auto- Manual CLOSE Dynamic Cold Inrush Restraint
Overcurrent Protec- matic Reclosing Load Pickup
tion Elements
67N-3 • • •
67N-TOC • • • •
2.3.2 Definite Time Directional High-set Elements 67-2, 67N-2, 67-3, 67N-3
For each element an individual pickup value 67-2 PICKUP, 67-3 PICKUP or 67N-2 PICKUP, 67N-3
PICKUP is set which can be measured as Fundamental or True RMS. Each phase current and the ground
current is compared with the common pickup value for each element 67-2 PICKUP, 67-3 PICKUP or
67N-2 PICKUP, 67N-3 PICKUP, and it is signaled when the value is exceeded provided that the fault direc-
tion is the same as the parameterized direction. After the associated delay times 67-2 DELAY, 67-3 DELAY
or 67N-2 DELAY, 67N-3 DELAY have expired, the tripping commands are initiated which are equally avail-
able separately for each element. The dropout value is approximately 95% of the pickup value for currents >
0.3 ΙNom.
tion does not drop out instantaneously. The trip delay times 50-2 DELAY, 67-3 DELAY or 50N-2 DELAY,
67N-3 DELAY continue during that time. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is reported
OFF and the trip delay time is reset unless the threshold 50-2 PICKUP, 67-3 PICKUP or 50N-2 PICKUP,
67N-3 PICKUP has been exceeded again. If the threshold is exceeded again during the dropout delay time,
the time is canceled. The trip delay time 50-2 DELAY, 67-3 DELAY or 50N-2 DELAY, 67N-3 DELAY
continues. If the threshold value is exceeded after this time has elapsed, the trip command is issued immedi-
ately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at this time, there is no reaction. If the threshold value is
exceeded again after expiry of the trip command delay time, while the dropout delay time is still running, trip-
ping is initiated immediately.
Each of these elements can be directional or non-directional (non-directional from V4.81 on).
The following figure gives an example of the logic diagram for the high-set elements 67-2 of the phase
currents. The high-set element 67-3 is structured identically.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_gerueberstromzeit_hochstromst-030903-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-23 Logic diagram for directional high-set element 67-2 for phases
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 67-2 instant. or 67-3 instant. and manual close detection is
present, a pickup causes instantaneous tripping even if the element is blocked via binary input.
The same applies to 79 AR 67-2 or 79 AR 67-3 instantaneous.
2.3.3 Definite Time, Directional Time Overcurrent Elements 67-1, 67N-1
For each element, an individual pickup value 67-1 PICKUP or 67N-1 PICKUP is set which can be measured
as Fundamental or True RMS. Phase and ground currents are compared separately with the common
setting value 67-1 PICKUP or 67N-1 PICKUP. Currents above the setting values are recognized separately
when fault direction is equal to the configured direction. If the inrush restraint function is used, either the
normal pickup signals or the corresponding inrush signals are issued as long as inrush current is detected.
When the relevant delay times 67-1 DELAY, 67N-1 DELAY have expired, a tripping command is issued

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
unless an inrush has been recognized or inrush restraint is active. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled, and
an inrush condition exists, no tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when
the overcurrent element time delay elapses. Trip signals and other flags for each element are issued when the
element times out. The dropout value is roughly equal to 95% of the pickup value for currents > 0.3 ΙNom.
tion does not drop out at high speed. The trip-command delay time 50-1 DELAY or 50N-1 DELAY continues
in the meantime. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is reported OFF and the trip delay time
is reset unless the threshold 50-1 PICKUP or 50N-1 PICKUP has been exceeded again. If the threshold is
exceeded again during the dropout delay time, the time is canceled. The trip-command delay time 50-1
DELAY or 50N-1 DELAY continues in the meantime. Should the threshold value be exceeded after its expiry,
the trip command is issued immediately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at this time, there will be no
reaction. If the threshold value is exceeded again after expiry of the trip-command delay time, while the
dropout delay time is still running, tripping occurs immediately.
The inrush restraint of the overcurrent elements 50-1 PICKUP or 50N-1 PICKUP is disabled via configu-
rable dropout times if an inrush pickup occurs, because the occurrence of an inrush does not constitute an
intermittent fault.
These elements can be blocked by the automatic reclosure function (AR).
The following figure shows by way of an example the logic diagram for the directional overcurrent element
67-1.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_gerueberstromzeit_ueberstromst-030903-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-24 Logic Diagram for the Directional Relay Element 67-1 for Phases
The dropout delay does only function if no inrush was detected. An approaching inrush resets an already
running dropout time delay.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_gerrueckfallverzoegerung_i_gr_ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-25 Logic of the Dropout Delay for 67-1
2.3.4 Inverse Time, Directional Time Overcurrent Elements 67-TOC, 67N-TOC
Inverse time elements are dependent on the variant ordered. They operate either according to the IEC- or the
ANSI-standard or to a user-defined characteristic. The characteristics and associated formulas are identical
with those of the non-directional overcurrent protection and are given in the Technical Data. When the inverse
time curves are configured, the definite time relay elements (67-2, 67-1) are also available.
Pickup Behavior
For each element, an individual pickup value 67-TOC PICKUP or 67N-TOC PICKUP is set which can be
measured as Fundamental or True RMS. Each phase and ground current is separately compared with the
common pickup value 67-TOC PICKUP or 67N-TOC PICKUP of each element. When a current value
exceeds the corresponding setting value by a factor of 1.1, the corresponding phase picks up and a message is
generated phase-selectively assuming that the fault direction is equal to the direction configured. If the inrush
restraint feature is used, either the normal pickup signals or the corresponding inrush signals are issued as
long as inrush current is detected. If the 67-TOC element picks up, the tripping time is calculated from the
actual fault current flowing, using an integrating method of measurement. The calculated tripping time
depends on the selected tripping curve. Once this time has elapsed, a trip signal is issued provided that no
inrush current is detected or inrush restraint is disabled. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled and an inrush
condition exists, no tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcur-
rent element time delay elapses.
For ground current element 67N-TOC, the characteristic may be selected independently of the characteristic
used for phase currents.
Pickup values of the 67-TOC (phases) and 67N-TOC (ground current) and the associated time multipliers may
be set individually.
Dropout Behavior
When using an ANSI or IEC curve, it can be selected whether the dropout of an element is to occur instantane-
ously or whether dropout is to be performed by means of the disk emulation mechanism. "Instantaneously"
means that pickup drops out when the pickup value of approx. 95 % of the set pickup value is undershot. For a
new pickup, the time counter starts at zero.
The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (time counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energiza-
tion. This process corresponds to the reset of a Ferraris disk (explaining its denomination "disk emulation"). In
case several faults occur in succession the "history" is taken into consideration due to the inertia of the Ferraris
disk and the time response is adapted. Reset begins as soon as 90 % of the setting value is undershot, in
accordance to the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. In the range between the dropout value (95 %
of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and the decrementing processes are in
idle state.
Disk emulation offers advantages when the overcurrent relay elements must be coordinated with conven-
tional electromechanical overcurrent relays located towards the source.
User-defined Characteristics
When user-defined characteristic are utilized, the tripping curve may be defined point by point. Up to 20 value
pairs (current, time) may be entered. The device then approximates the characteristic, using linear interpola-
tion.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The dropout curve may be user-defined as well. This is advantageous when the overcurrent protection must
be coordinated with conventional electromechanical overcurrent relays located towards the source. If no user-
defined dropout curve is required, the element drops out as soon as the measured signal is less than approx.
95% of the pickup setting. When a new pickup is evoked, the timer starts at zero again.
The following figure shows by way of an example the logic diagram for the 67-TOC relay element of the direc-
tional inverse time overcurrent protection of the phase currents.
[7sj6x_gerueberstromzeit_abh_ueberstrom_ip-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-26 Logic diagram for the directional overcurrent protection: 67-TOC relay element
2.3.5 Interaction with Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM)
False or undesired tripping can be caused by a measuring voltage that can be caused by either short-circuit or
broken wire in the voltage transformer's secondary system or an operation of the voltage transformer fuse.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Failure of the measuring voltage in one or two phases can be detected, and the directional time overcurrent
elements (Dir Phase and Dir Ground) can be blocked, see logic diagrams.
Undervoltage protection, sensitive ground fault detection and synchronization are also blocked in this case.
2.3.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function
It may be necessary to dynamically increase the pickup values of the directional time overcurrent protection if,
at starting, certain elements of the system show an increased power consumption after a long period of zero
voltage (e.g. air-conditioning systems, heating installations, motors). Thus, a general raise of pickup thresh-
olds can be avoided taking into consideration such starting conditions.
This dynamic pickup value changeover is common to all overcurrent elements and is described in Section
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup. The alternative pickup values can be set individually for each element of the
directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection.
2.3.7 Inrush Restraint
7SJ66 features an integrated inrush restraint function. It prevents "normal" pickup of the 67-1 or 67-TOC
elements (not 67-2 and 67-3) in the phases and in the ground path of the non-directional and directional
overcurrent protection functions. The same is true for the alternative pickup thresholds of the dynamic cold
load pickup function. If inrush currents are detected, special inrush pickup signals are generated. These signals
also initiate fault recording and start the associated trip delay time. If inrush conditions are still present after
the tripping time delay has elapsed, a corresponding message ("....TimeOut ") is output, but tripping is
blocked (for further information see "Inrush Restraint" in Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N,
51N).
2.3.8 Determination of Direction
The determination of the fault direction for the phase directional element and the ground directional element
is performed independently.
Basically, the direction determination is performed by determining the phase angle between the fault current
and a reference voltage.
Method of Directional Measurement

For the phase directional element the fault current of the corresponding phase and the unfaulted phase-to-
phase voltage are used as reference voltage. The unfaulted voltage also allows for a correct direction determi-
nation even if the fault voltage has collapsed entirely (short-line fault). In phase-to-ground voltage connec-
tions, the phase-to-phase voltages are calculated. In a connection of two phase-to-phase voltages and VN, the
third phase-to-phase voltage is also calculated.
With three-phase short-line faults, memory voltage values are used to clearly determine the direction if the
measurement voltages are not sufficient.Upon the expiration of the storage time period (2 s), the detected
direction is saved, as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available. When closing onto a fault, if no
memory voltage values exist in the buffer, the relay element will trip. In all other cases the voltage magnitude
will be sufficient for determining the direction.
For each directional ground element there are two possibilities of direction determination.
Direction Determination with Zero Sequence Calculated or Measured Quantities

For the directional ground fault elements, direction can be determined by comparing the zero sequence
system quantities. In the current path, the ΙN current is valid, when the transformer neutral current is
connected to the device. Otherwise, the device calculates the ground current from the sum of the three phase
currents. In the voltage path, the displacement voltage VN is used as reference voltage, if it is connected.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Otherwise the device calculates as reference voltage the zero sequence voltage 3 · V0 from the sum of the
three phase voltages. If the magnitude of V0 or 3 · V0 is not sufficient to determine direction, the direction is
undefined. Then the directional ground element will not initiate a trip signal. If the current Ι0 cannot be deter-
mined, e.g. because only two current transformers are utilized or the current transformers are connected in an
open delta configuration, then the directional ground elements will not be able to function. The latter is only
permitted in ungrounded systems.
Direction Determination with Negative Sequence System

Here, the negative sequence current and as reference voltage the negative sequence voltage are used for the
direction determination. This is advantageous if the zero sequence is influenced via a parallel line or if the zero
voltage becomes very small due to unfavorable zero impedances. The negative sequence system is calculated
from the individual voltages and currents. As with the use of the zero sequence values, a direction determina-
tion is carried out if the values necessary for the direction determination have exceeded a minimum threshold.
Otherwise the direction is undetermined.
Cross-Polarized Reference Voltages for Direction Determination

The direction of a phase-directional element is detected by means of a cross-polarized voltage. In a phase-to-
ground fault, the cross-polarized voltage (reference voltage) is 90° out of phase with the fault voltages (see
Figure 2-27). With phase-to-phase faults, the position of the reference voltages changes, depending on the
degree of collapse of the fault voltages, up to 30°.
[kurzschlussfremde-spannungen-fuer-richtungsbestimmung-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-27 Cross-polarized voltages for direction determination
Measured Values for the Determination of Fault Direction

Each phase has its own phase measuring element. The fourth measuring element is used as ground measuring
element. If the current exceeds the pickup threshold of a phase or that of the ground path, direction determi-
nation is started by the associated measuring element. In case of a multiphase fault, all phase measuring
elements involved perform their own direction determination. If one of the calculated directions differs from
the set direction, the function picks up.
The following table shows the allocation of measured values for the determination of fault direction for
various causes of pickup.
Table 2-7 Measured Values for the Determination of Fault Direction
Pickup Measuring element

A B C ground
Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
A ΙA VB - VC — — — — — —
B — — ΙB VC - VA — — — —
C — — — — ΙC VA - VB — —

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Pickup Measuring element

A B C ground
Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
N — — — — — — ΙN VN 1)
A, N VB - VC — — — — ΙN VN 1)
B, N — — ΙB VC - VA — — ΙN VN 1)
C, N — — — — ΙC VA - VB ΙN VN 1)
A, B ΙA VB - VC ΙB VC - VA — — — —
B, C — — ΙB VC - VA ΙC VA - VB — —
AC ΙA VB - VC — — ΙC VA - VB — —
A, B, N ΙA VB - VC ΙB VC - VA — — ΙN VN 1)
B, C, N — — ΙB VC - VA ΙC VA - VB ΙN VN 1)
A, C, N ΙA VB - VC — — ΙC VA - VB ΙN VN 1)
A, B, C ΙA VB - VC ΙB VC - VA ΙC VA - VB — —
A, B, C, N ΙA VB - VC ΙB VC - VA ΙC VA - VB ΙN VN 1)
1) or 3 · V0 = |VA + VB + VC|, depending on the connection type of voltages
Direction Determination of Directional Phase Elements

As already mentioned, the direction determination is performed by determining the phase angle between the
fault current and the reference voltage. In order to satisfy different network conditions and applications, the
reference voltage can be rotated by an adjustable angle. In this way, the vector of the rotated reference
voltage can be closely adjusted to the vector of the fault current in order to provide the best possible result for
the direction determination. Figure 2-28 clearly shows the relationship for the directional phase element
based on a single-phase ground fault in Phase A. The fault current ΙscA follows the fault voltage by fault angle
ϕsc. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for the directional phase element A, is rotated by the setting value
1519 ROTATION ANGLE, positively counter-clockwise. In this case, a rotation by +45°.
[7sj6x_drehung-referenzspannung-phase-200904-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-28 Rotation of the reference voltage, directional phase element
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse area, see Figure 2-29. The forward area is a
range of ±86° around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot If the vector of the fault current is in this area, the

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
device detects forward direction. In the mirrored area, the device detects reverse direction. In the intermediate
area, the direction result is undefined.
In a network, the vector of the fault current is usually in the forward or reverse area. If the vector moves out of
one these areas, e.g. the forward area, in direction of the undefined area, it leaves the forward area at Vref,rot
±86° and reaches the undefined area. If the vector leaves the undefined area in direction of the forward area
(or reverse area), a hysteresis of 2° is added. This hysteresis prevents chattering of the directional result. The
current vector reaches the forward area at ±84° (= 86°-2° hysteresis).
[7sj6x_vorwaertscharakteristik-gumz-phase-220904-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-29 Forward characteristic of the directional function, directional phase element
Direction Determination of Directional Ground Element with Ground Values

Figure 2-30 shows the treatment of the reference voltage for the directional ground element, also based on a
single-phase ground fault in phase A. Contrary to the directional phase elements, which work with the
unfaulted voltage as reference voltage, the fault voltage itself is the reference voltage for the directional
ground element. Depending on the connection of the voltage transformer, this is the voltage 3V0 (as shown in
Figure 2-30) or VN. The fault current -3Ι0 is phase offset by 180° to the fault current ΙscA and follows the fault
voltage 3V0 by fault angle ϕsc. The reference voltage is rotated by the setting value 1619 ROTATION ANGLE.
In this case, a rotation by -45°.
[7sj6x_drehung-referenzspannung-erde-nullsys-220904-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-30 Rotation of the reference voltage, directional ground element with zero sequence values
The forward area is also a range of ±86° around the rotated reference voltage Vref, rot. If the vector of the fault
current -3Ι0 (or ΙN) is in this area, the device detects forward direction.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Direction Determination of Directional Ground Element with Negative Sequence Values

Figure 2-31 shows the treatment of the reference voltage for the directional ground element using the nega-
tive sequence values based on a single-phase ground fault in phase A. As reference voltage, the negative
sequence voltage is used, as current for the direction determination, the negative sequence system in which
the fault current is displayed. The fault current -3Ι2 is in phase opposition to the fault current ΙscA and follows
the voltage 3V2 by the fault angle ϕsc. The reference voltage is rotated through the setting value 1619 ROTA-
TION ANGLE. In this case, a rotation of -45°.
[7sj6x_drehung-referenzspannung-erde-gegensys-220904-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-31 Rotation of the reference voltage, directional ground element with negative sequence values
The forward area is a range of ±86° around the rotated reference voltage Vref, rot. If the vector of the negative
sequence system current -3Ι2 is in this area, the device detects forward direction.
2.3.9 Reverse Interlocking for Double End Fed Lines
Application Example
The directionality feature of the directional overcurrent protection enables the user to perform reverse inter-
locking also on double end fed lines using relay element 67-1. It is designed to selectively isolate a faulty line
section (e.g. sections of rings) in high speed, i.e. no long graded times will slow down the process. This
scheme is feasible when the distance between protective relays is not too great and when pilot wires are avail-
able for signal transfer via an auxiliary voltage loop.
For each line, a separate data transfer path is required to facilitate signal transmission in each direction. When
implemented in a closed-circuit connection, disturbances in the communication line are detected and
signalled with time delay. The local system requires a local interlocking bus wire similar to the one described
in Subsection "Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection" for the directional overcurrent protection (Section
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N).
During a line fault, the device that detects faults in forward (line) direction using the directional relay element
67-1 will block one of the non-directional overcurrent elements (50-1, 50-TOC) of devices in the reverse direc-
tion (at the same busbar) since they should not trip (Figure 2-32). In addition, a message is generated
regarding the fault direction. "Forward" messages are issued when the current threshold of the directional
relay element 67-1 is exceeded and directional determination is done. Subsequently, "forward" messages are
transmitted to the device located in reverse direction.
During a busbar fault, the device that detects faults in reverse (busbar) direction using the directional relay
element 67-1 will block one of the non-directional overcurrent elements (50-1, 50-TOC) of devices at the
opposite end of the same feeder. In addition, a "Reverse" message is generated and transmitted via the auxil-
iary voltage loop to the relay located at the opposite end of the line.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[selektivitaetdurchrueckwverr-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-32 Reverse interlocking using directional elements
The directional overcurrent element providing normal time grading operates as selective backup protection.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the generation of fault direction signals.
[7sj6x-meld-gener-fehlerricht-20060118, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-33 Logic diagram for the generation of fault direction signals
General
When selecting the directional time overcurrent protection in DIGSI, a dialog box appears with several tabs for
setting the associated parameters. Depending on the functional scope specified during configuration of the
protective functions in addresses 115 67/67-TOC and 116 67N/67N-TOC, the number of tabs can vary.
If 67/67-TOC or 67N/67N-TOC is set equal to Definite Time, only the parameters for definite time over-
current protection are accessible here. If you select TOC IEC or TOC ANSI, the inverse time characteristics is
available, too. The superimposed directional elements 67-3, 67-2 and 67-1or 67N-3, 67N-2 and 67N-1apply in
all these cases.
At address 1501 FCT 67/67-TOC, directional phase overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF.
Pickup values, time delays, and characteristic are set separately for phase protection and ground protection.
Because of this, relay coordination for ground faults is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and
more sensitive settings can often be applied to directional ground protection. Thus, at address 1601 FCT
67N/67N-TOC, directional ground time overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF independent of
the directional phase time overcurrent protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Depending on the parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w., the device can either operate using measured values IN
or the quantities 3I0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current
input generally use the calculated quantity 3Ι0.
The directional orientation of the function is influenced by parameter 201 CT Starpoint (see Section
2.1.3 Power System Data 1).
Measurement Methods
The comparison values to be used for the respective element can be set in the setting sheets for the elements.
• Measurement of the Fundamental Harmonic (standard method):

This measurement method processes the sampled values of the current and filters in numerical order the
fundamental harmonic so that the higher harmonics or transient peak currents are rejected.
• Measurement of the True RMS Value

The current amplitude is derived from the sampled value in accordance with the definition equation of
the true RMS value. This measurement method should be selected when higher harmonics are to be
considered by the function (e.g. in capacitor bank).
The type of the comparison values can be set under the following addresses:
67-3 element Address 1527 67-3 MEASUREM.
67-TOC element Address 1522 67-TOC MEASUR.
67N-3 element Address 1627 67N-3 MEASUREM.
67N-TOC element Address 1622 67N-TOC MEASUR.
Direction Characteristic
The direction characteristic, i.e. the position of the ranges “forward”and “reverse” is set for the phase direc-
tional elements under address 1519 ROTATION ANGLE and for the ground directional element under address
1619 ROTATION ANGLE. The short-circuit angle is generally inductive in a range of 30° to 60°. This means
that usually the default settings of +45° for the phase directional elements and -45° for the ground directional
element can be maintained for the adjustment of the reference voltage, as they guarantee a safe direction
result.
Nevertheless, the following contains some setting examples for special applications (Table 2-8). The following
must be observed: With the phase directional elements, the reference voltage (fault-free voltage) for phase-
ground- faults is vertical on the short-circuit voltage. For this reason, the resulting setting of the angle of rota-
tion is (see also Section 2.3.8 Determination of Direction):
Ref. volt. angle of rotation = 90 - φsc Phase directional element (phase-
to-ground fault)
With the ground directional element, the reference voltage is the short-circuit voltage itself. The resulting
setting of the angle of rotation is then:
Ref. volt. angle of rotation = -φsc Directional ground element (phase-
to-ground fault).
It should also be noted for phase directional elements that with phase-to-phase faults, the reference voltage is
rotated between 0° (remote fault) and 30° (close-up fault) depending on the collapse of the faulty voltage.
This can be taken into account with a mean value of 15°:
Ref. volt. angle of rotation = 90 - φsc -15° Phase directional element (phase-
to-phase fault)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Table 2-8 Setting Examples
Application φsc Setting Setting

typical Directional Phase Directional Ground
Element Element
1519 ROTATION 1619 ROTATION
ANGLE ANGLE
60° Range 30°...0° –60°
→ 15°
30° Range 60°...30° –30°

→ 45°
30° Range 60°...30° –30°

→ 45°
1) Power flow direction

2) With the assumption that these are cable lines
Directional Orientation
Directional overcurrent protection normally operates in the direction of the protected object (line, trans-
former, etc.). If the protection device is properly connected in accordance with one of the circuit diagrams in
Appendix C Connection Examples, this is the “forward” direction.
The directional orientation Forward or Reverse can be set separately for each element. Moreover, each
element can also be operated Non-Directional.
• Address 1526 67-3 Direction
• Address 1525 67-TOC Direct.
• Address 1626 67N-3 Direction
• Address 1625 67N-TOC Direct.
NOTE
i If the threshold value of the 67-1 or 67N-1 element is exceeded, the phase-specific directional indications
“forward” or “reverse” are output (indications 2628 to 2636), independent of whether the fault direction is
the same as the configured direction.
These indications are used for directional comparison protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Quantity Selection for Direction Determination for the Directional Ground Element
Parameter 1617 67N POLARIZAT.can be set to specify whether direction determination is accomplished
from the zero sequence quantities or ground quantities (with VN and IN) or from the negative sequence
quantities (with V2 and I2) in the ground directional element. The first option is the preferential setting;
the latter is to be selected in case of danger that the zero voltage be too small due to unfavourable zero impe-
dance or that a parallel line influences the zero system.
Directional High-set Elements 67-2, 67-3 (phases)

The high-current element 67-2 PICKUP or 67-3 PICKUP is set at address 1502 or 1528. The associated
delay 67-2 DELAY or 67-3 DELAY at 1503 or 1529. For setting, the same considerations apply as did for the
non-directional time overcurrent protection in Section 2.2.11 Setting Notes.
The selected time is only an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can be set to ∞. After pickup the element will then not trip. Pickup, however, will be
signaled. If the 67-2 element or 67–3 element is not required at all, the pickup value 67-2 PICKUP or 67-3
PICKUP should be set to ∞. For this setting, there is neither a pickup signal generated nor a trip.
Directional High-set Elements 67-2, 67-3 (ground)

The high-current element 67N-2 PICKUP or 67N-3 PICKUP is set at address 1602 or 1628. The associated
delay 67N-2 DELAY or 67N-3 DELAY at 1603 or 1629. The same considerations apply for these settings as
for the phase currents.
dropout time). If the delay time is set to ∞, the element does not trip after the pickup, but the pickup condi-
tion is signaled. If the directional 67N-2 element or 67N-3 element is not required, set the pickup threshold
67N-2 PICKUP or 67N-3 PICKUP to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup indica-
tion.
Directional Overcurrent Element 67-1 (phases)

The pickup value of the 67-1 element (67-1 PICKUP) address1504 should be set above the maximum antici-
pated load current. Pickup due to overload should never occur since in this mode the device operates as fault
protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. For this reason, lines are
set to approx. 20% above the maximum expected (over)load and transformers and motors to approx. 40%.
7SJ66 may be used for the 67-1 element (for more information see margin heading "Inrush Restraint").
The delay for directional elements (address 1505 67-1 DELAY) is usually set shorter than the delay for
nondirectional elements (address 1205) since the non-directional elements overlap the directional elements
as backup protection. It should be based on the system coordination requirements for directional tripping.
For parallel transformers supplied from a single source (see "Applications"), the delay of element 67-1 DELAY
located on the load side of the transformers may be set to 0 without provoking negative impacts on selec-
tivity.
signaled. If the 67-1 element is not required at all, the pickup value 67-1 PICKUP should be set to ∞. This
setting prevents from tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
Directional Overcurrent Element 67N-1 (ground)

The pickup value of the 67N-1 overcurrent element should be set below the minimum anticipated ground
fault current.
the 7SJ66 may be used for the 67N-1 relay element (for more information see margin heading "Inrush
Restraint").
The delay is set at address 1605 67N-1 DELAY and should be based on system coordination requirements for
directional tripping. For ground currents in a grounded system a separate coordination chart with short time
delay is often used.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
signaled. If the 67N-1 element is not required at all, the pickup value 67N-1 PICKUP should be set to ∞. This
setting prevents from tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
Pickup Stabilization (67/67N Directional)

The pickups can also be stabilized via parameterizable dropout times under address 1518 67 T DROP-OUT or
1618 67N T DROP-OUT.
Directional Element 67-TOC with IEC or ANSI Curves (phases)

Having set address 115 67/67-TOC = TOC IEC or TOC ANSI when configuring the protection functions
(Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope), the parameters for the inverse time characteristics will also be available.
If the relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint function of
7SJ66 may be used for the 67-TOC relay element (for more information see margin heading "Inrush
Restraint").
current of about 1.1 times the setting value is present.
The current value is set in address 1507 67-TOC PICKUP. The setting is mainly determined by the maximum
operating current. Pickup due to overload should never occur, since the device in this operating mode oper-
ates as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection.
The corresponding element time multiplication factor for an IEC characteristic is set at address 1508 67 TIME
DIAL and in address 1509 67 TIME DIAL for an ANSI characteristic. It must be coordinated with the time
grading of the network.
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. After pickup the element will then not trip. Pickup, however, will be
signaled. If the 67-TOC element is not required at all, address 115 67/67-TOC should be set to Definite
Time during protective function configuration (see Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope).
If address 115 67/67-TOC = TOC IEC, you can specify the desired IEC–characteristic (Normal Inverse,
Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse) in address 1511 67- IEC CURVE. If address 115
67/67-TOC = TOC ANSI you can specify the desired ANSI–characteristic (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short
Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1512
67- ANSI CURVE.
Directional Element 67N-TOC with IEC or ANSI Curves (ground)

Having set address 116 67N/67N-TOC = TOC IEC when configuring the protection functions (Section
2.1.1 Functional Scope), the parameters for the inverse time characteristics will also be available. Specify in
address 1611 67N-TOC IEC the desired IEC characteristic (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely
Inv. or Long Inverse). If address 116 67N/67N-TOC was set to TOC ANSI, you can select the desired
ANSI characteristic (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv.,
Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1612 67N-TOC ANSI.
the 7SJ66 may be used for the 67N-TOC relay element (for more information see margin heading "Inrush
Restraint").
been included between the pickup value and the setting value 67N-TOC PICKUP. This means that a pickup
will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times the setting value is present. If Disk Emulation was selected at
address 1610 67N-TOC DropOut, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as for the existing
nondirectional time overcurrent protection described in Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N.
The current value is set at address 1607 67N-TOC PICKUP. The minimum appearing ground fault current is
most relevant for this setting.
The corresponding element time multiplication factor for an IEC characteristic is set at address 1608 67N-TOC
T-DIAL and in address 1609 67N-TOC T-DIAL for an ANSI characteristic. This has to be coordinated with
the system grading coordination chart for directional tripping. For ground currents with grounded network,
you can mostly set up a separate grading coordination chart with shorter delay times.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
signaled. If the 67N-TOC element is not required at all, address 116 67N/67N-TOC should be set to Defi-
nite Time during protection function configuration (see Section 2.1.1).
User-defined characteristic (Inverse Time Phases and ground)

If address 115 or 116 were set to User Defined PU or User def. Reset during configuration of the
userdefined characteristic option, a maximum of 20 value pairs (current and time) may be entered at address
1530 67 or 1630 M.of PU TD. This option allows point-by-point entry of any desired curve.
If address 115 or 116 were set to User def. Reset during configuration, additional value pairs (current
and reset time) may be entered in address 1531 MofPU Res T/Tp or 1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp to represent
the reset curve.
Entry of the value pair (current and time) is a multiple of the settings of the values of the addresses 1507 67-
TOC PICKUP or 1607 67N-TOC PICKUP and 1508 67 TIME DIAL or 1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL. Therefore,
it is recommended that parameter values are initially set to 1.00 for simplicity. Once the curve is entered, the
settings at addresses 1507 and 1607 or/and 1508 and 1608 may be modified later on if necessary.
The default setting of current values is ∞. They are, therefore, not enabled — and no pickup or tripping of
these protective functions will occur.
• The value pairs should be entered in increasing sequence. If desired, fewer than 20 pairs may be entered.
In most cases, about 10 pairs is sufficient to define the characteristic accurately. A value pair which will
not be used has to be made invalid entering ∞ for the threshold! The user must ensure the value pairs
produce a clear and constant characteristic.
The current values entered should be those from following Table, along with the matching times. Devi-
ating values MofPU (multiples of PU value) are rounded. This, however, will not be indicated.
Current flows less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to an extension of the tripping
time. The pickup curve (see Figure 2-18, right side) goes parallel to the current axis, up to the smallest
current point.
Current flows greater than the highest current value entered will not lead to a reduction of the tripping
time. The pickup characteristic (see Figure 2-18, right side) goes parallel to the current axis, beginning
with the greatest current point.
Table 2-9 Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User-defined Tripping Curves

1.00 1.50 2.00 3.50 5.00 6.50 8.00 15.00
1.06 1.56 2.25 3.75 5.25 6.75 9.00 16.00
1.13 1.63 2.50 4.00 5.50 7.00 10.00 17.00
1.19 1.69 2.75 4.25 5.75 7.25 11.00 18.00
1.25 1.75 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 12.00 19.00
1.31 1.81 3.25 4.75 6.25 7.75 13.00 20.00
1.38 1.88 14.00
1.44 1.94
The value pairs are entered at address 1531 MofPU Res T/Tp to recreate the reset curve. The following
must be observed:
• The current values entered should be those from Table 2-9, along with the matching times. Deviating
values Ι/Ιp are rounded. This, however, will not be indicated.
Current flows greater than the highest current value entered will not lead to a prolongation of the reset
time. The reset curve (see Figure 2-18, left side) is parallel to the current axis, beginning with the largest
current point.
Current flows which are less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to a reduction of the
reset time. The reset curve (see Figure 2-18, left side) is parallel to the current axis, beginning with the
smallest current point.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Table 2-10 Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User-defined Dropout Curves
MofPU = 1 to 0.86 MofPU = 0.84 to 0.67 MofPU = 0.66 to 0.38 MofPU = 0.34 to 0.00
1.00 0.93 0.84 0.75 0.66 0.53 0.34 0.16
0.99 0.92 0.83 0.73 0.64 0.50 0.31 0.13
0.98 0.91 0.81 0.72 0.63 0.47 0.28 0.09
0.97 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.61 0.44 0.25 0.06
0.96 0.89 0.78 0.69 0.59 0.41 0.22 0.03
0.95 0.88 0.77 0.67 0.56 0.38 0.19 0.00
0.94 0.86
[anwenderkennl-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-34 Using a User-defined Curve
Inrush Restraint
When applying the protection device to transformers where high inrush currents are to be expected, the
7SJ66 can make use of an inrush restraint function for the directional overcurrent elements 67-1, 67-TOC,
67N-1, and 67N-TOC as well as the non-directional overcurrent elements. The inrush restraint option is
enabled or disabled in 2201 INRUSH REST. (in the settings option non-directional time overcurrent protec-
tion). The characteristic values of the inrush restraint are already listed in the section discussing the non-direc-
tional time overcurrent (Section 2.2.11 Setting Notes).
Manual Close Mode (phases, ground)

When a circuit breaker is closed onto a faulted line, a high speed trip by the circuit breaker is often desired. For
overcurrent or high-set element the delay may be bypassed via a Manual Close pulse, thus resulting in instan-
taneous tripping. This pulse is prolonged by at least 300 ms. To enable the device to react properly on occur-
rence of a fault in the phase elements after manual close, address 1513 MANUAL CLOSE has to be set accord-
ingly. Accordingly, address 1613 MANUAL CLOSE is considered for the ground path address. Thus, the user
determines for both elements, the phase and the ground element, what pickup value is active with what delay
when the circuit breaker is closed manually.
External Control Switch

If the manual close signal is not from the 7SJ66 device, that is, neither sent via the built-in operator interface
nor via a serial port but directly from a control acknowledgment switch, this signal must be passed to a 7SJ66
binary input, and configured accordingly (>Manual Close), so that the element selected for MANUAL
CLOSE can become effective. Inactive means that all elements (phase and ground) operate with the config-
ured trip times even with manual close.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Internal Control Function

The manual closing information must be allocated via CFC (interlocking task-level) using the CMD_Information
block, if the internal control function is used.
[handein-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-35 Example for the generation of a manual close signal using the internal control function
NOTE
i For an interaction between the automatic reclosing function (79 AR) and the control function, an extended
CFC logic is necessary. See margin heading “Close command: Directly or via Control” in the Setting Notes of
the automatic reclosing function (Section 2.17.6 Setting Notes).
Interaction with Automatic Reclosure Function (phases)

When reclosing follows, high-speed protection against faults with 67-2 or 67-3 is usually desired. If the fault
still exists after reclosing, the 67-1 or 67-TOC element will be initiated with graded tripping times, that is, the
67-2 or 67-3 element will be blocked. You can use parameter 1514 67-2 active or 1532 67-3 active to
define whether the 67-2 or 67-3 element is influenced by a release signal of the internal or an external auto-
matic reclosing device or not. The setting with 79 active means that the 67-2 or 67-3 element is only
released if the automatic reclosing function is not blocked. If this is not desired, the setting always is selected
so that the 67-2 or 67-3 element is always active as configured.
each overcurrent element whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously, unaffected by the
AR with time delay (see Section 2.17 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
Interaction with Automatic Reclosing Function (ground)

If reclosing follows, high-speed and simultaneous closing in the event of a fault with 67N-2 is usually desired.
If the fault still exists after reclosing, the 67N-1 or 67N-TOC element is initiated with graded tripping times,
that is, the 67N-2 or 67N-3 element is blocked. For this purpose, parameter 1614 67N-2 active or 1632
67N-3 active is used to determine whether the 67N-2 or 67N-3 element is influenced by the release signal
of the internal or an external automatic reclosing device or not. The setting with 79 active means that the
67N- 2 or 67N-3 element is only released if the automatic reclosing function is not blocked. If this is not
desired, the setting always is selected so that the 67N-2 or 67N-3 element is always active as configured.
The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ66 also provides the option to individually determine for
each overcurrent element whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously, unaffected by the
AR with time delay (see Section 2.17 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
2.3.11 Settings
1501 FCT 67/67-TOC OFF OFF 67, 67-TOC Phase Time
ON Overcurrent
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1505 67-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-1Time Delay
1507 67-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 67-TOC Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1508 67 TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-TOC Time Dial
1509 67 TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67-TOC Time Dial
1510 67-TOC Drop-out Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
Disk Emulation
1511 67- IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
1512 67- ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
1513A MANUAL CLOSE 67-3 instant. 67-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
67-2 instant.
67-1 instant.
67-TOC instant.
Inactive
1514A 67-2 active with 79 active always 67-2 active
always
1519A ROTATION ANGLE -180 .. 180 ° 45 ° Rotation Angle of Refer-
ence Voltage
1520A 67-2 MEASUREM. Fundamental Fundamental 67-2 measurement of
True RMS
True RMS
1522A 67-TOC MEASUR. Fundamental Fundamental 67-TOC measurement of
True RMS
1523 67-2 Direction Forward Forward 67-2 Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
Reverse
Non-Directional
1525 67-TOC Direct. Forward Forward 67-TOC Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
Reverse
Non-Directional

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

True RMS
1528 67-3 PICKUP 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 67-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞A
1530 67 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞ 67
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1531 MofPU Res T/Tp 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1532A 67-3 active always always 67-3 active
with 79 active
1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC OFF OFF 67N, 67N-TOC Ground
ON Time Overcurrent
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1607 67N-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A 67N-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 67N-TOC Time Dial
1609 67N-TOC T-DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67N-TOC Time Dial
1610 67N-TOC DropOut Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
Disk Emulation
1611 67N-TOC IEC Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
1612 67N-TOC ANSI Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
1613A MANUAL CLOSE 67N-3 instant. 67N-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
67N-2 instant.
67N-1 instant.
67N-TOC instant
Inactive
1614A 67N-2 active always always 67N-2 active
with 79 active
1617 67N POLARIZAT. with VN and IN with VN and IN Ground Polarization
with V2 and I2
1618A 67N T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 67N Drop-Out Time Delay
1619A ROTATION ANGLE -180 .. 180 ° -45 ° Rotation Angle of Refer-
ence Voltage

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

1620A 67N-2 MEASUREM. Fundamental Fundamental 67N-2 measurement of
True RMS
True RMS
1622A 67N-TOC MEASUR. Fundamental Fundamental 67N-TOC measurement of
True RMS
1623 67N-2 Direction Forward Forward 67N-2 Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
Reverse
Non-Directional
1625 67N-TOC Direct. Forward Forward 67N-TOC Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
Reverse
Non-Directional
True RMS
1628 67N-3 PICKUP 0.50 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 67N-3 Pickup
1630 M.of PU TD 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞ Multiples of PU Time-Dial
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞ 67N TOC
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1632A 67N-3 active always always 67N-3 active
with 79 active

Informa-
tion
2604 >BLK 67/67-TOC SP >BLOCK 67/67-TOC
2605 67N-3 BLOCKED OUT 67N-3 is BLOCKED
2606 67-3 BLOCKED OUT 67-3 is BLOCKED
2614 >BLK 67N/67NTOC SP >BLOCK 67N/67N-TOC
2615 >BLOCK 67-2 SP >BLOCK 67-2
2617 >BLOCK 67-3 SP >BLOCK 67-3
2621 >BLOCK 67-1 SP >BLOCK 67-1
2622 >BLOCK 67-TOC SP >BLOCK 67-TOC
2624 >BLOCK 67N-TOC SP >BLOCK 67N-TOC

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
2628 Phase A forward OUT Phase A forward
2629 Phase B forward OUT Phase B forward
2630 Phase C forward OUT Phase C forward
2632 Phase A reverse OUT Phase A reverse
2633 Phase B reverse OUT Phase B reverse
2634 Phase C reverse OUT Phase C reverse
2635 Ground forward OUT Ground forward
2636 Ground reverse OUT Ground reverse
2647 67-2 Time Out OUT 67-2 Time Out
2648 67N-2 Time Out OUT 67N-2 Time Out
2649 67-2 TRIP OUT 67-2 TRIP
2651 67/67-TOC OFF OUT 67/67-TOC switched OFF
2652 67 BLOCKED OUT 67/67-TOC is BLOCKED
2653 67 ACTIVE OUT 67/67-TOC is ACTIVE
2656 67N OFF OUT 67N/67N-TOC switched OFF
2657 67N BLOCKED OUT 67N/67N-TOC is BLOCKED
2658 67N ACTIVE OUT 67N/67N-TOC is ACTIVE
2665 67-1 TRIP OUT 67-1 TRIP
2669 67-TOC BLOCKED OUT 67-TOC is BLOCKED
2670 67-TOC pickedup OUT 67-TOC picked up
2674 67-TOC Time Out OUT 67-TOC Time Out
2675 67-TOC TRIP OUT 67-TOC TRIP
2676 67-TOC DiskPU OUT 67-TOC disk emulation is ACTIVE
2677 67N-TOC BLOCKED OUT 67N-TOC is BLOCKED
2678 67-3 TRIP OUT 67-3 TRIP
2684 67N-TOCPickedup OUT 67N-TOC picked up
2685 67N-TOC TimeOut OUT 67N-TOC Time Out
2686 67N-TOC TRIP OUT 67N-TOC TRIP
2687 67N-TOC Disk PU OUT 67N-TOC disk emulation is ACTIVE
2691 67/67N pickedup OUT 67/67N picked up
2692 67 A picked up OUT 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
2693 67 B picked up OUT 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
2694 67 C picked up OUT 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
2695 67N picked up OUT 67N/67N-TOC picked up
2696 67/67N TRIP OUT 67/67N TRIP
14513 >INSTANT. 67-3 SP >67-3 instantaneously
14514 67-3 INSTANT. OUT 67-3 instantaneously
14515 >INSTANT. 67N-3 SP >67N-3 instantaneously
14516 67N-3 INSTANT. OUT 67N-3 instantaneously

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup

With the cold load pickup function, pickup and delay settings of directional and non-directional time overcur-
rent protection can be changed over dynamically.
Applications
• It may be necessary to dynamically increase the pickup values if, during starting and for a short time
thereafter, certain elements of the system have an increased power consumption after a long period of
zero voltage (e.g. air-conditioning systems, heating installations, motors). Thus a raise of pickup thresh-
olds can be avoided by taking into consideration such starting conditions.
• As a further option, the pickup thresholds may be modified by an automatic reclosure function in accord-
ance with its ready or not ready state.
NOTE
i Dynamic cold load pickup must not be confused with the changeover option of the 4 setting groups (A to
D). It is an additional feature.
It is possible to change pickup thresholds and delay times.
2.4.1 Description
Effect
There are two methods by which the device can determine if the protected equipment is de-energized:
• Via binary inputs, the device is informed of the position of the circuit breaker (address 1702 Start
Condition = Breaker Contact).
• As a criterion a set current threshold is undershot (address 1702 Start Condition = No Current).
If the device determines that the protected equipment is de-energized via one of the above methods, a time,
CB Open Time, is started and after its expiration the increased thresholds take effect.
In addition, switching between parameters can be triggered by two other events:
• By signal "79M Auto Reclosing ready" of the internal automatic reclosure function (address 1702 Start
Condition = 79 ready). Thus the protection thresholds and the tripping times can be changed if auto-
matic reclosure is ready for reclosing (see also Section 2.17 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
• Irrespective of the setting of parameter 1702 Start Condition, the release of cold load pickup may
always be selected via the binary input >ACTIVATE CLP.
Figure 2-37 shows the logic diagram for dynamic cold load pickup function.
If it is detected via the auxiliary contact or the current criterion that the system is de-energized, i.e. the circuit
breaker is open, the CB Open Time is started. As soon as it has elapsed, the greater thresholds are enabled.
When the protected equipment is re-energized (the device receives this information via the binary inputs or
when threshold BkrClosed I MIN is exceeded), a second time delay referred to as the Active Time is
initiated. Once it elapses, the pickup values of the relay elements return to their normal settings. This time
may be reduced when current values fall below all normal pickup values for a set Stop Time after startup,
i.e. after the circuit breaker has been closed. The starting condition of the fast reset time is made up of an OR-
combination of the configured dropout conditions of all directional and non-directional overcurrent elements.
When Stop Time is set to ∞ or when binary input >BLK CLP stpTim is active, no comparison is made with
the "normal" thresholds. The function is inactive and the fast reset time, if applied, is reset.
If overcurrent elements are picked up while time Active Time is running, the fault generally prevails until
pickup drops out, using the dynamic settings. Only then the parameters are set back to "normal".
If the dynamic setting values were activated via the binary input >ACTIVATE CLP or the signal "79M Auto
Reclosing ready" and this cause drops out, the "normal" settings are restored immediately, even if a pickup is
the result.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
If the binary input >BLOCK CLP is enabled, all triggered timers are reset and, as a consequence, all "normal"
settings are immediately restored. If blocking occurs during an on-going fault with dynamic cold load pickup
functions enabled, the timers of all overcurrent relay elements are stopped and may then be restarted based
on their "normal" duration.
During power up of the protective relay with an open circuit breaker, the time delay CB Open Time is
started, and is processed using the "normal" settings. Therefore, when the circuit breaker is closed, the
"normal" settings are effective.
Figure 2-36 illustrates the timing sequence. Figure 2-37 shows the logic diagram of the dynamic cold load
pickup feature.
[zeitablaeufe-der-dynamischen-parameterumschaltung-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-36 Timing Charts of the Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lo_Dynamic Cold Load Pickup, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-37 Logic Diagram of the Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function (50c, 50Nc, 51c, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)
2.4.2 Setting Notes
General
The dynamic cold load pickup function can only be enabled if address 117 Coldload Pickup was set to
Enabled during configuration of the protection functions. If not required, this function is set to Disabled.
The function can be turned ON or OFF under address 1701 Coldload Pickup.
Depending on the condition that should initiate the cold load pickup function address 1702 Start Condi-
tion is set to either No Current, Breaker Contact or to 79 ready. Naturally, the option Breaker
Contact can only be selected if the device receives information regarding the switching state of the circuit

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
breaker via at least one binary input. The option 79 ready modifies dynamically the pickup thresholds of the
directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection when the automatic reclosing function is ready. To
initiate the cold load pickup, the automatic reclosing function provides the internal signal "79M Auto
Reclosing ready". It is always active when the automatic reclosing function is available, activated, unblocked,
and ready for a further cycle (see also margin heading "Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent
Protection Elements via Cold Load Pickup" in Section 2.17.6 Setting Notes).
Time Delays
There are no specific procedures on how to set the time delays at addresses 1703 CB Open Time, 1704
Active Time and 1705 Stop Time. These time delays must be based on the specific loading characteristics
of the equipment being protected, and should be set to allow for brief overloads associated with dynamic cold
load conditions.
Non-Directional 50/51 Elements (phases)

The dynamic pickup values and tripping times associated with the time overcurrent protection functions are
set at address block 18 for the phase currents:
The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the high-set elements are set at addresses 1801 50c-2 PICKUP or
1808 50c-3 PICKUP and 1802 50c-2 DELAY or 1809 50c-3 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup and
delay settings for the 67N-1 element are set at addresses 1803 50c-1 PICKUP and 1804 50c-1 DELAY
respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves or user-defined curves), and time dial (for ANSI
curves) settings for the 67N-TOC element are set at addresses 1805 51c PICKUP, 1806 51c TIME DIAL
and 1807 51c TIME DIAL respectively.
Non-Directional 50N/51N Elements (ground)

The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with non-directional time overcurrent ground protec-
tion are set at address block 19:
The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the high-set elements are set at addresses 1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP
or 1908 50Nc-3 PICKUP and 1902 50Nc-2 DELAY or 1909 50Nc-3 DELAY respectively; the dynamic
pickup and delay settings for the 67N-1 element are set at addresses 1903 50Nc-1 PICKUP and 1904
50Nc-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves or user-defined curves), and time
dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 67N-TOC element are set at addresses 1905 51Nc PICKUP, 1906 51Nc
T-DIAL and 1907 51Nc T-DIAL respectively.
Directional 67/67–TOC Elements (phases)

The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with directional overcurrent phase protection are set at
address block 20
Addresses 2001 67c-2 PICKUP or 2008 67c-3 PICKUP and 2002 67c-2 DELAY or 2009 67c-3 DELAY
define the dynamic parameters for the high-current elements, 2003 67c-1 PICKUP and 2004 67c-1
DELAY for the directional definite time overcurrent element and 2005 67c-TOC PICKUP in combination with
2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL (for IEC characteristics or user-defined characteristics) or 2007 67c-TOC T-DIAL
(for ANSI characteristics) for the directional inverse time overcurrent protection element.
Directional 67/67N Elements (ground)

The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with directional overcurrent ground protection are set
at address block 21:
Addresses 2101 67Nc-2 PICKUP or 2108 67Nc-3 PICKUP and 2102 67Nc-2 DELAY or 2109 67Nc-3
DELAY define the dynamic parameters for the high-current elements, 2103 67Nc-1 PICKUP and 2104
67Nc-1 DELAY for the directional definite time overcurrent element and 2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP in combi-
nation with 2106 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL (for IEC characteristics or user-defined characteristics) or 2107 67Nc-
TOC T-DIAL (for ANSI characteristics) for the directional inverse time overcurrent protection element.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.4.3 Settings
1701 COLDLOAD PICKUP OFF OFF Cold-Load-Pickup Function
ON
1702 Start Condition No Current No Current Start Condition
Breaker Contact
79 ready
1703 CB Open Time 0 .. 21600 sec 3600 sec Circuit Breaker OPEN Time
1704 Active Time 1 .. 21600 sec 3600 sec Active Time
1705 Stop Time 1 .. 600 sec; ∞ 600 sec Stop Time
1801 50c-2 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A 50c-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 50.00 A
1802 50c-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50c-2 Time Delay
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1805 51c PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.50 A 51c Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 7.50 A
1806 51c TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51c Time dial
1807 51c TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51c Time dial
1808 50c-3 PICKUP 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 50c-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞A
1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 7.00 A 50Nc-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 35.00 A
1902 50Nc-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50Nc-2 Time Delay
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 7.50 A
1905 51Nc PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51Nc Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1906 51Nc T-DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51Nc Time Dial
1907 51Nc T-DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51Nc Time Dial
1908 50Nc-3 PICKUP 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 50Nc-3 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 50.00 A
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
2005 67c-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.50 A 67c Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 7.50 A
2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67c Time Dial
2007 67c-TOC T-DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67c Time Dial

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

2008 67c-3 PICKUP 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 67c-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞A
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 35.00 A
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 7.50 A
2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 67Nc-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
2106 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2107 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2108 67Nc-3 PICKUP 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 67Nc-3 Pickup

Informa-
tion
1730 >BLOCK CLP SP >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup
1731 >BLK CLP stpTim SP >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup stop timer
1732 >ACTIVATE CLP SP >ACTIVATE Cold-Load-Pickup
1994 CLP OFF OUT Cold-Load-Pickup switched OFF
1995 CLP BLOCKED OUT Cold-Load-Pickup is BLOCKED
1996 CLP running OUT Cold-Load-Pickup is RUNNING
1997 Dyn set. ACTIVE OUT Dynamic settings are ACTIVE

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection

The single-phase overcurrent protection evaluates the current that is measured by the sensitive ΙNS- or the
normal ΙN input. Which input is used depends on the device version according to the order number.
Applications
• Plain ground fault protection at a power transformer
• Sensitive tank leakage protection.
2.5.1 Functional Description
The single-phase definite time overcurrent ground protection is illustrated by the tripping characteristic as
shown in Figure 2-38. The current to be measured is filtered by numerical algorithms. Because of the high
sensitivity a particularly narrow band filter is used. The current pickup thresholds and tripping times can be
set. The detected current is compared to the pickup value 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP or 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP and
reported if this is violated. After expiry of the respective delay time 50 1Ph-1 DELAY or 50 1Ph-2 DELAY,
the trip command is issued. The two elements together form a two-stage protection. The dropout value is
approximately 95% of the pickup value for currents greater than I > 0.3 · INom.
The current filter is bypassed if currents are extremely high in order to achieve a short tripping time. This
occurs automatically as soon as the instantaneous value of the current exceeds the set value of the 50 1Ph-2
PICKUP element by at least factor 2 · √2.
[lo_2stage Characteristic OCP 1phase, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-38 Two-stage Characteristic of the Single-phase Time-overcurrent Protection
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the single-phase overcurrent protection function.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[logikdia-umz-1ph-strom-141103-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-39 Logic Diagram of the Single-phase Time Overcurrent ProtectionS
2.5.2 High-impedance Ground Fault Unit Protection
Application Examples
The high impedance protection concept is based on measuring the voltage across the paralleled CT's to a
common high-resistive resistor.
The CTs must be of the same design and feature at least a separate core for high-impedance protection. In
particular, they must have the same transformer ratios and approximately identical knee-point voltage.
With 7SJ66, the high-impedance principle is particularly well suited for detecting ground faults in grounded
networks at transformers, generators, motors and shunt reactors.
Figure 2-40 shows an application example for a grounded transformer winding or a grounded motor/gener-
ator. The right-hand example depicts an ungrounded transformer winding or an ungrounded motor/generator
where the grounding of the system is assumed somewhere else.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[ueb-einph-hochimpedanz-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-40 Ground fault protection according to the high-impedance principle
Function of the High-Impedance Principle

The high-impedance principle is explained on the basis of a grounded transformer winding.
No zero sequence current will flow during normal operation, i.e. the neutral point current is ΙSP = 0 and the
phase currents are 3 Ι0 = ΙA + ΙB + ΙC = 0.
In case of an external ground fault (left in Figure 2-41), whose fault current is supplied via the grounded
neutral point, the same current flows through the transformer neutral point and the phases. The corre-
sponding secondary currents (all current transformers have the same transformation ratio) compensate each
other; they are connected in series. Across resistor R only a small voltage is generated. It originates from the
inner resistance of the transformers and the connecting cables of the transformers. Even if any current trans-
former experiences a partial saturation, it will become low-ohmic for the period of saturation and creates a
low-ohmic shunt to the high-ohmic resistor R. Thus, the high resistance of the resistor also has a stabilizing
effect (the so-called resistance stabilization).
[ueb-einph-hochimpedanz2-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-41 Principle of ground fault protection according to the high-impedance principle
When a ground fault occurs in the protected zone Figure 2-41 right), there is always a neutral point current ΙSP.
The grounding conditions in the rest of the network determine how strong a zero sequence current from the
system is. A secondary current which is equal to the total fault current tries to pass through the resistor R.
Since the latter is high-resistive, a high voltage emerges immediately. Therefore, the current transformers get
saturated. The RMS voltage across the resistor approximately corresponds to the knee-point voltage of the
current transformers.
Resistance R is sized such that, even with the very lowest ground fault current to be detected, it generates a
secondary voltage, which is equal to half the saturation voltage of current transformers (see also notes on
"Dimensioning" in Subsection 2.5.4 Setting Notes).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
High-impedance Protection with the 7SJ66

With the 7SJ66 the sensitive measurement input INs or alternatively the insensitive measurement input ΙN is
used for high-impedance protection. As this is a current input, the protection detects current through the
resistor instead of the voltage across the resistor R.
Figure 2-42 illustrates the connection scheme. The protection device is connected in series to resistor R and
measures its current.
Varistor B limits the voltage when internal faults occur. High voltage peaks emerging with transformer satura-
tion are cut by the varistor. At the same time, voltage is smoothed without reduction of the mean value.
[dw_GFDP_High-Impedance Principle, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-42 Connection Diagram of the Ground Fault Differential Protection according to the High-impe-
dance Principle
For protection against overvoltages it is also important that the device is directly connected to the grounded
side of the current transformers so that the high voltage at the resistor can be kept away from the device.
For generators, motors and shunt reactors, the high-impedance differential protection can be used analo-
gously. All current transformers at the overvoltage side, the undervoltage side and the current transformer at
the neutral point have to be connected in parallel when using auto-transformers.
In principle, this procedure can be applied to every protected object. When applied as busbar protection, for
example, the device is connected to the parallel connection of all feeder current transformers via the resistor.
2.5.3 Tank Leakage Protection
Application Example
The tank leakage protection has the task to detect ground leakage — even high-ohmic — between a phase
and the frame of a power transformer. The tank must be isolated from ground. A conductor links the tank to
ground, and the current through this conductor is fed to a current input of the relay. When tank leakage
occurs, a fault current (tank leakage current) will flow through the grounding conductor to ground. This tank
leakage current is detected by the single-phase overcurrent protection as an overcurrent; an instantaneous or
delayed trip command is issued in order to disconnect all sides of the transformer.
A high-sensitivity single-phase current input is used for tank leakage protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[sj6x-ueb-einph-kesselschut-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-43 Principle of tank-leakage protection
2.5.4 Setting Notes
General
Single-phase time overcurrent protection can be set ON or OFF at address 2701 50 1Ph.
The settings are based on the particular application.
The setting ranges depend on whether the current measuring input is a sensitive or a normal input trans-
former (see also “Ordering Information” in the Appendix).
In case of a normal input transformer, set the pickup value for 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP in address 2702, the
pickup value for 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP in address 2705. If only one element is required, set the one not
required to ∞.
In case of a sensitive input transformer, set the pickup value for 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP in address 2703, the
pickup value for 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP in address 2706. If only one element is required, set the one not
required to ∞.
If you need a tripping time delay for the 50-2 elements, set it in address 2704 50 1Ph-2 DELAY, for the 50-1
element in address 2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY. With setting 0 s no delay takes place.
The selected times are additional time delays and do not include the operating time (measuring time, etc.) of
the elements. The delay can also be set to ∞; the corresponding element will then not trip after pickup, but
the pickup is reported.
Special notes are given in the following for the use as high-impedance unit protection and tank leakage
protection.
Application as High-impedance Protection

The application as high-impedance protection requires that neutral point current detection is possible in the
system in addition to phase current detection (see example in Figure 2-42). Furthermore, a sensitive input
transformer must be available at device input ΙN/ΙNS. In this case, only the pickup value for single-phase over-
current protection is set at the 7SJ66 device for the current at input ΙN/ΙNS.
The entire function of high-impedance protection is, however, dependent on the interaction of current trans-
former characteristics, external resistor R and voltage across R. The following section gives information on this
topic.
Current Transformer Data for High-impedance Protection

All current transformers must have an identical transformation ratio and nearly equal knee-point voltage. This
is usually the case if they are of equal design and identical rated data. The knee-point voltage can be approxi-
mately calculated from the rated data of a CT as follows:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[fo_ueb-einph-saetigungsspannung, 1, en_US]
VKPV Knee-point voltage

RI Internal burden of the CT
PNom Nominal power of the CT
INom Secondary nominal current of CT
ALF Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT
The nominal current, nominal power and accuracy limit factor are normally stated on the rating plate of the
current transformer, e.g.
Current transformer 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA
That means
ΙNom = 5 A (from 800/5)
ALF = 10 (from 5P10)
PNom = 30 VA
The internal burden is often stated in the test report of the current transformer. If not, it can be derived from a
DC measurement on the secondary winding.
Calculation Example:
CT 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 0.3 Ω
[fo_ueb-einph-saettigungssp-beisp1, 1, en_US]
or
CT 800/1; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 5 Ω
[fo_ueb-einph-saettigungssp-beisp2, 1, en_US]
Besides the CT data, the resistance of the longest connection lead between the CTs and the 7SJ66 device must
be known.
Stability with High-impedance Protection

The stability condition is based on the following simplified assumption: If there is an external fault, one of the
current transformers gets totally saturated. The other ones will continue transmitting their (partial) currents.
In theory, this is the most unfavorable case. Since, in practice, it is also the saturated transformer which
supplies current, an automatic safety margin is guaranteed.
Figure 2-44 shows a simplified equivalent circuit. CT1 and CT2 are assumed as ideal transformers with their
inner resistances Ri1 and Ri2. Ra are the resistances of the connecting cables between current transformers and
resistor R. They are multiplied by 2 as they have a forward and a return line. Ra2 is the resistance of the longest
connecting cable.
CT1 transmits current Ι1. CT2 shall be saturated. Because of saturation the transformer represents a low-resis-
tance shunt which is illustrated by a dashed short-circuit line.
R >> (2Ra2 + Ri2) is a further prerequisite..

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[ueb-einph-anordnung-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-44 Simplified equivalent circuit of a circulating current system for high-impedance protection
The voltage across R is then

VR = Ι1 · ( 2Ra2 + Ri2 )
It is assumed that the pickup value of the 7SJ66 corresponds to half the knee-point voltage of the current
transformers. In the balanced case results
VR = VKPV / 2
This results in a stability limit ΙSL, i.e. the maximum through-fault current below which the scheme remains
stable:
[fo_ueb-einph-stabilitaetslimit, 1, en_US]
For the 5 A CT as above with VKPV = 75 V and Ri = 0.3 Ω
longest CT connection lead 22 m (24.06 yd) with 4 mm2 cross-section, this corresponds to Ra = 0.1 Ω
[fo_ueb-einph-stabilitaetslimit-5a, 1, en_US]
that is 15 × rated current or 12 kA primary.

For the 1 A CT as above with VKPV = 350 V and Ri = 5 Ω
longest CT connection lead 107 m (117.02 yd) with 2.5 mm2 cross-section, this corresponds to Ra = 0.75 Ω
[fo_ueb-einph-stabilitaetslimit-1a, 1, en_US]
that is 27 × rated current or 21.6 kA primary.
Sensitivity with High-impedance Protection

The voltage present at the CT set is forwarded to the protective relay across a series resistor R as proportional
current for evaluation. The following considerations are relevant for dimensioning the resistor:
As already mentioned, it is desired that the high-impedance protection should pick up at half the knee-point
voltage of the CT's. The resistor R can calculated on this basis.
Since the device measures the current flowing through the resistor, resistor and measuring input of the device
must be connected in series. Since, furthermore, the resistance shall be high-resistance (condition: R >> 2Ra2 +
Ri2, as mentioned above), the inherent resistance of the measuring input can be neglected. The resistance is
then calculated from the pickup current Ιpu and half the knee-point voltage:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[fo_ueb-einph-widerstand, 1, en_US]
For the 5 A CT as above
desired pickup value Ιpu = 0.1 A (equivalent to 16 A primary)
[fo_ueb-einph-widerstand-5a, 1, en_US]
For the 1 A CT as above

desired pickup valueΙpu = 0.05 A (equivalent to 40 A primary)
[fo_ueb-einph-widerstand-1a, 1, en_US]
Series resistor R must be rated for a minimum permanent load Ppermanent:
[fo_hochimppcon_5a, 1, en_US]
[fo_hochimppcon_1a, 1, en_US]
Furthermore, series resistor R must be rated for a fault current applying for approx. 0.5 s. This time is usually
sufficient for the backup protection to clear the fault.
The thermal load of the series resistor depends on the voltage Vrms,stab applying during an internal fault. It is
calculated according to the following formulas:
[fo_hochimpvrmsstab_5a, 1, en_US]
[fo_hochimpvrmsstab_1a, 1, en_US]
where Ik,max,int corresponds to the maximum fault current during an internal fault.
For the 5 A current transformer 800/5 with 40 kA primary, Ιk,max,int equals 250 A secondary.
For the 1 A current transformer 800/1 with 40 kA primary, Ιk,max,int equals 50 A secondary.
This yields a short-time load over 0.5 s for the series resistor of:
[fo_hochimpp_5a, 1, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[fo_hochimpp_1a, 1, en_US]
Please bear in mind that when choosing a higher pickup value Ιpu, the resistance must be decreased and, in
doing so, power loss will increase significantly.
The varistor B (see following figure) must be dimensioned such that it remains high-resistive until reaching
knee-point voltage, e.g.
approx. 100 V for 5 A CT,
approx. 500 V for 1 A CT.
[dw_GFDP_High-Impedance Principle, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-45 Connection Diagram of the Ground Fault Differential Protection according to the High-impe-
dance Principle
Even with an unfavorable external circuit, the maximum voltage peaks should not exceed 2 kV for safety
reasons
If performance makes it necessary to switch several varistors in parallel, preference should by given to types
with a flat characteristic to avoid asymmetrical loading. Therefore the following types from METROSIL is
recommended:
600A/S1/S256 (k = 450, β = 0.25)
600A/S1/S1088 (k = 900, β = 0.25)
The pickup value (0.1 A or 0.05 A in the example) is set in address 2706 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP in the device.
The 50-2 element is not required (address 2703 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP = ∞ ).
The trip command of the protection can be delayed via address 2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY. Normally, such
delay is set to 0.
If a higher number of CTs is connected in parallel, e.g. as busbar protection with several feeders, the magnet-
izing currents of the transformers connected in parallel cannot be neglected anymore. In this case, the
magnetizing currents at half the knee-point voltage (corresponds to the setting value) have to be summed up.
These magnetizing currents reduce the current through the resistor R. Therefore the actual pickup value will
be correspondingly higher.
Application as Tank Leakage Protection

The use as tank leakage protection requires that a sensitive input transformer is available at the device input
ΙN/ΙNS. In this case, only the pickup value for single phase overcurrent protection is set at the 7SJ66 device for
the current at input ΙN/ΙNS.
The tank leakage protection is a sensitive overcurrent protection which detects the leakage current between
the isolated transformer tank and ground. Its sensitivity is set in address 2706 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP. The 50-2
element is not required (address 2703 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP = ∞ ).
The trip command of the element can be delayed in address 2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY. It is normally set to 0.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
NOTE
i In the following settings, addresses 2703 and 2706 are valid for a highly sensitive current measuring input
independently of the nominal current.
2.5.5 Settings
2701 50 1Ph OFF OFF 50 1Ph
ON
2702 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 50 1Ph-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
2703 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP 0.003 .. 1.500 A; ∞ 0.300 A 50 1Ph-2 Pickup
2704 50 1Ph-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50 1Ph-2 Time Delay
2705 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 50 1Ph-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
2706 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP 0.003 .. 1.500 A; ∞ 0.100 A 50 1Ph-1 Pickup
2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50 1Ph-1 Time Delay

Informa-
tion
5951 >BLK 50 1Ph SP >BLOCK 50 1Ph
5952 >BLK 50 1Ph-1 SP >BLOCK 50 1Ph-1
5953 >BLK 50 1Ph-2 SP >BLOCK 50 1Ph-2
5961 50 1Ph OFF OUT 50 1Ph is OFF
5962 50 1Ph BLOCKED OUT 50 1Ph is BLOCKED
5963 50 1Ph ACTIVE OUT 50 1Ph is ACTIVE
5966 50 1Ph-1 BLK OUT 50 1Ph-1 is BLOCKED
5967 50 1Ph-2 BLK OUT 50 1Ph-2 is BLOCKED
5971 50 1Ph Pickup OUT 50 1Ph picked up
5972 50 1Ph TRIP OUT 50 1Ph TRIP
5974 50 1Ph-1 PU OUT 50 1Ph-1 picked up
5975 50 1Ph-1 TRIP OUT 50 1Ph-1 TRIP
5977 50 1Ph-2 PU OUT 50 1Ph-2 picked up
5979 50 1Ph-2 TRIP OUT 50 1Ph-2 TRIP
5980 50 1Ph I: VI 50 1Ph: I at pick up

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59

Voltage protection has the task to protect electrical equipment against undervoltage and overvoltage. Both
operational states are abnormal as overvoltage may cause for example insulation problems or undervoltage
may cause stability problems.
There are two elements each available for overvoltage protection and undervoltage protection.
Applications
• Abnormally high voltages often occur e.g. in low loaded, long distance transmission lines, in islanded
systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load rejection of a generator from the
system.
• The undervoltage protection function detects voltage collapses on transmission lines and electrical
machines and prevents inadmissible operating states and a possible loss of stability.
2.6.1 Measurement Principle
Connection/Measured Values
The voltages supplied to the device can be the three phase-to-ground voltages VA-N, VB-N, VC-N or two phase-to-
phase voltages (VA-B, VB-C) and the displacement voltage (ground voltage VN) or, in case of a single-phase
connection, any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. The device 7SJ66 provides the option to
detect three phase-to-ground voltages and additionally the ground voltage. With a multiple-phase connection,
the connection type was specified during configuration of parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph.
If there is only one voltage transformer, the device has to be informed of this fact during configuration via
address 240 VT Connect. 1ph (see also Section 2.27 Protection for Single-phase Voltage Transformer
Connection).
The following table indicates which voltages can be evaluated by the function. The settings for this are carried
out in the P.System Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes). Furthermore, it is indicated to which value
the threshold must be set. All voltages are fundamental frequency values.
Table 2-11 Voltage protection, selectable voltages
Function Connection, three-phase Selectable voltage Threshold to be set as

(address 213) (address 614 / 615)
Overvoltage Van, Vbn, Vcn Vphph (largest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn Vph-n (largest phase-to-groundvoltage) phase-to-ground voltage
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy V1 (positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage
Van,Vbn,Vcn,Vx V2 (negative sequence voltage) Negative sequence voltage
Vab, Vbc, VGnd Vphph (largest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Vab, Vbc, Vx V1 (positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage
V2 (negative sequence voltage) Negative sequence voltage
Undervoltage Van, Vbn, Vcn Vphph (smallest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn Vph-n (smallest phase-to-ground Phase-to-ground voltage
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy voltage)
Van,Vbn,Vcn,Vx V1 Positive (positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage·
√3
Vab, Vbc, VGnd Vphph (smallest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Vab, Vbc, Vx V1 (positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage·
√3

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Function Connection, three-phase Selectable voltage Threshold to be set as

(address 213) (address 614 / 615)
Function Connection, single-phase Selectable voltage Threshold to be set as
(address 240 )
Overvoltage Any phase-to-phase or phase- None Phase-to-phase or
Undervoltage to-ground voltage (see also (direct evaluation of the voltage Phase-to-ground-voltage
Section 2.27 Protection for connected in accordance with address (in accordance with
Single-phase Voltage Trans- 240 address240)
former Connection)
Current Criterion
Depending on the system, the primary voltage transformers are arranged either on the supply side or the load
side of the associated circuit breaker. These different arrangements lead to different behaviour of the voltage
protection function when a fault occurs. When a tripping command is issued and a circuit breaker is opened,
full voltage remains on the supply side while the load side voltage becomes zero. When voltage supply is
suppressed, undervoltage protection, for instance, will remain picked up. If pickup is to drop out, the current
can be used as an additional criterion for pickup of undervoltage protection (current supervision CS). Under-
voltage pickup can only be maintained when the undervoltage criterion satisfied and a settable minimum
current level (BkrClosed I MIN) are exceeded. Here, the largest of the three phase currents is used. When
the current decreases below the minimum current setting after the circuit breaker has opened, undervoltage
protection drops out.
NOTE
i If parameter CURRENT SUPERV. is set to disabled in address 5120, the device picks up immediately
without measurement voltage and the undervoltage protection function in pickup. Apply measuring
voltage or block the voltage protection to continue with configuration. Moreover you have the option of
setting a flag via device operation for blocking the voltage protection. This initiates the reset of the pickup
and device configuration can be resumed.
2.6.2 Overvoltage Protection 59
Function
The overvoltage protection has two elements. In case of a high overvoltage, tripping switch off is performed
with a short-time delay, whereas in case of less severe overvoltages, the tripping is performed with a longer
time delay. When one of the adjustable settings is exceeded, the 59 element picks up and trips after an adjust-
able time delay has elapsed. The time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of the overvoltage.
The dropout ratio for the two overvoltage elements (= Vdropout value/Vpickup value) can be set.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the overvoltage protection function.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj80-ueberspgs-schutz-20061219, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-46 Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection
2.6.3 Undervoltage Protection 27
Function
Undervoltage protection consists of two definite time elements (27-1 PICKUP and 27-2 PICKUP). There-
fore, tripping can be time-coordinated depending on how severe voltage collapses are. Voltage thresholds and
time delays can be set individually for both elements.
The dropout ratio for the two undervoltage elements (= Vdropout value/Vpickup value) can be set.
Figure 2-47 shows a typical voltage profile during a fault for source side connection of the voltage trans-
formers. Because full voltage is present after the circuit breaker has been opened, current supervision CS
described above is not necessary in this case. After the voltage has dropped below the pickup setting, tripping
is initiated after time delay 27-1 DELAY. As long as the voltage remains below the dropout setting, reclosing
is blocked. Only after the fault has been cleared, i.e. when the voltage increases above the dropout level, the
element drops out and allows reclosing of the circuit breaker.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[stoerfallverlauf-ohne-stromkriterium-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-47 Typical fault profile for source side connection of the voltage transformer (without current
supervision)
Figure 2-48shows a fault profile for a load side connection of the voltage transformers. When the circuit
breaker is open, the voltage disappears (the voltage remains below the pickup setting), and current supervi-
sion is used to ensure that pickup drops out after the circuit breaker has opened (BkrClosed I MIN).
After the voltage has dropped below the pickup setting, tripping is initiated after time delay 27-1 DELAY.
When the circuit breaker opens, voltage decreases to zero and undervoltage pickup is maintained. The current
value also decreases to zero so that current criterion is reset as soon as the release threshold (BkrClosed I
MIN) is exceeded. Pickup of the protection function is also reset by the action of the AND-combination of
voltage and current. As a consequence, energization is admitted anew when the minimum command time
elapsed.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[stoerfallverlauf-mit-stromkriterium-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-48 Typical fault profile for load side connection of the voltage transformers (with current supervi-
sion)
Upon the closing of the circuit breaker, current criterion is delayed for a short period of time. If the voltage
criterion drops out during this time period (about 60 ms), the protection function does not pick up. Therefore
no fault record is created when voltage protection is activated in a healthy system. It is important to under-
stand, however, that if a low voltage condition exists on the load after the circuit breaker is closed (unlike
Figure 2-48), the desired pickup of the element will be delayed by 60 ms.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the undervoltage protection function.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lo_UVP, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-49 Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection
2.6.4 Setting Notes
General
Voltage protection is only effective and accessible if address 150 27/59 is set to Enabled during configura-
tion of protection functions. If this function is not required, then Disabled is set.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The voltage to be evaluated is selected in Power System Data 1 (see Chapter 2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59,
Table 2-11).
Overvoltage protection can be turned ON or OFF, or set to Alarm Only at address 5001 FCT 59.
Undervoltage protection can be turned ON or OFF or set to Alarm Only at address 5101 FCT 27.
With the protection function ON, tripping, the clearing of a fault and fault recording are initiated when the
thresholds are exceeded and the set time delays have expired.
With setting Alarm Only no trip command is given, no fault is recorded and no immediate fault annuncia-
tion is shown on the display
Overvoltage Protection with Phase-to-phase or Phase-to-ground Voltages

The largest of the applied voltages is evaluated for the phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground overvoltage protec-
tion.
The threshold values are set in the value to be evaluated (see Chapter 2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59,
Table 2-11).
The overvoltage protection has two elements. The pickup value of the lower threshold (address 5002 or 5003,
59-1 PICKUP, depending on the phase-to-ground or the phase-to-phase voltages, can be assigned a longer
time delay (address 5004, 59-1 DELAY) and the upper threshold element (address 5005 or 5006, 59-2
PICKUP) a shorter (address 5007, 59-2 DELAY) time delay. There are no specific procedures on how the
pickup values are set. However, as the function is mainly used to prevent high insulation damage to system
components and users, the threshold value 5002 , 5003 59-1 PICKUP lies generally between 110 % and 115
% of the nominal voltage and setting value 5005 , 5006 59-2 PICKUP at approximately 130 %.
The time delays of the overvoltage elements are entered at addresses 5004 59-1 DELAY and 5007 59-2
DELAY, and should be selected in such manner that they make allowance for brief voltage peaks that are
generated during switching operations and also enable clearance of stationary overvoltages in due time.
The choice between phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage allows voltage asymmetries (e.g. caused by
a ground fault) to be taken into account (phase-to-ground) or to remain unconsidered (phase-to-phase)
during evaluation.
NOTE
i During configuration of a single-phase voltage transformer connection (parameter 240 VT Connect.

1ph not equal to NO), parameters 213 VT Connect. 3ph and 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 are not evalu-
ated. In this case, exclusively parameters 5003 59-1 PICKUP or 5006 59-2 PICKUP are relevant for the
threshold values of the overvoltage protection.
Overvoltage Protection - Positive Sequence System V1

In a three-phase voltage transformer connection the positive sequence system can be evaluated for the over-
voltage protection by means of configuring parameter 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 to V1. In this case, the
threshold values of the overvoltage protection must be set in parameters 5019 59-1 PICKUP V1 or 5020
59-2 PICKUP V1.
Overvoltage Protection - Negative Sequence System V2

In a three-phase transformer connection, parameter 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 can determine that the negative
sequence system V2 can be evaluated as a measured value for the overvoltage protection. The negative
sequence system detects voltage unbalance and can be used for the stabilization of the time overcurrent
protection. In backup protection of transformers or generators, the fault currents lie, in some cases, only
slightly above the load currents. In order to obtain a pickup threshold of the time overcurrent protection that
is as sensitive as possible, its stabilization via the voltage protection is necessary to avoid false tripping.
Overvoltage protection comprises two elements. Thus, with configuration of the negative system, a longer
time delay (address 5004, 59-1 DELAY) may be assigned to the lower element (address 5015, 59-1-V2
PICKUP and a shorter time delay (address 5007, 59-2 DELAY) may be assigned to the upper element
(address 5016, 59-2-V2 PICKUP). There are not clear cut procedures on how to set the pickup values
59-1-V2 PICKUP or 59-2-V2 PICKUP as they depend on the respective station configuration.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The time delays of the overvoltage elements are entered at addresses 5004 59-1 DELAY and 5007 59-2
DELAY, and should be selected in such manner that they make allowance for brief voltage peaks that are
generated during switching operations and also enable clearance of stationary overvoltages in due time.
Dropout Threshold of the Overvoltage Protection

The dropout thresholds of the 59-1 element and the 59-2 element can be configured via the dropout ratio r =
VDropout/VPickup at addresses 5017 59-1 DOUT RATIO or 5018 59-2 DOUT RATIO. The following marginal
condition applies to r:
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 150 V with connection of phase-to-phase voltages and phase-to-ground
voltages or
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 260 V with calculation of the measured values from the connected voltages
(e.g. phase-to-phase voltages calculated from the connected phase-to-ground voltages).
The minimum hysteresis is 0.6 V.
Undervoltage Protection - Positive Sequence System V1

The positive sequence component (V1) can be evaluated for the undervoltage protection. Especially in case of
stability problems, their acquisition is advantageous because the positive sequence system is relevant for the
limit of the stable energy transmission. Concerning the pickup values there are no specific notes on how to set
them. However, because the undervoltage protection function is primarily intended to protect induction
machines from voltage dips and to prevent stability problems, the pickup values will usually be between 60 %
and 85 % of the nominal voltage.
The threshold value is multiplied as positive sequence voltage and set to √3, thus realizing the reference to the
nominal voltage.
Undervoltage protection comprises two elements. The pickup value of the lower threshold is set at address
5110 or 5111, 27-2 PICKUP (depending on the voltage transformer connection, phase-to-ground or phase-
to-phase), while time delay is set at address 5112, 27-2 DELAY (short time delay). The pickup value of the
upper element is set at address 5102 or 5103, 27-1 PICKUP, while the time delay is set at address 5106,
27-1 DELAY (a somewhat longer time delay). Setting these elements in this way allows the undervoltage
protection function to closely follow the stability behavior of the system.
The time settings should be selected such that tripping occurs in response to voltage dips that lead to unstable
operating conditions. On the other hand, the time delay should be long enough to avoid tripping on short-
term voltage dips.
Undervoltage Protection with Phase-to-phase or Phase-to-ground Voltages

In parameter 615 OP. QUANTITY 27 you can determine for undervoltage protection in a three-phase
connection that instead of the positive-sequence system V1, the smallest of the phase-to-phase voltages
Vphph or the smallest phase-to-ground voltage Vph-n is configured as a measured quantity. The threshold
values are set in the quantity to be evaluated (see Section 2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59, Table 2-11).
Undervoltage protection comprises two elements. The pickup value of the lower threshold is set at address
5110 or 5111, 27-2 PICKUP (depending on the voltage transformer connection, phase-to-ground or
phaseto- phase), while time delay is set at address 5112, 27-2 DELAY (short time delay). The pickup value of
the upper element is set at address 5102 or 5103, 27-1 PICKUP, while the time delay is set at address 5106,
27-1 DELAY (a somewhat longer time delay). Setting these elements in this way allows the undervoltage
protection function to closely follow the stability behavior of the system.
The time settings should be selected such that tripping occurs in response to voltage dips that lead to unstable
operating conditions. On the other hand, the time delay should be long enough to avoid tripping on short-
term voltage dips.
NOTE
i During configuration of a single-phase voltage transformer connection (parameter 240 VT Connect.

1ph not equal to NO), parameters 213 VT Connect. 3ph and 615 OP. QUANTITY 27 are not evalu-
ated. In this case, exclusively parameters 5103 27-1 PICKUP or5111 27-2 PICKUP are relevant for the
threshold values of the undervoltage protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Dropout Threshold of the Undervoltage Protection

The dropout thresholds of the 59-1 element and the 59-2 element can be parameterized via the dropout ratio
r = Vdropout/Vpickup (5113 27-1 DOUT RATIO or 5114 27-2 DOUT RATIO). The following marginal condition
applies to r:
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 120 V with connection of phase-to-phase voltages and phase-to-ground
voltages) or
r· (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 210 V with calculation of the measured values from the connected voltages
(e.g. calculated phase-to-phase voltages from the connected phase-to-ground voltages).
The minimum hysteresis is 0.6 V.
NOTE
i If a setting is selected such that the dropout threshold (= pickup threshold · dropout ratio) results in a
greater value than 120 V/210 V, it will be limited automatically. No error message occurs.
Current Criterion for Undervoltage Protection

The 27-1 element and the 27-2 element can be supervised by the current flow monitoring setting. If the
CURRENT SUPERV. is switched ON at address 5120 (factory setting), the release condition of the current
criterion must be fulfilled in addition to the corresponding undervoltage condition, which means that a config-
ured minimum current (BkrClosed I MIN, address 212) must be present to make sure that this protective
function can pick up. Thus it can be achieved that pickup of the undervoltage protection drops out when the
line is disconnected from voltage supply. Furthermore, this feature prevents an immediate general pickup of
the device when the device is powered-up without measurement voltage being present.
NOTE
i If parameter CURRENT SUPERV.is set to disabled at address 5120, the device picks up immediately if the
measuring-circuit voltage fails and the undervoltage protection is enabled. Furthermore, configuration can
be performed by pickup of measuring-circuit voltage or blocking of the voltage protection. The latter can be
initiated via device operation in DIGSI and via communication from the control center by means of a
tagging command for blocking the voltage protection. This causes the dropout of the pickup and parame-
terization can be resumed.
Please note that pickup threshold BkrClosed I MIN is used in other protective functions as well, including
overload protection, restart inhibit for motors, dynamic cold load pickup and circuit breaker maintenance.
2.6.5 Settings
5001 FCT 59 OFF OFF 59 Overvoltage Protection
ON
Alarm Only
5002 59-1 PICKUP 40 .. 260 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5003 59-1 PICKUP 40 .. 150 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5005 59-2 PICKUP 40 .. 260 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5006 59-2 PICKUP 40 .. 150 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5015 59-1-V2 PICKUP 2 .. 150 V 30 V 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (neg.
seq.)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

5016 59-2-V2 PICKUP 2 .. 150 V 50 V 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (neg.
seq.)
5017A 59-1 DOUT RATIO 0.90 .. 0.99 0.95 59-1 Dropout Ratio
5019 59-1 PICKUP V1 40 .. 150 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup V1
5020 59-2 PICKUP V1 40 .. 150 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup V1
5101 FCT 27 OFF OFF 27 Undervoltage Protection
ON
Alarm Only
5102 27-1 PICKUP 10 .. 210 V 75 V 27-1 Pickup
5103 27-1 PICKUP 10 .. 120 V 75 V 27-1 Pickup
5110 27-2 PICKUP 10 .. 210 V 70 V 27-2 Pickup
5111 27-2 PICKUP 10 .. 120 V 70 V 27-2 Pickup
5120A CURRENT SUPERV. OFF ON Current Supervision
ON

Informa-
tion
234.2100 27, 59 blk IntSP 27, 59 blocked via operation
6503 >BLOCK 27 SP >BLOCK 27 undervoltage protection
6505 >27 I SUPRVSN SP >27-Switch current supervision ON
6506 >BLOCK 27-1 SP >BLOCK 27-1 Undervoltage protection
6508 >BLOCK 27-2 SP >BLOCK 27-2 Undervoltage protection
6513 >BLOCK 59 SP >BLOCK 59 overvoltage protection
6530 27 OFF OUT 27 Undervoltage protection switched OFF
6531 27 BLOCKED OUT 27 Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED
6532 27 ACTIVE OUT 27 Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE
6533 27-1 picked up OUT 27-1 Undervoltage picked up
6534 27-1 PU CS OUT 27-1 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv
6537 27-2 picked up OUT 27-2 Undervoltage picked up
6538 27-2 PU CS OUT 27-2 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv
6539 27-1 TRIP OUT 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP
6540 27-2 TRIP OUT 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP
6565 59 OFF OUT 59-Overvoltage protection switched OFF
6566 59 BLOCKED OUT 59-Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED
6567 59 ACTIVE OUT 59-Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE
6570 59-1 TRIP OUT 59-1 TRIP
6571 59-2 picked up OUT 59-2 Overvoltage V>> picked up
6573 59-2 TRIP OUT 59-2 Overvoltage V>> TRIP

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46

Negative sequence protection detects unbalanced loads on the system.
Applications
• The application of unbalanced load protection to motors has a special significance. Unbalanced loads
create counter-rotating fields in three-phase induction motors, which act on the rotor at double
frequency. Eddy currents are induced at the rotor surface, and local overheating in rotor end zones and
the slot wedge begins to take place. This especially goes for motors which are tripped via vacuum contac-
tors with fuses connected in series. With single-phasing by fuse pickup the motor only generates small
and pulsing moments such that it soon gets strained thermally assuming, however, that the driven
machine requires the same amount of moments. In addition, with unbalanced supply voltage it is endan-
gered by thermal overload. Due to the small negative sequence reactance even small voltage asymme-
tries lead to negative sequence currents.
• In addition, this protection function may be used to detect interruptions, short circuits and polarity prob-
lems with current transformers.
• It is also useful in detecting single-phase and two-phase faults with fault currents lower than the
maximum load currents.
Prerequisites
The unbalanced load protection becomes effective when:
at least one phase current is greater than 0.05 x ΙNom and
all phase currents are smaller than 10 x ΙNom.
2.7.1 Definite Time characteristic
The definite time characteristic consists of two elements. As soon as the first settable threshold 46-1 PICKUP
is reached, a pickup message is output and time element 46-1 DELAY is started. When the second element
46-2 PICKUP is started, another message is output and time element 46-2 DELAY is initiated. Once either
time delay elapses, a trip signal is initiated.
[unabhaeng-ausl_charakt-des-schieflastschutzes-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-50 Definite time characteristic for negative sequence protection

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Settable Dropout Times

Pickup stabilization for the definite-time tripping characteristic 46-1, 46-2 can be accomplished by means of
settable dropout times. This facility is used in power systems with possible intermittent faults. Used together
with electromechanical relays, it allows different dropout responses to be adjusted and a time grading of
numerical and electromechanical relays to be implemented.
2.7.2 Inverse Time characteristic 46-TOC
The inverse time element is dependent on the ordered device version. It operates with IEC or ANSI character-
istic tripping curves. The curves and associated formulas are given in the Technical Data. When programming
the inverse time characteristic also definite time elements 46-2 PICKUP and 46-1 PICKUP are available
(see a foregoing paragraph).
Pickup and Tripping

The negative sequence current I2 is compared to the setting value 46-TOC PICKUP. When the negative
sequence current exceeds 1.1 times the setting value, a pickup annunciation is generated. The tripping time is
calculated from the negative sequence current according to the characteristic selected. When tripping time is
reached, a tripping command is issued. The characteristic curve is illustrated in the following Figure.
[abhaeng-ausl_charakt-des-schieflastschutzes-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-51 Inverse Time Characteristic for Negative Sequence Protection
Dropout for IEC Curves

The element drops out when the negative sequence current decreases to approx. 95% of the pickup setting.
The time delay resets immediately to be ready for another pickup operation.
Dropout for ANSI Curves

When using an ANSI curve it can be selected whether the dropout of the element is to occur instantaneously
or whether dropout is to be performed by means of the disk emulation mechanism. „Instantaneous“ means
that the drop out will occur when a 95 % of the pickup value is reached. For a new pickup the time counter
starts at zero.
The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (timer counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energiza-
tion. This process corresponds to the reset of a Ferraris-disk (explaining its denomination "disk emulation"). In
case several faults occur in succession, the "history" is taken into consideration due to the inertia of the

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Ferraris-disk, and the time response is adapted. This ensures a proper simulation of the temperature rise of the
protected object even for extremely fluctuating unbalanced load values. Reset begins as soon as 90 % of the
setting value is reached, in accordance with the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. In the range
between the dropout value (95 % of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and
decrementing process is in idle state.
Disk emulation offers advantages when the behavior of the negative sequence protection must be coordi-
nated with other relays in the system based on electromagnetic measuring principles.
Logic
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the negative sequence protection function. The protection
may be blocked via a binary input. This resets pickup and time elements and clears measured values.
When the negative sequence protection criteria are no longer satisfied (i.e. all phase currents below 0.05 x
ΙNom or at least one phase current is greater than 10 x ΙNom) all pickups issued by the negative sequence protec-
tion function are reset.
[lo_unbalanced load protection_1, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-52 Logic Diagram of the Unbalanced Load Protection
(1) Settings 4006 and 4010 are available only when the parameter 140 is set to TOC IEC; settings
4007, 4009, and 4011 are available only when the parameter 140 is set to TOC ANSI.
(2) Information 5171 is only active when the parameter 140 is set to TOC ANSI.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The pickup of the definite time overcurrent protection can be stabilized by the configured dropout time 4012
46 T DROP-OUT. This time is started and maintains the pickup condition if the current falls below the
threshold. Therefore, the function does not drop out at high speed. The trip command delay time continues
running. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is reported OFF and the trip delay time is reset
unless the threshold has been exceeded again. If the threshold is exceeded again during the dropout delay
time, the time is canceled. The trip command delay time continues running. Should the threshold value be
exceeded after its expiry, the trip command is issued immediately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at
this time, there will be no reaction. If the threshold value is exceeded again after expiry of the trip-command
delay time, while the dropout delay time is still running, tripping occurs immediately.
The configured dropout times do not influence the tripping times of the inverse time elements as these
depend dynamically on the measured current value. For purposes of dropout coordination, disc emulation is
used with electro-mechanical relays.
2.7.3 Setting Notes
General
The function type has been specified during configuration of the protection functions (see Section
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes, address 140, 46). If only the definite time elements are desired, the address 46 should
be set to Definite Time. Selecting 46 = TOC IEC or TOC ANSI in address 140 will additionally make all
parameters available that are relevant for the inverse time characteristics. If this function is not required, then
Disabled is set.
The function can be turned ON or OFF in address 4001 FCT 46.
The default pickup settings and delay settings are generally sufficient for most applications. If data is available
from the manufacturer regarding the allowable long-term load imbalance and the allowable load imbalance
per unit of time, this data should be used preferentially. It is important to note that the manufacturer's data
relate to the primary values of the machine, for example, the maximum permissible permanent inverse
current is referred to the nominal machine current. For the setting values at the protection device, this infor-
mation is converted to the secondary inverse current. The following applies
[fo_einstellwert-i2, 1, en_US]
with
Ι2 perm prim permissible thermal inverse current of the motor
ΙNom Motor Nominal Motor Current
ΙCT sec Secondary Nominal Current of the Current Transformer
ΙCT prim Primary nominal current of the current transformer
Definite Time Elements

The unbalanced load protection function comprises two elements. Therefore, the upper element (address
4004 46-2 PICKUP) can be set to a short time delay 4005 46-2 DELAY) and the lower element (address
4002 46- 1 PICKUP) can be set to a somewhat longer time delay (address 4003 46-1 DELAY). This allows the
lower element to act, e.g. as an alarm, while the upper element will cut the inverse time characteristic as soon
as high inverse currents are present. If 46-2 PICKUP is set to about 60%, tripping is always performed with
the thermal characteristic. On the other hand, with more than 60% of unbalanced load, a two-phase fault can
be assumed. The delay time 46-2 DELAY must be coordinated with the system grading of phase-to-phase
faults. If power supply with current I is provided via just two phases, the following applies to the inverse
current:
[fo_i2-058, 1, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Examples:
Motor with the following data:
Nominal current ΙNom Motor = 545 A
Continuously permissible negative Ι2 dd prim /ΙNom Motor = 0.11 continuous
sequence current
Briefly permissible negative Ι2 long-term prim /ΙNom Motor= 0.55 for Tmax = 1 s
sequence current
Current transformer ΙNom prim/ΙNom sec = 600 A/1 A
Setting value 46-1 Pickup = 0.11 · 545 A · (1/600 A) = 0.10 A
Setting value 46-2 Pickup = 0.55 · 545 A · (1/600 A) = 0.50 A
When protecting feeder or cable systems, unbalanced load protection may serve to identify low magnitude
unsymmetrical faults below the pickup values of the directional and non-directional overcurrent elements.
Here, the following must be observed:
[fo_i2-058, 1, en_US]
A phase-to-ground fault with current Ι corresponds to the following negative sequence current:
[fo_i2-033, 1, en_US]
On the other hand, with more than 60% of unbalanced load, a phase-to-phase fault can be assumed. The
delay time 46-2 DELAY must be coordinated with the system grading of phase-to-phase faults.
For a power transformer, unbalanced load protection may be used as sensitive protection for low magnitude
phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults. In particular, this application is well suited for delta-wye trans-
formers where low side phase-to-ground faults do not generate high side zero sequence currents (e.g. vector
group Dy).
Since transformers transform symmetrical currents according to the transformation ratio "CTR", the relation-
ship between negative sequence currents and total fault current for phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-
ground faults are valid for the transformer as long as the turns ratio "CTR" is taken into consideration.
Consider a transformer with the following data:
Base Transformer Rating SNomT = 16 MVA
Primary Nominal Voltage VNom = 110 kV
Secondary Nominal Voltage VNom = 20 kV (TRV = 110/20)
Vector Groups Dy5
High Side CT 100 A/1 A (CTΙ = 100)
The following fault currents may be detected at the low side:

If 46-1 PICKUP on the high side of the devices is set to = 0.1, then a fault current of Ι = 3 · TRV · TRΙ · 46-1
PICKUP = 3 · 110/20 · 100 · 0.1 A = 165 A for single-phase faults and √3 · TRV · TRΙ · 46-1 PICKUP = 95 A can
be detected for two-phase faults at the low side. This corresponds to 36% and 20% of the transformer nominal
current respectively. It is important to note that load current is not taken into account in this simplified
example.
As it cannot be recognized reliably on which side the thus detected fault is located, the delay time 46-1
DELAY must be coordinated with other downstream relays in the system.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Pickup Stabilization (definite-time overcurrent protection)

Pickup of the definite time elements can be stabilized by means of a configurable dropout time. This dropout
time is set in 4012 46 T DROP-OUT.
IEC Curves (Inverse Time Tripping Curve)

The thermal behavior of a machine can be closely replicated due to negative sequence by means of an inverse
time tripping curve. In address 4006 46 IEC CURVE, select out of three IEC curves provided by the device the
curve which is most similar to the thermal unbalanced load curve provided by the manufacturer. The tripping
curves of the protective relay, and the formulas on which they are based, are given in the Technical Data.
It must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the
setting value when an inverse time characteristic is selected. This means that a pickup will only occur if an
unbalanced load of about 1.1 times the setting value 46-TOC PICKUP is present (address 4008). The dropout
is performed as soon as the value falls below 95% of the pickup value.
The associated time multiplier is entered at address 4010, 46-TOC TIMEDIAL.
signaled. If the inverse time element is not required at all, address 140 46 should be set to Definite Time
during the configuration of protection functions (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes).
ANSI Curves (Inverse Time Tripping Curve)

Behavior of a machine due to negative sequence current can be closely replicated by means of an inverse time
tripping curve. In address 4007 the 46 ANSI CURVE, select out of four ANSI curves provided by the device
the curve which is most similar to the thermal unbalanced load curve provided by the manufacturer. The trip-
ping curves of the protective relay, and the formulas on which they are based, are given in the Technical Data.
It must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the
setting value when an inverse time characteristic is selected. This means that a pickup will only occur if an
unbalanced load of about 1.1 times the setting value is present. If Disk Emulation was selected at address
4011 46-TOC RESET, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as described in the Functional
Description.
The unbalanced load value is set at address 4008 46-TOC PICKUP. The corresponding time multiplier is
accessible via address 4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL.
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However, pickup,
will be signaled. If the inverse time element is not required at all, address 140 46 should be set to Definite
Time during configuration of the protection functions (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes).
2.7.4 Settings
4001 FCT 46 OFF OFF 46 Negative Sequence
ON Protection
4002 46-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 3.00 A 0.10 A 46-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 15.00 A 0.50 A
4004 46-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 3.00 A 0.50 A 46-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 15.00 A 2.50 A
4006 46 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Extremely Inv. 46 IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

4007 46 ANSI CURVE Extremely Inv. Extremely Inv. 46 ANSI Curve
Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
4008 46-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.90 A 46-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 4.50 A
4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 46-TOC Time Dial
4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 46-TOC Time Dial
4011 46-TOC RESET Instantaneous Instantaneous 46-TOC Drop Out
Disk Emulation

Informa-
tion
5151 46 OFF OUT 46 switched OFF
5152 46 BLOCKED OUT 46 is BLOCKED
5153 46 ACTIVE OUT 46 is ACTIVE
5166 46-TOC pickedup OUT 46-TOC picked up
5170 46 TRIP OUT 46 TRIP
5171 46 Dsk pickedup OUT 46 Disk emulation picked up

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.8 Motor Protection

For the protection of motors, devices 7SJ66 are provided with a motor starting protection function, a restart
inhibit and a load jam protection. The starting protection function protects the motor from prolonged startup
procedures thus supplementing the overload protection (see Section 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection 49).
The restart inhibit prevents restarting of the motor when this restart may cause the permissible thermal limits
of the rotor to be exceeded. The load jam protection serves to protect the motor during sudden rotor blocking.
2.8.1 Motor Starting Supervision 48
When devices 7SJ66 are used to protect a motor, the starting protection feature supplements the overload
protection and protects the motor against prolonged starting operations (see Section 2.11 Thermal Overload
Protection 49).
General
In particular, rotor-critical high-voltage motors can quickly be heated above their thermal limits when multiple
starting attempts occur in a short period of time. If the durations of these starting attempts are lengthened
e.g. by excessive voltage surges during motor starting, by excessive load moments, or by blocked rotor condi-
tions, a trip signal will be initiated by the protective relay.
Motor starting is detected when a settable current threshold I MOTOR START is exceeded. Calculation of the
tripping time is then initiated. It should be noted that this timer starts every time the motor is started. This is
therefore a normal operating condition that is neither indicated in the fault log nor causes the creation of a
fault record. Only when the locked rotor time has elapsed is the trip command issued.
The protection function consists of one definite time and one inverse time tripping element.
Inverse Time Overcurrent Element

The inverse time overcurrent element is designed to operate only when the rotor is not blocked. With a
decreased startup current resulting from voltage dips when starting the motor, prolonged startup times are
evaluated correctly and tripping with an appropriate time is enabled. The characteristic (see formula below)
can be ideally adjusted to the condition of the motor by using different startup times depending on the cold or
warm condition of the motor (see Figure 2-53).
The tripping time is calculated based on the following equation:
[fo_taus, 1, en_US]
with
tTRIP Actual tripping time for flowing current Ι
tmaxSTARTUP Tripping time for nominal startup current ΙSTARTUP (address 4103,
STARTUP TIME or 4105, STARTUP T WARM)
Ι Current actually flowing (measurement value)
ΙSTARTUP Nominal startup current of the motor (address 4102, STARTUP
CURRENT)
ΙMOTOR START Pickup value for recognition of motor startup (address 1107, I MOTOR
START)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_ausloesezeit-in-abhaengigkeit-des-anlaufstr-170306-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-53 Inverse time tripping curve for motor starting current
Therefore, if the startup current Ι is smaller (larger) than the nominal current ΙSTARTUP (parameter STARTUP
CURRENT) as configured under address 4102, then the actual tripping time tTrip is prolonged (or shortened)
accordingly (see Figure 2-53).
Definite Time Overcurrent Tripping Characteristic (Locked Rotor Time)

Tripping must be executed when the actual motor starting time exceeds the maximum allowable locked rotor
time if the rotor is locked. The device can be informed about the locked rotor condition via the binary input
(>48 Rot. locked), e.g. from an external r.p.m. monitor. The motor startup condition is assumed when
the current in any phase exceeds the current threshold I MOTOR START. At this instant, the timer LOCK
ROTOR TIME is started.
The locked rotor delay time (LOCK ROTOR TIME) is linked to a binary input >48 Rot. locked via an AND
gate. If the binary input is picked up after the set locked rotor time has expired, immediate tripping will take
place regardless of whether the locked rotor condition occurred before, during or after the timeout.
Logic
Motor starting protection may be switched on or off. In addition, motor starting protection may be blocked via
a binary input which will reset timers and pickup annunciations. The following figure illustrates the logic of
motor starting protection. A pickup does not create messages in the trip log buffer. Fault recording is not
started until a trip command has been issued. When the function drops out, all timers are reset. The annuncia-
tions disappear and a trip log is terminated should it have been created.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_anlaufzeitueberwachung-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-54 Logic diagram of the Motor Starting Protection
Switching of Startup Times

The motor manufacturer provides startup time curves for both cold and warm motor conditions (see
Figure 2-53). The function Motor Starting Protection automatically performs a switching. The "warm motor"
condition is derived from the thermal storage of the restart inhibit (see Section 2.8.2 Motor Restart Inhibit 66).
Therefore, this function must be enabled. The condition for the switching is determined by the parameter
4106 TEMP.COLD MOTOR. If the motor temperature (actually the rotor temperature) exceeds the threshold
value, then a switching from "cold motor" to "warm motor" takes place (see Figure 2-54). The threshold values
can be derived from the permitted number of cold (ncold) and warm (nwarm) motor startups. By means of the
following formula an approximate limit value can be determined.
(Parameter 4106 TEMP.COLD MOTOR)
[fo_motoranlauftemperatur-warm, 1, en_US]
The setting value should always be lower than the limit value (see Setting Notes 2.8.1.2 Setting Notes).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
General
Motor starting protection is only effective and accessible if address 141 .48 = Enabled is set. If the function is
not required Disabled is set. The function can be turned ON or OFF under address 4101 48.
Startup Parameter
The device is informed of the startup current values under normal conditions at address 4102 STARTUP
CURRENT, the startup time at address 4103 STARTUP TIME. At all times this enables timely tripping if the
value Ι2t calculated in the protection device is exceeded.
If the startup time is longer than the permissible blocked rotor time, an external rpm-counter can initiate the
definite-time tripping characteristic via binary input (>48 Rot. locked). A locked rotor leads to a loss of
ventilation and therefore to a reduced thermal load capacity of the machine. For this reason, the motor
starting time function is to issue a tripping command before reaching the thermal tripping characteristic valid
for normal operation.
A current above the current threshold 1107 I MOTOR START is interpreted as motor startup. Consequently,
this value must be chosen such that it is reliably attained by the actual starting current under any load or
voltage conditions during motor startup, but not during a permissible short-time overload.
Example: Motor with the following data:
Rated Voltage VNom = 6600 V
Nominal current ΙMOTNom = 126 A
Startup current (primary) ΙSTARTUPw = 624 A
Long-term current rating Ιmax = 135 A
Startup time (cold condition) TMax.STARTUPc = 15 s
Startup time (warm condition) TMax.STARTUPc = 8.5 s
Current transformer ΙNomCTWdl prim/ΙN omCTsec = 200 A/1 A
The setting for address STARTUP CURRENT (ΙSTARTUP) as a secondary value is calculated as follows:
[fo_maxanlauf, 1, en_US]
For reduced voltage, the startup current is also reduced almost linearly. At 80 % nominal voltage, the startup
current in this example is reduced to 0.8 · ΙSTARTUP = 2.5 A.
The setting for detection of a motor startup must lie above the maximum load current and below the
minimum start-up current. If no other influencing factors are present (peak loads), the value for motor startup
I MOTOR START set at address 1107 may be an average value:
Based on the Long-Term Current Rating:
[fo_beispiel-anl-zulstrom, 1, en_US]
[fo_motoranlauf, 1, en_US]
For ratios deviating from nominal conditions, the motor tripping time changes:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[fo_taus-tmaxanlauf, 1, en_US]
At 80% of nominal voltage (which corresponds to 80% of nominal starting current), the tripping time is:
[fo_taus-133, 1, en_US]
After the time delay (4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME) has elapsed, the binary input becomes effective and gener-
ates a trip signal. If the locked rotor time is set just long enough that during normal startup the binary input
>48 Rot. locked (FNo. 6805) is reliably reset during the delay time 4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME, faster trip-
ping will be available during motor starting under locked rotor conditions.
Threshold Values "cold" / "warm" Motor

Parameter 4106 TEMP.COLD MOTOR determines the threshold value. It is derived from the number of cold
(ncold) and warm (nwarm) motor startups.
Unless specified otherwise, three cold and two warm startups (ncold = 3; nwarm = 2) will be sufficient. These are
typical motor data. The limit value is thus derived:
[fo_T-motorl-grenzwert-oangaben, 1, en_US]
A recommended setting value with consideration of a safety margin for TEMP.COLD MOTOR = 25%.
Should the technical data of the motor make reference to four cold and two warm startups (ncold = 4; nwarm =
2), the following limit value can be determined:
[fo_T-motorl-grenzwert-mangaben, 1, en_US]
The setting value should fall below the limit value. A value of 40% is recommended for that purpose.
NOTE
i Overload protection curves are also effective during motor starting conditions. However, the thermal
profile during motor starting is constant. Parameter I MOTOR START at address 1107 limits the working
range of the overload protection to larger current values.
NOTE
i The motor restart inhibit 4301 FCT 66 must be switched on to enable distinguishing between cold and
warm condition of the motor.
2.8.2 Motor Restart Inhibit 66
The motor restart inhibit prevents restarting of the motor when this restart may cause the permissible thermal
limits of the rotor to be exceeded.
Additionally, the function can trip directly if the rotor temperature exceeds the maximum admissible tempera-
ture (100%) (rotor overload).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.8.2.1 Description
General
The rotor temperature of a motor generally remains well below its maximum admissible temperature during
normal operation and also under increased load conditions. However, high startup currents required during
motor startup increase the risk of the rotor being thermally damaged rather the stator, due to the short
thermal constant of the rotor. To avoid that multiple starting attempts provoke tripping, a restart of the motor
must be inhibited if it is apparent that the thermal limit of the rotor will be exceeded during this startup
attempt. Therefore, the 7SJ66 relays feature the motor restart inhibit which outputs a blocking command until
a new motor startup is permitted for the deactivated motor (restarting limit). The blocking signal must be
configured to a binary output relay of the device whose contact is inserted in the motor starting circuit.
Determining the Rotor Overtemperature

Since the rotor current cannot be measured directly, the stator current must be used to generate a thermal
replica of the rotor. The r.m.s. values of the currents are used for this. The rotor overtemperature ΘR is calcu-
lated using the largest of these three phase currents. It is assumed that the thermal limit values for the rotor
winding are based on the manufacturer's data regarding the nominal starting current, maximum permissible
starting time, and the number of starts permitted from cold (ncold) and warm (nwarm) conditions. From this
data, the device performs the necessary calculations to establish the thermal replica of the rotor and issues a
blocking signal until the thermal replica of the rotor decreases below the restarting limit at which startup is
permitted again.
[temperaturverlauf-bei-mehrfachanlaeufen-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-55 Temperature curve at the rotor and in the thermal replica during repeated start-up attempts

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Although the heat distribution on the rotor bars may severely differ during motor starting, the different
maximum temperatures in the the rotor are not pertinant for motor restart inhibit (see Figure 2-55). It is much
more important to establish a thermal replica, after a complete motor start, that is appropriate for the protec-
tion of the motor's thermal condition. Figure 2-55 shows, as an example, the heating processes during
repeated motor starts (three starts from cold operating condition), as well as the thermal replica in the protec-
tion relay.
Restart Threshold
If the rotor temperature has exceeded the restart threshold, the motor cannot be restarted. The blocking
signal is not lifted unless the rotor temperature has fallen below the restarting limit, that is, when exactly one
start becomes possible without exceeding the excessive rotor temperature limit. Based on the specified motor
parameters the device calculates the normalized restarting limit ΘRestart:
[fo_wiedereinschaltgrenze, 1, en_US]
Where:
ΘRestart = Temperature threshold below which restarting is possible
kR = k-factor for the rotor, calculated internally
ΙSTARTUP = Startup current
ΙMOTNom = Nominal motor current
Tstart max = Maximum startup time
τR = Thermal time constant of the rotor, calculated internally
ncold = Permissible number of startups in cold condition
The restarting limit ΘRestart is displayed as operational measured value in the ”thermal measured values”.
Rotor Overload Detection

If the rotor temperature exceeds 100% of the maximum temperature calculated from the thermal rotor profile,
there is a risk of motor damage. If this threshold value is exceeded, either tripping occurs or an overload
message is issued. The desired reaction can be determined via parameter 4311 ROTOR OVERLOAD. If param-
eter is set to OFF, rotor overload will not be detected.
Restart Time
The motor manufacturer allows a maximum number of cold (ncold) and warm (nwarm) startup attempts. There-
after, another startup is not permitted. A certain time must have passed — restarting time TRestart — to ensure
that the rotor has cooled off (operational measured value 661).
Equilibrium Time
This thermal behavior is provided for in the protection as follows: Each time the motor is shut down, the timer
starts (address 4304 T Equal). It takes into account the different thermal conditions of the motor parts at the
moment of shutdown. During the equilibrium time, the thermal replica of the rotor is not updated. It is main-
tained constant to replicate the equilization process in the rotor. Then, the thermal replica with the corre-
sponding time constant (rotor time constant x extension factor) cools down. During the equilibrium time the
motor cannot be restarted. As soon as the temperature sinks below the restarting limit, the next restart
attempt can be made.
Minimum Inhibit Time

Regardless of thermal replicas, some motor manufacturers require a minimum inhibit time after the maximum
number of permissible startup attempts has been exceeded.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The total duration of the inhibit signal depends on which of the times TMin Inhibit or TRestart is longer.
Total Time TReclose
The total waiting time TReclose before the motor can be restarted is therefore composed of the equilibrium time
and the time TRestart calculated from the thermal replica, and the value that is needed to drop below the limit
for restarting. If the calculated temperature rise of the rotor is above the restarting limit when the motor is
shut down, the minimum inhibit time will be started together with the equilibrium time.
Thus the total inhibit time TReclose can become equal to the minimum inhibit time if it is longer than the sum of
the two first mentioned times:
TReclose = TEqual + TRestart for TMin Inhibit < TEqual + TRestart
TReclose = TMin Inhibit for TMin Inhibit ≥ TEqual + TRestart, if the calculated exces-
sive temperature > restarting limit
The operational measured value 809 TReclose (visible in the thermal measured values) is the remaining time
until the next restart is permissible. When the rotor excessive temperature is below the restarting limit and
thus the next restarting attempt is permitted, the operational measured value for the waiting time has
reached zero.
Extension of Cool Down Time Constants

In order to properly account for the reduced heat exchange when a self-ventilated motor is stopped, the cool
down time constants can be increased relative to the time constants for a running machine with the factor Kτ
at STOP (address 4308). The criterion for the motor stop is the undershooting of a set current threshold
BkrClosed I MIN. This understands that the motor idle current is greater than this threshold. The pickup
threshold BkrClosed I MIN affects also the thermal overload protective function (see Section 2.11 Thermal
Overload Protection 49).
While the motor is running, the heating of the thermal replica is modeled with the time constant τR calculated
from the motor ratings, and the cool down calculated with the time constant τR · Kτ at RUNNING (address
4309). In this way, the protection caters to the requirements in case of a slow cool down (slow temperature
equilibrium).
For calculation of the restarting time TRestart the following applies:
[fo_TWE, 1, en_US]
with
kτ at STOP Extension factor for the time constant = Kτ at STOP, address 4308
kτ at RUNNING Extension factor for the time constant = Kτ at RUNNING, address
4309
Θpre thermal replica at the moment of motor shutdown (depending on
operational condition)
τR Rotor time constant, calculated internallyτ
Behavior in Case of Power Supply Failure

Depending on the setting in address 235 ATEX100 of Power System Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes)
the value of the thermal replica is either reset to zero (ATEX100 = NO) if the power supply voltage fails, or
cyclically buffered in a non-volatile memory (ATEX100 = YES) so that it is maintained in the event of auxiliary
supply voltage failure. In the latter case, when power supply is restored, the thermal replica uses the stored
value for calculation and matches it to the operating conditions. The first option is the default setting. For

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
further details, see /5/ Additional description for the protection of explosion-protected motors of protection
type increased safety “e”.
Emergency Start
If, for emergency reasons, motor starting that will exceed the maximum allowable rotor temperature must
take place, the motor restart inhibit signal can be removed via a binary input (>66 emer.start), thus
allowing a new starting attempt. The thermal rotor profile, however, continues to function and the maximum
allowable rotor temperature will be exceeded. No motor shutdown will be initiated by the motor restart
inhibit, but the calculated excessive temperature of the rotor can be observed for risk assessment.
Blocking
If the motor restart inhibit function is blocked via binary input >BLOCK 66 or switched off, the thermal replica
of the rotor overtemperature, the equilibrium time T Equal and the minimum inhibit time T MIN.
INHIBIT are reset. Thus any blocking signal that is present or upcoming is disregarded.
Via another binary input (>66 RM th.repl.) the thermal replica can be reset independently. This may be
useful for testing and commissioning, and after a power supply voltage failure.
Logic
There is no pickup annunciation for the restart inhibit and no trip log is produced. The following figure shows
the logic diagram for the restart inhibit.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lo_restart inhibit, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-56 Logic Diagram for the Restart Inhibit
General
Restart inhibit is only effective and accessible if address 143 66 #of Starts is set to Enabled. If not
required, this function is set to Disabled. The function can be turned ON or OFF under address 4301 FCT
66.
NOTE
i When function settings of the motor restart inhibit are changed, the thermal replica of this function is
reset.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The motor restart inhibit acts on the starting process of a motor that is shut down. A motor is considered shut
down when its current consumption falls below the settable threshold 212 BkrClosed I MIN. Therefore,
this threshold must be set lower than the motor idle current.
The motor restart inhibit concludes the condition “warm motor” from the thermal replica of the restart inhibit.
For this function, address 4301FCT 66 has to be enabled.
Additionally, the function can trip directly if the rotor temperature exceeds the maximum admissible tempera-
ture (100%). For this purpose address 4311 ROTOR OVERLOAD is set to ON. If only monitoring is desired, set
to Alarm Only, otherwise to OFF.
Characteristic Values
Many of the variables needed to calculate the rotor temperature are supplied by the motor manufacturer.
Among these variables are the starting current ΙSTARTUP, the nominal motor current ΙMOT. NOM, the maximum
allowable starting time T START MAX (address 4303), the number of allowable starts from cold conditions
(ncold), and the number of allowable starts from warm conditions (nwarm).
The starting current is entered at address 4302 IStart/IMOTnom , expressed as a multiple of nominal motor
current. In contrast, the nominal motor current is entered as a secondary value, directly in amperes, at address
4305 I MOTOR NOMINAL. The number of warm starts allowed is entered at address 4306 (MAX.WARM
STARTS and the difference #COLD-#WARM between the number of allowable cold and warm starts is entered
at address 4307.
For motors without separate ventilation, the reduced cooling at motor stop can be accounted for by entering
the factor Kτ at STOP at address 4308. As soon as the current no longer exceeds the setting value entered
at address 212 BkrClosed I MIN, motor standstill is detected and the time constant is increased by the
extension factor configured.
If no difference between the time constants is to be used (e.g. externally-ventilated motors), then the exten-
sion factor Kτ at STOP should be set to 1.
The cooling with the motor running is influenced by the extension factor 4309 Kτ at RUNNING. This factor
considers that motor running under load and a stopped motor do not cool down at the same speed. It
becomes effective as soon as the current exceeds the value set at address 212 BkrClosed I MIN. With Kτ
at RUNNING = 1 the heating and the cooling time constant are the same at operating conditions (Ι >
BkrClosed I MIN).
Example: Motor with the following data:
Rated Voltage VNom = 6600 V
Nominal current ΙNom = 126 A
Startup current ΙSTARTUP = 624 A
Startup duration TStart max. = 8.5 s
Permitted starts with cold motor ncold = 3
Permitted starts with warm motor nwarm = 2
Current transformer 200 A/1 A
The following settings are derived from these data:
[fo_ianl, 1, en_US]
[fo_imotnenn, 1, en_US]
The following settings are made:

IStart/IMOTnom = 4.9
I MOTOR NOMINAL = 0.6 A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
T START MAX = 8.5 s

MAX.WARM STARTS = 2
#COLD-#WARM = 1
For the rotor temperature equilibrium time, (address 4304) a setting time of approx. T Equal = 1 min has
proven to be a good value. The value for the minimum inhibit time T MIN. INHIBIT depends on the motor
manufacturer, or by the user's requirements. It must in any case be higher than 4304 T Equal. In this
example, a value has been chosen that reflects the thermal replica (T MIN. INHIBIT = 6.0 min).
The motor manufacturer's, or the requirements also determine also the extension factor for the time constant
during cool-down, especially with the motor stopped. Where no other specifications are made, the following
settings are recommended: Kτ at STOP = 5 and Kτ at RUNNING = 2.
For a proper functioning, it is also important that the CT values and the current threshold for distinction
between stopped and running motor (address 212 BkrClosed I MIN, recommended setting ≈ 0.1 ΙMOT.NOM)
have been set correctly. An overview of parameters and their default settings is generally given in the setting
tables.
Temperature Behavior during Changing Operating States

For a better understanding of the above considerations several possible operating ranges in two different
operating areas will be discussed in the following paragraph. Settings indicated above are to be used prevaling
3 cold and 2 warm startup attempts have resulted in the restart limit reaching 66.7%.
A) Below the thermal restarting limit:
• A normal startup brings the machine into a temperature range below the thermal restarting limit and the
machine is stopped. The stop launches the equilibrium time 4304 T Equal and generates the message
66 TRIP. The equilibrium time expires and the message 66 TRIP is cleared. During the time T Equal
the thermal replica remains "frozen" (see Figure 2-57, on the left).
• A normal startup brings the machine into a temperature range below the thermal restarting limit, the
machine is stopped and is started by an emergency startup without waiting for the equilibrium time to
expire. The equilibrium time is reset, the thermal replica is released and 66 TRIP is reported as going
(see Figure 2-57, to the right).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[anlaufbeispiele-a-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-57 Startups according to examples A.1 and A.2
B) Above the thermal restarting limit:
• A startup brings the machine from load operation into a temperature range far above the thermal
restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The minimum inhibit time and the equilibrium time are
started and 66 TRIP is reported. The temperature cool-down below the restarting limit takes longer
than 4310 T MIN. INHIBIT and 4304 T Equal, so that the time passing until the temperature falls
below the temperature limit is the decisive factor for clearing the message 66 TRIP. The thermal replica
remains "frozen" while the equilibrium time expires (see Figure 2-58, to the left).
• A startup brings the machine from load operation into a temperature range just above the thermal
restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The minimum inhibit time and the equilibrium time are
started and 66 TRIP is reported. Although the temperature soon falls below the restarting limit, the
blocking 66 TRIP is preserved until the equilibrium time and the minimum inhibit time have expired
(see Figure 2-58, to the right).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[anlaufbeispiele-b-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-58 Starting up according to examples B.1 and B.2
2.8.3 Load Jam Protection (51M)
The load jam protection serves to protect the motor during sudden rotor blocking. Damage to drives, bearings
and other mechanic motor components can be avoided or reduced by means of quick motor shutdown.
The blocking results in a current jump in the phases. This is detected by the function as a recognition criteria.
The thermal overload protection would of course also pickup as soon as the configured threshold values of the
thermal replicas are exceeded. The load jam protection, however, is able to detect a locked rotor quicker, thus
reducing possible damage to the motor and powered equipment.
Principle of Operation
Figure 2-59 illustrates a typical characteristic curve of an asynchronous cage motor. Nominal current is flowing
at normal load. If the load is increased, the current flow also increases and the speed decreases. Above a
certain load, however, the motor is no longer able to adjust the speed by increasing the torque. The motor
comes to standstill in spite of an increase in current to a multiple of its nominal value (see Figure 2-60). Other
types of induction motors have similar characteristics. Apart from the thermal heating of the motor, a locked
rotor causes substantial mechanical strain on coils and bearings.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[typ-kennl-asyn-motors, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-59 Typical characteristic of an asynchronous cage motor
Figure 2-60 illustrates an example of a locked rotor caused by mechanical overload. It should be noted that
the current flow increases substantially as soon as the mechanical load reaches the stability limit.
[bsp-t-kennl-mechan-blk, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-60 Example of the time characteristic for mechanical rotor blocking
Logic
A continuous comparison of the motor current with the configured threshold values of the protection function
takes place for the purpose of detecting a locked rotor. Figure 2-61 shows the logic diagram. The threshold-
value comparison is blocked during the motor startup phase, as the startup currents usually move in a size
similar to the occurring currents when a rotor is locked.
The algorithm verifies the motor standstill according to currents and (if available) the message >52-a. As
soon as a current increase is applied after detection of the motor standstill, the load jam protection is tempo-
rarily blocked in order to avoid motor shutdown during the motor startup phase.
The motor is detected as being in standstill when none of the three phase currents exceeds the threshold set
via address 212 BkrClosed I MIN and the binary signal >52-a is inactive. The >52-a signal is only taken
into account if the binary input is allocated accordingly.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[logik-lastblk-schutz, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-61 Logic diagram of the load jam protection
Elements
A warning and a tripping element can be configured. The threshold value of the tripping element 4402 Load
Jam I> is usually configured below motor startup at double motor ampere rating. Warning element 4404 I
Alarm is naturally set below the tripping element, to approx. 75% of the tripping element, with a longer delay
time (parameter 4405 ALARM DELAY). If the warning element is not required, the pickup value can be set to
its maximum value and the respective message from the buffers can be removed.
Motor Standstill and Motor Startup

Due to the threshold setting below the motor startup current, the load jam protection during motor startup
must be blocked. Via parameters 212 BkrClosed I MIN the open circuit breaker is detected during current-
flow measurement (motor standstill). In this condition the load change protection is blocked. After having
closed the circuit breaker, the blocking is maintained during motor startup by the setting 4406 T Start
Blk.. In order to avoid malfunctioning, the T Start Blk. is set to the double startup time.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Motor Protection Example

Figure 2-62 illustrates an example of a complete motor protection characteristic. Such characteristic usually
consists of different protection elements, and each element is responsible for special motor malfunctions.
These are:
• Thermal overload protection: to avoid overheating of the motor due to inadmissible load
• Load jam protection: to prevent overheating and mechanical damage due to a locked rotor
• Motor starting protection: protects the motor against prolonged startup procedures and the consequent
thermal overload of the rotor
• Overcurrent and high-current elements: for motor shutdown due to electrical faults
[motorbelastungsgrenze, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-62 Example of a Complete Motor Protection Characteristic
Example:
Motor with the following data:
Nominal voltage UNom = 6600 V
Nominal current ΙNom = 126 A
Long-term current rating Ιmax = 135 A
Startup duration Tstartmax = 8.5 s
Current transformer ΙNomCTprim / ΙNomCTsec = 200 A / 1 A
The setting for address 4402 Load Jam I> as secondary value is calculated as follows:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[fo_load jam I>, 1, en_US]
The tripping delay time can remain at the default setting of 1 s. The warning threshold is set to 75% of the
tripping element (4404 I Alarm ≡ 0.95 A sec.).
The tripping delay time can remain at the default setting of 2 s.
In order to block the function during motor startup, the parameter 4406 T Start Blk. is set to double
startup time (T Start Blk. = 2 · 8.5 s = 17 s).
2.8.4 Motorprotection (Motor Starting Protection 48, Motor Restart Inhibit 66,
LoadJam)
Functions relevant to Motor Protection and Restart Inhibit for Motors and Load Jam Protection are described in
the aforegoing two sections and contain information concerning configuration.
2.8.4.1 Settings
4101 FCT 48 OFF OFF 48 Startup Time Supervi-
ON sion for Motors
4102 STARTUP CURRENT 1A 0.50 .. 16.00 A 5.00 A Startup Current
5A 2.50 .. 80.00 A 25.00 A
4103 STARTUP TIME 1.0 .. 180.0 sec 10.0 sec Startup Time
4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME 0.5 .. 180.0 sec; ∞ 2.0 sec Permissible Locked Rotor
Time
4105 STARTUP T WARM 0.5 .. 180.0 sec; ∞ 10.0 sec Startup Time for warm
motor
4106 TEMP.COLD MOTOR 0 .. 80 %; ∞ 25 % Temperature limit for cold
motor
4301 FCT 66 OFF OFF 66 Startup Counter for
ON Motors
4302 IStart/IMOTnom 1.10 .. 10.00 4.90 I Start / I Motor nominal
4303 T START MAX 1 .. 320 sec 10 sec Maximum Permissible
Starting Time
4304 T Equal 0.0 .. 320.0 min 1.0 min Temperature Equalizaton
Time
4305 I MOTOR NOMINAL 1A 0.20 .. 1.20 A 1.00 A Rated Motor Current
5A 1.00 .. 6.00 A 5.00 A
4306 MAX.WARM STARTS 1 .. 4 2 Maximum Number of
Warm Starts
4307 #COLD-#WARM 1 .. 2 1 Number of Cold Starts -
Warm Starts
4308 Kτ at STOP 0.2 .. 100.0 5.0 Extension of Time Constant
at Stop
4309 Kτ at RUNNING 0.2 .. 100.0 2.0 Extension of Time Constant
at Running
4310 T MIN. INHIBIT 0.2 .. 120.0 min 6.0 min Minimum Restart Inhibit
Time

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

4311 ROTOR OVERLOAD ON ON Rotor Overload Protection
OFF
Alarm Only
4401 Load Jam Prot. OFF OFF Load Jam Protection
ON
Alarm Only
4402 Load Jam I> 1A 0.50 .. 12.00 A 2.00 A Load Jam Tripping
5A 2.50 .. 60.00 A 10.00 A Threshold
4403 TRIP DELAY 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 1.00 sec Load Jam Trip Delay
4404 I Alarm 1A 0.50 .. 12.00 A 1.80 A Load Jam Alarm Threshold
5A 2.50 .. 60.00 A 9.00 A
4405 ALARM DELAY 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 1.00 sec Load Jam Alarm Delay
4406 T Start Blk. 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 10.00 sec Load Jam Blocking after
motor start

Informa-
tion
4822 >BLOCK 66 SP >BLOCK 66 Motor Startup Counter
4823 >66 emer.start SP >66 Mot.St.Cnt: Emergency start
4824 66 OFF OUT 66 Motor Startup Counter OFF
4825 66 BLOCKED OUT 66 Motor Startup Counter BLOCKED
4826 66 ACTIVE OUT 66 Motor Startup Counter ACTIVE
4827 66 TRIP OUT 66 Motor Startup Counter TRIP
4828 >66 RM th.repl. SP >66 Mot.St.Cnt: Reset therm.memory rotor
4829 66 RM th.repl. OUT 66 Mot.St.Cnt: therm. memory rotor reset
4834 Rot.overl.TRIP OUT Rotor thermal overload TRIP
4835 Rot.overl.alarm OUT Rotor thermal overload alarm
6801 >BLOCK 48 SP >BLOCK 48 Motor Startup Time Supervision
6805 >48 Rot. locked SP >48/14 Mot.St.Time Sup. Rotor locked
6811 48 OFF OUT 48 Motor Startup Time Supervision OFF
6812 48 BLOCKED OUT 48 Motor Startup Time Superv. BLOCKED
6813 48 ACTIVE OUT 48 Motor Startup Time Supervision ACTIVE
6821 48 TRIP OUT 48 Motor Startup Time Supervision TRIP
6822 48 Rotor locked OUT 48/14 Mot.St.Time Sup. Rotor locked
6823 48 pickup OUT 48 Motor Startup Time Superv. picked up
10020 >BLOCK Load Jam SP >BLOCK Load Jam Protection
10021 Load Jam BLOCK. OUT Load Jam Protection is BLOCKED
10022 Load Jam OFF OUT Load Jam Protection is OFF
10023 Load Jam ACTIVE OUT Load Jam Protection is ACTIVE
10024 Load Jam alarm OUT Load Jam Protection alarm
10025 Load Jam pickup OUT Load Jam Protection picked up
10026 Load Jam TRIP OUT Load Jam Protection TRIP

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.9 Frequency Protection 81 O/U

The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the system or in electrical
machines. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated, such as load
shedding or separating a generator from the system.
Applications
• Decrease in system frequency occurs when the system experiences an increase in the real power
demand, or when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or automatic generation control (AGC)
system. The frequency protection function is also used for generators which (for a certain time) operate
to an island network. This is due to the fact that the reverse power protection cannot operate in case of a
drive power failure. The generator can be disconnected from the power system by means of the
frequency decrease protection.
• Increase in system frequency occurs e.g. when large blocks of load (island network) are removed from
the system, or again when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor. This entails risk of self-excita-
tion for generators feeding long lines under no-load conditions.
Detection of Frequency
The frequency is detected preferably from the positive sequence voltage. If this voltage is too low, the phase-
to-phase voltage VA-B at the device is used. If the amplitude of this voltage is too small, one of the other phase-
to-phase voltages is used instead.
Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation is free from harmonic influ-
ences and very accurate.
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements. To make protection flexible for different power
system conditions, theses elements can be used alternatively for frequency decrease or increase separately,
and can be independently set to perform different control functions.
Operating Range
The frequency can be determined as long as in a three-phase voltage transformer connection the positive-
sequence system of the voltages, or alternatively, in a single-phase voltage transformer connection, the
respective voltage is present and of sufficient magnitude. If the measured voltage drops below a settable
value Vmin, the frequency protection is blocked because no precise frequency values can be calculated from
the signal.
Time Delays / Logic

Each frequency element has an associated settable time delay. When the time delay elapses, a trip signal is
generated. When a frequency element drops out, the tripping command is immediately terminated, but not
before the minimum command duration has elapsed.
Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually via binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_frequenzschutz-070906-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-63 Logic diagram of the frequency protection
2.9.2 Setting Notes
General
Frequency protection is only in effect and accessible if address 154 81 O/U is set to Enabled during configu-
ration of protective functions. If the function is not required Disabled is set. The function can be turned ON
or OFF under address 5401 FCT 81 O/U.
By setting the parameters 5421 to 5424, the function of each of the elements 81-1 PICKUP to 81-4
PICKUP is set individually as overfrequency or underfrequency protection or set to OFF, if the element is not
required.
Minimum Voltage
Address 5402 Vmin is used to set the minimum voltage. Frequency protection is blocked as soon as the
minimum voltage is undershot.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
On all three-phase connections and single-phase connections of a phase-to-phase voltage, the threshold must
be set as a phase-to-phase value. With a single phase-to-ground connection the threshold must be set as a
phase voltage.
Pickup Values
The setting as overfrequency or underfrequency element does not depend on the parameter threshold values
of the respective element. An element can also function, for example, as an overfrequency element if its
threshold value is set below the nominal frequency and vice versa.
If frequency protection is used for load shedding purposes, the setting values depend on the actual power
system conditions. Normally, a time coordinated load shedding is required that takes into account the impor-
tance of the consumers or consumer groups.
Further application examples exist in the field of power stations. Here too, the frequency values to be set
mainly depend on the specifications of the power system / power station operator. The underfrequency
protection safeguards the power station's own demand by disconnecting it from the power system on time.
The turbo governor regulates the machine set to the nominal speed. Consequently, the station's own
demands can be continuously supplied at nominal frequency.
Under the assumption that the apparent power is reduced by the same degree, turbine-driven generators can,
as a rule, be continuously operated down to 95% of the nominal frequency. However, for inductive
consumers, the frequency reduction not only means an increased current input, but also endangers stable
operation. For this reason, only a short-term frequency reduction down to about 48 Hz (for fN = 50 Hz) or 58
Hz (for fN = 60 Hz) is permissible.
A frequency increase can, for example, occur due to a load shedding or malfunction of the speed regulation
(e.g. in an island network). In this way, the frequency increase protection can, for example, be used as over-
speed protection.
Dropout Thresholds
The dropout threshold is defined via the adjustable dropout-difference address 5415 DO differential. It
can thus be adjusted to the network conditions. The dropout difference is the absolute-value difference
between pickup threshold and dropout threshold. The default value of 0.02 Hz can usually remain. Should,
however, frequent minor frequency fluctuations be expected, this value should be increased.
Time Delays
The delay times 81-1 DELAY to 81-4 DELAY (addresses 5405, 5408, 5411 and 5414) allow the frequency
elements to be time coordinated, e.g. for load shedding equipment. The set times are additional delay times
not including the operating times (measuring time, dropout time) of the protection function.
2.9.3 Settings
5401 FCT 81 O/U OFF OFF 81 Over/Under Frequency Protec-
ON tion
5402 Vmin 10 .. 150 V 65 V Minimum required voltage for
operation
5403 81-1 PICKUP 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

5411 81-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec 81-3 Time delay
5414 81-4 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec 81-4 Time delay
5415A DO differential 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Dropout differential
5421 FCT 81-1 O/U OFF OFF 81-1 Over/Under Frequency
ON f> Protection
ON f<
ON f> Protection
ON f<
ON f> Protection
ON f<
ON f> Protection
ON f<

Informa-
tion
5203 >BLOCK 81O/U SP >BLOCK 81O/U
5206 >BLOCK 81-1 SP >BLOCK 81-1
5207 >BLOCK 81-2 SP >BLOCK 81-2
5208 >BLOCK 81-3 SP >BLOCK 81-3
5209 >BLOCK 81-4 SP >BLOCK 81-4
5211 81 OFF OUT 81 OFF
5212 81 BLOCKED OUT 81 BLOCKED
5213 81 ACTIVE OUT 81 ACTIVE
5214 81 Under V Blk OUT 81 Under Voltage Block
5236 81-1 TRIP OUT 81-1 TRIP
5237 81-2 TRIP OUT 81-2 TRIP
5238 81-3 TRIP OUT 81-3 TRIP
5239 81-4 TRIP OUT 81-4 TRIP

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.10 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects the system for mains decoupling purposes. To
prevent a voltage collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a generator, must be equipped with
voltage and frequency protection devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is required at
the supply system connection point. It detects critical power system situations and ensures that the power
generation facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures that reconnection only takes place
under stable power system conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized.
Applications
• High-voltage and extra-high voltage power systems
• Medium-voltage power systems
• Regenerative infeed types such as wind power stations, photovoltaics, cogeneration plants or hydro-
power
2.10.1 Description
General
To detect critical power system situations, the QU protection uses the phase-to-phase voltage, the positive-
sequence current and the reactive power.
To release the reconnection, the results of voltage protection and frequency protection are additionally
analyzed on the generating side.
If the frequency and voltage values are outside the operating range, the QU protection does not work.
It can also be blocked by the fuse-failure monitor or via a binary input.
Pickup of the QU protection causes the device to pick up. Simultaneously, fault recording is activated. But trip-
ping of the QU protection does not cause the device to trip and should be routed to a separate binary output.
No other fault record is started.
The QU protection can be used for all voltage connection types that enable detection of the displacement
voltage (measured or calculated). The Appendix provides connection examples.
Signal transmission in the high-voltage power system requires the power system connection point and the
generating facility to be connected via telecommunication cables (optical fiber or copper cable). Radio links,
GPRS or satellite transmission with signal transit times <3 s can alternatively be used in medium-voltage
systems.
Protection Function
The QU protection trips under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
• The positive-sequence current Ι1 is above the parameterized threshold value.
• The facility requires more than the set reactive power.

The pickup thresholds for undervoltage U< Pickup, the reactive power Q> Pickup and the release current
I-Release can be set.
After detection of the tripping criteria, time-delayed trip signals are sent to the circuit breaker of the power
system connection point and to the circuit breaker of the generating facility. The time delay can be set sepa-
rately for both circuit breakers. Time-graded tripping is thus possible. The tripping of the circuit breaker at the
power system connection point ultimately de-energizes the entire generating facility.
To prevent tripping of the QU protection during starting operations, parameterize and activate the inrush
current detection. The inrush blocking of the QU protection can then be activated via parameter Inrush
blk. The overcurrent protection detects the inrush. The QU protection evaluates the inrush indications of the
overcurrent protection (see Figure 2-16).
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the QU protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[prot-lo-qvp-20120319, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-64 Logic diagram of the QU protection
Reconnection
The release for reconnecting the generating facility is given under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are above the parameterized threshold value.
• The power system frequency is within the parameterized range.
• The delay time of the protection function has elapsed. The delay time is started by the first trip signal of
any stage of the voltage or frequency protection.
The release criteria for reconnection can be set. The following parameters are used:
• Threshold for the release voltage at the power system connection point
• Frequency deviation in positive and negative direction
• Reconnection release can be delayed by a settable time.

You also define whether the tripping of the circuit breaker at the generating facility point is included in the
formation of the release signal. The tripping of the protection stages of voltage and frequency protection is
always included.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the QU protection for reconnection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lo-recl-rel-qvp-20120319, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-65 Logic Diagram of QU Protection Restarting
General
Configuration of the protection functions at address 155 27/Q-Protection defines whether the QU protec-
tion is Enabled or Disabled.
At address 5501 27/Q-Protection the QU protection function can be switched ON or OFF.
The release current is entered at address 5502 I-Release. The default setting is at 10 % of the rated current.
The threshold is one of the pickup criteria for tripping.
At address 5503 Inrush blk you can activate the blocking when inrush has been detected.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Pickup Values
You can set the pickup value for the reactive power stage at address 5511 Q> Pickup.
Example:
Q > 5 % of the supply system rating
VNomsec = 100 V
INomsec = 1 A
this yields the (default) setting value Q> Pickup for Q> Pickup
100 V · 1 A · √3 · 0.05 = 8.7 VAR
At address 5512 U< Pickup, you can enter the pickup value for the voltage stage.
Delays
Address 5513 Delay Gen. CB is used to set the time delay for tripping the circuit breaker of the generation
facility, e.g. at the generator.
Enter the time delay for tripping the circuit breaker at the supply system connection point at address 5514
Delay Grid CB. Always set the delay time longer than delay time Delay Gen. CB.
Close Release
At address 5521 Recl. release the close release is switched ON or OFF.
At address 5522 U> Reclose you can specify the release voltage. Set the value to approx. 95 % of the rated
voltage value (default).
Specify the delay time for releasing the generator reconnection at address 5523 T Reclose.
Furthermore, enter the admitted deviation from the rated frequency. At address 5524 Pos. f-diff enter
the frequency deviation in positive direction and at address 5525 Neg. f-diff in negative direction. If the
measured frequency is within this range, this reconnection condition is satisfied.
Address 5526 Incl. 27/Q Trip determines whether the tripping indication of the QU protection is taken
into account for the reconnection release.
2.10.3 Settings
5501 27/Q-Protection OFF OFF 27 / Q dir. con. Protection
ON
5502 I-Release 1A 0.02 .. 0.20 A 0.10 A Current-Rel. for Trip and
5A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Reclose
5503 Inrush blk NO NO blocking with inrush
YES
5511 Q> Pickup 1A 1.70 .. 10000.00 VAR 8.70 VAR Reactive power threshold
5A 8.50 .. 50000.00 VAR 43.50 VAR for pickup
5512 U< Pickup 10.00 .. 210.00 V 85.00 V Undervoltage threshold for
pickup
5513 Delay Gen. CB 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.50 sec Trip time delay generator
CB
5514 Delay Grid CB 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 1.50 sec Trip time delay grid CB
5521 Recl. release OFF OFF Reclosure release
ON

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

5522 U> Reclose 10.00 .. 210.00 V 95.00 V Voltage threshold for reclo-
sure rel.
5523 T Reclose 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 0.00 sec Reclosure Delay Time
5524 Pos. f-diff 0.01 .. 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz Pos. f-diff threshold for
reclosure rel.
5525 Neg. f-diff -5.00 .. -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz Neg. f-diff threshold for
reclosure rel.
5526A Incl. 27/Q Trip NO NO Include 27/Q Trip for reclo-
YES sure rel.

Informa-
tion
6401 >27/Q Block SP >QV-Protection Blocked
6411 27/Q OFF OUT 27/Q -Protection off
6412 27/Q block OUT 27/Q -Protection blocked
6413 27/Q ACT OUT 27/Q -Protection active
6421 27/Q Gen TRIP OUT 27/Q -Protection Gen TRIP
6422 27/Q Grid TRIP OUT 27/Q -Protection Grid TRIP
6423 27/Q PICKUP OUT 27/Q-Protection PICKUP
6424 Reclosure rel. OUT Reclosure release
6425 27/Q blk.b.Inr. OUT 27/Q pickup blocked by Inrush

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.11 Thermal Overload Protection 49

The thermal overload protection is designed to prevent thermal overloads from damaging the protected
equipment. The protection function represents a thermal replica of the equipment to be protected (overload
protection with memory capability). Both the previous history of an overload and the heat loss to the environ-
ment are taken into account.
Applications
• In particular, the thermal overload protection allows the thermal status of motors, generators and trans-
formers to be monitored.
• If an additional thermal input is available, the thermal replica may take the actual ambient or coolant
temperature into account.
Thermal Replica
The device calculates the overtemperature in accordance with a single-body thermal replica, based on the
following differential equation:
[fo_thermdifferentialgleichung, 1, en_US]
with
Θ Present overtemperature related to the final overtemperature at maximum allowed phase
current k · ΙNom Obj.
τth Thermal time constant of the protected object's heating
Ι Present true r.m.s value of phase current
k k–factor indicating the maximum permissible constant phase current referred to the
nominal current of the protected object
ΙNom Obj. Nominal current of protected object
[fo_umgebungstemperatur, 1, en_US]
with
Θu Measured ambient temperature or coolant temperature
ΘNom Temperature at object nominal current
If the ambient or coolant temperature is not measured, a constant value of Θu = 40 °C is assumed so that Θu' =
0.
The protection function therefore represents a thermal replica of the equipment to be protected (overload
protection with memory capability). Both the previous history of an overload and the heat loss to the environ-
ment are taken into account.
When the calculated overtemperature reaches the first settable threshold 49 Θ ALARM, an alarm annuncia-
tion is issued, e.g. to allow time for the load reduction measures to take place. When the calculated overtem-
perature reaches the second threshold, the protected equipment may be disconnected from the system. The
highest overtemperature calculated from the three phase currents is used as the criterion.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The maximum thermally permissible continuous current Ιmax is described as a multiple of the object nominal
currentΙNom Obj.:
Ιmax = k · ΙNom Obj.
In addition to the k factor (parameter 49 K-FACTOR) the TIME CONSTANT τth and the alarm temperature 49
Θ ALARM (in percent of the trip temperature ΘTRIP) must be specified.
Overload protection also features a current warning element (I ALARM) in addition to the temperature
warning element. The current warning element may report an overload current prematurely, even if the calcu-
lated operating temperature has not yet attained the warning or tripping levels.
Coolant Temperature (Ambient Temperature)

The device can account for external temperatures. Depending on the type of application, this may be a coolant
or ambient temperature. The temperature can be measured via a temperature detection unit (RTD-box). For
this purpose, the required temperature detector is connected to detector input 1 of the first RTD-box (corre-
sponds to RTD 1). If incorrect temperature values are measured or there are disturbances between the RTDbox
and the device, an alarm will be issued and the standard temperature of Θu = 40 °C is used for calculation with
the ambient temperature detection simply being ignored.
When detecting the coolant temperature, the maximum permissible current Ιmax is influenced by the tempera-
ture difference of the coolant (in comparison with the standard value = 104° F or 40° C). If the ambient or
coolant temperature is low, the protected object can support a higher current than it does when the tempera-
ture is high.
Extension of Time Constants

When using the device to protect motors, the varying thermal response at standstill or during rotation may be
correctly evaluated. When running down or at standstill, a motor without external cooling looses heat more
slowly, and a longer thermal time constant must be used for calculation. For a motor that is switched off, the
7SJ66 increases the time constant τ th by a programmable factor (kτ factor). The motor is considered to be off
when the motor currents drop below a programmable minimum current setting BkrClosed I MIN (refer to
"Current Flow Monitoring" in Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). For externally-cooled motors, cables and
transformers, the Kτ-FACTOR = 1.
Current Limiting
In order to ensure that overload protection, on occurrence of high fault currents (and with small time
constants), does not result in extremely short tripping times thereby perhaps affecting time grading of the
short circuit protection, the thermal replica is frozen (kept constant) as soon as the current exceeds the
threshold value 1107 I MOTOR START.
Blocking
The thermal memory may be reset via a binary input (>RES 49 Image) and the current-related overtempera-
ture value is thus reset to zero. The same is accomplished via the binary input (>BLOCK 49 O/L); in this case,
the entire overload protection is blocked completely, including the current warning element.
When motors must be started for emergency reasons, temperatures above the maximum permissible over-
temperatures can be allowed by blocking the trip signal via a binary input (>EmergencyStart). Since the
thermal replica may have exceeded the tripping temperature after initiation and dropout of the binary input,
the protection function features a programmable run-on time interval (T EMERGENCY) which is started when
the binary input drops out and continues suppressing a trip signal. Tripping via the overload protection is
suppressed until this time interval has elapsed. The binary input affects only the trip command. There is no
effect on the trip log nor does the thermal replica reset.
Behavior in Case of Power Supply Failure

Depending on the setting in address 235 ATEX100 of Power System Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3 Power System
Data 1) the value of the thermal replica is either reset to zero (ATEX100 = NO) if the power supply voltage
fails, or cyclically buffered in a non-volatile memory (ATEX100 = YES) so that it is maintained in the event of
auxiliary supply voltage failure. In the latter case, the thermal replica uses the stored value for calculation and

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
matches it to the operating conditions. The first option is the default setting (see /5/ Additional description for
the protection of explosion-protected motors of protection type increased safety “e”).
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the overload protection function.
[7sj6x_ueberlastschutz-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-66 Logic diagram of the overload protection

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
General
The overload protection is only in effect and accessible if address 142 49 = No ambient temp or = With
amb. temp. during configuration. If the function is not required Disabled is set.
Transformers and cable are prone to damage by overloads that last for an extended period of time. Overloads
cannot and should not be detected by fault protection. Time overcurrent protection should be set high
enough to only detect faults since these must be cleared in a short time. Short time delays, however, do
neither allow measures to discharge overloaded equipment nor do they permit to take advantage of its
(limited) overload capacity.
The 7SJ66 devices feature an overload protection function with thermal tripping characteristic adaptable to
the overload capability of the equipment being protected (overload protection with memory function).
Overload protection can be switched ON or OFF or set to Alarm Only at address 4201 FCT 49. If overload
protection is ON, tripping, trip log and fault recording is possible.
When setting Alarm Only no trip command is given, no trip log is initiated and no spontaneous fault annun-
ciation is shown on the display.
NOTE
i Changing the function parameters resets the thermal replica. The thermal model is frozen (kept constant),
as soon as the current exceeds the setting value 1107 I MOTOR START.
Overload Parameter k-factor

The overload protection is set in reference values. The nominal current ΙNom Obj. of the protected object (motor,
transformer, cable) is used as the basic current for overload protection. By means of the thermal consistently
permissible current Ιmax, a factor kprim can be calculated:
[fo_kfaktor, 1, en_US]
The thermally permissible continuous current for the equipment being protected is known from the manufac-
turers specifications. This function is normally not applicable to overhead lines since the current capability of
overhead lines is generally not specified. For cables, the permissible continuous current is dependent on the
cross-section, insulating material, design, and the cable routing, among other things. It may be taken from
pertinent tables, or is specified by the cable manufacturer. If no specifications are available, a value of 1.1
times the nominal current rating may be assumed.
For the 49 K-FACTOR to be set in the device the following applies (address 4202)
[fo_einstellwert-kfaktor-allg, 2, en_US]
with
Ιmax prim Permissible thermal primary current of the motor
ΙNom Obj. Nominal current of the protected object
ΙNomCT prim Nominal primary CT current
Example: Motor and current transformer with the following data:

Permissible Continuous Current Ιmax prim = 1.2 · ΙNom Obj.
Nominal Motor Current ΙNom Obj. = 1100 A
Current Transformer 1200 A/1 A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Setting value FACTOR K:
[fo_einstellwert-k-faktor_01, 1, en_US]
Overload Parameter k-factor

The overload protection is set in reference values. The nominal current ΙNom Obj. of the protected object (motor,
transformer, cable) is used as the basic current for overload protection. By means of the thermal consistently
permissible current Ιmax, a factor kprim can be calculated:
[fo_kfaktor, 1, en_US]
The thermally permissible continuous current for the equipment being protected is known from the manufac-
turers specifications. This function is normally not applicable to overhead lines since the current capability of
overhead lines is generally not specified. For cables, the permissible continuous current is dependent on the
cross-section, insulating material, design, and the cable routing, among other things. It may be taken from
pertinent tables, or is specified by the cable manufacturer. If no specifications are available, a value of 1.1
times the nominal current rating may be assumed.
For the 49 K-FACTOR to be set in the device the following applies (address 4202)
[fo_einstellwert-kfaktor-allg, 2, en_US]
with
Ιmax prim Permissible thermal primary current of the motor
ΙNom Obj. Nominal current of the protected object
NOTE
i The setting for 49 K-FACTOR (address 4202) has always to be made as a secondary value.
Example: Motor and current transformer with the following data:

Permissible Continuous Current Ιmax prim = 1.2 · ΙNom Obj.
Nominal Motor Current ΙNom Obj. = 1100 A
Current Transformer 1200 A/1 A
Setting value FACTOR K:
[fo_einstellwert-k-faktor_01, 1, en_US]
Time Constant τ
The overload protection tracks overtemperature progression, employing a thermal differential equation whose
steady state solution is an exponential function. The TIME CONSTANT τth (set at address 4203) is used in the
calculation to determine the threshold of overtemperature and thus, the tripping temperature.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
For cable protection, the heat-gain time constant τ is determined by cable specifications and by the cable envi-
ronment. If no time-constant specification is available, it may be determined from the short-term load capa-
bility of the cable. The 1-sec current, i.e. the maximum current permissible for a one-second period of time, is
often known or available from tables. Then, the time constant may be calculated with the formula:
[fo_einstellwert-tau, 1, en_US]
If the short-term load capability is given for an interval other than one second, the corresponding short-term
current is used in the above formula instead of the 1-second current, and the result is multiplied by the given
duration. For example, if the 0.5-second current rating is known:
[fo_einstellwert-tau-05s, 1, en_US]
It is important to note, however, that the longer the effective duration, the less accurate the result.
Example: Cable and current transformer with the following data:
Permissible continuous current Ιmax = 500 A at Θu = 40 °C
Maximum current for 1 s Ι1s = 45 · Ιmax = 22.5 kA
Current transformer 600 A/1 A
Thus results:
[fo_k-0833, 1, en_US]
[fo_tau-3375, 1, en_US]
The settings are: 49 K-FACTOR = 0.83; TIME CONSTANT = 33.75 min
Warning Elements
By setting the thermal warning element 49 Θ ALARM (address 4204), a warning message can be issued
before reaching the tripping temperature. Tripping can thus be avoided by initiating early load reduction
measures. This warning element simultaneously represents the dropout level for the trip signal. Only when
this threshold is undershot, the tripping command will be reset and the protected equipment can be switched
on again.
The thermal element level is given in % of the tripping overtemperature.
A current warning level is also available (parameter 4205 I ALARM). The setting is set as the secondary
current in A (mperes) and should be equal to or slightly less than the permissible current k · ΙNom sec . It can be
used instead of the thermal warning element by setting the thermal warning element to 100 % thus virtually
disabling it.
Extension of Time Constants

TIME CONSTANT set in address 4203 is valid for a running motor. When a motor without external cooling is
running down or at standstill, the motor cools down more slowly. This behavior can be modeled by increasing
the time constant by factor Kτ-FACTOR, set at address 4207. Motor stop is detected if the current falls below
the threshold value BkrClosed I MIN of the current flow monitoring (see side title "Current Flow Moni-
toring" in Subsection 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes). This understands that the motor idle current is greater than this

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
threshold. The pickup threshold BkrClosed I MIN affects also the following protection functions: voltage
protection and restart inhibit for motors.
If no differentiation of the time constants is necessary (e.g. externally-cooled motors, cables, lines, etc.) the
Kτ-FACTOR is set at 1 (default setting value).
Dropout Time after Emergency Starting

The dropout time to be entered at address 4208 T EMERGENCY must ensure that after an emergency startup
and after dropout of the binary input >EmergencyStart the trip command is blocked until the thermal
replica is below the dropout threshold again.
Ambient or Coolant Temperature

The specifications made up to now are sufficient to model the overtemperature. The ambient or coolant
temperature, however, can also be processed. This has to be communicated to the device as digitalized meas-
ured value via the interface. During configuration, parameter 142 49 must be set to With amb. temp..
If the ambient temperature detection is used, the user must be aware that the 49 K-FACTOR to be set refers
to an ambient temperature of 104° F or 40° C, i.e. it corresponds to the maximum permissible current at a
temperature of 104° F or 40° C.
Since all calculations are performed with standardized quantities, the ambient temperature must also be
standardized. The temperature at nominal current is used as standardized quantity. If the nominal current
deviates from the nominal CT current, the temperature must be adapted according to the formula following.
In address 4209 or 4210 49 TEMP. RISE I the temperature adapted to the nominal transformer current is
set. This setting value is used as standardization quantity for the ambient temperature input.
[fo_maschinentemperatur, 1, en_US]
with
ΘNom sec Machine temperatur at secondary nominal current = setting at the protection
device (address 4209 or 4210)
ΘNom Mach Machine temperature at nominal machine current
ΙNom Mach Nominal current of the machine
If the temperature input is used, the tripping times change if the coolant temperature deviates from the
internal reference temperature of 104° F or 40° C. The following formula can be used to calculate the tripping
time:
[fo_tripping time, 1, en_US]
with
τ TIME CONSTANT (address 4203)
k 49 K-FACTOR (address 4202)
ΙNom Nominal device current in A
Ι Fault current through phase in A
Ιpre Prefault current
ΘNom Temperature at nominal current ΙNom (address 4209 49 TEMP. RISE I)
Θk Coolant temperature input (scaling with address 4209 or 4210)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Example:
Maschine: ΙNom Mach = 483 A
Ιmax Mach= 1.15 ΙNom at Θk = 40 °C
ΘNom Mach= 93 °C Temperature at ΙNom Mach
τth = 600 s (thermal time constant of the machine)
Current transformer: 500 A/1 A
[fo_einstellwert-k-111, 1, en_US]
[fo_einstellwert-temperatur-100, 1, en_US]
Motor Starting Recognition

The motor starting is detected when setting I MOTOR START at address 1107 is exceeded. Information on
how to perform the configuration is given under "Recognition of Running Condition (only for motors)" in
Subsection 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes.
2.11.3 Settings
4201 FCT 49 OFF OFF 49 Thermal overload
ON protection
Alarm Only
4202 49 K-FACTOR 0.10 .. 4.00 1.10 49 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT 1.0 .. 999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
4204 49 Θ ALARM 50 .. 100 % 90 % 49 Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A Setpoint
4207A Kτ-FACTOR 1.0 .. 10.0 1.0 Kt-FACTOR when motor
stops
4208A T EMERGENCY 10 .. 15000 sec 100 sec Emergency time
4209 49 TEMP. RISE I 40 .. 200 °C 100 °C 49 Temperature rise at
rated sec. curr.
4210 49 TEMP. RISE I 104 .. 392 °F 212 °F 49 Temperature rise at
rated sec. curr.
4211 TEMPSENSOR RTD 1 .. 6 1 Temperature sensor
connected to RTD
4212 TEMPSENSOR RTD 1 .. 12 1 Temperature sensor
connected to RTD

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
1503 >BLOCK 49 O/L SP >BLOCK 49 Overload Protection
1507 >EmergencyStart SP >Emergency start of motors
1511 49 O / L OFF OUT 49 Overload Protection is OFF
1512 49 O/L BLOCK OUT 49 Overload Protection is BLOCKED
1513 49 O/L ACTIVE OUT 49 Overload Protection is ACTIVE
1515 49 O/L I Alarm OUT 49 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm)
1516 49 O/L Θ Alarm OUT 49 Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip
1517 49 Winding O/L OUT 49 Winding Overload
1521 49 Th O/L TRIP OUT 49 Thermal Overload TRIP
1580 >RES 49 Image SP >49 Reset of Thermal Overload Image
1581 49 Image res. OUT 49 Thermal Overload Image reset

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.12 Supervision Functions

The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and software. In addition,
the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibility, therefore, the current transformer and
voltage transformer circuits are largely integrated into the monitoring.
2.12.1 Measurement Supervision
2.12.1.1 General
The device monitoring extends from the measuring inputs to the binary outputs. Monitoring checks the hard-
ware for malfunctions and abnormal conditions.
Hardware and software monitoring described in the following are enabled continuously. Settings (including
the possibility to activate and deactivate the monitoring function) refer to the monitoring of external trans-
former circuits.
2.12.1.2 Hardware Monitoring
Auxiliary and Reference Voltages

Failure of or switching off the supply voltage removes the device from operation and a message is immedi-
ately generated by a normally closed contact. Brief auxiliary voltage interruptions of less than 50 ms do not
disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary voltage > 110 VDC).
The processor monitors the offset and reference voltage of the ADC (analog-digital converter). The protection
is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable range, and lengthy deviations are reported.
Buffer Battery
The buffer battery, which ensures operation of the internal clock and storage of counters and messages if the
auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for charge status. If it is less than an allowed minimum voltage,
then the Fail Battery message is issued.
Memory Components
All working memories (RAMs) are checked during startup. If a malfunction occurs then, the starting sequence
is interrupted and an LED blinks. During operation the memories are checked with the help of their checksum.
For the program memory, the cross sum is formed cyclically and compared to the stored program cross sum.
For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed cyclically and compared to the cross sum that is freshly
generated each time a setting process takes place.
If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.
Scanning
Scanning and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are constantly monitored. If any
deviations cannot be removed by renewed synchronization, then the processor system is restarted.
Measurement Value Acquisition – Currents

The monitoring of the device-internal measured-value acquisition of the currents can be effected via the
current sum monitoring.
Up to four input currents are measured by the device. If the three phase currents and the ground current from
the current transformer neutral point are connected with the device, the sum of the four digitized currents
must be zero. This also applies in the event of a possible transformer saturation. For that reason – in order to
eliminate pickup upon transformer saturation – this function is only available in a Holmgreen-connection (see
also Section 2.1.3.2). Faults in the current circuits are recognized if
ΙF = | iA + iB + iC + iE | > Σ I THRESHOLD + Σ I FACTOR · Σ | Ι |

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Σ I THRESHOLD (address 8106) and Σ I FACTOR (address 8107) are setting parameters. The component Σ
I FACTOR · Σ | Ι | takes into account the permissible current proportional ratio errors of the input transducers
which are particularly prevalent during large short-circuit currents (Figure 2-67). The dropout ratio is about 97
%.
[stromsummenueberwachung-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-67 Current sum monitoring
An error in the current sum results in the message Failure Σ I (No. 162) and blocking of the protection
function. Furthermore, a fault log is initiated for a period of 100 ms.
The monitoring can be switched off.
The monitoring is available subject to the following conditions:
• The three phase currents are connected to the device (address 251 A, B, C, (Gnd))
• The ground current of the current transformer neutral point is connected to the fourth current input (Ι4)
(Holmgreen-connection). This is communicated to the device in the Power System Data 1 via address 280
YES.
• The fourth current input is normally designed for a Ι4–transformer. In case of a sensitive transformer
type, this monitoring is not available.
• The settings CT PRIMARY (address 204) and Ignd-CT PRIM (address 217) must be the same.
• The settings CT SECONDARY (address 205) and Ignd-CT SEC (address 218) must be the same.
The following logic diagram illustrates the operational mode of the current sum monitoring.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x-stromsummenueberw-20070315, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-68 Logic Diagram of the fast current sum monitoring
AD Transformer Monitoring
The digitized sampled values are being monitored in respect of their plausibility. If the result is not plausible,
message 181 Error A/D-conv. is issued. The protection is blocked, thus preventing unwanted operation.
Furthermore, a fault record is generated for recording of the internal fault.
2.12.1.3 Monitoring of the Hardware Modules
The device is able to recognize location and malfunctions of hardware modules during operation. In the event
of a fault, messages Error Board 1 (FNo. 183) to Error Board 7 (FNo. 189) are initiated. The module
number corresponds to the address number. For the assignment of addresses to modules as well as slot posi-
tions of the modules in the device, please refer to the following table.
Table 2-12 Assignment of the Addresses to the Slot Positions in the Device (View of the Open Housing)
Device Housing Module Slot Position

I/5 I/6 I/7 I/12 I/25 I/27
7SJ661 1/3 BI Board Insulation CPU + Com Power Supply VT/CT Board Metal Support
Support Plate Board Board
7SJ662 1/3 BI Board Insulation CPU + Com + Power Supply VT/CT Board Metal Support
Support Plate Extension BIO Board Board
Device Housing Module Slot Position
I/3 I/7 I/8 I/13 I/18 I/23 I/39 I/41
7SJ663 1/2 BI Board Insulation CPU + BIO BIO Power VT/CT Metal
Support Com Board Board Supply Board Support
Plate Board Board

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.12.1.4 Software Monitoring
Watchdog
For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the hardware (hardware
watchdog) that expires upon failure of the processor or an internal program, and causes a complete restart of
the processor system.
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of programs are discov-
ered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.
If such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart attempt is begun. After three unsuc-
cessful restarts within a 30 second window of time, the device automatically removes itself from service and
the red “Error” LED lights up. The readiness relay drops out and indicates „device malfunction“ with its normally
closed contact.
Offset Monitoring
This monitoring function checks all ring buffer data channels for corrupt offset replication of the analog/digital
transformers and the analog input paths using offset filters. Possible offset errors are detected using DC filters,
and the associated sampled values are corrected up to a specific limit. If this limit is exceeded, an indication is
generated (191 Error Offset) and integrated into the warning group indication (160). As increased offset
values impair the measurements, we recommend sending the device to the OEM plant for corrective action
should this indication persist.
The Offset monitoring can be blocked via the binary input signal >Blk.offset s. (No. 17565).
2.12.1.5 Monitoring of the Transformer Circuits

Open circuits or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current and voltage transformers, as well as
faults in the connections (important during commissioning!), are detected and reported by the device. The
measured quantities are periodically checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is
present.
Current Symmetry
During normal system operation, symmetry among the input currents is expected. The monitoring of the
measured values in the device checks this balance. The smallest phase current is compared to the largest
phase current. Asymmetry is detected if | Ιmin | / | Ιmax | < BAL. FACTOR I as long as Ιmax > BALANCE I
LIMIT is valid.
Thereby Ιmax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin the smallest. The symmetry factor BAL.
FACTOR I (address 8105) represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase currents while the limit value
BALANCE I LIMIT (address 8104) is the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see
Figure 2-69). Both parameters can be set. The dropout ratio is about 97 %.
This fault is signalled after settable delay time with Fail I balance.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[stromsymmetrieueberwachung-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-69 Current symmetry monitoring
Voltage Symmetry
During normal system operation, balance among the voltages is expected. Since the phase-to-phase voltages
are insensitive to ground faults, the phase-to-phase voltages are used for balance monitoring. If the device is
connected to the phase-to-ground voltages, then the phase-to-phase voltages are calculated accordingly,
whereas, if the device is connected to phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage V0, then the third
phase-to-phase voltage is calculated accordingly. From the phase-to-phase voltages, the device generates the
rectified average values and checks the balance of their absolute values. The smallest phase voltage is
compared with the largest phase voltage.
Asymmetry is recognized if
| Vmin | / | Vmax | < BAL. FACTOR V as long as | Vmax | > BALANCE V-LIMIT. Where Vmax is the highest of the
three voltages and Vmin the smallest. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR V (address 8103) represents the
allowable asymmetry of the conductor voltages while the limit value BALANCE V-LIMIT (address 8102) is
the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-70). Both parameters can be set. The
dropout ratio is about 97%.
This fault is signalled after settable delay time with Fail V balance.
[Voltage symmetry monitoring, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-70 Voltage Symmetry Monitoring

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Phase Sequence of Voltage and Current

To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the phase sequence of the
phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents are checked by monitoring the sequence of same
polarity zero crossing of the voltages.
Direction measurement with normal voltages, path selection for fault location, and negative sequence detec-
tion all assume a phase sequence of "abc". Phase rotation of measurement quantities is checked by verifying
the phase sequences. For that purpose, the phase-sequence monitoring uses the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, VCA.
Voltages: VAB before VBC before VCA
Currents: ΙA before ΙB before ΙC.
Verification of the voltage phase rotation is done when each measured voltage is at least
|VAB|, |VBC|, |VCA| > 40 V
Verification of the current phase rotation is done when each measured current is at least:
|ΙA|, |ΙB|, |ΙC| > 0.5 ΙN.
For abnormal phase sequences, the messages Fail Ph. Seq. V or Fail Ph. Seq. I are issued, along
with the switching of this message Fail Ph. Seq..
For applications in which an opposite phase sequence is expected, the protective relay should be adjusted via
a binary input or the respective parameter PHASE SEQ. (address 209). If the phase sequence is changed in
the relay, phases B and C internal to the relay are reversed, and the positive and negative sequence currents
are thereby exchanged (see also Section 2.24.2 Setting Notes). The phase-related messages, malfunction
values, and measured values are not affected by this.
2.12.1.6 Measurement Voltage Failure Detection
Requirements
The measurement voltage failure detection function, referred to as “Fuse Failure Monitor” (FFM), only oper-
ates under the following condition:
• Three phase-to-ground voltages are connected; with phase-to-phase voltages and VN or single-phase
connection, the function is disabled.
Purpose of the Fuse Failure Monitor

In case of a measuring voltage failure caused by a fault or a broken wire in the voltage transformer secondary
system, a zero voltage can be simulated to individual measuring loops.
The displacement voltage element of the sensitive ground fault detection, the directional overcurrent protec-
tion, the voltage-controlled inverse time non-directional overcurrent protection, the undervoltage protection
and the synchronization function in the 7SJ66 can thereby acquire incorrect measuring results.
Of course, supervision of the miniature circuit breaker and the Fuse Failure Monitor can be used at the same
time.
Mode of Operation – Grounded System

The device is informed of the application of the FFM in a grounded system via address 5301 FUSE FAIL
MON. Solid grounded.
NOTE
i On systems where the ground fault current is very small or absent (e.g. ungrounded supply transformers),
fuse failure monitoring must be disabled or set to Coil.gnd./isol..
The logic diagram on the operating mode in a grounded system is illustrated in Figure 2-71. Depending on the
configuration and MLFB, the FFM operates with measured or calculated values VN or ΙN. If zero sequence
voltage occurs without a ground fault current being registered simultaneously, then there is an asymmetrical
fault in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The displacement voltage element of the sensitive ground fault detection, the directional overcurrent protec-
tion (phase and ground function), the voltage-controlled inverse time non-directional overcurrent protection,
the undervoltage protection and the synchronization function are blocked if parameter 5310 BLOCK PROT. is
set to YES.
The FFM picks up if the ground voltage VN is higher than the set limit value under address5302 FUSE FAIL
3Vo and if the ground current IN lies below the set limit value under address 5303 FUSE FAIL RESID.
Pickup occurs in accordance with the configured values. A hysteresis of 105% for the dropout is integrated for
ΙN or 95% for VN. In case of low-current asymmetrical faults in systems with week infeed, the ground current
caused by the fault could lie below the pickup threshold of the Fuse Failure Monitor. Overfunctioning of the
Fuse Failure Monitor can, however, cause the feeder protection device to underfunction since all protection
functions that use voltage signals are blocked. In order to prevent overfunctioning of the FFM, the phase
currents are also checked. If at least one phase current lies above the pickup threshold of 5303 FUSE FAIL
RESID, it can be assumed that the zero current created by a fault will equally exceed this threshold.
In order to immediately detect an existing fault after switching in, the following applies: If a ground current ΙN
is detected within 10 seconds after recognition of the Fuse Failure criterion, the protection assumes a fault
and removes the blocking by the Fuse Failure Monitor for the duration of the fault. If, on the other hand, the
voltage failure criterion is present for longer than approx. 10 s, the blocking is permanently activated. After
this time has elapsed, it can be assumed that a fuse failure has actually occurred. Only 10 s after the voltage
criterion has been removed by correction of the secondary circuit failure, will the blocking automatically reset,
thereby releasing the blocked protection functions.
The generation of the internal signal “Alarm FFM” for the operation in isolated systems is shown in
Figure 2-72.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lo_FFM for grounded networks, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-71 Logic Diagram of the Fuse Failure Monitor for Grounded Networks
Mode of Operation – Isolated System and 3-phase Fuse Failure

The FFM can also function in isolated and compensated (grounded) systems where only low ground currents
are expected. This is indicated to the device via address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON..
The logic diagram on the functioning in an isolated system and for 3-phase fuse failure is shown in
Figure 2-72. The following is a description of the principles for 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase faults in a secon-
dary voltage transformer system. If this part of the FFM logic picks up, the internal signal “Alarm FFM” is gener-
ated. The processing of this signal is shown in Figure 2-71.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lo_ FFM for isolated and grounded systems, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-72 Logic Diagram of the Fuse Failure Monitor for Isolated Systems
Single- and Two-phase Failures in Voltage Transformer Circuits

The measuring voltage failure detection is based on the fact that a significant negative sequence system is
formed in the voltage during single- or two-phase voltage failure, however without influencing the current.
This enables a clear distinction from asymmetries impressed by the power system. If the negative sequence
system is related to the current positive sequence system, the following rules apply to the Fault-free Case:
[fo_u2-u1-fehlerfreier-fall, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs in the voltage transformer secondary system, the following rules apply to the Single-phase
Failure:
[fo_u2-u1-einpoliger-ausfall, 1, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
If a fault occurs in the voltage transformer secondary system, the following rules apply to the Two-phase
Failure:
[fo_u2-u1-zweipoliger-ausfall, 1, en_US]
In case of a failure of one or two phases of the primary system, the current also shows a negative sequence
system of 0.5 or 1. Consequently, the voltage monitoring does not respond since no voltage transformer fault
can be present. In order to avoid occurrence of an overfunctioning of the measuring voltage failure detection
due to inaccuracy, the function is blocked below a minimum threshold of the positive sequence systems of
voltage (V1 << 0.1 VNom) and current (Ι1 << 0.1 ΙNom).
Three-phase Failures in Voltage Transformer Circuits

A 3-phase failure in the voltage transformer secondary system cannot be detected via the positive- and nega-
tive- sequence system as described above. The monitoring of the progress of current and voltage over time is
required here. If a voltage dip to almost zero occurs (or if the voltage is zero), and the current remains
unchanged, a 3-phase failure in the voltage transformer secondary system can be concluded. The jump detec-
tion is used for this purpose. The sensitivity of the jump detection for current can be increased via parameter
FFM Idiff (3ph).
2.12.1.7 Broken Wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits
Requirements
This function is only available in device version “World” (Ordering Information Pos. 10 = B), as it is only used in
certain regions.
Furthermore, the measurement of all three phase-to-ground voltages is a requirement.
If only two phase-to-phase voltages were measured, it would not be possible to evaluate two of the required
criteria.
Task
The “Broken Wire” monitoring function monitors the voltage transformer circuits of the secondary system with
regard to failure. One distinguishes between single-phase, two-phase and three-phase failures.
Mode of Operation / Logic

All three phase-to-ground voltages, the displacement voltage and the three phase currents are measured. The
required values are calculated for the respective criteria and eventually a decision is made. The resulting alarm
message may be delayed. A blocking of the protection functions is however not effected. This is done by the
measuring voltage failure detection.
The “Broken Wire” monitoring is also active during a fault. The function may be enabled or disabled.
The following logic diagram shows how “Broken Wire” monitoring functions.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lo_broken wire monitoring, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-73 Logic Diagram for Broken Wire Monitoring
Measured Value Monitoring

The sensitivity of measured value monitor can be modified. Default values which are sufficient in most cases
are preset. If especially high operating asymmetries in the currents and/or voltages are to be expected during
operation, or if it becomes apparent during operation that certain monitoring functions activate sporadically,
then the setting should be less sensitive.
Address 8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT determines the limit voltage (phase-to-phase) above which the voltage
symmetry monitor is effective. Address 8103 BAL. FACTOR V is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the
slope of the symmetry characteristic curve. In address 8110 T BAL. V LIMIT you set the delay time of fault
message no. 167 Fail V balance.
Address 8104 BALANCE I LIMIT determines the limit current above which the current symmetry monitor is
effective. Address 8105 BAL. FACTOR I is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the
symmetry characteristic curve. In address 8111 T BAL. I LIMIT you set the delay time for fault message
no. 163 Fail I balance.
Address 8106 Σ I THRESHOLD determines the limit current above which the current sum monitoring is acti-
vated (absolute portion, only relative to ΙNom). The relative portion (relative to the maximum conductor
current) for activating the current sum monitor is set at address 8107 Σ I FACTOR.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
NOTE
i Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the protected line is fed to
the fourth current input (ΙN) of the relay (see Power System Data 1). Furthermore, the fourth current input
(ΙN) may not be sensitive.
NOTE
i The connections of the ground paths and their adaption factors were set when configuring the general
Power System Data. These settings must be correct for the measured values monitoring to function prop-
erly.
Measured value monitoring can be set to ON or OFF at address 8101 MEASURE. SUPERV.
Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM)

Via address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON. you select under which system conditions the FFM works. Depending on
that, make the required settings in the grounded system via the parameters 5302, 5303 and 5308. In a
grounded/isolated system, only the parameter 5308 is relevant.
The settings for the fuse failure monitor must be selected in such manner that reliable activation occurs if a
phase voltage fails, but that false activation does not occur during ground faults in a grounded network.
Address 5303 FUSE FAIL RESID must be set as sensitive as required (with ground faults, below the smallest
fault current).
The FFM picks up if the ground voltage VN is higher than the set limit value under address 5302 FUSE FAIL
3Vo and if the ground current IN lies below the set limit value under address 5303 FUSE FAIL RESID.
In order to detect a three-phase failure, the progress in time of current and voltage is monitored. If the voltage
sinks below the threshold value without a change in the current value, a three-phase failure is detected. This
threshold value of the current element must be set under address 5308 FFM Idiff (3ph). The threshold value
should be identical with the definite time overcurrent protection.
Under address 5310 BLOCK PROT. it can be determined whether the protection functions should be blocked
upon pickup by the FFM.
NOTE
i The setting under address 5310 BLOCK PROT. has no effect on the flexible protection functions. A sepa-
rate blocking can be selected for that purpose.
The function may be disabled in address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON., e.g. when performing asymmetrical tests.
2.12.1.9 Settings
5201 VT BROKEN WIRE ON OFF VT broken wire supervision
OFF
5202 Σ V> 1.0 .. 100.0 V 8.0 V Threshold voltage sum
5203 Vph-ph max< 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Maximum phase to phase
voltage
5204 Vph-ph min< 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Minimum phase to phase
voltage
5205 Vph-ph max-min> 10.0 .. 200.0 V 16.0 V Symmetry phase to phase
voltages

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

5206 I min> 1A 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A Minimum line current
5A 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A
5208 T DELAY ALARM 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 1.25 sec Alarm delay time
5301 FUSE FAIL MON. OFF OFF Fuse Fail Monitor
Solid grounded
Coil.gnd./isol.
5302 FUSE FAIL 3Vo 10 .. 100 V 30 V Zero Sequence Voltage
5303 FUSE FAIL RESID 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Residual Current
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
5308A FFM Idiff (3ph) 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Differential Current
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A Threshold (3phase)
5310 BLOCK PROT. NO YES Block protection by FFM
YES
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV OFF ON Measurement Supervision
ON
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for
Balance Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V 0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A Balance Monitoring
8105 BAL. FACTOR I 0.10 .. 0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A Summated Current Moni-
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A toring Threshold
8107 Σ I FACTOR 0.00 .. 0.95 0.10 Summated Current Moni-
toring Factor
8109 FAST Σ i MONIT OFF ON Fast Summated Current
ON Monitoring
8110A T BAL. V LIMIT 0 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Balance Factor for
Voltage Monitor
8111A T BAL. I LIMIT 0 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Current Balance Monitor

Informa-
tion
161 Fail I Superv. OUT Failure: General Current Supervision
162 Failure Σ I OUT Failure: Current Summation
163 Fail I balance OUT Failure: Current Balance
167 Fail V balance OUT Failure: Voltage Balance
169 VT FuseFail>10s OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm >10s)
170 VT FuseFail OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous)
171 Fail Ph. Seq. OUT Failure: Phase Sequence
175 Fail Ph. Seq. I OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Current
176 Fail Ph. Seq. V OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
197 MeasSup OFF OUT Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
253 VT brk. wire OUT Failure VT circuit: broken wire

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
255 Fail VT circuit OUT Failure VT circuit
256 VT b.w. 1 pole OUT Failure VT circuit: 1 pole broken wire
6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT SP >Failure: Feeder VT
6510 >FAIL: BUS VT SP >Failure: Busbar VT
2.12.2 Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC
Device 7SJ66 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit supervision. Depending on the number of available
binary inputs (not connected to a common potential), supervision with one or two binary inputs can be
selected. If the allocation of the required binary inputs does not match the selected supervision type, then a
message to this effect is generated (74TC ProgFail).
Applications
• When using two binary inputs, malfunctions in the trip circuit can be detected under all circuit breaker
conditions.
• When only one binary input is used, malfunctions in the circuit breaker itself cannot be detected.
Prerequisites
A requirement for the use of trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for the circuit breaker is at least
twice the voltage drop across the binary input (VCt > 2 · VBImin).
Since at least 19 V are needed for the binary input, the supervision can only be used with a system control
voltage of over 38 V.
Supervision with Two Binary Inputs

When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 2-74, parallel to the associated trip
contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts on the other.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[prinzip-ausloesekreisueberwachung-2-binein-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-74 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision with two binary inputs not only detects interruptions in the trip circuit and loss of control voltage,
it also supervises the response of the circuit breaker using the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are activated (logical
condition "H" in Table 2-13), or not activated (logical condition "L").
In healthy trip circuits the condition that both binary inputs are not actuated (”L") is only possible during a
short transition period (trip contact is closed but the circuit breaker has not yet opened). A continuous state of
this condition is only possible when the trip circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit,
a loss of battery voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism. Therefore, it is
used as supervision criterion.
Table 2-13 Condition table for binary inputs, depending on RTC and CB position
No. Trip contact Circuit breaker 52a Contact 52b Contact BI 1 BI 2

1 Open Closed Closed Open H L
2 Open Open Open Closed H H
3 Closed Closed Closed Open L L
4 Closed Open Open Closed L H
The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place about every 600 ms. If
three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality (after 1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see
Figure 2-75). The repeated measurements determine the delay of the alarm message and avoid that an alarm
is output during short transition periods. After the malfunction in the trip circuit is cleared, the fault annuncia-
tion is reset automatically after the same time period.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_ausloesekreis_2_binaerein-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-75 Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision with One Binary Input

The binary input is connected according to the following figure in parallel with the associated trip contact of
the protection relay. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is bridged with a bypass resistor R.
Figure 2-76 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition "H") when the trip contact is open and
the trip circuit is intact, because the monitoring circuit is closed by either the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary
contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or through the bypass resistor R by the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary
contact. Only as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary input is short circuited and thereby deactivated
(logical condition "L").
If the binary input is continuously deactivated during operation, this leads to the conclusion that there is an
interruption in the trip circuit or loss of control voltage.
As the trip circuit supervision does not operate during system faults, the closed trip contact does not lead to a
fault message. If, however, tripping contacts from other devices operate in parallel with the trip circuit, then
the fault message must be delayed (see also Figure 2-77). The delay time can be set via parameter 8202
Alarm Delay. A message is only released after expiry of this time. After clearance of the fault in the trip
circuit, the fault message is automatically reset.
[7sj6x_ausloesekreis_1_binaerein-050906-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-77 Logic diagram of trip circuit supervision with one binary input

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the message that can be generated by the trip circuit
monitor, depending on the control settings and binary inputs.
[7sj6x_ausloesekreis_meldelogik-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-78 Message logic for trip circuit supervision
General
The function is only effective and accessible if address 182 (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes) was set to either 2
Binary Inputs or 1 Binary Input during configuration, the appropriate number of binary inputs has
been configured accordingly for this purpose and the function FCT 74TC is ON at address 8201. If the alloca-
tion of the required binary inputs does not match the selected supervision type, a message to this effect is
generated (74TC ProgFail). If the trip circuit monitor is not to be used at all, then Disabled is set at
address 182.
In order to ensure that the longest possible duration of a trip command can be reliably bridged, and an indica-
tion is generated in case of an actual fault in the trip circuit, the indication regarding a trip circuit interruption
is delayed. The time delay is set under address 8202 Alarm Delay.
Supervision with One Binary Input

Note: When using only one binary input (BI) for the trip circuit monitor, malfunctions, such as interruption of
the trip circuit or loss of battery voltage are detected in general, but trip circuit failures while a trip command
is active cannot be detected. Therefore, the measurement must take place over a period of time that bridges
the longest possible duration of a closed trip contact. This is ensured by the fixed number of measurement
repetitions and the time between the state checks.
When using only one binary input, a resistor R is inserted into the circuit on the system side, instead of the
missing second binary input. Through appropriate sizing of the resistor and depending on the system condi-
tions, a lower control voltage is mostly sufficient.
Information for dimensioning resistor R is given in the Chapter "Installation and Commissioning" under Config-
uration Notes in the Section "Trip Circuit Supervision".

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.12.2.3 Settings

8201 FCT 74TC ON ON 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervision
OFF
8202 Alarm Delay 1 .. 30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm

Informa-
tion
6851 >BLOCK 74TC SP >BLOCK 74TC
6852 >74TC trip rel. SP >74TC Trip circuit superv.: trip relay
6853 >74TC brk rel. SP >74TC Trip circuit superv.: brk relay
6861 74TC OFF OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF
6862 74TC BLOCKED OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED
6863 74TC ACTIVE OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE
6864 74TC ProgFail OUT 74TC blocked. Bin. input is not set
6865 74TC Trip cir. OUT 74TC Failure Trip Circuit
2.12.3 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions
In the following malfunction responses of monitoring equipment are clearly listed.
2.12.3.1 Description
Malfunction Responses
Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of the processor system is
initiated, or the device is taken out of service. After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is taken out
of service. The operational readiness NC contact operates to indicate the device is malfunctioning. Also, the
red LED ”ERROR" lights up on the front cover, if the internal auxiliary voltage is present, and the green ”RUN"
LED goes out. If the internal auxiliary voltage fails, all LEDs are dark. Table 2-14 provides a summary of the
monitoring functions and the malfunction responses of the relay.
Table 2-14 Summary of malfunction responses by the protection relay
Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction Message (No.) Output

Response
AC/DC supply voltage loss External Device shutdown All LEDs dark DOK2) drops
(Nominal voltage) out
internal (power
supply)
Internal supply voltages Internal (power Device shutdown LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
supply) out
Buffer battery Internal (buffer Message Fail Battery (177)
battery)
Hardware watchdog Internal Device shutdown1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
(processor failure) out
Software watchdog Internal Restart attempt 1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
(processor failure) out
Working memory ROM Internal (hardware) Relay aborts restart, LED blinkt DOK2) drops
device shutdown out

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction Message (No.) Output

Response
Program memory RAM Internal (hardware) During boot sequence LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
Detection during oper- LED "ERROR" out
ation:
Restart attempt1)
Settings memory Internal (hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Sampling frequency Internal (hardware) Device shutdown LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Measured value acquisition External (hardware) Blocking by the protec- Error A/D-conv. DOK2) drops
tion function (181), out
LED "ERROR"
Error in the I/O-board Internal (hardware) Device shutdown I/O-Board error DOK2) drops
(178), out
LED "ERROR"
Module error Internal (hardware) Device shutdown Error Board 1 to DOK2) drops
Error Board 7 (178 out
to 189),
LED "ERROR"
0V monitoring Internal (hardware) Device shutdown Error 0V (145), DOK2) drops
LED "ERROR" out
Offset monitoring Internal (hardware) Device shutdown Error Offset (191) DOK2) drops
out
Internal supply voltages Internal (hardware) Device shutdown Error PwrSupply DOK2) drops
(147), out
LED "ERROR"
Current sum Internal Device shutdown Failure Σ I (162) DOK2) drops
(measured value out
acquisition)
Current symmetry External (power Message Fail I balance As allocated
system or current (163)
transformer)
Voltage symmetry External (power Message Fail V balance As allocated
system or voltage (167)
transformer)
Voltage phase sequence External (power Message Fail Ph. Seq. V As allocated
system or connec- 176)
tion)
Current phase sequence External (power Message Fail Ph. Seq. I As allocated
system or connec- (175)
tion)
Fuse Failure Monitor External Message VT FuseFail>10s As allocated
(voltage transformer) (169)
VT FuseFail (170)
Trip circuit monitoring External (trip circuit Message 74TC Trip cir. As allocated
or control voltage) (6865)
Secondary voltage transformer External (voltage Message VT brk. wire (253) As allocated
circuit monitoring transformer circuit
interruption)
Calibration data fault Internal (hardware) Message Alarm NO calibr As allocated
(193)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
1) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is shut down.

2) DOK = "Device Okay" = Ready for service relay drops off, protection and control functions are blocked.
Group Alarms
Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms. A listing of the group
alarms and their composition is given in the Appendix F.4 Group Indications. In this case, it must be noted that
message 160 Alarm Sum Event is only issued when the measured value monitoring functions (8101
MEASURE. SUPERV) are activated.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.13 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)

Depending on the variant, the fourth current input of the multi-functional protection relays 7SJ66 is equipped
either with a sensitive input transformer or a standard transformer for 1/5 A.
In the first case, the protective function is designed for ground fault detection in isolated or compensated
systems due to its high sensitivity. It is not really suited for ground fault detection with large ground currents
since the linear range is transcended at about 1.6 A at the sensitive ground fault detection relay terminals.
If the relay is equipped with a standard transformer for 1/5 A currents, large currents can also be detected
correctly.
This function can operate in two modes. The standard procedure, the “cos-φ– / sin-φ measurement”, evaluates
the part of the ground current perpendicular to the settable directional characteristic.
The second procedure, the “U0/I0-φ measurement”, calculates the angle between ground current and
displacement voltage. For this procedure, two different directional characteristics can be set.
Applications
• Sensitive ground fault detection may be used in isolated or compensated systems to detect ground faults,
to determine phases affected by ground faults, and to specify the direction of ground faults.
• In solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground fault detection is used to detect high
impedance ground faults.
• This function can also be used as supplementary ground fault protection.
2.13.1 Ground Fault Detection for cos-φ / sin-φ Measurement (Standard Method)
Voltage Element
The voltage element relies on a pickup initiated by the displacement voltage V0 or 3 · V0. Additionally, the
faulty phase is determined. The displacement voltage V0 can be directly applied to the device, or the summary
voltage 3 · V0 can be calculated by the device based on the three phase–to–ground voltages. In the latter case,
the three voltage inputs must be connected to voltage transformers in a grounded-wye configuration (see also
address 213 VT Connect. 3ph in Subsection 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). If the device is only provided
with phase-to-phase voltages, it is not possible to calculate a displacement voltage from them. In this case the
direction cannot be determined.
If the displacement voltage is calculated, then:
3 · V0 = VA + VB + VC
If the displacement voltage is directly applied to the device, then V0 is the voltage at the device terminals. It is
not affected by parameter Vph / Vdelta (address 206).
The displacement voltage is used both to detect a ground fault and to determine direction. When the voltage
element picks up, a preset time delay must elapse before detection of the displacement voltage is reported to
be able to record stable measurement quantities. The time delay can be configured (T-DELAY Pickup) and
its factory setting is 1 s.
Pickup performed by the displacement voltage can be delayed (64-1 DELAY) for tripping.
It is important to note that the total tripping time then consists of the displacement voltage measurement
time (about 50 ms) plus the pickup time delay T-DELAY Pickup plus the tripping delay 64-1 DELAY.
After the voltage element picks up due to detection of a displacement voltage, the grounded phase is identi-
fied, if possible. To do this, the individual phase-to-ground voltages are measured. Of course, this is only
possible if three phase-to-ground voltages are obtained from voltage transformers connected in a grounded
wye configuration. If the voltage magnitude for any given phase is below the setting value VPh min, that phase
is detected as the grounded phase as long as the remaining phase-to-ground voltages are simultaneously
above the setting value VPh max.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_erdschlussbehaftete_phase-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-79 Determination of Grounded Phase
Current Elements
The current elements for ground faults operate with the magnitudes of the ground current. It is sensible to
employ them only where the magnitude of the ground current can be used to specify the ground fault. This
may be the case on grounded systems (solid or low-resistance) or on electrical machines which are directly
connected to the busbar of an isolated power system, when in case of a network ground fault the machine
supplies only a negligible ground fault current across the measurement location, which must be situated
between the machine terminals and the network, whereas in case of a machine ground fault the higher
ground fault current produced by the total network is available. Ground current protection is mostly used as
backup protection for high resistance ground faults in solid or low resistance grounded systems when the
main fault protection does not pickup.
For ground fault protection, two-step current/time characteristic can be set. Analog to the overcurrent protec-
tion, the high-set current element is designated as 50Ns-2 PICKUP and 50Ns-2 DELAY and is provided
with a definite time characteristic. The overcurrent element 50Ns-1 PICKUP works with definite time delay
(50Ns-1 PICKUP and 50Ns-1 DELAY). The 51Ns PICKUP element may be operated with either a user-
defined characteristic (51Ns PICKUP and 51NsTIME DIAL) or an inverse-time characteristic according to
IEC or ANSI standards. Additionally, a current element with logarithmic inverse characteristic or logarithmic
inverse characteristic with knee point is implemented. The characteristics of these current elements can be
configured. Each of these elements may be directional or non-directional.
The pickup of the definite time overcurrent protection can be stabilized by the configured dropout delay time
(address 3121 50Ns T DROP-OUT).
The dropout delay only works if the current stage is operated independently of the voltage stage. Parameter
3130 PU CRITERIA is set to Vgnd OR INs.
Determination of Direction
When determining the sensitive ground fault direction it is not the current value that is crucial, but the part of
the current which is perpendicular to a settable directional characteristic (axis of symmetry). As a prerequisite
for determining the direction, the displacement voltage V0 must be exceeded as well as a configurable current
part influencing the direction (active or reactive component).
The following figure illustrates an example using a complex vector diagram in which the displacement voltage
V0 is the reference magnitude of the real axis. The active part 3Ι0real of current 3Ι0 is calculated with reference
to the displacement voltage V0 and compared with setting value RELEASE DIRECT.. The example is there-

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
fore suitable for ground fault direction in resonant grounded systems where quantity 3Ι0 · cos φ is relevant.
The directional limit lines are perpendicular to axis 3Ι0real.
[7sj6-richtungskennlinie-bei-cos-messung-101210, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-80 Directional characteristic for cosφ measurement
The directional limit lines may be rotated by a correction angle (address PHI CORRECTION) up to ± 45°.
Therefore, in grounded systems it is possible e.g. to increase sensitivity in the resistive-inductive range with a
rotation of –45°, or in case of electric machines connected to the busbar of an ungrounded power system in
the resistive- capacitive range with a rotation of +45° (see the following Figure). Furthermore the directional
limit lines may be rotated by 90° to determine ground faults and their direction in isolated systems.
[richtungskennlinien-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-81 Directional characteristic for cosφ measurement

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Fault direction is calculated with the zero sequence values from the ground current 3Ι0 and displacement
voltage V0 or 3 · V0. With these quantities ground active power and ground reactive power is calculated.
The calculation algorithm used filters the measured values so that it is highly accurate and insensitive to
higher harmonics (particularly the 3rd and 5th harmonics – which are often present in zero sequence
currents). Direction determination relies on the sign of active and reactive power.
Since active and reactive components of the current - not the power - are relevant for pickup, current compo-
nents are calculated from the power components. When determining the ground fault direction the active or
reactive components of the ground current in reference to the displacement voltage as well as the direction of
the active and reactive power are evaluated.
For measurements of sin φ (for ungrounded systems) the following applies
• Ground fault (forward direction), if Q0 < 0 and 3Ι0reactive > setting value (RELEASE DIRECT.),
• Ground fault (reverse direction), if Q0 >0 and 3Ι0reactive > setting value (RELEASE DIRECT.).
For measurements cos φ(for resonant grounded systems) the following applies
• Ground fault (forward direction), if P0 > 0 and 3Ι0active > setting value (RELEASE DIRECT.),
• Ground fault (reverse direction), if P0 < 0 and 3Ι0active > setting value (RELEASE DIRECT.).
If PHI CORRECTION is unequal 0°, the angle of the directional limit lines is calculated by adding up active and
reactive power components.
The forward and reverse zone can be reduced at its boundaries at address 3160 α1 red.dir.area and
address 3161 α2 red.dir.area (see Figure 2-80).
Logic
The following figure illustrates the activation criteria of the sensitive ground fault protection. The operational
mode of the ground fault detection can be set under address 3101.
If set to ON, tripping is possible and a fault log is generated.
If set to Alarm Only, tripping is not possible and only a ground fault log is generated.
The pickup of the displacement voltage element V0 starts the ground fault recording. As the pickup of the V0
element drops out, fault recording is terminated (see logic diagrams Figure 2-83 and Figure 2-84).
The entire function can be blocked under the following conditions:
• A binary input is set,
• the Fuse Failure Monitor or the voltage transformer protection breaker pick up and parameter 3130 PU
CRITERIA is set to Vgnd AND INs,
• the Fuse Failure Monitor or the voltage transformer protection breaker pick up and parameter 3130 PU
CRITERIA is set to Vgnd OR INs, and both current elements are in directional operation mode.
Switching off or blocking means that measurement is deactivated. Therefore, time delays and pickup
messages are reset.
All elements can be blocked individually via binary inputs. In this case pickup and, if possible, direction and
grounded phase will still be reported, however, tripping does not take place since the time elements are
blocked.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj80-aktiv-cos-sin-empf-ef-070309, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-82 Activation of the sensitive ground-fault detection for cos-ϕ -/sin-ϕ measurement
Generation of a pickup message, for both current elements, is dependent on the direction selection for each
element and the setting of parameters 3130 PU CRITERIA. If the element is set to Non-Directional and
parameter PU CRITERIA = Vgnd OR INs, a pickup message is generated as soon as the current threshold is
exceeded, irrespective of the status of the V0 element. If, however, the setting of parameter PU CRITERIA is
Vgnd AND INs, the V0–element must have picked up also for non-directional mode.
However, if a direction is programmed, the current element must be picked up and the direction determina-
tion results must be present to generate a message. Once again, a condition for valid direction determination
is that the voltage element V0 be picked up.
Parameter PU CRITERIA specifies, whether a fault is generated by means of the AND-function or the ORcom-
bination of displacement voltage and pickup of the ground current. The former may be advantageous if the
pickup setting of displacement voltage element V0 was chosen to be very low.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj80-erdfehler-ue-cos-sin-20061206, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-83 Logic diagram of the V0> element for cos-φ -/sin-φ measurement

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x-erdfehler-iee-cos-sin-20061206, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-84 Logic diagram of the ΙNs elements for cos-ϕ -/sin-ϕ measurement
2.13.2 Ground Fault Detection for V0/I0-ϕ Measurement
Voltage Element
The voltage element relies on a pickup initiated by the displacement voltage V0 or 3 · V0. Additionally, the
faulty phase is determined. The displacement voltage V0 can be directly applied to the device, or the summary

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
voltage 3 · V0 can be calculated by the device based on the three phase–to–ground voltages. In the latter case,
the three voltage inputs must be connected to voltage transformers in a grounded-wye configuration (see also
address 213 VT Connect. 3ph in Subsection 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). If the device is only provided
with phase-to-phase voltages, it is not possible to calculate a displacement voltage from them. In this case the
direction cannot be determined.
3 · V0 = VA + VB + VC
Pickup performed by the displacement voltage can be delayed (64-1 DELAY) for tripping.
It is important to note that the total trip-command time then consists of the displacement voltage measure-
ment time (about 50 ms) plus the pickup delay time 64-1 DELAY.
After the voltage element picks up due to detection of a displacement voltage, the grounded phase is identi-
fied, if possible. To do this, the individual phase-to-ground voltages are measured. Of course, this is only
possible if three phase-to-ground voltages are obtained from voltage transformers connected in a grounded
wye configuration. If the voltage magnitude for any given phase is below the setting value VPh min, that phase
is detected as the grounded phase as long as the remaining phase-to-ground voltages are simultaneously
above the setting value VPh max.
[7sj6x_erdschlussbehaftete_phase-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-85 Determination of Ground-faulted Phase
Current Elements
There are two current elements. Both elements operate directionally, whereby the tripping zones can be set
individually for each element (see margin heading “Tripping Area”). Both current elements are provided with a
definite time characteristic. Two current/time elements are used for ground fault protection. Analog to the
time overcurrent protection function, the overcurrent element is named 50Ns-1 PICKUP and 50Ns-1
DELAY and the high-set element 50Ns-2 PICKUP and 50Ns-2 DELAY.
The pickup of the definite time overcurrent protection can be stabilized by the configured dropout delay time
(address 3121 50Ns T DROP-OUT).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Tripping Area
The U0/I0-ϕ characteristic is illustrated as a sector in the U0/I0 phasor diagram (see Figure 2-86). This sector
corresponds to the tripping area. If the cursor of the ground current is in this sector, the function picks up.
The tripping area is defined via several parameters: Via the angle ϕ (parameter 3154 50Ns-1 Phi or 3151
50Ns-2 Phi), the center of the zone with reference to the displacement voltage V0 is set. Via the angle Δϕ
(parameter 3155 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi or 3152 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi), the zone is extended to both sides of the
center.
The zone is further limited downwards by minimum values of the displacement voltage and ground current.
These settable threshold values must be exceeded in order to be picked up.
Negative angle settings turn the tripping area in the “inductiv” direction, i.e. ground current inductive
compared to ground voltage.
[enel-character, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-86 Tripping range of V0-Ι0-φ characteristic
Logic
The following figure illustrates the activation criteria of the sensitive ground fault protection. The operational
mode of the ground fault detection can be set under address 3101.
If set to ON, tripping is possible and a fault log is generated.
If set to ON with GF log, tripping is possible, a fault log and a ground fault log are generated.
If set to Alarm Only, tripping is not possible and only a ground fault log is generated.
The pickup of the displacement voltage V0 or pickup of the 50Ns-2 element or pickup of the 50Ns-1 or 51Ns
element start the ground fault recording. As the pickup of the element drops out, fault recording is terminated
(see the following logic diagrams).
The entire function can be blocked under the following conditions:
• A binary input is set,
• the Fuse Failure Monitor or the voltage transformer protection breaker pick up.
Switching off or blocking means that measurement is deactivated. Therefore, time delays and pickup
messages are reset.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
All elements can be blocked individually via binary inputs. In this case pickup and, if possible, direction and
grounded phase will still be reported, however, tripping does not take place since the time elements are
blocked.
To support the commissioning, a message is issued if the current and voltage threshold of an element is
exceeded but the ground fault phasor is not inside of the trip range.
[7sj80-aktiv-empf-erdfehler-20061218, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-87 Activation of the sensitive ground fault detection for V0/I0-ϕ measurement

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj62-64-ef-ue-u0-i0-mess-20081112, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-88 Logic diagram during V0-/Ι0 -φ measurement, part 1

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj80-erdfehler-iee-u0-i0-messung-20061206, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-89 Logic diagram for V0-/I0 -ϕ measurement, part 2
2.13.3 Ground Fault Location
Application Example
Directional determination may often be used to locate ground faults. In radial systems, locating the ground
fault is relatively simple. Since all feeders from a common bus (Figure 2-90) deliver a capacitive charging
current, nearly the total ground fault current of the system is available at the measuring point of the faulty line
in the ungrounded system. In the resonant grounded system it is the residual wattmetric current of the
Petersen coil that flows via the measuring point. Therefore, on the faulty cables a clear "forward" decision is
made whereas in other feeders either "reverse" direction is sent back or no measurement is carried out in case
ground current is too low. Definitely the faulty line can be determined clearly.
[erdschlussortung-im-strahlennetz-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-90 Location of ground faults in a radial network
In meshed or looped systems, the measuring points of the faulty line also receive the maximum ground fault
current (residual current). Only in this line, "forward" direction is signaled at both ends (Figure 2-91). The rest
of the direction indications in the system may also be useful for ground fault detection. However, some indica-
tions may not be given when the ground current is too low.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[ortung-des-erdschlusses-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-91 Determination of the ground fault location basing on directional indicators in the meshed
system
General Settings
During configuration of the protection functions (Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope, under address 131 Sens.
Gnd Fault it was determined with which parameters the ground fault detection is functioning.
If address Sens. Gnd Fault = Definite Time is selected, then the settings for the definite-time
elements are available here.
If address Sens. Gnd Fault = Log. inverse A is set, a logarithmic inverse time characteristic is avail-
able.
If address Sens. Gnd Fault = Log. Inverse B is set, a logarithmic inverse time characteristic with knee
point is active.
If Sens. Gnd Fault = User Defined PU is selected, a user-specified characteristic can be used for the
overcurrent protection elements 50Ns-1 or 51Ns.
If Sens. Gnd Fault = TOC IEC or Sens. Gnd Fault = TOC ANSI is selected, you can use an inverse
time characteristic either according to the IEC- or the ANSI-standard.
The superimposed high-current element 50Ns-1 is available in all these cases.
If this function is not required, then Disabled is set.
The logarithmic inverse time characteristics, the characteristics according to IEC or ANSI standards and user
characteristics are only available if under address 130 the standard measurement method cos φ / sin φ is
set.
The characteristic for determining the direction is set at address 130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch. It is optional to select
either the standard measurement method cos φ / sin φ or the V0/I0 φ mea. with one sector charac-
teristic.
At address 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault, the function ON or OFF can be set to either ON with GF log or
Alarm Only. If settings ON and ON with GF log are applied, tripping is also possible, otherwise a fault log
is created. A ground fault log is created for ON with GF log and Alarm Only. Setting ON with GF log
is only available if characteristic V0/I0 φ mea. has been selected at address 130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch.
The parameters 3111 T-DELAY Pickup and 3130 PU CRITERIA are only visible if the standard measure-
ment method cos φ / sin φ has been selected when setting the direction characteristic. The ground fault
is detected and reported when the displacement voltage was sustained a certain time T-DELAY Pickup).
Address 3130 PU CRITERIA specifies whether ground fault detection is enabled only for pickups of VN and
ΙNS (Vgnd AND INs) or as soon as one of the two has picked up (Vgnd OR INs).
The pickup can be stabilized for ground fault protection with definite time curve by a settable dropout time
delay (address 3121 50Ns T DROP-OUT). This facility is used in power systems with intermittent faults. Used
together with electro-mechanical relays, it allows different dropout responses to be adjusted and time grading
of digital and electro-magnetic relays to be implemented. The setting depends on the dropout time delay of

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
the electro-magnetic relay. If no coordination is required, the preset value (zero = no dropout time delay)
remains.
NOTE
i Address 213 VT Connect. 3ph specifies how the voltage transformers are connected (phase-to-ground
or phase-to-phase). Furthermore, adjustment factor Vph/Vdelta for displacement voltage is properly set
in address 206, primary and secondary nominal transformer current in the ground path are properly set in
addresses 217 and 218.
Overcurrent Elements Definite Time/Inverse Time

A two-element current/time characteristic can be set at addresses 3113 to 3120. These elements operate with
the amounts of the ground current. They are therefore only useful where the magnitude of the ground
current and maybe its direction can be used to specify the ground fault. This may be the case for grounded
systems (solid or low-resistant) or on electrical machines connected to the busbar of an ungrounded power
system, when in case of a network ground fault the machine supplies only a negligible ground fault current
across the measurement location, which must be situated between the machine terminals and the network,
whereas in case of a machine ground fault the total ground fault current produced by the total network is
available.
IEC/ANSI characteristics
For an inverse time element 51Ns, a characteristic according to IEC or ANSI standards may be used. These
characteristics can be employed for the measurement method cos φ / sin φ.
The type of IEC characteristic can be selected under address 3144 51Ns IEC CURVE. Setting options that can
ve selected are Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. and Long Inverse.
The type of ANSI characteristic can be selected under address 3145 51Ns ANSI CURVE. Setting options that
can be selected are Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv.,
Extremely Inv. and Definite Inv..
As dropout time, set under address 3146 51Ns Drop-out Instantaneous or Disk Emulation.
Logarithmic Inverse Time characteristic (Inverse Time)

The logarithmic inverse time characteristic is only used for the standard measurement method cos φ / sin
φ (address 130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch).
The characteristic (see Figure 2-92) is set with the parameters 3119 51Ns PICKUP, 3141 51Ns Tmax, 3140
51Ns Tmin, 3142 51Ns TIME DIAL and 3143 51Ns Startpoint. 51Ns Tmin and 51Ns Tmax deter-
mine the tripping time range. The slope of the curve is defined in 3142 51Ns TIME DIAL. 51Ns PICKUP is
the reference value for all current values with 51Ns Startpoint representing the beginning of the curve,
i.e. the lower operating range on the current axis (related to 51Ns PICKUP). This factor is preset to the value
1.1, analogously to the other inverse time curves. This factor can also be set to 1.0 since in logarithmic inverse
curves the tripping time on a current value, which is identical to the specified pickup threshold, does not
approach infinity, but has a finite time value.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[kennlinie-amz-log-invers-050803, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-92 Trip time characteristics of the inverse time ground fault protection with logarithmic-inverse
time characteristic
Logarithmic inverse t = 51Ns MAX. TIME DIAL - 51Ns TIME DIAL·ln (Ι/51Ns PICKUP)
Note: For Ι/51Ns PICKUP > 35 the time applies for Ι/51Ns PICKUP = 35
Logarithmic Inverse Time characteristic with Knee Point (inverse time)

The logarithmic inverse time characteristic with knee point is only used for the standard measurement method
cos φ / sin φ (address 130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch).
The curve (see Figure 2-93) is set by parameters 3119 51Ns PICKUP, 3127 51Ns I T min, 3128 51Ns I
T knee, 3132 51Ns TD, 3140 51Ns T min and 3141 51Ns T max. 51Ns T min and 51Ns T max deter-
mine the range of the tripping time, whereby 51Ns T max of current threshold 51Ns PICKUP and 51Ns T
min of current threshold 51Ns I T min are assigned. In configuration with knee point 51Ns T knee, the
tripping time is determined at transition of the two curve sections with different slopes. The transition point is
defined by current threshold 51Ns T knee. 51Ns PICKUP represents the minimum pickup limit for the
ground fault pickup current of the overcurrent element. As of a maximum secondary current of 1.4 A, the trip-
ping time takes on a constant value. Parameter 51Ns TD serves as a time multiplier for multiplication of the
tripping time.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6x_portugal_kennlinie-010704-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-93 Trip-time characteristics of the inverse-time ground fault protection with logarithmic inverse
time characteristic with knee point (example for 51Ns= 0.004 A)
User-defined characteristic (Inverse Time)

User-defined characteristics are only used for the standard measurement method cos φ / sin φ (address
130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch). During configuration of a user-defined characteristic, it should be noted that there is
a safety factor of approx. 1.1 between pickup and setting value - as is standard for inverse curves. This means
that pickup will only be initiated when current of 1.1 times the setting value flows.
The value pairs (current and time) are entered as multiples of the values at addresses 3119 51Ns PICKUP
and 3120 51NsTIME DIAL. Therefore, it is recommended that these addresses are initially set to 1.00 for
simplicity reasons. Once the curve has been entered, the settings at addresses 3119 and/or 3120 can be modi-
fied if necessary.
The default setting of current values is ∞. They are, therefore, not enabled — and no pickup or tripping of
these protective functions will occur.
Up to 20 value pairs (current and time) may be entered at address 3131 M.of PU TD. The device then
approximates the characteristic, using linear interpolation.
• The value pairs should be entered in increasing sequence. If desired, fewer than 20 pairs can be entered.
In most cases, about 10 pairs is sufficient to define the characteristic accurately. A value pair which will
not be used has to be made invalid by entering "∞” for the threshold! The user must ensure that the value
pairs produce a clear and constant characteristic
The current values entered should be those from Table 2-4, along with the matching times. Deviating
values Ι/Ιp are rounded. This, however, will not be indicated.
Current below the current value of the smallest curve point will not lead to an extension of the tripping
time. The pickup curve (see Figure 2-94) continues, from the smallest current point parallel to the current
axis.
Current flows greater than the highest current value entered will not result in a reduced tripping time.
The pickup curve (see Figure 2-94) continues, from the highest current point parallel to the current axis.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Table 2-15 Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User-specific Tripping Curves

1.00 1.50 2.00 3.50 5.00 6.50 8.00 15.00
1.06 1.56 2.25 3.75 5.25 6.75 9.00 16.00
1.13 1.63 2.50 4.00 5.50 7.00 10.00 17.00
1.19 1.69 2.75 4.25 5.75 7.25 11.00 18.00
1.25 1.75 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 12.00 19.00
1.31 1.81 3.25 4.75 6.25 7.75 13.00 20.00
1.38 1.88 14.00
1.44 1.94
[verwendung-einer-anwenderspezifizierbaren-kennlinie-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-94 Use of a user-defined characteristic
Determination of Ground-Faulted Phase

The ground-faulted phase may be identified in an ungrounded or resonant-grounded system, if the device is
supplied by three voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration. The phase in which the
voltage lies below setting VPH MIN at address 3106 is identified as the faulty phase as long as the other two
phase voltages simultaneously exceed the setting VPH MAX at address 3107. The setting VPH MIN must be
set less than the minimum expected operational phase-to-ground voltage. A typical setting for this address
would be 40 V. Setting VPH MAX must be greater than the maximum expected operational phase-to-ground
voltage, but less than the minimum expected operational phase-to-phase voltage. For VNom = 100 V, approxi-
mately 75 V is a typical setting. These settings have no significance in a grounded system.
Displacement Voltage Element Vo
The displacement voltage 64-1 VGND (address 3109) or 64-1 VGND (address 3110) is used to pick up
ground fault detection. At the same time, pickup of the voltage element is a condition for initiation of direc-
tion determination (when setting the direction characteristic to cos φ / sin φ). If the direction character-
istic is set toV0/I0 φ mea., the displacement voltage element is not relying on the current elements at all.
Depending on the configuration at address 213 VT Connect. 3ph, only the applicable limit value at address
3109 64-1 VGND or 3110 64-1 VGND is accessible.
If two phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage V0 are supplied to the device, the measured
displacement voltage is used directly for ground fault recognition. The threshold for V0 is set at address 3109,
where a more sensitive setting can be made than with a calculated displacement voltage.
Please note that when the V0 voltage is connected, the factor (normally = 1.73; see also Section
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes) specified with parameter 206 Vph/Vdelta is used. For display of parameter 3109
64-1 VGND in primary values, the following conversion formula applies:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[fo_uenprim-uensek, 1, en_US]
If three phase-to-ground voltages are connected to the device, the displacement voltage 3 · V0 is calculated
from the momentary values of phase-to-ground voltages, and address 3110 is where the threshold is to be
set. For the display of parameter 3110 in primary values, the following applies:
[fo_3u0prim-3u0sek, 1, en_US]
If the secondary values of (for example) parameters 3110 are set equally, then their primary values differ by
adjustment value Vph/Vdelta.
Example:
Parameter 202 Vnom PRIMARY = 12 kV
Parameter 203 Vnom SECONDARY = 100 V
Parameter 206 Vph/Vdelta = 1.73
Parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc,

VGnd
The following applies when switching to primary values:
[fo_beispiel-uen-83kv, 1, en_US]
With the following configuration

Parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn
Parameter 3110 64-1 VGND = 40 V
the following applies when switching to primary values:
[fo_beispiel-3u0-48kv, 1, en_US]
With regard to a ground fault in a ungrounded or resonant-grounded system, nearly the entire displacement
voltage appears at the device terminals, therefore the pickup setting is not critical, and typically lies between
30 V and 60 V (for 64-1 VGND with a standard V0-connection) or 50 V and 100 V (for 64-1 VGND). Large
fault resistances may require higher sensitivity (i.e. a lower pickup setting).
With regard to a grounded system, a more sensitive (lower) pickup value may be set, but it must be above the
maximum anticipated displacement voltage during normal (unbalanced) system operation.
Pickup of just the voltage element may initiate time delayed tripping assumed that ground fault detection is
configured to perform tripping (address 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault = ON or ON with GF log) and moreover
address 3130 PU CRITERIA is configured Vgnd OR INs. The tripping delay is then set at address 3112
64-1 DELAY. It is important to note that the total tripping time consists of the displacement voltage meas-
urement time (about 50 ms) plus the pickup time delay (address 3111 T-DELAY Pickup) plus the tripping
time delay (address 3112 64-1 DELAY).
Direction Determination for cos-ϕ/ sin-ϕ

Addresses 3115 to 3126 are important for direction determination.
Address 3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT determines the direction of the definite high-set current element 50Ns-2 and
can be set to either Forward or Reverse or Non-Directional, i.e. to both directions. The direction of the

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
current element 50Ns-1 or or 51Ns can be set to Forward or Reverse or Non-Directional, i.e. to both
directions, at address 3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT..
Current value RELEASE DIRECT. (address 3123) is the release threshold for directional determination. It is
based on the current components which are perpendicular to the directional limit lines. The position of the
directional limit lines themselves are based on the settings entered at addresses 3124 and 3125.
The following applies to the determination of direction during ground faults: The pickup current 3Ι0 DIR.
(=RELEASE DIRECT. address 3123) must be set as high as possible to avoid false pickup of the device
provoked by asymmetrical currents in the system and by current transformers (especially in the Holmgreen-
connection).
If direction determination is used in conjunction with one of the current elements discussed above (50Ns-1
PICKUP, addresses 3117 ff, or 51Ns PICKUP, addresses 3119 ff), it is sensible to select a value for address
RELEASE DIRECT. that is lower than or equal to the above pickup value.
A corresponding message (reverse, forward, or undefined) is issued upon direction determination. To avoid
chatter for this message resulting from extremely varying ground connection currents, a dropout delay RESET
DELAY, entered at address 3126, is initiated when directional determination drops out, and the message is
held for this period of time.
When address 3124 PHI CORRECTION is set to 0.0°, in address 3125 the following signifies
• MEAS. METHOD = COS φ

the resistive component of the ground current with respect to the displacement voltage is most relevant
for the current value RELEASE DIRECT. (3Ι0 DIR.),
MEAS. METHOD = SIN φ
the reactive (capacitive) component of the ground current with respect to the displacement voltage is
most relevant for the current value RELEASE DIRECT. (3Ι0 DIR.) (Figure 2-95).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj6-richtkennl-bei-sin-mess-20110113, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-95 Directional characteristic for sin–φ–measurement
• In address 3124 PHI CORRECTION the directional line, in this respect, may be rotated within the range
± 45°. Figure 2-80 "Directional characteristic for cos-ϕ-measurement" in the functional description of the
sensitive ground fault detection gives an example regarding this topic.
The forward and reverse zone can be reduced at its boundaries at address 3160 α1 red.dir.area and
address 3161 α2 red.dir.area (see Figure 2-95). Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2°
(this corresponds to the behavior of versions without this setting option). In a grounded system in feeders
with very high capacitive current, it can be reasonable to set a slightly larger angle α1 to prevent erroneous
pickup due to transformer and algorithm tolerances.
Direction Determination for V0/I0 ϕ Measurement

With the minimum voltage 50Ns-2 Vmin, address 3150 and the level of the pickup current 50Ns-2
PICKUP, address 3113, the lower limit of the circuit segment of element 50Ns-2 is set. The thresholds of the
tripping range in respect of the displacement voltage is set by means of the matching phase angle 50Ns-2

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Phi, address 3151 and angle 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi, address 3152. The trip delay time is set under address
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY. The actual settings are based on the respective application.
The minimum voltage 50Ns-1 Vmin of the high-current element 50Ns-1 is set under address 3153, the
pickup current 50Ns-1 PICKUP under 3117. The respective phase angle 50Ns-1 Phi is set under address
3154, the angle 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi is entered under address 3155. The angle should be set to 180° so that
the element functions non-directionally. The trip delay time is set under address 3118 50Ns-1 DELAY.
Positive angle settings (address 3151 and 3154) turn the tripping area in the „capacitive“ direction, i.e. ground
current capacitive compared to ground voltage.
Negative angle settings turn the tripping area in the “inductiv” direction, i.e. ground current inductive
compared to ground voltage.
Angular Error Compensation (Ι Transformer)

The high reactive component in a resonant grounded system and the inevitable air gap of the toroidal current
transformer often require the angle error of the toroidal current transformer to be compensated. In addresses
3102 to 3105 the maximum angle error CT Err. F1 and the associated secondary current CT Err. I1 as
well as another operating point CT Err. F2/CT Err. I2 are set for the actually connected burden. The
device thus approximates the transformation characteristic of the transformer with considerable accuracy. In
ungrounded or grounded systems angle compensation is not required.
Ungrounded System
In an ungrounded system with a ground fault on a cable, capacitive ground currents of the galvanically
connected system flow via the measuring point, except for the ground current generated in the grounded
cable, since the current last-mentioned will flow directly to the fault location (i.e. not via the measuring point).
A setting equal to about half the ground current is to be selected. The measurement method should be SIN
φ, since capacitive ground current is most relevant here.
Resonant-Grounded System
In resonant-grounded systems, directional determination on the occurrence of a ground fault is more difficult
since the low residual wattmetric current for measurement is usually dwarfed by a reactive current (be it
capacitive or inductive) which is much higher. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and the posi-
tion of the arc-compensating coil, the total ground current supplied to the device may vary considerably in its
values with regard to magnitude and phase angle. The relay, however, must evaluate only the active compo-
nent of the ground fault current, that is, ΙNs cos ϕ. This demands extremely high accuracy, particularly with
regard to phase angle measurement of all instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set
to operate too sensitive. When applying this function in resonant-grounded systems, a reliable direction deter-
mination can only be achieved when toroidal current transformers are connected. Here the following rule of
thumb applies: Set pickup values to about half of the expected measured current, thereby considering only the
residual wattmetric current. Residual wattmetric current predominantly derives from losses of the Petersen
coil. Here, the COS φ measurement method is used since the resistive residual wattmetric current is most rele-
vant.
Grounded System
In grounded systems, a value is set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current. It is important to
note that 3I0 DIR (current value RELEASE DIRECT.) only detects the current components that are perpendic-
ular to the directional limit lines defined at addresses 3124 and 3125. COS φ is the method of measurement
used, and the correction angle is set to –45°, since the ground fault current is typically resistive-inductive
(right section of Figure 2-81 "Directional curve for cos-ϕ-measurement" in the functional description of the
sensitive ground fault detection).
Electrical Machines
One may set the value COS φ for the measurement method and use a correction angle of +45° for electrical
motors supplied from a busbar in an ungrounded system, since the ground current is often composed of an
overlap of the capacitive ground current from the system and the resistive current of the load resistance (left

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
part of Figure "Directional characteristic for cos-ϕ-measurement" in the functional description of the sensitive
ground fault detection).
Information on the Configuration of the Current Threshold

With devices with sensitive ground fault input, generally settings may be entered in primary values with
consideration given to the ratio of the applicable current transformer. However, problems related to the reso-
lution of the pickup currents can occur when very small settings and small nominal primary currents are
involved. The user is therefore encouraged to enter settings for the sensitive ground fault detection in secon-
dary values.
2.13.5 Settings
3101 Sens. Gnd Fault OFF OFF (Sensitive) Ground Fault
ON
ON with GF log
Alarm Only
3102 CT Err. I1 0.001 .. 1.600 A 0.050 A Current I1 for CT Angle
Error
3102 CT Err. I1 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Current I1 for CT Angle
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A Error
3103 CT Err. F1 0.0 .. 5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I1
Error
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A Error
3106 VPH MIN 10 .. 100 V 40 V L-Gnd Voltage of Faulted
Phase Vph Min
3107 VPH MAX 10 .. 100 V 75 V L-Gnd Voltage of Unfaulted
Phase Vph Max
3109 64-1 VGND 1.8 .. 170.0 V; ∞ 40.0 V 64-1 Ground Displacement
Voltage
3110 64-1 VGND 10.0 .. 225.0 V; ∞ 70.0 V 64-1 Ground Displacement
Voltage
3111 T-DELAY Pickup 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time-DELAY Pickup
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP 0.001 .. 1.500 A 0.300 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 10.00 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 50Ns-2 Time Delay
3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT Forward Forward 67Ns-2 Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP 0.001 .. 1.500 A 0.100 A 50Ns-1 Pickup
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 2.00 A 50Ns-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 10.00 A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

3118 50Ns-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec 50Ns-1 Time delay
3119 51Ns PICKUP 0.001 .. 1.400 A 0.100 A 51Ns Pickup
3119 51Ns PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51Ns Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
3119 51Ns PICKUP 0.003 .. 0.500 A 0.004 A 51Ns Pickup
3120 51NsTIME DIAL 0.05 .. 4.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 51Ns Time Dial
3120 51c TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51c Time dial
3121A 50Ns T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50Ns Drop-Out Time Delay
3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. Forward Forward 67Ns-1 Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. 0.001 .. 1.200 A 0.010 A Release directional element
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. 1A 0.05 .. 30.00 A 0.50 A Release directional element
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A
3124 PHI CORRECTION -45.0 .. 45.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for Dir.
Determination
3125 MEAS. METHOD COS φ COS φ Measurement method for
SIN φ Direction
3126 RESET DELAY 0 .. 60 sec 1 sec Reset Delay
3127 51Ns I T min 0.003 .. 1.400 A 1.333 A 51Ns Current at const.
Time Delay T min
3127 51Ns I T min 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 15.00 A 51Ns Current at const.
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 75.00 A Time Delay T min
3128 51Ns I T knee 0.003 .. 0.650 A 0.040 A 51Ns Current at Knee Point
3128 51Ns I T knee 1A 0.05 .. 17.00 A 5.00 A 51Ns Current at Knee Point
5A 0.25 .. 85.00 A 25.00 A
3129 51Ns T knee 0.20 .. 100.00 sec 23.60 sec 51Ns Time Delay at Knee
Point
3130 PU CRITERIA Vgnd OR INs Vgnd OR INs Sensitive Ground Fault
Vgnd AND INs PICKUP criteria
3131 M.of PU TD 1.00 .. 20.00 MofPU; ∞ Multiples of PU Time-Dial
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
3132 51Ns TD 0.05 .. 1.50 0.20 51Ns Time Dial
3140 51Ns Tmin 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 1.20 sec 51Ns Minimum Time Delay
3140 51Ns T min 0.10 .. 30.00 sec 0.80 sec 51Ns Minimum Time Delay
3141 51Ns Tmax 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 5.80 sec 51Ns Maximum Time Delay
3141 51Ns T max 0.50 .. 200.00 sec 93.00 sec 51Ns Maximum Time Delay
(at 51Ns PU)
3142 51Ns TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 15.00 sec; ∞ 1.35 sec 51Ns Time Dial
3143 51Ns Startpoint 1.0 .. 4.0 1.1 51Ns Start Point of Inverse
Charac.
3144 51Ns IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

3145 51Ns ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
3146 51Ns Drop-out Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-out characteristic
Disk Emulation
3150 50Ns-2 Vmin 10.0 .. 90.0 V 10.0 V 50Ns-2 minimum voltage
3151 50Ns-2 Phi -180.0 .. 180.0 ° -90.0 ° 50Ns-2 angle phi
3152 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi 0.0 .. 180.0 ° 30.0 ° 50Ns-2 angle delta phi
3154 50Ns-1 Phi -180.0 .. 180.0 ° -160.0 ° 50Ns-1 angle phi
3155 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi 0.0 .. 180.0 ° 100.0 ° 50Ns-1 angle delta phi
3160 α1 red.dir.area 1 .. 15 ° 2° Alpha1 (reduction direc-
tional area)
3161 α2 red.dir.area 1 .. 15 ° 2° Alpha2 (reduction direc-
tional area)

Informa-
tion
1202 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 SP >BLOCK 50Ns-2
1203 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 SP >BLOCK 50Ns-1
1204 >BLOCK 51Ns SP >BLOCK 51Ns
1207 >BLK 50Ns/67Ns SP >BLOCK 50Ns/67Ns
1211 50Ns/67Ns OFF OUT 50Ns/67Ns is OFF
1212 50Ns/67Ns ACT OUT 50Ns/67Ns is ACTIVE
1215 64 Pickup OUT 64 displacement voltage pick up
1217 64 TRIP OUT 64 displacement voltage element TRIP
1221 50Ns-2 Pickup OUT 50Ns-2 Pickup
1223 50Ns-2 TRIP OUT 50Ns-2 TRIP
1224 50Ns-1 Pickup OUT 50Ns-1 Pickup
1226 50Ns-1 TRIP OUT 50Ns-1 TRIP
1227 51Ns Pickup OUT 51Ns picked up
1229 51Ns TRIP OUT 51Ns TRIP
1230 Sens. Gnd block OUT Sensitive ground fault detection BLOCKED
1264 IEEa = VI Corr. Resistive Earth current
1265 IEEr = VI Corr. Reactive Earth current
1266 IEE = VI Earth current, absolute Value
1267 VGND, 3Vo VI Displacement Voltage VGND, 3Vo

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
1271 Sens.Gnd Pickup OUT Sensitive Ground fault pick up
1272 Sens. Gnd Ph A OUT Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph A
1273 Sens. Gnd Ph B OUT Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph B
1274 Sens. Gnd Ph C OUT Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph C
1276 SensGnd Forward OUT Sensitive Gnd fault in forward direction
1277 SensGnd Reverse OUT Sensitive Gnd fault in reverse direction
1278 SensGnd undef. OUT Sensitive Gnd fault direction undefined
16029 51Ns BLK PaErr OUT Sens.gnd.flt. 51Ns BLOCKED Setting Error
16030 φ(3Vo,INs) = VI Angle between 3Vo and INsens.
16034 50Ns-1n.TRrange OUT 50Ns-1 not in tripping range
16035 50Ns-2n.TRrange OUT 50Ns-2 not in tripping range

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.14 Admittance Ground Fault Protection
2.14.1 General
The Admittance protection function has 4 stages:
• Y0-1
• Y0-2
• Y0-3
• Y0-4
You can select a non-directional element (Y0) or a directional element (G0/B0) for each stage. Stages without
direction determination have the same logic and stages with direction determination have the same logic. The
function is described using an example with the stage Y0-1.
2.14.2 Description of the Non-Directional Admittance Protection Y0
Logic
If you select Non-Directional under address 3541 Y0-1 DIR Mode, the admittance protection works
without direction determination.
[lo_7SJ66_Admittance_2, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-96 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional Admittance Protection Y0-1

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Voltage Elements
The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available,
the device calculates the zero-sequence voltage V0 from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and
VC using the defining equation.
The method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Current Elements
The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current. Since the linearity range of the sensi-
tive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary ground currents, the function switches to the
3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very large linearity and settings range.
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Y0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 with the formula
Y0 = 3I0/V0. This stage uses Y0 as a condition to recognize the ground fault.
Minimum 3I0 Threshold

To start the Y0 calculation, the 3I0 value must exceed a minimum 3I0 threshold. For protection-class current
transformers, the threshold value is 50 mA (Irated, sec = 1 A) or 250 mA (Irated, sec = 5 A). For sensitive current
transformers, the threshold value is 3 mA (Irated, sec = 1 A).
Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal

You can block the stage via the binary input signal 18481 >BLK Y0-1 or block the complete function via the
binary input signal 18513 >BLK Y0. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage is reset.
Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage is
reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• The inside signal 170 VT FuseFail of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• An external source via the binary input signal 6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT or 6510 >FAIL: BUS VT
The parameter 5310 BLOCK PROT. can be set so that the Measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or does not block it.
Blocking of the Time Delay

Set the parameter 3500 Adm.E Fault to Alarm Only to prevent the start of the time delay and thus also
the trip indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.
2.14.3 Description of the Directional Admittance Protection Y0 with G0 or B0

Measurement
Logic
If you select Forward or Reverse under address 3541 Y0-1 DIR Mode, the admittance protection works
with direction determination.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lo_7SJ66_Admittance, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-97 Logic Diagram of the Directional Admittance Protection Y0-1 with G0 or B0 Measurement
Voltage Elements
The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available,
the device calculates the zero-sequence voltage V0 from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and
VC using the defining equation.
The method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Current Elements
The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current. Since the linearity range of the sensi-
tive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary ground currents, the function switches to the
3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very large linearity and settings range.
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
G0, B0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 = G0 + jB0. You can
select to use G0 or B0 to determine the direction.
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the parameter 3561
Y0-1 DIR Delay to achieve steady-state measurands. The result from the direction determination is only
valid if the absolute value of the ground current has also exceeded its release threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
G0 direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight lines from 0 (Parameter
3562 PHI CORRECT). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-
suppression-coil-ground system where the value G0 is decisive for the direction determination.
[dw_G0 Measurement Dir., 1, en_US]
Figure 2-98 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the G0 Measurement
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is generally the reference value for the real axis and is identical to the G0 axis.
The axis of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the B0 (reactive) axis for this
example. For the direction determination, the component of the admittance perpendicular to the set direc-
tion-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is G0dir (= Y0 dir.). In this example, this is the active component
G0active of the admittance Y0. The conductance G0dir. (here = G0active) is calculated and compared with the
value set under the address 3543 Thr Y0-1. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the
direction is forward. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the negative setting value, the direction is reverse. In
the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
With the parameters 3563 Alpha1 and 3564 Alpha2, you can limit the forward and reverse ranges as shown
in Figure 2-99. With this, the direction determination is secured in case of high currents in the direction of the
axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be rotated via a correction angle (3562 PHI CORRECT parameter) in a range of ±45°.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° rotation. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated
system, the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a rotation of +45° (see
following figure).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[dw_G0 Measurement with angle correction, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-99 Rotating the Direction-Characteristic Curves with G0 Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the 3560 Y0-1 MEAS.MTD parameter to B0 and the 3562 PHI CORRECT parameter to 0, the axis
of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the G0 and B0 axes. Since the component of
the admittance Y0 perpendicular to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is B0dir. (= Y0 dir.),
here, the susceptance B0 (reactive) is used in the direction determination. If the susceptance B0dir. (B0reac-
tive) exceeds the negative setting value 3543 Thr Y0-1, the direction is forward. If the susceptance B0dir.
exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is reverse. In the range in between, the direction is undeter-
mined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[dw_B0 Measurement Dir., 1, en_US]
Figure 2-100 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the B0 Measurement
Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal

You can block the stage via the binary input signal 18481 >BLK Y0-1 or block the complete function via the
binary input signal 18513 >BLK Y0. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage is reset.
Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• The inside signal 170 VT FuseFail of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• An external source via the binary input signal 6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT or 6510 >FAIL: BUS VT
The parameter 5310 BLOCK PROT. can be set so that the Measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or does not block it.
Blocking of the Time Delay

Set the parameter 3500 Adm.E Fault to Alarm Only to prevent the start of the time delay and thus also
the trip indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.
General Settings
The Admittance protection function is only effective and accessible if address 135 Adm.E Fault is set to
Enabled during the configuration of protection functions. If this function is not required, select Disabled
under address 135 Adm.E Fault.
You can set the Admittance protection function to ON, OFF, or Alarm Only under address 3500 Adm.E
Fault. The Admittance protection can be blocked in case of a measuring-voltage failure.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• With the following conditions, the tripping occurs and the recording of a fault is initiated.
– The parameter 3500 Adm.E Fault is set to ON.
– The set threshold is exceeded.
– The set time delay has expired.
• If the parameter 3500 Adm.E Fault is set to Alarm Only, no trip command is given and no fault is
shown on the display.
The Admittance protection function has 4 stages. The same setting rules and method apply to each stage.
With the parameter 3541 Y0-1 DIR Mode, you can select whether the admittance protection function works
with direction determination or not.
Non-Directional Stages Y0
If you select Non-Directional under address 3541 Y0-1 DIR Mode, the admittance protection works
without direction determination. To ensure the accuracy, you must parameterize the following:
• Set a minimum ground voltage under address 3542 Thr V0-1. The threshold value must be smaller
than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must be detected.
• Set a minimum calculated value Y0 under address 3543 Thr Y0-1. If the ground admittance for the
setting value is unknown, you can assume the following relation:
[fo_SeGfY0-270614-01, 2, en_US]
ks Factor, takes into account the ohmic components of the current

(1.2 for overhead lines, 1.0 to 1.05 for cable systems)
Ic,line Secondary capacitive ground-fault current for the protected line
Vph-gnd Secondary phase-to-ground voltage in the healthy case
3I0min Secondary ground current in the healthy case (resulting from transformer error),
5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0> Secondary pickup threshold of the residual voltage
• Set a minimum pickup delay under address 3501 Y0 PU T Delay. If you do not intend to evaluate the
transient cycle of the ground fault occurrence, set a delay value out of the range, for example, 100 ms.
• Set a minimum trip delay under address 3544 Y0-1 Trip delay.
Directional Stages Y0 with G0 or B0 Measurement

If you select Forward or Reverse under address 3541 Y0-1 DIR Mode, the admittance protection works
with direction determination.
To ensure the accuracy in the direction determination, you need to do the following parameterization:
• Set a minimum ground voltage under address 3542 Thr V0-1. The threshold value must be smaller
than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must be detected.
• Set a minimum trip delay under address 3544 Y0-1 Trip delay.
• Set a minimum direction determination time delay under address 3561 Y0-1 DIR Delay.
The direction determination is released if the ground current exceeds the threshold set under address 3559
Y0-1 REL DIR.
You can select the measurement method for the direction determination under address3560 Y0-1
MEAS.MTD (G0 or B0).
If the parameter is set to G0 and the parameter 3562 PHI CORRECT is set to 0°, the real component of the
ground admittance (G0) is compared with the value set under address 3543 Thr Y0-1. If the real component
exceeds the set threshold, the direction determination is released and the zero-sequence conductance G0 is

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
calculated. If the calculated zero-sequence conductance G0 supplied to the fault is positive (G0>0), the fault is
considered to be in the direction of the protected equipment (forward direction). If G0 is negative, the fault is
considered to be in the opposite direction (reverse direction). This method is typically used to determine the
direction of high-impedance faults in a resonant-grounded (compensated) system. To improve the reliability,
it is necessary to reduce the forward and reverse areas for arc-suppression-coil-ground system that contain
feeders with high capacitive currents (long cable feeders). You can set the limit of the forward and reverse
area under address 3563 Alpha1 and 3564 Alpha2. The parameter 3563 Alpha1 limits the forward area in
the second quadrant and the reverse area in the third quadrant, while the parameter 3564 Alpha2 limits the
forward area in the first quadrant and the reverse area in the fourth quadrant.
If the parameter 3560 Y0-1 MEAS.MTD is set to B0 and the parameter 3562 PHI CORRECT is set to 0°, the
imaginary component of the ground admittance (B0) is compared with the setting 3543 Thr Y0-1. If the
imaginary component exceeds the set threshold, the direction determination is released and the zero-
sequence susceptance B0 is calculated. If the calculated zero-sequence susceptance B0 supplied to the fault is
negative (B0>0), the fault is considered to be in the direction of the protected equipment (forward direction).
If B0 is positive, the fault is considered to be in the opposite direction (reverse direction). To improve the relia-
bility, it is necessary to reduce the forward and reverse areas for arc-suppression-coil-ground system that
contain feeders with quite high capacitive currents (long cable feeders). You can set the limit of the forward
and reverse area under address 3563 Alpha1 and 3564 Alpha2. The parameter 3563 Alpha1 limits the
forward area in the second quadrant and the reverse area in the third quadrant, while the parameter 3564
Alpha2 limits the forward area in the first quadrant and the reverse area in the fourth quadrant.
The directional limit lines can be rotated up to ±45° via the parameter 3562 PHI CORRECT. Therefore, it is
possible to increase the sensitivity in the resistive-inductive range with a rotation of –45°, or in the resistive-
capacitive range with a rotation of +45°. If 3562 PHI CORRECT is set to a value other than 0°, the angle of the
directional limit line is determined by the sum of the real and reactive components of zero-sequence system
power.
2.14.5 Settings
Error
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A Error
Error
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A Error
3500 Adm.E Fault OFF OFF Admittance Earth Fault
ON Protection
Alarm Only
3501 Y0 PU T Delay 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Y0 Pickup Time Delay
3511 Y0-4 DIR Mode Forward Non-Directional Y0(G0/B0)-4 Directional
Reverse mode
Non-Directional
3512 Thr V0-4 1.8 .. 170.0 V; ∞ 5.0 V Y0(G0/B0)-4 V0 Threshold
Value
Value

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

3513 Thr Y0-4 0.10 .. 100.00 mS; ∞ 2.00 mS Y0(G0/B0)-4 Threshold
Value
3514 Y0-4 Trip delay 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec Y0(G0/B0)-4 Trip Delay
Time
Reverse mode
Non-Directional
Value
Value
Value
Time
Reverse mode
Non-Directional
Value
Value
Value
Time
Reverse mode
Non-Directional
Value
Value
Value
Time
3550 Y0-4 REL DIR 0.003 .. 1.200 A 0.010 A Y0 G0/B0-4 3I0 Release Dir
3550 Y0-4 REL DIR 1A 0.05 .. 30.00 A 0.50 A Y0 G0/B0-4 3I0 Release Dir
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A
3551 Y0-4 MEAS.MTD G0 G0 Y0 G0/B0-4 Dir Measuring
B0 Method
3552 Y0-4 DIR Delay 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.10 sec Y0 G0/B0-4 Dir
Determin.Delay Time
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A
B0 Method

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Determin.Delay Time
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A
B0 Method
Determin.Delay Time
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A
B0 Method
Determin.Delay Time
3562 PHI CORRECT -45.0 .. 45.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for DIR
3563 Alpha1 1 .. 15 ° 2° Alpha1(reduction direc-
tional area)
3564 Alpha2 1 .. 15 ° 2° Alpha2(reduction direc-
tional area)

Informa-
tion
18481 >BLK Y0-1 SP >BLOCK Y0(G0/B0)-1
18482 >BLK Y0-2 SP >BLOCK Y0(G0/B0)-2
18483 >BLK Y0-3 SP >BLOCK Y0(G0/B0)-3
18484 >BLK Y0-4 SP >BLOCK Y0(G0/B0)-4
18485 Y0-1 Forward OUT Y0 G0/B0-1 in forward direction
18486 Y0-1 Reverse OUT Y0 G0/B0-1 in reverse direction
18497 Y0-1 BLOCKED OUT Y0(G0/B0)-1 is BLOCKED
18501 Y0-1 Pickup OUT Y0(G0/B0)-1 Pickup
18505 Y0-1 TRIP OUT Y0(G0/B0)-1 TRIP

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
18513 >BLK Y0 SP >BLOCK Y0(G0/B0)
18514 Y0 BLOCKED OUT Y0(G0/B0) is BLOCKED
18516 Y0 OFF OUT Y0(G0/B0) is OFF
18517 Y0 ACTIVE OUT Y0(G0/B0) is ACTIVE

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.15 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

A typical characteristic of intermittent ground faults is that they often disappear automatically to strike again
after some time. They can last between a few milliseconds and several seconds. This is why such faults are not
detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary time overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are extremely
short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path may pick up; selective tripping is thus not ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function such faults are too short to initiate shutdown of
the faulted cable. Only when they have become permanent such ground faults can be removed selectively by
the short-circuit protection.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of causing thermal damage to equipment. This is why
devices 7SJ66 feature a protective function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and accumu-
lates their duration. If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time, the limit of the thermal load
capacity has been reached. If the ground faults are distributed over a long period of time or if the ground fault
goes off and does not re-ignite after some time, the equipment under load is expected to cool down. Tripping
is not necessary in this case.
Applications
• Protection from intermittent ground faults which occur, e.g. in cables due to poor insulation or water
ingress in cable joints.
2.15.1 Description
Acquisition of Measured Quantities

The intermittent ground fault can either be detected via the ordinary ground current input (IN), the sensitive
ground current input (INS), or it is calculated from the sum of the three phase currents (3I0). Unlike the over-
current protection which uses the fundamental wave, the intermittent ground fault protection creates the
r.m.s. value of this current and compares it to a settable threshold Iie>. This method accounts for higher
order harmonics contents (up to 400 Hz) and for the direct component since both factors contribute to the
thermal load.
Pickup/Tripping
If the pickup value Iie> is exceeded, the pickup indication IIE Fault det (see Figure 2-101) is generated.
The pickups are also counted; when the counter content reaches the value of parameter Nos.det., the indi-
cation Intermitt.EF is output. A stabilized pickup is obtained by prolonging the pickup indication IIE
Fault det by a settable time T-det.ext.. This stabilization is especially important for the coordination
with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent relays.
The duration of the stabilized pickups IIE stab.Flt is summated with an integrator T-sum det.. If the
accumulated pickup time reaches a settable threshold value, a corresponding message is generated (IEF
Tsum exp.). Tripping takes place, however, only while a ground fault is present (message IEF Trip). The
trip command is maintained during the entire minimum tripping time specified for the device, even if the
ground fault is of short duration. After completion of the tripping command all memories are reset and the
protection resumes normal condition.
The (much longer) resetting time T-reset (message IEF Tres run.) is launched simultaneously with T-
sum det. when a ground fault occurs. Unlike T-sum det., each new ground fault resets this time to its
initial value and it expires anew. If T-reset expires and no new ground fault is recorded during that time, all
memories are reset and the protection resumes normal position. T-reset thus determines the time during
which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermittent ground fault in connection with
the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later will be considered a new fault event.
The message IIE Fault det will be entered in the fault log and reported to the system interface only until
the message Intermitt.EF is issued. This prevents a burst of messages. If the message is allocated to an
LED or a relay, this limitation does not apply. This is accomplished by doubling the message (message
numbers 6924, 6926).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Interaction with the Automatic Reclosure Function

Automatic reclosure is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults as the function only trips
after repeated detection of a fault or after expiration of the summation monitoring time T-sum det. and
besides this, its basic design is to prevent thermal overload. For these reasons, the intermittent ground fault
protection is not implemented as starting feature of the automatic reclosing function.
Interaction with Breaker Failure Protection

A pickup that is present when the time delay TRIP-Timer has expired is interpreted by the breaker failure
protection as a criterion for a tripping failure. Since permanent pickup is not ensured after a tripping command
by the intermittent ground fault protection, cooperation with the breaker failure protection is not sensible.
Therefore, this function is not activated by the intermittent ground fault protection.
Logic Diagram
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the intermittent ground fault protection function.
[7sj6x_intermit_erdfehler-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-101 Logic diagram of the intermittent ground fault protection – principle
Fault Logging
A fault event and thus fault logging is initiated when the non-stabilized ΙΙE element picks up for the first time.
A message IIE Fault det is produced. The message IIE Fault det is issued and entered in the fault
log (and reported to the system interface) so often until the number of pickups IIE Fault det has reached
the value set for parameter Nos.det.. When this happens, the message Intermitt.EF is issued and IIE

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Fault det is blocked for the fault log and the system interface. This method accounts for the fact that the
ΙΙE element may also pick up for a normal short-circuit. In this case the pickup does not launch the alarm
Intermitt.EF.
Intermittent ground faults may cause other overcurrent elements to pick up (e.g. 50-1, 50N-1, 50Ns-1), which
may result in a burst of messages. In order to avoid an overflow of the fault log, its messages are no longer
entered in the fault log after detection of intermittent ground faults (indication Intermitt.EF), unless they
cause a trip command. If an intermittent ground fault has been detected, the following pickup messages of
the time overcurrent protection will still be reported without restraint (see Table 2-16):
Table 2-16 Unrestricted Messages
FNo. Message Description

1800 50-2 picked up 50-2 picked up
7551 50-1 InRushPU 50-1 InRush picked up
7552 50N-1 InRushPU 50N-1 InRush picked up
7553 51 InRushPU 51 InRush picked up
7554 51N InRushPU 51N InRush picked up
7559 67-1 InRushPU 67-1 InRush picked up
7560 67N-1 InRushPU 67N-1 InRush picked up
7561 67-TOC InRushPU 67-TOC InRush picked up
7562 67N-TOCInRushPU 67N-TOC InRush picked up
7565 Ia InRush PU Phase A InRush picked up
7566 Ib InRush PU Phase B InRush picked up
7567 Ic InRush PU Phase C InRush picked up
7564 Gnd InRush PU ground InRush picked up
Table 2-17 shows all messages subject to a restraint mechanism avoiding a message burst during an intermit-
tent ground fault:
Table 2-17 Buffered Messages

1761 50(N)/51(N) PU 50(N)/51(N) picked up
1762 50/51 Ph A PU 50/51 Phase A picked up
1763 50/51 Ph B PU 50/51 Phase B picked up
1764 50/51 Ph C PU 50/51 Phase C picked up
1767 50-3 picked up 50-3 element picked up
1820 51 picked up 51 element picked up
1765 50N/51NPickedup 50N element picked up
1768 50N-3 picked up 50N-3 element picked up
1837 51N picked up 51N element picked up
2691 67/67N pickedup 67/67N picked up
2670 67-TOC pickedup 67-TOC element picked up
2692 67 A picked up 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
2693 67 B picked up 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
2694 67 C picked up 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

2684 67N-TOCPickedup 67N-TOC element picked up
2695 67N picked up 67N/67N-TOC element picked up
5166 46-TOC pickedup 46-TOC picked up
1215 64 Pickup 64 displacement voltage pick up
1221 50Ns-2 Pickup 50Ns-2 element picked up
1224 50Ns-1 Pickup 50Ns-1 element picked up
1227 51Ns Pickup 51Ns element picked up
6823 48 pickup Startup supervision Pickup
Before they are entered in the fault log (event buffer) and transmitted to the system interface or CFC, the indi-
cations of Table 2-17 are buffered (starting with the incoming indication Intermitt.EF). The buffering does
not apply to signaling to relays and LEDs as it is required by time-graded protection systems for reverse inter-
locking. The buffer can store a maximum of two status changes (the most recent ones) for each indication.
Buffered messages are signaled to the fault log, CFC and to the system interface with the original time flag
only when a TRIP command is initiated by a protection function other than the intermittent ground fault
protection. This ascertains that a pickup, although delayed, is always signaled in association with each TRIP
command.
All pickup messages which usually do not occur during an intermittent ground fault are not affected by this
mechanism. Among others this includes the pickup and TRIP commands of the following protective functions:
• Breaker failure protection
• Overload protection
• Frequency protection
• Voltage protection
• QU protection
The pickup signals of these functions will still be logged immediately. A TRIP command of one of these protec-
tive functions will cause the buffered messages to be cleared since no connection exists between tripping
function and buffered message.
A fault event is cleared when the time T-reset has expired or the TRIP command IEF Trip has been termi-
nated.
Terminating a fault event for the intermittent ground fault protection thus is a special case. It is the time T-
reset that keeps the fault event opened and not the pickup.
General
The protection function for intermittent ground faults can only take effect and is only accessible if the current
to be evaluated was configured in address 133, INTERM.EF (with Ignd or with with 3I0 or with
Ignd,sens.). If not required, this function is set to Disabled.
The function can be turned ON or OFF under address 3301 INTERM.EF.
The pickup threshold (r.m.s. value) is set in address 3302 Iie>. A rather sensitive setting is possible to
respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as the current in excess of the setting
increases. The setting range depends on the selection of the current to be evaluated at address 133
INTERM.EF.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The pickup time can be prolonged at address 3303 T-det.ext.. This pickup stabilization is especially impor-
tant for the coordination with existing analog or electromechanical overcurrent relays. The time T-det.ext.
can also be disabled (T-det.ext. = 0).
The stabilized pickup starts the counter T-sum det.. This counter is stopped but not reset when the picked
up function drops out. Based on the last counter content the counter resumes counting when the stabilized
function picks up next. This sum of individual pickup times, which are to initiate tripping, is set at address
3304 T-sum det.. It represents one of the four selectivity criteria (pickup value Iie>, detection extension
time T-det.ext., counter T-sum det. and reset time T-reset) for coordinating the relays on adjacent
feeders and is comparable to the time grading of the time overcurrent protection. The relay in the radial
network which is closest to the intermittent fault and picks up, will have the shortest summation time T-sum
det..
The reset time, after which the summation is reset in healthy operation and the protection resumes normal
status, is configured to T-reset at address 3305.
[selektivitaetskrit-intermitt-erdfehler-120902-oz, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-102 Example of selectivity criteria of the intermittent ground fault protection
Address 3306 Nos.det. specifies the number of pickups after which a ground fault is considered intermit-
tent.
2.15.3 Settings
3301 INTERM.EF OFF OFF Intermittent earth fault
ON protection
3302 Iie> 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A stage
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A stage
3302 Iie> 0.005 .. 1.500 A 1.000 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F
stage
3303 T-det.ext. 0.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.10 sec Detection extension time
3304 T-sum det. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 20.00 sec Sum of detection times
3305 T-reset 1 .. 600 sec 300 sec Reset time
3306 Nos.det. 2 .. 10 3 No. of det. for start of int.
E/F prot

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

3301 INTERM.EF OFF OFF Intermittent earth fault
ON protection
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A stage
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A stage
3302 Iie> 0.005 .. 1.500 A 1.000 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F
stage
3303 T-det.ext. 0.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.10 sec Detection extension time
3304 T-sum det. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 20.00 sec Sum of detection times
3305 T-reset 1 .. 600 sec 300 sec Reset time
3306 Nos.det. 2 .. 10 3 No. of det. for start of int.
E/F prot

Informa-
tion
6903 >IEF block SP >block interm. E/F prot.
6921 IEF OFF OUT Interm. E/F prot. is switched off
6922 IEF blocked OUT Interm. E/F prot. is blocked
6923 IEF enabled OUT Interm. E/F prot. is active
6924 IIE Fault det OUT Interm. E/F detection stage Iie>
6925 IIE stab.Flt OUT Interm. E/F stab detection
6926 IIE Flt.det FE OUT Interm.E/F det.stage Iie> f.Flt. ev.Prot
6927 Intermitt.EF OUT Interm. E/F detected
6928 IEF Tsum exp. OUT Counter of det. times elapsed
6929 IEF Tres run. OUT Interm. E/F: reset time running
6930 IEF Trip OUT Interm. E/F: trip
6931 Iie/In= VI Max RMS current value of fault =
6932 Nos.IIE= VI No. of detections by stage Iie>=

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.16 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection

The directional intermittent ground fault protection is designed to selectively detect intermittent ground faults
in compensated cable systems.
Intermittent ground faults in compensated cable systems are usually characterized by the following proper-
ties:
• Very short high ground current pulses (up to several hundred amperes) with a duration of less than 1 ms;
• They are self-extinguishing and re-ignite within one half period up to several periods, depending on the
power system conditions and the fault characteristic.
• They can persist over longer periods (many seconds to minutes) and develop into static faults.
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resis-
tance of old cables.
Ground fault functions based on fundamental component measured values are primarily designed to detect
static ground faults and do not always operate correctly in the event of intermittent ground faults. The func-
tion described here evaluates specifically the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
displacement voltage to determine the direction.
Applications
• Directional protection against intermittent ground faults which occur, e.g. in cables due to poor insula-
tion or water ingress in cable joints.
2.16.1 Description
Activating the Function

The function is only available if the device is equipped with a sensitive ground current input.
For voltage connection 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, Vx and 1-phase voltage connection 240 VT
Connect. 1ph ≠ NO, the directional intermittent ground fault protection is not active. V0 cannot be obtained
for these connection types.
The function is blocked in case of a measuring voltage failure under the condition that the fuse-failure monitor
is configured for the functioning in a grounded system (see Section 2.12.1 Measurement Supervision, Fuse-
Failure Monitor).
Furthermore, the function can be blocked externally using the binary input signal >dIEF block.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj62-64-iefger-aktiv-20120611, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-103 Activation of the directional intermittent ground fault protection
Measurand Acquisition
The intermittent ground fault current 3I0 is measured exclusively via the sensitive ground current input INs
(4th current transformer input) of the device.
Also the displacement voltage Ven or 3 · V0 is required to determine the direction. The displacement voltage V0
can be applied directly to the device, or the summation voltage 3 · V0 can be calculated from the three phase-
to-ground voltages.
3 · V0 = VA + VB + VC
Fault Log, Ground Fault Log, Fault Recording

Parameter Dir. Interm. EF allows you to define the type of fault handling and fault logging. If set to ON,
tripping is possible and a fault log is generated. If set to ON with ON with GF log, tripping is possible, a
fault log and a ground fault log are generated. If set to Alarm Only, no tripping is possible. Only an alarm is
generated. Furthermore, only a ground fault log is created.
The raising pickup of the function (indication 6972 dIEF pick up) is the criterion for opening the ground
fault log.
Logic Diagram
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the directional intermittent ground fault protection function.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[Lo_7sj62-64-iefger, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-104 Logic diagram of the directional intermittent ground fault protection
Direction Determination
The ground fault is detected by evaluating the fundamental component of the displacement voltage. The
sensitivity is determined using the settable threshold value Vgnd> / 3V0>. Direction determination is started
after the ground fault has been detected. For this purpose, the igniting current pulses are extracted from the
ground current signal. The igniting current pulse and the associated maximum displacement voltage over time
are compared with regard to their phase relationship. The fault direction forward or reverse is derived from
this comparison. Each detected ignition pulse receives a direction information. If no clear direction determina-
tion is possible, the direction information pertaining to the pulse is undefined. The direction results of the
recurring ignition pulses are counted and are available as value indication if their value is different than zero.
Pickup
The setting of parameter Pickup defines under which conditions pickup is detected and fault recording
started. For with Vgnd/3V0>, pickup is initiated once the threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> has been exceeded. For
with oper. dir., pickup is initiated when a pulse is detected in the direction specified at address 3402.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The pickup disappears when the displacement voltage has fallen below the threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> and the
time Monitoring time has expired.
Alarm/Trip
The setting of parameter Direction defines whether the function operates in forward or in reverse direc-
tion. The pulses in the specified direction are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the threshold value set in
parameter No. of pulses, the function trips or generates an alarm. It is possible that not every ignition
pulse is recognized as such. If two ignition pulses are very close to one another in respect of time, they may
not be detected separately. This is not relevant from the protection perspective, because during an intermit-
tent fault many ignition pulses occur and the counter threshold is certainly reached.
The directional pulse counter is reset under the following conditions:
• A different direction than the set Direction is detected. An undefined direction result does not reset
the counter.
• The monitoring time Monitoring time has elapsed. No other pulse in the set direction was detected
during that time. This time can be understood as a criterion for the disappearing of the intermittent fault.
The function thus also drops out if the intermittent fault develops into a static fault.
• V0 is lower than the set threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> and the time Monitoring time has expired.
Interaction with other Functions

The directional intermittent ground fault protection does not interact with the automatic reclosing function.
The function cannot start the automatic reclosing function.
The directional intermittent ground fault protection interacts with the circuit-breaker failure protection. The
function starts the circuit-breaker failure protection.
General
Configuration of the protection functions at address 134 Dir. Interm. EF defines whether the directional
intermittent ground fault protection is Enabled Disabled.
At address 3401 Dir. Interm. EF the directional ground fault protection is switched on or off. The
following setting options are available:
• ON enables the function with tripping and fault record log.
• ON with GF log enables the function with tripping, fault record log and ground fault log.
• Alarm Only generates the ground fault log only. Tripping and fault record log are not possible.
• OFF disables the function.

The pickup threshold for the displacement voltage is set at address 3405 Vgnd> / 3V0>. Exceeding this
threshold is the criterion for detecting the intermittent ground fault.
The direction to be protected Forward or Reverse is set in address 3402 Direction.
Address 3403 No. of pulses allows you to specify how many pulses must be detected in the set direction
before the alarm or tripping is initiated. It is possible that not every ignition pulse is recognized as such. If two
ignition pulses are very close to one another in respect of time, they may not be detected separately. This is
not relevant from the protection perspective, because during an intermittent fault many ignition pulses occur
and the counter threshold is certainly reached.
At address 3404 Monitoring time you set the monitoring time after detection of the direction pulse in the
direction parameterized at 3402. If the time has expired before the number set at 3403 No. of pulses has
been reached, the associated counter is reset. This time is a criterion for the disappearing of the intermittent
fault.
At address 3406 Pickup you can set the criterion for the pickup of the function. For with Vgnd/3V0>
pickup takes place as soon as the threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> has been exceeded, regardless of whether a real

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
intermittent ground fault is present or not. For with oper. dir., recording starts when a direction pulse in
the direction parameterized at 3402 has been detected.
2.16.3 Settings

3401 Dir. Interm. EF OFF OFF Dir. Intermittent earth fault
ON protection
ON with GF log
Alarm Only
3402 Direction Forward Forward Direction to be protected
Reverse
3403 No. of pulses 2 .. 50 5 Pulse no. for detecting the interm.
E/F
3404 Monitoring time 0.04 .. 10.00 sec 2.00 sec Monitoring time after pickup
detected
3405 Vgnd> / 3V0> 2.0 .. 100.0 V 20.0 V Vgnd> measured / 3V0> calcu-
lated
3406 Pickup with Vgnd/3V0> with Vgnd/3V0> Pickup of the function
with oper. dir.

Informa-
tion
6951 >dIEF block SP >Block directional interm. E/F prot.
6961 dIEF OFF OUT Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is switched off
6962 dIEF blocked OUT Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is blocked
6963 dIEF active OUT Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is active
6972 dIEF pick up OUT dIEF: pick up
6973 dIEF TRIP OUT dIEF: Trip
6974 No.forward= VI dIEF: No. of detected forward pulses =
6975 No.reverse= VI dIEF: No. of detected reverse pulses =
6976 No.undef.= VI dIEF: No. of detected undefined pulses =
6979 dIEF ALARM OUT dIEF: Alarm

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.17 Automatic Reclosing System 79

From experience, about 85 % of insulation faults associated with overhead lines are arc short circuits which
are temporary in nature and disappear when protection takes effect. This means that the line can be
connected again. The reconnection is accomplished after a dead time via the automatic reclosure function.
If the fault still exists after automatic reclosure (arc has not disappeared, there is a metallic fault), then the
protective elements will re-trip the circuit breaker. In some systems, several reclosing attempts are performed.
Applications
• The automatic reclosure system integrated in the 7SJ66 can also be controlled by an external protection
device (e.g. backup protection). For this application, a signal exchange must occur between 7SJ66 and
the external protection device via binary inputs and outputs.
• It is also possible to allow the relay 7SJ66 to work in conjunction with an external reclosing device.
• The automatic reclosure system can also operate in interaction with the integrated synchronization func-
tion or with an external synchrocheck.
• Since the automatic reclosing function is not applied when the 7SJ66 is used to protect generators,
motors, transformers, cables and reactors etc., it should be disabled for this application.
2.17.1 Program Execution
The 7SJ66 is equipped with an integrated three-pole, single-shot and multi-shot automatic reclosure (AR).
Figure 2-100 shows an example of a timing diagram for a successful second reclosure.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[ablaufdiagramm-2-malige-wiedereinschaltung-erfolgreich-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-105 Timing diagram showing two reclosing shots, first cycle unsuccessful, second cycle successful
The following figure shows an example of a timing diagram showing for two unsuccessful reclosing shots,
with no additional reclosing of the circuit breaker.
The number of reclose commands initiated by the automatic reclosure function are counted. A statistical
counter is available for this purpose for the first and all subsequent reclosing commands.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[ablaufdiagramm-2-malige-wiedereinschaltung-erfolglos-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-106 Timing diagram showing two unsuccessful reclosing shots
Initiation
Initiation of the automatic reclosing function can be caused by internal protection functions or externally via
binary inputs. The automatic reclosing function can be programmed in such manner that any of the elements
of the following Table can initiate (Starts 79), not initiate (No influence), or block reclosing (Stops
79):
Table 2-18 Initiating automatic reclosure
Non-directional start Directional start Start other

50-1 67-1 Negative Sequence Protection 46
50N-1 67N-1 BINARY INPUT
50-2 67-2
50-3 67-3
50N-2 67N-2
50N-3 67N-3
51 67-TOC
51N 67N-TOC
67Ns-1
67Ns-2
67Ns-TOC
On initiation, the automatic reclosure function is informed that a trip command was issued and the respective
reclosing program is now being executed.
The binary input messages 2715 >Start 79 Gnd and 2716 >Start 79 Ph for starting an automatic reclo-
sure program can also be activated via CFC (fast PLC task processing). Automatic reclosure can thus be initi-
ated via any messages (e.g. protective pickup) if address 7164 BINARY INPUTis set to Starts 79.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Action Time
The action time (address 7117) monitors the time between a device pickup and the trip command of a protec-
tion function configured as starter. The action time is launched when pickup of any function is detected,
which is set as source of the automatic reclosure program. Protection functions which are set to Alarm Only
or which in principle should not start a reclosing program do not trigger the action time.
If a protection function configured as starter initiates a trip command during the action time, the automatic
reclosure program is started. Trip commands of a protection function configured as starter occurring in the
time between expiration of the action time and dropout of the device pickup cause the dynamic blocking of
the automatic reclosing program. Trip commands of protection functions which are not configured as starter
do not affect the action time.
If the automatic reclosure program interacts with an external protection device, the general device pickup for
starting the operating time is communicated to the automatic reclosing program via binary input 2711 >79
Start.
Delay of Dead Time Start

After start of the automatic reclosure function, the dead time start can be delayed by pickup of the binary
input message 2754 >79 DT St.Delay. The dead time is not initiated as long as the binary input is active.
Start occurs only on cleared binary input. The delay of the dead time start can be monitored via parameter
7118 T DEAD DELAY. If the time elapses and the binary input is still active, the Automatic Reclosing System
79 changes to the status of the dynamic blocking via (2785 79 DynBlock). The maximum time delay of the
dead time start is logged by message 2753 79 DT delay ex..
Reclosing Programs
Depending on the type of fault, two different reclosing programs can be used. Here the following applies:
• The single phase fault (ground fault) reclosing program applies if all fault protection functions that
initiate automatic reclosure detected a phase-to-ground fault. The following conditions must apply: only
one phase, only one phase and ground or only ground have picked up. This program can also be started
via a binary input.
• The multiple phase fault (phase fault) reclosing program applies to all other cases. That is, when
elements associated with two or more phases pick up, with or without the pickup of ground elements,
such as negative sequence elements. This program can be started via a binary input as well.
The reclosure program evaluates only elements during pickup as elements dropping out may corrupt the result
if they drop out at different times when opening the circuit breaker. Therefore, the ground fault reclosure
program is executed only when the elements associated with one particular phase pick up until the circuit
breaker is opened; all others conditions will initiate the phase fault program.
For each of the programs, up to 9 reclosing attempts can be separately programmed. The first four reclosing
attempts can be set differently for each of the two reclosing programs. The fifth and each of the following
automatic reclosures will correspond to the fourth dead time.
Reclosing Before Selectivity

For the automatic reclosure sequence to be successful, faults on any part of the line must be cleared from the
feeding line end(s) within the same – shortest possible – time. Usually, therefore, an instantaneous protection
element is set to operate before an automatic reclosure. Fast fault termination has thus priority over selectivity
aspects as the reclosing action aims at maintaining normal system operation. For this purpose, all protection
functions which can initiate the automatic reclosure function are set in such manner that they may trip instan-
taneously or with a very small time delay before automatic reclosure.
With the final reclosing attempt, i.e. when no automatic reclosing is expected, protection is to trip with delay
according to the grading coordination chart of the system, since selectivity has priority.For details see also
information at margin heading "Interaction with the Automatic Reclosing Function" which can be found with
the setting notes of the overcurrent protection functions and the functional description of the intermittent
ground fault protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Single-Shot Reclosing
When a trip signal is programmed to initiate the automatic reclosure, the appropriate automatic reclosing
program will be executed. Once the circuit breaker has opened, a dead time interval in accordance with the
type of fault is started (see also margin heading "Reclosing Programs"). Once the dead time interval has
elapsed, a closing signal is issued to reclose the circuit breaker. A blocking time interval TIME RESTRAINT is
started at the same time. Within this restraint time it is checked whether the automatic reclosure was
performed successfully. If a new fault occurs before the restraint time elapses, the automatic reclosing func-
tion is dynamically blocked causing the final tripping of the circuit breaker. The dead time can be set individu-
ally for each of the two reclosing programs.
Criteria for opening the circuit breaker may either be the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker or the
dropout of the general device pickup if auxiliary contacts are not configured.
If the fault is cleared (successful reclosing attempt), the blocking time expires and automatic reclosing is reset
in anticipation of a future fault. The fault is terminated.
If the fault has not been cleared (unsuccessful reclosing attempt), then a final trip signal is initiated by one or
more protective elements.
Multi-shot Reclosing
7SJ66 permits up to 9 reclosings. The number can be set differently for the phase fault reclosing program and
the ground fault reclosing program.
The first reclose cycle is, in principle, the same as the single-shot auto-reclosing. If the first reclosing attempt is
unsuccessful, this does not result in a final trip, but in a reset of the restraint time interval and start of the next
reclose cycle with the next dead time. This can be repeated until the set number of reclosing attempts for the
corresponding reclose program has been reached.
The dead time intervals preceding the first four reclosing attempts can be set differently for each of the two
reclosing programs. The dead time intervals preceding the fifth reclosing attempts will be equal to the dead
time interval that precedes the fourth reclosing attempt.
If one of the reclosing attempts is successful, i.e. the fault disappeared after reclosure, the restraint time
expires and the automatic reclosing function is reset. The fault is cleared.
If none of the reclosing attempts is successful, then a final circuit breaker trip (according to the grading coordi-
nation chart) will take place after the last allowable reclosing attempt has been performed by the protection
function. All reclosing attempts were unsuccessful.
After the final circuit breaker tripping, the automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked (see below).
Blocking Time
The function of the blocking time has already been described under section "Single-/Multi-Shot Reclosing". The
blocking time can be prolonged if the following conditions have been fulfilled.
The time 211 TMax CLOSE CMD defines the maximum time during which a close command can apply. If a
new trip command occurs before this time has run out, the close command will be canceled. If the time TMax
CLOSE CMD is set longer than the restraint time TIME RESTRAINT, the restraint time will be extended to the
remaining close command duration after expiry!
A pickup from a protection function that is set to initiate the automatic reclosing function will also lead to an
extension of the blocking time should it occur during this time!
2.17.2 Blocking
Static Blocking
Static blocking means that the automatic reclosing function is not ready to initiate reclosing, and cannot
initiate reclosing as long as the blocking signal is present. A corresponding message 79 is NOT ready
(FNo. 2784) is generated. The static blocking signal is also used internally to block the protection elements
that are only supposed to work when reclosing is enabled (see also side title "Reclosing Before Selectivity"
further above).
The automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• The signal >BLOCK 79 FNo. 2703) is present at a binary input, as long as the automatic reclosing func-
tion is not initiated (associated message: >BLOCK 79),
• The signal >CB Ready (FNo. 2730) indicates that the circuit breaker disappears via the binary input, if
the automatic reclosing function is not initiated (associated message: >CB Ready),
• The number of allowable reclosing attempts set for both reclosing programs is zero (associated message:
79 no cycle),
• No protection functions (parameters 7150 to 7163) or binary inputs are set to initiate the automatic
reclosing function (associated message: 79 no starter),
• The circuit breaker position is reported as being "open" and no trip command applies (associated
message: 79 BLK: CB open). This presumes that 7SJ66 is informed of the circuit breaker position via
the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker.
Dynamic Blocking
Dynamic blocking of the automatic reclosing function occurs in those cases where the reclosing program is
active and one of the conditions for blocking is fulfilled. The dynamic blocking is signaled by the message 79
DynBlock. The dynamic blocking is associated with the configurable blocking time SAFETY 79 ready. This
blocking time is usually started by a blocking condition that has been fulfilled. After the blocking time has
elapsed, the device checks whether or not the blocking condition can be reset. If the blocking condition is still
present or if a new blocking condition is fulfilled, the blocking time is restarted. If, however, the blocking
condition no longer exists after the blocking time has elapsed, the dynamic blocking will be reset.
Dynamic blocking is initiated if:
• The maximum number of reclosure attempts has been achieved. If a trip command now occurs within
the dynamic blocking time, the automatic reclosure program will be blocked dynamically (indicated by 79
Max. No. Cyc).
• The protection function has detected a three-phase fault and the device is programmed not to reclose
after three-phase faults (indicated by 79 BLK:3ph p.u.).
• if the maximum waiting period T DEAD DELAY for the delay of the dead time initiation by binary inputs
expires without binary input >79 DT St.Delay having been disabled during this time period.
• The action time has elapsed without a TRIP command being issued. Each TRIP command that occurs after
the action time has expired and before the picked-up element drops out, will initiate the dynamic
blocking (indicated by 79 Tact expired).
• A protection function trips which is to block the automatic reclosure function (as configured). This applies
irrespective of the status of the automatic reclosure system (started / not started) if a TRIP command of a
blocking element occurs (indicated by 79 BLK by trip).
• The circuit breaker failure function is initiated.
• The circuit breaker does not trip within the configured time T-Start MONITOR after a trip command
was issued, thus leading to the assumption that the circuit breaker has failed. (The breaker failure moni-
toring is primarily intended for commissioning purposes. Commissioning safety checks are often
conducted with the circuit breaker disconnected. The breaker failure monitoring prevents unexpected
reclosing after the circuit breaker has been reconnected, indicated by 79 T-Start Exp).
• The circuit breaker is not ready after the breaker monitoring time has elapsed, provided that the circuit
breaker check has been activated (address 7113 CHECK CB? = Chk each cycle, indicated by 79 T-
CBreadyExp)
• The circuit breaker is not ready after maximum extension of the dead time Max. DEAD EXT.. The moni-
toring of the circuit breaker status and the synchrocheck may cause undesired extension of the dead
time. To prevent the automatic reclosure system from assuming an undefined state, the extension of the
dead time is monitored. The extension time is started when the regular dead time has elapsed. When it
has elapsed, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically and the lock-out time launched. The
automatic reclosure system resumes normal state when the lock-out time has elapsed and new blocking
conditions do not apply (indicated by 79 TdeadMax Exp) .

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• Manual closing has been detected (externally) and parameter BLOCK MC Dur. (T ≠ 0) was set so that
the automatic reclosing function responds to manual closing,
• Via a correspondingly routed binary input (FNo. 2703 >BLOCK 79). If the blocking takes places while the
automatic recloser is in normal state, the latter will be blocked statically (79 is NOT ready). The
blocking is terminated immediately when the binary input has been cleared and the automatic reclosure
function resumes normal state. If the automatic reclosure function is already running when the blocking
arrives, the dynamic blocking takes effect (79 DynBlock). In this case, the activation of the binary input
starts the dynamic blocking time SAFETY 79 ready. Upon its expiration, the device checks if the binary
input is still activated. If this is the case, the automatic reclosure program changes from dynamic blocking
to static blocking. If the binary input is no longer active when the time has elapsed and if no new
blocking conditions apply, the automatic reclosure system resumes normal state.
2.17.3 Status Recognition and Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker Status

The detection of the actual circuit breaker status is necessary for the correct functionality of the automatic
reclosure function. The circuit breaker status is detected by the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and is
communicated to the device via binary inputs 4602 >52-b and 4601 >52-a.
Here the following applies:
• If binary input 4601 >52-a and binary input 4602 >52-b are used, the automatic reclosure function can
detect whether the circuit breaker is open, closed or in intermediate position. If both auxiliary contacts
detect that the circuit breaker is open, the dead time is started. If the circuit breaker is open or in inter-
mediate position without a trip command being present, the automatic reclosure function is blocked
dynamically if it is already running. If the automatic reclosure system is in normal state, it will be blocked
statically. When checking whether a trip command applies, all trip commands of the device are taken into
account irrespective of whether the function acts as starting or blocking element on behalf of the auto-
matic reclosure program.
• If only the binary input 4601 >52-a is allocated, the circuit breaker is considered open if the binary input
is not active. If the binary input gets inactive while no trip command of (any) function applies, the auto-
matic reclosure function is blocked. The blocking will be of static nature if the automatic reclosure func-
tion is in normal state at this time. If the automatic reclosing function is already running, there will be a
dynamic blocking. The dead time is started if the binary input gets inactive following the trip command of
a starting element (4601 >52-a = inactive). An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be
detected for this type of allocation.
• If binary input 4602 >52-balone is allocated, the circuit breaker is considered open while the binary
input is active. If the binary input gets active while no trip command of (any) function applies, the auto-
matic reclosure function is blocked dynamically provided it is already running. Otherwise, there will be a
static blocking. The dead time is started if the binary input gets active following the trip command of a
starting element. An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be detected for this type of allo-
cation.
• If neither binary input 4602 >52-b nor 4601 >52-a are allocated, the automatic reclosure program
cannot detect the position of the circuit breaker. In this case, the automatic reclosure function will be
controlled exclusively via pickups and trip commands. Monitoring for "52-b without TRIP" and starting the
dead time in dependence of the circuit breaker feedback is not possible in this case.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The time needed by the circuit breaker to perform a complete reclose cycle can be monitored by the 7SJ66.
Breaker failure is detected:
A precondition for a reclosing attempt, following a trip command initiated by a protective relay element and
subsequent initiation of the automatic reclosing function, is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one
TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle. The readiness of the circuit breaker is monitored by the device using a binary input >CB
Ready. In the case where this signal from the breaker is not available, the circuit breaker monitoring feature
should be disabled, otherwise reclosing attempts will remain blocked.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• Especially when multiple reclosing attempts are programmed, it is a good idea to monitor the circuit
breaker condition not only prior to the first but also to each reclosing attempt. A reclosing attempt will be
blocked until the binary input indicates that the circuit breaker is ready to complete another CLOSE-TRIP
cycle.
• The time needed by the circuit-breaker to regain the ready state can be monitored by the 7SJ66. The
monitoring time CB TIME OUT expires for as long as the circuit breaker does not indicate that it is ready
via binary input >CB Ready (FNo. 2730). That means if the binary input >CB Ready is cleared, the
monitoring time CB TIME OUT is started. If the binary input returns before the monitoring time has
elapsed, the monitoring time will be canceled and the reclosure process is continued. If the monitoring
time runs longer than the dead time, the dead time will be extended accordingly. If the monitoring time
elapses before the circuit breaker signals its readiness, the automatic reclosure function will be blocked
dynamically.
Interaction with the synchronism check may cause the dead time to extend inadmissibly. To prevent the auto-
matic reclosure function from remaining in an undefined state, dead time extension is monitored. The
maximum extension of the dead time can be set at Max. DEAD EXT.. The monitoring time Max. DEAD
EXT. is started when the regular dead time has elapsed. If the synchronism check responds before the time
has elapsed, the monitoring time will be stopped and the close command generated. If the time expires before
the synchronism check reacts, the automatic reclosure function will be blocked dynamically.
Please make sure that the above mentioned time is not shorter than the monitoring time CB TIME OUT.
The time 7114 T-Start MONITOR serves for monitoring the response of the automatic reclosure function to
a breaker failure. It is activated by a trip command arriving before or during a reclosing operation and marks
the time that passes between tripping and opening of the circuit breaker. If the time elapses, the device
assumes a breaker failure and the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically. If parameter T-Start
MONITOR is set to ∞, the start monitoring is disabled.
2.17.4 Controlling Protection Elements
Depending on the reclosing cycle it is possible to control elements of the directional and non-directional over-
current protection by means of the automatic reclosure system (Protective Elements Control). There are three
mechanisms:
• Time overcurrent protection and the sensitive ground fault protection elements may trip instantaneously
depending on the automatic reclosure cycle (T = 0), they may remain unaffected by the auto reclosing
function AR (T = T) or may be blocked (T = ∞). For further information see side title "Cyclic Control".
• The automatic reclosing states "Auto Reclosing ready" and "Auto Reclosing not ready" can activate or
deactivate the dynamic cold load pickup function. This function is designed to influence overcurrent
stages (see also Section 2.16.6 and Section 2.17.6 Setting Notes) regarding thresholds and tripping time
delays.
• The time overcurrent protection parameter 1X14A 50(N)-2 ACTIVE or 1X16A 50(N)-3 ACTIVE defines
whether the elements 50(N)-2 or 50(N)-3 are to operate always or only with "79M Auto Reclosing
ready"(see Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N).
Cyclic Control
Control of the time overcurrent protection and sensitive ground fault protection elements takes effect by
releasing the cycle marked by the corresponding parameter. The cycle zone release is indicated by the
messages 79 1.CycZoneRel to 79 4.CycZoneRel. If the automatic reclosure function is in normal state,
the settings for the starting cycle apply. These settings always take effect when the automatic reclosure func-
tion assumes normal state.
The settings are released for each following cycle when issuing the close command and starting the blocking
time. Following a successful reclosure (blocking time expired) or after returning from the blocking, the auto-
matic reclosure function goes into normal state. Control of the protection is again assumed by the parameters
for the starting cycle.
The following figure illustrates the control of the protection elements 50-2 and 50N-2.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[schutzstufensteuerung-bei-zweimaliger-erfolgreicher-awe-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-107 Control of protection elements for two-fold, successful automatic reclosure
Example
Before the first reclosing, faults are to be eliminated quickly applying elements 50-2 or 50N-2. Fast fault termi-
nation thus has priority over selectivity aspects as the reclosing action aims at maintaining normal system
operation. If the fault prevails, a second tripping is to take place instantaneously and subsequently, a second
reclosing.
After the second reclosing, however, elements 50-2 or 50N-2 are to be blocked so the fault can be eliminated
by applying elements 50-1 or 50N-1 according to the grading coordination chart of the system giving priority
to selectivity concerns.
Addresses 7202 bef.1.Cy:50-2, 7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2, 7203 bef.1.Cy:50N-2 and 7215
bef.2.Cy:50N-2 are set to instant. T=0 to enable the elements after the first reclosing. Addresses 7226
bef.3.Cy:50-2 and 7227 bef.3.Cy:50N-2, however, are set to blocked T=∞, to ensure that elements
50-2 and 50N-2 are blocked when the second reclosing applies. The back-up elements, e.g. 50-1 and 50N-1,
must obviously not be blocked (addresses 7200, 7201, 7212, 7213, 7224 and 7225).
The blocking applies only after reclosure in accordance with the set address. Hence, it is possible to specify
again other conditions for a third reclosure.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The blocking conditions are also valid for the zone sequence coordination, provided it is available and acti-
vated (address 7140, see also margin heading "Zone Sequencing").
2.17.5 Zone Sequencing / Fuse Saving Scheme
It is the task of the zone sequence coordination to harmonize the automatic reclosure function of this device
with that of another device that forms part of the same power system. It is a complementary function to the
automatic reclosure function and allows, for example, to perform group reclosing operations in radial systems.
In case of multiple reclosures, groups may also be in nested arrangement and further high-voltage fuses can
be overgraded or undergraded.
Zone sequencing works by blocking certain protection functions depending on the reclosing cycle. This is
implemented by the protection elements control (see margin heading "Controlling Protection Elements").
As a special feature, changing from one reclosing cycle to the next is possible without trip command only via
pickup/dropout of 50-1 or 50N-1.
The following figure shows an example of a group reclosure at feeder 3. It is assumed that reclosure is
performed twice.
With fault F1 on feeder 5, protection devices in the infeed and on feeder 3 pick up. The time delay of the 50-2
element at protecting feeder 3 is set in such a way that the feeder 3 circuit breaker will clear the fault before
the fuse at feeder 5 is damaged. If the fault is cleared, all functions are reset after the restraint time has
expired and the fault is terminated. The fuse has therefore also been protected.
If the fault continues to exist, a second reclosing cycle is performed in the same way.
High speed element 50-2 is now blocked at relay protecting Feeder 3. If the fault still remains, only the 50-1
element continues to be active in Feeder 3 which, however, overgrades the fuse with a time delay of 0.4 s.
After the fuse operated to clear the fault, the series-connected devices drop out. If the fuse fails to clear the
fault, then the 50-1 element protecting Feeder 3 will operate as backup protection.
The 50-2 element at the busbar relay is set with a delay of 0.4 seconds, since it supposed to trip the 50-2
elements and the fuses as well. For the second reclosing, the 50-2 element also has to be blocked to give pref-
erence to the feeder relay (50-1 element with 0.4 s). For this purpose, the device has to "know" that two
reclosing attempts have already been performed.
In this device, zone sequence coordination must be switched on: When pickup of 50-1 or 50N-1 drops out,
zone sequence coordination provokes that the reclosing attempts are counted as well. If the fault still persists
after the second reclosure, the 50-1 element, which is set to 0.9 seconds, would serve as backup protection.
For the busbar fault F2, the 50-2 element at the bus would have cleared the fault in 0.4 seconds. Zone
sequencing enables the user to set a relatively short time period for the 50-2 elements. The 50-1 element is
only used as backup protection. If zone sequencing is not applied, the 50-1 element is to be used only with its
relatively long time period (0.9 s).
[ablaufkoordinierung-fehler-am-abgang-5-ss-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-108 Zone sequencing with a fault occurring at Tap Line 5 and at the busbar

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
General Settings
The internal automatic reclosure function will only be effective and accessible if address 171 79 Auto Recl.
is set Enabled during configuration. If not required, this function is set to Disabled. The function can be
turned ON or OFF under address 7101 FCT 79.
If no automatic reclosures are performed on the feeder for which the 7SJ66 is used (e.g. cables, transformers,
motors, etc.), the automatic reclosure function is disabled by configuration. The automatic reclosure function
is then completely disabled, i.e. the automatic reclosure function is not processed in the 7SJ66. No messages
exist for this purpose and binary inputs for the automatic reclosure function are ignored. All parameters of
block 71 are inaccessible and of no significance.
Blocking Duration for Manual-CLOSE Detection

Parameter 7103 BLOCK MC Dur. defines the reaction of the automatic reclosure function when a manual
closing signal is detected. The parameter can be set to specify how long the auto reclosure function will be
blocked dynamically in case of an external Manual close-command being detected via binary input (356
>Manual Close). If the setting is 0, the automatic reclosure function will not respond to a Manual close
signal.
Restraint Time and Dynamic Blocking

The blocking time TIME RESTRAINT(address 7105) defines the time that must elapse, after a successful
reclosing attempt, before the automatic reclosing function is reset. If a protective function configured for
initiation of the automatic reclosure function provokes a new trip before this time elapses, the next reclosing
cycle is started in case of multiple reclosures. If no further reclosure is allowed, the last reclosure will be
classed as unsuccessful.
In general, a few seconds are sufficient. In areas with frequent thunderstorms or storms, a shorter blocking
time may be necessary to avoid feeder lockout due to sequential lightning strikes or flashovers.
A longer restraint time should be chosen if there is no possibility to monitor the circuit breaker (see below)
during multiple reclosing (e.g. because of missing auxiliary contacts and information on the circuit breaker
ready status). In this case, the restraint time should be longer than the time required for the circuit breaker
mechanism to be ready.
If a dynamic blocking of the automatic reclosing function was initiated, then reclosing functions remain
blocked until the cause of the blocking has been cleared. The functional description gives further information
on this topic, see side title "Dynamic Blocking". The dynamic blocking is associated with the configurable
blocking time SAFETY 79 ready. Blocking time is usually started by a blocking condition that has picked up.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring

Reclosing after a fault clearance presupposes that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP
cycle at the time when the reclosing function is initiated (i.e. at the beginning of a trip command):
The readiness of the circuit breaker is monitored by the device using a binary input >CB Ready (FNo. 2730).
• It is possible to check the status of the circuit breaker before each reclosure or to disable this option
(address 7113, CHECK CB?):
CHECK CB? = No check, deactivates the circuit breaker check,
CHECK CB? = Chk each cycle, to verify the circuit breaker status before each reclosing command.
Checking the status of the circuit breaker is usually recommended. Should the breaker not provide such a
signal, you can disable the circuit breaker check at address 7113 CHECK CB? (No check), as otherwise
auto-reclosure would be impossible.
The status monitoring time CB TIME OUT can be configured at address 7115 if the circuit breaker check
was enabled at address 7113. This time is set slightly higher than the maximum recovery time of the
circuit breaker following reclosure. If the circuit breaker is not ready after the time has expired, reclosing
is omitted and dynamic blocking is initiated. Automatic reclosure thus is blocked.
Time Max. DEAD EXT. serves for monitoring the dead time extension. The extension can be initiated by the
circuit breaker monitoring time CB TIME OUT and by an external synchronism check.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The monitoring time Max. DEAD EXT. is started after the configured dead time has elapsed.
This time must not be shorter than CB TIME OUT. When using the monitoring time CB TIME OUT, the time
Max. DEAD EXT. should be set to a value ≥ CB TIME OUT.
If the automatic reclosure function is operated with an external synchronism check, Max. DEAD EXT.
assures that the automatic reclosure function does not remain in undefined state when the synchronism
check fails to check back..
If the synchronization is used as synchronism check (for synchronous systems), the monitoring time may be
configured quite short, e.g. to some seconds. In this case the synchronizing function merely checks the
synchronism of the power systems. If synchronism prevails it switches in instantaneously, otherwise it will not.
If the synchronization is used for synchronous/asynchronous networks, the monitoring time must grant suffi-
cient time for determining the time for switching in. This depends on the frequency slip of the two subnet-
works. A monitoring time of 100 s should be sufficient to account for most applications for asynchronous
networks.
Generally, the monitoring time should be longer than the maximum duration of the synchronization process
(parameter 6112).
The breaker failure monitoring time 7114 T-Start MONITOR determines the time between tripping (closing
the trip contact) and opening the circuit breaker (checkback of the CB auxiliary contacts or disappearing device
pickup if no auxiliary contacts are allocated). This time is started each time a tripping operation takes place.
When time has elapsed, the device assumes breaker failure and blocks the automatic reclosure function
dynamically.
Action Time
The action time monitors the time between pickup of the device and trip command of a protective function
configured as starter while the automatic reclosure function is ready but not yet running. A trip command
issued by a protective function configured as starter occurring within the action time will start the automatic
reclosing function. If this time differs from the setting value of T-ACTION (address 7117), the automatic
reclosure function will be blocked dynamically. The trip time of inverse tripping characteristics is considerably
determined by the fault location or fault resistance. The action time prevents reclosing in case of far remote or
high-resistance faults with long tripping time. Trip commands of protective functions which are not config-
ured as starter do not affect the action time.
Delay of Dead Time Start

The dead time start can be delayed by pickup of the binary input message 2754 >79 DT St.Delay. The
maximum time for this can be parameterized under 7118 T DEAD DELAY. The binary input message must be
deactivated again within this time in order to start the dead time. The exact sequence is described in the func-
tional description at margin heading "Delay of Dead Time Start".
Number of Reclosing Attempts

The number of reclosing attempts can be set separately for the "phase program" (address7136, # OF RECL.
PH) and "ground program" (address 7135 # OF RECL. GND). The exact definition of the programs is
described in the functional description at margin heading "Reclosing Programs".
Close Command: Direct or via Control

Address 7137 Cmd.via control can be set to either generate directly the close command via the automatic
reclosing function (setting Cmd.via control = none) or have the closing initiated by the control function.
If the automatic reclosure function is to be closed via the control function, the manual closing command has
to be suppressed during an automatic reclose command. The example in the Section 2.2.11 Setting Notes of a
MANUAL CLOSE for commands via the integrated control function has to be extended in this case (see
Figure 2-109). The messages 2878 79 L-N Sequence and 2879 79 L-L Sequence indicate that the AR
has been started and wants to carry out a reclosure after the dead time. The annunciations set the flipflop and
suspend the manual signal until the AR has finished the reclosure attempts. The flipflop is reset via the OR-
combination of the annunciations 2784 79 is NOT ready, 2785 79 DynBlock and 2862 79
Successful. Manual closing is initiated if a CLOSE command comes from the control function.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[cfc-logik-handein-awe-steuerung-140503-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-109 CFC logic for Manual Close with automatic reclosing via control
The selection list for parameter 7137 is created dynamically depending on the allocated switchgear compo-
nents. If one of the switchgear components is selected, usually the circuit breaker52Breaker, reclosure is
accomplished via control. In this case, the automatic reclosure function does not create a close command but
issues a close request. It is forwarded to the control which then takes over the switching. Thus, the properties
defined for the switchgear component such as interlocking and command times apply. Hence, it is possible
that the close command will not be carried out due to an applying interlocking condition.
If this behavior is not desired, the auto-reclose function can also generate the close command 79 Close
directly which must be allocated to the associated contact. The CFC chart as in Figure 2-109 is not needed in
this case.
Connection to the Internal Synchronism Check

The auto-reclose function can interact with the internal synchronization function of the device. If this is
desired as well as the Manual Close functionality, the CFC chart illustrated in Figure 2-109 is a definite prereq-
uisite since the synchronization function always interacts with the control function. Additionally, one of the
four synchronization groups must be selected via parameter 7138 Internal SYNC. The synchronization
conditions for automatic reclosure are are thereby specified. In that case the selected synchronization group
defines the switchgear component to be used (usually the circuit breaker 52Breaker). The defined switch-
gear component and the one specified at 7137 Cmd.via control must be identical. Synchronous reclosing
via the close command 79 Close is not possible.
If interaction with the internal synchronization is not desired, the CFC Chart, as in Figure 2-109, is not required
and the parameter 7138 is set to none.
Automatic Reclosure with External Synchronism Check

Parameter 7139 External SYNC can be set to determine that the automatic reclosure function operates
with external synchrocheck. An external synchronization is possible if the parameter is set to YES and the
device is connected to the external synchronization check via indication 2865 79 Sync.Request and the
binary input >Sync.release.
Note: The automatic reclosure function cannot be connected to the internal and external synchrocheck at the
same time !
Initiation and Blocking of Automatic Reclosure by Protective Elements (configuration)

At addresses 7150 through 7164, and 7166 through 7174, reclosing can be started or blocked for various
types of protection functions. Together they constitute the wiring between protection elements and auto-

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
matic reclosing function. Each address designates a protection element or protection function together with
its ANSI synonym, for example 50-2 for the high-set element 50-2 of the non-directional time overcurrent
protection (address 7152).
The setting options have the following meaning:
• Starts 79 the protective element initiates the automatic reclosure via its trip command;
No influence the protective element does not start the automatic reclosure, it may however be initi-
ated by other functions;
Stops 79 the protective element blocks the automatic reclosure, it cannot be started by other func-
tions; a dynamic blocking is initiated.
Dead Times (1st AR)

Addresses 7127 and 7128 are used to determine the duration of the dead times of the 1st cycle. The time
defined by this parameter is started when the circuit breaker opens (if auxiliary contacts are allocated) or
when the pickup drops out following the trip command of a starter. Dead time before first automatic reclosure
for reclosing program "Phase" is set in address 7127 DEADTIME 1: PH, for reclosing program "ground" in
address 7128 DEADTIME 1: G. The exact definition of the programs is described in the functional description
at margin heading "Reclosing Programs". The length of the dead time should relate to the type of application.
With longer lines, they should be long enough to make sure that the fault arc disappears and that the air
surrounding it is de-ionized and auto-reclosure can successfully take place (usually 0.9 s to 1.5 s). For lines
supplied by more than one side, mostly system stability has priority. Since the de-energized line cannot
transfer synchronizing energy, only short dead times are allowed. Standard values are 0.3 s to 0.6 s. In radial
systems, longer dead times are allowed.
Cyclic Control of Protective Functions via Automatic Reclosure

The addresses 7200 through 7211 and 7248, 7249, 7256, 7257 and 7175 through 7177 allow the AR to
control the cycle of the different protection functions. This enables any protection elements to be blocked
selectively, set to operate instantaneously or according to the configured delay times.
The following options are available:
• Set value T=T The protection element is delayed as configured, i.e. the automatic reclosing function
does not effect this element;
instant. T=0 The protection element becomes instantaneous if the automatic reclosing function is
ready to perform the mentioned cycle;
blocked T=∞ The protection element is blocked if the auto-reclose function reaches the cycle defined
in the parameter. The element picks up, however, time expiry of the element is blocked by this setting.
Dead Times (2nd to 4th AR)

If more than one reclosing cycle was set, you can now configure the individual reclosing settings for the 2nd
to 4th cycle. The same options are available as for the first cycle.
For the 2nd cycle:
Address 7129 DEADTIME 2: PH Dead time for the 2nd reclosing attempt phase
Address 7130 DEADTIME 2: G Dead time for the 2nd reclosing attempt ground
Addresses 7212 to 7223, Cyclic control of the various protection functions by the 2nd reclosing
7250, 7251, 7258, 7259 attempt
and 7178 to 7180
For the 3rd cycle:

Address 7131 DEADTIME 3: PH Dead time for the 3rd reclosing attempt phase
Address 7132 DEADTIME 3: G Dead time for the 3rd reclosing attempt ground
Addresses 7224 to 7235, Cyclic control of the various protection functions by the 3rd reclosing
7252, 7253, 7260, 7261 attempt
and 7181 to 7183

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
For the 4th cycle:

Address 7133 DEADTIME 4: PH Dead time for the 4th reclosing attempt phase
Address 7134 DEADTIME 4: G Dead time for the 4th reclosing attempt ground
Addresses 7236 to 7247, Cyclic control of the various protection functions by the 4th reclosing
7254, 7255, 7262, 7263 attempt
and 7184 to 7186
Fifth to Ninth Reclosing Attempt

If more than four cycles are configured, the dead times set for the fourth cycle also apply to the fifth to ninth
cycle.
Blocking Three-Phase Faults

Regardless of which reclosing program is executed, automatic reclosing can be blocked for trips following
three-phase faults (address 7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK). The pickup of all three phases for a overcurrent
element is the criterion required.
Blocking of Automatic Rreclosure via Internal Control

The automatic reclosure function can be blocked, if control commands are issued via the integrated control
function of the device. The information must be routed via CFC (interlocking task-level) using the CMD_Infor-
mation function block (see the following figure).
[blockierung-der-wiedereinschaltautomatik-26-06-02-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-110 Blocking of the automatic reclose function using the internal control function
Zone Sequencing / Fuse Saving Scheme

At address 7140 ZONE SEQ.COORD., the zone sequencing feature can be turned ON or OFF.
If multiple reclosing operations are performed and the zone sequencing function is deactivated, only those
reclosing cycles are counted which the device has conducted after a trip command. If the zone sequencing
function is switched on, an additional sequence counter also counts such automatic reclosures which (in radial
systems) are carried out by relays connected on load side. This presupposes that the pickup of the 50-1/50N-1
elements drops out without a trip command being issued by a protection function starting the automatic
reclosing function. The parameters at addresses 7200 through 7263 (see paragraphs below at "Start and
Blocking of Automatic Reclosing by Protection Functions" and "Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Over-
current Protection Elements via Cold Load Pickup") can thus be set to determine which protection elements
are active or blocked during what dead time cycles (for multiple reclosing attempts carried out by relays on the
load side).
In the example shown in Figure "Zone sequencing with a fault occurring at Tap Line 5 and the busbar" (see
Figure 2-108) in the functional description, the zone sequencing was applied in the bus relay. Furthermore, as
from the second automatic reclosure, the 50-2 elements (also applicable to the 50-3 elements) must be
blocked, i.e. address 7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 must be set to blocked T=∞. The zone sequencing of the
feeder relays is switched off but the 50-2 elements must also be blocked after the second reclosing attempt.
Moreover, it must be ensured that the 50-2 elements start the automatic reclosing function: Set address 7152
50-2 to Starts 79.
Controlling Directional / Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Elements via Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
The dynamic cold load pickup function provides a further alternative to control the protection via the auto-
matic reclosing function (see also Section 2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup). This function contains the param-
eter 1702 Start Condition. It determines the starting conditions for the increased setting values of
current and time of the dynamic cold load pickup that must apply for directional and non-directional overcur-
rent protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
If parameter 1702 Start Condition is set to 79 ready, the directional and non-directional overcurrent
protection always use the increased setting values if the automatic reclosing function is ready. The auto-reclo-
sure function provides the signal 79 ready for controlling the dynamic cold load pickup. The signal 79
ready is always active if the automatic reclosure function is available, active, unblocked and ready for another
cycle. Control via the dynamic cold load pickup function is non-cyclic.
Since control via dynamic cold load pickup and cyclic control via automatic reclosure function can run simulta-
neously, the directional and non-directional overcurrent protection must coordinate the input values of the
two interfaces. In this context the cyclic auto-reclosing control has the priority and thus overwrites the release
of the dynamic cold load pickup function.
If the protective elements are controlled via the automatic reclosure function, changing the control variables
(e.g. by blocking) has no effect on elements that are already running. The elements in question are continued.
Note Regarding Settings List for Automatic Reclosure Function

The setting options of address 7137 Cmd.via control are generated dynamically according to the current
configuration.
2.17.7 Settings

7101 FCT 79 OFF OFF 79 Auto-Reclose Function
ON
7103 BLOCK MC Dur. 0.50 .. 320.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after manual
close
7105 TIME RESTRAINT 0.50 .. 320.00 sec 3.00 sec 79 Auto Reclosing reset time
7108 SAFETY 79 ready 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Safety Time until 79 is ready
7113 CHECK CB? No check No check Check circuit breaker before AR?
Chk each cycle
7114 T-Start MONITOR 0.01 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring time
7115 CB TIME OUT 0.10 .. 320.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision
Time
7116 Max. DEAD EXT. 0.50 .. 1800.00 sec; ∞ 100.00 sec Maximum dead time extension
7117 T-ACTION 0.01 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ ∞ sec Action time
7118 T DEAD DELAY 0.0 .. 1800.0 sec; ∞ 1.0 sec Maximum Time Delay of Dead-
Time Start
7127 DEADTIME 1: PH 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Phase Fault
7128 DEADTIME 1: G 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Ground Fault
7135 # OF RECL. GND 0 .. 9 1 Number of Reclosing Cycles
Ground
7136 # OF RECL. PH 0 .. 9 1 Number of Reclosing Cycles Phase
7137 Cmd.via control (Setting options depend on none Close command via control device
configuration)
7138 Internal SYNC (Setting options depend on none Internal 25 synchronisation
configuration)
7139 External SYNC YES NO External 25 synchronisation
NO

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

7140 ZONE SEQ.COORD. OFF OFF ZSC - Zone sequence coordination
ON
7150 50-1 No influence No influence 50-1
Starts 79
Stops 79
7151 50N-1 No influence No influence 50N-1
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
7154 51 No influence No influence 51
Starts 79
Stops 79
7155 51N No influence No influence 51N
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
7160 67 TOC No influence No influence 67 TOC
Starts 79
Stops 79
7161 67N TOC No influence No influence 67N TOC
Starts 79
Stops 79
7163 46 No influence No influence 46
Starts 79
Stops 79
7164 BINARY INPUT No influence No influence Binary Input
Starts 79
Stops 79
7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK YES NO 3 Pole Pickup blocks 79
NO

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
7172 67Ns-1 No influence No influence 67Ns-1
Starts 79
Stops 79
7173 67Ns-2 No influence No influence 67Ns-2
Starts 79
Stops 79
7174 67Ns TOC No influence No influence 67Ns TOC
Starts 79
Stops 79
7175 bef.1.Cy:67Ns-1 Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67Ns-1
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7177 bef.1Cy:67NsTOC Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67Ns TOC
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7200 bef.1.Cy:50-1 Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-1
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7201 bef.1.Cy:50N-1 Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-1
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7204 bef.1.Cy:51 Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 51
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7205 bef.1.Cy:51N Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 51N
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7210 bef.1.Cy:67 TOC Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67 TOC
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7211 bef.1.Cy:67NTOC Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N TOC
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7257 bef.1.Cy:67N-3 Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: IE>>> directional
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

Informa-
tion
127 79 ON/OFF IntSP 79 ON/OFF (via system port)
2701 >79 ON SP >79 ON
2702 >79 OFF SP >79 OFF
2711 >79 Start SP >79 External start of internal A/R
2715 >Start 79 Gnd SP >Start 79 Ground program
2716 >Start 79 Ph SP >Start 79 Phase program
2722 >ZSC ON SP >Switch zone sequence coordination ON
2723 >ZSC OFF SP >Switch zone sequence coordination OFF
2730 >CB Ready SP >Circuit breaker READY for reclosing
2731 >Sync.release SP >79: Sync. release from ext. sync.-check
2753 79 DT delay ex. OUT 79: Max. Dead Time Start Delay expired
2754 >79 DT St.Delay SP >79: Dead Time Start Delay
2781 79 OFF OUT 79 Auto recloser is switched OFF
2782 79 ON IntSP 79 Auto recloser is switched ON
2784 79 is NOT ready OUT 79 Auto recloser is NOT ready
2785 79 DynBlock OUT 79 - Auto-reclose is dynamically BLOCKED
2788 79 T-CBreadyExp OUT 79: CB ready monitoring window expired
2801 79 in progress OUT 79 - in progress
2808 79 BLK: CB open OUT 79: CB open with no trip
2809 79 T-Start Exp OUT 79: Start-signal monitoring time expired
2810 79 TdeadMax Exp OUT 79: Maximum dead time expired
2823 79 no starter OUT 79: no starter configured
2824 79 no cycle OUT 79: no cycle configured
2827 79 BLK by trip OUT 79: blocking due to trip
2828 79 BLK:3ph p.u. OUT 79: blocking due to 3-phase pickup
2829 79 Tact expired OUT 79: action time expired before trip
2830 79 Max. No. Cyc OUT 79: max. no. of cycles exceeded
2844 79 1stCyc. run. OUT 79 1st cycle running
2845 79 2ndCyc. run. OUT 79 2nd cycle running
2846 79 3rdCyc. run. OUT 79 3rd cycle running
2847 79 4thCyc. run. OUT 79 4th or higher cycle running

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
2851 79 Close OUT 79 - Close command
2862 79 Successful OUT 79 - cycle successful
2863 79 Lockout OUT 79 - Lockout
2865 79 Sync.Request OUT 79: Synchro-check request
2878 79 L-N Sequence OUT 79-A/R single phase reclosing sequence
2879 79 L-L Sequence OUT 79-A/R multi-phase reclosing sequence
2883 ZSC active OUT Zone Sequencing is active
2884 ZSC ON OUT Zone sequence coordination switched ON
2885 ZSC OFF OUT Zone sequence coordination switched OFF
2889 79 1.CycZoneRel OUT 79 1st cycle zone extension release
2890 79 2.CycZoneRel OUT 79 2nd cycle zone extension release
2891 79 3.CycZoneRel OUT 79 3rd cycle zone extension release
2892 79 4.CycZoneRel OUT 79 4th cycle zone extension release
2899 79 CloseRequest OUT 79: Close request to Control Function

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.18 Fault Locator
2.18 Fault Locator

The measurement of the distance to a short-circuit fault is a supplement to the protection functions. Power
transmission within the system can be increased when the fault is located and cleared faster.
2.18.1 Description
General
The fault locator is a stand-alone and independent function which uses the line and power system parameters
set in other functions. In the event of a fault, it is addressed by the protection functions provided in the 7SJ66
device.
The protected object can e.g. be an inhomogeneous line. For calculation purposes, the line can be divided into
different sections, for example, a short cable followed by an overhead line. In such protected objects, you can
configure each section individually. Without this information, the fault locator uses the general line data (see
Section 2.1.6.2 Setting Notes).
The fault locator also calculates double ground faults with different base points, reverse faults and faults that
are located behind the configured sections. For faults that are not located within the configured sections, the
fault locator uses the general line data.
The fault locator can be triggered by the trip command of the non-directional or directional time overcurrent
protection, or by each fault detection. In the latter case, fault location calculations is even possible if another
protection relay cleared the fault. Additionally, the fault location can be initiated via a binary input. However,
it is a prerequisite that pickup of the time overcurrent protection is performed at the same time (directional or
nondirectional).
Fault Location Determination

The measurement principle of the fault locator is based on the calculation of impedances.
Sampled value pairs of short-circuit current and short-circuit voltage are stored in a buffer (at a sampling rate
of 1/16 cycle) shortly after the trip command. At that time, even with very fast circuit breakers, no errors in the
measured values have occurred during the shutdown procedure. Measured value filtering and the number of
impedance calculations are adjusted automatically to the number of stable measured value pairs in the deter-
mined data window. If no sufficient data windows with reliable values could be determined for fault location,
message Flt.Loc.invalid is issued.
The fault locator evaluates the short-circuit loops and uses the loops with the lowest fault impedance (see
margin heading “Loop Selection”).
NOTE
i If in Power System Data 1 address 213 Vab, Vbc, VGnd was selected for the voltage connection
(connection of two phase-to-phase voltages as well as the displacement voltage), but without connecting a
displacement voltage to the device, the fault locator cannot function properly and must be taken out of
service.
Loop Selection
Using the pickup of the time overcurrent protection (directional or non-directional), the valid measurement
loops for the calculation of fault impedance are selected.
The following table shows the assignment of the evaluated loops to the possible pickup scenarios of the
protection elements.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.18 Fault Locator
Table 2-19 Assignment of Pickup - Evaluated Loops
Pickup by Fault Type Measured Loop Signaled Loop

A B C N
x A A-N A-N
x B B-N B-N
x C C-N C-N
x N A-N, B-N, C-N lowest impedance
x x A-N A-N A-N
x x B-N B-N B-N
x x C-N C-N C-N
x x A-B A-B A-B
x x A-C A-C A-C
x x B-C B-C B-C
x x x A-B-N A-B, A-N, B-N lowest impedance
x x x A-C-N C-A, A-N, B-N lowest impedance
x x x B-C-N B-C, B-N, C-N lowest impedance
x x x A-B-C A-B, B-C, C-A lowest impedance
x x x x A-B-C-N A-B, B-C, C-A, A-N, B-N, C-N lowest impedance
Output of Fault Location

The following information is output as result of the fault location:
• the short-circuit loop from which the fault reactance was determined,
• the fault reactance X in Ω primary and Ω secondary,
• the fault resistance R in Ω primary and Ω secondary,
• the distance to fault d in kilometers or miles of the line proportional to the reactance, converted on the
basis of the set line reactance per unit line length,
• the distance to fault d in % of the line length, calculated on the basis of the set reactance per unit length
and the set line length.
Line Sections
The line type is determined by the line section settings. If, for instance, the line includes a cable and an over-
head line, two different sections must be configured. The system can distinguish between up to three
different line types. When configuring this line data, please note that the different tabs for setting the line
sections will only be displayed if more than one line section has been configured under the functional scope
(address 181). The parameters for a line section are entered in the Setting tab .
.
General
The fault location is only enabled if address 180 was set to Enabled during configuration of the function
extent.
Under address 181 L-sections FL the number of line section must be selected, which is required for the
accurate description of the line. If the number is set to 2 Sections or 3 Sections, further setting sheets
appear in the Power System Data 2 in DIGSI. Default setting is 1 Section.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.18 Fault Locator
Line Data
To calculate the fault distance in kilometers or miles, the device needs the per distance reactance of the line in
Ω/kilometer or Ω/mile. Furthermore, the line length in km or miles, the angle of the line impedance, and resis-
tance and reactance ratios are required. These parameters have already been set in the Power System Data 2
for a maximum of 3 line sections (see Section 2.1.6.2 Setting Notes under “Ground Impedance Ratios” and
“Reactance per Unit Length”).
Initiation of Measurement
Normally the fault location calculation is started when a directional or non-directional time overcurrent protec-
tion initiates a trip signal (address 8001 START = TRIP). However, it may also be initiated when pickup drops
out (address 8001 START = Pickup), e.g. when another protection element clears the fault. Irrespective of
this fact, calculation of the fault location can be triggered externally via a binary input. (FNo. 1106 >Start
Flt. Loc) provided the device has picked up.
2.18.3 Settings

8001 START Pickup Pickup Start fault locator with
TRIP

Informa-
tion
1106 >Start Flt. Loc SP >Start Fault Locator
1114 Rpri = VI Flt Locator: primary RESISTANCE
1115 Xpri = VI Flt Locator: primary REACTANCE
1117 Rsec = VI Flt Locator: secondary RESISTANCE
1118 Xsec = VI Flt Locator: secondary REACTANCE
1119 dist = VI Flt Locator: Distance to fault
1120 d[%] = VI Flt Locator: Distance [%] to fault
1122 dist = VI Flt Locator: Distance to fault
1123 FL Loop AG OUT Fault Locator Loop AG
1124 FL Loop BG OUT Fault Locator Loop BG
1125 FL Loop CG OUT Fault Locator Loop CG
1126 FL Loop AB OUT Fault Locator Loop AB
1127 FL Loop BC OUT Fault Locator Loop BC
1128 FL Loop CA OUT Fault Locator Loop CA
1132 Flt.Loc.invalid OUT Fault location invalid

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.19 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF

The breaker failure protection function monitors proper tripping of the relevant circuit breaker..
2.19.1 Description
General
If after a programmable time delay, the circuit breaker has not opened, breaker failure protection issues a trip
signal to isolate the failure breaker by tripping other surrounding backup circuit breaker (see example in the
figure below).
[funktionsprinzip-svs-20061219, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-111 Function principle of the breaker failure protection
Initiation
The breaker failure protection function can be initiated by two different sources:
• Trip signals of internal protective functions of the 7SJ66,
• External trip signals via binary inputs (>50BF ext SRC).

For each of the two sources, a unique pickup message is generated, a unique time delay is initiated, and a
unique trip signal is generated. The setting values of current threshold and delay time apply to both sources.
Criteria
There are two criteria for breaker failure detection:
• Check whether the current flow has effectively disappeared after a tripping command was issued,
• Evaluate the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts.

The criteria used to determine if the circuit breaker has operated are selectable and also depend on the protec-
tion function that initiated the breaker failure function. On tripping without fault current, e.g. via voltage
protection, the current below the threshold 50BF PICKUP is not a reliable indication of the proper func-
tioning of the circuit breaker. In such cases, pickup exclusively depends on the auxiliary contact criterion. In
protection functions based on the measurement of currents (including all short-circuit protection functions),
the current flow is a preferential criterion, i.e. it is given priority, as opposed to the auxiliary contacts. If
current flows above the set threshold or thresholds (enabled w/ 3I0>) are detected, the breaker failure
protection trips even if the auxiliary criterion indicates “Breaker Open”.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Monitoring of the Current Flow

Address 170 50BF can be set in such a way that either the current criterion can already be met by a single
phase current (setting Enabled) or that another current is taken into consideration in order to check the plau-
sibility (setting enabled w/ 3I0>), see Figure 2-112.
The currents are filtered through numerical filters to evaluate only the fundamental harmonic. They are moni-
tored and compared to the set threshold values. Besides the three phase currents, two additional currents are
provided to enable a plausibility check. Separate threshold values can be used for this plausibility check if this
is configured accordingly. To detect ground faults more quickly, the threshold value for the ground current
can also be used for checking the plausibility of the phase currents. This function is activated via binary input
>50BFactiv.3I0> (see Figure 2-112).
The ground current IN (3·Ι0) is preferably used as plausibility current. Via the parameters 613 you decide
whether the measured (Ignd (measured)) or the calculated (3I0 (calcul.)) values are to be used. In
case of system faults not involving ground currents, no increased ground currents/residual currents are
flowing, and therefore the calculated triple negative sequence current 3·I2 or a second phase current is used
as plausibility current.
[7sj80-plausibilitaet-i-sv-20061218, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-112 Monitoring of the current flow
Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts

Evaluation of the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts depends on the type of contacts, and how they are
connected to the binary inputs:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• the auxiliary contacts for circuit breaker "open" (4602 >52-b) and "closed" (4601 >52-a) are configured,
• only the auxiliary contact for circuit breaker "open" is configured (4602 >52-b),
• only the auxiliary contact for circuit breaker "closed" is configured (4601 >52-a),
• none of the two auxiliary contacts is configured.

Feedback information of the auxiliary status of the circuit breaker is evaluated, depending on the allocation of
binary inputs and auxiliary contacts. After a trip command has been issued it is the aim to detect — if possible
— by means of the feedback of the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts whether the breaker is open or in inter-
mediate position. If valid, this information can be used for a proper initiation of the breaker failure protection
function.
The logic diagram illustrates the monitoring of the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts.
[7sj80-erzeug-svs-int-sign, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-113 Logic diagram for breaker failure protection, monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts
Logic
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the breaker failure protection function. The entire breaker
failure protection function may be turned on or off, or it can be blocked dynamically via binary inputs. If
breaker failure protection is initiated, an alarm message is generated. With the initiation, two setable delay
times are started. One delay time can be used to repeat the trip command to the local circuit breaker. The
other is used to trip the higher-level circuit breaker. If criteria for a pickup are still met once the time delays
have elapsed, the trip signals are issued successively
If the criteria that led to the pickup are no longer met, after the time delays have elapsed, then the pickup will
drop out and no trip signal is issued by the breaker failure protection function.
To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilization of the binary inputs for
external trip signals takes place. This external signal must be present during the entire period of the delay
times, otherwise the timer is reset and no tripping signal is issued.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj62-64-svs-20081110, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-114 Logic diagram of the breaker failure protection
General
Breaker failure protection is only effective and accessible if address 170 50BF is set to Enabled or enabled
w/ 3I0>. Setting Enabled considers the three phase currents for total current monitoring. Setting enabled
w/ 3I0> additionally evaluates the ground current or the negative sequence system when only one phase
current occurs.
If this function is not required, then Disabled is set. The function can be set to ON or OFF under address
7001 FCT 50BF.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Criteria
Address 7004 Chk BRK CONTACT establishes whether or not the breaker auxiliary contacts connected via
binary inputs are to be used as a criterion for pickup. If this address is set to ON, then current criterion and/or
the auxiliary contact criterion apply. This setting must be selected if the breaker failure protection is started by
functions, which do not always have a certain criterion for detection of an open circuit breaker, e.g. voltage
protection.
Single-Element Breaker Failure Protection

In single-element breaker failure protection, the adjacent circuit breakers, i.e. the breakers of the busbar or the
busbar section affected, and where applicable also the breaker at the remote end, are tripped after the time
delay TRIP-Timer (address 7005) has elapsed. The time 50BF-2 Delay (address 7008) is in this case set to
infinite because it is not needed.
The time delay to be set should be based on the maximum circuit breaker operating time plus the dropout
time of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin which takes into consideration the tolerance
of the time delay. Figure 2-115 illustrates the time sequences in an example.
[abl-bei-norm-fehlerkllaer-u-bei-lsvs-20061220, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-115 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and for circuit breaker failure with
single-element breaker failure protection
Two-Element Breaker Failure Protection

In two-element breaker failure protection, the trip command is output again to the local feeder circuit breaker,
normally to a separate set of trip coils of the feeder breaker, after the time delay TRIP-Timer (address 7005)
has elapsed.
If the circuit breaker does not respond to the repeated trip, the adjacent circuit breakers, i.e. the breakers of
the busbar or the busbar section affected, and where applicable also the breaker at the remote end, are
tripped after the time delay 50BF-2 Delay (Adresse 7008) has elapsed and the fault still exists.
The time delays to be set should be based on the maximum circuit breaker operating time plus the dropout
time of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin which takes into consideration the tolerance
of the time delay. Figure 2-116 illustrates the time sequences in an example.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[abl-bei-norm-fehlerkllaer-u-bei-lsvs-2stufig-090116, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-116 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and for circuit breaker failure with
two-element breaker failure protection
Pickup Values
The pickup value of the current flow monitoring is set under address 7006 50BF PICKUP, and the pickup
value of the ground current monitoring under address 7007 50BF PICKUP IE>. The threshold values must
be set at a level below the minimum fault current for which the total current monitoring must operate. A
setting of 10 % below the minimum fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate is recom-
mended. The pickup value should not be set too low since otherwise there is a risk that transients in the
current transformer secondary circuit may lead to extended dropout times if extremely high currents are
switched off.
Via binary input 1404 >50BFactiv.3I0> you can activate the threshold value 50BF PICKUP IE> also for
checking the plausibility of the phase currents.
2.19.3 Settings
7001 FCT 50BF OFF OFF 50BF Breaker Failure
ON Protection
7004 Chk BRK CONTACT OFF OFF Check Breaker contacts
ON
7005 TRIP-Timer 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
7006 50BF PICKUP 1A 0.03 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A 50BF Pickup current
5A 0.15 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A threshold
7007 50BF PICKUP IE> 0.03 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A 50BF Pickup earth current
threshold
7008 50BF-2 Delay 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Delay of 2nd stage for
busbar trip

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
1403 >BLOCK 50BF SP >BLOCK 50BF
1404 >50BFactiv.3I0> SP >50BF Activate 3I0> threshold
1431 >50BF ext SRC SP >50BF initiated externally
1451 50BF OFF OUT 50BF is switched OFF
1452 50BF BLOCK OUT 50BF is BLOCKED
1453 50BF ACTIVE OUT 50BF is ACTIVE
1456 50BF int Pickup OUT 50BF (internal) PICKUP
1457 50BF ext Pickup OUT 50BF (external) PICKUP
1471 50BF TRIP OUT 50BF TRIP
1480 50BF int TRIP OUT 50BF (internal) TRIP
1481 50BF ext TRIP OUT 50BF (external) TRIP
1494 50BF TRIP 2 OUT 50BF TRIP 2

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.20 Flexible Protection Functions

The flexible protection function is applicable for a variety of protection principles. The user can create up to 20
flexible protection functions and configure them according to their function. Each function can be used either
as an autonomous protection function, as an additional protective element of an existing protection function
or as a universal logic, e.g. for monitoring tasks.
General
The function is a combination of a standard protection logic and a characteristic (measured quantity or derived
quantity) that is adjustable via parameters. The characteristics listed in table 2-20 and the derived protection
functions are available.
Table 2-20 Possible Protection Functions
Characteristic Characteristic / Measured Quantity Protective Function ANSI-No. Mode of Operation

Group 3–phase 1–phase
Current Ι RMS value of fundamental Time overcurrent protec- 50, 50G X X
component tion
Ιrms True RMS (r.m.s. value) Time overcurrent protec- 50, 50G X X
tion
Thermal overload protec-
tion
3Ι0 Zero sequence system Time overcurrent protec- 50N X
tion, ground
Ι1 Positive-sequence component X
Ι2 Negative-sequence component Negative sequence protec- 46 X
tion
Ι2/Ι1 Positive/negative sequence X
component ratio
Frequency f Frequency Frequency protection 81U/O without phase
df/dt Frequency change Frequency change protec- 81R reference
tion
Voltage V RMS value of fundamental Voltage protection 27, 59, X X
component Displacement voltage 59G, 59N,
59NC
Vrms True RMS (r.m.s. value) Voltage protection 27, 59, X X
Displacement voltage 59G, 59N,
59NC
3V0 Zero sequence system Displacement voltage 59N X
V1 Positive-sequence component Voltage protection 27, 59 X
V2 Negative-sequence component Voltage asymmetry 47 X
dV/dt Voltage change Voltage change protection X
Power P Real power Reverse power protection 32R, 32, 37 X X
Power protection
Q Reactive power Power protection 32 X X
cos φ Power factor Power factor 55 X X
Binary input – Binary input Direct coupling without phase
reference

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Section 2.21 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function gives an application
example of the function “reverse power protection”.
The maximum 20 configurable protection functions operate independently of each other. The following
description concerns one function; it can be applied accordingly to all other flexible functions. The logic
diagram Figure 2-117 illustrates the description.
Functional Logic
The function can be switched OFF and ON or, it can be set to Alarm Only. In this status, a pickup condition
will neither initiate fault recording nor start the trip time delay. Tripping is thus not possible.
Changing the Power System Data 1 after flexible functions have been configured may cause these functions to
be set incorrectly. Message (FNo.235.2128 $00 inval.set) reports this condition. The function is inactive
in this case and function's setting has to be modified.
Blocking Functions
The function can be blocked via binary input (FNo. 235.2110 >BLOCK $00) or via local operating terminal
(“Control”->“Tagging”->“Set”). Blocking will reset the function's entire measurement logic as well as all running
times and indications. Blocking via the local operating terminal may be useful if the function is in a status of
permanent pickup which does not allow the function to be reset.
In context with voltage-based characteristics, the function can be blocked if one of the measuring voltages
fails. Recognition of this status is either accomplished by the relay's internal „Fuse-Failure-Monitor“ (FNo. 170
VT FuseFail; see section 2.12.1 Measurement Supervision) or via auxiliary contacts of the voltage trans-
former CB (FNo. 6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT and FNo. 6510 >FAIL: BUS VT). This blocking mechanism can
be enabled or disabled in the according parameters. The associated parameter BLK.by Vol.Loss is only
available if the characteristic is based on a voltage measurement.
When using the flexible function for power protection or power monitoring, it will be blocked if currents fall
below 0.03 · ΙNom.
Parameter BLK f out of r allows you to specify whether the protection function is blocked if the meas-
ured power frequency is outside the operating range of the function (25 Hz to 70 Hz).
Operating Mode, Measured Quantity, Measurement Method

The flexible function can be tailored to assume a specific protective function for a concrete application in
parameters OPERRAT. MODE, MEAS. QUANTITY, MEAS. METHOD and PICKUP WITH. Parameter
OPERRAT. MODE can be set to specify whether the function works 3-phase, 1-phase or no reference,
i.e. without a fixed phase reference. The three-phase method evaluates all three phases in parallel. This
implies that threshold evaluation, pickup indications and trip time delay are accomplished selectively for each
phase and parallel to each other. This may be for example the typical operating principle of a three-phase time
overcurrent protection.
When operating single-phase, the function employs either a phase's measured quantity, which must be stated
explicitly, (e.g. evaluating only the current in phase Ib), the measured ground current In or the measured
displacement voltage Vn.
If the characteristic relates to the frequency or if external trip commands are used, the operating principle is
without (fixed) phase reference. Additional parameters can be set to specify the used MEAS. QUANTITY and
the MEAS. METHOD. The MEAS. METHOD determines for current and voltage measured values whether the
function uses the RMS value of the fundamental component or the normal RMS value (true RMS) that evalu-
ates also harmonics. All other characteristics use always the rms value of the fundamental component. Param-
eter PICKUP WITH moreover specifies whether the function picks up on exceeding the threshold (>-element)
or on falling below the threshold (<-element).
Characteristic Curve
The function's characteristic curve is always “definite time”; this means that the time delay is not affected by
the measured quantity.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Function Logic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of a three-phase function. If the function operates on one phase
or without phase reference, phase selectivity and phase-specific indications are not relevant.
[lo_7sj66_flexprot, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-117 Logic Diagram of the Flexible Protection Functions
The parameters can be set to monitor either exceeding or dropping below of the threshold. The configurable
pickup time delay will be started once the threshold (>-element) has been exceeded. When the time delay has
elapsed and the threshold is still violated, the pickup of the phase (e.g. no. 235.2122 $00 pickup A)and of
the function (no. 235.2121 $00 picked up) is reported. If the pickup delay is set to zero, the pickup will
occur simultaneously with the detection of the threshold violation. If the function is enabled, the pickup will
start the trip time delay and the fault log. This is not the case if set to "Alarm only". If the threshold violation
persists after the trip time delay has elapsed, the trip will be initiated upon its expiration (no. 235.2126 $00
TRIP). The timeout is reported via (no. 235.2125 $00 Time Out). Expiry of the trip time delay can be
blocked via binary input (no. 235.2113 >$00 BLK.TDly). The time delay will not be started as long as the

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
binary input is active; a trip can thus be initiated. The time delay is started after the binary input has dropped
out and the pickup is still present. It is also possible to bypass the expiration of the time delay by activating
binary input (no. 235.2111 >$00 instant.). The trip will be launched immediately when the pickup is
present and the binary input has been activated. The trip command can be blocked via binary inputs (no.
235.2115 >$00 BL.TripA) and (no. 235.2114 >$00 BLK.TRIP). The phase-selective blocking of the trip
command is required for interaction with the inrush restraint (see “Interaction with other functions”). The
function's dropout ratio can be set. If the threshold (>-element) is undershot after the pickup, the dropout
time delay will be started. The pickup is maintained during that time, a started trip delay time continues to
count down. If the trip time delay has elapsed while the dropout time delay is still during, the trip command
will only be given if the current threshold is exceeded. The element will only drop out when the dropout time
delay has elapsed. If the time is set to zero, the dropout will be initiated immediately once the threshold is
undershot.
External Trip Commands

The logic diagram does not explicitly depict the external trip commands since their functionality is analogous.
If the binary input is activated for external trip commands (no. 235.2112 >$00 Dir.TRIP), it will be logically
treated as threshold overshooting, i.e. once it has been activated, the pickup time delay is started. If the
pickup time delay is set to zero, the pickup condition will be reported immediately starting the trip time delay.
Otherwise, the logic is the same as depicted in Function Logic, Page 283.
Interaction with Other Functions

The flexible protection functions interact with a number of other functions such as the
• Breaker failure protection:

The breaker failure protection is started automatically if the function initiates a trip. The trip will,
however, only take place if the current criterion is met at this time, i.e. the set minimum current
threshold 212 BkrClosed I MIN (Power System Data 1) has been exceeded.
• Automatic reclosing (AR):

The AR cannot be started directly. In order to interact with the AR, the trip command of the flexible func-
tion needs be linked in CFC to binary input no. 2716 >Start 79 Ph or no. 2715 >Start 79 Gnd.
Using an operating time requires the pickup of the flexible function to be linked to binary input no. 2711
>79 Start.
• Fuse-Failure-Monitor (see description at “Blocking Functions”).
• Inrush restraint:
Direct interaction with the inrush restraint is not possible. In order to block a flexible function by the
inrush restraint, the blocking must be carried out in CFC. The flexible function provides three binary
inputs for blocking trip commands selectively for each phase (no. 235.2115 to 235.2117). They have to
be linked with the phase-selective indications for detecting the inrush (no. 1840 to 1842). Activating a
crossblock function requires the phase-selective inrush indications to be logically combined with the
binary input for blocking the function trip command (no. 235.2114 >$00 BLK.TRIP). The flexible func-
tion also needs to be delayed by at least 20 ms to make sure that the inrush restraint picks up before the
flexible function.
• Entire relay logic:

The pickup signal of the flexible function is added to the general device pickup, the trip signal is added to
the general device trip (see also Section 2.25 Function Logic). All functions associated with general
device pickup and tripping are thus also applied to the flexible function.
After the picked up element has dropped out, the trip signals of the flexible protection functions are held
up at least for the specified minimum trip command time 210 T TRIPCOM MIN.
The setting of the functional scope determines the number of flexible protection functions to be used (see
Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope). If a flexible function in the functional scope is disabled (by removing the

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
checkmark), this will result in losing all settings and configurations of this function or its settings will be reset
to their default settings.
General
In the DIGSI setting dialog "General", parameter FLEXIBLE FUNC. can be set to OFF, ON or Alarm Only. If
the function is enabled in operational mode Alarm Only, no faults are recorded, no „Effective“-indication is
generated, no trip command issued and neither will the circuit-breaker protection be affected. Therefore, this
operational mode is preferred when a flexible function is not required to operate as a protection function.
Furthermore, the OPERRAT. MODE can be configured.
Three-phase – functions evaluate the three-phase measuring system, i.e. all three phases are processed
simultaneously. A typical example is the three-phase operating time overcurrent protection.
Single-phase – functions evaluate only the individual measuring value. This can be an individual phase value
(e.g VB) or a ground variable (VN or ΙN).
Setting no reference determines the evaluation of measured variables irrespective of a single or threep-
hase connection of current and voltage. Table 2-20 provides an overview regarding which variables can be
used in which mode of operation.
Parameter BLK f out of r allows you to specify whether the protection function is blocked if the meas-
ured power frequency is outside the operating range of the function (25 Hz to 70 Hz). SIEMENS recommends
using the default setting (YES). A release beyond the normal operating range is only required for special appli-
cations.
Measured Variable
In the setting dialog “Measured Variable” the measured variables to be evaluated by the flexible protection
functions can be selected, which may be a calculated or a directly measured variable. The setting options that
can be selected here are dependent on the mode of measured-value processing as predefined in parameter
OPERRAT. MODE (see the following table).
Table 2-21 Parameter “Operating Mode” and “Measured Quantity”
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY

Setting Setting Options
Single-phase, Current
Three-phase Voltage
P forward
P reverse
Q forward
Q reverse
Power factor
3-phase dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
Without Reference Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binary Input
Measurement Procedures
The measurement procedures as set out in the following table can be configured for the measured variables -
current, voltage and power. The dependencies of the available measurement procedures of configurable
modes of operation and the measured variable are also indicated.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Table 2-22 Parameter in the Setting Dialog "Measurement Procedure", Mode of Operation 3-phase
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE = 3-phase

Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Current or Voltage
Parameter MEAS. METHOD
Fundamental Harmonic Only the fundamental harmonic is evaluated, higher harmonics are suppressed. This is
the standard measurement procedure of the protection functions.
Important: The voltage threshold value is always parameterized as phase-to-phase
voltage. Independent of parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM.
True RMS The "true" RMS value is determined, i.e. higher harmonics are evaluated. This procedure is
applied, for example, if an overload protection element must be realized on the basis of a
current measurement, as the higher harmonics contribute to thermal heating.
Important: The voltage threshold value is always parameterized as phase-to-phase
voltage. Independent of parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM.
Positive seq., In order to realize certain applications, the positive sequence system or negative
Negative seq., sequence system can be configured as measurement procedure. Examples are:
Zero sequence - I2 (tripping monitoring system)
- U2 (voltage asymmetry)
Via the selection zero sequence system, additional zero sequence current or zero
sequence voltage functions can be realized that operate independent of the ground varia-
bles IN and VN, which are measured directly via transformers.
Important: The voltage threshold is always parameterized according to the definition of

the balanced components independently of parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM.
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Current
Parameter MEAS. METHOD
Ratio I2/I1 The ratio of the negative-sequence current to the positive-sequence current is evaluated.
Please note that the function only operates ifΙ2 or Ι1 has exceeded the threshold value
0.1 · ΙN.
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Voltage
Parameter VOLTAGE
SYSTEM
Phase-Phase If phase-to-ground voltages are connected to the device (see parameter address 213 VT
Phase-Ground Connect. 3ph), it can be selected whether a three-phase operating voltage function
must evaluate the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages. When selecting phase-to-
phase, these variables are derived from the phase-to-ground voltages. The selection is, for
example, important for single-pole faults. If the faulty voltage drops to zero, the affected
phase-to-ground voltage is thus zero, and the respective phase-to-phase voltages drop to
the variable of a phase-to-ground voltage.
With phase-to-phase voltage connection the parameter is hidden.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
NOTE
i With regard to the phase-selective pickup messages, a special behavior is observed in the three-phase
voltage protection with phase-to-phase variables, because the phase-selective pickup message "Flx01
Pickup Lx" is allocated to the respective measured-value channel "Lx".
Single-phase faults:
If, for example, voltage VA drops to such degree that voltages VAB and VCA exceed their threshold values, the
device indicates pickups “Flx01 Pickup A” and “Flx01 Pickup C”, because the undershooting was detected in
the first and third measured-value channel.
Two-phase faults:
If, for example, voltage VAB drops to such degree that its threshold value is reached, the device then indi-
cates pickup "Flx01 Pickup A", because the undershooting was detected in the first measured-value
channel.
Table 2-23 Parameter in the Setting Dialog "Measurement Procedure", Mode of Operation 1-phase
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE = 1-phase

Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Current or Voltage
Parameter
MEAS. METHOD
Fundamental Harmonic Only the fundamental harmonic is evaluated, higher harmonics are suppressed. This is
the standard measurement procedure of the protection functions.
True RMS The “True” RMS value is determined, i.e. higher harmonics are evaluated. This procedure
is applied, for example, if an overload protection element must be realized on the basis of
a current measurement, as the higher harmonics contribute to thermal heating.
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Current
Parameter CURRENT
Ia It is determined which current-measuring channel must be evaluated by the function.
Ib Depending on the device version, either IN (normal-sensitive ground current input), INS
Ic (sensitive ground current input) or IN2 (second ground current connected to the device)
can be selected.
In
In sensitive
In2
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Voltage
Parameter VOLTAGE
Va-n It is determined which voltage-measuring channel must be evaluated by the function.
Vb-n When selecting phase-to-phase voltage, the threshold value must be set as a phase-to-
Vc-n phase value, when selecting a phase-to-ground variable as phase-toground voltage. The
extent of the setting texts depends on the connection of the voltage transformer (see
Va-b
address 213 VT Connect. 3ph).
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = P forward or P reverse or Q forward or Q reverse
Parameter POWER
Ia Va-n It is determined which power-measuring channel (current and voltage) must be evaluated
Ib Vb-n by the function. With phase-tophase voltage connections the parameter is hidden (see
Ic Vc-n address 213 VT Connect. 3ph).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
NOTE
i Warning!
If the 3-phase voltage connection is established at a motor or generator feeder and the Ux input is operated
at the busbar or at another voltage measuring point other than the feeder, you must select "True RMS" as
the measurement procedure. Otherwise, there is a risk of overfunction or underfunction in a situation
where the feeder voltage and the Ux voltage exhibit significantly different frequencies.
NOTE
i With single-phase voltage protection, the configured voltage threshold is always interpreted as voltage at
the terminal. The parameterization in 213 VT Connect. 3ph (see Power System Data 1) is ignored here.
The forward direction of power (P forward, Q reverse) is the direction of the line. Parameter (1108 P,Q sign)
for sign inversion of the power display in the operating measured values is ignored by the flexible functions.
Via parameter PICKUP WITH it is determined whether the function must be triggered on exceeding or under-
shooting of the set threshold value.
Settings
The pickup thresholds, time delays and dropout ratios of the flexible protection function are set in the
“Settings” dialog box in DIGSI.
The pickup threshold of the function is configured via parameter P.U. THRESHOLD. The OFF-command time
delay is set via parameter T TRIP DELAY. Both setting values must be selected according to the required
application.
The pickup can be delayed via parameter T PICKUP DELAY. This parameter is usually set to zero (default
setting) in protection applications, because a protection function should pick up as quickly as possible. A
setting deviating from zero may be appropriate if a trip log is not desired to be started upon each short-term
exceeding of the pickup threshold, for example, with power protection or when a function is not used as a
protection, but as a monitoring function.
When setting the power threshold values, it is important to take into consideration that a minimum current of
0.03 ΙN is required for power calculation. The power calculation is blocked for lower currents.
The dropout of pickup can be delayed via parameter T DROPOUT DELAY. This setting is also set to zero by
default (standard setting) A setting deviating from zero may be required if the device is utilized together with
electro-magnetic devices with considerably longer dropout ratios than the digital protection device (see
Section 2.2 for more information). When utilizing the dropout time delay, it is recommended to set it to a
shorter time than the OFF-command time delay in order to avoid both times to "race".
The dropout ratio of the function can be selected in parameter DROPOUT RATIO. The standard dropout ratio
of protection functions is 0.95 (default setting). If the function is used as power protection, a dropout ratio of
at least 0.9 should be set. The same applies to the utilization of the symmetrical components of current and
voltage. If the dropout ratio is decreased, it would be sensible to test the pickup of the function regarding
possible "chatter".
The dropout difference of the frequency elements is set under parameter DO differential. Usually, the
default setting of 0.02 Hz can be retained. A higher dropout difference should be set in weak systems with
larger, short-term frequency fluctuations to avoid chattering of the message.
A fixed dropout difference of 0.1 Hz/s is used for the frequency change (df/dt) measurand. The same applies to
the voltage change (dU/dt) measurand. The permanent dropout difference here is 3 V/s.
Parameter BLK.by Vol.Loss determines whether a function whose measured variable is based on a voltage
measurement (measured quantities voltage, P forward, P reverse, Q forward, Q reverse and power factor),
should be blocked in case of a measured voltage failure (set to YES) or not (set to NO).
Renaming Messages, Checking Configurations

After parameterization of a flexible function, the following steps should be noted:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• Open matrix in DIGSI
• Rename the neutral message texts in accordance with the application.
• Check configurations on contacts and in operation and fault buffer, or set them according to the require-
ments.
Further Information
The following instruction should be noted:
• As the power factor does not differentiate between capacitive and inductive, the sign of the reactive
power may be used with CFC-help as an additional criterion.
2.20.3 Settings
0 FLEXIBLE FUNC. OFF OFF Flexible Function
ON
Alarm Only
0 OPERRAT. MODE 3-phase 3-phase Mode of Operation
1-phase
no reference
0 BLK f out of r YES YES Block while Freq. is out of
NO range
0 MEAS. QUANTITY Please select Please select Selection of Measured
Current Quantity
Voltage
P forward
P reverse
Q forward
Q reverse
Power factor
dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binary Input
0 MEAS. METHOD Fundamental Fundamental Selection of Measurement
True RMS Method
Positive seq.
Negative seq.
Zero sequence
Ratio I2/I1
0 PICKUP WITH Exceeding Exceeding Pickup with
Dropping below

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

0 CURRENT Ia Ia Current
Ib
Ic
In
In sensitive
In2
0 VOLTAGE Please select Please select Voltage
Va-n
Vb-n
Vc-n
Va-b
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
0 POWER Ia Va-n Ia Va-n Power
Ib Vb-n
Ic Vc-n
0 VOLTAGE SYSTEM Phase-Phase Phase-Phase Voltage System
Phase-Ground
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A 10.00 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A 10.00 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 0.001 .. 1.500 A 0.100 A Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 2.0 .. 260.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 61.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.5 .. 10000.0 W 200.0 W Pickup Threshold
5A 2.5 .. 50000.0 W 1000.0 W
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.5 .. 10000.0 VAR 200.0 VAR Pickup Threshold
5A 2.5 .. 50000.0 VAR 1000.0 VAR
0 P.U. THRESHOLD -0.99 .. 0.99 0.50 Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 15 .. 100 % 20 % Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 4 .. 100 V/s 60 V/s Pickup Threshold
0 T TRIP DELAY 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec Trip Time Delay
0 T PICKUP DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0 T PICKUP DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0A T DROPOUT DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Dropout Time Delay
0A BLK.by Vol.Loss NO YES Block in case of Meas.-
YES Voltage Loss
0A DROPOUT RATIO 0.70 .. 0.99 0.95 Dropout Ratio
0A DROPOUT RATIO 1.01 .. 3.00 1.05 Dropout Ratio
0A DO differential 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Dropout differential

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
235.2110 >BLOCK $00 SP >BLOCK Function $00
235.2111 >$00 instant. SP >Function $00 instantaneous TRIP
235.2112 >$00 Dir.TRIP SP >Function $00 Direct TRIP
235.2113 >$00 BLK.TDly SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Time Delay
235.2114 >$00 BLK.TRIP SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP
235.2115 >$00 BL.TripA SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase A
235.2116 >$00 BL.TripB SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase B
235.2117 >$00 BL.TripC SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase C
235.2118 $00 BLOCKED OUT Function $00 is BLOCKED
235.2119 $00 OFF OUT Function $00 is switched OFF
235.2120 $00 ACTIVE OUT Function $00 is ACTIVE
235.2121 $00 picked up OUT Function $00 picked up
235.2122 $00 pickup A OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase A
235.2123 $00 pickup B OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase B
235.2124 $00 pickup C OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase C
235.2125 $00 Time Out OUT Function $00 TRIP Delay Time Out
235.2126 $00 TRIP OUT Function $00 TRIP
235.2128 $00 inval.set OUT Function $00 has invalid settings
236.2127 BLK. Flex.Fct. IntSP BLOCK Flexible Function

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.21 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
2.21 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection

Function
2.21.1 Description
General
By means of the flexible protection functions a single-element or multi-element reverse power protection can
be realized. Each reverse power element can be operated in single-phase or three-phase. Depending on the
chosen option, the elements can evaluate active power forward, active power reverse, reactive power forward
or reactive power reverse as measured value. The pickup by the protection elements can occur on exceeding
or undershooting of the threshold. Possible applications for reverse power protection are set out in
Table 2-24.
Table 2-24 Overview of reverse power protection applications
Type of Evaluation
Direction Overshooting Undershooting
P forward Monitoring of the forward power limits of operational equipment Detection of idling
motors
reverse Protection of a local industrial network against reversed feeding into
the energy supply network
Detection of reversed feeding by motors
Q forward Monitoring of the reactive power limits of operational equipment
(transformers, lines)
Connection of a capacitor bank for reactive power compensation
reverse Monitoring of the reactive power limits of operational equipment
(transformers, lines)
Connection of a capacitor bank
The following example depicts a typical application where the flexible function acts as reverse power protec-
tion.
Disconnection Facility
The following fugure gives an example of an industrial control system with internal supply by the illustrated
generator. All illustrated lines and the busbar are indicated in three-phase (excluding the ground connections
and the connection to the voltage measurement at the generator). Both feeders 1 and 2 supply the consumers
of the customer. Usually the industrial customer receives his current from the energy supplier. The generator
runs in synchronism, without feeding power. If the power supply company can no longer guarantee the
required supply, the control system is separated from the system of the power supply company and the gener-
ator is taking over the internal supply. In this example the control system is disconnected from the system of
the power supply company as soon as the frequency leaves the nominal range (e.g. 1 - 2% deviation from the
nominal frequency), the voltage exceeds or undershoots a set value, or the generator's active power is fed to
the system of the power supply company. Depending on the user's philosophy, some of these criteria may be
combined. This would be realized via the CFC.
The example illustrates how a reverse power protection is implemented by means of the flexible protection
functions. Frequency protection and voltage protection are described in Sections 2.9 Frequency Protection 81
O/U and 2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[flexfkn-entkupplung-040204-st, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-118 Example of a substation with autonomous generator supply
Substation Layout
The control system is on the high-voltage side linked via a 110 kV line to the power system of the power
supply company. The circuit breaker CB1 is part of the power system of the power supply company. Discon-
nection from the control system of the power supply company's power system is effected by the load-isolator.
The transformer with a transformation ratio of 10:1 transforms the voltage level to 11 kV. The transformer,
the generator and the two feeders are linked via a busbar at the low-voltage side. Circuit breakers CB2 to CB5
separate consumer and operational equipment from the busbar.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Table 2-25 System data for the application example
Power System Data

Generator nominal power SNom,Gen = 38.1 MVA
Transformer nominal power SNom,Trafo = 38.1 MVA
Nominal voltage of high-voltage side UNom = 110 kV
Nominal voltage of busbar side UNom = 11 kV
Nominal primary CT current on busbar side ΙNom,prim = 2000 A
Nominal secondary CT current on busbar side ΙNom,sek = 1 A
Nominal primary VT voltage on busbar side UNom,prim = 11 kV
Nominal secondary VT voltage on busbar side UNom,sek = 100 V
Protective Functionality
With protection device 7SJ66, the control system is disconnected from the generator upon the generator's
reversed feeding into the power supply company's power system (protection function P reverse>). This func-
tionality is realized by means of a flexible protection function. Additionally, the disconnection is effected by
fluctuations in frequency or voltage in the power supply company's power system (protection function f<, f>,
27-1 PICKUP, 59-1 PICKUP, 67-1 PICKUP, , 67N-1 PICKUP).
This protection receives measured values via a three-phase current and voltage transformer set as well as a
single-phase connection to the generator's voltage transformer (for synchronization).
In case of disconnection, the circuit breaker CB2 is triggered.
The transformer is protected by a differential protection and inverse or definite time overcurrent protection
functions for the phase-to-phase currents. In the event of a fault, the circuit-breaker CB1 in the power supply
company's system is activated via a remote link. In addition, the circuit breaker CB2 is activated.
Overcurrent protection functions protect the feeders 1 and 2 against short circuits and overload caused by the
connected consumers. The phase-to-phase currents and the zero currents of the feeders can be protected by
inverse and definite time overcurrent protection elements. In the event of a fault, the circuit breakers CB4 and
CB5 are activated.
In addition, the busbar could be equipped with the 7UT635 differential protective relay for multiple ends. The
current transformers required to this end are already included in the example above.
Synchronization Before Connecting the Generator

In most cases, it is the power customer who is responsible for restoring normal system operation after discon-
nection. The 7SJ66 relay tests whether the synchronous system conditions are satisfied. After successful
synchronization the generator is connected to the busbar.
The voltages required for synchronization are measured at the transformer and at the generator. The voltage
at the transformer is measured in all three phases since they are also necessary to determine the direction. A
generator supplies the phase-to-phase voltage VCA across a star-delta transformer to device input V4 (see the
following figure).
Wiring Diagram, Power Direction

The following figure shows the wiring of the device for reverse power protection and synchronization. The
power flow in positive or forward direction occurs from the high-voltage busbar (not shown) via the trans-
former to the lowvoltage busbar.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[7sj64-anschluss_instanz_fkt-090204-st, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-119 Wiring Diagram for a 7SJ66 as Reverse Power Protection (Flush-mounted Case)
2.21.2 Implementation of the Reverse Power Protection
General
The names of messages can be edited in DIGSI and adjusted accordingly for this example. The names of the
parameters are fixed.
Determination of the Reverse Power

The reverse power protection evaluates the active power from the symmetrical components of the funda-
mental harmonics of the voltages and currents. The evaluation of the positive sequence systems causes
reverse power determination to be independent of the asymmetries in currents and voltages and reflects the
real load of the driving end. The calculated active power value corresponds to the total active power. The
connection in the example illustrates positive measurement of power in the direction extending from the
busbar to the transformer of the device.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Functional Logic
The following logic diagram depicts the functional logic of the reverse power protection.
[flexfkn-p-rueckwaerts-040104-st, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-120 Logic diagram of the reverse power determination with flexible protection function
The reverse power protection picks up once the configured pickup threshold has been exceeded. If the pickup
condition persists during the equally settable pickup delay, the pickup message P.rev.PU is generated and
starts the trip delay time. If the pickup condition does not drop out while the trip delay time is counting down,
the trip indication P. rev. TRIP and the timeout indication P. rev. timeout (not shown) are generated. The
picked up element drops out when the value falls below the dropout threshold. The blocking input >P rev.
block blocks the entire function, i.e. pickup, trip and running times are reset. After the blocking has been
released, the reverse power must exceed the pickup threshold and both times must run out before the protec-
tion function trips.
Pickup Value, Dropout Ratio

The pickup value of the reverse power protection is set to 10% of the nominal generator output. In this
example, the setting value is configured as secondary power in watts. The following relationship exists
between the primary and the secondary power:
[fo_flexfkn-ansprechwert, 1, en_US]
On the basis of the indicated data, the pickup values are calculated considering P prim = 3.81 MW (10% of 38.1
MW) on the primary level to
[fo_flexfkn-ansprechwert-numer, 1, en_US]
on the secondary level. The dropout ratio is set to 0.9. This yields a secondary dropout threshold of Psec, dropout
= 15.6 W. If the pickup threshold is reduced to a value near the lower setting limit of 0.5 W, the dropout ratio
should equally be reduced to approximately 0.7.
Delay for Pickup, Dropout and Trip

The reverse power protection does not require short tripping times as protection from undesired power feed-
back. In the present example, it is useful to delay pickup and dropout by about 0.5 s and the trip by approx. 1
s. Delaying the pickup will minimize the number of fault logs which are opened when the reverse power oscil-
lates around the threshold.
When using the reverse power protection to disconnect the substation quickly from the power supply compa-
ny's system if faults occur, it is useful to select a larger pickup value (e.g. 50% of nominal power) and shorter
time delays.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.21.3 Configuring the Reverse Power Protection in DIGSI
First create and open a 7SJ66 device in DIGSI Manager. Configure a flexible protection function (flexible func-
tion 01) for the present example in the Device Configuration.
[sc_Configuration_of_a_Flexible_Protection_Function, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-121 Configuration of a Flexible Protection Function
Select “Additional functions” in the „Parameters“ menu to view the flexible function

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[flexfkn-weitere-funktionen-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-122 The Flexible Function Appears in the Function Selection
First activate the function at “Settings --> General” and select the operating mode “3-phase”
[flexfkn-einstellungen-allgemein-3phasig-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-123 Selection of the Three-phase Operating Mode
In menu items “Measured Value” and “Measurement Procedures” “Active Power reverse”“ or “Exceeding” must
be set. If in menu item „Settings“ the box „Additional Parameters display“ is enabled, threshold value, pickup
delay time and trip delay time can be configured. As the power direction cannot be determined in case of
measured voltage failure, protection blocking would be sensible in this case.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[sc_flexfkn-einstellungen-5-watt, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-124 Setting Options of the Flexible Function
Allocating the Reverse-Power Protection in DIGSI Configuration Matrix

The DIGSI configuration matrix initially shows the following indications (after selecting “Indications and
commands only” and “No filter”.
[flexfkn-rangierung-vor-dem-editieren-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-125 Indications Prior to Editing
Clicking the texts allows for editing short text and long text as required by the application.
[flexfkn-rangierung-nach-dem-editieren-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-126 Indications after Editing
The indications are allocated in the same way as the indications of other protective functions.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.22 Synchronization Function

7SJ66 provides one function group for the synchronization check. The function and mode of operational
according to SYNC Function group 1is described as follows.
2.22.1 SYNC Function group 1
When connecting two sections of a power system, the synchrocheck verifies that the switching does not
endanger the stability of the power system.
Applications
• Typical applications are, for example, the synchronism check of a feeder and a busbar (see Figure 2-122)
or the synchronism check of two busbars via bus coupler (see Figure 2-128).
Prerequisites
In 7SJ66 only one SYNC function group exists. Furthermore, only the operation mode SYNCHROCHECK is avail-
able.
2.22.1.1 General
For comparing the two voltages the synchronism check uses the reference voltage V1 and an additional
voltage to be connected V2.
If a transformer is connected between the two voltage transformers (Figure 2-127), its vector group can be
adapted in the 7SJ66 relay so that there are no external adjustment required.
[synchronisierfunktion-einspeisung-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-127 Infeed

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[synchronisierfunktion-querkupplung-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-128 Bus Coupler
The synchronizing feature of the 7SJ66 usually coordinates with the integrated automatic reclosing system
and the control functions of the control function. It is also possible to employ an external automatic reclosing
system. In such a case, signal exchange between the devices is accomplished via binary inputs and outputs.
The configuration decides whether the synchronism check is carried out only for automatic reclosing or only
for circuit breaker control or both. It is also possible to specify different release criteria for automatic close or
control close. Synchronous connection is always accomplished via the integrated control.
The release command for closing under satisfied synchronism conditions can be deactivated by parameter
6113 25 Synchron. The disabled closing release can, however, be activated via binary input (>25
synchr.). It is intended for special applications (see De-energized switching).
Connection, Multiple-phase
For comparing the two voltages, the synchronization function uses the reference voltage V1 and an additional
voltage to be connected V2. The reference voltage V1 is derived from the multi-phase system, usually the three
phase-to-ground voltages. The voltage to be synchronized V2 is assigned to the single-phase connection and
may be any phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage.
The device can also be connected in open delta Voltage connection using two phase-phase voltages. In this
case, a phase-to-phase voltage must be connected to the voltage to be synchronized V2. Furthermore, it
should be noted that in case of a open delta voltage connection, zero sequence voltage cannot be detected.
The functions “Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground”, “Directional Ground Fault Detection” and “Fuse
Failure Monitoring (FFM)” must be either removed or switched off.
Connection, Single-phase
If there is only one primary voltage to represent the reference voltage V1, the device can be informed of this
fact via the Power System Data 1. Also in this case the synchronization function can be fully applied.
Operating Modes
Synchronous power systems exhibit small differences regarding phase angle and voltage magnitude. Before
connection it is checked whether conditions are synchronous or not. If synchronism prevails the system is
energized, with asynchronous conditions it is not. The circuit breaker operating time is not taken into consid-
eration. The SYNCHROCHECK mode is used. It corresponds to the classic synchrocheck function.
Functional Sequence
The synchronization function only operates if it receives a measurement request. This request may be issued
by the control, the automatic reclosing function or externally via a binary input e.g., from an external auto-
matic reclosing system.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The measurement request performs certain plausibility checks (for further information see “Plausibilty Check”).
If there is a condition which is not plausible, the message 25 Sync. Error is output. The measurement is
then not performed. If conditions are plausible, measurement is initiated (message „25-1 meas.“).
Each condition met is indicated explicitly (messages 25 Vdiff ok, 25 fdiff ok, 25 αdiff ok). Also
conditions not fulfilled are indicated, for example, when voltage differences (messages 25 V2>V1, 25
V2<V1), frequency differences (messages 25 f2>f1, 25 f2<f1) or angle differences (messages 25 α2>α1,
25 α2<α1) lie outside the threshold values. For these messages to be sent, both voltages must lie within the
operating range of the synchrocheck (see margin heading “Operating Range”).
If these conditions are met, the synchronization function issues a release signal for closing the breaker (25
CloseRelease). This release signal is only available for the configured duration of the CLOSE command and
is always processed by the control, which issues the actual CLOSE command for controlling the circuit breaker
(see also margin heading “Interaction with Control”). The message 25 Synchron is applied as long as the
synchronous are fulfilled.
Measuring the synchronism conditions can be confined to the a maximum monitoring time T-SYN. DURA-
TION. If the conditions are not fulfilled during T-SYN. DURATION, the release is cancelled (message 25
MonTimeExc). A new synchronization can only be performed if a new measurement request is received.
Validity Check / SYNC Error

During startup of the device a parameter validation check is performed. When there is a fault, the message 25
Set-Error is produced. If after a measurement request there is a condition which is not plausible, the
message 25 Sync. Error is output. The measurement is then not initiated.
The following plausibility checks are carried out:
• Checking unique function group identification
• Checking the configuration
• Evaluation of monitoring functions

The synchronization function cannot be controlled via a binary input.
Concerning configuration it is also checked if power system address 213 is set to Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy. Other-
wise, the message 25 Sync. Error is output. Furthermore, specific thresholds and settings of the selected
function group are checked. If there is a condition which is not plausible, the error message 25 Set-Error is
output additionally. Please ensure in this case that address 6106 (threshold V1, V2 energized) is smaller than
address 6103 (lower voltage limit Vmin). The synchronization function cannot be controlled via a binary input.
If the monitoring function Fuse Failure Monitor is used and if it has picked up at the time as the measurement
of the synchronization was requested, the synchronization is not started either (message 25 Sync. Error).
The same applies if a voltage transformer failure (m.c.b. tripping) is communicated to the device via binary
input 6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT or. 6510 >FAIL: BUS VT. In this case, the synchronization can be
controlled directly via a binary input.
Operating Range
The operating range of the synchronization function is defined by the configured voltage thresholds Vmin and
Vmax, and the fixed frequency band fNom ± 3 Hz.
If measurement is started and one or both voltages are outside the operating range, or one voltage leaves the
permissible range, corresponding messages indicate this behavior (25 f1>>, 25 f1<<, 25 V1>>, 25 V1<<,
etc.).
Measured Values
The measured values of the synchronization function are displayed in separate windows for primary and
secondary measured values and percentages. The measured values are displayed and updated under the
following conditions:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• when the synchronization function is requested (measurement request)
• as soon as the function group was enabled via the message>25-1 act (170.0001).
Thereby the operation “measurement only” can be realized, since no measurement request is required
and thus no close command is generated.
The following is displayed:
• Value of reference voltage V1
• Value of the voltage to be synchronized V2
• Frequency values f1 and f2
• Differences of Voltage, Frequency and Angle.
Table 2-26 Conversion formulae between secondary, primary and percentage values of the
synchronisation function
Measured Secondary Primary %

values
V1 V1sec
V2 V2sec
ΔV ΔVsec 20 Vsec corresponds to 100 %
Frequencies f in Hz f in Hz
f1
f2
Δf f2 – f1 f2 – f1
1 Hz corresponds to 100 %
Angle differ- °el. °el. 45 ° entspricht 100 %
ence
Δα α2 – α1 α2 – α1
Table 2-27 Legend for the conversion formulae
Parameter Address
Balancing V1/V2 6121
Vnom PRIMARY 202
VT Vn2, primary 6125
Vnom SECONDARY 203
2.22.1.2 Synchrocheck
Having selected operating mode SYNCHROCHECK the mode verifies the synchronism before connecting the
two system components and cancels the connecting process if parameters for synchronism lie outside the
configured thresholds.
Before a release is granted, the following conditions are checked:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin, but below the maximum voltage Vmax?
• Is the voltage V2 to be synchronized above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum voltage
Vmax?
• Is the voltage difference V2 – V1 within the permitted thresholddV SYNCHK V2>V1?
• Is the voltage difference V1 – V2 within the permitted threshold dV SYNCHK V2<V1?
• Are the two frequencies f1 and f2 within the permitted operating range fN ± 3 Hz?
• Is the frequency difference f2 – f1 within the permitted threshold df SYNCHK f2>f1?
• Is the frequency difference f1 – f2 within the permitted threshold df SYNCHK f2<f1?
• Is the angle difference α2 – α1 within the permitted threshold dα SYNCHK α2>α1?
• Is the angle difference α1 – α2 within the permitted threshold dα SYNCHK α2<α1?
2.22.1.3 De-energized Switching
Connecting two components of a power system is also possible if at least one of the components is de-ener-
gized and if the measured voltage is greater than the threshold 6106 V>, with a multiple-phase connection at
side V1 all three voltages must have a higher value than threshold V> so that side V1 is recognized as ener-
gized. With single-phase connection, of course, only one voltage has to exceed the threshold value.
Besides release under synchronous conditions, the following additional release conditions can be selected for
the check:
SYNC V1>V2< = Release on the condition that component V1 is energized and component V2 is de-ener-
gized.
SYNC V1<V2> = Release on the condition that component V1 is de-energized and component V2 is ener-
gized.
SYNC V1<V2< = Release on the condition that component V1 and component V2 are de-energized.
Each of these conditions can be enabled or disabled individually; combinations are thus also possible (e.g.,
release if SYNC V1>V2< or SYNC V1<V2> are fulfilled).
For that reason synchronization with the use of the additional parameter 6113 25 Synchron (configured to
NO) can also be used for the connection of a ground electrode. In such a case, one may only connect when
there is no voltage on the load side, i.e. under synchronous conditions no connection is permitted.
The release conditions can be configured individually either for automatic reclosing or for manual closing via
control commands. You can, for example, allow manual closing for synchronism or for de-energized feeder
whereas before an automatic reclosing operation, checking only de-energized conditions at one feeder
terminal and afterwards only synchronism at the other.
The threshold below which a power system component is considered as de-energized is defined by parameter
V<. If the measured voltage exceeds the threshold V>, a power system component is energized. Thus, with a
multiple-phase connection at side V1 all three voltages must have a higher value than threshold V> so that
side V1 is recognized as energized. With single-phase connection only one voltage has to exceed the threshold
value.
Before granting a release for connecting the energized component V1 and the de-energized component V2,
the following conditions are checked:
• Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin and V>, but below the maximum voltage Vmax?
• Is the voltage to be synchronized V2 below the thresholdV<?
• Is the frequency f1 within the permitted operating range fNom ± 3 Hz?
After successful termination of the check the release is granted.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
For switching the de-energized component 1 to the energized component 2 or connecting the de-energized
component 1 to the equally de-energized component 2 the conditions to be fulfilled correspond with those
stated above.
The associated messages indicating the release via the corresponding condition are as follows: 25 V1> V2<,
25 V1< V2> and 25 V1< V2<.
Via binary input >25 V1>V2<, >25 V1<V2> and >25 V1<V2<, release conditions can be issued externally
provided the synchronization is controlled externally.
Parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6111) can be set to configure a monitoring time which requires above
stated release conditions for de-energized connection to be fulfilled at least this time before switching is
allowed.
2.22.1.4 Direct Command / Blocking
Parameter Direct CO can be set to grant a release without performing any checks. In this case switching is
released immediately when initiating the synchrocheck. It is obviously not reasonable to combine Direct CO
with other release conditions.
If the synchrocheck fails, depending on the type of failure a direct command bypassing any checks may be
issued or not (also see "Plausibility check / SYNC Error").
Via binary input >25direct CO this release can also be granted externally.
Blocking the entire synchrocheck is possible via binary input >BLK 25-1. The message signaling this condi-
tion is made via 25-1 BLOCK. When blocking the measurement is terminated and the entire function is reset.
A new measurement can only be performed with a new measurement request.
Via binary input >BLK 25 CLOSE it is possible to only block the release signal for closing (25 CloseRe-
lease). When blocking is active, measurement continues. The blocking is indicated by the message 25
CLOSE BLK. When blocking is reset and release conditions are fulfilled, the release signal for closing is issued.
2.22.1.5 Interaction with Control, AR and External Control
With Control
.
Basically, the synchrocheck interacts with the device control. The switchgear component to be synchronized is
selected via a parameter. If an ON command is issued, the control takes into account that the switchgear
component requires synchronism. The control sends a measurement request (25 Measu. req.) to the
synchrocheck which is then started. Having completed the check, the synchrocheck issues the release
message (25 CloseRelease) to which the control responds by terminating the switching operation posi-
tively or negatively (see Figure 2-129).
[dw_Interaction_of_Control_and_Synchrocheck, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-129 Interaction of Control and Synchrocheck

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
With AR
The automatic reclosing (AR) function can also interact with the synchrocheck function. They are linked via the
device control. The selection is made by parameterizing the automatic reclosing and synchrocheck function.
The AR parameters (7138 Internal SYNC) defines the SYNC function group (SYNC FG). The switch to be
used is defined in the selected function group. The switching object specified in the AR parameters (7137
Cmd.via control) and the selected SYNC function group must be identical. If no SYNC function group is
entered in the AR parameters, the close command of the AR function is carried out asynchronously via the
switching object specified in the AR parameters. Equally, the CLOSE command 79 Close (indication 2851)
allows only asynchronous switching. If, for example, circuit breaker Q0 is configured as object to be switched
synchronously, a CLOSE command of the AR function will address this breaker and assign it a CLOSE command
which will be processed by the control. As this breaker requires synchronization, the control launches the
synchrocheck function and awaits release. If the parameterized conditions of the respective SYNC function
group are satisfied, release is granted and the control issues the CLOSE command (see Figure 2-130).
[dw_Connection_of_the_Automatic _Reclosing_Function, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-130 Connection of the Automatic Reclosing function to the Synchronization Function
With External Control

As another option the synchronizing function can be activated via external measurement request. The
synchronizing function can be started via binary input using a measurement request (>25 Sync req. or
pulse-like start and stop signals >25 Start, >25 Stop). After the synchronizing function has completed the
check, it issues a release message (25 CloseRelease see Figure 2-131). Measurement is finished as soon as
the measurement request is reset via the binary input. In this case there is no need to configure any control
device to be synchronized.
[dw_Interaction_of_Synchronizing_Function_and_External_Control, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-131 Interaction of Synchronizing Function and External Control

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
General
When setting the Power System Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes) the device was already provided
with data relevant for the measured values and the operating principle of the synchronization function. This
concerns the following parameters:
202 Vnom PRIMARY primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1 (phase-to-phase) in kV;
203 Vnom SECONDARY secondary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1 (phase-to-phase) in V;
213 VT Connect. 3ph defines the way voltage transformers are connected if there are several voltage
transformers at the primary side..
When using the synchronization function, the setting Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy must always be selected regardless
of whether there are phase-ground or phase-phase voltages at the primary side. Two phase-to-phase voltages
are connected to the device in open delta voltage connection (see also the connection examples in Appendix
C Connection Examples). In this case, however, a zero sequence voltage cannot be determined. The functions
“Directional Time Overcurrent Protection Ground”, “Directional Ground Fault Detection” and “Fuse Failure
Monitor (FFM)” must be either removed or switched off.
240 VT Connect. 1ph specifies the voltage connected at side V1 if only one voltage transformer is available
at the primary side. If this address is not set to NO, the setting of address 213 is not relevant anymore. With
single-phase connection the device generally assumes the voltage at the fourth voltage transformer (V4) as
the voltage V2 to be synchronized.
214 Rated Frequency the operating range of the synchronizing function refers to the nominal frequency of
the power system (fNOM ± 3 Hz);
The synchronization function can only operate if the address 161 25 Function 1 is set to Enabled during
configuration of the functional scope (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes). SYNCHROCHECK can be selected as
operating mode. If this function is not required, then Disabled is set.
The corresponding messages of SYNC Function Group 1 are pre-allocated for IEC 60870–5–103 (VDEW).
Selecting the displayed SYNC function group in DIGSI opens a dialog box with different tabs in which the indi-
vidual settings for synchronism can be made. For SYNC function group 1 the following applies:
General Settings
The general thresholds for the synchronizing function are set at addresses 6101 to 6112.
Address 6101 Synchronizing Function can be set to switch the entire SYNC function group x ON or OFF.
If switched off, the synchronous check does not verify the synchronization conditions and release is not
granted.
Address 6102 SyncCB is used to select the switchgear component to which the synchronizing settings will be
applied. Select the option none to use the function as external synchronizing feature. It will then be triggered
via binary input messages.
Addresses 6103 Vmin and 6104 Vmax set the upper and lower limits for the operating voltage range for V1 or
V2 and thus determine the operating range for the synchronizing function. If the values leave this band, a
message will be output.
Address 6105 V< indicates the voltage threshold below which the feeder or the busbar can safely be consid-
ered switched off (for checking a de-energized feeder or busbar).
Address 6106 V> indicates the voltage threshold above which the feeder or busbar can safely be considered
energized (for checking an energized feeder or busbar). It must be set below the anticipated operational
undervoltage.
The setting for the mentioned voltage values is made in secondary volts. When using the PC and DIGSI for
configuration, these values can also be entered as primary values. Depending on the connection of the
voltages these are phase-to-ground voltages or phase-to-phase voltages.
Addresses 6107 to 6110 are set to specify the release conditions for the closing check. Where:
6107 SYNC V1<V2> = Component V1 must be de-energized, component V2 must be energized (connection to
reference without voltage, dead line);

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
6108 SYNC V1>V2< = component V1 must be energized, component V2 voltage value must be de-energized
(connection to feeder without voltage, dead bus);
6109 SYNC V1<V2< = Component V1 and Component V2 must be de-energized (connection when reference
and feeder are de-energized, dead bus/dead bus);
6110A Direct CO = Command is released without checks.
The possible release conditions are independent of each other and can be combined. It is obviously not
reasonable to combine Direct CO with other release conditions.
Parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6111A) can be set to configure a monitoring time which requires above
stated release conditions to be at least fulfilled for de-energized connection before switching is allowed. The
preset value of 0.1 s accounts for transient responses and can be applied without modification.
Release via synchronism check can be limited to a configurable synchronous monitoring time T-SYN. DURA-
TION (address 6112). The configured conditions must be fulfilled within this time period. Otherwise, release is
not granted and the synchronization function is terminated. If this time is set to ∞, the conditions will be
checked until they are fulfilled.
For special applications (e.g. connecting a ground switch), the closing release under satisfied synchronism
conditions can be activated or deactivated in parameter 6113A 25 Synchron.
Power System Data

The power system data for the synchronizing function are set at addresses 6121 to 6125.
The parameter Balancing V1/V2 (address 6121) can be set to account for different VT ratios of the two
parts of the power system (see example in Figure 2-132).
If a transformer is located between the system parts to be synchronized, its vector group can be accounted for
by angle adjustment so that no external adjusting measures are required. Parameter ANGLE ADJUSTM.
(address 6122A) is used for that purpose.
The phase angle from V1 to V2 is evaluated positively.
Example: (see alsoFigure 2-132):
Busbar 400 kV primary; 110 V secondary
Feeder 220 kV primary; 100 V secondary
Transformer 400 kV/220 kV; vector group Dy(n) 5
The transformer vector group is defined from the high side to the low side. In the example, the reference
voltage transformers (V1) are the ones of the transformer high side, i.e. the setting angle is 5 x 30° (according
to vector group), that is 150°:
Address 6122A: ANGLE ADJUSTM. = 150°.
The reference voltage transformers supply 100 V secondary for primary operation at nominal value while the
feeder transformer supplies 110 V secondary. Therefore, this difference must be balanced:
Address 6121:Balancing V1/V2 = 100 V/110 V = 0.91.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[sammelschienenspg-ueber-trafo-gemess-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-132 Busbar Voltage Measured across Transformer
Connections
For connection of voltage V1 there are three voltage inputs and for voltage V2 there is one voltage input avail-
able (see Figure 2-133 and also example in Figure 2-132). According to definition, the three-phase voltage is
the reference voltage V1. To compare the three-phase voltage V1 with voltage V2 correctly, the connection
type of voltage V2 must be signaled to the device. Address CONNECTIONof V2 assumes this task (parameter
6123).
If three phase-to-ground voltages are connected to side V1, any phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltage
can be used and configured as synchronized voltage V2. If two phase-to-phase voltages are connected in Vcon-
nection to side V1, then the voltage V2 to be synchronized must be a phase-to-phase voltage. It must be
connected and configured.
Single-phase connection is also possible for sideV1. In address 240 VT Connect. 1ph this information must
be communicated to the device (see above). Setting of address 213 is not relevant in that case. Compared to
voltage of side 1 the voltage to be synchronized must be equal in type and phase. Address 6123 CONNEC-
TIONof V2 is hidden for single-phase connection. An example of the single-phase connection to a device can
be found in Figure 2-134.
[anschlussvon-u1-undu2-amgeraet-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-133 Connection of V1 and V2 at Device

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[sync-einphasiger-anschluss-le-120902-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-134 Single-phase Connection (phase-to-ground) to Side V1
For the device to perform the internal conversion to primary values, the primary rated transformer voltage of
the measured quantity V2 must be entered via parameter 6125 VT Vn2, primary, if a transformer is
located between the system parts to be synchronized.
If a phase sequence reversal is desired, the voltage A-G should be connected for synchronization. This voltage
does not vary even after a phase sequence reversal. For this purpose, set parameter 6123 CONNECTIONof V2
to A-G.
When using a different synchronizing voltage, the parameter 6123 must be changed in addition to parameter
209 PHASE SEQ. after reversing the phase sequence, and the wiring in case of a connection of a phase-to-
phase voltage must be reversed.
Synchrocheck
Address 6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 and 6151 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 can be used to configure the permitted
voltage difference also asymmetrically. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical release
range to be set.
Parameters 6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 and 6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 determine the permissible frequency
differences. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical release to be set.
Parameters 6154 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 and 6155 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 confine the operating range for
synchronous switching. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical release to be set.
2.22.1.7 Settings
6101 Synchronizing ON OFF Synchronizing Function
OFF
6102 SyncCB (Setting options depend on none Synchronizable circuit breaker
configuration)
6103 Vmin 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum voltage limit: Vmin
6104 Vmax 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum voltage limit: Vmax

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

6105 V< 1 .. 60 V 5V Threshold V1, V2 without voltage
6106 V> 20 .. 140 V 80 V Threshold V1, V2 with voltage
6107 SYNC V1<V2> YES NO ON-Command at V1< and V2>
NO
6108 SYNC V1>V2< YES NO ON-Command at V1> and V2<
NO
6109 SYNC V1<V2< YES NO ON-Command at V1< and V2<
NO
6110A Direct CO YES NO Direct ON-Command
NO
6111A TSUP VOLTAGE 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time of V1>;V2> or
V1<;V2<
6112 T-SYN. DURATION 0.01 .. 1200.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec Maximum duration of Synchroni-
zation
6113A 25 Synchron YES YES Switching at synchronous condi-
NO tion
6120 T-CB close 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB
6121 Balancing V1/V2 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing factor V1/V2
6122A ANGLE ADJUSTM. 0 .. 360 ° 0° Angle adjustment (transformer)
6123 CONNECTIONof V2 A-G A-B Connection of V2
B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
C-A
6125 VT Vn2, primary 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV VT nominal voltage V2, primary
6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference
V2>V1
6151 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference
V2<V1
6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
f2>f1
6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
f2<f1
6154 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference
alpha2>alpha1
6155 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference
alpha2<alpha1

Informa-
tion
170.0001 >25-1 act SP >25-group 1 activate
170.0043 >25 Sync req. SP >25 Synchronization request
170.0049 25 CloseRelease OUT 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command
170.0050 25 Sync. Error OUT 25 Synchronization Error
170.0051 25-1 BLOCK OUT 25-group 1 is BLOCKED
170.2007 25 Measu. req. SP 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
170.2008 >BLK 25-1 SP >BLOCK 25-group 1
170.2009 >25direct CO SP >25 Direct Command output
170.2011 >25 Start SP >25 Start of synchronization
170.2012 >25 Stop SP >25 Stop of synchronization
170.2013 >25 V1>V2< SP >25 Switch to V1> and V2<
170.2014 >25 V1<V2> SP >25 Switch to V1< and V2>
170.2015 >25 V1<V2< SP >25 Switch to V1< and V2<
170.2016 >25 synchr. SP >25 Switch to Sync
170.2022 25-1 meas. OUT 25-group 1: measurement in progress
170.2025 25 MonTimeExc OUT 25 Monitoring time exceeded
170.2026 25 Synchron OUT 25 Synchronization conditions okay
170.2027 25 V1> V2< OUT 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled
170.2028 25 V1< V2> OUT 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled
170.2029 25 V1< V2< OUT 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled
170.2030 25 Vdiff ok OUT 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay
170.2031 25 fdiff ok OUT 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay
170.2032 25 αdiff ok OUT 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay
170.2033 25 f1>> OUT 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible
170.2034 25 f1<< OUT 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible
170.2035 25 f2>> OUT 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible
170.2036 25 f2<< OUT 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible
170.2037 25 V1>> OUT 25 Voltage V1 > Vmax permissible
170.2038 25 V1<< OUT 25 Voltage V1 < Vmin permissible
170.2039 25 V2>> OUT 25 Voltage V2 > Vmax permissible
170.2040 25 V2<< OUT 25 Voltage V2 < Vmin permissible
170.2050 V1 = MV V1 =
170.2051 f1 = MV f1 =
170.2052 V2 = MV V2 =
170.2053 f2 = MV f2 =
170.2054 dV = MV dV =
170.2055 df = MV df =
170.2056 dα = MV dalpha =
170.2090 25 V2>V1 OUT 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1)
170.2091 25 V2<V1 OUT 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1)
170.2092 25 f2>f1 OUT 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1)
170.2093 25 f2<f1 OUT 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1)
170.2094 25 α2>α1 OUT 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1)
170.2095 25 α2<α1 OUT 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1)
170.2096 25 FG-Error OUT 25 Multiple selection of func-groups
170.2097 25 Set-Error OUT 25 Setting error
170.2101 25-1 OFF OUT Sync-group 1 is switched OFF
170.2102 >BLK 25 CLOSE SP >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command
170.2103 25 CLOSE BLK OUT 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED
170.2332 Sync f syn OUT Sync:Synchronization cond. f syn

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.23 Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes

An RTD box 7XV5662 with 12 measuring sensors in total can be used for temperature detection and are recog-
nized by the input/output device.
Applications
• In particular, the thermal status of motors, generators and transformers can thus be monitored. Rotating
machines are additionally monitored for a violation of the bearing temperature thresholds. The tempera-
tures are measured by RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors in different locations of the protected
object and forwarded to the device via a 7XV5662 RTD box.
2.23.1 Description
RTD Box 7XV5662

The RTD box 7XV5662 is an external device mounted on a DIN rail. It features 12 temperature inputs and one
RS485 interface (7XV5662-6AD10) or Ethernet interface (7XV5662-8AD10) for communication with the
protection device. The RTD box detects the coolant temperature of each measuring point from the resistance
value of the temperature detectors (Pt 100) connected via two- or three-wire cable and converts it into a
digital value. The digital values are made available at a serial interface.
Communication with the Protection Device

Via its service interface (port C), the protection device 7SJ66 can also work with an RTD box.
Therefore, up to 12 temperature measuring points are available in this way. For greater distances to the
protection device the communication via fiber-optic cables is recommended.
Processing Temperatures
The transmitted raw temperature data is converted to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit. The
conversion depends on the temperature sensor used.
For each temperature detector two threshold decisions can be performed which are available for further
processing. The user can make the corresponding allocations in the configuration matrix.
Each temperature sensor issues an alarm in case of a short-circuit or interruption of the sensor circuit or if a
sensor is configured but not assigned. Additionally, a group indication is generated across all 12 temperature
sensors of the RTD box (14101 Fail: RTD). In case of communication failures, the fault indication 264
Fail: RTD-Box 1 is generated for RTD1 to RTD12.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for temperature processing.
The manual supplied with the RTD-box contains a connection diagram and dimensional drawing.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[Lo_DiagramTemperatureProcessing, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-135 Logic Diagram of Temperature Processing for the RTD Box
General
Temperature detection is only effective and accessible if this protection function was allocated to an interface
during configuration (Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope). At address 190 RTD-BOX INPUT the RTD box is allo-
cated to the interface at which it will be operated (e.g. port C). The number of sensor inputs and the commu-
nication mode were set at address 191 RTD CONNECTION. The temperature unit (°C or °F) was set in the
Power System Data 1 at address TEMP. UNIT.
Device Settings
The settings are the same for each input and are here shown at the example of measuring input 1. Set IP
address of RTD box from 9001 to 9004 and the UDP port at address 9000.
Set the type of temperature sensor for RTD 1 (temperature sensor for measuring point 1) at address 9011 RTD
1 TYPE. You can choose Pt 100 for TR 1200 box. If no measuring point is available for RTD 1, set RTD 1
TYPE = Not connected. This setting is only possible in DIGSI at “Display Additional Settings”.
Address 9012 RTD 1 LOCATION informs the device on the mounting location of RTD 1. You can choose
between Oil, Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other. The selection is not evaluated in the device but
only serves the purpose of providing information about the medium in which the temperature measurement
is carried out. This setting is only possible in DIGSI at “Display Additional Settings”.
You can also set an alarm temperature and a tripping temperature. Depending on the temperature unit
selected in the Power System Data (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes in address 276 TEMP. UNIT), the alarm
temperature can be expressed in degrees Celsius (°C) (address 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1) or degrees Fahrenheit
(°F) (address 9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1). The tripping temperature is set to degrees Celsius (°C) in address 9015
RTD 1 STAGE 2 or to degrees Fahrenheit (°F) at address 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2.
Accordingly, you can enter the settings for all connected temperature sensors of the RTD box.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
RTD-box Settings
If temperature detectors are used with two-wire connection, the line resistance (for short-circuited tempera-
ture detector) must be measured and adjusted. For this purpose, select "SEn." in the RTD-box and enter the
resistance value for the corresponding temperature detector (range 0 to 50.6 Ω). If a 3-wire connection is
used, no further settings are required to this end.
A baudrate of 9600 bits/s ensures communication. Parity is even. The factory setting of the bus number 0.
Modifications at the RTD-box can be made in "Bus". The following convention applies:
Table 2-28 Setting the bus address at the RTD box 7XV5662
Mode Address
half duplex RTD 1 to RTD 12: 1
Further information is provided in the operating manual of the RTD-box.
Processing Measured Values and Messages

The RTD-box is visible in DIGSI as part of the 7SJ66 protection devices, i.e. messages and measured values
appear in the configuration matrix similar to those of the internal functions, and can be configured and
processed in the same way. Messages and measured values can thus be forwarded to the integrated userde-
fined logic (CFC) and interconnected as desired. Pickup signals RTD x St. 1 p.up and RTD x Anr. St.
2 p.up, however, are neither included in the group alarms 501 Relay PICKUP and 511 Relay TRIP nor
do they trigger a trip log.
If it is desired that a message should appear in the event log, a cross must be entered in the intersecting box
of column/row.
2.23.3 Settings
9000 UDP Port 0 .. 65535 5000 UDP service port in the RTD box
9001 IP address[0] 0 .. 255 0 IP address[0] of RTD box, connec.
by UDP
by UDP
by UDP
by UDP
9011A RTD 1 TYPE Not connected Pt 100 Ω RTD 1: Type
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION Oil Oil RTD 1: Location
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Pickup
Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE Not connected Not connected RTD 2: Type
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION Oil Other RTD 2: Location
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE Not connected Not connected RTD10: Type
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

9102A RTD10 LOCATION Oil Other RTD10: Location
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD10: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD10: Temperature Stage 1
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup
Pickup

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
264 Fail: RTD-Box 1 OUT Failure: RTD-Box 1
14101 Fail: RTD OUT Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted)
14111 Fail: RTD 1 OUT Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted)
14112 RTD 1 St.1 p.up OUT RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up
14201 Fail: RTD10 OUT Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted)
14202 RTD10 St.1 p.up OUT RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.24 Phase Rotation
2.24 Phase Rotation

A phase rotation function via binary input and parameter is implemented in 7SJ66 devices.
Applications
• Phase rotation ensures that all protective and monitoring functions operate correctly even with anti-
clockwise rotation, without the need for two phases to be reversed.
General
Various functions of the 7SJ66 only operate correctly if the phase rotation of the voltages and currents is
known. Among these functions are negative sequence protection, undervoltage protection (based only on
positive sequence voltages), directional overcurrent protection (direction with cross-polarized voltages), and
measured value monitors.
If an "acb" phase rotation is normal, the appropriate setting is made during configuration of the Power System
Data.
If the phase rotation can change during operation (e.g. the direction of a motor must be routinely changed),
then a changeover signal at the routed binary input for this purpose is sufficient to inform the protective relay
of the phase rotation reversal.
Logic
Phase rotation is permanently established at address 209 PHASE SEQ. (Power System Data). Via the exclu-
sive- OR gate the binary input >Reverse Rot. inverts the sense of the phase rotation applied with setting.
[meldelogikdrehfeldumschaltung-090902-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-136 Message logic of the phase rotation reversal
Influence on Protective and Monitoring Functions

The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative sequence quantities, as well
as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one phase-to-ground voltage from another and vice versa.
Therefore, this function is vital so that phase detection messages, fault values, and operating measurement
values are not correct. As stated before, this function influences the negative sequence protection function,
directional overcurrent protection function, voltage protection function, flexible protection functions and
some of the monitoring functions that issue messages if the defined and calculated phase rotations do not
match.
Setting the Function Parameter

The normal phase sequence is set at 209 (see Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). If, on the system side,
phase rotation is reversed temporarily, then this is communicated to the protection device using the binary
input >Reverse Rot. (5145).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.25 Function Logic
2.25 Function Logic

The function logic coordinates the execution of protection and auxiliary functions, it processes the resulting
decisions and information received from the system. This includes in particular:
Fault Detection / Pickup Logic
Processing Tripping Logic
2.25.1 Pickup Logic of the Entire Device
General Device Pickup

The pickup signals for all protection functions in the device are connected via an OR logic and lead to the
general device pickup. 4 It is initiated by the first function to pick up and drop out when the last function
drops out. As a consequence, the following message is reported: 501 Relay PICKUP.
The general pickup is a prerequisite for a number of internal and external consequential functions. The
following are among the internal functions controlled by general device pickup:
• Start of a trip log: From general device pickup to general device dropout, all fault messages are entered in
the trip log.
• Initialization of Oscillographic Records: The storage and maintenance of oscillographic values can also be
made dependent on the general device pickup.
Exception: Apart from the settings ON or OFF, some protection functions can also be set to Alarm Only. With
setting Alarm Only no trip command is given, no trip log is created, fault recording is not initiated and no
spontaneous fault annunciations are shown on the display.
External functions may be controlled via an output contact. Examples are:
• Automatic reclosing devices,
• Starting of additional devices, or similar.
2.25.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device
General Tripping
The trip signals for all protective functions are connected by OR and generate the message 511 Relay TRIP.
This message can be configured to an LED or binary output, just as the individual tripping messages can.
Terminating the Trip Signal

Once the trip command is output by the protection function, it is recorded as message Relay TRIP (see
Figure 2-137). At the same time, the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started. This
ensures that the command is transmitted to the circuit breaker for a sufficient amount of time, even if the
function which issued the trip signal drops out quickly. The trip commands can be terminated first when the
last protection function has dropped out (no function is in pickup mode) AND the minimum trip signal dura-
tion has expired.
Finally, it is possible to latch the trip signal until it is manually reset (lockout function). This allows the circuit-
breaker to be locked against reclosing until the cause of the fault has been clarified and the lockout has been
manually reset. The reset takes place either by pressing the LED reset key or by activating an appropriately
allocated binary input (>Reset LED). A precondition, of course, is that the circuit-breaker close coil – as usual
– remains blocked as long as the trip signal is present, and that the trip coil current is interrupted by the auxil-
iary contact of the circuit breaker.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.25 Function Logic
[7sj6x-abst-ausloesekommando-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-137 Terminating the Trip Signal
Trip Signal Duration

The minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD was described already in Section 2.1.3 Power System
Data 1. This setting applies to all protective functions that initiate tripping.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.26 Auxiliary Functions
2.26.1 Message Processing
After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective relay and the measured
values are saved for future analysis. For this reason the device is designed to perform message processing.
Applications
• LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
• Information via Display Field or Personal Computer
• Information to a Control Center
Prerequisites
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description provides a detailed description of the configuration procedure
(see /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
2.26.1.1 LED Displays and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)

Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs at the front panel of the relay. The device further-
more has output relays for remote indication. All LEDs and binary outputs indicating specific messages can be
freely configured. The relay is delivered with a default setting. The Appendix of this manual deals in detail with
the delivery status and the allocation options.
The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (each may be individually
set).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are reset:
• On site by pressing the LED key on the relay,
• Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose,
• Using one of the serial interfaces,
• Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup.

State indication messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion to be reported
has reset. This applies to messages from monitoring functions, or similar.
A green LED displays operational readiness of the relay ("RUN“), and cannot be reset. It goes out if the self-
check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal occurrence, or if the auxiliary voltage is lost.
When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the red LED ("ERROR") lights
up and the processor blocks the relay.
2.26.1.2 Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or Personal Computer
Events and conditions can be read out on the display at the front cover of the relay. Using the front PC inter-
face or the rear service interface, a personal computer can be connected, to which the information can be
sent.
The relay is equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit breaker statistics, etc.,
which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a buffer battery. These messages can be displayed
on the LCD at any time by selection via the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service
or PC interface. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Descrip-
tion.
Classification of Messages
The messages are categorized as follows:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• Operational messages (event log); messages generated while the device is operating: Information
regarding the status of device functions, measured data, power system data, control command logs etc.
• Fault indications; these are indications of the last 25 network faults that were processed by the device.
• Ground fault messages (when the device has sensitive ground fault detection).
• Messages of "statistics"; they include a counter for the trip commands initiated by the device and possibly
reclose commands as well as values of interrupted currents and accumulated fault currents.
A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device with the maximum
functional scope can be found in the appendix. All functions are associated with an information number
(FNo). There is also an indication of where each message can be sent to. If functions are not present in a not
fully equipped version of the device, or are configured to Disabled, then the associated indications cannot
appear.
Operational Messages (Buffer: Event Log)

The operational messages contain information that the device generates during operation and about opera-
tional conditions. Up to 512 operational messages are recorded in chronological order in the device. New
messages are appended at the end of the list. If the memory is used up, then the oldest message is scrolled
out of the list by a new message.
Fault Messages (Buffer: Trip Log)

After a fault on the system, for example, important information about the progression of the fault can be
retrieved, such as the pickup of a protective element or the initiation of a trip signal. The start of the fault is
time stamped with the absolute time of the internal system clock. The progress of the disturbance is output
with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection, so that the duration of the fault until tripping and
up to reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1 ms.
Spontaneous Displays on the Device Front

For devices featuring a four-line text display the most relevant fault data appears without further operating
actions, automatically after a general pickup of the device, in the sequence shown in Figure 2-135. For any
further information that can be displayed, please refer to Annex E Default Settings and Protocol-dependent
Functions, Section “Default Display, Spontaneous Fault Message Display”.
If the device features a graphical display, these messages will only occur if they were set at address 611 unlike
the default setting to allow for spontaneous fault messages.
[anzeige-spontanmeld-im-display-20070326, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-138 Display of spontaneous messages in the HMI
Retrievable Messages
The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved and read out. The definition of a network fault
is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the disturbance is considered to be one
network fault. If auto-reclosing occurs, then the network fault ends after the last reclosing shot, which means
after a successful reclosing or lockout. Therefore the entire clearing process, including all reclosing shots,
occupies only one trip log buffer. Within a network fault, several fault messages can occur (from the first
pickup of a protective function to the last dropout of a protective function). Without auto-reclosing each fault
event represents a network fault.
In total 600 indications can be recorded. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is full.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Ground Fault Messages

In devices with sensitive ground fault detection, separate ground fault logs are provided for ground fault
recording. These logs are completed if the ground fault detection is not set to tripping but to Alarm Only
(address 3101 = Alarm Only) or the setting ON with GF log has been selected. With setting ON with
GF log, there is also a trip, apart from the opening of the ground fault log.
For cos-ϕ / sin-ϕ measurements, a criterion for the opening of the ground fault log is the pickup of the VN>-
element. For “U0/I0-ϕ measurements” the ground fault log is opened as soon as a VN>-element has responded
and the angle condition is fulfilled. (Detailed information is provided in the logic diagrams for ground fault
detection, Section 2.13 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)). As soon as the pickup drops out,
the fault recording is terminated. The ground fault log is opened as soon as the message 1271 Sens.Gnd
Pickup (appearing) is issued and terminated upon disappearing of such message.
Up to 45 ground fault messages can be recorded for the last 3 ground faults. If more ground fault messages
are generated, the oldest are deleted consecutively.
General Interrogation
The general interrogation which can be retrieved via DIGSI enables the current status of the SIPROTEC 4 device
to be read out. All messages requiring general interrogation are displayed with their present value.
Spontaneous Messages
The spontaneous messages displayed using DIGSI reflect the present status of incoming information. Each
new incoming message appears immediately, i.e. the user does not have to wait for an update or initiate one.
2.26.1.3 Information to a Substation Control Center

If the device has a serial system interface, stored information may additionally be transferred via this interface
to a centralized control and storage device. Transmission is possible via different transmission protocols.
2.26.2 Statistics
The number of trips initiated by the 7SJ66, the number of close commands initiated by the AR and the oper-
ating hours under load are counted.
An additional counter allows the number of hours to be determined in which the circuit breaker is positioned
in the “open” condition. Further statistical data can be gained to optimize the intervals for circuit breaker main-
tenance.
Furthermore, if the device is utilized as motor protection, statistical values regarding the operation of the
motor as well as the last 5 motor startups are available.
The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage.
During the first start of the protection device the statistical values are pre-defined to zero.
Number of Trips
In order to count the number of trips of 7SJ66, the 7SJ66 relay has to be informed of the position of the circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts via binary inputs. Hereby, it is necessary that the internal pulse counter #of
TRIPs= is allocated in the matrix to a binary input that is controlled by the circuit breaker OPEN position. The
pulse count value "Number of TRIPs CB" can be found in the "Statistics" group if the option "Measured and
Metered Values Only" was enabled in the configuration matrix.
Number of Automatic Reclosing Commands

The number of reclosing commands initiated by the automatic reclosing function is summed up in separate
counters for the 1st and ≥ 2nd cycle.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Operating Hours
The operating hours under load are also stored (= the current value in at least one phase is greater than the
limit value BkrClosed I MIN set under address 212).
Hours Meter "CB open"

A meter can be realized as a CFC application if it adds up the number of hours in state “Circuit Breaker open”
similarly to the operating hours meter. The universal hours meter is linked to a respective binary input and
counts if the binary input is active. Alternatively, the undershooting of the parameter value 212 BkrClosed
I MIN may be used as a criterion for starting the meter. The meter can be set or reset. A CFC application
example for such meter is available on the Internet (SIPROTEC Download Area).
2.26.2.2 Circuit-Breaker Maintenance
General
The procedures aiding in CB maintenance allow maintenance intervals of the CB poles to be carried out when
their actual degree of wear makes it necessary. Saving on maintenance and servicing costs is one of the main
benefits this functionality offers.
The universal CB maintenance accumulates the tripping currents of the trips initiated by the protective func-
tions and comprises the four following autonomous subfunctions:
• Summation tripping current (ΣΙ-procedure)
• Summation of tripping powers (ΣΙx-procedure)
• Two-point procedure for calculating the remaining lifetime (2P-procedure)
• Sum of all Squared Fault Current Integral (I2t-procedure);

Measured value acquisition and preparation operates phase-selectively for all four subfunctions. The three
results are each evaluated using a threshold which is specific for each procedure (see Figure 2-139.).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[schema-lsw-171103-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-139 Diagram of CB maintenance procedures
The ΣΙ procedure is always present and active as a basic functionality. However, the other procedures (ΣΙx, 2P
and Ι2t) can be selected via a common configuration parameter.
As the load on the switch depends on the current amplitude and duration of the actual switching action,
including arc deletion, determination of the start and end criteria is of great importance. The procedures ΣΙx,
2P and Ι2t make use of the same criteria for that purpose. The logic of the start and end criterion is illustrated
in Figure 2-140.
The start criterion is fulfilled by an internal protective tripping initiated by the group indication "device TRIP".
Trips initiated via the internal control function are taken into consideration for the circuit breaker maintenance
if the respective command is indicated via the parameter 265 Cmd.via control. An externally initiated trip
command can be taken into consideration if the message >52 Wear start is sent simultaneously via a
binary input. The edge of the sent message >52-a can also be used as a further criterion as this signals that
the mechanism of the circuit breaker is put in motion in order to separate the contacts.
As soon as the start criterion has been fulfilled, the parameterized opening time of the circuit breaker is
started. The time of commencement of separation of the circuit breaker contacts is thus determined. The end
of the trip procedure, including arc deletion is determined via another given parameter (CB tripping time)
supplied by the manufacturer of the circuit breaker.
In order to prevent an incorrect calculation procedure in case of circuit breaker failure, the current criterion
212 BkrClosed I MIN verifies whether the current actually returned to zero after two additional cycles.
When the phase-selective logic release is fulfilled by the current criterion, the calculation and evaluation
methods of the respective procedures are initiated. After these have been completed, the end criterion of the
circuit breaker maintenance is fulfilled and ready for a new initiation.
Please note that CB maintenance will be blocked if parameter settings are made incorrectly. This condition is
indicated by the message 52 WearSet.fail, 52WL.blk n PErr or 52WL.blk I PErr (see Section
2.1.6.2 Setting Notes, “Power System Data 2”). The latter two indications can only take effect if the 2P-proce-
dure was configured.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[logik-lsw-start-endekriterium-170903-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-140 Logic of the start and end criterion
ΣΙ-Procedure
Being a basic function, the ΣΙ-procedure is unaffected by the configuration and does not require any procedur-
especific settings. All tripping currents occurring 1½ periods after a protective trip, are summed up for each
phase. These tripping currents are r.m.s. values of the fundamental harmonic.
The interrupted current in each pole is determined for each trip signal. The interrupted fault current is indi-
cated in the fault messages and is added up with previously stored fault current values in the statistic-coun-
ters. Measured values are indicated in primary terms.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The ΣΙ method does not feature integrated threshold evaluation. But using CFC it is possible to implement a
threshold, which logically combines and evaluates the three summation currents via an OR operation. Once
the summation current exceeds the threshold, a corresponding message will be triggered.
ΣΙx-Procedure
While the ΣΙ-procedure is always enabled and active, use of the ΣIx-procedure depends on the CB maintenance
configuration. This procedure operates analogously to the ΣΙ-procedure. The differences relate to the involu-
tion of the tripping currents and their reference to the exponentiated rated operating current of the CB. Due to
the reference to Ιr x, the result is an approximation to the number of make-break operations specified by the
CB manufacturer. The displayed values can be interpreted as the number of trips at rated operational current
of the CB. They are displayed in the statistics values without unit and with two decimal places.
The tripping currents used for calculation are a result of the rms values of the fundamental harmonic, which is
recalculated each cycle.
If the start criterion is satisfied (as described in Section „General“), the r.m.s. values, which are relevant after
expiration of the opening time, are checked for each phase as to whether they comply with the current crite-
rion. If one of the values does not satisfy the criterion, its predecessor will be used instead for calculation. If no
r.m.s. value satisfies the criterion up to the predecessor of the starting point, which is marked by the start
criterion, a trip has taken place which only affects the mechanical lifetime of the breaker and is consequently
not detected by this procedure.
If the current criterion grants the logic release after the opening time has elapsed, the recent primary tripping
currents (Ιb) are involuted and related to the exponentiated rated operating current of the CB. These values
are then added to the existing statistic values of the ΣΙx-procedure. Subsequently, threshold comparison is
started using threshold ΣI^x> as well as the output of the new related summation tripping current powers. If
one of the new statistic values lies above the threshold, the message Threshold ΣI^x> is generated.
2P-Procedure
The application of the two-point procedure for the calculation of the remaining lifespan depends on the CMD
configuration. The data supplied by the CB manufacturer is transformed in such manner that, by means of
measuring the fault currents, a concrete statement can be made with regard to the still possible operating
cycles. The CB manufacturer's double-log operating cycle diagrams form the basis of the measured fault
currents at the time of contact separation. Determination of the fault currents is effected in accordance with
the method as described in the above section of the ΣΙx–procedure.
The three results of the calculated remaining lifetime are represented as statistic value. The results represent
the number of still possible trips, if the tripping takes place when the current reaches the rated operational
current. They are displayed without unit and without decimals.
As with the other procedures, a threshold logically combines the three “remaining lifetime results” via an OR
operation and evaluates them. It forms the “lower threshold”, since the remaining lifetime is decremented
with each trip by the corresponding number of operating cycles. If one of the three phase values drops below
the threshold, a corresponding message will be triggered.
A double-logarithmic diagram provided by the CB manufacturer illustrates the relationship of operating cycles
and tripping current (see example in Figure 2-141). This diagram allows the number of yet possible trips to be
determined (for tripping with equal tripping current). According to the example, approximately 1000 trips can
yet be carried out at a tripping current of 10 kA. The characteristic is determined by two vertices and their
connecting line. Point P1 is determined by the number of permitted operating cycles at rated operating
current Ιr, point P2 by the maximum number of operating cycles at rated fault tripping current Ιsc. The associ-
ated four values can be configured.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[lsw-2p-schaltspiel270404-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-141 Diagram of operating cycles for the 2P procedure
As Figure 2-141 illustrates a double-log diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be expressed by the
following exponential function:
n = b·Ιbm
where n is the number of operating cycles, b the operating cycles at Ιb = 1A, Ιb the tripping current, and m the
directional coefficient.
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.
NOTE
i Since a directional coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of
incorrect settings, it is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in the oper-
ating cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of operating cycles with Ιsc (263 OP.CYCLES
Isc) is used instead as the calculation result for the current number of operating cycles, see Figure 2-142.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[2p-richtungskoeffizient-300104-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-142 Value limitation of directional coefficient
If the current criterion described in the Section “General” grants the phase-selective logic release, the present
number of operating cycles is calculated based on the tripping currents determined when the CB operating
time on tripping has elapsed. They are set off against the remaining lifetime allowing the present statistic
values to be displayed and the evaluation to be started using the specified threshold. If one of the new values
lies above the threshold, the message Thresh.R.Endu.< is generated.
Three additional phase-selective statistic values are provided to determine the portion of purely mechanical
trips among the results of the remaining lifetime (e.g. for phase A: mechan.TRIP A=). They act as counters
which count only the trips whose tripping currents are below the value of the current criterion.
Ι2t-Procedure
During the Ι2t-procedure the squared fault current integral occurring per trip is added up phase-selectively.
The integral is derived from the squared instantaneous values of the currents occurring during arc time of the
circuit breaker. This results in:
T CB arc = (parameter 266 T 52 BREAKTIME) – (parameter 267 T 52 OPENING).
The three sums of the calculated integrals are represented as statistic values referred to the squared device
nominal current (Ιnom2). As with the other procedures, a threshold logically combines the three sums via an OR
operation and evaluates them.
The calculated squared tripping currrent integrals are added to the existing statistic values. Subsequently,
threshold comparison is started using threshold ΣI^2t>, and the new statistic values are output. If one of the
values lies above the threshold, the message Thresh. ΣI^2t> is generated.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Commissioning
Usually, no measures are required for commissioning. However, should the protection device be exchanged
(e.g. old circuit breaker and a new protection device), the initial values of the respective limit or statistical
values must be determined via the switching statistics of the respective circuit breaker.
2.26.2.3 Motor Statistics
General
There are two different types of statistical motor data:
• Operational information and
• Startup information.
The statistical operational information contains the
• Total number of motor startups
• Total number of the motor operating hours (including startup conditions)
• Total number of motor shutdown hours
• Percentage of motor operating time and the total megawatt hours (if the device has a voltage trans-
former).
For every motor startup
• The duration
• The startup current
• The startup voltage (if the device has a voltage transformer) are stored in the startup information.
Motor Operation Information

The motor operation statistic is newly calculated in a 600 ms cycle. In the statistics buffer, its image is
decreased to a resolution of one hour.
Motor Startup Information

The motor startup current and the startup voltage (if the device has a voltage transformer) are indicated as
primary values.
The measurement of these statistical values is initiated upon energization of the motor. This is recognized as
soon as the threshold value of the circuit breaker position detection (parameter 212 BkrClosed I MIN) is
exceeded in at least one phase. A requirement for this is that all three phase currents were previously below
the configured threshold value.
The end of the startup time measurement is triggered as soon as the largest of the three phase currents
undershoots the startup current as set in parameter 1107 I MOTOR START for at least 300 ms.
If the motor startup current (parameter 1107 I MOTOR START) is not exceeded after energization detection
or if the current falls below the motor startup current within 500 ms after energization detection, then this is
not considered being a motor startup. No statistic is created.
Reading/Setting/Resetting Counters
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description provides a description of how to read out the statistical counters via the
device front panel or DIGSI. Setting or resetting of these statistical counters takes place under the menu item
MESSAGES —> STATISTICS by overwriting the counter values displayed.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Circuit Breaker Maintenance

Under address 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT one of the alternatives ΣΙx procedure, 2P procedure, Ι2t procedure or
Disabled can be set. All parameters relevant to this function are available at parameter block P.System
Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1 ).
The following setting values are important input values the subfunctions require in order to operate correctly:
The CB Tripping Time is a characteristic value provided by the manufacturer. It covers the entire tripping
process from the trip command (applying auxiliary power to the trip element of the circuit breaker) up to arc
extinction in all poles. The time is set at address 266 T 52 BREAKTIME.
The CB Operating Time T 52 OPENING is equally a characteristic value of the circuit breaker. It covers the
time span between the trip command (applying auxiliary power to the trip element of the circuit breaker) and
separation of CB contacts in all poles. It is entered at address 267 T 52 OPENING.
The following diagram illustrates the relationship between these CB times.
[ls-zeiten-120304-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-143 Illustration of the CB times
Current flow monitoring 212 BkrClosed I MIN, which some protective functions rely upon to detect a
closed CB, is used as the current zero criterion. It should be set with respect to the actually used device func-
tions (see also margin heading “Current Flow Monitoring (CB)” in Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes.
ΣΙProcedure
Being the basic function of summation current formation, the ΣΙ-procedure is always active and does not
require any additional settings. This is irrespective of the configuration in address 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT.
This method does not offer integrated threshold evaluation. The latter could, however, be implemented using
CFC.
ΣΙx-Procedure
Parameter 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT can be set to activate the ΣΙx procedure. In order to facilitate evaluating
the sum of all tripping current powers, the values are referred to the involuted CB rated operational current.
This value is indicated in the CB data at address 260 Ir-52 in the P.System Data 1 and can be set as
primary value. This reference allows the threshold of the ΣΙx procedure to correspond to the maximum

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
number of make-break operations. For a circuit breaker, whose contacts have not yet been worn, the
maximum number of make-break operations can be entered directly as threshold. The exponent for the invo-
lution of the rated operational current and of the tripping currents is set at address 264 Ix EXPONENT. To
meet different customer requirements, this exponent 264 Ix EXPONENT can be increased from 1.0 (default
setting = 2.0) to 3.0.
For the procedure to operate correctly, the time response of the circuit breaker must be specified in parame-
ters 266 T 52 BREAKTIME and 267 T 52 OPENING.
The summated values can be interpreted as the number of tripping operations at rated operational current of
the CB. They are displayed in the statistical values without unit and with two decimal places.
2P-Procedure
Parameter 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT can be set to activate the 2P procedure. An operating cycles diagram (see
sample diagram in the functional description of the 2P procedure), provided by the manufacturer, shows the
relationship of make-break operations and tripping current. The two vertices of this characteristic in a double
logarithmic scale are decisive for the setting of addresses 260 to 263:
Point P1 is determined by the number of permitted make-break operations (parameter 261 OP.CYCLES AT
Ir) for rated operational current Ιr (parameter 260 Ir-52)
Point P2 is determined by the maximum number of make-break operations (parameter 263 OP.CYCLES Isc)
for rated fault tripping current Ιsc (parameter 262 Isc-52).
For the procedure to operate correctly, the time response of the circuit breaker must be specified in parame-
ters 266 T 52 BREAKTIME and 267 T 52 OPENING.
Ι2t-Procedure
The Ι2t-procedure is activated via configuration parameter 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT. The square fault current
integrals are referred to the squared device nominal current. For purposes of determining the arc time, the
device must be informed of the CB tripping time T 52 BREAKTIME as well as the CB opening time T 52
OPENING of the circuit breaker. For recognition of the last zero crossing (arc deletion) of the currents after
tripping, the “Current-zero” Criterion is required.

Informa-
tion
– #of TRIPs= PMV Number of TRIPs=
409 >BLOCK Op Count SP >BLOCK Op Counter
1020 Op.Hours= VI Counter of operating hours
1021 Σ Ia = VI Accumulation of interrupted current Ph A
1022 Σ Ib = VI Accumulation of interrupted current Ph B
1023 Σ Ic = VI Accumulation of interrupted current Ph C
2896 79 #Close1./3p= VI No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3pole
2898 79 #Close2./3p= VI No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3p
16001 ΣI^x A= VI Sum Current Exponentiation Ph A to Ir^x
16002 ΣI^x B= VI Sum Current Exponentiation Ph B to Ir^x
16003 ΣI^x C= VI Sum Current Exponentiation Ph C to Ir^x
16006 Resid.Endu. A= VI Residual Endurance Phase A
16007 Resid.Endu. B= VI Residual Endurance Phase B
16008 Resid.Endu. C= VI Residual Endurance Phase C
16011 mechan.TRIP A= VI Number of mechanical Trips Phase A
16012 mechan.TRIP B= VI Number of mechanical Trips Phase B
16013 mechan.TRIP C= VI Number of mechanical Trips Phase C
16014 ΣI^2t A= VI Sum Squared Current Integral Phase A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
16015 ΣI^2t B= VI Sum Squared Current Integral Phase B
16016 ΣI^2t C= VI Sum Squared Current Integral Phase C

Informa-
tion
10027 StartDuration1 VI Startup Duration 1
10028 StartupCurrent1 VI Startup Current 1
10029 StartupVoltage1 VI Startup Voltage 1
10030 Nr.of Mot.Start VI Total Number of Motor Starts
10031 Motor Run.Time VI Total Motor Running Time
10032 Motor Stop.Time VI Total Motor Stopped Time
10033 Perc.Run.Time VI Motor Percent Running Time
2.26.3 Measurement
A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly available for call up on site, or
for data transfer.
Applications
• Information on the actual status of the system
• Conversion of secondary values to primary values and percentages
Prerequisites
Except for secondary values, the device is able to indicate the primary values and percentages of the measured
values.
A precondition correct display of the primary and percentage values is the complete and correct entry of the
nominal values for the instrument transformers and the protected equipment as well as current and voltage
transformer ratios in the ground paths when configuring the device. The following table shows the formulas
which are the basis for the conversion of secondary values to primary values and percentages.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.26.3.1 Display of Measured Values
Table 2-29 Conversion formulae between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured Secon- Primary %

Values dary
ΙA, ΙB, ΙC, Ιsec.
Ι1, Ι2
ΙN = 3 ·Ι0 ΙN sec.
(calculated)
ΙN = measured ΙN sec.
value of ΙN-input
ΙNs ΙNs sec.

(ΙNs,
Ι3I0real,
Ι3I0reactive)
VA, VB, VC, VPh-N sec.
V0, V1, V2,
V4
VA–B, VB–C, VC–A VPh-Ph sec.
VN VN sec.
P, Q, S (P and Q No secondary measured values

phase-segre-
gated)
Power Factor cos φ cos φ cos φ · 100 in %
(phase-segre-
gated)
Frequency f in Hz f in Hz
Protection
Table 2-30 Legend for the conversion formulae
Parameter Address Parameter Address

Vnom PRIMARY 202 Ignd-CT PRIM 217
Vnom SECONDARY 203 Ignd-CT SEC 218
CT PRIMARY 204 FullScaleVolt. 1101
CT SECONDARY 205 FullScaleCurr. 1102
Vph / Vdelta 206
Depending on the type of device ordered and the device connections, some of the operational measured
values listed below may not be available.
The phase–to–ground voltages are either measured directly, if the voltage inputs are connected phase–to–
ground, or they are calculated from the phase–to–phase voltages VA–B and VB–C and the displacement voltage
VN.
The displacement voltage VN is either measured directly or calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[fo_verlagerungsspannungen, 1, en_US]
Please note that value V0 is indicated in the operational measured values.

The ground current ΙN is either measured directly or calculated from the conductor currents.
[fo_erdstrom, 1, en_US]
In addition, the following may be available:
• Θ/Θ TRIP thermal measured value of overload protection value for stator in % of the trip initiating over-
temperature
• Θ/ΘL TRIP thermal measured value of restart inhibit (rotor winding),
• Θ Restart restarting limit of restart inhibit,
• TReclose total time, before the motor can be restarted,
• ΘRTD 1 to ΘRTD 12 temperature values at the RTD box.
Upon delivery, the power and operating values are set in such manner that power in line direction is positive.
Active components in line direction and inductive reactive components in line direction are also positive. The
same applies to the power factor cosϕ. It is occasionally desired to define the power drawn from the line (e.g.
as seen from the consumer) positively. Using parameter 1108 P,Q sign the signs for these components can
be inverted.
The calculation of the operational measured values is also performed during a fault. The values are updated in
intervals of > 0.3 s and < 1 s.
2.26.3.2 Transfer of Measured Values

Measured values can be transferred via the interfaces to a central control and storage unit.
The measuring range in which these values are transmitted depend on the protocol and, if necessary, addi-
tional settings.
Protocol Transmittable measuring range, format
IEC 60870-5-103 0 to 240 % of the measured value.
IEC 61850 The primary operational measured values are transmitted.
The measured values as well as their unit format are set out in detail in manual PIXIT.
The measured values are transmitted in “Float” format. The transmitted measuring
range is not limited and corresponds to the operational measurement.
Modbus The unit format of the measured values on the device side is at first automatically
generated by means of the selected nominal values of current and voltage within the
system data.
The current unit format can be determined in DIGSI or at the device via Menu Opera-
tional Values.
The user can select via DIGSI which operational measured values (primary, secondary
or percentage) must be transmitted.
The measured values are always transmitted as 16-bit values including sign (range ±
32768). The user can define the scaling of the operational measured value to be trans-
mitted. This will result in the respective transmittable measuring range.
For further details, please refer to the descriptions and protocol profiles.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
268 Superv.Pressure OUT Supervision Pressure
269 Superv.Temp. OUT Supervision Temperature
601 Ia = MV Ia
602 Ib = MV Ib
603 Ic = MV Ic
604 In = MV In
605 I1 = MV I1 (positive sequence)
606 I2 = MV I2 (negative sequence)
621 Va = MV Va
622 Vb = MV Vb
623 Vc = MV Vc
624 Va-b= MV Va-b
625 Vb-c= MV Vb-c
626 Vc-a= MV Vc-a
627 VN = MV VN
629 V1 = MV V1 (positive sequence)
630 V2 = MV V2 (negative sequence)
632 Vsync = MV Vsync (synchronism)
641 P= MV P (active power)
642 Q= MV Q (reactive power)
644 Freq= MV Frequency
645 S= MV S (apparent power)
661 Θ REST. = MV Threshold of Restart Inhibit
701 INs Real MV Resistive ground current in isol systems
702 INs Reac MV Reactive ground current in isol systems
805 Θ Rotor MV Temperature of Rotor
807 Θ/Θtrip MV Thermal Overload
809 T reclose= MV Time untill release of reclose-blocking
830 INs = MV INs Senstive Ground Fault Current
831 3Io = MV 3Io (zero sequence)
832 Vo = MV Vo (zero sequence)
901 PF = MV Power Factor
991 Press = MVU Pressure
992 Temp = MVU Temperature
996 Td1= MV Transducer 1
997 Td2= MV Transducer 2
1068 Θ RTD 1 = MV Temperature of RTD 1

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
1077 Θ RTD10 = MV Temperature of RTD10
16031 φ(3Vo,INs) = MV Angle between 3Vo and INsens.
16032 In2 = MV In2
30701 Pa = MV Pa (active power, phase A)
30702 Pb = MV Pb (active power, phase B)
30703 Pc = MV Pc (active power, phase C)
30704 Qa = MV Qa (reactive power, phase A)
30705 Qb = MV Qb (reactive power, phase B)
30706 Qc = MV Qc (reactive power, phase C)
30707 PFa = MV Power Factor, phase A
30708 PFb = MV Power Factor, phase B
30709 PFc = MV Power Factor, phase C
30800 VX = MV Voltage VX
17937 Ia (2nd) = MV Ia (2nd harmonic) =
17938 Ib (2nd) = MV Ib (2nd harmonic) =
17939 Ic (2nd) = MV Ic (2nd harmonic) =
17940 Ia (3rd) = MV Ia (3rd harmonic) =
17941 Ib (3rd) = MV Ib (3rd harmonic) =
17942 Ic (3rd) = MV Ic (3rd harmonic) =
17943 Ia (4th) = MV Ia (4th harmonic) =
17944 Ib (4th) = MV Ib (4th harmonic) =
17945 Ic (4th) = MV Ic (4th harmonic) =
17946 Ia (5th) = MV Ia (5th harmonic) =
17947 Ib (5th) = MV Ib (5th harmonic) =
17948 Ic (5th) = MV Ic (5th harmonic) =
17961 Ia (THD) = MV Ia (THD) =
17962 Ib (THD) = MV Ib (THD) =
17963 Ic (THD) = MV Ic (THD) =
17949 Va (2nd) = MV Va (2nd harmonic) =
17950 Vb (2nd) = MV Vb (2nd harmonic) =
17951 Vc (2nd) = MV Vc (2nd harmonic) =
17952 Va (3rd) = MV Va (3rd harmonic) =
17953 Vb (3rd) = MV Vb (3rd harmonic) =
17954 Vc (3rd) = MV Vc (3rd harmonic) =
17955 Va (4th) = MV Va (4th harmonic) =
17956 Vb (4th) = MV Vb (4th harmonic) =
17957 Vc (4th) = MV Vc (4th harmonic) =
17958 Va (5th) = MV Va (5th harmonic) =
17959 Vb (5th) = MV Vb (5th harmonic) =
17960 Vc (5th) = MV Vc (5th harmonic) =
17964 Va (THD) = MV Va (THD) =

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
17965 Vb (THD) = MV Vb (THD) =
17966 Vc (THD) = MV Vc (THD) =
2.26.4 Average Measurements
The long-term averages are calculated and output by the 7SJ66.
Long-Term Averages
The long-term averages of the three phase currents Ιx, the positive sequence components Ι1 for the three
phase currents, and the real power P, reactive power Q, and apparent power S are calculated within a set
period of time and indicated in primary values.
For the long-term averages mentioned above, the length of the time window for averaging and the frequency
with which it is updated can be set.
Average Calculation
The selection of the time period for measured value averaging is set with parameter 8301 DMD Interval in
the corresponding setting group from A to D under MEASUREMENT. The first number specifies the averaging
time window in minutes while the second number gives the frequency of updates within the time window. 15
Min., 3 Subs, for example, means: Time average is generated for all measured values with a window of 15
minutes. The output is updated every 15/3 = 5 minutes.
With address 8302 DMD Sync.Time, the starting time for the averaging window set under address 8301 is
determined. This setting specifies if the window should start on the hour (On The Hour) or 15 minutes later
(15 After Hour) or 30 minutes / 45 minutes after the hour (30 After Hour or 45 After Hour).
If the settings for averaging are changed, then the measured values stored in the buffer are deleted, and new
results for the average calculation are only available after the set time period has passed.
2.26.4.3 Settings

8301 DMD Interval 15 Min., 1 Sub 60 Min., 1 Sub Demand Calculation Intervals
15 Min., 3 Subs
15 Min.,15 Subs
30 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min.,10 Subs
5 Min., 5 Subs
8302 DMD Sync.Time On The Hour On The Hour Demand Synchronization Time
15 After Hour
30 After Hour
45 After Hour

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
833 I1 dmd= MV I1 (positive sequence) Demand
834 P dmd = MV Active Power Demand
835 Q dmd = MV Reactive Power Demand
836 S dmd = MV Apparent Power Demand
963 Ia dmd= MV I A demand
964 Ib dmd= MV I B demand
965 Ic dmd= MV I C demand
2.26.5 Min/Max Measurement Setup
Minimum and maximum values are calculated by the 7SJ66. Time and date of the last update of the values
can also be read out.
Minimum and Maximum Values

The minimum and maximum values for the three phase currents Ιx, the three phase-to-ground voltages Vx-N,
the three phase-to-phase voltages Vxy, the positive sequence components Ι1 and V1, the displacement voltage
V0, the thermal measured value of overload protection Θ/Θoff, the real power P, reactive power Q, and appa-
rent power S, the frequency; and the power factor cos ϕ are calculated as primary values (including the date
and time they were last updated).
The minimum and maximum values of the long-term averages listed in the previous section are also calcu-
lated.
The minimum and maximum values can be reset at any time via binary inputs or by using the integrated
control panel or the DIGSI software. Additionally, the reset can be carried out cyclically, starting at a preset
point of time.
Minimum and Maximum Values

The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a programmable point in time.
To select this feature, address 8311 MinMax cycRESET should be set to YES. The point in time when reset is
to take place (the minute of the day in which reset will take place) is set at address 8312 MiMa RESET TIME.
The reset cycle in days is entered at address 8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning date of the cyclical
process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered at address 8314 MinMaxRES.START.
2.26.5.3 Settings

8311 MinMax cycRESET NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
YES
8312 MiMa RESET TIME 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle Period
8314 MinMaxRES.START 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
– ResMinMax IntSP_Ev Reset Minimum and Maximum counter
395 >I MinMax Reset SP >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
396 >I1 MiMaReset SP >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
397 >V MiMaReset SP >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
398 >VphphMiMaRes SP >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
399 >V1 MiMa Reset SP >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
400 >P MiMa Reset SP >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
401 >S MiMa Reset SP >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
402 >Q MiMa Reset SP >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
403 >Idmd MiMaReset SP >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
404 >Pdmd MiMaReset SP >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
405 >Qdmd MiMaReset SP >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
406 >Sdmd MiMaReset SP >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
407 >Frq MiMa Reset SP >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
408 >PF MiMaReset SP >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
412 > Θ MiMa Reset SP >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
837 IAdmdMin MVT I A Demand Minimum
838 IAdmdMax MVT I A Demand Maximum
839 IBdmdMin MVT I B Demand Minimum
840 IBdmdMax MVT I B Demand Maximum
841 ICdmdMin MVT I C Demand Minimum
842 ICdmdMax MVT I C Demand Maximum
843 I1dmdMin MVT I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum
844 I1dmdMax MVT I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum
845 PdMin= MVT Active Power Demand Minimum
846 PdMax= MVT Active Power Demand Maximum
847 QdMin= MVT Reactive Power Demand Minimum
848 QdMax= MVT Reactive Power Demand Maximum
849 SdMin= MVT Apparent Power Demand Minimum
850 SdMax= MVT Apparent Power Demand Maximum
851 Ia Min= MVT Ia Min
852 Ia Max= MVT Ia Max
853 Ib Min= MVT Ib Min
854 Ib Max= MVT Ib Max
855 Ic Min= MVT Ic Min
856 Ic Max= MVT Ic Max
857 I1 Min= MVT I1 (positive sequence) Minimum
858 I1 Max= MVT I1 (positive sequence) Maximum
859 Va-nMin= MVT Va-n Min
860 Va-nMax= MVT Va-n Max
861 Vb-nMin= MVT Vb-n Min
862 Vb-nMax= MVT Vb-n Max
863 Vc-nMin= MVT Vc-n Min
864 Vc-nMax= MVT Vc-n Max

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
865 Va-bMin= MVT Va-b Min
867 Va-bMax= MVT Va-b Max
868 Vb-cMin= MVT Vb-c Min
869 Vb-cMax= MVT Vb-c Max
870 Vc-aMin= MVT Vc-a Min
871 Vc-aMax= MVT Vc-a Max
872 Vn Min = MVT V neutral Min
873 Vn Max = MVT V neutral Max
874 V1 Min = MVT V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum
875 V1 Max = MVT V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
876 Pmin= MVT Active Power Minimum
877 Pmax= MVT Active Power Maximum
878 Qmin= MVT Reactive Power Minimum
879 Qmax= MVT Reactive Power Maximum
880 Smin= MVT Apparent Power Minimum
881 Smax= MVT Apparent Power Maximum
882 fmin= MVT Frequency Minimum
883 fmax= MVT Frequency Maximum
884 PF Max= MVT Power Factor Maximum
885 PF Min= MVT Power Factor Minimum
1058 Θ/ΘTrpMax= MVT Overload Meter Max
1059 Θ/ΘTrpMin= MVT Overload Meter Min
2.26.6 Set Points for Measured Values
SIPROTEC 4 devices facilitate the setting of setpoints for some measured or metered values. Should any of
these setpoints be reached, exceeded or undershot during operation, the device issues a warning which is
indicated in the form of an operational message. This can be configured to LEDs and/or binary outputs, trans-
ferred via the ports and interconnected in DIGSI CFC. Additionally, DIGSI CFC can be used for the configuration
of set points for further measured and metered values and to allocate these via the DIGSI device matrix. In
contrast to the actual protection functions, the setpoints monitoring function operates in the background;
therefore it may not pick up if measured values are changed spontaneously in the event of a fault and if
protection functions are picked up. As a message is only issued upon multiple exceeding of the setpoints, such
setpoint monitoring does not react as fast as the trip signals of protection functions.
Applications
• This monitoring program works with multiple measurement repetitions and lower priority than the
protection functions. For that reason, in the event of a fault it may not respond to fast measured value
changes before protection functions are started and tripped. This monitoring program is not suitable for
blocking protection functions.
Setpoint Monitoring
Upon delivery, the following individual setpoint levels are configured:
• ΙAdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase A.
• ΙBdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase B.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• ΙCdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase C.
• Ι1dmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average positive sequence current.
• |Pdmd|>: Exceeding a preset maximum average active power
• |Qdmd|>: Exceeding a preset maximum average reactive power.
• Sdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value of reactive power.
• Temp>: Exceeding a preset temperature (if measuring transducers available).
• Press<: Falling below a preset pressure (if measuring transducers available).
• 37-1<: Falling below a preset current in any phase.
• |PF |<: Falling below a preset power factor.
Setpoints for Measured Values

Setting is performed in the DIGSI Configuration Matrix under Settings, Masking I/O (Configuration Matrix).
Set the filter "Measured and Metered Values Only" and select the configuration group "Setpoints (MV)". Here,
default settings may be changed or new setpoints defined.
Settings must be applied in percent and usually refer to nominal values of the device.

Informa-
tion
– I Admd> LV I A dmd>
– I Bdmd> LV I B dmd>
– I Cdmd> LV I C dmd>
– I1dmd> LV I1dmd>
– |Pdmd|> LV |Pdmd|>
– |Qdmd|> LV |Qdmd|>
– |Sdmd|> LV |Sdmd|>
– Press< LVU Pressure<
– Temp> LVU Temp>
– 37-1 LV 37-1 under current
– |PF|< LV |Power Factor|<
270 SP. Pressure< OUT Set Point Pressure<
271 SP. Temp> OUT Set Point Temp>
273 SP. I A dmd> OUT Set Point Phase A dmd>
274 SP. I B dmd> OUT Set Point Phase B dmd>
275 SP. I C dmd> OUT Set Point Phase C dmd>
276 SP. I1dmd> OUT Set Point positive sequence I1dmd>
277 SP. |Pdmd|> OUT Set Point |Pdmd|>
278 SP. |Qdmd|> OUT Set Point |Qdmd|>
279 SP. |Sdmd|> OUT Set Point |Sdmd|>
284 SP. 37-1 alarm OUT Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent alarm
285 SP. PF(55)alarm OUT Set Point 55 Power factor alarm

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.26.7 Set Points for Statistic

For the statistical counters, setpoints may be entered and a message is generated as soon as they are reached.
The message can be allocated to both output relays and LEDs.
Setpoints for the Statistical Counter

The setting of threshold values for the statistical counters takes place in DIGSI under Messages → Statistics in
the sub-menu Threshold Values for Statistics. Double-click to display the corresponding contents in another
window. By overwriting the previous value the settings can be changed (please refer to the SIPROTEC 4
System Description).

Informa-
tion
– OpHour> LV Operating hours greater than
272 SP. Op Hours> OUT Set Point Operating Hours
16004 ΣI^x> LV Threshold Sum Current Exponentiation
16005 Threshold ΣI^x> OUT Threshold Sum Curr. Exponent. exceeded
16009 Resid.Endu. < LV Lower Threshold of CB Residual Endurance
16010 Thresh.R.Endu.< OUT Dropped below Threshold CB Res.Endurance
16018 Thresh. ΣI^2t> OUT Threshold Sum Squa. Curr. Int. exceeded
2.26.8 Energy Metering
Metered values for active and reactive energy are determined by the device. They can be called up at the front
of the device, read out via the operating interface using a PC with DIGSI, or transferred to a central master
station via the system interface.
Metered Values for Active and Reactive Energy

Metered values of the real power Wp and reactive power (Wq) are acquired in kilowatt, megawatt or gigawatt
hours primary or in kVARh, MVARh or GVARh primary, separately according to the input (+) and output (–), or
capacitive and inductive. The measured-value resolution can be configured. The signs of the measured values
appear as configured in address 1108 P,Q sign (see Section “Display of Measured Values”).
Setting of parameter for meter resolution

Parameter 8315 MeterResolution allows increasing the resolution of the energy metered values by the
Factor 10 or Factor 100 compared to the Standard setting.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.26.8.3 Settings

8315 MeterResolution Standard Standard Meter resolution
Factor 10
Factor 100

Informa-
tion
– Meter res IntSP_Ev Reset meter
888 Wp(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wp (active)
889 Wq(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive)
916 WpΔ= - Increment of active energy
917 WqΔ= - Increment of reactive energy
924 WpForward MVMV Wp Forward
925 WqForward MVMV Wq Forward
928 WpReverse MVMV Wp Reverse
929 WqReverse MVMV Wq Reverse
2.26.9 Commissioning Aids
Device data sent to a central or master computer system during test mode or commissioning can be influ-
enced. There are tools for testing the system interface and the binary inputs and outputs of the device.
Applications
• Test Mode
• Commissioning
Prerequisites
In order to be able to use the commissioning aids described in the following:
• The device needs a port..
• The device must be connected to a control center.
Test Messages to the SCADA Interface during Test Operation

If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information
that is transmitted can be influenced.
Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred to the central control
system can be identified with an added message "test operation"-bit while the device is being tested on site
(test mode). This identification prevents the messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an
actual power system disturbance or event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally
transferred via the system interface can be blocked during the testing ("block data transmission").
Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using the operating panel on the
device, or with a PC and DIGSI via the operator interface.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Manual describes in detail how to activate and deactivate test mode and blocked data
transmission.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Checking the System Interface

If the device features a system interface and uses it to communicate with the control center, the DIGSI device
operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted correctly.
A dialog box shows the display texts of all messages which were allocated to the system interface in the
configuration matrix. In another column of the dialog box you can specify a value for the messages you intend
to test (e.g. ON/OFF). After having entered password no. 6 (for hardware test menus) a message can be
generated. The corresponding message is issued and can be read out either from the event log of the
SIPROTEC 4 device or from the substation control system.
The procedure is described in detail in Chapter "Mounting and Commissioning".
Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs

The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in
DIGSI. This feature can be used, for example, to verify control wiring from the device to substation equipment
(operational checks), during start-up.
A dialog box shows all binary inputs and outputs as well as LEDs of the device with their present status. The
operating equipment, commands, or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components are
also displayed. After having entered password no. 6 (for hardware test menus), it is possible to switch to the
opposite status in another column of the dialog box. Thus, you can energize every single output relay to check
the wiring between protected device and the system without having to create the alarm allocated to it.
Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests

During commissioning, energization sequences should be carried out to check the stability of the protection
also during closing operations. Oscillographic event recordings contain the maximum information on the
behavior of the protection.
Along with the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection function, the 7SJ66 also has
the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program
DIGSI, the serial interface, or a binary input. For the latter, event >Trig.Wave.Cap. must be allocated to a
binary input. Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs, for instance, via the binary input when
the protection object is energized.
An oscillographic recording that is triggered externally (that is, without a protective element pickup) are
processed by the device as a normal oscillographic record. For each oscillographic record a fault record is
created which is given its individual number to ensure that assignment can be made properly. However, these
oscillographic recordings are not displayed in the fault log buffer in the display as they are no network fault
events.
2.26.10 Web Monitor
NOTE
i As of 7SJ66 FW V4.33, you can access the Web Monitor only via HTTPS.
The Web Monitor facilitates the display of parameters, data, and measuring values for 7SJ66 devices during
installation or during operation. It uses Internet technology for this purpose. The display is effected by means
of a Web browser, for example, the Internet Explorer.
The SIPROTEC Web Monitor provides various comprehensive device functions, other available functions are
device-specific. For the 7SJ66, a phase diagram and an observation function for the illustration of synchroniza-
tion data are implemented as specific functions. Apart from general information regarding installation, this
manual provides a description of specific functions of the SIPROTEC Web Monitor for 7SJ66. The general func-
tions are described in the Help file of the DIGSI-CD (as from DIGSI V4.87).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Prerequisites
The Web Monitor runs on the operator PC and requires only standard software. The following software
programs / operating systems must be installed:
Operating system: Microsoft Windows 10, Microsoft Windows 8, Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows XP,
Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows NT, Microsoft Windows ME, and Microsoft Windows 98.
Internet browser: Netscape Communicator Version 4.7, Netscape Communicator as from Version 6.x or Micro-
soft Internet Explorer as from Version 5.0. Java must be installed and activated.
Web Monitor versions < V2.08 work with Java versions up to 6.xx. The Web Monitor version V2.09 supports
the Java version 7.xx and higher.
2.26.10.1 General
During the commissioning phase, the device configuration created in the devices must be verified and their
functions be checked. The Web Monitor provides support during the basic and clear determination and
displaying of important measuring values.
Discrepancies in the wiring or the configuration can be quickly found and solved.
To run the Web Monitor, a link from the operator PC to the protection device via its front and rear operator
interface (service interface) is necessary. An Internet browser must be installed on the operator PC (see para-
graph on system requirements). DIGSI 4 is usually also installed on the operator PC.
Please note that it must be ensured that DIGSI 4 and the Web Monitor do not use the same operator interface
at the same time. A simultaneous access would lead to data collisions. This means that either DIGSI 4 OR the
Web-Monitor can use a device interface. Before the Web Monitor is started, DIGSI 4 must be exited or at least
the settings and allocations in DIGSI 4 must have been finalized. It is possible to simultaneously operate DIGSI
4 at the front operator interface via a port of the operator PC and the Web Monitor at the rear operating inter-
face via another port of the operating PC.
The Web Monitor consists of HTML pages and the Java-Applets contained therein, which are stored in the
7SJ66 SIPROTEC 4 device in EEPROM. It forms an integral part of the SIPROTEC 4 device firmware and there-
fore does not need to be installed separately. All that needs to be created on the operator PC is a longdistance
data transmission network used for selection and communication. After the link has been successfully estab-
lished through the data transmission network, the browser is started and the TCP-IP address of the protection
device is entered. The server address of the device, which is its homepage address, is transmitted to the
browser and displayed as an HTML page. This TCP-IP address is set at the front and service interface using
DIGSI 4, or directly on the device using the integrated operator interface.
NOTE
i As the Java plug-in is not supported anymore starting with Firefox 52 or Chrome 45, the Web Monitor can
only be accessed with browser versions lower than Firefox 52 or Chrome 45.
NOTE
i It is only possible to monitor this process. Control of the process through the data transmission link is only
possible after a control feature has been set up and established. A parameter can be modified either
directly on the device or with DIGSI 4 in such manner that the device control feature contained in the Web
Monitor also permits the input of numerical values. Thereafter, the Web Monitor parameters can be modi-
fied which are normally set only directly on the device, because passwords can now be entered from the
keyboard.
2.26.10.2 Functions
Basic Functionality
Basic functionality means the functions that are generally available, i.e. not device-dependent.
These comprise:
• Device Control
• Messages

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• Measurement Overview
• Synchronization tools
• Phasor Diagram
• Siemens Internal Diagnostics

A description of these functions is provided in the Online Help of DIGSI as from Version V4.60.
[sc_Web-Monitor Default Display, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-144 Web-Monitor Default Display
The above figure of the device operation view shows a device connected through the data transmission link
with its control (keyboard) and display elements (display, LEDs, inscriptions). The device can be operated with
the keys shown in the display in the same way as with the sealed keypad on the device.
It is recommended to block the control via the Web Monitor. This can be achieved by setting "Read Only"-
access for the interface via which the Web browser accesses the device. This parameter can be accessed in
DIGSI via "Interfaces - Operator Interface on Device" (for access via serial interface) or via "Interfaces - Ethernet
on Device" (for access via the Ethernet interface, see the following figure).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[sc_einstell-bedienberecht-webmon, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-145 Setting the Web Monitor authorization for access via Ethernet interface
As an example for the basic functionality, the figure below shows messages of the event log of the device in
the form of a list. These messages are displayed with their short text stored in the device.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[web-betriebsmeldung-040402-ro, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-146 Operational Messages (Buffer: Event Log)
Device-specific Functionality
Apart from the general basic functionality, the Web Monitor contains the synchronization function for the
7SJ66. The following information can therefore be displayed via the Web Monitor.
The synchronisation function includes the following views:
• Synchronization range
The synchronisation ranges are displayed in a coordinate system. The X axis shows the frequency and the
Y axis the voltage.
• Synchronoscope
The synchronoscope is dynamically visualized by three diagrams showing respectively the difference
angle, the difference voltages and the difference frequency.
• Synchronous systems
Synchronous networks are visualized by a pie chart and the current measured values.
The figure below shows an example of the synchronoscope with selection list, pie/bar chart and the current
measured values.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[web-synchronoskop-040513-ro, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-147 Web-Monitor Synchronoscope
All currently parameterized functions are shown in a list. An LED icon shows the current status of the selected
group: bright green (ON) for active, and dark green (OFF) for inactive. For an inactive function group, only the
parameter settings are shown, whereas for an active function group the current measured values are
displayed as well. On startup, the first active function group found is displayed automatically. All measured
values are read out directly in the device – about every 100 ms – and visualized in tables or diagrams.
2.26.10.3 Operating Modes
The Web Monitor works in the following operating modes between the operator PC and the SIPROTEC 4
device:
Operation via Ethernet

Connection via an Ethernet interface. This type of connection requires an Ethernet board inside the device and
a connection of that module to a local network.
For more information of the basic functionality, the installation and the operating system-specific configura-
tion, please refer to the Web-Monitor online help provided on the DIGSI DVD.
Access Regulations for Web Monitor

The access rights for the Web Monitor are assigned with DIGSI via the Interfaces entry. It is recommended to
assigne the Read only authority there; it is then not possible to deleted the event list via the Web Monitor nor
to issue a command or to reset a stored LED. If the Full access is assigned, all these operating actions are also
possible via the Web Monitor.
NOTE
i No access has no effect yet, i.e. the user also has full access in this case. See Figure 2-145 on that.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.26.10.4 Display Example
With the help of the Web Monitor, a clear represenation of the most important measurement data of the
device can be achieved. The measurement values can be called via the navigation bar. A list with the desired
information appears (see the following figure)
[webmon-primaer-mess-wlk-040427, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-148 Measured values in the Web Monitor - examples for measured values
The currents, voltages and their phase angles derived from the primary and secondary measured values are
graphically displayed as phasor diagrams (see Figure 2-146). In addition to phasor diagrams of the measured
values, the numerical values as well as frequency and device address are indicated.
[webmon-messwertprim-zeig-wlk-040429, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-149 Phasor diagram of the primary measured values - example

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The following types of messages can be retrieved and displayed with the Web Monitor:
• Operational messages (buffer: event log)
• Fault messages (buffer: trip log)
• Ground fault messages
• Spontaneous messages
• Fault Records
You can print these lists with the “Print event buffer” button.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.27 Protection for Single-phase Voltage Transformer Connection

Devices 7SJ66 may also be connected to only one primary voltage transformer. Impacts on protective func-
tions to be taken into consideration are described in this section.
Applications
• For some applications there is only one voltage transformer on the primary voltage side. Usually it is a
phase voltage. However, it may also be a phase-to-phase voltage. Via configuration the device may be
adapted for such an application.
2.27.1 Connection
The device may optionally be supplied with a phase-to-ground voltage (e.g. VA–N) or a phase-to-phase voltage
(e.g. VAB). The connection mode has been specified during the configuration (see Subsection 2.1.3.2 Setting
Notes) in address 240 VT Connect. 1ph. The following figure shows a connection example. Further exam-
ples can be found in the Appendix C Connection Examples.
[Connection Example of VC-N, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-150 Connection example of a single-phase voltage transformer for 7SJ66 with phase-to-ground
voltage VC–N
2.27.2 Impacts on the Functionality of the Device
When a device is operated by only one voltage transformer, this will have an impact on several device func-
tions. The ones affected are described in the following. Furthermore, this type of connection is dealt with in
the functional descriptions. Functions not mentioned in the following are not affected by this type of connec-
tion.
Undervoltage Protection, Overvoltage Protection (27, 59 Elements)

Depending on the configuration in address 240 voltage protection is either operated by a phase-to-ground or
a phase-to-phase voltage. Therefore, if the device is connected to a phase-to-ground voltage, set the phase
voltage threshold. If connected to a phase-phase voltage, set the phase-to-phase voltage threshold. In
contrast, with three-phase connection, the threshold generally represents a phase-to-phase quantity. See also
Section 2.6.4 Setting Notes.
Functional logic, scope of settings and information of this function are described in Section 2.6 Voltage
Protection 27, 59.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Frequency Protection (81 Elements)

Depending on the configuration in address 240, frequency protection is either operated by a phase-to-ground
or a phase-to-phase voltage. A maximum voltage may be configured. If the value set is undershot, frequency
protection is blocked. Therefore, if the device is connected to a phase-to-ground voltage, set the phase voltage
threshold. If connected to a phase-to-phase voltage, set the phase-to-phase voltage threshold.
Functional logic, scope of settings and information of this function are described in Section 2.9 Frequency
Protection 81 O/U.
Directional Time Overcurrent Protection (67 and 67N Elements)

If the device is connected to only one voltage transformer, the function is set to inactive and hidden.
Synchronization
The synchronization function can be applied without any restrictions. Connection examples are shown in the
following figure and in the Appendix, C Connection Examples.
[connection example, phase-to-ground, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-151 Connection example of a single-phase voltage transformer for 7SJ66 (phase-to-ground
voltages)
If the phases of voltages V1 and V2 differ, phase displacement may be adjusted in address 6122 ANGLE
ADJUSTM..
(Sensitive) Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)

The directional functionality and the displacement voltage element of this function cannot be applied since
there is no displacement voltage. Current elements of this function, however, can be operated in non-direc-
tional mode
Except for the above-mentioned restriction the functional logic, scope of settings and information are
described in Section 2.13 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s).
Directional Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

If only one voltage transformer is connected, this function is inactive and hidden.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Reactive Power Direction Undervoltage Protection QU Protection

If only one voltage transformer is connected, this function is inactive and hidden.
Fault Locator
If the device is connected to only one voltage transformer, this function is disabled and hidden.
Monitoring Functions
Voltage-measuring monitoring functions such as "Voltage symmetry" and "Fuse-Failure-Monitor" cannot be
applied. They are set inactive and are hidden.
Operational Measured Values

Several operational measured values cannot be calculated. If whole groups of operational measured values are
concerned, they will be hidden. If only parts of a group are concerned, corresponding operational measured
values are set invalid (values are replaced by dashes) or reset.
Voltage Connection
Address 240 VT Connect. 1ph is set to ensure that only one voltage transformer is connected to the device
and to define the type of voltage transformer connected to it. Thus, the user specifies which primary voltage is
connected to which analog input. If one of the voltages offered is selected, i.e. a setting unequal NO, setting of
address 213 for multiple-phase connection is no more relevant. Only address 240 is to be set.
For 7SJ66 with single-phase voltage transformer connection, the voltage connected to voltage input V4 is
always used for synchronization.
Nominal Values of Voltage Transformers

In addresses 202 Vnom PRIMARY and 203 Vnom SECONDARY set, as usual, the voltage transformer nominal
values defined as phase-to-phase quantities. This depends on whether the device is connected to a phase
voltage or phase-to-phase voltage.
Undervoltage Protection, Overvoltage Protection, Frequency Protection

If phase-to-ground voltage connection is selected for address 240, the voltage thresholds of this function also
have to be set as phase-to-ground voltages. If phase-to-phase connection is selected for address 240, the
voltage thresholds of this function also have to be set as phase-to-phase voltages.
(Sensitive) Ground Fault Detection

All directional- and voltage-type settings (addresses 3102 to 3107, 3109 to 3112 and 3123 to 3126) are of no
significance. Thus, their settings may not be modified.
Current elements are to be set to Non-Directional in addresses 3115 and 3122.
Set parameter 3130 to Vgnd OR INs. Thus, the current elements are operated independently of VN.
Example:
In a system with a primary nominal voltage of 138 kV and a secondary nominal voltage of 115 V, single-phase
voltage VA–N is connected (see Figure 2-152).
Threshold values for voltage protection are set as follows:
Overvoltage 59-1: to 120 % VNom
Undervoltage 27-1: to 60 % VNom

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[Connection Example, setting notes, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-152 Example of a single-phase voltage transformer connection (phase-to-ground)
Apply the following settings to the device:

Address 202 Vnom PRIMARY = 138 kV
Address 203 Vnom SECONDARY = 115 V
Address 240 VT Connect. 1ph = Van
[fo_einstellbeispiel-einphas-anschluss, 1, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.28 Breaker Control

A control command function is integrated in the SIPROTEC 4 7SJ66 to coordinate the operation of circuit
breakers and other equipment in the power system.
Control commands can originate from four command sources:
• Local control at the device's operator panel
• Operation using DIGSI
• Remote control via network control center or substation controller (e.g. SICAM)
• Automatic functions (e.g., via binary input)

Switchgear with single and multiple busbars are supported. The number of switchgear devices to be controlled
is limited only by the number of binary inputs and outputs. Interlocking checks ensure high security against
maloperation and a multitude of switchgear types and operating modes are available.
2.28.1 Control Device
In devices with integrated or detached operator panel, switchgear can be controlled via the operator panel of
the device. In addition, control can be executed via the operator interface using a personal computer and via
the serial interface with a link to the substation control equipment.
Applications
• Switchgears with single and double busbars
Prerequisites
The number of switchgear devices to be controlled is limited by the
binary inputs present
binary outputs present
Operation Using the Keypad with Small Display

You can access the control menu and select the switching device to be operated by using the navigation keys
▲, ▼, ◀, ▶. After entering a password, a new window is displayed in which multiple control actions (for
example, close, open, cancel) are available and can be selected using the ▼ and ▲ keys. Thereafter, a query
appears for security reasons. After the security check has been completed, the ENTER key must be pressed
again to carry out the command. If this release does not occur within 1 minute, the process is aborted. Before
the control command is issued, cancelation via the ESC key is possible at any time.
You can also access the control menu by using the 3 independent colored keys I, CTRL，or O which are
located below the LCD display. If you are in the menu system outside the control submenu, you can return to
the control mode via one of the 3 independent colored keys. Then, select the switchgear to be operated with
the help of the navigation keys. The switching direction is determined by operating the I or O push-button.
The selected switching direction is displayed flashing in the bottom line of the following security prompt. Pass-
word and security prompts prevent unintended switching operations. Press the ENTER key to confirm the
entries. Before the control command is issued or during switch selection, cancelation is possible at any time
via the ESC key. Command end, feedback or any violation of the interlocking conditions are indicated.
Operation Using the Keypad with Graphic Display

Commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the relay. For this purpose, there
are three independent keys located below the graphic display. The key CTRL causes the control display to
appear in the LCD. Controlling of switchgears is only possible within this control display, since the two control
keys OPEN and CLOSE only become active as long as the control display is present. The LCD must be changed
back to the default display for other, non-control, operational modes.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The navigation keys ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ are used to select the desired device in the Control Display. The I key or the O
key is then pressed to convey the intended control command.
Consequently, the switch icon in the control display flashes in setpoint direction. At the lower display edge,
the user is requested to confirm the switching operation via the ENTER key. Thereafter a query for security
reasons appears. After the security check is completed, the ENTER key must be pressed again to carry out the
command. If this confirmation is not performed within one minute, the setpoint flashing changes again to the
corresponding actual status. Cancellation via the ESC key is possible at any time before the control command
is issued.
During normal processing, the control display indicates the new actual status after the control command was
executed and the message command end appears at the lower display edge. In case of control commands
with feedback, the message FB reached is displayed for a short time before this.
If the attempted command fails, because an interlocking condition is not met, an error message appears in the
display. The message indicates why the control command was not accepted (see also SIPROTEC 4 System
Description). This message must be acknowledged with ENTER before any further control commands can be
issued.
Operation using DIGSI

Switchgear devices can be controlled via the operator control interface with a PC using the DIGSI operating
program. The procedure to do so is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description (Control of Switchgear).
Operation Using the System Interface

Control of switching devices can be performed via the serial system interface and a connection to the switch-
gear control and protection system. It is therefore required to ensure that the required peripherals physically
exist in the device and in the power system. Furthermore, certain settings for the serial interface in the device
need to be carried out (see SIPROTEC 4 System Description).

Informa-
tion
– 52Breaker CF_D12 52 Breaker
– 52Breaker DP 52 Breaker
– Disc.Swit. CF_D2 Disconnect Switch
– Disc.Swit. DP Disconnect Switch
– GndSwit. CF_D2 Ground Switch
– GndSwit. DP Ground Switch
– 52 Open IntSP Interlocking: 52 Open
– 52 Close IntSP Interlocking: 52 Close
– Disc.Open IntSP Interlocking: Disconnect switch Open
– Disc.Close IntSP Interlocking: Disconnect switch Close
– GndSw Open IntSP Interlocking: Ground switch Open
– GndSw Cl. IntSP Interlocking: Ground switch Close
– UnlockDT IntSP Unlock data transmission via BI
– Q2 Op/Cl CF_D2 Q2 Open/Close
– Q2 Op/Cl DP Q2 Open/Close
– Q9 Op/Cl CF_D2 Q9 Open/Close
– Q9 Op/Cl DP Q9 Open/Close
– Fan ON/OFF CF_D2 Fan ON/OFF
– Fan ON/OFF DP Fan ON/OFF
31000 Q0 OpCnt= VI Q0 operationcounter=

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions

Informa-
tion
2.28.2 Types of Commands
In conjunction with the power system control several command types can be distinguished for the device:
Commands to the Process

These are all commands that are directly output to the switchgear to change their process state:
• Switching commands for controlling the circuit breakers (not synchronized), disconnectors and ground
electrodes
• Step commands, e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs
• Set-point commands with configurable time settings, e.g. to control Petersen coils
Internal / Pseudo Commands

They do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal functions, simulate changes of
state, or to acknowledge changes of state.
• Manual overriding commands to manually update information on process-dependent objects such as

annunciations and switching states, e.g. if the communication with the process is interrupted. Manually
overridden objects are flagged as such in the information status and can be displayed accordingly.
• Tagging commands (for "setting") of the information value of internal objects, for example switching
authority (remote/local), settings group switching, data transmission block and deleting/presetting
metered values.
• Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers or data states.
• Information status command to set/reset the additional information "information status" of a process
object, such as:
– Input blocking
– Output blocking
2.28.3 Command Sequence
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be released after a thorough
check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded. Standard Interlocking checks are provided for each
individual control command. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed separately
for each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards. The overall command
task procedure is described in brief in the following list:
Check Sequence
Please observe the following:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• Command Entry, e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
– Check Password → Access Rights
– Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) → Selection of Deactivated interlocking
Recognition.
• User configurable interlocking checks

– Switching Authority
– Device Position Check (set vs. actual comparison)
– Interlocking, Zone Controlled (logic using CFC)
– System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller)
– Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation)
– Protection Blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions).
• Fixed Command Checks

– Internal Process Time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing the control action
between initiation of the control and final close of the relay contact)
– Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands are denied or
delayed)
– Operating equipment enabled as output (if an operating equipment component was configured, but
not configured to a binary input, the command is denied)
– Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the
moment the command is processed, then the command is denied)
– Board Hardware Error
– Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one operating equipment,
object-related Double Operation Block)
– 1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as relays contact sharing a common
terminal a check is made if a command is already active for this set of output relays).
Monitoring the Command Execution

The following is monitored:
• Interruption of a command because of a Cancel Command
• Runtime Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)
2.28.4 Switchgear Interlocking
System interlocking is executed by the user-defined logic (CFC).
Interlocking checks in a SICAM / SIPROTEC 4 system are normally divided in the following groups:
• System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central control system.
• Bay interlocking relies on the object data base (feedbacks) of the bay unit.
• Cross-bay interlocking via GOOSE messages directly between bay units and protection relays with
IEC61850.
The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration of the relay. To obtain more informa-
tion about GOOSE, please refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Switching objects that require system interlocking in a central control system are assigned to a specific param-
eter inside the bay unit (via configuration matrix).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (Interlocking OFF) can
be selected:
• For automatic commands, via command processing. by CFC and deactivated interlocking recognition,
• For local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command.
Interlocked / Non-Interlocked Switching

The configurable command checks in the SIPROTEC 4 devices are also called "standard interlocking". These
checks can be activated via DIGSI (interlocked switching/tagging) or deactivated (non-interlocked).
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not checked in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked within the command
processing. If a condition is not fulfilled, the command will be rejected by a message with a minus added to it
(e.g. “CO–”), immediately followed by a message.
The following table shows the possible types of commands in a switching device and their corresponding
annunciations. For the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI they
appear in spontaneous messages.
Type of Command Command Cause Message
Control issued Switching CO CO +/–
Manual tagging (positive / negative) Manual tagging MT MT+/–
Information state command, input blocking Input blocking ST ST+/– *)
Information state command, output blocking Output blocking ST ST+/– *)
Cancel command Cancel CA CA+/–
The "plus" appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution. The command execution
was as expected, in other words positive. The minus sign means a negative confirmation, the command was
rejected. Possible command feedbacks and their causes are dealt with in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
The following figure shows operational indications relating to command execution and operation response
information for successful switching of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and tags that were set with
a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out
independent of the interlocking.
[dw_display_LS-betriebsmeldung, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-153 Example of an operational annunciation for switching circuit breaker 52 (Q0)
Standard Interlocking (default)

The standard interlockings contain the following fixed programmed tests for each switching device, which can
be individually enabled or disabled using parameters:
• Device Status Check (set = actual): The switching command is rejected, and an error indication is
displayed if the circuit breaker is already in the set position. (If this check is enabled, then it works
whether interlocking, e.g. zone controlled, is activated or deactivated.) This condition is checked in both
interlocked and non-interlocked status modes.
• System Interlocking: To check the power system interlocking, a local command is transmitted to the
central unit with Switching Authority = LOCAL. A switching device that is subject to system interlocking
cannot be switched by DIGSI.
• Zone Controlled / Bay Interlocking: Logic links in the device which were created via CFC are interrogated
and considered during interlocked switching.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
• Blocking by Protection: Switch-ON commands are rejected with interlocked switches, as soon as one of
the protection functions of the unit has opened a fault case. The OPEN-command, by contrast, can
always be executed. Please be aware, activation of thermal overload protection elements or sensitive
ground fault detection can create and maintain a fault condition status, and can therefore block CLOSE
commands.
If the interlocking is removed, consider that, on the other hand, the restart inhibit for motors will not
automatically reject a CLOSE command to the motor. Therefore, a restart inhibit must be provided by
other means, e.g. by a bay interlocking using CFC.
• Double Operation Block: Parallel switching operations are interlocked against one another; while one
command is processed, a second cannot be carried out.
• Switching Authority LOCAL: A control command from the user interface of the device (command with
command source LOCAL) is only allowed if LOCAL is set in the device menu.
• Switching Authority DIGSI: Switching commands that are issued locally or remotely via DIGSI (command
with command source DIGSI) are only allowed if remote control is admissible for the device. If a DIGSI-PC
communicates with the device, it deposits here its virtual device number (VD). Only commands with this
VD (when Switching Authority = REMOTE) will be accepted by the device. Remote switching commands
will be rejected.
• Switching Authority REMOTE: A remote control command (command with command source REMOTE) is
only allowed if REMOTE is set in the device menu.
[dw_schutz-standardverriegelungen, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-154 Standard interlockings
The following figure shows the configuration of the interlocking conditions using DIGSI.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[sc_objekteigenschaft_verriegelungsbeding, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-155 DIGSI dialog box for setting the interlocking conditions
On devices with operator panel, the display shows the configured interlocking reasons. They are marked with
letters explained in the following table.
Table 2-31 Command types and corresponding messages
Interlocking Commands Abbrev. Display

Switching Authority L L
System interlocking S A
Zone controlled Z Z
SET = ACTUAL (switch direction check) P P
Protection blocking B B
The following figure shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of the device) for
three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in the previous table. All parameterized
interlocking conditions are indicated.
[verriegelungsbed-020315-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-156 Example of configured interlocking conditions

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Control Logic using CFC

For bay interlocking, a release logic can be created using CFC. Via specific release conditions the information
"released" or "bay interlocked" are available (e.g. object "52 Close" and "52 Open" with the data values: ON/
OFF).
Switching Authority (for devices with operator panel)

The interlocking condition "Switching Authority" serves for determining the switching authority. It enables the
user to select the authorized command source. For devices with operator panel, the following switching
authority ranges are defined in the following priority sequence:
• LOCAL
• DIGSI
• REMOTE
The object "Switching Authority" serves to interlock or enable LOCAL control, but not REMOTE or DIGSI
commands. The switching authority can be changed between "REMOTE" and "LOCAL" in the operator panel
after having entered the password or by means of CFC also via binary input and function key.
The "Switching authority DIGSI" is used for interlocking and allows commands to be initiated using DIGSI.
Commands are allowed for both a remote and a local DIGSI connection. When a (local or remote) DIGSI PC
logs on to the device, it enters its Virtual Device Number (VD). The device only accepts commands having that
VD (with switching authority = OFF or REMOTE). When the DIGSI PC logs off, the VD is cancelled.
Commands are checked for their source SC and the device settings, and compared to the information set in
the objects "Switching authority" and "Switching authority DIGSI".
Configuration
Switching authority available y/n (create appropriate object)

Switching authority available DIGSI y/n (create appropriate object)
Specific device (e.g. switching device) Switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): y/n
Specific device (e.g. switching device) Switching authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or
DIGSI commands: y/n
Table 2-32 Interlocking logic
Current Switching Command Issued with Command Issued from Command issued from
Switching SC3)=LOCAL SC=LOCAL or REMOTE SC=DIGSI
Authority Status
LOCAL not Allowed Interlocked 2) - "switching Interlocked "DIGSI not
registered authority LOCAL" registered"
LOCAL Checked Allowed Interlocked 2) - "switching Interlocked 2) - "switching
authority LOCAL" authority LOCAL"
REMOTE Not checked Interlocked 1) - "switching Allowed Interlocked "DIGSI not
authority REMOTE" registered"
REMOTE Checked Interlocked 1) - "switching Interlocked 2) - "switching Allowed
authority DIGSI" authority DIGSI"
1) also "Allowed" for: ”switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): is not marked
2) also "Allowed" for: ”Switching authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI status): is not marked"
3) SC= Source of command
SC = Auto SICAM:
Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in the CFC) are not subject to switching
authority and are therefore always "allowed".

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Switching Authority (for devices without operator panel)

The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to "REMOTE". The specifications of the previous
section apply.
Switching Mode (for devices with operator panel)

The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be activated or deactivated at
the time of the switching operation.
The following switching modes (local) are defined:
• Local commands (SC = LOCAL)

– interlocked (normal), or
– non-interlocked switching.
The switching mode can be changed between "interlocked (latched)" and "non-interlocked (unlatched)" in the
operator panel after having entered the password or by means of CFC also via binary input and function key.
The following switching modes (remote) are defined:
• Remote or DIGSI commands (SC = LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI)

– interlocked, or
– non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via a separate
command. The position of the key-switch is irrelevant.
– For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO SICAM), please observe the notes in the CFC manual (compo-
nent: BOOL to command).
Switching Mode (for devices without operator panel)

The dongle cable sets the switching mode of the device to "Normal". The specifications of the previous section
apply.
Zone Controlled / Field Interlocking

Zone controlled / field interlocking (e.g. via CFC) includes the verification that predetermined switchgear posi-
tion conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors (e.g. disconnector vs. ground switch, ground switch
only if no voltage applied) as well as verification of the state of other mechanical interlocking in the switch-
gear bay (e.g. High Voltage compartment doors).
Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for device control CLOSE
and/or OPEN.
The enable information with the data "switching device is interlocked (OFF/NV/FLT) or enabled (ON)" can be
set up,
• directly, using a single point or double point indication, key-switch, or internal indication (marking), or
• by means of a control logic via CFC.

When a switching command is initiated, the actual status is scanned cyclically. The assignment is done via
"Release object CLOSE/OPEN".
System Interlocking
Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other bays evaluated by a central
control system.
Double Activation Blockage

Parallel switching operations are interlocked. As soon as the command has arrived all command objects
subject to the interlocking are checked to know whether a command is being processed. While the command
is being executed, interlocking is enabled for other commands.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Blocking by Protection
The pickup of protective elements blocks switching operations. Protective elements are configured, separately
for each switching component, to block specific switching commands sent in CLOSE and TRIP direction.
When enabled, "Block CLOSE commands" blocks CLOSE commands, whereas "Block TRIP commands" blocks
TRIP signals. Switching operations in progress will immediately be aborted by the pickup of a protective
element.
Device Status Check (set = actual)

For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device is already in the set/
desired position (set/actual comparison). This means, if a circuit breaker is already in the CLOSED position and
an attempt is made to issue a closing command, the command will be refused, with the operating message
"set condition equals actual condition". If the circuit breaker / switchgear device is in the intermediate position,
then this check is not performed.
Bypassing Interlockings
Bypassing configured interlockings at the time of the switching action happens device-internal via interlocking
recognition in the command job or globally via so-called switching modes.
• SC=LOCAL
– The switching mode can be changed between "interlocked (latched)" and "non-interlocked
(unlatched)" on the operator panel after having entered the password or, by means of CFC, also via
binary input and function key.
• REMOTE and DIGSI

– Commands issued by SICAM or DIGSI are unlocked via a global switching mode REMOTE. A separate
request must be sent for the unlocking. The unlocking applies only for one switching operation and
for commands caused by the same source.
– Job order: command to object "Switching mode REMOTE", ON
– Job order: switching command to "switching device"
• Command via CFC (automatic command, SC=Auto SICAM):

– Behavior configured in the CFC block ("BOOL to command").
2.28.5 Command Logging
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing and processing,
command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing center. These messages
contain information on the cause. With the corresponding allocation (configuration) these messages are
entered in the event list, thus serving as a report.
Prerequisites
A listing of possible operating messages and their meaning as well as the command types needed for tripping
and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of transformer taps are described in the SIPROTEC 4
System Description.
Acknowledgment of Commands to the Device Front

All messages with the source of command LOCAL are transformed into a corresponding response and shown
in the display of the device.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Acknowledgment of commands to Local / Remote / DIGSI

The acknowledgment of messages with source of command Local/ Remote/DIGSI are sent back to the initiating
point independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface).
The acknowledgment of commands is therefore not executed by a response indication as it is done with the
local command but by ordinary command and feedback information recording.
Monitoring of Feedback Information

The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feedback information for all
commands. At the same time the command is sent, the monitoring time is started (monitoring of the
command execution). This time controls whether the device achieves the required final result within the
monitoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback
information arrives, a response Timeout command monitoring time appears and the process is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the execution of a
command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in
case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets and a message is
output.
The "plus" sign appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was successful. The
command was as expected, in other words positive. The "minus" is a negative confirmation and means that
the command was not executed as expected.
Command Output and Switching Relays

The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of trans-
former taps are described in the configuration section of the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ SIPROTEC 4
System Description.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
2.29 Communication
2.29.1 General
The device 7SJ66 supports the following protocols:
• IEC 61850
• IEC 60870-5-103
• Modbus
• DNP3 (communication through Ethernet)
• DNP3 (serial connection)
2.29.2 Parameter Settings in DIGSI
Preparing DIGSI 4
Before setting the parameters, make sure that the device catalog of your DIGSI 4 parameterization software
contains the device of the required version whose parameters need to be set. If the device of the required
version is not contained, you must obtain and install the correct device driver.
Preparing the Device

In the DIGSI 4 station manager, you can insert the devices of a substation from a device catalog and set
parameters. The operation includes setting the interface parameters correctly. A view of the substation is
available as shown in Figure 2-157, in which you can select the device and access the settings via Device →
Object Properties. Use DIGSI 4 in offline mode for the following steps, that is, there is no active serial link to
the device.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_DeviceMLFB, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-157 Settings According to the Order Number (MLFB) of the Device
Selecting the System Interface

In the MLFB tab, set the parameter 11. Systemport to 9: additional protocols. In the following
dialog, select the IEC 61850 protocol and set the interface of IEC 61850:
• For the electrical Ethernet interface, select L0R.
• For the optical interface, select L0S.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_SelectSystemInterface, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-158 Selecting the System Interface
NOTE
i For 7SJ66 devices with other Ethernet protocols or with other order options, the order number can be
different.
Setting Communication Parameters

The communication parameters are set in a similar way to the MLFB setting. You can find more information
for the Communication parameters tab in the following screenshot.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_ComParameterSetting, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-159 Setting Communication Parameters
Setting the IED Name

You can set the IED name of the device. The name cannot start with a numerical digit and has no more than
13 characters. The name is then used as the identifier for the device in the IEC 61850 system configurator in
2.29.4 Setting on IEC 61850 Station in DIGSI. Once being set, the device names cannot be changed.
Manual Changes
You can change network settings manually with the Manual change button. If the devices are not set with
the station configurator or are not used in such a parameterized station network, the manual change mode is
necessary.
If an SCD file is created or imported, addresses set for the system interface are reassigned. Then the addresses
are assigned as part of the network parameterization and overwrite the individual settings.
Selecting the IEC 61850 Edition

You can select IEC 61850 edition 1 or edition 2 in each 7SJ66 device. Select the edition in the Object property
of the device under the IEC 61850 setting. The setting is available only when the device is not assigned to any
station.
NOTE
i If you change the edition of a device or station to edition 2, the setting can no longer be changed. Siemens
recommends archiving the DIGSI 4 project before changing the edition.
NOTE
i You can add the SIPROTEC device to the station only if the device has the same or a lower edition as the
station.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
Setting Time Synchronization

After setting the communication parameters, initialize the selected device. The setting of the IEC 61850 time
synchronization is shown in Figure 2-160. If the device has an Ethernet module, the time synchronization is
offered via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) and performed via the Ethernet network. The time synchro-
nization is available for both electrical and optical interfaces. The parameters for the SNTP server itself are set
via the IEC 61850 configurator. You can find more information in 2.29.8 Additional Information.
NOTE
i After you change parameters, close and save the device. Otherwise there will be no ICD file (a mapping of
the device in a standard-compliant file) generated. An ICD file is required for further work with the device
in the IEC 61850 system configurator.
Configure the ICD file in accordance with the edition settings.
[sc_TimeSyncEthernetSNTP, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-160 Time Synchronization Setting via Ethernet and SNTP Server
Network Interface Settings

The network interface settings include the Ethernet interface settings. You can set the Ethernet interface not
only as a Line mode but also as a Switch mode in various redundancy protocols.
You can find more details for the settings in the following screenshot.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_SettingOperatingMode, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-161 Setting the Operating Mode
You can set the operating mode to Line or Switch. The operating mode Switch corresponds to the function-
ality of a switch with 3 ports. One port is linked directly to the device and the other 2 ports are used to form a
ring structure. You can find more information in 2.29.6 Integration into Networks.
Setting the Redundancy Type

If you select the Switch mode, set the redundancy in the next step. Available redundancy types are RSTP and
PRP. The redundancy depends on the structure of the network.
The redundancy type RSTP is used worldwide and is supported by almost all switches. The following screen-
shot shows the settings of the redundancy type.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_SettingRedundancyType, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-162 Settings of the Redundancy Type
Setting RSTP Parameters

If the redundancy type RSTP is set, a number of other settings are available. You can access the settings by
clicking the More... button.
NOTE
i The RSTP parameter settings must be changed only if it is necessary. Otherwise, you can use the recom-
mended settings in Figure 2-163. The DIGSI 4 default settings are the same as those of the devices with the
latest device drivers. You can find more information in 2.29.6 Integration into Networks and 2.29.8 Addi-
tional Information.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_RecommendedSettingRSTPParametersDIGSI4, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-163 Recommended Setting of the RSTP Parameters in DIGSI 4
RSTP Cooperation with SIPROTEC 5

In a network topology that contains only 7SJ66 devices, you must set the parameter Cost Style in all
devices to the same value 200 000 or 200 001.
In a RSTP network topology together with SIPROTEC 5 devices in the same ring, you must set the parameter
Cost Style to 200 001. The other parameters remain the same as the recommended settings in
Figure 2-163.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_RecommendedSettingCostStyleCooperationSIP5, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-164 Recommended Setting of Cost Style Cooperation with SIPROTEC 5
NOTE
i Even when no parameters have been changed, you must close and save all device parameters. Otherwise,
the parameter set will not be generated for 7SJ66.
2.29.3 Security Features
2.29.3.1 Overview
NOTE
i You can only deploy the device in a secured environment.

Siemens recommends protecting the network access to the energy automation products with appropriate
security mechanisms (for example, firewalls, segmentation, and VPN). In order to run the devices in a
secured IT environment, configure the environment according to the operational guidelines.
You can find the recommended security guidelines to secure substations via Cyber Security General
Downloads -> Manuals in http://www.siemens.com/gridsecurity.
The 7SJ66 device supports the security features since V4.31.
HTTPS
The 7SJ66 device supports all the following security requirements related to HTTPS:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
• The secured HTTPS protocol is used for accessing the Web UI of the 7SJ66 device by default. The unse-
cured HTTP access is supported only after you modify the configuration.
• The Web server only supports connection requests with the cryptographic protocols TLS 1.1 and TLS 1.2.
Due to security reasons, older versions of the TLS protocol are not supported.
• Only high-strength cipher suites (key length of 128 bits) are supported. Medium-strength cipher suites
(key length < 128 bits) are not supported.
• A TLS certificate (self-signed certificate) is used. The certificate is generated in the 7SJ66 device itself but
not signed or confirmed by a certificate authority. When the Web server offers an untrusted certificate to
the device, all browsers display a corresponding message. Due to the authentication scheme used by
browsers, Siemens does not provide certificates to be used for HTTPS with browsers (for example, during
manufacturing of the modules). During the installation, you can determine the DNS name or IP address
of the device system port as the part of the signed certificate. Therefore, after you set the IP address, the
device generates a self-signed certificate. The self-signed certificate is trusted by all clients used to access
the device in a secured way.
You can find recommendations for trusting self-signed certificates via Cyber Security General Down-
loads -> Application Notes in http://www.siemens.com/gridsecurity.
• After the certificate is linked to the IP address of the device, it is regenerated with each change of the IP
address.
DTLS
Starting with DIGSI 4 V4.92 and 7SJ66 firmware version V4.31, the IP-based communication of the devices is
secured with the DTLS protocol. The DTLS protocol runs on the top of UDP. Once the DTLS protocol handshake
between DIGSI 4 and the device is completed, the authentication, integrity, and confidentiality protection are
added to the UDP communication.
After the secure session is confirmed and the DIGSI 4 connection password (see detailed information in
2.29.3.3 Configuration via User Interface) is verified by 7SJ66 device, the further communication is identical
to the previous versions of 7SJ66 and DIGSI 4.
Disable Ports
When the 7SJ66 firmware is delivered, the HTTPS port is activated and the unsecured HTTP port is closed. You
can find detailed information in 2.29.3.5 Secure TCP/UDP Ports Used.
2.29.3.2 Password Definition

The following table shows the password used in 7SJ66 for security functions.
Table 2-33 Password for Security Functions
Password Description
DIGSI 4 Connection Password to connect a 7SJ66 device with DIGSI 4 via Ethernet
The password must contain 8 to 24 ASCII-characters and must include at least the following characters:
• 1 uppercase letter (A-Z)
• 1 lowercase letter (a-z)
• 1 digit (0-9)
• 1 special character, for example: !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
NOTE
i The password does not have a default value at the device delivery. Siemens recommends setting passwords
during the commissioning of the device.
The password protects against unauthorized access to the device.
The DIGSI 4 connection password can be set and changed only through device Web UI.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
2.29.3.3 Configuration via User Interface
Setting for Web Access via HTTPS

For DIGSI 4 V4.92 and higher, you can set the setting Web server to ON to enable one of the following func-
tions:
• Web access via HTTPS for 7SJ66 firmware V4.31 and higher
• Web access via HTTP for 7SJ66 firmware V4.30 and lower
[sc_WebServerSettingsDIGSI4V4.92Higher, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-165 Web Server Settings for DIGSI 4 V4.92 and Higher
For DIGSI 4 before V4.92, the setting Web server (HTTP) or Web server (HTTPS) only enables Web
access via HTTPS for 7SJ66 from V4.31.
The setting Web server (HTTP) enables Web access via HTTP for 7SJ66 before V4.31.
The setting Web server (HTTPS) does not work for 7SJ66 before V4.31.
[sc_WebServerSettingsDIGSI4BeforeV4.92, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-166 Web Server Settings for DIGSI 4 Before V4.92
Initializing Passwords
During the commissioning, you can set the following passwords via Web UI:
• Maintenance password (https://IP-address/setmaintenancepassword)
• DIGSI 4 connection password (https://IP-address/setconnectionpassword)

You can only set the password for DIGSI 4 connection after you have finished setting the password for Mainte-
nance.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_SetMaintenancePassword, 1, --_--]
Figure 2-167 Setting Maintenance Password
[sc_SetDIGSI4ConnectionPassword, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-168 Setting DIGSI 4 Connection Password
Changing Passwords
When you have the correct current password, you can change the following passwords via Web UI:
• Maintenance password (https://IP-address/setmaintenancepassword)
• DIGSI 4 connection password (https://IP-address/setconnectionpassword)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
[sc_ChangeMaintenancePassword, 1, --_--]
Figure 2-169 Changing Maintenance Password
[sc_ChangeDIGSI4ConnectionPassword, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-170 Changing DIGSI 4 Connection Password
Resetting Passwords
You can reset the DIGSI 4 maintenance password and connection password via the device HMI menu.
[sc_ResetDIGSI4ConnectionPassword, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-171 Resetting the DISGI 4 Maintenance Password and Connection Password
NOTE
i Resetting the DIGSI 4 maintenance password and connection password via Web monitor is not supported.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
Web Monitor Access Setup

In 7SJ66 parameter set version V4.31 and higher, the parameter Web monitor operation is set to No
access by default.
2.29.3.4 DIGSI 4 DTLS Connection

If an IP connection exists, the transportation channel between DIGSI 4 and 7SJ66 can be secured with the
DTLS protocol. As of DIGSI 4 V4.92 and 7SJ66 V4.31 the DTLS protocol is supported.
In addition, there is a connection password used for Ethernet access authorization.
After the initial start, there is no default connection password, and a warning message is displayed on the Web
page.
You can set a connection password during commissioning. The connection password can be initialized and
changed via the Web page.
You can find more information for using a connection password in 2.29.3.3 Configuration via User Interface.
After the DIGSI secure connection is established and the connection password is verified by the 7SJ66 device,
the rest of the communication occurs as before over the DTLS connection.
NOTE
i If the 7SJ66 firmware V4.31 works together with the parameter set V4.31, the DTLS secure connection is
enabled.
If the firmware version or the parameter set version is lower than V4.31, the DTLS secure connection is
disabled.
2.29.3.5 Secure TCP/UDP Ports Used

The following table shows the delivery settings for secure communication protocols.
Table 2-34 7SJ66 Port Usage
Communication TCP/UDP Port Activated by Description

Protocol Default
HTTPS TCP 443 Yes Secure connection to a Web browser for
device configuration and value view
HTTP TCP 80 No Connection to a Web browser for device
configuration and value view
DTLS UDP 50000 No Secure communication with DIGSI 4 via
Ethernet
UDP DIGSI UDP 50000 Yes Communication with DIGSI 4 via Ethernet
UDP Web monitor UDP 56797 No Communication with Web monitor via
Ethernet
IEC 61850 MMS TCP 102 Optional IEC61850 MMS communication activated
with the IEC61860 configuration
SNMP UDP 161 Yes SNMP communication
2.29.4 Setting on IEC 61850 Station in DIGSI
For further information about the setting on IEC 61850 station in DIGSI, refer to the chapter 3.4 in Ethernet
Module EN100 for IEC 61850 with electrical/optical 100 MBit Interface /6/ Ethernet Module EN100 for IEC
61850 with electrical/optical 100 MBit Interface, Manual

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.29 Communication
2.29.5 IEC 61850 System Configurator
For further information about the IEC 61850 system configurator, refer to the chapter 3.5 in Ethernet Module
EN100 for IEC 61850 with electrical/optical 100 MBit Interface /6/ Ethernet Module EN100 for IEC 61850 with
electrical/optical 100 MBit Interface, Manual
2.29.6 Integration into Networks
For further information about the integration into networks, refer to the chapter 4 in Ethernet Module EN100
for IEC 61850 with electrical/optical 100 MBit Interface /6/ Ethernet Module EN100 for IEC 61850 with elec-
trical/optical 100 MBit Interface, Manual
NOTE
i 7SJ66 does not have an EN100 module. Therefore, there is no need to consider the EN100 hardware
compatibility.
7SJ66 does not support the HSR protocol.
2.29.7 Parameterization
For further information about the parameterization, refer to the chapter 5 in Ethernet Module EN100 for IEC
61850 with electrical/optical 100 MBit Interface /6/ Ethernet Module EN100 for IEC 61850 with electrical/
optical 100 MBit Interface, Manual
2.29.8 Additional Information
For further information about the additional information, refer to the chapter 6 in Ethernet Module EN100 for
IEC 61850 with electrical/optical 100 MBit Interface /6/ Ethernet Module EN100 for IEC 61850 with electrical/
optical 100 MBit Interface, Manual
NOTE
i Compared with the EN100 module, the 7SJ66 device does not support the firmware update via Web UI.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
2.30 Security Logging
2.30.1 Overview
From V4.33 on, the 7SJ66 device provides a security audit trail which chronologically acquires and categorizes
security-relevant events according to the origin and severity.
2.30.2 Structure of Security Events
A syslog event is built up with the following elements:

Element Description
Severity (level) Severity levels of the event:
• Event
• Alarm
Data Date when the event is logged
Time Time when the event is logged
• T
Time
• hh:mm:ss.ttt
Time when the event is created
• +hh:mm
Time deviation from GMT
IP address IP address of the product that generates the log entry
Module name The name of the product module that generates the log entry
BOM Byte order marked for UTF8 encoding
Product name The name of the product that generates the log entry
Indication text The message part of a syslog event
Depending on the event, the indication text can contain variable additional informa-
tion.
2.30.3 Configuration
The security logs are automatically created during the operation of a 7SJ66 device. You can view the collected
log data in the security logs locally on the device HMI display or the device Web UI. The alarm and safety-crit-
ical indications are stored chronologically in the security logs. You cannot modify or delete these entries.
You can, for example, answer the following questions:
• How many login attempts have been made?
• When was the device configuration last updated?

You can find a full list of recorded security events in the section Recordings, Page 388.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
The following figure shows a setting example for the 7SJ66 security events.
[sc_7SJ66SecurityEvents, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-172 Setting Example for 7SJ66 Security Events
Configuration
With the adjustable Security log capacity warning parameter, a warning indication is issued. A warning
threshold of 80 % means that the set capacity limit has been reached after approx. 1600 entries in the security
log. Further warning indications are issued when the capacity limits of 85 %, 90 %, 95 %, and 98 % are
reached.
If the log organized as a ring buffer exceeds the 100 % capacity limit, the earliest generated entries are auto-
matically overwritten and the capacity utilization is reset to 0 %.
When you read the security log via the device HMI or via the Web UI, the capacity utilization is reset to 0 %.
The indications remain in the device. Apply all settings with DIGSI 4.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Recordings
The following items are logged in the security log:
• Actions
– Successfully established the DIGSI Ethernet or USB connection
– Successfully terminated the DIGSI Ethernet or USB connection
– Changing or resetting the connection password
– Changing or resetting the maintenance password
– Changing the passwords
– Updating the firmware version in the device
– Uploading or changing the configuration in the device
– Downloading the configuration from the device
– Changing the date and time
– Forcing control operations
– Security log access
• Potential errors
– Number of entries with correct or incorrect DIGSI Ethernet connection password
– Unsuccessful login attempt by typing 3 wrong DIGSI Ethernet connection passwords
– Rebooting or restarting the device
– DIGSI Ethernet connection time-out
• Other entries
– Capacity warning of the security log
The following table shows when which type of message (including format) and which action is expected.
Event/Alarm Summary Syslog Message Event Information
Severity
Successfully established the WARNING The content of the events for the successful login
DIGSI Ethernet or USB depends on the location from which the login is made:
connection Remotely (via Ethernet port) or locally (USB port).
Successfully terminated the WARNING The events for the manual logout are logged in the
DIGSI Ethernet or USB security log.
connection
Changing or resetting the WARNING Events relating to changing the DIGSI Ethernet connec-
connection password tion password via the device Web UI and to resetting the
DIGSI Ethernet connection password via the device HMI
Changing or resetting the WARNING Events relating to changing the maintenance password
maintenance password via the device Web UI and to resetting the maintenance
password via the device HMI
Changing the passwords WARNING Events relating to changing the 16 types of passwords
via DIGSI
Updating the firmware WARNING Events relating to uploading the device firmware in the
version in the device device
Uploading the configuration WARNING Events relating to uploading the protection configura-
tion from a PC to a device
Changing the configuration WARNING Events that display a change in the current configura-
tion. For example, changing a parameter.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
Event/Alarm Summary Syslog Message Event Information

Severity
Downloading the configura- WARNING Events relating to downloading the protection configura-
tion from the device tion to a PC. For example, DIGSI Plug & Play operation.
Changing the date and time WARNING Event that displays changes in the current date/time
configuration
Forcing control operations WARNING Events for control operations initiated locally or remotely
Security log access WARNING Events relating to displaying the security log of the
device
Login failed ALARM Events for a failed login (Incorrect DIGSI 4 Ethernet
connection password was entered). The failed logins are
logged after 3 attempts within the configured time
frame. Afterwards, each additional incorrect attempt is
logged as well until the maximum number of login
attempts has been reached. Once the number of login
attempts has been exhausted, the login is blocked for
the configured time span. That is, additional login
attempts are refused and logged, regardless of whether
the password is correct or not. Once the blocking time
has elapsed, the counter for the blocking is reset. The
counter is also reset if a successful login attempt occurs
or if the time span has elapsed without reaching the
maximum number of login attempts.
Rebooting or restarting the ALARM Events upon restarting the device. Booting or restarting
device the device by removing the power supply or by using a
device-internal restart mechanism, for example, a reset
button, is logged.
2.30.4 Viewing Audit Logs
Unsuccessful access attempts are recorded. A security log can store up to 2048 indications.
Reading from the Web UI
• To access the security log of your 7SJ66 device, use the Web UI. The device must be in Online access.
You can access the security logs (https://IP-address/securitylogaccess) via the Web UI.
After entering the correct maintenance password, the state of the last-loaded security log from the device is
displayed. If you do not set a maintenance password, you are not allowed to access the security log. You can
find more information about how to set the maintenance password in the section Initializing Passwords,
Page 381.
• You can refresh the contents by clicking the Refresh link in the headline.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions
[sc_7SJ66ReadingSecurityIndications, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-173 Reading the Security Indications
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel
• To access the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu -> Test & Diagnosis -> Security log
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
[sc_7SJ66ReadingSecurityLog, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-174 Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed.
• You cannot delete the log which is organized as a ring buffer.
• If you want to know security-relevant information without missing information, you must regularly
read this log.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3 Mounting and Commissioning
This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. The staff must be familiar with the commis-
sioning of protection and control systems, with the management of power systems and with the relevant
safety rules and guidelines. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are explained. The
primary tests require the protected object (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load.
3.1 Mounting and Connections 392
3.2 Checking Connections 415
3.3 Commissioning 418
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 436

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections

General
! WARNING
Warning of improper transport, storage, installation or assembly of the device.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or serious material damage.
² Trouble-free and safe use of this device depends on proper transport, storage, installation, and
assembly of the device according to the warnings in this device manual.
² Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in a high-voltage
environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations). These
regulations must be observed.
3.1.1 Configuration Information
Prerequisites
For installation and connections the following conditions must be met:
The rated device data have been checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. It has been
verified that these data comply with the power system data.
General Diagrams
General diagrams for the 7SJ66 device range are shown in Appendix B Terminal Assignments. Connection
examples for current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix C Connection Examples. It
must be checked that the setting configuration of the Power System Data1 (Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes)
corresponds with the connections.
Voltage Connection Examples

Connection examples for voltage transformers are provided in Appendix C Connection Examples
For the standard connection the 4th voltage measuring input is not used; the address 213 VT Connect.
3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn must be set accordingly. The factor in address 206 Vph / Vdelta must however be
set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measured and fault values).
Also an additional connection example of an e-n-winding of the voltage transformer is shown. Here address
213 must be set to VT Connect. 3ph = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn. The factor address 206 Vph / Vdelta
depends on the transformation ratio of the e–n-winding. For additional hints, please refer to section
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes under “Transformation Ratio”.
Another figure shows an example of a connection of the e–n winding of a set of voltage transformers, in this
case, however of a central set of transformers at a busbar. For more information refer to the previous para-
graph.
Another figure shows an example of the connection of a different voltage, in this case the busbar voltage (e.g.
for the synchronization function). For the synchronization function, address 213 must be set to
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy. Balancing V1/V2, address 6121, is always equal to 1 unless the feeder VT and
busbarside VT have a different transformation ratio. The factor in address 206 Vph / Vdelta must however
be set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault recording values).
Two phase–phase voltages or the displacement voltage Vdelta can also be connected to the device. Here the
address must be set to 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd. For the latter setting, only two phase–
phase voltages or only the displacement voltage Vdelta can be connected.
Moreover, for the flexible protection functions, you can connect any voltage Vx. Then set under address 213
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, Vx or Van,Vbn,Vcn,Vx.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
If there is only one voltage transformer on the system side, wiring is performed according to examples on
single-phase connection. For this case, address 240 VT Connect. 1ph in the P.System Data 1 specifies
to the device which primary voltage is connected to which analog input.
In case of single-phase voltage transformer connection the voltage connected to voltage input V4 is always
interpreted as the voltage which is to be synchronized.
Binary Inputs and Outputs

The configuration options of the binary in- and outputs, i.e. the procedure for the individual adaptation to the
plant conditions, are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The connections to the plant are
dependent on this configuration. The presettings of the device are listed in Appendix E Default Settings and
Protocol-dependent Functions. Please also check that the labeling strips on the front panel correspond to the
configured message functions.
Changing Setting Groups

If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, please observe the following:
• Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups when four groups are to
be switched. One binary input must be set for >Set Group Bit0, the other input for >Set Group
Bit1. If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled.
• For the control of 2 setting groups one binary input is sufficient, namely >Set Group Bit0, since the
non-assigned binary input >Set Group Bit1 is then regarded as not connected.
• The control signals must be permanently active so that the selected setting group is and remains active.
The following table shows the allocation of the binary inputs to the setting groups A to D and a simplified
connection diagram for the two binary inputs is illustrated in the following figure. The figure illustrates an
example in which both Set Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated
binary input is energized (high).
Where:
no = not energized or not connected
yes = energized
Table 3-1 Changing Setting Groups Using Binary Inputs
Binary Input Active Group

>Set Group Bit0 >Set Group Bit1
No No Group A
Yes No Group B
No Yes Group C
Yes Yes Group D
[lo_Setting Group Switching Using Binary Inputs, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-1 Connection Diagram (example) for Setting Group Switching Using Binary Inputs

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Trip Circuit Supervision

Please note that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R must be connected in series.
The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore stay substantially below half the rated control DC
voltage.
If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must be volt-free i.o.w. not be
commoned with each other or with another binary input.
If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be used (see following figure). The resistor R is inserted
into the circuit of the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary contact to facilitate the detection of a malfunction also
when the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary contact is open and the trip contact has dropped out. The value of this
resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore 52a is open and 52b is closed), the
circuit breaker trip coil (52TC) is no longer energized and binary input (BI1) is still energized if the command
relay contact is open.
Figure 3-2 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax , and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal
value of the arithmetic mean R should be selected:
[fo_mittelwert-r, 1, en_US]
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is derived as:
[fo_rmax, 1, en_US]
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is derived as:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[fo_rmin, 1, en_US]
ΙBE (HIGH) Constant current with activated BI ( = 1.2 mA)

VBI min minimum control voltage for BI
Vhigh ≥ 19 V (for 7SJ66**-4****-****)
Vhigh ≥ 88 V (for 7SJ66**-5****-****)
Vhigh ≥ 176 V (for 7SJ66**-6****-****)
VCTR Control voltage for trip circuit
RCBTC Ohmic resistance of the circuit breaker coil
VCBTC (LOW) Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker coil that does not lead to tripping
If the calculation results in Rmax < Rmin, the calculation must be repeated, with the next lowest switching
threshold VBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in the relay using plug-in jumpers (see Section
“Hardware Modifications”).
For the power consumption of the resistance:
[fo_leistungvon-r, 1, en_US]
Example
ΙBI (HIGH) 1.2 mA

VBI min 19 V (for 7SJ66**-4****-****)
88 V (for 7SJ66**-5****-****)
176 V (for 7SJ66**-6****-****)
VCTR 110 V (system / release circuit)
RCBTC 90 Ω (from system / trip circuit)
VCBTC (LOW) 2 V (system / release circuit)
[fo_Rmax, 2, en_US]
[fo_Rmin, 2, en_US]
[fo_R, 2, en_US]
The closest standard value of 12 kΩ is selected; the power is:
[fo_PR, 2, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications
3.1.2.1 General
Hardware modifications concerning, for instance, rated currents, the control voltage for binary inputs or termi-
nation of serial interfaces might be necessary. The following procedures in this section describe these hard-
ware modifications.
Auxiliary Voltage
There are different power supply voltage ranges for the auxiliary voltage available (refer to the Ordering Infor-
mation in Appendix A Ordering Information and Accessories). The power supply ranges of the variants are
DC 24 V/DC 48 V/DC 110 V/DC 220 V and AC 220 V.
Live Status Contact

The status contact of the device 7SJ66 is Closed normally. It will open when the device is operating.
Nominal Currents
The input transformers of the devices are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A with jumpers. The assignment
of the plug-in jumpers to the nominal current and the spatial arrangement of the jumpers are described sepa-
rately in the following sections.
Jumpers of current transformers, X1, X2 and X3 must be set for the same rated current, i.e. there must be one
jumper for each input transformer, and the common jumper X 14.
With standard 1A/5 A transformer jumper X4 for the ground path is set to 1 A or 5 A irrespective of other
jumper positions and depending on the ordered variant.
With models equipped with a sensitive ground fault current input of setting range 0.002 to 1.500 A, jumper
X4 is positioned as 1 A.
NOTE
i If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be registered via the
parameters 205 CT SECONDARY /218 Ignd-CT SEC in the Power System Data (see Section
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes).
Control Voltage for Binary Inputs

When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with a voltage that corre-
sponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. In general, to optimize the operation of the inputs, the
pickup voltage of the inputs should be set to most closely match the actual control voltage being used.
A jumper position must be changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The assignment of the
jumpers to the binary inputs and their spatial arrangement are described separately in the following sections.
NOTE
i If binary inputs are used for trip circuit monitoring, please note that two binary inputs (or one binary input
and one replacement resistor) must be connected in series. The switching threshold must lie significantly
below half the nominal voltage.
Contact Mode for Binary Outputs

Contact mode for binary outputs is normally open.
Exchanging Interfaces
The serial interface can only be replaced in devices designed for panel and cubicle flush mounting and for
surface-mounted devices with detached or without operator panel. The following section under margin
heading “Rreplacing Interface Modules” describes which interfaces can be exchanged, and how this is done.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Terminating of Serial Interfaces

If the device is equipped with a serial RS485 interface, they can be terminated with resistors at the terminate
unit on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For this purpose termination resistors are provided on the
PCB of the CPU processor module and on the RS485 interface module which can be connected via jumpers.
Here, only one option can be used.
As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched off.
Spare Parts
Spare parts can be the buffer battery that provides for storage of the data in the battery-buffered RAM when
the supply voltage fails, and the miniature fuse of the internal power supply. Their physical arrangement is
shown in the figures of the processor boards. The ratings of the fuse are printed on the board next to the fuse.
When exchanging the fuse, please observe the hints given in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description under “Main-
tenance” and “Corrective Action / Repairs”.
3.1.2.2 Environmental Protection Hints
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries (Applicable only for European Union and Countries with a Recycling
System)
The disposal of our products and possible recycling of their components after decommissioning has to be
carried out by an accredited recycling company, or the products/components must be taken to applicable
collection points. Such disposal activities must comply with all local laws, guidelines and environmental speci-
fications of the country in which the disposal is done. For the European Union the sustainable disposal of elec-
tronic scrap is defined in the respective regulation for "waste electrical and electronic equipment" (WEEE).
The crossed-out wheelie bin on the products, packaging and/or accompanying documents means
that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with normal house-
hold waste.
According to national legislation, penalties may be charged for incorrect disposal of such
waste.
By disposing of these products correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential
negative effects on human health and the environment.
NOTE
i Our products and batteries must not be disposed of as household waste. For disposing batteries it is neces-
sary to observe the local national/international directives.
Disposal of Mobile Storage Devices (e.g. USB Sticks and Memory Cards)
When disposing of/transferring mobile storage devices, using the format or delete functions only changes the
file management information and does not completely delete the data from your mobile storage device. When
disposing of or transferring a mobile storage device, Siemens strongly recommends physically destroying it or
completely deleting data from the mobile storage device by using a commercially available computer data
erasing software.
REACH/RoHS Declaration
You can find our current REACH/RoHS declarations at:
https://www.siemens.com/global/en/home/products/energy/ecotransparency/ecotransparency-down-
loads.html
NOTE
i You can find more information about activities and programs to protect the climate at the EcoTransparency
website:
https://www.siemens.com/global/en/home/products/energy/ecotransparency.html

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.1.2.3 Disassembly
Work on the Printed Circuit Boards
NOTE
i Before carrying out the following steps, make sure that the device is not operative.
! CAUTION
Caution when changing jumper settings that affect nominal values of the device
As a consequence, the ordering number (MLFB) and the ratings that are stated on the nameplate do
no longer match the actual device properties.
² If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device. Self adhe-
sive stickers are available that can be used as replacement nameplates.
To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching elements or exchanging
modules, proceed as follows:
• Prepare working area. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject against damage from
electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed:
– screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip,
– a Philips screwdriver size 1,
– 5 mm socket or nut driver.
• Unfasten the screw-posts of the current terminal connectors on the back panel.
• Remove the four caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become accessible.
• Carefully take off the front cover.
Work on the Plug Connectors
! CAUTION
Mind electrostatic discharges
Non–observance can result in minor personal injury or material damage.
² When working on plug connectors, electrostatic discharges must be avoided by previously touching a
grounded metal part.
² Do not plug or withdraw interface connections under power!
Here, the following must be observed:
• Disconnect the ribbon cable between the front cover and the CPU board at the front cover side.
• Disconnect the ribbon cables between the CPU unit and the input/output printed circuit boards I/O.
• Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD damage.
• Check the jumpers according to the following information. Change or remove the jumpers if necessary.
Module Arrangement 7SJ66

The following figures show the arrangement of the modules for 7SJ66 in housing size 1/3 and housing size 1/2.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[dw_Front View of 7SJ661/2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-3 Front View of 7SJ661/2 with Housing Size 1/3 after Removal of the Front Cover (Simplified and
Scaled Down)
[dw_Front View of 7SJ663, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Front View of 7SJ663 with Housing Size 1/2 after Removal of the Front Cover (Simplified and
Scaled Down)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.1.2.4 Jumper Settings of Binary Input Board (Only Available with MLFB Position 8 = 5 or 6)
The layout of the binary input board of the 7SJ661/2 is illustrated in the following figure.
[dw_BI Board for 7SJ661/2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-5 Binary Input Board for 7SJ661/2
Table 3-2 Jumper Settings for Pickup Voltage of Binary Inputs BI1 to BI16 (7SJ661/2)
Terminal Binary Inputs Jumper DC 88 V Pickup1 DC 176 V Pickup2

F BI1 X1 L H
BI2 X2 L H
BI3 X3 L H
BI4 X4 L H
BI5 X5 L H
BI6 X6 L H
BI7 X7 L H
1 Factory settings for devices with MLFB position 8 = 5.


C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Terminal Binary Inputs Jumper DC 88 V Pickup1 DC 176 V Pickup2

K BI8 X8 L H
BI9 X9 L H
BI10 X10 L H
BI11 X11 L H
BI12 X12 L H
BI13 X13 L H
BI14 X14 L H
BI15 X15 L H
BI16 X16 L H
NOTE
i The jumpers X18 and X19 must be set to default (def).
3.1.2.5 Jumper Settings of Binary Input Board (Only Available with MLFB Position 8 = 4)
The layout of the binary input board of the 7SJ661 is illustrated in the following figure.


C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[dw_BI Board for 7SJ661, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Binary Input Board for 7SJ661
Table 3-3 Jumper Settings for Pickup Voltage of Binary Inputs BI1 to BI16 (7SJ661)
Terminal Binary Inputs Jumper DC 19 V Pickup

F BI1 X1 L
BI2 X2 L
BI3 X3 L
BI4 X4 L
BI5 X5 L
BI6 X6 L
BI7 X7 L

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Terminal Binary Inputs Jumper DC 19 V Pickup

K BI8 X8 L
BI9 X9 L
BI10 X10 L
BI11 X11 L
BI12 X12 L
BI13 X13 L
BI14 X14 L
BI15 X15 L
BI16 X16 L
NOTE
i The jumpers from X1 to X16 must be set to default L side to reach the binary input threshold of DC 19 V.
The jumpers X18 and X19 must be set to default (Def).
3.1.2.6 Jumper Settings of VT/CT Board
The following picture illustrates the layout of the VT/CT board.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[dw_VT/CT Board, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-7 VT/CT Board
Table 3-4 Jumpers of Current Transformer
Jumper 1A 5A Notes
Protection CT X1-X3, X14 1A 5A Ia,Ib,Ic,X14 are
common jumpers
X4 and X15 1A 5A in, CT
The settings of jumpers X1, X2 and X3 must be same. That is, each jumper of CT must be in the same position.
The common jumper is X14.
The ground CT is not related to the other jumpers. It's set to 1 A or 5 A according to the MLFB and can be
changed via jumper X4.
If the device has a sensitive ground current transformer (INs), the current input range is from 0.001 to 1.600
A. The jumper is fixed at 1 A.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table 3-5 Jumpers of voltage transformer
Transformer Jumper Rated 100 V Rated 220 V Notes

VT1-3 X11-X13 L H
• The settings of the jumpers X11, X12 and X13 must be same.
• If the rated VT secondary value is 100 V, the jumpers are fixed at L.
• If the rated VT secondary value is 220 V, the jumpers are fixed at H.
3.1.2.7 Extension BIO Board
[dw_Extension BIO Input/Output, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-8 Extension BIO Input/Output
Table 3-6 Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI17 to BI22 (7SJ662)
Terminal Binary Inputs Jumper 88 VDC Pickup3 176 VDC Pickup4

7SJ662 L H
J BI17 X1 L H
BI18 X2 L H
BI19 X3 L H
BI20 X4 L H
BI21 X5 L H
BI22 X6 L H


C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table 3-7 Jumper Settings for BO (Terminal J11 J12 can Change between NO and NC)
NO5 NC
Jumper X7-X8 X8-X9
3.1.2.8 BIO Board
[dw_BIO Board, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-9 BIO Board for the Housing Size 1/2
5 Normally open, default setting of the BO10 in 7SJ662.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Table 3-8 Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs with the Housing Size 1/2 BIO
Board
Terminal Binary Inputs Jumper 88 VDC Pickup6 176 VDC Pickup7

F/H/G BI1/BI13/BI25 X1 L H
BI2/BI14/BI26 X2 L H
BI8/BI20/B32 X8 L H
K/M/L BI11/BI23/BI35 X11 L H
Table 3-9 Jumper of Bus Addresses of Input/Output Board Configuration
Jumper SLOT3/BIO-1 SLOT13/BIO-2 SLOT-23/BIO-3

X13 H L H
X14 L H H


C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.1.2.9 Communication Board
LAN Communication Board
[dw_LAN Communication Board, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 LAN Communication Board
Table 3-10 Jumper for the GPS Configuration
Jumper TTL RS485

J01 TTL RS4858
Table 3-11 Jumper Settings of the Terminating Resistors
Jumper 120ohm termination resistor no termination resistor

J02 120ohm NC9
8 Default Setting
9 Default Setting (no use of termination resistor)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
RS485 Serial Communication Board
[dw_RS485 Serial Communication Board, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-11 RS485 Serial Communication Board
Jumper TTL RS485

J03 TTL RS48510

J04 120ohm NC11
Interface Jumper 120ohm termination no termination resistor

resistor
Interface B J05 120ohm NC12
Interface C J06 120ohm NC13
10 Default Setting

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Optical Communication Board
[dw_Optical Communication Board, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Optical Communication Board

X3 120ohm NC14
Jumper TTL RS485

X4 TTL RS48515
3.1.2.10 Reassembly
To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:
• Carefully insert the boards into the case.
• First plug the plug connectors of the ribbon cable into the input/output boards I/O and then onto the
processor module CPU. Do not bend any connector pins! Do not use force!
• Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor module CPU and the front cover into
the socket of the front cover.
• Press the latches of the plug connectors together.

15 Default Setting

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
• Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws.
• Put the covers back on.
• Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing.
3.1.3 Installation
3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting

The device housing can be 1/3 and 1/2 19 inches with 4 securing holes.
• Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, to reveal the 4 elongated holes in the mounting
flange.
• Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with 4 screws. For dimensions refer to Section
4.29 Dimensions.
• Put the 4 covers back in place.
• Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack or cubicle using eight screws.
• Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the panel using at least
one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of
any other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at
least 2.5 mm2.
• Connections are realized via the plug or screw terminals on the rear side of the device according to the
circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for screw terminals or in case of direct connections, the screws
must be screwed in so far that the screw heads align with the terminal block before inserting the lugs
and wires. A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber in such a way that the screw thread
fits in the hole of the lug. The SIPROTEC System Description provides information regarding maximum
wire size, torque, bending radius and cable relief and must be observed.
[Panel Flush Mounting of 7SJ661/2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Panel Flush Mounting of 7SJ661/2 (Housing Size 1/3)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[Panel Flush Mounting of 7SJ663, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-14 Panel Flush Mounting of a 7SJ663 (Housing Size 1/2)
3.1.3.2 Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting

To install the device in a rack or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The ordering codes are stated in
Appendix A Ordering Information and Accessories.
For housing size 1/3 (Figure 3-15) and 1/2 (Figure 3-16) there are 4 covers and 4 holes to secure the device.
• Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack or cubicle with 4 screws.
• Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover. Thus the 4 respectively elongated holes in the
mounting flange are revealed and can be accessed.
• Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with 4 screws.
• Put the 4 covers back in place.
• Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack or cubicle using eight screws.
• Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the panel. Using at least
one M4 screw. The cross-section of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-
section but must be at least 2.5 mm2 / 0.098 in2.
• Connections are realized via the plug or screw terminals on the rear side of the device according to the
circuit diagram. When using forked lugs for screw terminals or in case of direct connections, the screws
must be screwed in so far that the screw heads align with the terminal block before inserting the lugs
and wires. A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber in such a way that the screw thread
fits in the hole of the lug. The SIPROTEC 4 System Description provides information regarding maximum
wire size, torque, bending radius and cable relief and must be observed.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[Install Device_Rack_Cubicle (Housing Size 1/3), 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Installing a Device in a Rack or Cubicle (Housing Size 1/3)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[Install Device_Rack_Cubicle (Housing Size 1/2), 1, en_US]
Figure 3-16 Installing a Device in a Rack or Cubicle (Housing Size 1/2)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.2 Checking Connections
3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Time Synchronization and Communication

Interfaces
Pin Assignments
The following figure illustrates the pin assignments of the communication interfaces and the time synchroni-
zation interface. You can find the position of the connections in the following figure.
[dw_communication interface, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Communication Interfaces
In the case of GPS Synchronization (RS485 or TTL) connection, the pins 7 and 8 of the RJ45 connector are
used. Pin 7 connects to plus, pin 8 connects to minus. The high-level voltage value of the GPS TTL interface is
5 V.
Temperature Detection Unit (RTD Box)

For more information regarding the RTD box, please refer to the enclosed device manual. Check the transmis-
sion parameters at the RTD box. In addition to the baud rate and the parity, the bus number is important, too.
Please observe that sensor input 1 (RTD1) of the RTD box is reserved for input of the ambient temperature or
coolant temperature of the overload protection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.2.2 Checking the System Connections
! WARNING
Warning of dangerous voltages
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial prop-
erty damage.
² Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures should perform the inspection steps.
! CAUTION
Take care when operating the device without a battery on a battery charger.
Non-observance of the following measures can lead to unusually high voltages and consequently,
the destruction of the device.
² Do not operate the device on a battery charger without a connected battery.
If undervoltage protection is configured and enabled in the device and if, at the same time, the current crite-
rion is disabled, the device picks up right after auxiliary voltage has been connected, since no measuring
voltage is available. To make the device configurable, pickup is to be stopped, i.e. the measuring voltage is
connected or voltage protection is blocked. This can be performed by operation.
Before the device is energized for the first time, it should be in the final operating environment for at least 2
hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humidity and to avoid condensation. Connections are checked
with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
Proceed as follows in order to check the system connections:
• Protective switches for the power supply and the measured voltages must be opened.
• Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the system and connec-
tion diagrams:
– Are the current transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the current transformer the same?
– Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct?
– Are the voltage transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct?
– Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformer correct?
– Is the polarity for current input Ι4 correct (if used)?
– Is the polarity for voltage input V4 correct (for example, for broken-delta winding or busbar voltage)?
• Check the functions of all test switches that are installed for the purposes of secondary testing and isola-
tion of the device. Of particular importance are “test switches” in current transformer circuits. Be sure
these switches short-circuit the current transformers when they are in the test mode.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
• The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. This may be performed
with secondary test equipment or other test equipment for checking continuity. Make sure that terminal
continuity is not wrongly simulated in reverse direction via current transformers or their short-circuiters.
– Remove the front panel of the device
– Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O board with the measured current inputs (on the front
side it is the right printed circuit board). Furthermore, remove the printed circuit board so that there
is no more contact with the plug-in terminal of the housing.
– At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current from
the CTs
– Firmly re-insert the I/O board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend any connector pins !
Do not use force !
– At the terminals of the device, again check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current
from the CTs.
– Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
• Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A for the
meter is appropriate.
• Switch on m.c.b. for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check the voltage level and, if applicable, the
polarity of the voltage at the device terminals or at the connection modules.
• The current input should correspond to the power input in neutral position of the device. The measured
steady state current should be insignificant. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the
charging current of capacitors.
• Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches.
• Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply connections.
• Apply voltage to the power supply.
• Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers.
• Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct.
• Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers and the power supply.
• Check the trip and close circuits to the power system circuit breakers.
• Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
• Check the signaling connections.
• Switch the mcb back on.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
! WARNING
Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device
erty damage.
² Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly familiar with all
warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps,
safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
² Before making any connections, the device must be grounded at the protective conductor terminal.
² Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current transformers,
voltage transformers, and test circuits.
² Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been
removed (capacitors can still be charged).
² After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before re-energizing
the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly established before the device is
re-energized.
² The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 4) must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor
during commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are
connected and that the trip and close circuits to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are discon-
nected from the device.
! DANGER
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
² Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are
opened.
Switching operations have to be carried out during commissioning. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is
that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not intended for opera-
tional checks.
! WARNING
Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests
erty damage.
² Primary tests are only allowed to be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations
(switching, grounding, etc.).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block
Activation and Deactivation

If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information
that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible with some of the protocols available (see Table
“Protocol- dependent functions” in the Appendix E.7 Protocol-dependent Functions).
If the test mode is switched on, the messages sent by a SIPROTEC 4 device to the main system has an addi-
tional test bit. This bit allows the messages to be recognized as resulting from testing and not from an actual
fault or power system event. Furthermore, it can be determined by activating the transmission block that no
annunciations at all are transmitted via the system interface during test mode.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes in detail how to activate and deactivate test mode and blocked
data transmission. Note that when DIGSI is being used, the program must be in the online operating mode for
the test features to be used.
3.3.2 Testing the System (SCADA) Interface
Prefacing Remarks
If the device features a system interface and uses it to communicate with the control center, the DIGSI device
operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted correctly. This test option should however definitely
not be used while the device is in service on a live system.
! DANGER
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the
test function
property damage.
² Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only
during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the test function
during “real” operation by transmitting or receiving messages via the system interface.
NOTE
i After termination of the test mode the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If
required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test.
The interface test is carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
• Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.
• Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
• Double click Generate Annunciations shown in the list view. The dialog box Generate Annunciations
opens (refer to the following figure).
Structure of the Test Dialog Box

In the column Indication the display texts of all indications are displayed which were allocated to the system
interface in the matrix. In the column SETPOINT Status the user has to define the value for the messages to
be tested. Depending on annunciation type, several input fields are offered (e.g. message ON / message OFF).
By clicking on one of the fields you can select the desired value from the pull-down menu.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
[sc_schnittstelle-testen, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-18 System interface test with the Dialog Box: Generation Annunciations - Example
Changing the Operating State

When clicking one of the buttons in the column Action for the first time, you will be prompted for the pass-
word no. 6 (for hardware test menus). After correct entry of the password, individual annunciations can be
initiated. To do so, click on the button Send on the corresponding line. The corresponding message is issued
and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC 4 device or from the substation control system.
As long as the window is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message Direction

For all information that is transmitted to the central station, test the options in the list which appears in
SETPOINT Status:
• Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any danger (see above and
refer to DANGER!)
• Click on Send in the function to be tested and check whether the transmitted information reaches the
central station and shows the desired reaction. Data which are normally linked via binary inputs (first
character “>”) are likewise indicated to the central power system with this procedure. The function of the
binary inputs itself is tested separately.
Exiting the Test Mode

To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service while the start-up routine
is executed. The dialog box closes.
Test in Command Direction

The information transmitted in command direction must be indicated by the central station. Check whether
the reaction is correct.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.3 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
Prefacing Remarks
The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in
DIGSI. During commissioning this feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment
(operational checks). This test option should however definitely not be used while the device is in service on a
live system.
! DANGER
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the
test function
property damage.
² Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only
during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the test function
during real operation by transmitting or receiving messages via the system interface.
NOTE
i After finishing the hardware test, the device will make an initial startup. Thereby, all annunciation buffers
are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test.
The hardware test can be carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
• Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.
• Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
• Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name opens (see the
following figure).
Structure of the Test Dialog Box

The dialog box is classified into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output relays, and LED for lightemit-
ting diodes. On the left of each of these groups is an accordingly labeled button. By double-clicking a button,
information regarding the associated group can be shown or hidden.
In the column Status the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. Indication is made
by symbols. The physical actual states of the binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed
switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Scheduled. The display is made in plain text.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware
components.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
[ein-ausgabe-testen-110402-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 Test of the binary inputs and outputs — example
Changing the Operating State

To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated button in the Scheduled column.
Password (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is
allowed. After entry of the correct password a status change will be executed. Further status changes remain
possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Output Relays

Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between the output relay and the
plant, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of
state for any one of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device func-
tions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means, that for example a TRIP command
coming from a protection function or a control command from the operator panel to an output relay cannot
be executed.
Proceed as follows in order to check the output relay:
• Ensure that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see above under
DANGER!).
• Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled-cell in the dialog box.
• Finish the testing (see margin title below “Exiting the Test Mode”), so that during further testings no
unwanted switchings are initiated.
Test of the Binary Inputs

To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs the condition in the plant which initiates the binary
input must be generated and the response of the device checked.
To do so, the dialog box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the physical state of the binary inputs.
The password is not yet required.
Proceed as follows in order to check the binary inputs:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
• Activate each of function in the system which causes a binary input to pick up.
• Check the reaction in the Status column of the dialog box. To do this, the dialog box must be updated.
The options may be found below under the margin heading “Updating the Display”.
• Finish the testing (see margin heading below “Exiting the Test Mode”).
If ,however, the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is
possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of
any binary input is triggered and the password No. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from
the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function.
Test of the LEDs

The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as the first state
change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated from the internal device functionality and can
only be controlled via the hardware test function. This means e.g. that no LED is illuminated anymore by a
protection function or by pressing the LED reset button.
Updating the Display

During the opening of the dialog box, Hardware Test the operating states of the hardware components which
are current at this time are read in and displayed.
An update is made:
• for each hardware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed,
• for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
• for all hardware components with cyclical updating (cycle time is 20 seconds) if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Exiting the Test Mode

To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes unavailable for a brief
start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions
determined by the plant settings.
3.3.4 Tests for Breaker Failure Protection
General
If the device provides a breaker failure protection and if this is used, the integration of this protection function
in the system must be tested under practical conditions.
Due to the variety of application options and the available system configurations, it is not possible to make a
detailed description of the necessary tests. It is important to observe local conditions and protection and
system drawings.
Before starting the circuit breaker tests it is recommended to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at
both ends, i.e. line isolators and busbar isolators should be open so that the breaker can be operated without
risk.
! CAUTION
Also for tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder a trip command to the surrounding circuit breakers
can be issued for the busbar.
Non–observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage.
² Therefore, primarily it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands to the adjacent (busbar)
breakers, e.g. by interrupting the corresponding pickup voltages.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
Before the breaker is finally closed for normal operation, the trip command of the feeder protection routed to
the circuit breaker must be disconnected so that the trip command can only be initiated by the breaker failure
protection.
Although the following lists do not claim to be complete, they may also contain points which are to be ignored
in the current application.
Auxiliary Contacts of the CB

The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure protection system in case
they have been connected to the device. Make sure the correct assignment has been checked.
External Initiation Conditions

If the breaker failure protection can be started by external protection devices, the external start conditions
must be checked.
In order for the breaker failure protection to be started, a current must flow at least via the monitored phase.
This may be a secondary injected current.
• Start by trip command of the external protection: binary input functions >50BF ext SRC (FNo 1431)
(in spontaneous or fault annunciations).
• After every start, the message 50BF ext Pickup (FNo 1457) must appear in the spontaneous or fault
annunciations.
• After time expiration TRIP-Timer (address 7005) tripping command of the breaker failure protection.
Switch off test current.
If start is possible without current flow:
• Closing the circuit breaker to be monitored to both sides with the disconnector switches open.
• Start by trip command of the external protection: Binary input functions >50BF ext SRC (FNo 1431) (in
spontaneous or fault annunciations).
• After every start, the message 50BF ext Pickup (FNo 1457) must appear in the spontaneous or fault
annunciations.
• After time expiration TRIP-Timer (address 7005) tripping command of the breaker failure protection.
Open the circuit breaker again.
Busbar Tripping
For testing the distribution of the trip commands in the substation in the case of breaker failures it is impor-
tant to check that the trip commands to the adjacent circuit breakers are correct.
The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of
the fault current should the local breaker fail. These are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed
the busbar or busbar section to which the feeder with the fault is connected.
A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the adjacent circuit breakers largely
depends on the system topology.
In particular with multiple busbars, the trip distribution logic for the adjacent circuit breakers must be checked.
Here it should be checked for every busbar section that all circuit breakers which are connected to the same
busbar section as the feeder circuit breaker under observation are tripped, and no other breakers.
Termination
All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, e.g. especially switching states, interrupted trip
commands, changes to setting values or individually switched off protection functions.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.5 Testing User-Defined Functions
CFC Logic
The device has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic.
Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked.
Of course, general test procedures cannot be given. Configuration of these functions and the target conditions
must be actually known beforehand and tested. Possible interlocking conditions of switching devices (circuit
breakers, disconnectors, earth switch) are of particular importance. They must be considered and tested.
3.3.6 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing
≥ 10 % of Load Current
The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary quantities. Secondary load
current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device is necessary. The line is energized and will remain
in this state during the measurements.
With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the measured-values supervision elements in the
device should pick up. If an element detects a problem, the causes which provoked it may be viewed in the
Event Log. If current or voltage summation errors occur, then check the matching factors.
Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are asymmetrical conditions in
the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal service conditions, the corresponding monitoring
functions should be made less sensitive.
Current and Voltage Values

Currents and voltages can be seen in the display field on the front of the device or the operator interface via a
PC. They can be compared to the quantities measured by an independent source, as primary and secondary
quantities.
If the measured values are not plausible, the connection must be checked and corrected after the line has
been isolated and the current transformer circuits have been short-circuited. The measurements must then be
repeated.
Phase Rotation
The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a clockwise phase rotation. If
the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must have been considered when the power system data
was set (address 209 PHASE SEQ.). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm Fail Ph. Seq. (FNo 171)
is generated. The measured value phase allocation must be checked and corrected, if required, after the line
has been isolated and current transformers have been short-circuited. The measurement must then be
repeated.
Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker (VT mcb)

The VT mcb of the feeder (if used) must be opened. The measured voltages in the operational measured
values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of no consequence).
Check in the spontaneous annunciations that the VT mcb trip was entered (annunciation >FAIL:FEEDER VT
“ON” in the spontaneous annunciations). Beforehand it has to be assured that the position of the VT mcb is
connected to the device via a binary input.
Close the VT mcb again: The above messages appear under the spontaneous messages as “OFF”, i.e.
>FAIL:FEEDER VT “OFF”.
If one of the events does not appear, the connection and allocation of these signals must be checked.
If the ON-state and OFF–state are swapped, the contact type (H–active or L–active) must be checked and
remedied.
If a busbar voltage is used for input V4 (for voltage protection or synchrocheck) and the assigned VT mcb is
connected to the device, the following function must also be checked:

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
If the VT mcb is open the annunciation >FAIL: BUS VT “ON” appears, if it is closed the annunciation
>FAIL: BUS VT “OFF” is displayed.
Switch off the protected power line.
3.3.7 Test for High Impedance Protection
Polarity of Transformers
When the device is used for high-impedance protection, the current at ΙN or ΙNs is equivalent to the fault
current in the protected object. It is essential in this case that all current transformers feeding the resistor
whose current is measured at ΙN(S) have the same polarity. The test currents used for this are through currents.
Each CT must be included in a measurement. The current at ΙN(S) may never exceed half the pickup value of the
single-phase time overcurrent protection.
3.3.8 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme
(only if used)
Testing reverse interlocking is available if at least one of the binary inputs available is configured for this
purpose (e.g. presetting of binary input BI1 >BLOCK 50-2 and >BLOCK 50N-2 to open circuit system). Tests
can be performed with phase currents or ground current. For ground current the corresponding ground
current setting values are provided.
Please note that the blocking function can either be configured for the pickup current connected (open circuit
system) or the pickup current missing (closed circuit system). For open circuit system the following tests are to
be proceeded:
The feeder protection relays of all associated feeders must be in operation. At the beginning no auxiliary
voltage is fed to the reverse interlocking system.
A test current higher than the pickup values of 50-2 PICKUP and 50-1 PICKUP or 51 PICKUP is set. As a
result of the missing blocking signal, the protection function trips after (short) time delay 50-2 DELAY.
! CAUTION
Tests with currents that exceed more than 4 times the nominal device current
cause an overload of the input circuits.
² Perform test only for a short time (see Technical Data, Section 4.1 General Device Data). Afterwards
the device has to cool off !
The auxiliary voltage for reverse interlocking is now switched to the line. The precedent test is repeated, the
result will be the same.
Subsequently, at each of the protection devices of the feeders, a pickup is simulated. Meanwhile, another fault
is simulated for the protection function of the infeed, as described before. Tripping is performed within time
50-1 DELAY (longer time period) (with definite time overcurrent protection) or according to characteristic
(with inverse time overcurrent protection).
These tests also check the proper functioning of the wiring for reverse interlocking.
3.3.9 Direction Check with Load Current
≥ 10 % of Load Current
The correct connection of the current and voltage transformers is tested via the protected line using the load
current. For this purpose, connect the line. The load current the line carries must be at least 0.1 · ΙNom. The
load current should be in-phase or lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load). The direction of

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
the load current must be known. If there is any doubt, network or ring loops should be opened. The line
remains energized during the test.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially the correlation of the
measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is checked. In this case the normal situation is
assumed whereby the forward direction (measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line
P positive, if active power flows into the line,
P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line,
Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.
[lastscheinleistung-110402-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 Apparent Load Power
All signs of powers may be inverted deliberately. Check whether polarity is inverted in address 1108 P,Q
sign in the P.System Data 2. In that case the signs for active and reactive power are inverse as well.
The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured values have the correct
polarity. If both the active power and the reactive power have the wrong sign and 1108 P,Q sign is set to
not reversed, the polarity according to address 201 CT Starpoint must be checked and corrected.
However, power measurement itself is not able to detect all connection errors. For this reason, directional
messages should be generated by means of the directional overcurrent protection. Therefore, pickup thresh-
olds must be reduced so that the available load current causes a continuous pickup of the element. The direc-
tion reported in the messages, such as Phase A forward or Phase A reverse must correspond to the
actual power flow. Be careful that the “Forward” direction of the protective element is in the direction of the
line (or object to be protected). This is not necessarily identical with the direction of the normal the power
flow. For all three phases, the directional messages to the power flow must be reported properly.
If all directions differ from each other, individual phases in current or voltage transformer connections are
interchanged, not connected properly or phase assignment is incorrect. After isolation of the line and short-
circuiting of the current transformers the connections must be checked and corrected. The measurements
must then be repeated.
Finally, switch off the protected power line.
NOTE
i Important! Make sure that pickup values that have been changed for testing are set back to the valid
settings!
3.3.10 Polarity Check for Voltage Input V4
Depending on the application of the voltage measuring input V4, a polarity check may be necessary. If no
measuring voltage is connected to this input, this subsection is irrelevant.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
If input V4 is used for the measurement of the displacement voltage Ven (Power System Data 1 Address 213
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd or Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn), the polarity is checked together with the
current measurement Ι4 (see further down).
If the input V4 is used for measuring a voltage for synchronism check (Power System Data 1, Address 213 VT
Connect. 3ph = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy), the following is to be observed:
• The single-phase voltage V2 needed for synchronization is to be connected to input V4.
• The polarity must be checked as follows using the synchronism check function:
The device must be equipped with the synchronism and voltage check which is to be configured in address
161 SYNC Function.
Voltage V2 needed for synchronization is to be set correctly in address 6123 CONNECTIONof V2.
If a transformer is located between the measuring points of reference voltage V1 and the voltage to be
synchronized V2, its phase rotation must be taken into consideration. For this purpose an angle corresponding
to the transformer vector group is entered in address 6122 ANGLE ADJUSTM.. The angle is set in direction
busbar viewed from the feeder. An example is shown in Subsection 2.22.1 SYNC Function group 1.
If necessary different transformation ratios of the transformers on the busbar and the feeder may have to be
considered under address Balancing V1/V2.
The synchronism and voltage check must be switched under address 6101 Synchronizingx = ON.
A further aid for checking in the connection are the messages 170.2090 25 V2>V1, 170.2091 25 V2<V1,
170.2094 25 α2>α1 and 170.2095 25 α2<α1 in the spontaneous messages.
• Circuit breaker is open. The feeder is isolated (zero voltage). The VTmcb's of both voltage transformer
circuits must be closed.
• For the synchrocheck the program Direct CO is set to YES (address 6110); the other programs
(addresses 6107 to 6109) are set to NO.
• Via binary input (170.0043 >25 Sync req.) initiate the measuring request. The synchronization check
must release closing (message 170.0049 25 CloseRelease). If not, check all relevant parameters
again (synchrocheck configured and enabled correctly, see Sections 2.1.1 Functional Scope and
2.22.1 SYNC Function group 1).
• Set address 6110 Direct CO to NO.
• Then the circuit breaker is closed while the line isolator is open (see Figure 3-21). Both voltage trans-
formers therefore measure the same voltage.
• For the synchrocheck the program SYNC-Function Group 1 is set to SYNCHROCHECK (address 0161).
• Via binary input (170.0043 >25 Sync req.) initiate the measuring request. The synchronism check
must release closing (message 25 CloseRelease 170.0049).
• If not, first check whether one of the aforesaid messages 170.2090 25 V2>V1 or 170.2091 25 V2<V1
or 170.2094 25 α2>α1 or 170.2095 25 α2<α1 is available in the spontaneous messages.
Messages 25 V2>V1 or 25 V2<V1 indicate that the magnitude matching is incorrect. Check address
6121 Balancing V1/V2 and recalculate the adaptation factor.
The messages 25 α2>α1 or 25 α2<α1 indicate that the phase relation of the busbar voltage does not
match the setting under address CONNECTIONof V2 (see Section 2.22.1 SYNC Function group 1). When
measuring via a transformer, address 6122 ANGLE ADJUSTM. must also be checked. This must adapt
the vector group. If these are correct, there is probably a reverse polarity of the voltage transformer
terminals V1.
• For the synchrocheck the program SYNC V1>V2< is set to YES (address 6108) and SYNC Function
Group 1 is set to SYNCHROCHECK (address 161).
• Open the VT mcb of the busbar voltage.
• Via binary input (170.0043 >25 Sync req.) initiate the measuring request. There is no close release. If
there is, the VT mcb for the busbar voltage is not allocated. Check whether this is the required state,
alternatively check the binary input >FAIL: BUS VT (6510).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
• Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage again.
• Open the circuit breaker.
• For the synchrocheck the program SYNC V1<V2> is set to YES (address 6107) and SYNC V1>V2< is set
to NO (address 6108).
• Via binary input (170.0043 >25 Sync req.) initiate the measuring request. The synchronism check
must release closing (message 25 CloseRelease 170.0049). Otherwise check all voltage connections
and the corresponding parameters again carefully as described in Section 2.22.1 SYNC Function group 1.
• Open the VT mcb of the feeder voltage.
• Via binary input (170.0043 >25 Sync req.) initiate the measuring request. No close release is given.
• Close the VT mcb of the feeder voltage again.

Addresses 6107 to 6110 must be restored as they were changed for the test. If the routing of the LEDs or
signal relays was changed for the test, this must also be restored.
[messspannungenzursynchronkontrolle-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 Measuring voltages for the synchro-check
3.3.11 Ground Fault Check
Ungrounded Systems
The ground fault check is only necessary if the device is connected to an isolated or resonant-grounded system
and the ground fault detection is applied. The device must thus have been preset during configuration of the
device functions to Sens. Gnd Fault (address 131) not equal to Disabled. Furthermore, the direction
characteristic (S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch, address 130) must be set to cos φ / sin φ.
If none of this is the case, this section is not relevant.
The primary check serves to find out the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the determination
of the ground fault direction.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
! DANGER
Energized equipment of the power system ! Capacitive coupled voltages at disconnected equipment of the
power system !
property damage.
² Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and grounded equipment of the
power system !
Using the primary ground fault method a most reliable test result is guaranteed. Therefore please proceed as
follows:
• Isolate the line and ground it on both ends. During the whole testing procedure the line must be open at
the remote end.
• Make a test connection between a single phase and ground. On overhead lines it can be connected
anywhere, however, it must be located behind the current transformers (looking from the busbar of the
feeder to be checked). Cables are grounded on the remote end (sealing end).
• Remove the protective grounding of the line.
• Connect a circuit breaker to the line end that is to be tested.
• Check the direction indication (LED if allocated)
• The faulty phase (FNo 1272 for A or 1273 for B or 1274 for C) and the direction of the line, i.e. SensGnd
Forward (FNo 1276) must be indicated in the ground fault protocol.
• The active and reactive components of the ground current are also indicated (INs Reac, FNo. 702). The
reactive current INs Real, FNo. 701) is the most relevant for isolated systems. If the display shows the
message SensGnd Reverse (FNo. 1277), either the current or voltage transformer terminals are
swapped in the neutral path. If message SensGnd undef. (FNo 1278) appears, the ground current may
be too low.
• Deenergize and ground the line.

The test is then finished.
3.3.12 Polarity Check for Current Input ΙN
General
If the standard current wiring connection of the device is used with current input IN connected in the neutral
point of the set of current transformers (refer also to the connection circuit diagram in the Appendix
C Connection Examples), then the correct polarity of the ground current path usually occurs automatically.
If, however, current ΙN is derived from a separate summation CT (see e.g. a connection circuit diagram in the
Appendix C Connection Examples), an additional direction check with this current is necessary.
If the device is provided with the sensitive current input for IN and it is connected to in an isolated or resonant-
grounded system, the polarity check for ΙN was already carried out with the ground fault check according to
the previous section. Then this section can be ignored.
Otherwise the test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be noted that
during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with situations that may occur in practice, the non-
symmetry of measured values may cause the measured value monitoring to pick up. This must therefore be
ignored during such tests.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
! DANGER
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers
property damage.
² Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are
opened.
Directional Testing for Grounded Systems

The check can either be carried out with function “directional ground fault protection” (address 116) or with
the function “ground fault detection” (address 131), which can be operated as additional fault protection.
In the following the check is described using the “directional ground fault protection” function (address 116)
as an example.
To generate a displacement voltage, the e–n winding of one phase in the voltage transformer set (e.g. A) is
bypassed (see Figure 3-22). If no connection on the e–n windings of the voltage transformer is provided, the
corresponding phase is disconnected on the secondary side (refer to Figure 3-23). Only the current of the
transformer which is not provided with voltage in its voltage path is fed into the current path. If the line carries
resistive- inductive load, the protection is in principle subjected to the same conditions that exist during a
ground fault in line direction.
The directional ground fault protection must be configured to enabled and activated (address 116 or 131). Its
pickup threshold must be below the load current of the line; if necessary the pickup threshold must be
reduced. The parameters that have been changed, must be noted.
After switching the line on and off again, the direction indication must be checked: In the fault log the
messages 67N picked up and Ground forward must at least be present. If the directional pickup is not
present, either the ground current connection or the displacement voltage connection is incorrect. If the
wrong direction is indicated, either the direction of load flow is from the line toward the busbar or the ground
current path has a swapped polarity. In the latter case, the connection must be rectified after the line has been
isolated and the current transformers short-circuited.
If the pickup message is missing, the measured ground (residual) current or the displacement voltage
emerged may be too small. This can be checked via operational measured values.
Important! If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their original state after
completion of the test !

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
[polaritaetspruefung-ie-mituen-gemessen, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Polarity testing for IN, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen-connec-
tion (VTs with broken delta connection -- e-n winding)
[polaritaetspruefung-ie-mituen-berechnet-211002-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-23 Polarity testing for IN, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen-connec-
tion (VTs Wye-connected)
3.3.13 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD‑Box
After the termination of the RS485 port and the setting of the bus address have been verified according to
Section 3.2 Checking Connections, the measured temperature values and thresholds can be checked.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
If temperature sensors are used with 2-phase connection you must first determine the line resistance for the
temperature detector being short-circuited. Select mode 2-conductor connection at the RTD-Box and enter the
resistance value you have determined for the corresponding sensor.
When using the preset 3-phase connection for the temperature detectors no further entry must be made.
For checking the measured temperature values, the temperature detectors are replaced by adjustable resistors
(e.g. precision resistance decade) and the correct assignment of the resistance value and the displayed
temperature for 2 or 3 temperature values from the following table are verified.
Table 3-17 Assignment of the resistance value and the temperature of the sensors
Temperature in °C Temperature in °F Ni 100 DIN 43760 Ni 120 DIN 34760 Pt 100 IEC 60751
–50 –58 74,255 89,106 80,3062819
–40 –40 79,1311726 94,9574071 84,270652
–30 –22 84,1457706 100,974925 88,2216568
–20 –4 89,2964487 107,155738 92,1598984
–10 14 94,581528 113,497834 96,085879
0 32 100 120 100
10 50 105,551528 126,661834 103,902525
20 68 111,236449 133,483738 107,7935
30 86 117,055771 140,466925 111,672925
40 104 123,011173 147,613407 115,5408
50 122 129,105 154,926 119,397125
60 140 135,340259 162,408311 123,2419
70 158 141,720613 170,064735 127,075125
80 176 148,250369 177,900442 130,8968
90 194 154,934473 185,921368 134,706925
100 212 161,7785 194,1342 138,5055
110 230 168,788637 202,546364 142,292525
120 248 175,971673 211,166007 146,068
130 266 183,334982 220,001979 149,831925
140 284 190,88651 229,063812 153,5843
150 302 198,63475 238,3617 157,325125
160 320 206,58873 247,906476 161,0544
170 338 214,757989 257,709587 164,772125
180 356 223,152552 267,783063 168,4783
190 374 231,782912 278,139495 172,172925
200 392 240,66 288,792 175,856
210 410 249,79516 299,754192 179,527525
220 428 259,200121 311,040145 183,1875
230 446 268,886968 322,664362 186,835925
240 464 278,868111 334,641733 190,4728
250 482 289,15625 346,9875 194,098125
Temperature thresholds that are configured in the protection device can be checked by slowly approaching
the resistance value.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.14 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices
Control by Local Command

If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test already described, all
configured switching devices must be switched on and off from the device via the integrated control element.
The feedback information of the circuit breaker position injected via binary inputs is read out at the device and
compared with the actual breaker position.
For devices with graphic display this is easy to do with the control display.
The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The switching authority must be
set according to the command source used. With the switch mode it is possible to select between interlocked
and non-interlocked switching. Note that non-interlocked switching constitutes a safety risk.
Control by Protective Functions

For OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker please take into consideration that if the internal or external
automatic reclosure function is used a TRIP-CLOSE test cycle is initiated.
! DANGER
A test cycle successfully started by the automatic reclosure function can lead to the closing of the
circuit breaker !
Non-observance of the following statement will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
² Be fully aware that OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker can result in a trip-close-trip event of
the circuit breaker by an external reclosing device.
Control from a Remote Control Center

If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system interface, the corresponding switching tests
may also be checked from the substation. Please also take into consideration that the switching authority is
set in correspondence with the source of commands used.
3.3.15 Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests
General
In order to be able to test the stability of the protection during switchon procedures also, switchon trials can
also be carried out at the end. Oscillographic records obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of
the protection.
Requirements
To be able to generate oscillographic recordings, parameter Osc Fault Rec. must be configured to
Enabled in the Functional Scope. Apart from the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protec-
tion function, the 7SJ66 also has the capability of initiating a measured value recording via the operator
program DIGSI, the serial interface or binary input. For the latter, the information >Trig.Wave.Cap. must
be allocated to a binary input. Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs, for instance, via the
binary input when the protection object is energized.
Those that are externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup) are processed by the device
as a normal oscillographic record. For each oscillographic record a fault record is created which is given its
individual number to ensure that assignment can be made properly. However, these recordings are not
displayed in the fault indication buffer, as they are not fault events.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.3 Commissioning
Triggering Oscillographic Recording

To trigger test measurement recording with DIGSI, click on Test in the left part of the window. Double click
the entry Test Wave Form in the list of the window.
[digsi-fenster-testmessschrieb-starten-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-24 Start oscillographic recording with DIGSI
Oscillographic recording is started immediately. During recording, a report is given in the left part of the status
bar. Bar segments additionally indicate the progress of the procedure.
The SIGRA or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device

Firmly tighten all screws. Tighten all terminal screws, including those that are not used.
! CAUTION
Inadmissable Tightening Torques
Non–observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage.
² The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be
damaged!
The settings values should be checked again, if they were changed during the tests. Check if protection,
control and auxiliary functions to be found with the configuration parameters are set correctly (Section
2.1.1 Functional Scope, Functional Scope). All desired elements and functions must be set ON. Keep a copy of
all settings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set or synchronize the clock if the element is not automati-
cally synchronized. For assistance, refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
The annunciation buffers are deleted under MAIN MENU → Annunciations → Set/Reset, so that future infor-
mation will only apply for actual events and states (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description). The counters in
the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing (see also SIPROTEC
4 System Description).
Reset the counters of the operational measured values (e.g. operation counter, if available) under MAIN
MENU → Measured Value → Reset (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
Press the ESC key (several times if necessary) to return to the default display. The default display appears in
the display box (e.g. the display of operational measured values).
Clear the LEDs on the front panel of the device by pressing the LED key, so that they show only real events and
states in the future. In this context, also output relays probably memorized are reset. Pressing the LED key also
serves as a test for the LEDs on the front panel because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any
LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must light up, whereas the red “ERROR” must not light up.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
4 Technical Data
This chapter provides the technical data of the device SIPROTEC 7SJ66 and its individual functions, including
the limit values that may not be exceeded under any circumstances. The electrical and functional data for the
maximum functional scope are followed by the mechanical specifications with dimensioned drawings.
4.1 General Device Data 438
4.2 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection 446
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection 448
4.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection 459
4.5 Inrush Restraint 461
4.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup 462
4.7 Single-phase Overcurrent Protection 463
4.8 Voltage Protection 464
4.9 Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time characteristic) 466
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics) 467
4.11 Motor Starting Time Supervision 473
4.12 Motor Restart Inhibit 474
4.13 Load Jam Protection 475
4.14 Frequency Protection 476
4.15 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q) 477
4.17 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive) 481
4.18 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 490
4.19 Directional intermittent ground fault protection 491
4.20 Automatic Reclosing 492
4.21 Fault Locator 493
4.22 Breaker Failure Protection 494
4.23 Flexible Protection Functions 495
4.24 Synchronization Function 498
4.25 RTD Box for Temperature Detection 500
4.26 User-defined Functions (CFC) 501
4.27 Additional Functions 507
4.28 Switching Device Control 512
4.29 Dimensions 513

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
4.1.1 Analog Inputs
Current Inputs
Nominal Frequency fNom 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)

Nominal Current ΙNom 1 A or 5 A
Ground Current, Sensitive ΙNs ≤ linear range 1.6 A16
Burden per Phase and Ground Path
- at ΙNom = 1 A Approx. 0.02 VA
- at ΙNom = 5 A Approx. 0.40 VA
- for sensitive ground fault detection at 1.6 A Approx. 0.10 VA
Load capacity current path
100 In for 1 s
- Thermal (rms)
4 In continuous
Current overload capability for high-sensitivity input ΙNs 16
- Thermal (rms) 150 A for 1 s
6 A continuous
- Dynamic (peak value)
Voltage Inputs
Nominal Voltage 100 V to 230 V (adjustable)

Measuring Range 0 V to 170 V
Burden at 100 V Approx. 0.15 VA
AC Voltage Input Overload Capacity
- Thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
4.1.2 Auxiliary Voltage
Direct Voltage
Power supply via integrated converter

Rated auxiliary voltage DC VAux DC 110 V/DC 220 V DC 24 V/DC 48 V
Permissible Voltage Ranges DC 88 V to DC 250 V DC 19 V to DC 58 V
AC Ripple Voltage, 15 % of the auxiliary voltage
Peak to Peak, IEC 60255-11
Power Input Quiescent Energized

7SJ661 Approx. 5 W Approx. 9 W
7SJ662 Approx. 5 W Approx. 9 W
7SJ663 Approx. 7 W Approx. 12.5 W
Bridging time for failure/short- ≥ 50 ms at V ≥ DC 110 V
circuit, IEC 60255-11 (in not ener- ≥ 20 ms at V ≥ DC 24 V
gized operation)
16 only in models with input for sensitive ground fault detection (see ordering data in Appendix)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Alternating Voltage
Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter

Rated auxiliary voltage AC VAux AC 115 V AC 230 V
Permissible Voltage Ranges AC 92 V to 132 V AC 184 V to 265 V
Power input (at AC 115 V/ 230 V) Quiescent Energized

7SJ661 Approx. 5 VA Approx. 11 VA
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs
Variant Number
7SJ661 16 (configurable)
Current consumption, picked approx. 1.4 mA
up
(independent of the operating
voltage)
Pickup time approx. 1 ms
Secured switching threshold adjustable with jumpers
For nominal voltages DC 110 V/DC 220 V DC 24 V/DC 48 V
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V DC 58 V
Output Relays
Output relay for commands/annunciations, alarm relay

Number and Information According to the order variant (allocatable)
Order Variant NO contact NO / NC selectable Life contact
7SJ661 6 1 1 (NC contact)
7SJ662 8 2 1 (NC contact)
7SJ663 23 2 1 (NO/NC selectable)
Switching Capability MAKE 1000 W/VA at L/R ≤ 40 ms
Switching Capability BRAKE 30 W/VA
at L/R ≤ 40 ms
Switching Voltage ≤ DC 250 V / AC 250 V
Admissible current per 5A
contact (continuous)
Admissible current per 30 A for 0.5 s (NO contact)
contact (close and hold)
Total current on common 5 A continuous, 30 A for 0.5 s
path

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces
User Interface
Connection Front side, USB port for connecting a personal computer

(PELV)
Operation With DIGSI
Transmission speed Min. 4800 Bd, max. 115 200 Bd;
Factory setting: 115 200 Baud; Parity: 8E1
Bridgeable distance 15 m
Service/Modem Interface
Connection Isolated interface for data transmis-

sion
Operation With DIGSI
Factory setting: 38 400 Baud
RS485 Connection for flush-mounted Rear panel, mounting location "C",
casing RJ45 connector
Connection for surface-mounted At the housing-mounted case on
casing the case bottom;
Shielded data cable
Test voltage 500 VAC
RS485 Maximum distance of transmission 3280 feet (1000 m)
System Interface
IEC 60870-5-103 RS485 Isolated interface for data transmission to a master terminal
Connection for flush-mounted Rear panel, mounting location "B"
Factory setting 9600 Bd
Maximum distance of transmission max. 0.62 miles (1 km)
Modbus RS485 Connection for flush-mounted Rear panel, mounting location "B"
Transmission speed Up to 19 200 Bd
Maximum distance of transmission Max. 0.62 miles (1 km)
Ethernet electrical for DIGSI Connection for flush-mounted Rear panel, mounting location "B"
IEC 61850 casing 2 x RJ45 socket contact
100 BaseT acc. to IEEE 802.3
Test voltage (reg. socket) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed 100 Mbit/s
Bridgeable distance 65.62 feet (20 m)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Ethernet optical for DIGSI Connection for flush-mounted Rear panel, mounting location "B"
IEC 61850 casing LC-interface
100 BaseT acc. to IEEE 802.3
Transmission speed 100 Mbit/s
Optical wavelength 1300 nm
Bridgeable distance Max. 0.93 miles (1.5 km)
Time Synchronization Interface
Time synchronization DCF77 / IRIG B Signal

(Telegram format IRIG-B000)
Connection for flush-mounting Rear panel, mounting location “A”;
housing RJ45 connector
Signal rated voltages Selectable 5 V, 12 V, or 24 V
Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Signal Levels and Burdens

Nominal Signal Voltage
5V 12 V 24 V
VIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V
VILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI 890 Ω at VI = 4 V 1930 Ω at VI = 8.7 V 3780 Ω at VI = 17 V
640 Ω at VI = 6 V 1700 Ω at VI = 15.8 V 3560 Ω at VI = 31 V
4.1.5 Electrical Tests
Regulations
Standards: IEC 60255 (product standards)

ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2
DIN 57435 Part 303
for more standards see also individual functions
Insulation Test
Standards: IEC 60255-27

High voltage test (routine test) All circuits except 2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz
Communication Interface and Time Synchroniza-
tion Interfaces
High voltage test (routine test). 3.5 kV DC
High voltage test (routine test). Only Isolated 500 V (rms), 50 Hz
Communication and Time Synchronization Inter-
faces
Impulse voltage test (type test). All Circuits Except 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
Communication and Time Synchronization Inter- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 1 s
faces, Class III
High voltage test for reinforced insulation. All 3.25 kV (rms), 50 Hz
circuits except Communication and Time Synchro-
nization Interfaces

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests)
Standards: IEC 60255-26, (product standards)

Damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2.5 kV (Peak); 100 kHz/1 MHz; τ = 15 μs;
IEC 61000-4-18, Level III 40/400 Burst/s; Burst duration 2 s; Ri = 200
Ω
Electrostatic discharge test, 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge;
IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV Test duration 1 min; both polarities; 150
pF; Ri = 330 Ω
Radiated RF electromagnetic field immunity test 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 1000 MHz; 1.4 GHz - 2.7
IEC 61000-4-3, Level III GHz; , including spot frequency test at 80
MHz/160 MHz/380 MHz/450 MHz/900 MHz/
1.85 GHz/2.15 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromag- 35 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequency 200
netic interference from transceivers Hz; duty cycle of 50 %; 35 V/m; 80 MHz to
ANSI/IEEE C 37.90.2 1000 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Fast transient disturbance / burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms;
IEC 61000-4-4, Level IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; Ri =
50 Ω; test duration 1 min
SURGE immunity test Impulse: 1.2/50 μs
IEC 61000-4-5 Level III
Auxiliary voltage port Common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 μF
Diff. mode:1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 μF
Measuring inputs, binary inputs and Common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
relay outputs Diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by RF fields 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
IEC 61000-4-6, Level III
Power system frequency magnetic field 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
IEC 61000-4-8, Level IV
Oscillatory surge withstand capability 2.5 (peak value); 1 MHz; damped oscilla-
ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.1 tion; 400 Burst/s; Burst Duration 2 s; Ri =
200 Ω
Ripple on d.c. input power port immunity test 15% of rated d.c. value
IEC 61000-4-17
Power frequency test on binary inputs 300 V Common Mode
IEC 60255-26 150 V Differential Mode, 50 Hz
EMC Tests for Emission (Type Test)
Standard: IEC 60255-26 (Product Standard)

Conducted Emission, on auxiliary voltage port 150 kHz to 30 MHz
CISPR 22 Limit Class A
Radiated Emission 30 MHz to 1000 MHz Limit Class A
CISPR 22 1-2 GHz Limit Class A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.1.6 Mechanical Tests
Vibration and Shock Stress during Steady-State Operation
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068

Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2; 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm amplitude; 60 Hz to 150 Hz:
IEC 60068-2-6 1g acceleration
frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min 20 cycles in
3 orthogonal axes
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; 5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, each 3 shocks in both
IEC 60068-2-27 directions of the 3 axes
Seismic Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-3, Class 1; 1 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis)
IEC 60068-3-3 1 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude (vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontal axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0,5 g acceleration (vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min,
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068

Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2; 10 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
IEC 60068-2-6 frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; 15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068-2-27 each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
Continuous Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; 10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms,
IEC 60068-2-29 each 1000 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Temperatures
Standards: IEC 60255-6

IEC 60068-2-1:2007
IEC 60068-2-2:2007
Type tested (acc. IEC 60068-2-1 and -2, Test Bd, for –25 °C to +85 °C or –13 °F to +185 °F
16 h)
Permissible temporary operating temperature –40 °C to +70 °C or –40 °F to +158 °F
(tested for 16 h) (legibility of the display may be restricted from +55 °C
or +131 °F
Recommended for permanent operation (according –25 °C to +55 °C or –13 °F to +131 °F
to IEC 60255-6)
Limiting Temperatures for Storage –25 °C to +85 °C or –13 °F to +185 °F

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Humidity
Permissible humidity Mean value per year ≤ 75 % relative humidity;

IEC 60068-2-1:2007 1）Steady damp heat test, 40°C, 93 % RH ,10 days
IEC 60068-2-2:2007 2）Cyclic damp heat test, 25°C, 97 % RH；55°C, 93%
IEC 60068-2-78:2001 RH，each 12 hours，6 days;
on 56 days of the year up to 93 % relative humidity;
condensation must be avoided!
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor
subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.
4.1.8 Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical utility environment.
Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
In addition, the following is recommended:
• All contacts and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the numerical protec-
tive device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression components.
• For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be shielded with
a conductive shield grounded at both ends. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special
measures are normally required.
• Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device is energized. In with-
drawn condition, some components are electrostatically endangered; during handling the ESD stand-
ards (for Electrostatic Sensitive Devices) must be observed. They are not endangered when inserted into
the case.
4.1.9 Constructive Designs
Case 7XP20
Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 4.29 Dimensions
Variant Case Size Weight (mass)

7SJ661 Flush-mounting case 1/
3
5.1 Kg
3
5.1 Kg
2
6.5 kg
International Protection Under IEC 60529

in flush mounted case and in model with detached
operator panel
Front IP 51
Rear IP 20
For personal protection IP 2x with cover cap
4.1.10 Flammability of Materials
Standard IEC 60255-27

Part Flammability class
Front cover HB

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Front foil HB 40
LCD cover HB 40

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.2 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection

Operating Modes
Three-phase Standard
Two-phase Phases A and C
Measuring Method
All elements First harmonic, rms value (true rms)

50-3, 50N-3 Instantaneous values
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup current phases for ΙNom = 1 A 0.10 A to 35.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments

0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.50 A to 175.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Pickup currents ground for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 35.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 175.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Delay times T 0.00 s to 60.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Dropout delay times 50 T DROP-OUT, 50N T 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01
DROP-OUT s
Times
Pickup times (without inrush restraint, with restraint + 1 period)

First harmonic, rms value
for 2 x setting value approx. 30 ms
- for 10 x setting value approx. 20 ms
Instantaneous value
Dropout Times
First harmonic, rms value approx. 30 ms
Instantaneous value approx. 40 ms
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) ≤ 10 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio for

- first harmonic, rms value approx. 0.95 for Ι/ΙNom ≥ 0.3
- instantaneous value approx. 0.90 for Ι/ΙNom ≥ 0.3
Tolerances
Pickup currents 2 % of setting value or 10 mA at ΙNom = 1 A

or 50 mA at ΙNom = 5 A
Delay times T 1 % or 10 ms

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Influencing Variables for Pickup and Dropout
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNom ≤ 1.15 1%

Temperature in range 23.00 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range 25 Hz to 70 Hz 1%
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic 1%
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic 1%
Transient overreaction during fundamental harmonic measuring procedure for τ > 100 ms <5 %
(with full displacement)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection

Operating Modes
Three-phase Standard
Two-phase Phases A and C
voltage-independent,
voltage-controlled,
voltage-dependent
Measuring Technique
All elements First harmonic, rms value (true rms)
Pickup current 51 (phases) for ΙNom = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments

0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A
Pickup current 51N ground for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments
0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A
Time multiplier T for 51, 51N for IEC curves 0.05 s to 3.20 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Time multiplier T for 51, 51N for ANSI curves 0.50 s to 15.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Undervoltage threshold 51V V< for release of 10.0 V to 125.0 V Increments 0.1V
51
Trip Time Curves acc. to IEC
Acc. to IEC 60255-151 or BS 142, Section 3.5.2 (see also Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2)
The tripping times for Ι/Ιp ≥ 20 are identical with those for Ι/Ιp = 20
For zero sequence current, read 3Ι0p instead of Ιp and T3Ι0p instead of Tp
for ground fault, read ΙEp instead of Ιp and TΙEp instead of Tp
Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 · Ιp

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Dropout Time Characteristics with Disk Emulation acc. to IEC
The dropout time curves apply to (Ι/Ιp) ≤ 0.90

For zero sequence current, read 3Ι0p instead of Ιp and T3Ι0p instead of Tp;
for ground fault, read ΙEp instead of Ιp and TΙEp instead of Tp
Dropout Setting
IEC without Disk Emulation approx. 1.05 · setting value Ιp for Ιp/ΙN ≥ 0.3, this corresponds to
approx. 0.95 · pickup value
IEC with Disk Emulation approx. 0.90 · setting value Ιp
Tolerances
Pickup/dropout thresholds Ιp, ΙEp 2 % of setting value or 10 mA for ΙNom = 1 A, or 50 mA for ΙN 5 A

Trip time for 2 ≤ Ι/Ιp ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms
Dropout time for Ι/Ιp ≤ 0,90 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms

Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausloese-rueckfall-kennli-amz-iec-norm-stark-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-1 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to IEC

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausl-rueckfall-kennl-amz-iec-extrem-langzeit-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-2 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to IEC

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Trip Time Curves acc. to ANSI
Acc. to ANSI/IEEE (see also Figure 4-3 to Figure 4-6)
Where
t Trip time
D Setting value of the time multiplier
I Fault current
Ip Setting value of the pickup current
The tripping times for Ι/Ιp ≥ 20 are identical with those for Ι/Ιp = 20
For zero sequence current read 3Ι0p instead of Ιp and T3Ι0p instead of Tp;
for ground fault read ΙEp instead of Ιp and TΙEp instead of Tp
Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 · Ιp

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Dropout Time Characteristics with Disk Emulation acc. to ANSI/IEEE
Where:
tReset Reset time
D Setting value of the multiplier
I Fault current
Ip Setting value of the pickup currrent
The dropout time curves apply to (Ι/Ιp) ≤ 0.90

For zero sequence current read 3Ι0p instead of Ιp and T3Ι0p instead of Tp;
for ground fault read ΙEp instead of Ιp and TΙEp instead of Tp
Dropout Setting
ANSI without Disk Emulation approx. 1.05 · setting value Ιp for Ιp/ΙN ≥ 0.3; corresponds to approx.
0.95 · pickup value
ANSI with Disk Emulation approx. 0.90 · setting value Ιp
Tolerances
Pickup/dropout thresholds Ιp, ΙEp 2% of setting value or 10 mA for ΙNom = 1 A or 50 mA for ΙNom = 5 A
Trip time for 2 ≤ Ι/Ιp ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms
Dropout time forΙ/Ιp ≤ 0.90 5 % of reference value + 2 %, or 30 ms

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data

Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausl-rueckfallkennl-amz-ansi-inv-short-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-3 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to ANSI/IEEE

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausl-rueckfallkennl-amz-ansi-lang-maessig-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausloese-rueckfallkennl-ansi-amz-stark-extrem-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausloese-rueckfall-amz-ansi-gleichmaessig-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection

Time Overcurrent Elements
The same specifications and characteristics apply as for non-directional time overcurrent protection (see
previous Sections).
Determination of Direction
Moreover, the following data apply to direction determination:
For Phase Faults
Polarization With cross-polarized voltages;

with voltage memory 2 s
Forward Range Vref,rot ± 86°
Rotation of the reference voltage Vref,rot –180° to +180°
Increments 1°
Dropout difference 2°
Directional sensitivity Unlimited for single and two phase faults
For three phase faults, dynamically unlimited, steady-
state
approx. 7V phase-to-phase
For Ground Faults
Polarization with zero sequence quantities 3V0, 3Ι0

Rotation of the reference voltage Vref,ot –180° to +180°
Increments 1°
Directional Sensitivity VN ≈ 2.5 V displacement voltage, measured
3V0 ≈ 5 V displacement voltage, calculated
Polarization with negative sequence quantities 3V2, 3Ι2

Rotation of the reference voltage Vref,rot –180° to +180°
Increments 1°
Directional Sensitivity 3V2 ≈ 5 V negative sequence voltage
3Ι2 ≈ 45 mA negative sequence current with ΙNom = 1 A
3Ι2 ≈ 225 mA negative sequence current with ΙNom =
5A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Times
Pickup times (without inrush restraint, with restraint + 1 period)

50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50N-1, 50N-2, 50N-3, 67, 67N
Dropout Times
50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50N-1, 50N-2, 50N-3 approx. 40 ms
Tolerances
Angle faults for phase and ground faults ±1° electrical
Influencing Variables
Frequency Influence
– With no memory voltage approx 1° in range 25 Hz to 50 Hz

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.5 Inrush Restraint
4.5 Inrush Restraint

Controlled Elements
Time Overcurrent Elements 50-1, 50N-1, 51, 51N, 67-1, 67N-1
Stabilization factor Ι2f/Ι 10 % to 45 % Increments 1 %
Functional Limits
Lower Function Limit Phases for ΙNom = 1 A at least one phase current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) ≥ 25 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A at least one phase current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) ≥ 125 mA
Lower Function Limit ground for ΙNom = 1 A Ground current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) ≥ 25 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A Ground current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) ≥ 125 mA
Upper Function Limit, for ΙNom = 1 A 0.30 A to 25.00 A (increments 0.01 A)
configurable for ΙNom = 5 A 1.50 A to 125.00 A (increments 0.01 A)
Crossblock
Crossblock ΙA, ΙB, ΙC ON/OFF

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data

Timed Changeover of Settings
Controlled functions Directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection (separated

acc. to phases and ground)
Initiation criteria Current Criteria "BkrClosed I MIN"
Interrogation of the circuit breaker position
Automatic reclosing function ready
Binary input
Time control 3 time elements
(TCB Open., TActive, TStop)
Current control Current threshold "BkrClosed I MIN" (reset on current falling below
threshold: monitoring with timer)
Current Control for ΙNom = 1 A 0.04 A to 1.00 A Increments

0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.20 A to 5.00 A
Time Until Changeover To Dynamic Settings TCB Open 0 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) Increments 1 s
Period Dynamic Settings are Effective After a Reclo- 1 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) Increments 1 s
sure TActive
Fast Reset Time TStop 1 s to 600 s (= 10 min) or ∞ (fast Increments 1 s
reset inactive)
Dynamic Settings of Pickup Currents and Time Adjustable within the same ranges and with the same
Delays or Time Multipliers increments as the directional and non-directional time
overcurrent protection

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.7 Single-phase Overcurrent Protection
4.7 Single-phase Overcurrent Protection

Current Elements
High-set current elements 50-2 0.05 A to 35.00 A 1) Increments 0.01 A

0.003 A to 1.500 A 2) Increments
or ∞ (element disabled) 0.001 A
T50-2 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or ∞ (no trip)
Definite-Time Current Element 50-1 0.05 A to 35.00 A 1) Increments 0.01 A
0.003 A to 1.500 A 2) Increments
or ∞ (element disabled) 0.001 A
T50-1 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or ∞ (no trip)
The set times are pure delay times.
1) Secondary values for ΙNom = 1 A; with ΙNom = 5 A multiply currents by 5.
2) Secondary values for “sensitive” measuring input, independent of nominal device current
Operating Times
Pickup/Dropout Times
Frequency Pickup Time 50 Hz 60 Hz
minimum 14 ms 13 ms
maximum ≤ 35 ms ≤ 35 ms
Dropout time approx. 25 ms 22 ms
Dropout Ratios
Current Elements approx 0.95 for Ι/ΙNom ≥ 0.5
Tolerances
Currents 3 % of setting value or 1 % of nominal current at ΙNom = 1 A or 5 A

Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for the Pickup Values

Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.8 Voltage Protection

Undervoltages 27-1, 27-2
Measured quantity used - Positive sequence system of voltages

with three-phase connection - Smallest phase-to-phase voltages
- Smallest phase-to-ground voltage
Measured quantity used with single-phase Single-phase phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage
connection
Connection of phase-to-ground voltages
- Evaluation of phase-to-ground voltages 10 V to 120 V Increment 1 V
- Evaluation of phase-to-phase voltages 10 V to 210 V Increment 1 V
- Evaluation of positive-sequence system 10 V to 210 V Increment 1 V
Connection of phase-to-phase voltages 10 V to 120 V Increment 1 V
Connection: single-phase 10 V to 120 V Increment 1 V
Dropout ratio r for 27-1, 27-21) 1.01 to 3.00 Increment 0.01
Dropout threshold for max. 120 V for phase-to-phase voltage
(r · 27-1) or (r · 27-2) max. 210 V for phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum hysteresis 0.6 V
Time delays 27-1 DELAY, 27-2 DELAY 0.00 s to 100.00 s or ∞ (disa- Increment 0.01 s
bled)
Current criterion BkrClosed I for ΙN = 1 A 0.04 A to 1.00 A Increment 0.01 A
MIN
for ΙN = 5 A 0.20 A to 5.00 A
Overvoltages 59-1, 59-2
Measured quantity used - Positive-sequence system of the voltages

with three-phase connection - Negative-sequence system of the voltages
- Largest phase-to-phase voltage
- Largest phase-to-ground voltage
Measured quantity used Connected single-phase phase-to-ground voltage or
with single-phase connection phase-to-phase voltage
Connection of phase-to-ground voltages
- Evaluation of phase-to-ground voltages 40 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
- Evaluation of negative-sequence system 2 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
Connection of phase-to-phase voltages
- Evaluation of negative-sequence system 2 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
Connection: single-phase 40 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
Dropout ratio r for 59-1, 59-21) 0.90 to 0.99 Increment 0.01 V
Dropout threshold for max. 150 V for phase-to-phase voltage
(r · 59-1) or (r · 59-2) max. 260 V for phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum hysteresis 0.6 V

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Time delays 59-1 DELAY, 59-2 DELAY 0.00 s to 100.00 s or ∞ (disa- Increment 0.01 s
bled)
1) r = Vdropout/Vpickup
Times
Pickup Times
- Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2, 27-1 V1, 27-2 V1 approx. 50 ms
- Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2 approx. 50 ms
- Overvoltage 59-1 V1, 59-2 V1, 59-1 V2 , 59-2 V2 approx. 60 ms
Dropout Times
- Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2, 27-1 V1, 27-2 V1 approx. 50 ms
- Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2 approx. 50 ms
- Overvoltage 59-1 V1, 59-2 V1, 59-1 V2 , 59-2 V2 approx. 60 ms
Tolerances
Pickup Voltage Limits 1 % of setting value or 1 V

Delay times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Temperature in range 23.00 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 0.5 %/10 K
°C)
Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.9 Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time characteristic)
4.9 Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time characteristic)

Unbalanced load tripping element for ΙN = 1 A 0.05 A to 3.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 A
46-1.46-2
for ΙN = 5 A 0.25 A to 15.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Delay Times 46-1, 46-2 0.00 s to 60.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Dropout Delay Times 46 T DROP-OUT 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Functional Limit
Functional Limit for ΙNom = 1 A all phase currents ≤ 10 A

for ΙNom = 5 A all phase currents ≤ 50 A
for ΙNom = 1 A one phase current ≥ 0.05 A
for ΙNom = 5 A one phase current ≥ 0.25 A
Times
Pickup Times approx. 35 ms

Dropout Times approx. 35 ms
Dropout Ratio
Characteristic 46-1, 46-2 approx. 0.95 for Ι2/ΙNom ≥ 0.3
Tolerances
Pickup values 46-1, 46-2 3 % of setting value or 10 mA for ΙNom = 1 A or 50 mA for

ΙNom = 5 A
Time Delays 1 % or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values

Harmonics
Transient overreaction for τ > 100 ms (with full displacement) <5 %

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)

Pickup value 46-TOC (Ι2p) for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 2.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 10.00 A
Time Multiplier TI2p (IEC) 0.05 s to 3.20 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Time Multiplier DI2p (ANSI) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Functional Limit
Functional Limit for ΙNom = 1 A all phase currents ≤ 10 A

for ΙNom = 5 A all phase currents ≤ 50 A
Trip Time Curves acc. to IEC
See also Figure 4-7
Where
tTRIP Trip Time
TI2p Setting Value of the Time Multiplier
I2 Negative Sequence Currents
Setting Value of the Pickup Current
I2p
The trip times for Ι2/Ι2p ≥ 20 are identical to those for Ι2/Ι2p = 20
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10· Ι2p

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
It can be selected one of the represented trip time characteristic curves in Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 each on
the right side of the figure.
Where
tTRIP Trip Time
DI2p Setting Value of the Time Multiplier
I2p
The trip times for Ι2/Ι2p ≥ 20 are identical to those for Ι2/Ι2p = 20
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10· Ι2p
Tolerances
Pickup Threshold Ι2p 3 % of setting value or 10 mA for ΙNom = 1 A

or 50 mA with ΙNom = 5 A
Time for 2 ≤ Ι/Ι2p ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance,
or 30 ms

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Dropout Time Curves with Disk Emulation acc. to ANSI
Representation of the possible dropout time curves, see Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 each on the left side of the
figure
Where:
tReset Reset Time
DI2p Setting Value of the Time Multiplier
I2p
The dropout time constants apply to (Ι2/Ι2p) ≤ 0.90
Dropout Value
IEC and ANSI (without Disk Emulation) approx. 1.05 Ι2p, setting value, which is approx. 0.95 · pickup
threshold Ι2
ANSI with Disk Emulation approx. 0.90 Ι2p setting value
Tolerances
Dropout value Ι2p 2 % of setting value or 10 mA for ΙNom = 1 A

or 50 mA for ΙNom = 5 A
Time for Ι2/Ι2p ≤ 0.90 5 % of reference (calculated) value +2 % current tolerance,
or 30 ms

Harmonics
Transient overreaction for τ > 100 ms (with full displacement) <5 %

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausloese-iec-schieflast-inv-stark-extr-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-7 Trip time characteristics of the inverse time negative sequence element 46-TOC, acc. to IEC

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausloese-rueckfall-ansi-schieflast-inv-mod-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-8 Dropout time and trip time characteristics of the inverse time unbalanced load stage, acc. to
ANSI

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausl-rueckfall-schieflast-ansi-stark-extrem-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-9 Dropout time and trip time characteristics of the inverse time unbalanced load stage, acc. to
ANSI

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.11 Motor Starting Time Supervision
4.11 Motor Starting Time Supervision

Startup current of the motor for ΙNom = 1 A 0.50 A to 16.00 A Increments 0.01 A
ΙSTARTUP
for ΙNom = 5 A 2.50 A to 80.00 A
Pickup threshold ΙMOTOR START for ΙNom = 1 A 0.40 A to 10.0 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 2.00 A to 50.00 A
Permissible startup time TMax.STARTUP 1.0 s to 180.0 s Increments 0.1 s
Permissible locked rotor time TLOCKED ROTOR 0.5 s to 180.0 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.1 s
Maximum startup time with warm motor 0.5 s to 180.0 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.1 s
TMax.STARTUP W
Maximum startup time with cold motor 0 % to 80 % or ∞ (disabled) Increments 1 %
TMax.STARTUP C
Trip Curve
[fo_anlaufzeit, 1, en_US]
Where:
ISTARTUP Motor starting current setting
I Actual current flowing
IMOTOR START Pickup threshold setting, used to detect
tTRIP Trip time in seconds
TMax. STARTUP Tripping time for nominal startup current
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio approx. 0.95
Tolerances
Pickup Threshold 2 % of setting value or 10 mA for ΙNom = 1 A or 50 mA for ΙNom = 5 A

Time Delay 5 % or 30 ms

Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.12 Motor Restart Inhibit
4.12 Motor Restart Inhibit

Motor starting current relative to nominal motor current 1.1 to 10.0 Increments 0.1
ΙStart/ΙMotor Nom
Nominal motor current for ΙNom = 1 A 0.20 A to 1.20 A Increments 0.01 A
ΙMotor Nom for ΙNom = 5 A 1.00 A to 6.00 A
Max. permissible starting time TSTART Max. 1 s to 320 s Increments 1 s
Equilibrium time TEqual 0.0 min to 320.0 min Increments 0.1 min
Minimum inhibit time TMIN. INHIBIT TIME 0.2 min to 120.0 min Increments 0.1 min
Maximum permissible number of warm startups nWARM 1 to 4 Increments 1
Difference between cold and warm startups nCOLD - nWARM 1 to 2 Increments 1
Extension of Time Constant at stop kτ at STOP 0.2 to 100.0 Increments 0.1
Extension of Time constant at running kτ at RUNNING 0.2 to 100.0 Increments 0.1
Restart Threshold
Where: ΘRESTART = Temperature limit below which restarting is possible

kD = k-factor for the rotor
ΙSTARTUP = Startup current
ΙMOTNom = Motor nominal current
Tstart max = Max. startup time
τR = Thermal rotor time constant
nCold = Max. number of cold starts


C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.13 Load Jam Protection
4.13 Load Jam Protection

Tripping threshold for ΙNom = 1 A 0.50 A to 12.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for ΙNom = 5 A 2.50 A to 60.00 A
Alarm threshold for ΙNom = 1 A 0.50 A to 12.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 2.50 A to 60.00 A
Trip delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Message delay 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Blocking duration after motor start 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Timers
Pickup time approx. 55 ms

Dropout time approx. 30 ms
Dropout ratio
Dropout ratio tripping stage approx. 0.95

Dropout ratio warning stage approx. 0.95
Tolerances
Pickup threshold for ΙNom = 1 A 2 % of setting value or 10 mA

for ΙNom = 5 A 2 % of setting value or 50 mA
Time delay 1 % or 10 ms

Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.14 Frequency Protection
4.14 Frequency Protection

Number of frequency elements 4; each can be set f> or f<

adjustable
Pickup threshold 81O or 81U for fNom = 50 Hz 40.00 Hz to 60.00 Hz Increments
0.01 Hz
Pickup threshold 81O or 81U for fNom = 60 Hz 50.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments
0.01 Hz
Dropout difference = 0.02 Hz to 1.00 Hz Increments 0.01
|pickup threshold - dropout threshold| Hz
Delay times T 0.00 s to 100.00 s or ∞ (disa- Increments
bled) 0.01 s
Undervoltage blocking 10 V to 150 V Increments 1 V
with three-phase connection:
Positive sequence component V1
with single phase connection:
single-phase-to-ground- or phase-tophase Voltage
Times
Pickup times 81O, 81U approx. 80 ms

Dropout times 81O, 81U approx. 75 ms
Dropout Ratio
Dropout Ratio for Undervoltage Blocking approx. 1.05
Tolerances
Pickup Frequencies 81/O or 81U 5 mHz (at V = VNom, f = fN)

10 mHz (at V = VNom)
Undervoltage blocking 3 % of setting value or 1 V
Time Delays 81/O or 81/U 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Temperature in range 23 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131 °F (55 °C) 0.5 %/10 K
Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.15 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)

Measured Values / Modes of Operation
3-phase Ι1, V, Q,
Measuring method for Ι, V Fundamental wave
Pickup when Exceeding threshold value or
falling below threshold value
Pickup thresholds:
Current Ι1 for ΙNom = 1 A 0.01 to 0.20 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.05 to 1.00 A
Voltage V 10.0 to 210.00 V Increments 0.1 V
Power Q for ΙNom = 1 A 1.0 to 100 VAR Increments 0.01 VAR
for ΙNom = 5 A 5.0 to 500 VAR
Pickup delay (standard) 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Command delay time 0.00 to 3600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Dropout delay 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Function Limits
Power measurement 3-phase for ΙNom = 1 A Positive sequence system current > 0.03 A
for ΙNom = 5 A Positive sequence system current > 0.15 A
Times
Pickup times:
QU protection
typical approx. 120 ms
maximum (small signals and thresholds) approx. 350 ms
Binary input approx. 20 ms
Dropout times:
QU protection
typical < 50 ms
maximum < 350 ms
Binary input < 10 ms
Tolerances
Pickup thresholds:
Current for ΙNom = 1 A 1% of set value or 10 mA at ΙNom ≥ 0.03 A
2% of set value or 20 mA bei ΙNom < 0.03 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 1% of set value or 50 mA at ΙNom ≥ 0.25 A
2% of set value or 100 mA at ΙNom <0.25 A
Current (symmetrical compo- for ΙNom = 1 A 2% of set value or 20 mA
nents)
for ΙNom = 5 A 2% of set value or 100 mA
Voltage 1% of set value or 0.1 V

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Voltage (symmetrical components) 2% of set value or 0.2 V

Power 1% of set value or 0.3 VAR
Times 1% of set value or 10 ms
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range from 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNom ≤ 1.15 1%

Temperature in the range from 23.00 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range from 25 Hz to 70 Hz 1%
Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.16 Thermal Overload Protection

K-Factor accord. IEC 60255-8 0.10 to 4.00 Increments 0.01

Time Constant τth 1.0 min to 999.9 min Increments 0.1 min
Thermal Alarm ΘAlarm/ΘTrip 50 % to 100 % of the trip excessive Increments 1 %
temperature
Current Overload ΙAlarm for ΙNom = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A
Extension kτ Factor when Machine Stopped 1.0 to 10.0 relative to the time Increments 0.1
constant for the machine running
Emergency Time TEmergency 10 s to 15000 s Increments 1 s
Nominal Overtemperature (for ΙNom) 40 °C to 200 °C = –13 °F to +185 °F Increments 1 °C
Trip Characteristic
Formula for primary values:

Trip Characteristic curve for Ι / (k ⋅ ΙNom) ≤8
with
t Trip time in minutes
τth Heating-up time constant
Ιn Actual load current
Ιpre Preload current
k Setting factor per IEC 60255-8
ΙNom Nominal current for the protected object
Dropout Ratios
Θ/ΘTrip Drops out with ΘAlarm

Θ/ΘAlarm approx. 0.99
Ι/ΙAlarm approx. 0.97
Tolerances
Referring to k · ΙNom 2 % or 10 mA for ΙNom = 1 A, or 50 mA für ΙNom = 5 A,

2 % class according to IEC 60255-8
Referring to Trip Time 3 % or 1 s for Ι/(k ·ΙNom) > 1,25;
3 % class according to IEC 60255-8
Influencing Variables Referring to k · ΙNom
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VPS/VVPSNom ≤ 1.15 1%


C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
[ausloesekennlinie-ueberlast-1111203-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-10 Trip time curves for the thermal overload protection (49)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.17 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)

Displacement Voltage Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults
Displacement voltage, measured V0> 1.8 V to 170.0 V or Increments

∞(disabled) 0.1 V
Displacement voltage, calculated VGND> 10.0 V to 225.0 V Increments
0.1 V
Pickup delay T-DELAY Pickup 0 s to 320.00 s or ∞ Increments
0.01 s
Additional tripping delay 0.10 s to 40000.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
64-1 DELAY 0.01 s
Operating time approx. 50 ms
Dropout value 0.95 or (pickup value – 0.6 V)
Measurement tolerance
V0> (measured) 3 % of setting value or 0.3 V
3V0> (calculated) 3 % of setting value or 3 V
Operating time tolerances 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Phase Detection for Ground Faults on an Ungrounded System
Measuring Principle Voltage measurement (phase-ground)

VPHASE MIN (Ground Fault Phase) 10 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
VPHASE MAX (Healthy Phase) 10 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
Measurement Tolerance acc. to VDE 0435, Part 3 % of setting value or 1 V
303
Ground Fault Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults (Definite Time Characteristic)
Pickup current 50Ns-2 PICKUP

for sensitive transformer 0.001 A to 1.500 A Increments
for normal 1-A transformer 0.05 A to 35.00 A 0.001 A
for normal 5-A transformer 0.25 A to 175.00 A Increments
0.01 A
Increments
0.05 A
Time Delay 50Ns-2 DELAY 0.00 s to 320.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Pickup current 50Ns-1 PICKUP
0.01 A
Increments
0.05 A
Time Delay 50Ns-1 DELAY 0.00 s to 320.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Dropout Time Delay 50Ns T DROP-OUT 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01
s
Operating Time ≤ 50 ms (non-directional)
≤ 50 ms (directional)
Dropout Ratio approx. 0.95 for ΙNs > 50 mA

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Measurement Tolerance 2 % of setting value or 1 mA

Operating Time Tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Ground Fault Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults (Inverse Time Characteristic)
User-defined Curve (defined by a maximum of 20 value pairs of current and time delay)
Pickup Current 51Ns
0.01 A
Increments
0.05 A
Time multiplier T51Ns 0.10 s to 4.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10 · Ι51Ns
Dropout ratio approx. 1.05 · Ι51Ns for Ι51Ns > 50 mA
Measurement Tolerance 2 % setting value or 1 mA
Operating Time Tolerance in Linear Range 7 % of reference value for 2 ≤ Ι/Ι51Ns ≤ 20 + 2 % current
tolerance, or 70 ms
Ground Fault Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults (Inverse Time Characteristic Logarithmic inverse)
Pickup Current 50Ns

For sensitive transformer 0.001 A to 1.400 A Increments
For normal 1-A transformer 0.05 A to 4.00 A 0.001 A
For normal 5-A transformer 0.25 A to 20.00 A Increments
0.01 A
Increments
0.05 A
Starting current factor 51Ns Startpoint 1.0 to 4.0 Increments 0.1
Time factor 51Ns TIME DIAL 0.05 s to 15.00 s; ∞ Increments
0.01 s
Maximum time 51Ns Tmax 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments
0.01 s
Minimum time 51Ns Tmin 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments
0.01 s
Characteristics see Figure 2-92
Tolerances inv. 5 % ± 15 ms for 2 ≤ Ι/Ι51Ns ≤ 20 and 51Ns TIME DIAL ≥ 1 s
Times def. 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Ground Fault Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults (Inverse Time Characteristic Logarithmic Inverse with Knee
Point)
Pickup Current 50Ns

0.01 A
Increments
0.05 A
Minimum time 51Ns T min 0.10 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01
s

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Pickup current51Ns I T min

for normal 5-A transformer 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01
A
Increments 0.05
A
Knee-point time 51Ns T knee 0.20 s to 100.00 s Increments
0.01 s
Pickup current 51Ns I T knee
for normal 5-A transformer 0.25 A to 85.00 A Increments 0.01
A
Increments 0.05
A
Maximum time 51Ns T max 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments
0.01 s
Time factor 51Ns TD 0.05 s to 1.50 s Increments
0.01 s
Characteristics see Figure 2-93
Tolerances inv 5 % ± 15 ms
Times def. 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Trip Time Characteristics according to IEC
Where:
t Trip time in seconds
Tp Setting Value of the Time Multiplier
I Fault Current
IEEp Setting value of the Pickup Current
The tripping times for Ι/Ι51Ns ≥ 20 are identical with those for Ι/ΙEEp = 20
Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 · ΙEEp

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Dropout Time Curves with Disk Emulation acc. to. IEC
Where:
tReset Reset Time
Tp Setting Value of the Time Multiplier
I Fault Current
IEEp Setting Value of the Pickup Current
The dropout time curves apply to (Ι/ΙEEp) ≤ 0.90
Pickup Threshold IEC
IEC without disk emulation approx. 1.05 · setting value ΙEEp for ΙEEp/ΙN ≥ 0.3; this corresponds to
IEC with disk emulation approx. 0.90 · setting value ΙEEp
IEC Tolerances
Pickup/dropout thresholds ΙEEp 2 % of setting value or 10 mA for ΙN = 1 A or 50 mA for ΙN = 5 A

Pickup time for 2 ≤ Ι/ΙEEp≤ 20 5 % of reference value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms
Dropout time forΙ/ΙEEp ≤ 0.90 5 % of reference value + 2 %, or 30 ms

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Where:
t Trip time
D Setting Value of the Time Multiplier
I Fault Current
IEEp Setting value of the Pickup Current
The tripping times for Ι/ΙEEp ≥ 20 are identical with those for Ι/ΙEEp = 20
Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 · ΙEEp

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Dropout Time Curves with Disk Emulation acc. to. ANSI/IEEE
Where:
tReset Reset Time
D Setting Value of the Time Multiplier
I Fault Current
IEEp Setting Value of the Pickup Current
The dropout time curves apply to (Ι/ΙEEp) ≤ 0.90
Pickup Threshold ANSI
ANSI without disk emulation approx. 1.05 · setting value ΙEEp for ΙEEp/ΙN ≥ 0.3; this corresponds to
ANSI with disk emulation approx. 0.90 · ΙEEp setting value
ANSI tolerances
Pickup/dropout thresholds ΙEEp 2 % of setting value or 10 mA for ΙN = 1 A or 50 mA for ΙN = 5 A

Pickup time for 2 ≤ Ι/ΙEEp≤ 20 5 % reference value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms
Dropout time for Ι/ΙEEp ≤ 0.90 5 % reference value + 2 %, or 30 ms

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Auxiliary DC voltage within range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1%

1.15
Temperature in range –5 °C ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 %/10 K
Harmonics
Note: When using the sensitive transformer, the linear range of the measuring input for the sensitive ground
fault detection is from 0.001 A to 1.6 A. The function is, however, still preserved for greater currents.
Direction Determination for all Types of Ground Fault with cos φ / sin φ Measurement
Direction determination - ΙN and VN gemessen

- 3Ι0 and 3V0 berechnet
Measuring principle Real/reactive power measurement
Measuring release RELEASE DIRECT.
(current component perpendicular to directional limit
line) 0.001 A to 1.200 A Increments
for sensitive transformer 0.05 A to 30.00 A 0.001 A
for normal 5-A transformer 0.01 A
Increments
0.05 A
Dropout ratio approx. 0.80
Measuring method cos φ and sin φ
Directional limit line PHI CORRECTION -45.0° to +45.0° Increments 0.1°
Dropout delay RESET DELAY 0 s to 60 s Increments 1 s
Limitation of the directional areas using α1 and α2 1° to 15° Increments 1°
Angle tolerance 3°
Direction Determination for all Types of Ground Fault with V0 ϕ / I0 ϕ Measurement
Direction determination - ΙN and VN measured

- 3Ι0 and 3U0 calculated
Measuring principle V0 / Ι0–phase angle measurement
50Ns-1 element
Minimum voltage 50Ns-1 Vmin
V0 measured 1.8 V to 50 V Increments
3V0 calculated 10 V to 90 V 0.1 V
Increments 1 V
Phase angle 50Ns-1 Phi - 180° to 180° Increments 1°
Delta phase angle 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi 0° to 180° Increments 1°
50Ns-2 element
Minimum voltage50Ns-2 Vmin
V0 measured 1.8 V to 50 V Increments
3V0 calculated 10 V to 90 V 0.1 V
Increments 1 V
Phase angle 50Ns-2 Phi - 180° to 180° Increments 1°

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Delta phase angle 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi 0° to 180° Increments 1°

Angle tolerance 3°
Angle Correction
Angle correction for cable converter in two operating points F1/I1 and F2/I2:
Angle correction F1, F2 (for grounded system) 0.0° to 5.0° Increments 0.1°
Current value Ι1, Ι2 for the angle correction
for sensitive transformer 0.001 A to 1.600 A Increments 0.001 A
for normal 1-A transformer 0.05 A to 35.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for normal 5-A transformer 0.25 A to 175.00 A Increments 0.05 A
Note: Due to the high sensitivity the linear range of the measuring input ΙN with integrated sensitive input
transformer is from 0.001A to 1.6 A. For currents greater than 1.6 A, correct directionality can no longer be
guaranteed.
Logarithmic inverse trip time characteristic
[kennlinie-amz-log-invers-050803, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-11 Trip time characteristics of inverse time ground fault protection with logarithmic inverse time
characteristic
Logarithmic t =51Ns Tmax – 51Ns TIME DIAL · 51Ns(Ι/51Ns PICKUP)

inverse
Note: For Ι/51Ns PICKUP > 35 the time applies for Ι/51Ns PICKUP = 35; for t < 51Ns Tmin
the time 51Ns Tmin applies.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Logarithmic Inverse Trip Time characteristic with knee point
[7sj6x_portugal_kennlinie-010704-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-12 Trip-time characteristics of the inverse-time ground fault protection with logarithmic inverse
time characteristic with knee point (example for 51Ns= 0.004 A)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data

Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
Pickup Threshold
with ΙN for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 35.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for Ι
Nom = 5 A 0.25 A to 175.00 A Increments 0.01 A
with 3Ι0 for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 35.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for Ι
with ΙNs for ΙNom = 1 A 0.005 A to 1.500 A Increments 0.001 A

for Ι
Pickup extension time Tv 0.00 s to 10.00 s Increments 0.01 s

Ground Fault Accumulation Time Tsum 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Reset Time for Accumulation Tres 1 s to 600 s Increments 1 s
Number of Pickups for Intermittent Ground Fault 2 to 10 Increments 1
Times
Pickup Times
– Current = 1.25 x Pickup Value approx. 30 ms
– for ≥ 2 · Pickup Value approx. 22 ms
Dropout Time (without extension time) approx. 22 ms
Tolerances
Pickup threshold Ιie> for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 10 mA

Times TV, Tsum, Tres 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNim ≤ 1.15 <1 %

Temperature in range 23.00 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) <0.5 %/ K
Frequency in range 25 Hz to 70 Hz <5 % relating to the set time

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.19 Directional intermittent ground fault protection
4.19 Directional intermittent ground fault protection

Pickup threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> 2.0 V .. 100.0 V Increments 1 V

Monitoring time after pickup detected 0.04 s ... 10.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Pulse no. for detecting the interm. E/F 2 ... 50 Increments 1
Dropout ratio
Dropout ratio Vgnd> / 3V0> 0,95 or (pickup value - 0,6 V)
Tolerances
Measurement tolerance Vgnd> / 3V0> 3 % of setting value

Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNom ≤ 1.15 <1 %

Temperature in range 23.00 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) <0,5 %/ K

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.20 Automatic Reclosing
4.20 Automatic Reclosing

Number of Reclosures 0 to 9 (separated for phase and ground)
Cycles 1 to 4 can be adjusted individually
The following Protective Functions initiate the AR 50-3, 50-2, 50-1, 51, 67-3, 67-2, 67-1, 67-TOC
79 (no 79 start / 79 start / 79 blocked) 50N-3, 50N-2, 50N-1, 51N, 67N-3, 67N-2, 67N-1, 67- TOC
50Ns-1, 50Ns-2, 51Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2, 67Ns-TOC
unbalanced load, binary input
Blocking of 79 by Pick up of protective elements for which 79 blocking is set
(see above)
3-phase pickup (optional)
Binary input
last trip command after the reclosing cycle is complete
(unsuccessful reclosure)
Trip command from the breaker failure
Opening the circuit breaker without 79
External CLOSE Command
Breaker failure monitoring
Dead Time TDead 0.01 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
(separate for phase and ground and individual for
cycles 1 to 4)
Extension of Dead Time using binary input with time monitoring
Blocking Duration for Manual-CLOSE Detec- 0.50 s to 320.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
tionTBLK Manual Close
Blocking Duration after reclosuree TBlocking Time 0.50 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Blocking Duration after Dynamic Blocking TBLK DYN 0.01 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Start Signal Monitoring Time TStart Mnitor 0.01 s to 320.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Circuit Breaker Monitoring Time TCB Monitor 0.10 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Maximum Dead Time Extension TDead Exten 0.50 s to 320.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Start delay of dead time using binary input with time monitoring
Max. start delay of dead time 0,0 s to 1800,0 s or ∞ Increments 1,0 s
TDead Delay
Operating time TOperate 0,01 s to 320,00 s or ∞ Increments 0,01 s
The following protection functions can be influ- 50-3, 50-2, 50-1, 51, 67-3, 67-2, 67-1, 67-TOC
enced by the automatic reclosing function indi- 50N-3, 50N-2, 50N-1, 51N, 67N-3, 67N-2, 67N-1, 67- TOC
vidually for the cycles 1 to 4 (setting value T=T/ 50Ns-1, 50Ns-2, 51Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2, 67Ns-TOC
instantaneous T=0/ blocked T=infinite):
Additional Functions Lockout (Final Trip)
Circuit breaker monitoring using breaker auxiliary
contacts

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.21 Fault Locator
4.21 Fault Locator

Units of Distance Measurement in Ω primary and secondary
in km or miles line
length or in % of line length1)
Trigger trip command,
Dropout of an Element, or
External command via binary input
Reactance Setting (secondary) for ΙNom = 1 A 0.0050 to 9.5000 Ω/km Increments
0.0001
0.0050 to 15.0000 Ω/Meile Increments
0.0001
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.0010 to 1.9000 Ω/km Increments
0.0001
0.0010 to 3.0000 Ω/Meile Increments
0.0001
For the remaining parameters refer to the Power System Data 2.
When configuring mixed lines, the reactance value must be set for each line section (A1 to A3).
Measurement Tolerance acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303 for 2,0 % fault location (without intermediate infeed)
Sinusoidal Measurement Quantities 30° ≤ φK ≤ 90° and VK/VNom ≥ 0.1 and ΙK/ΙNom ≥ 1.0
1) Homogeneous lines or correctly configured line sections are assumed when the fault distance is given in km,
miles or %.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.22 Breaker Failure Protection
4.22 Breaker Failure Protection

Pickup threshold 50-1 BF for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Pickup threshold 50N-1 BF for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Delay time 50 BF Trip timer 0.06 s to 60.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Delay time 50 BF-2 Delay 0.06 s to 60.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Times
Pickup Times
– On Internal Start included in time delay
– For external Start included in time delay
Dropout Time approx. 25 ms 1)
Tolerances
Pickup thresholds 50-1 BF, 50N-1 BF 2 % of setting value

Time Delay TRIP-Timer 1 % or 20 ms

Harmonics
1) A further delay for the current may be caused by compensation in the CT secondary circuit.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data

Measured Quantities / Operating Modes
Three-phase Ι, ΙN, ΙNs, 3Ι0, Ι1, Ι2, Ι2/Ι1, V, VN, 3V0, V1, V2,
dV/dt, P, Q, cosφ
Single-phase Ι, ΙN, ΙNs, V, VN, Vx, P, Q, cosφ
Without fixed phase reference f, df/dt, binary input
Measuring procedure for Ι, V Fundamental wave<
True RMS value,
Positive sequence system,
Negative sequence system
Pickup on Exceeding threshold or
falling below threshold
Pickup tresholds:
Current Ι, Ι1, Ι2, 3Ι0, ΙN for ΙNom = 1 A 0.03 to 40.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.15 to 200.00 A
Ratio Ι2/Ι1 15% to 100% Increments 1%
Sensitive ground current ΙNN 0.001 to 1.600 A Increments 0.001 A
Voltage V, V1, V2, 3V0 2.0 to 260.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Displacement voltage VN or 2.0 to 200.0 V Increments 0.1 V
any voltage
Power P, Q for ΙNom = 1 A 0.5 to 10000 W Increments 0.1 W
for ΙNom = 5 A 2.5 to 50000 W
Power factor cosϕ -0.99 to +0.99 Increments 0.01
Frequency for fNom = 50 Hz 40.0 to 60.0 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
for fNom = 60 Hz 50.0 to 70.0 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Frequency change df/dt 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/s Increments 0.01

Hz/s
Voltage change dV/dt 4 V/s to 100 V/s Increments 1 V/s
Dropout ratio > element 1.01 to 3.00 Increments 0.01
Dropout ratio < element 0.70 to 0.99 Increments 0.01
Dropout differency frequency 0.02 to 1.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Pickup delay (standard) 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Pickup delay for Ι2/Ι1 0.00 to 28800.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Command delay time 0.00 to 3600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Dropout delay 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Fixed dropout differences
Dropout difference df/dt 0.1 Hz/s

Dropout difference dV/dt 3 V/s

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Functional Limits
Power measurement 3-phase for ΙNom = 1 A With current system > 0.03 A
for ΙNom = 5 A With current system > 0.15 A
Power measurement 1-phase for ΙNom = 1 A Phase current > 0.03 A
for ΙNom = 5 A Phase current > 0.15 A
Times
Pickup times:
Current, voltage (phase quantities)
2 times pickup value approx. 30 ms
Current, voltage (symmetrical components)
Power
typical approx. 120 ms
maximum ((small signals and thresholds) approx. 350 ms
Power factor 300 to 600 ms
Frequency approx. 100 ms
Frequency change df/dt for 1.25 times pickup value approx. 220 ms
Voltage change dV/dt for 2 times pickup value approx. 220 ms
Binary input approx. 20 ms
Dropout times:
Current, voltage (phase quantities) < 20 ms
Current, voltage (symmetrical components) < 30 ms
Power
typical < 50 ms
maximum < 350 ms
Power factor < 300 ms
Frequency < 100 ms
Frequency change < 200 ms
Voltage change < 220 ms
Binary input < 10 ms
Tolerances
Pickup thresholds:
Current for ΙNom = 1 A 0.5 % of setting value or 10 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.5 % of setting value or 50 mA
Current (symmetrical components) for ΙNom = 1 A 1 % of setting value or 20 mA
Current (Ι2/Ι1) 1 % of setting value
Voltage 0.5 % of setting value or 0.1 V
Voltage (symmetrical components) 1 % of setting value or 0.2 V
Voltage change dV/dt 5 % of setting value or 1.5 V/s
Power 1 % of setting value or 0.3 W
(for nominal values)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Power factor 2°
Frequency 5 mHz (bei V = VNom, f = fNom)
10 mHz (bei V = VNom)
Frequency change df/dt 5% of setting value or 0.05 Hz/s

Harmonics

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data

Operating Modes
- Synchrocheck
- Asynchronous / Synchronous (only 7SJ64)
Additional Release Conditions
- Live bus / dead line,

- Dead bus / live line,
- Dead bus and dead line
- Bypassing
Voltages
Maximum operating voltage Vmax 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V

Minimum operating voltage Vmin 20 V to 125 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
V< for dead line 1 V to 60 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
V> for live line 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
Primary transformer rated voltage V2N 0.10 kV to 800.00 kV Increments 0.01 kV
Tolerances 2 % of pickup value or 2 V
Dropout Ratios approx. 0.9 (V>) or 1.1 (V<)
Permissible Difference
Voltages differences V2>V1; V2<V1 0.5 V to 50.0 V (phase-to- Increments 0.1 V

Tolerance phase)
1V
Frequency Difference f2>f1; f2<f1 0.01 Hz to 2.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Tolerance 30 mHz
Angle Difference α2 > α1; α2 < α1 2° to 80° Increments 1°
Tolerance 2°
Max. angle error 5° for Δf ≤ 1 Hz
10° for Δf >1 Hz
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker operating time 0.01 s to 0.60 s Increments 0,01 s
Matching
Vector group matching via angle 0° to 360° Increments 1°

Different voltage transformer V1/V2 0.50 to 2.00 Increments 0.01
Times
Minimum Measuring Time approx. 80 ms

Maximum duration TSYN DURATION 0.01 s to 1200.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or ∞ (disabled)
Monitoring Time TSUP VOLTAGE 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Release delay at synchronous conditions TSYNCDELAY 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Tolerance of all times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Measured Values of the Synchronism and Voltage Check
Reference voltage V1 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom

- Range 10 % to 120 % of VNom
- Tolerance 1) ≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0,5 % VNom
Voltage to be synchronized V2 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom
- Range 10 % to 120 % of VNom
- Tolerance 1) ≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0,5 % VNom
Frequency of the voltage V1 f1 in Hz
- Range fNom ± 5 Hz
- Tolerance 1) 20 mHz
Frequency of the voltage V2 f2 in Hz
Voltage difference V2-V1 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % of VN
- Range 10 % to 120 % of VN
- Tolerance 1) ≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of VN
Frequency difference f2-f1 in mHz
Angle difference λ2-λ1 in °
- Range 0 to 180°
- Tolerance 1) 0,5°
1) at nominal frequency

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.25 RTD Box for Temperature Detection
4.25 RTD Box for Temperature Detection

Temperature Detectors
Connectable RTD-box 1 7XV5662-6AD10 or 7XV5662-8AD10 with 12

temperature sensor inputs
Number of temperature detectors max. 12
Measuring method Pt 100 Ω
selectable 2 or 3 phase connection
Mounting identification “Oil” or “Ambient” or “Stator” or “Bearing” or “Other”
Number of measuring points Maximal of 12 temperature measuring points

Temperature Unit °C or °F, adjustable
Measuring Range
- for Pt 100 –199 °C to 800 °C (–326 °F to 1472 °F)
Resolution 1 °C or 1 °F
Tolerance ± 0.5 % of measured value ± 1 digit
Indication Thresholds
for each measuring point

Stage 1 –50 °C to 250 °C (Increments 1 °C)
–58 °F to 482 °F (Increments 1 °F)
or ∞ (no message)
Stage 2 –50 °C to 250 °C (Increments 1 °C)
–58 °F to 482 °F (Increments 1 °F)
or ∞ (no message)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.26 User-defined Functions (CFC)

Function Blocks and Their Possible Assignments to Task Levels
Function Module Explanation Task Level

MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_
BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB
ABSVALUE Magnitude Calculation X — — —
ADD Addition X X X X
ALARM Alarm clock X X X X
AND AND - Gate X X X X
FLASH Blink block X X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to Control (conversion) — X X —
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to Double Point (conver- — X X X
sion)
BOOL_TO_IC Bool to Internal SI, Conversion — X X X
BUILD_DI Create Double Point Annunciation — X X X
CMD_CANCEL Command cancelled X X X X
CMD_CHAIN Switching Sequence — X X —
CMD_INF Command Information — — — X
CMD_INF_EXE Command information in realtime — — — X
COMPARE Metered value comparison X X X X
CONNECT Connection — X X X
COUNTER Counter X X X X
DI_GET_STATUS Decode double point indication X X X X
DI_SET_STATUS Generate double point indication X X X X
with status
D_FF D- Flipflop — X X X
D_FF_MEMO Status Memory for Restart X X X X
DI_TO_BOOL Double Point to Boolean (conver- — X X X
sion)
DINT_TO_REAL Adaptor X X X X
DIST_DECODE Conversion double point indication X X X X
with status to four single indica-
tions with status
DIV Division X X X X
DM_DECODE Decode Double Point X X X X
DYN_OR Dynamic OR X X X X
INT_TO_REAL Conversion X X X X
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non-linear Curve X — — —
LONG_TIMER Timer (max.1193h) X X X X
LOOP Feedback Loop X X — X
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower Limit X — — —
MUL Multiplication X X X X
MV_GET_STATUS Decode status of a value X X X X
MV_SET_STATUS Set status of a value X X X X
NAND NAND - Gate X X X X
NEG Negator X X X X
NOR NOR - Gate X X X X

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Function Module Explanation Task Level

MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_
BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB
OR OR - Gate X X X X
REAL_TO_DINT Adaptor X X X X
REAL_TO_INT Conversion X X X X
REAL_TO_UINT Conversion X X X X
RISE_DETECT Rise detector X X X X
RS_FF RS- Flipflop — X X X
RS_FF_MEMO RS- Flipflop with state memory — X X X
SQUARE_ROOT Root Extractor X X X X
SR_FF SR- Flipflop — X X X
SR_FF_MEMO SR- Flipflop with state memory — X X X
ST_AND AND gate with status X X X X
ST_NOT Inverter with status X X X X
ST_OR OR gate with status X X X X
SUB Substraction X X X X
TIMER Timer — X X —
TIMER_SHORT Simple timer — X X —
UINT_TO_REAL Conversion X X X X
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper Limit X — — —
X_OR XOR - Gate X X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero Supression X — — —
Device-specific CFC Blocks
Table 4-1 BOSTATE – The block reads the state of an output relay and outputs it as a Boolean value.
Name Type Description Default function

Input BO UINT Number of output relay 0
Number STATE BOOL State of the output relay FALSE
Task levels: Recommendation: This block should be placed in the MW_BEARB level,
where it is cyclically updated
Note: In the task levels PLC1_BEARB and PLC_BEARB, changes of the
output relay are no trigger events for these levels. These levels are only
triggered by changes to indications routed onto them.
Behavior of inputs and outputs: If the output relay with the number BO exists and the state of the associ-
ated output relay is active, STATE = TRUE is set, otherwise STATE =
FALSE.
Table 4-2 ASWITCH – This block is used to switch between two REAL inputs (RMS values).

Input SWITCH BOOL Analog value selection FALSE
IN1 REAL Analog value 0.0
IN2 REAL Analog value 0.0
Output OUT REAL Selected analog value

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Task levels: Recommendation: Into task levels PLC1_BEARB and PLC_BEARB, because
these levels are directly triggered.
Note: If you use thi block in the task levels MW_BEARB and SFS_BEARB, a
change of the SWITCH signal is only recognized if the signal lasts longer
than the processing cycle of the task level.
Behavior of inputs and outputs:
Table 4-3 COUNTACTIVE – This block calculates the number of active inputs. It is a generic block in which
you can specify a number of summands between 2 and 120.

Input X1 BOOL Input value FALSE
X2 to X120 BOOL Input value FALSE
Output Y UINT Number of “TRUE” input values 0
Task levels: Recommendation: Into task levels PLC1_BEARB and PLC_BEARB, because
these levels are directly triggered.
Note: If you use thi block in the task levels MW_BEARB and SFS_BEARB, a
change of the SWITCH signal is only recognized if the signal lasts longer
than the processing cycle of the task level.
Behavior of inputs and outputs:
Info: The COUNTACTIVE block is used to convert two Boolean inputs X1 and
X2 to INTEGER (FALSE=0, TRUE=1), and add them. The addition result is
available at output Y.
In the context menu of the block you can increase the number of inputs
to a maximum of 120:
General Limits
Description Limit Comment

Maximum number of all CFC charts 32 If the limit is exceeded, the device rejects the parameter
considering all task levels set with an error message, restores the last valid param-
eter set and restarts using that parameter set.
Maximum number of all CFC charts 16 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
considering one task level the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of all CFC inputs 400 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
considering all charts the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of reset-resistant 350 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
flipflops the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
D_FF_MEMO The red ERROR-LED lights up.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Device-Specific Limits
Description Limit Comment

Maximum number of synchronous 165 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
changes of chart inputs per task level the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
Maximum number of chart outputs per 150 The red ERROR-LED lights up.
task level
Additional Limits
Additional limits 1) for the following CFC blocks:

Task Level Maximum Number of Modules in the Task Levels
TIMER2) 3) TIMER_SHORT2) 3)
MW_BEARB — —
PLC1_BEARB
15 30
PLC_BEARB
SFS_BEARB — —
1) When the limit is exceeded, an error message is iisued by the device. Consequently, the device starts moni-
toring. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
2) The following condition applies for the maximum number of timers: (2 · number of TIMER + number of
TIMER_SHORT) < 30. TIMER and TIMER_SHORT hence share the available timer resources within the frame of
this inequation. The limit does not apply to the LONG_TIMER.
3) The time values for the blocks TIMER and TIMER_SHORT must not be selected shorter than the time resolu-
tion of the device of 10 ms, as then, the blocks will not then start with the starting pulse.
Maximum Number of TICKS in the Task Levels
Task Level Limit in TICKS 1)

MW_BEARB ((Measured Value Processing) 10000
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC Processing) 12000
PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC Processing) 600
SFS_BEARB (Interlocking) 10000
1) When the sum of TICKS of all blocks exceeds the limits before-mentioned, an error message is output by
CFC.
Processing Times in TICKS Required by the Individual Elements
Individual Element Number of TICKS

Block, basic requirement 5
Each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules 1
Connection to an input signal 6
Connection to an output signal 7
Additional for each chart 1
Arithmetic ABS_VALUE 5
ADD 26
SUB 26
MUL 26
DIV 54
SQUARE_ROOT 83
Basic logic AND 5
CONNECT 4
DYN_OR 6

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data

NAND 5
NEG 4
NOR 5
OR 5
RISE_DETECT 4
X_OR 5
Information status SI_GET_STATUS 5
CV_GET_STATUS 5
DI_GET_STATUS 5
MV_GET_STATUS 5
SI_SET_STATUS 5
DI_SET_STATUS 5
MV_SET_STATUS 5
ST_AND 5
ST_OR 5
ST_NOT 5
Memory D_FF 5
D_FF_MEMO 6
RS_FF 4
RS_FF_MEMO 4
SR_FF 4
SR_FF_MEMO 4
Control commands BOOL_TO_CO 5
BOOL_TO_IC 5
CMD_INF 4
CMD_INF_EXE 4
CMD_CHAIN 34
CMD_CANCEL 3
LOOP 8
Type converter BOOL_TO_DI 5
BUILD_DI 5
DI_TO_BOOL 5
DM_DECODE 8
DINT_TO_REAL 5
DIST_DECODE 8
UINT_TO_REAL 5
REAL_TO_DINT 10
REAL_TO_UINT 10
Comparison COMPARE 12
LOWER_SETPOINT 5
UPPER_SETPOINT 5
LIVE_ZERO 5
ZERO_POINT 5
Metered value COUNTER 6
Time and clock pulse TIMER 5
TIMER_LONG 5
TIMER_SHORT 8

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data

ALARM 21
BLINK 11
Routable in Matrix
In addition to the defined preassignments, indications and measured values can be freely routed to buffers,
preconfigurations can be removed.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.27 Additional Functions

Currents in A (kA) primary and in A secondary or in % ΙNom

ΙA; ΙB; ΙC
Positive sequence component Ι1
Negative sequence component Ι2
ΙE or 3Ι0
Range 10 % to 200 % ΙNom
Tolerance 1)
1 % of measured value or 0.5 % ΙNom
Voltages (phase-to-ground) in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom
VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Voltages (phase-to-phase)
VA-B, VB-C, VC-A, VSYN
VGND or V0
Positive sequence component V1
Negative sequence component V2
Range 10 % to 120 % of VNom
Tolerance 1)
1 % of measured value or 0.5 % VNom
S, apparent power in kVAr (MVAR or GVAR) primary and in % SNom
Range 0 % to 120 % SNom
Tolerance 1)
1 % of SNom
for V/VNom and Ι/ΙNom = 50 to 120 %
P, Active power with sign, total and phase-segregated in kW (MW or GW)
primary and in % SNom
Tolerance 1) 1 % of SNom
for V/VNom and Ι/ΙNom = 50 to 120 % and | cos φ | = 0.707 to 1
with SNom =√3 · VNom · ΙNom
Q, reactive power with sign, total and phase-segregated in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr)
primary and in % SNom
Tolerance 1)
1 % of SNom
for V/VNom and Ι/ΙNom = 50 to 120 % and | sin φ | = 0.707 to 1
with SNom = √3· VNom · ΙNom
cos φ, power factor total and phase-segregated
Range –1 to +1
Tolerance 1) 1 % for | cos φ | ≥ 0.707
Frequencies f in Hz
Range fNom ± 5 Hz
Tolerance 1) 20 mHz
Temperature overload protection in %
Θ /ΘTrip

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Range 0 % to 400 %
Tolerance 1) 5 % class accuracy acc. to IEC 60255-8
Temperature restart inhibit in %
ΘL /ΘL Trip
Range 0 % to 400 %
Tolerance 1) 5 % class accuracy acc. to IEC 60255-8
Restart threshold in %
ΘRestart/ΘR Trip
Inhibit time TReclose in min
Currents of sensitive ground fault detection in A (kA) primary and in mA secondary
(total, real, and reactive current)
ΙNs, ΙNsreal; ΙNsreactive
Range 0 mA to 1600 mA
Tolerance 1) 2 % of measured value or 1 mA
Phase angle between zero sequence voltage in °
and sensitive ground current φ (3V0, ΙNs)
Range - 180° to + 180°
Tolerance 1) ± 1°
RTD-box See section (Temperature Detection via RTD Boxes)
Synchronization Function 25 See section (Synchronization Function 25)
Long-Term Mean Values
Time Window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes

Frequency of Updates adjustable
Long-Term Averages
of Currents ΙAdmd; ΙBdmd; ΙCdmd; Ι1dmd in A (kA)
of Real Power Pdmd in W (kW, MW)
of Reactive Power Qdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
of Apparent Power
Sdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
Min./Max. Memory
Storage of Measured Values with date and time

Reset automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes, 0 to 1439 min) Time
frame and starting time adjustable (in days, 1 to 365 days,
and ∞)
Manual Reset Using binary input
Using keypad
Via communication
Min/Max Values for Current ΙA; ΙB; ΙC;
Ι1 (positive sequence component)
Min/Max Values for Voltages VA-N; VB-N; VC-N;
V1 (positive sequence component);
VA-B; VB-C; VC-A
Min/Max Values for Power S, P; Q, cos φ; frequency

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Min/Max Values for Overload Protection Θ/ΘtRIP

Min/Max Values for Mean Values ΙAdmd; ΙBdmd; ΙCdmd;
Ι1 (positive sequence component);
Sdmd; Pdmd; Qdmd
Fuse Failure Monitor
Operating Modes - in grounded systems

- in resonant-grounded/isolated systems
only for connection of phase-to-ground voltages
Broken-wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits
suited for single-, two- or three-pole broken-wire detection of voltage transformer circuits;
only for connection of phase-ground voltages
Local Measured Value Monitoring
Current Asymmetry Ιmax/Ιmin > symmetry factor, for Ι > Ιlimit,

with settable delay time
Voltage asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > symmetry factor, for V > Vlimit,
with settable delay time
Total current, quick monitoring function with protec- | iA + iB + iC + iE | > limit value
tion blockage
Current phase sequence Clockwise (ABC)/ counter-clockwise (ACB)
Voltage phase sequence Clockwise (ABC)/ counter-clockwise (ACB)
Limit value monitoring ΙA > limit value ΙAdmd>
ΙB > limit value ΙBdmd>
ΙC > limit value ΙCdmd>
Ι1 > limit value Ι1dmd>
ΙL< limit value ΙL<
cos φ < lower limit | cos φ |<
P > limit value of active power | Pdmd | >
Q > limit value of reactive poweR | Qdmd | >
S > limit value of apparent power Sdmd >
Pressure < lower pressure limit<
Temperature > Temperature limit>
Fault Logging
Recording of indications of the last 25 power system faults

Recording of indications of the last 3 power system ground faults
Time Allocation
Resolution for Event Log (Operational Annunciations) 1 ms

Resolution for Trip Log (Fault Annunciations) 1 ms
Maximum Time Deviation (Internal Clock) 0.01 %
Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, Typ CR 1/2 AA
Message “Battery Fault” for insufficient battery charge

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Fault Recording
max. 8 fault records saved by buffer battery also in the event of auxiliary voltage failure
Recording Time Total 20 s
Pre-event and post-event recording and memory time adjust-
able
Probing 16 samples (instantaneous values) per cycle
Energy Counter
Meter Values for Energy in kWh (MWh or GWh) and in kVARh (MVARh or GVARh)
Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy)
Range 28 Bit or 0 to 2 68 435 455 decimal for IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW
protocol)
31 Bit or 0 to 2 147 483 647 decimal for other protocols (other
than VDEW)
≤ 2 % for Ι > 0.1 ΙN, V > 0.1 VN and
Tolerance 1) | cos φ | ≥ 0.707
Switching Statistics
Saved Number of Trips up to 9 digits

Number of Automatic Reclosing Commands up to 9 digits
(segregated according to 1st and ≥ 2nd cycle)
Accumulated Interrupted Current (segregated up to 4 digits
according to pole)
Motor Statistics
Total number of motor startups 0 to 9999 Resolution 1

Total operating time 0 to 99999 h Resolution 1 h
Total down-time 0 to 99999 h Resolution 1 h
Ratio operating time / down-time 0 to 100 % Resolution 0.1 %
Active energy and reactive energy (see Operational Measured Values)
Motor start-up data: of the last 5 start-ups
- Start-up time 0.30 s to 9999.99 s Resolution 10 ms
- Start-up current (primary) 0 A to 1000 kA Resolution 1 A
- Start-up voltage (primary) 0 V to 100 kV Resolution 1 V
Operating Hours Counter
Display Range Up to 7 digits

Criterion Overshoot of an adjustable current threshold (element
50-1, BkrClosed I MIN)
Circuit Breaker Maintenance
Calculation methods on true r.m.s value basis: ΣΙ, ΣΙx, 2P;

on instantaneous value basis: Ι2t
Acquisition/conditioning of measured values phase-selective
Evaluation one threshold per subfunction
Number of saved statistic values up to 13 digits

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
Trip Circuit Supervision
With one or two binary inputs
Commissioning Aids
- Phase rotation field check

- Operational measured values
- Circuit breaker test by means of control function
- Creation of a test measurement report
Clock
Time Synchronization DCF 77/ IRIG B-Signal

Binary Input
Communication
Operating Modes for Time Tracking
No. Operating Mode Explanations
1 Internal Internal synchronization using RTC (presetting)
2 IEC 60870-5-103 External synchronization using system interface (IEC
60870-5-103)
3 Time signal IRIG B External synchronization using IRIG B
4 Time signal DCF77 External synchronization using DCF 77
5 Time signal Sync.-Box External synchronization via the time signal SIMEAS-
Synch.Box
6 Pulse via binary input External synchronization with pulse via binary input
7 Fieldbus (Modbus) External synchronization using field bus
8 SNTP (IEC 61850) External synchronization using system interface (IEC
61850)
Setting Group Change Option of the Functional Settings
Number of Available Setting Groups 4 (parameter group A, B, C and D)

Switchover Performed using the keypad
DIGSI using the front PC port
with protocol via system (SCADA) interface
Binary Input
IEC 61850 GOOSE (inter-relay communication)
The GOOSE communication service of IEC 61850 is qualified for switchgear interlocking The runtime of
GOOSE messages with the protection relay picked up depends on the number of connected IEC 61850
clients.
As from version V4.6 of the devices, applications with protective functions have to be checked with regard
to their required runtime. In individual cases, the manufacturer has to be consulted with regard to the
requirements to ensure that the application functions safely.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.28 Switching Device Control
4.28 Switching Device Control

Number of Controlled Switching Devices Depends on the number of binary inputs and outputs
available
Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking
Messages Feedback messages; closed, open, intermediate position
Control Commands Single command / double command
Switching Command to Circuit Breaker 1-, 1½ - and 2-pole
Programmable Logic Controller PLC logic, graphic input tool
Local Control Control via menu control
assignment of function keys
Remote Control Using Communication Interfaces
Using a substation automation and control system (e.g.
SICAM)
Using DIGSI (e.g. via Modem)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.29 Dimensions
4.29 Dimensions
4.29.1 Panel Flush Mounting and Cabinet Flush Mounting (Housing Size 1/3)
[dw_Dimension Housing Size 1/3, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-13 Dimensional drawing of a 7SJ66 for panel flush and cubicle mounting (housing size 1/3)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.29 Dimensions
4.29.2 Panel Flush Mounting and Cabinet Flush Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)
[dw_Dimension Housing Size 1/2, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-14 Dimensional drawing of a 7SJ66 for panel flush and cubicle mounting (housing size 1/2)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Technical Data
4.29 Dimensions
4.29.3 Varistor
[dw_varistor, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-15 Dimensional drawing of the varistor for voltage limiting in high-impedance differential protec-
tion

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
A Ordering Information and Accessories
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This section provides ordering information for
the models of this device. Connection diagrams indicating the terminal connections of the models of this
device are included. Following the general diagrams are diagrams that show the proper connections of the
devices to primary equipment in many typical power system configurations. Tables with all settings and all
information available in this device equipped with all options are provided. Default settings are also given.
A.1 Ordering Information 518
A.2 Accessories 523

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information

Multi-Functional 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Suffix
Protective Relay with 7 S J 6 6 – – +
Local Control
Case, inputs and outputs Pos. 6

Case 1/3 19"; 4xU, 4xI, 16 BI, 7 BO, 1 life contact 1
Case 1/3 19"; 4xU, 4xI, 22 BI, 10 BO, 1 life contact 2
Case 1/2 19"; 4xU, 4xI, 36 BI, 23 BO, 1 life contact, 4 function keys 3
Measuring inputs (3xU/4xU, 4xI) Pos. 7

IPh = 1 A, IN = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A); position 15 only with A, C, E, G 1
IPh = 1 A, IN = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A); position 15 only with B, D, F, H 2
IPh = 5 A, IN = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A); position 15 only with A, C, E, G 5
IPh = 5 A, IN = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A); position 15 only with B, D, F, H 6
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs) Pos. 8

DC 24 V to 48 V, binary input threshold DC 19 V 417
DC 110 V to 250 V, AC 115 V to 230 V, binary input threshold DC 88 V 5
DC 110 V to 250 V, AC 115 V to 230 V, binary input threshold DC 176 V 6
Construction Pos. 9
Flush-mounting case, screw-type terminals, 8-line text display D
Flush-mounting case, spring-type terminals (direct connection), screw-type terminals for CT E
connection (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs), 8-line text display
Flush-mounting case, screw-type terminals, graphical display J
Flush-mounting case, spring-type terminals (direct connection),screw-type terminals for CT K
connection (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs), graphical display
Region-specific default settings/function versions and language settings Pos. 10

Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) B
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed) E
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Russian (Language can be changed) G
Port B (system interface) Pos. 11

No system port 0
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, RS485 218
Additional protocols, see MLFB Extension L 9
Additional Protocols, MLFB Extension L (Device Rear, Port B) Suffix

Modbus, RS485 + L0D18
DNP3, RS485 + L0G18
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-connector + L0R19
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC-connector + L0S19
DNP3 + IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-connector + L2R19
DNP3 + IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC-connector + L2S19
17 Only available with position 6 = 1

18 Only available with position 12 = 0 or 2
19 Only available with position 12 = 0 or 6

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Port C (service interface) Pos. 12

No port 0
DIGSI 4/Modem/RTD Box, electric RS485 2
Ethernet port (DIGSI port, RTD box connection, not IEC61850), RJ45 connector 6
Measuring/Fault Recording Pos. 13

With fault recording 1
With fault recording, average values, min/max values 3
Functions Pos. 14
and 15
Designation ANSI No. Description FA
Basic Elements (included — Control
in all versions) 50/51 Time-overcurrent protection: I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip
50N/51N Earth-fault protection: IE>, IE>>, IE>>>, IEp
50N/51N Earth-fault protection via insensitive IEE-function:
IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp20
50/50N Flexible protection functions (index quantities derived
from current):additional time-overcurrent protection
stanges I(E)>>>>, I2>
51V Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants)
46 Phase unbalance current protection (negative-
sequence protection)
37 Undercurrent monitoring
47 Phase sequence monitoring
59N/64 Displacement voltage
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection
74TC Trip circuit supervision
— 4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
— Inrush blocking
86 Lock out
V, P, f 27/59 Under/Overvoltage FE
81U/O Under/Overfrequency
27/47/59(N)/3 QU protection
2/55/81R Flexible protection functions (parameters from
current and voltage): Voltage/power/power factor/
frequency change/voltage change protection
IEF — Intermittent earth-fault PE
V, P, f 27/59 Under-/Overvoltage
81U/O Under-/Overfrequency
2/55/81R Flexible protection functions (parameters from
current and voltage): Voltage/power/power factor/
frequency change/voltage change protection
Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and FC
ground
20 Only with position 7=1,5 (non-sensitive ground current input)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions Pos. 14
and 15
Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and F G
V, P, f 27/59 ground
81U/O Under-/Overvoltage
27/47/59(N)/3 Under-/Overfrequency
2/55/81R QU protection
Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
current & voltages): Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/frequency
change/voltage change protection
Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and P G
IEF 27/59 ground
V, P, f 81U/O Under-/Overvoltage
27/47/59(N)/3 Under-/Overfrequency
current & voltages):Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/frequency
Intermittent earth-fault
Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and PC
IEF — ground
DGFD 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and F D21
Dir 67Ns ground
67Ns Directional sensitive earth-fault detection
87N Directional detection of intermittent ground faults
High-impedance restricted earth fault
DGFD 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and P D21
Dir 67Ns ground
IEF 67Ns Directional sensitive earth-fault detection
87N Directional detection of intermittent ground faults
— High-impedance restricted earth fault
DGFD 67Ns Directional sensitive earth-fault detection F F21
Dir 67Ns Directional detection of intermittent ground faults
V, P, f 87N High-impedance restricted earth fault
27/59 Under-/overvoltage
81U/O Under-/overfrequency
27/47/59(N)/3 Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
2/55/81R current & voltages):Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/frequency
DGFD 67Ns Directional sensitive earth-fault detection F B21
67Ns Directional detection of intermittent ground faults
87N High-impedance restricted earth fault
21 For isolated/compensated networks, only with position 7=2,6 (sensitive ground current input)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions Pos. 14
and 15
DGFD 67Ns Directional sensitive earth-fault detection H F21
Motor 67Ns Directional detection of intermittent ground faults
V, P, f 87N High-impedance restricted earth fault
48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
66/86 Restart inhibit
51M Motor load jam protection
27/59 Motor statistics
81U/O Under-/overvoltage
27/47/59(N)/3 Under-/overfrequency
DGFD 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and H H21
Motor 67Ns ground
Dir 67Ns Directional sensitive earth-fault detection
V, P, f 87N Directional detection of intermittent ground faults
Motor statistics 48/14 High-impedance restricted earth fault
QU protection 66/86 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
51M Restart inhibit
27/59 Motor load jam protection
81U/O Under-/overvoltage
27/47/59(N)/3 Under-/overfrequency
2/55/81R Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
current & voltages): Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/frequency
DGFD 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and R H21
Motor 67Ns ground
Dir 67Ns Directional sensitive earth-fault detection
IEF 87N Directional detection of intermittent ground faults
V, P, f 48/14 High-impedance restricted earth fault Intermittent
66/86 earthfault
51M Starting time supervision, locked rotor
Motor load jam protection
Motor statistics
Under-/overvoltage
81U/O Under-/overfrequency
2/55/81R Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions Pos. 14
and 15
Motor 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and H G
Dir 48/14 ground
V, P, f 66/86 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
51M Restart inhibit
27/59 Motor load jam protection
81U/O Motor statistics
27/47/59(N)/3 Under-/overvoltage
2/55/81R Under-/overfrequency
QU protection
Motor 48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor HA
51M Motor load jam protection
Motor statistics
IEF: Intermittent earth fault
V,P,f: Voltage-, Power-, frequency protection
Dir: Directional OC-Prot.
Motor: Motor protection
Automatic Reclosing (79) / Fault Locator Pos. 16

Without 0
79 With 79 1
21FL With fault locator 2
79, 21FL With 79 and fault locator 3
25 With Synchronization22 4
25, 79, 21FL With Synchronization, 79 and fault locator22 7
Conformal Coating Short

Code
Conformal Coating (7SJ66X) ZY13
22 Synchrocheck (no asynchronous switching), one function group

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
A.2 Accessories
A.2 Accessories
Table A-1 RTD-Box (Resistance Temperature Detector)
Name Order No.

RTD box, VH = 24 to 240 V AC/DC 7XV5662-6AD10
RTD box Eth, VH = 24 to 240 V AC/DC 7XV5662-8AD10
Table A-2 Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks
Name Order No.

Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C53207-A406-D280-1
Table A-3 Battery
Lithium Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Order No.

VARTA 6127 101,301
Panasonic BR-1/2AA
Table A-4 Varistor (Voltage-Limiting Resistor for High-Impedance Differential Protection)
Name Order No.

125 Veff, 600 A, 1S/S256 W73028-V3125-A1
240 Veff, 600 A, 1S/S1088 W73028-V3300-A2
Table A-5 Screw Cover
Name Order No.

Screw cover C53207-A406-D278-1
Table A-6 Front Unit with Display and HMI
Name Order No.

Front unit with display and HMI 1/3 C53207-A406-D276-1
Front unit with display and HMI 1/2 C53207-A406-D277-1
Table A-7 USB Cover
Name Order No.

USB cover C53207-A406-D271-1
Table A-8 Terminals
Name Order No.

Terminal voltage,12 pin spring type C53207-A406-D272-1
Terminal voltage,16 pin spring type C53207-A406-D273-1
Terminal voltage,12 pin screw type C53207-A406-D274-1
Terminal voltage,16 pin screw type C53207-A406-D275-1

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
B Terminal Assignments
B.1 7SJ66_Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation 526

B.2 Connector Assignment 530

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
B.1 7SJ66_Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation

7SJ661
[7SJ661 terminal_1, 4, en_US]
Figure B-1 General Diagram for 7SJ661 (Panel Flush Mounted or Cubicle Mounted)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
7SJ662
[7SJ662 terminal, 4, en_US]
Figure B-2 General Diagram 7SJ662 (Panel Flush Mounted or Cubicle Mounted)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
7SJ663
[7SJ663 terminal_A, 3, en_US]

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[7SJ663 terminal_B, 2, en_US]
Figure B-3 General Diagram 7SJ663 (Panel Flush Mounted or Cubicle Mounted)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
B.2 Connector Assignment
B.2 Connector Assignment

System and Service Port
RS485 (RJ45) Ethernet

1 – Tx+
2 – Tx-
3 – Rx+
4 – –
5 – –
6 – Rx-
7 A –
8 B –
Synchronization Port
Pin-No. Designation Signal Meaning

1 – –
2 – –
3 – –
4 – –
5 – –
6 – –
7 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
8 M_TSIG Return Line

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current Transformers, all Devices 532

C.2 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers 7SJ662 536
C.3 Connection example for high-impedance ground fault differential protection 540
C.4 Connection Example for RTD Box 541

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current Transformers, all Devices
[3 CTs, 1, en_US]
Figure C-1 Current transformer connections to three current transformers and neutral point current
(ground current), standard connection, suitable for all electrical power systems
[2 CTs, 1, en_US]
Figure C-2 Current connections to two current transformers - only for ungrounded or compensated
networks

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
[3 CTs, Ground, 1, en_US]
Figure C-3 Current connections to three current transformers, ground current from additional summation
CT, normal circuit layout
Important! Grounding of the cable shield must be effected at the cable's side
For busbar-side grounding of the current transformer, the current polarity of the device is changed via
address 0201. This also reverses the polarity of current input IN/INs. When using a cable-type current trans-
former, the connection of k and l at Q8 and Q7 must be changed.
[2 CTs, Ground, 1, en_US]
Figure C-4 Current connections to two current transformers, ground current of additional toroidal trans-
former for sensitive ground fault detection.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
[2 phase CT and 1 ground CT, 1, en_US]
Figure C-5 Current transformer connections to two phase-current transformers and a ground-current
transformer; the ground current is taken via the highly sensitive and sensitive ground input.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
[2 phse CTs and 2 ground CTs, 1, en_US]
Figure C-6 Current transformer connections to two phase currents and two ground currents; IN/INs –
ground current of the line, IG2 – ground current of the transformer neutral point

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
C.2 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers 7SJ662
[3Y VT, 1, en_US]
Figure C-7 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers, normal connection
[3Y VT, additional, 1, en_US]
Figure C-8 Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers with additional open delta
windings (da-dn)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
[3Y VT, busbar, 1, en_US]
Figure C-9 Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers with additional open delta
windings (da-dn) of the busbar
[3Y VT, ph-to-ph, 1, en_US]
Figure C-10 Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers and additionally to any
phase-to-phase voltage (for synchronism check for example)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
[2 VT, ph-to-ph, 1, en_US]
Figure C-11 Voltage transformer connections of two phase-to-phase voltages in open delta voltageconnec-
tion. In this connection, determination of zero-sequence voltage V0 is not possible. Functions
using zero-sequence voltage must be disabled.
[2 VT, additional, 1, en_US]
Figure C-12 Voltage connections to two voltage transformers and additionally to any phase-to-phase
voltage (for synchronism check for example) In this connection, determination of zerose-
quence voltage V0 is not possible. Functions using zero-sequence voltage must be disabled.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
[connection circuit, 1, en_US]
Figure C-13 Connection circuit for single-phase voltage transformers with phase-to-phase voltages

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
C.3 Connection example for high-impedance ground fault differential protection
C.3 Connection example for high-impedance ground fault differential

protection
[High-impedence, 1, en_US]
Figure C-14 High-impedance differential protection for a grounded transformer winding (showing the
partial connection for the high-impedance differential protection)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Connection Examples
C.4 Connection Example for RTD Box
C.4 Connection Example for RTD Box
[RTD box, 1, en_US]
Figure C-15 Simplex operation with one RTD-box, design with RS 485, operation Ethernet via Port C
(EN100-RJ45).

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
D Current Transformer Requirements
The requirements for phase current transformers are usually determined by the overcurrent time protection,
particularly by the high-current element settings. Besides, there is a minimum requirement based on experi-
ence.
The recommendations are given according to the standard IEC 60044-1.
The standards IEC 60044-6, BS 3938 and ANSI/IEEE C 57.13 are referred to for converting the requirement into
the knee-point voltage and other transformer classes.
D.1 Accuracy limiting factors 544
D.2 Class conversion 545
D.3 Cable Core Balance Current Transformer 546

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Current Transformer Requirements
D.1 Accuracy limiting factors
D.1 Accuracy limiting factors

Effective and Rated Accuracy Limiting Factor
Required minimum effective accuracy limiting

factor
but at least 20
with
KALF' Minimum effective accuracy limiting factor
50-2PU Primary pickup value of the high-current
element
ΙpNom Primary nominal transformer current
Resulting rated accuracy limiting factor
with
KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
RBC Connected burden resistance (device and
cables)
RBN Nominal burden resistance
RCt Transformer internal burden resistance
Calculation Example according to IEC 60044–1
ΙsNom = 1 A
KALF' = 20
RBC = 0.6 Ω (device and cables) KALF set to 10,
RCt = 3 Ω so that: 5P10, 5 VA
RBN = 5 Ω (5 VA)
with
ΙsNom = secondary transformer nominal current

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
D.2 Class conversion
D.2 Class conversion

Table D-1 Conversion into other classes
British Standard BS 3938
ANSI/IEEE C 57.13, Class C
ΙsNom = 5 A (typical value)

IEC 60044-6 (transient response),
class TPS
K≈ 1
KSSC≈ KALF
Calaculation see Section above with: KSSC ≈ KALF

Classes TPX, TPY, TPZ
TP depending on power system and specified closing sequence
with
Vk Knee-point voltage
RCt Internal burden resistance
RBN Nominal burden resistance
ΙsN Secondary nominal transformer current
KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
Us.t.max Sec. terminal voltage at 20 ΙpNom
Ual Sec. magnetization limit voltage
K Dimensioning factor
KSSC Factor symmetr. Rated fault current
TP Primary time constant

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
D.3 Cable Core Balance Current Transformer
D.3 Cable Core Balance Current Transformer

General
The requirements to the cable core balance current transformer are determined by the function “sensitive
ground fault detection”.
The recommendations are given according to the standard IEC 60044-1.
Requirements
Transformation ratio, typical 60 / 1

It may be necessary to select a different transformation ratio to
suit the specific power system and thus the corresponding
amount of the maximum ground fault current.
Accuracy limiting factor FS = 10
Minimum power 1.2 VA
Maximum connected load
– For secondary current threshold values ≥ 20 mA ≤ 1.2 VA (≤ 1.2 Ω)
– For secondary current threshold values < 20 mA ≤ 0.4 VA (≤ 0.4 Ω)
Class Accuracy
Table D-2 Minimum Required Class Accuracy Depending on Neutral Grounding and Function Operating
Principle
Neutral point Isolated Resonant-grounded High-resistance grounded

Function directional Class 1 Class 1 Class 1
Function non-directional Class 3 Class 1 Class 3
For extremely small ground fault currents it may become necessary to correct the angle at the device (see
function description of "sensitive ground fault detection").

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
When the device leaves the factory, a large number of LED indications, binary inputs and outputs as well as
function keys are already preset. They are summarized in the following table.
E.1 LEDs 548
E.2 Binary Input 549
E.3 Binary Output 550
E.4 Function Keys 551
E.5 Default Display 552
E.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts 555
E.7 Protocol-dependent Functions 557

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.1 LEDs
E.1 LEDs
Table E-1 Preset LED displays
LEDs Default function Function No. Description

LED1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
LED2 50/51 Ph A PU 1762 50/51 Phase A picked up
67 A picked up 2692 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
LED3 50/51 Ph B PU 1763 50/51 Phase B picked up
67 B picked up 2693 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
LED4 50/51 Ph C PU 1764 50/51 Phase C picked up
67 C picked up 2694 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up
LED5 50N/51NPickedup 1765 50N/51N picked up
67N picked up 2695 67N/67N-TOC picked up
LED6 Failure Σ I 162 Failure: Current Summation
Fail I balance 163 Failure: Current Balance
Fail V balance 167 Failure: Voltage Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. I 175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current
Fail Ph. Seq. V 176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
VT brk. wire 253 Failure VT circuit:broken wire
LED7 Not configured 1 No Function configured

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E.2 Binary Input
E.2 Binary Input

Table E-2 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description

BI1 >BLOCK 50-2 1721 >BLOCK 50-2
>BLOCK 50N-2 1724 >BLOCK 50N-2
BI2 >Reset LED 5 >Reset LED
BI3 >Light on >Back Light on
BI4 >52-b 4602 >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed)
52Breaker 52 Breaker
BI5 >52-a 4601 >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E.3 Binary Output
E.3 Binary Output

Table E-3 Further Output Relay Presettings
Binary Output Default function Function No. Description

BO1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
BO2 52Breaker 52 Breaker
79 Close 2851 79 - Close command
BO3 52Breaker 52 Breaker
79 Close 2851 79 - Close command
BO4 Failure Σ I 162 Failure: Current Summation
Fail I balance 163 Failure: Current Balance
Fail V balance 167 Failure: Voltage Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. I 175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current
Fail Ph. Seq. V 176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
VT brk. wire 253 Failure VT circuit:broken wire
BO7 Relay PICKUP 501 Relay PICKUP

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E.4 Function Keys
E.4 Function Keys

Table E-4 Only Applies to 7SJ663 Device
Function Keys Default function

F1 Display of operational indications
F2 Display of the primary operational measured values
F3 Display of the last fault event recording
F4 Not allocated

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E.5 Default Display
E.5 Default Display

In devices with 8-line displays and depending on the device version, a number of predefined measured value
pages are available. The start page of the default display appearing after startup of the device can be selected
in the device data via parameter 640 Start image DD.
In devices with graphic display, there is a default display indicating the actual operating state and/or selected
measured values. The display size is selected during configuration.
For Text Display
[sc_E-5_default_display_1, 1, en_US]
Figure E-1 Default Display 1

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E.5 Default Display
Default display 8 can only be used if one of the two special connection types (A,G2,C,G; G->B or A,G2,C,G; G2-
>B) was selected for the current connection (parameter 251 CT Connect). Please refer to the description of
Power System Data 1.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E.5 Default Display
For the Graphic Display of 7SJ66
[sc_E-5_default_display, 1, en_US]
Figure E-9 Default Display
[E.5 control display, 1, en_US]
Figure E-10 Control Display
Spontaneous Fault Indication of the 4–Line Display

The spontaneous annunciations on devices with 4–line display serve to display the most important data about
a fault. They appear automatically in the display after general interrogation of the device, in the sequence
shown in the following figure.
[anzeige-spontanmeld-im-display-20070326, 1, en_US]
Figure E-11 Display of Spontaneous Messages in the HMI
Spontaneous Fault Indication of the Graphic Display

All devices featuring a graphic display allow to select whether or not to view automatically the most important
fault data on the display after a general interrogation. The information corresponds to those of the 4–Line
Display.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts

Some CFC charts are already supplied with the SIPROTEC device. Depending on the variant the following
charts may be implemented:
Device and System Logic

The NEGATOR block assigns the input signal “DataStop” directly to an output. This is not directly possible
without the interconnection of this block.
[cfc-verbindungen-eingang-ausgang-020902-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure E-12 Logical links between input and output
Setpoints MV
Using modules on the running sequence ”measured value processing", a low current monitor for the three
phase currents is implemented. The output message is set high as soon as one of the three phase currents falls
below the set threshold:
[cfc-unterstromueberwachung-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure E-13 Undercurrent monitoring
Blocks of the task level "MW_BEARB" (measured value processing) are used to implement the overcurrent
monitoring and the power monitoring.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
[cfc-ueberstromueberwachung-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure E-14 Overcurrent monitoring
[cfc-leistungsueberwachung-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure E-15 Power monitoring

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
E.7 Protocol-dependent Functions
E.7 Protocol-dependent Functions

Protocol IEC IEC DNP3.0 DNP 3.0 TCP
Function 60870-5-10 61850 Modbus
3, single Ethernet ASCII/RT
U
Operational Yes Yes Yes Yes
Measured Values
Metered values Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault Recording Yes Yes No Yes
Remote relay No Yes No Yes
setting
User-defined Yes Yes Yes Yes
messages and
switching
objects
Time Synchroni- Yes Yes Yes Yes
zation
Messages with Yes Yes Yes Yes
time stamp
Commissioning aids
Measured value Yes Yes No No
indication
blocking
Creating test Yes Yes No No
messages
Physical mode Asynchro- Synchro- Asyn- Synchro-
nous nous chronous nous
Transmission cyclically/ cyclically/ cyclically/ cyclically/
Mode Event Event cyclically/ Event
(Modbus
)
Baud rate 1200 to up to 1200 to up to 100
115200 100 57600(M MBaud
MBaud odbus)
9600 to
57600(D
NP)
Type RS485 Ethernet RS485 Ethernet TP
TP Ethernet
optical fiber

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F Functions, Settings, Information
F.1 Functional Scope 560

F.2 Settings 563
F.3 Information List 599
F.4 Group Indications 646
F.5 Measured Values 648

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Functions, Settings, Information
F.1 Functional Scope

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Enabled Oscillographic Fault Records
Enabled
112 Charac. Phase Disabled Definite Time 50/51
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
User def. Reset
113 Charac. Ground Disabled Definite Time 50N/51N
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
User def. Reset
115 67/67-TOC Disabled Definite Time 67, 67-TOC
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
User def. Reset
116 67N/67N-TOC Disabled Definite Time 67N, 67N-TOC
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
User def. Reset
117 Coldload Pickup Disabled Disabled Cold Load Pickup
Enabled
122 InrushRestraint Disabled Disabled 2nd Harmonic Inrush Restraint
Enabled
127 50 1Ph Disabled Disabled 50 1Ph
Enabled
130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch cos φ / sin φ cos φ / sin φ (sens.) Ground fault dir. character-
V0/I0 φ mea. istic
131 Sens. Gnd Fault Disabled Disabled (sensitive) Ground fault
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
User Defined PU
Log. inverse A
Log. Inverse B

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021

133 INTERM.EF Disabled Disabled Intermittent earth fault protection
with Ignd
with 3I0
with Ignd,sens.
134 Dir. Interm. EF Disabled Disabled Dir. Intermittent earth fault
Enabled protection
135 Adm.E Fault Disabled Disabled Admittance Earth Fault Protection
Enabled
140 46 Disabled Disabled 46 Negative Sequence Protection
TOC ANSI
TOC IEC
Definite Time
141 48 Disabled Disabled 48 Startup Time Supervision for
Enabled Motors
142 49 Disabled Disabled 49 Thermal Overload Protection
No ambient temp
With amb. temp.
143 66 #of Starts Disabled Disabled 66 Startup Counter for Motors
Enabled
144 LOAD JAM PROT. Disabled Disabled Load Jam Protection
Enabled
150 27/59 Disabled Disabled 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protec-
Enabled tion
154 81 O/U Disabled Disabled 81 Over/Underfrequency Protec-
Enabled tion
155 27/Q-Protection Disabled Disabled 27 / Q dir. con. Protection
Enabled
161 25 Function 1 Disabled Disabled 25 Function group 1
ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK
170 50BF Disabled Disabled 50BF Breaker Failure Protection
Enabled
enabled w/ 3I0>
171 79 Auto Recl. Disabled Disabled 79 Auto-Reclose Function
Enabled
172 52 B.WEAR MONIT Disabled Disabled 52 Breaker Wear Monitoring
Ix-Method
2P-Method
180 Fault Locator Disabled Enabled Fault Locator
Enabled
181 L-sections FL 1 Section 1 Section Line sections for fault locator
2 Sections
3 Sections
182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled Disabled 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
2 Binary Inputs
1 Binary Input

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021

190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input
Port C
191 RTD CONNECTION 12 RTD HDX 12 RTD HDX Ext. Temperature Input Connec-
12 RTD Eth tion Type

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings
F.2 Settings
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
0 FLEXIBLE FUNC. Flx OFF OFF Flexible Function
ON
Alarm Only
0 OPERRAT. MODE Flx 3-phase 3-phase Mode of Operation
1-phase
no reference
0 BLK f out of r Flx YES YES Block while Freq. is out of
NO range
0 MEAS. QUANTITY Flx Please select Please select Selection of Measured
Current Quantity
Voltage
P forward
P reverse
Q forward
Q reverse
Power factor
dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binary Input
0 MEAS. METHOD Flx Fundamental Fundamental Selection of Measure-
True RMS ment Method
Positive seq.
Negative seq.
Zero sequence
Ratio I2/I1
0 PICKUP WITH Flx Exceeding Exceeding Pickup with
Dropping below
0 CURRENT Flx Ia Ia Current
Ib
Ic
In
In sensitive
In2

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

0 VOLTAGE Flx Please select Please select Voltage
Va-n
Vb-n
Vc-n
Va-b
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
0 POWER Flx Ia Va-n Ia Va-n Power
Ib Vb-n
Ic Vc-n
0 VOLTAGE SYSTEM Flx Phase-Phase Phase-Phase Voltage System
Phase-Ground
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A 10.00 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 1A 0.03 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.15 .. 200.00 A 10.00 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 0.001 .. 1.500 A 0.100 A Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 2.0 .. 260.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 61.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 1A 0.5 .. 10000.0 W 200.0 W Pickup Threshold
5A 2.5 .. 50000.0 W 1000.0 W
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 1A 0.5 .. 10000.0 VAR 200.0 VAR Pickup Threshold
5A 2.5 .. 50000.0 VAR 1000.0 VAR
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx -0.99 .. 0.99 0.50 Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 15 .. 100 % 20 % Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 4 .. 100 V/s 60 V/s Pickup Threshold
0 T TRIP DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec Trip Time Delay
0 T PICKUP DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0A T DROPOUT DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Dropout Time Delay
0A BLK.by Vol.Loss Flx NO YES Block in case of Meas.-
YES Voltage Loss
0A DROPOUT RATIO Flx 0.70 .. 0.99 0.95 Dropout Ratio
0A DROPOUT RATIO Flx 1.01 .. 3.00 1.05 Dropout Ratio
0A DO differential Flx 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Dropout differential
201 CT Starpoint P.System Data towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
1 towards Busbar
202 Vnom PRIMARY P.System Data 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
1
203 Vnom SECONDARY P.System Data 100 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
1 (L-L)
204 CT PRIMARY P.System Data 10 .. 50000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current
1

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

205 CT SECONDARY P.System Data 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary
1 5A Current
206A Vph / Vdelta P.System Data 0.10 .. 3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT
1 To Open-Delta-VT
207 Vnom-PRI VT V4 P.System Data 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV VT Rated Primary Voltage
1 V4
208 Vnom-SEC VT V4 P.System Data 100 .. 225 V 100 V VT Rated Secondary
1 Voltage V4
209 PHASE SEQ. P.System Data ABC ABC Phase Sequence
1 ACB
210A TMin TRIP CMD P.System Data 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command
1 Duration
211A TMax CLOSE CMD P.System Data 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close
1 Command Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN P.System Data 1A 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min.
1 5A 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A Current Threshold
213 VT Connect. 3ph P.System Data Van, Vbn, Vcn Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection, three-
1 Vab, Vbc, VGnd phase
Vab, Vbc, Vx
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn
Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy
Van,Vbn,Vcn,Vx
214 Rated Frequency P.System Data 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
1 60 Hz
215 Distance Unit P.System Data km km Distance measurement
1 Miles unit
217 Ignd-CT PRIM P.System Data 1 .. 50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary
1 current
218 Ignd-CT SEC P.System Data 1A 1A Ignd-CT rated secondary
1 5A current
235A ATEX100 P.System Data NO NO Storage of th. Replicas
1 YES w/o Power Supply
238 Ignd2-CT PRIM P.System Data 1 .. 50000 A 60 A Ignd2-CT rated primary c.
1 (conn. to I2)
240 VT Connect. 1ph P.System Data NO NO VT Connection, single-
1 Van phase
Vbn
Vcn
Vab
Vbc
Vca
250A 50/51 2-ph prot P.System Data ON OFF 50, 51 Time Overcurrent
1 OFF with 2ph. prot.
251A CT Connect. P.System Data A, B, C, (Gnd) A, B, C, (Gnd) CT Connection
1 A,G2,C,G; G->B
A,G2,C,G; G2->B
260 Ir-52 P.System Data 10 .. 50000 A 125 A Rated Normal Current (52
1 Breaker)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

261 OP.CYCLES AT Ir P.System Data 100 .. 1000000 10000 Switching Cycles at Rated
1 Normal Current
262 Isc-52 P.System Data 10 .. 100000 A 25000 A Rated Short-Circuit
1 Breaking Current
263 OP.CYCLES Isc P.System Data 1 .. 1000 50 Switch. Cycles at Rated
1 Short-Cir. Curr.
264 Ix EXPONENT P.System Data 1.0 .. 3.0 2.0 Exponent for the Ix-
1 Method
265 Cmd.via control P.System Data (Setting options none 52 B.Wear: Open Cmd.
1 depend on configu- via Control Device
ration)
266 T 52 BREAKTIME P.System Data 1 .. 600 ms 80 ms Breaktime (52 Breaker)
1
267 T 52 OPENING P.System Data 1 .. 500 ms 65 ms Opening Time (52
1 Breaker)
276 TEMP. UNIT P.System Data Celsius Celsius Unit of temperature
1 Fahrenheit measurement
280 Holmgr. for Σi P.System Data NO NO Holmgreen-conn. (for fast
1 YES sum-i-monit.)
302 CHANGE Change Group Group A Group A Change to Another
Group B Setting Group
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
401 WAVEFORM- Osc. Fault Rec. Save w. Pickup Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture
TRIGGER Save w. TRIP
Start w. TRIP
402 WAVEFORM DATA Osc. Fault Rec. Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Pow.Sys.Flt.
403 MAX. LENGTH Osc. Fault Rec. 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Wave-
form Capture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior
to Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after
Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary
Input
407 Flt.Rec.Points Osc. Fault Rec. 16 16 Fault Record Points Per
32 Cycle
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device, General Target on PU Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD
Target on TRIP
611 Spont. FltDisp. Device, General YES NO Spontaneous display of
NO flt.annunciations
613A 50N/51N/67N w. P.System Data Ignd (measured) Ignd (measured) 50N/51N/67N Ground
1 3I0 (calcul.) Overcurrent with
614A OP. QUANTITY 59 P.System Data Vphph Vphph Opera. Quantity for 59
1 Vph-n Overvolt. Prot.
V1
V2

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

615A OP. QUANTITY 27 P.System Data V1 V1 Opera. Quantity for 27
1 Vphph Undervolt. Prot.
Vph-n
617A T103 with 16 MV Device, General YES NO T103-transfer limeted to
NO 16 meas. values
OFF
625A T MIN LED HOLD Device, General 0 .. 60 min; ∞ 0 min Minimum hold time of
latched LEDs
640 Start image DD Device, General image 1 image 1 Start image Default
image 2 Display
image 3
image 4
image 5
image 6
image 7
image 8
image 9
image 10
700 GOOSE-Stop Device, General YES NO GOOSE-Stop
NO
1101 FullScaleVolt. P.System Data 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV Measurem:FullScale-
2 Voltage(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. P.System Data 10 .. 50000 A 100 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-
2 rent(Equipm.rating)
1103 RE/RL P.System Data -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. compensating
2 factor RE/RL
1104 XE/XL P.System Data -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. compensating
2 factor XE/XL
1105 x' P.System Data 1A 0.0050 .. 0.2420 Ω/mi feeder reactance per
2 15.0000 Ω/mi mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 0.0484 Ω/mi
3.0000 Ω/mi
1106 x' P.System Data 1A 0.0050 .. 0.1500 Ω/km feeder reactance per km:
2 9.5000 Ω/km x'
5A 0.0010 .. 0.0300 Ω/km
1.9000 Ω/km
1107 I MOTOR START P.System Data 1A 0.40 .. 10.00 A 2.50 A Motor Start Current
2 5A 2.00 .. 50.00 A 12.50 A (Block 49, Start 48)
1108 P,Q sign P.System Data not reversed not reversed P,Q operational measured
2 reversed values sign
1109 Line angle P.System Data 10 .. 89 ° 85 ° Line angle
2
1110 Line length P.System Data 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km Line length in kilometer
2
1111 Line length P.System Data 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles Line length in miles
2
1201 FCT 50/51 50/51 Overcur. ON ON 50, 51 Phase Time Over-
OFF current
1202 50-2 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 50-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

1203 50-2 DELAY 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50-2 Time Delay
1204 50-1 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 50-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1207 51 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1208 51 TIME DIAL 50/51 Overcur. 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51 Time Dial
1209 51 TIME DIAL 50/51 Overcur. 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51 Time Dial
1210 51 Drop-out 50/51 Overcur. Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-out characteristic
Disk Emulation
1211 51 IEC CURVE 50/51 Overcur. Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
1212 51 ANSI CURVE 50/51 Overcur. Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
1213A MANUAL CLOSE 50/51 Overcur. 50-3 instant. 50-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
50-2 instant.
50 -1 instant.
51 instant.
Inactive
1214A 50-2 active 50/51 Overcur. Always Always 50-2 active
with 79 active
1215A 50 T DROP-OUT 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50 Drop-Out Time Delay
1216A 50-3 active 50/51 Overcur. Always Always 50-3 active
with 79 active
1217 50-3 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 50-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞A
1219A 50-3 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental Fundamental 50-3 measurement of
True RMS
Instantaneous
True RMS
True RMS
1222A 51 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental Fundamental 51 measurement of
True RMS
1223 VOLT. INFLUENCE 50/51 Overcur. NO NO 51V Voltage Influence
Volt. controll.
Volt. restraint
1224 51V V< 50/51 Overcur. 10.0 .. 125.0 V 75.0 V 51V V< Threshold for
Release Ip

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

1230 51/51N 50/51 Overcur. 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞ 51/51N
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1231 MofPU Res T/Tp 50/51 Overcur. 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <->
0.01 .. 999.00 TD T/Tp
1301 FCT 50N/51N 50/51 Overcur. ON ON 50N, 51N Ground Time
OFF Overcurrent
1302 50N-2 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 50N-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
1303 50N-2 DELAY 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50N-2 Time Delay
1304 50N-1 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 50N-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1307 51N PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A 51N Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1308 51N TIME DIAL 50/51 Overcur. 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 51N Time Dial
1309 51N TIME DIAL 50/51 Overcur. 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51N Time Dial
1310 51N Drop-out 50/51 Overcur. Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
Disk Emulation
1311 51N IEC CURVE 50/51 Overcur. Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
1312 51N ANSI CURVE 50/51 Overcur. Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
1313A MANUAL CLOSE 50/51 Overcur. 50N-3 instant. 50N-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
50N-2 instant.
50N-1 instant.
51N instant.
Inactive
1314A 50N-2 active 50/51 Overcur. Always Always 50N-2 active
With 79 Active
1315A 50N T DROP-OUT 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50N Drop-Out Time Delay
1316A 50N-3 active 50/51 Overcur. Always Always 50N-3 active
with 79 active
1317 50N-3 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 50N-3 Pickup
1319A 50N-3 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental Fundamental 50N-3 measurement of
True RMS
Instantaneous
True RMS
True RMS

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

1322A 51N measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental Fundamental 51N measurement of
True RMS
1330 50N/51N 50/51 Overcur. 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞ 50N/51N
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1331 MofPU Res T/TEp 50/51 Overcur. 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <->
0.01 .. 999.00 TD T/TEp
1501 FCT 67/67-TOC 67 Direct. O/C OFF OFF 67, 67-TOC Phase Time
ON Overcurrent
1502 67-2 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 67-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1503 67-2 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 67-2 Time Delay
1504 67-1 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 67-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1505 67-1 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-1Time Delay
1507 67-TOC PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 67-TOC Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1508 67 TIME DIAL 67 Direct. O/C 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-TOC Time Dial
1509 67 TIME DIAL 67 Direct. O/C 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67-TOC Time Dial
1510 67-TOC Drop-out 67 Direct. O/C Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
Disk Emulation
1511 67- IEC CURVE 67 Direct. O/C Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
1512 67- ANSI CURVE 67 Direct. O/C Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
1513A MANUAL CLOSE 67 Direct. O/C 67-3 instant. 67-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
67-2 instant.
67-1 instant.
67-TOC instant.
Inactive
1514A 67-2 active 67 Direct. O/C with 79 active always 67-2 active
always
1518A 67 T DROP-OUT 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 67 Drop-Out Time Delay
1519A ROTATION ANGLE 67 Direct. O/C -180 .. 180 ° 45 ° Rotation Angle of Refer-
ence Voltage
1520A 67-2 MEASUREM. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental Fundamental 67-2 measurement of
True RMS
True RMS
1522A 67-TOC MEASUR. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental Fundamental 67-TOC measurement of
True RMS

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

1523 67-2 Direction 67 Direct. O/C Forward Forward 67-2 Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
Reverse
Non-Directional
1525 67-TOC Direct. 67 Direct. O/C Forward Forward 67-TOC Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
Reverse
Non-Directional
True RMS
1528 67-3 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 67-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞A
1529 67-3 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67-3 Time Delay
1530 67 67 Direct. O/C 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞ 67
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1531 MofPU Res T/Tp 67 Direct. O/C 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <->
0.01 .. 999.00 TD T/Tp
1532A 67-3 active 67 Direct. O/C always always 67-3 active
with 79 active
1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC 67 Direct. O/C OFF OFF 67N, 67N-TOC Ground
ON Time Overcurrent
1602 67N-2 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 67N-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
1603 67N-2 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 67N-2 Time Delay
1604 67N-1 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 67N-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1607 67N-TOC PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A 67N-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL 67 Direct. O/C 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 67N-TOC Time Dial
1609 67N-TOC T-DIAL 67 Direct. O/C 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67N-TOC Time Dial
1610 67N-TOC DropOut 67 Direct. O/C Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
Disk Emulation
1611 67N-TOC IEC 67 Direct. O/C Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
1612 67N-TOC ANSI 67 Direct. O/C Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

1613A MANUAL CLOSE 67 Direct. O/C 67N-3 instant. 67N-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
67N-2 instant.
67N-1 instant.
67N-TOC instant
Inactive
1614A 67N-2 active 67 Direct. O/C always always 67N-2 active
with 79 active
1617 67N POLARIZAT. 67 Direct. O/C with VN and IN with VN and IN Ground Polarization
with V2 and I2
1618A 67N T DROP-OUT 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 67N Drop-Out Time Delay
1619A ROTATION ANGLE 67 Direct. O/C -180 .. 180 ° -45 ° Rotation Angle of Refer-
ence Voltage
1620A 67N-2 MEASUREM. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental Fundamental 67N-2 measurement of
True RMS
True RMS
1622A 67N-TOC MEASUR. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental Fundamental 67N-TOC measurement
True RMS of
1623 67N-2 Direction 67 Direct. O/C Forward Forward 67N-2 Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
Reverse
Non-Directional
1625 67N-TOC Direct. 67 Direct. O/C Forward Forward 67N-TOC Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
Reverse
Non-Directional
True RMS
1628 67N-3 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 0.50 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 67N-3 Pickup
1630 M.of PU TD 67 Direct. O/C 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞ Multiples of PU Time-Dial
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp 67 Direct. O/C 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞ 67N TOC
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
1632A 67N-3 active 67 Direct. O/C always always 67N-3 active
with 79 active
1701 COLDLOAD PICKUP ColdLoadPickup OFF OFF Cold-Load-Pickup Func-
ON tion
1702 Start Condition ColdLoadPickup No Current No Current Start Condition
Breaker Contact
79 ready
1703 CB Open Time ColdLoadPickup 0 .. 21600 sec 3600 sec Circuit Breaker OPEN
Time
1704 Active Time ColdLoadPickup 1 .. 21600 sec 3600 sec Active Time

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

1705 Stop Time ColdLoadPickup 1 .. 600 sec; ∞ 600 sec Stop Time
1801 50c-2 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A 50c-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 50.00 A
1802 50c-2 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50c-2 Time Delay
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1805 51c PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.50 A 51c Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 7.50 A
1806 51c TIME DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51c Time dial
1807 51c TIME DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51c Time dial
1808 50c-3 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 50c-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞A
1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 7.00 A 50Nc-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 35.00 A
1902 50Nc-2 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50Nc-2 Time Delay
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 7.50 A
1905 51Nc PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51Nc Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1906 51Nc T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51Nc Time Dial
1907 51Nc T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51Nc Time Dial
1908 50Nc-3 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 50Nc-3 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 50.00 A
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
2005 67c-TOC PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.50 A 67c Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 7.50 A
2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67c Time Dial
2007 67c-TOC T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67c Time Dial
2008 67c-3 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 67c-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞A
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 35.00 A
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 7.50 A
2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 67Nc-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

2106 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2107 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2108 67Nc-3 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞A 67Nc-3 Pickup
2201 INRUSH REST. 50/51 Overcur. OFF OFF Inrush Restraint
ON
2202 2nd HARMONIC 50/51 Overcur. 10 .. 45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of
fundamental
2203 CROSS BLOCK 50/51 Overcur. NO NO Cross Block
YES
2204 CROSS BLK TIMER 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 180.00 sec 0.00 sec Cross Block Time
2205 I Max 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.30 .. 25.00 A 7.50 A Maximum Current for
5A 1.50 .. 125.00 A 37.50 A Inrush Restraint
2701 50 1Ph 50 1Ph OFF OFF 50 1Ph
ON
2702 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP 50 1Ph 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 50 1Ph-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
2703 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP 50 1Ph 0.003 .. 1.500 A; ∞ 0.300 A 50 1Ph-2 Pickup
2704 50 1Ph-2 DELAY 50 1Ph 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50 1Ph-2 Time Delay
2705 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP 50 1Ph 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 50 1Ph-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
2706 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP 50 1Ph 0.003 .. 1.500 A; ∞ 0.100 A 50 1Ph-1 Pickup
2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY 50 1Ph 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50 1Ph-1 Time Delay
3101 Sens. Gnd Fault Sens. Gnd Fault OFF OFF (Sensitive) Ground Fault
ON
ON with GF log
Alarm Only
3102 CT Err. I1 Sens. Gnd Fault 0.001 .. 1.600 A 0.050 A Current I1 for CT Angle
Adm.E Fault Error
3102 CT Err. I1 Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Current I1 for CT Angle
Adm.E Fault 5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A Error
3103 CT Err. F1 Sens. Gnd Fault 0.0 .. 5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I1
Adm.E Fault
3104 CT Err. I2 Sens. Gnd Fault 0.001 .. 1.600 A 1.000 A Current I2 for CT Angle
Adm.E Fault Error
3104 CT Err. I2 Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 10.00 A Current I2 for CT Angle
Adm.E Fault 5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A Error
3105 CT Err. F2 Sens. Gnd Fault 0.0 .. 5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I2
Adm.E Fault
3106 VPH MIN Sens. Gnd Fault 10 .. 100 V 40 V L-Gnd Voltage of Faulted
Phase Vph Min
3107 VPH MAX Sens. Gnd Fault 10 .. 100 V 75 V L-Gnd Voltage of
Unfaulted Phase Vph Max
3109 64-1 VGND Sens. Gnd Fault 1.8 .. 170.0 V; ∞ 40.0 V 64-1 Ground Displace-
ment Voltage
3110 64-1 VGND Sens. Gnd Fault 10.0 .. 225.0 V; ∞ 70.0 V 64-1 Ground Displace-
ment Voltage

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

3111 T-DELAY Pickup Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; 1.00 sec Time-DELAY Pickup
∞
3112 64-1 DELAY Sens. Gnd Fault 0.10 .. 10.00 sec 64-1 Time Delay
40000.00 sec; ∞
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 0.001 .. 1.500 A 0.300 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 10.00 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; 1.00 sec 50Ns-2 Time Delay
∞
3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT Sens. Gnd Fault Forward Forward 67Ns-2 Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 0.001 .. 1.500 A 0.100 A 50Ns-1 Pickup
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 2.00 A 50Ns-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 10.00 A
3118 50Ns-1 DELAY Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; 2.00 sec 50Ns-1 Time delay
∞
3119 51Ns PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 0.001 .. 1.400 A 0.100 A 51Ns Pickup
3119 51Ns PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 0.003 .. 0.500 A 0.004 A 51Ns Pickup
3119 51Ns PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51Ns Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
3120 51NsTIME DIAL Sens. Gnd Fault 0.05 .. 4.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 51Ns Time Dial
3120 51c TIME DIAL Sens. Gnd Fault 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51c Time dial
3121A 50Ns T DROP-OUT Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50Ns Drop-Out Time
Delay
3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. Sens. Gnd Fault Forward Forward 67Ns-1 Direction
Reverse
Non-Directional
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. Sens. Gnd Fault 0.001 .. 1.200 A 0.010 A Release directional
element
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 30.00 A 0.50 A Release directional
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A element
3124 PHI CORRECTION Sens. Gnd Fault -45.0 .. 45.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for Dir.
Determination
3125 MEAS. METHOD Sens. Gnd Fault COS φ COS φ Measurement method for
SIN φ Direction
3126 RESET DELAY Sens. Gnd Fault 0 .. 60 sec 1 sec Reset Delay
3127 51Ns I T min Sens. Gnd Fault 0.003 .. 1.400 A 1.333 A 51Ns Current at const.
Time Delay T min
3127 51Ns I T min Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 15.00 A 51Ns Current at const.
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 75.00 A Time Delay T min
3128 51Ns I T knee Sens. Gnd Fault 0.003 .. 0.650 A 0.040 A 51Ns Current at Knee
Point
3128 51Ns I T knee Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 17.00 A 5.00 A 51Ns Current at Knee
5A 0.25 .. 85.00 A 25.00 A Point
3129 51Ns T knee Sens. Gnd Fault 0.20 .. 100.00 sec 23.60 sec 51Ns Time Delay at Knee
Point
3130 PU CRITERIA Sens. Gnd Fault Vgnd OR INs Vgnd OR INs Sensitive Ground Fault
Vgnd AND INs PICKUP criteria

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

3131 M.of PU TD Sens. Gnd Fault 1.00 .. Multiples of PU Time-Dial
20.00 MofPU; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
3132 51Ns TD Sens. Gnd Fault 0.05 .. 1.50 0.20 51Ns Time Dial
3140 51Ns Tmin Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 1.20 sec 51Ns Minimum Time
Delay
3140 51Ns T min Sens. Gnd Fault 0.10 .. 30.00 sec 0.80 sec 51Ns Minimum Time
Delay
3141 51Ns Tmax Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 5.80 sec 51Ns Maximum Time
Delay
3141 51Ns T max Sens. Gnd Fault 0.50 .. 200.00 sec 93.00 sec 51Ns Maximum Time
Delay (at 51Ns PU)
3142 51Ns TIME DIAL Sens. Gnd Fault 0.05 .. 15.00 sec; ∞ 1.35 sec 51Ns Time Dial
3143 51Ns Startpoint Sens. Gnd Fault 1.0 .. 4.0 1.1 51Ns Start Point of
Inverse Charac.
3144 51Ns IEC CURVE Sens. Gnd Fault Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
3145 51Ns ANSI CURVE Sens. Gnd Fault Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
3146 51Ns Drop-out Sens. Gnd Fault Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-out characteristic
Disk Emulation
3150 50Ns-2 Vmin Sens. Gnd Fault 1.8 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V 50Ns-2 minimum voltage
3151 50Ns-2 Phi Sens. Gnd Fault -180.0 .. 180.0 ° -90.0 ° 50Ns-2 angle phi
3152 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi Sens. Gnd Fault 0.0 .. 180.0 ° 30.0 ° 50Ns-2 angle delta phi
3154 50Ns-1 Phi Sens. Gnd Fault -180.0 .. 180.0 ° -160.0 ° 50Ns-1 angle phi
3155 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi Sens. Gnd Fault 0.0 .. 180.0 ° 100.0 ° 50Ns-1 angle delta phi
3160 α1 red.dir.area Sens. Gnd Fault 1 .. 15 ° 2° Alpha1 (reduction direc-
tional area)
3161 α2 red.dir.area Sens. Gnd Fault 1 .. 15 ° 2° Alpha2 (reduction direc-
tional area)
3301 INTERM.EF Intermit. EF OFF OFF Intermittent earth fault
ON protection
3302 Iie> Intermit. EF 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm.
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A E/F stage
3302 Iie> Intermit. EF 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm.
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A E/F stage
3302 Iie> Intermit. EF 0.005 .. 1.500 A 1.000 A Pick-up value of interm.
E/F stage
3303 T-det.ext. Intermit. EF 0.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.10 sec Detection extension time

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

3304 T-sum det. Intermit. EF 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 20.00 sec Sum of detection times
3305 T-reset Intermit. EF 1 .. 600 sec 300 sec Reset time
3306 Nos.det. Intermit. EF 2 .. 10 3 No. of det. for start of int.
E/F prot
3401 Dir. Interm. EF Dir. Interm. EF OFF OFF Dir. Intermittent earth
ON fault protection
ON with GF log
Alarm Only
3402 Direction Dir. Interm. EF Forward Forward Direction to be protected
Reverse
3403 No. of pulses Dir. Interm. EF 2 .. 50 5 Pulse no. for detecting
the interm. E/F
3404 Monitoring time Dir. Interm. EF 0.04 .. 10.00 sec 2.00 sec Monitoring time after
pickup detected
3405 Vgnd> / 3V0> Dir. Interm. EF 2.0 .. 100.0 V 20.0 V Vgnd> measured / 3V0>
calculated
3406 Pickup Dir. Interm. EF with Vgnd/3V0> with Vgnd/3V0> Pickup of the function
with oper. dir.
3500 Adm.E Fault Adm.E Fault OFF OFF Admittance Earth Fault
ON Protection
Alarm Only
3501 Y0 PU T Delay Adm.E Fault 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Y0 Pickup Time Delay
3511 Y0-4 DIR Mode Adm.E Fault Forward Non-Directional Y0(G0/B0)-4 Directional
Reverse mode
Non-Directional
3512 Thr V0-4 Adm.E Fault 1.8 .. 170.0 V; ∞ 5.0 V Y0(G0/B0)-4 V0 Threshold
Value
Value
3513 Thr Y0-4 Adm.E Fault 0.10 .. 100.00 mS; 2.00 mS Y0(G0/B0)-4 Threshold
∞ Value
3514 Y0-4 Trip delay Adm.E Fault 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec Y0(G0/B0)-4 Trip Delay
Time
Reverse mode
Non-Directional
Value
Value
∞ Value
Time
Reverse mode
Non-Directional
Value

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

Value
∞ Value
Time
Reverse mode
Non-Directional
Value
Value
∞ Value
Time
3550 Y0-4 REL DIR Adm.E Fault 0.003 .. 1.200 A 0.010 A Y0 G0/B0-4 3I0 Release
Dir
3550 Y0-4 REL DIR Adm.E Fault 1A 0.05 .. 30.00 A 0.50 A Y0 G0/B0-4 3I0 Release
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A Dir
3551 Y0-4 MEAS.MTD Adm.E Fault G0 G0 Y0 G0/B0-4 Dir Measuring
B0 Method
3552 Y0-4 DIR Delay Adm.E Fault 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.10 sec Y0 G0/B0-4 Dir
Determin.Delay Time
Dir
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A Dir
B0 Method
Determin.Delay Time
Dir
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A Dir
B0 Method
Determin.Delay Time
Dir
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A Dir
B0 Method
Determin.Delay Time
3562 PHI CORRECT Adm.E Fault -45.0 .. 45.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for DIR

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

3563 Alpha1 Adm.E Fault 1 .. 15 ° 2° Alpha1(reduction direc-
tional area)
3564 Alpha2 Adm.E Fault 1 .. 15 ° 2° Alpha2(reduction direc-
tional area)
4001 FCT 46 46 Negative OFF OFF 46 Negative Sequence
Seq ON Protection
4002 46-1 PICKUP 46 Negative 1A 0.05 .. 3.00 A 0.10 A 46-1 Pickup
Seq 5A 0.25 .. 15.00 A 0.50 A
4003 46-1 DELAY 46 Negative 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 46-1 Time Delay
Seq
4004 46-2 PICKUP 46 Negative 1A 0.05 .. 3.00 A 0.50 A 46-2 Pickup
Seq 5A 0.25 .. 15.00 A 2.50 A
4005 46-2 DELAY 46 Negative 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 46-2 Time Delay
Seq
4006 46 IEC CURVE 46 Negative Normal Inverse Extremely Inv. 46 IEC Curve
Seq Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
4007 46 ANSI CURVE 46 Negative Extremely Inv. Extremely Inv. 46 ANSI Curve
Seq Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
4008 46-TOC PICKUP 46 Negative 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.90 A 46-TOC Pickup
Seq 5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 4.50 A
4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 46 Negative 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 46-TOC Time Dial
Seq
4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 46 Negative 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 46-TOC Time Dial
Seq
4011 46-TOC RESET 46 Negative Instantaneous Instantaneous 46-TOC Drop Out
Seq Disk Emulation
4012A 46 T DROP-OUT 46 Negative 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 46 Drop-Out Time Delay
Seq
4101 FCT 48 48/66 Motor- OFF OFF 48 Startup Time Supervi-
prot ON sion for Motors
4102 STARTUP CURRENT 48/66 Motor- 1A 0.50 .. 16.00 A 5.00 A Startup Current
prot 5A 2.50 .. 80.00 A 25.00 A
4103 STARTUP TIME 48/66 Motor- 1.0 .. 180.0 sec 10.0 sec Startup Time
prot
4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME 48/66 Motor- 0.5 .. 180.0 sec; ∞ 2.0 sec Permissible Locked Rotor
prot Time
4105 STARTUP T WARM 48/66 Motor- 0.5 .. 180.0 sec; ∞ 10.0 sec Startup Time for warm
prot motor
4106 TEMP.COLD 48/66 Motor- 0 .. 80 %; ∞ 25 % Temperature limit for cold
MOTOR prot motor
4201 FCT 49 49 Th.Overload OFF OFF 49 Thermal overload
ON protection
Alarm Only
4202 49 K-FACTOR 49 Th.Overload 0.10 .. 4.00 1.10 49 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT 49 Th.Overload 1.0 .. 999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
4204 49 Θ ALARM 49 Th.Overload 50 .. 100 % 90 % 49 Thermal Alarm Stage

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

4205 I ALARM 49 Th.Overload 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A Setpoint
4207A Kτ-FACTOR 49 Th.Overload 1.0 .. 10.0 1.0 Kt-FACTOR when motor
stops
4208A T EMERGENCY 49 Th.Overload 10 .. 15000 sec 100 sec Emergency time
4209 49 TEMP. RISE I 49 Th.Overload 40 .. 200 °C 100 °C 49 Temperature rise at
rated sec. curr.
4210 49 TEMP. RISE I 49 Th.Overload 104 .. 392 °F 212 °F 49 Temperature rise at
rated sec. curr.
4211 TEMPSENSOR RTD 49 Th.Overload 1 .. 6 1 Temperature sensor
connected to RTD
4212 TEMPSENSOR RTD 49 Th.Overload 1 .. 12 1 Temperature sensor
connected to RTD
4301 FCT 66 48/66 Motor- OFF OFF 66 Startup Counter for
prot ON Motors
4302 IStart/IMOTnom 48/66 Motor- 1.10 .. 10.00 4.90 I Start / I Motor nominal
prot
4303 T START MAX 48/66 Motor- 1 .. 320 sec 10 sec Maximum Permissible
prot Starting Time
4304 T Equal 48/66 Motor- 0.0 .. 320.0 min 1.0 min Temperature Equalizaton
prot Time
4305 I MOTOR NOMINAL 48/66 Motor- 1A 0.20 .. 1.20 A 1.00 A Rated Motor Current
prot 5A 1.00 .. 6.00 A 5.00 A
4306 MAX.WARM 48/66 Motor- 1 .. 4 2 Maximum Number of
STARTS prot Warm Starts
4307 #COLD-#WARM 48/66 Motor- 1 .. 2 1 Number of Cold Starts -
prot Warm Starts
4308 Kτ at STOP 48/66 Motor- 0.2 .. 100.0 5.0 Extension of Time
prot Constant at Stop
4309 Kτ at RUNNING 48/66 Motor- 0.2 .. 100.0 2.0 Extension of Time
prot Constant at Running
4310 T MIN. INHIBIT 48/66 Motor- 0.2 .. 120.0 min 6.0 min Minimum Restart Inhibit
prot Time
4311 ROTOR OVERLOAD 48/66 Motor- ON ON Rotor Overload Protection
prot OFF
Alarm Only
4401 Load Jam Prot. 48/66 Motor- OFF OFF Load Jam Protection
prot ON
Alarm Only
4402 Load Jam I> 48/66 Motor- 1A 0.50 .. 12.00 A 2.00 A Load Jam Tripping
prot 5A 2.50 .. 60.00 A 10.00 A Threshold
4403 TRIP DELAY 48/66 Motor- 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 1.00 sec Load Jam Trip Delay
prot
4404 I Alarm 48/66 Motor- 1A 0.50 .. 12.00 A 1.80 A Load Jam Alarm
prot 5A 2.50 .. 60.00 A 9.00 A Threshold
4405 ALARM DELAY 48/66 Motor- 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 1.00 sec Load Jam Alarm Delay
prot
4406 T Start Blk. 48/66 Motor- 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 10.00 sec Load Jam Blocking after
prot motor start

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

5001 FCT 59 27/59 O/U Volt. OFF OFF 59 Overvoltage Protec-
ON tion
Alarm Only
5002 59-1 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 40 .. 260 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5004 59-1 DELAY 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 0.50 sec 59-1 Time Delay
∞
∞
5015 59-1-V2 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 2 .. 150 V 30 V 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage
(neg. seq.)
5016 59-2-V2 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 2 .. 150 V 50 V 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage
(neg. seq.)
5017A 59-1 DOUT RATIO 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.90 .. 0.99 0.95 59-1 Dropout Ratio
5019 59-1 PICKUP V1 27/59 O/U Volt. 40 .. 150 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup V1
5020 59-2 PICKUP V1 27/59 O/U Volt. 40 .. 150 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup V1
5101 FCT 27 27/59 O/U Volt. OFF OFF 27 Undervoltage Protec-
ON tion
Alarm Only
∞
∞
5120A CURRENT SUPERV. 27/59 O/U Volt. OFF ON Current Supervision
ON
5201 VT BROKEN WIRE Meas- ON OFF VT broken wire supervi-
urem.Superv OFF sion
5202 Σ V> Meas- 1.0 .. 100.0 V 8.0 V Threshold voltage sum
urem.Superv
5203 Vph-ph max< Meas- 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Maximum phase to phase
urem.Superv voltage
5204 Vph-ph min< Meas- 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Minimum phase to phase
urem.Superv voltage
5205 Vph-ph max-min> Meas- 10.0 .. 200.0 V 16.0 V Symmetry phase to phase
urem.Superv voltages
5206 I min> Meas- 1A 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A Minimum line current
urem.Superv 5A 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A
5208 T DELAY ALARM Meas- 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 1.25 sec Alarm delay time
urem.Superv

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

5301 FUSE FAIL MON. Meas- OFF OFF Fuse Fail Monitor
urem.Superv Solid grounded
Coil.gnd./isol.
5302 FUSE FAIL 3Vo Meas- 10 .. 100 V 30 V Zero Sequence Voltage
urem.Superv
5303 FUSE FAIL RESID Meas- 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Residual Current
urem.Superv 5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
5308A FFM Idiff (3ph) Meas- 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Differential Current
urem.Superv 5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A Threshold (3phase)
5310 BLOCK PROT. Meas- NO YES Block protection by FFM
urem.Superv YES
5401 FCT 81 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF OFF 81 Over/Under Frequency
ON Protection
5402 Vmin 81 O/U Freq. 10 .. 150 V 65 V Minimum required
voltage for operation
5403 81-1 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup
5405 81-1 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 60.00 sec 81-1 Time Delay
∞
5408 81-2 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 30.00 sec 81-2 Time Delay
∞
5411 81-3 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 3.00 sec 81-3 Time delay
∞
5414 81-4 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 30.00 sec 81-4 Time delay
∞
5415A DO differential 81 O/U Freq. 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Dropout differential
5421 FCT 81-1 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF OFF 81-1 Over/Under
ON f> Frequency Protection
ON f<
ON f<
ON f<
ON f<
5501 27/Q-Protection 27/Q OFF OFF 27 / Q dir. con. Protection
ON
5502 I-Release 27/Q 1A 0.02 .. 0.20 A 0.10 A Current-Rel. for Trip and
5A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Reclose

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

5503 Inrush blk 27/Q NO NO blocking with inrush
YES
5511 Q> Pickup 27/Q 1A 1.70 .. 8.70 VAR Reactive power threshold
10000.00 VAR for pickup
5A 8.50 .. 43.50 VAR
50000.00 VAR
5512 U< Pickup 27/Q 10.00 .. 210.00 V 85.00 V Undervoltage threshold
for pickup
5513 Delay Gen. CB 27/Q 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.50 sec Trip time delay generator
CB
5514 Delay Grid CB 27/Q 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 1.50 sec Trip time delay grid CB
5521 Recl. release 27/Q OFF OFF Reclosure release
ON
5522 U> Reclose 27/Q 10.00 .. 210.00 V 95.00 V Voltage threshold for
reclosure rel.
5523 T Reclose 27/Q 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 0.00 sec Reclosure Delay Time
5524 Pos. f-diff 27/Q 0.01 .. 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz Pos. f-diff threshold for
reclosure rel.
5525 Neg. f-diff 27/Q -5.00 .. -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz Neg. f-diff threshold for
reclosure rel.
5526A Incl. 27/Q Trip 27/Q NO NO Include 27/Q Trip for
YES reclosure rel.
6001 S1: RE/RL P.System Data -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S1: Zero seq. compen-
2 sating factor RE/RL
6002 S1: XE/XL P.System Data -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S1: Zero seq. compen-
2 sating factor XE/XL
6003 S1: x' P.System Data 1A 0.0050 .. 0.2420 Ω/mi S1: feeder reactance per
2 15.0000 Ω/mi mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 0.0484 Ω/mi
3.0000 Ω/mi
6004 S1: x' P.System Data 1A 0.0050 .. 0.1500 Ω/km S1: feeder reactance per
2 9.5000 Ω/km km: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 0.0300 Ω/km
1.9000 Ω/km
6005 S1: Line angle P.System Data 10 .. 89 ° 85 ° S1: Line angle
2
6006 S1: line length P.System Data 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S1: Line length in miles
2
6007 S1: Line length P.System Data 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km S1: Line length in kilo-
2 meter
2 15.0000 Ω/mi mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 0.0484 Ω/mi
3.0000 Ω/mi

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

2 9.5000 Ω/km km: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 0.0300 Ω/km
1.9000 Ω/km
2
6016 S2: line length P.System Data 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S2: line length in miles
2
2 meter
2 15.0000 Ω/mi mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 0.0484 Ω/mi
3.0000 Ω/mi
2 9.5000 Ω/km km: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 0.0300 Ω/km
1.9000 Ω/km
2
6026 S3: line length P.System Data 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S3: line length in miles
2
2 meter
6101 Synchronizing SYNC function ON OFF Synchronizing Function
1 OFF
6102 SyncCB SYNC function (Setting options none Synchronizable circuit
1 depend on configu- breaker
ration)
6103 Vmin SYNC function 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum voltage limit:
1 Vmin
6104 Vmax SYNC function 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum voltage limit:
1 Vmax
6105 V< SYNC function 1 .. 60 V 5V Threshold V1, V2 without
1 voltage
6106 V> SYNC function 20 .. 140 V 80 V Threshold V1, V2 with
1 voltage
6107 SYNC V1<V2> SYNC function YES NO ON-Command at V1< and
1 NO V2>
6108 SYNC V1>V2< SYNC function YES NO ON-Command at V1> and
1 NO V2<
6109 SYNC V1<V2< SYNC function YES NO ON-Command at V1< and
1 NO V2<
6110A Direct CO SYNC function YES NO Direct ON-Command
1 NO
6111A TSUP VOLTAGE SYNC function 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time of
1 V1>;V2> or V1<;V2<

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

6112 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function 0.01 .. 1200.00 sec; 30.00 sec Maximum duration of
1 ∞ Synchronization
6113A 25 Synchron SYNC function YES YES Switching at synchronous
1 NO condition
6120 T-CB close SYNC function 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time
1 of CB
6121 Balancing V1/V2 SYNC function 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing factor V1/V2
1
6122A ANGLE ADJUSTM. SYNC function 0 .. 360 ° 0° Angle adjustment (trans-
1 former)
6123 CONNECTIONof V2 SYNC function A-G A-B Connection of V2
1 B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
C-A
6125 VT Vn2, primary SYNC function 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 12.00 kV VT nominal voltage V2,
1 primary
6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 SYNC function 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage differ-
1 ence V2>V1
6151 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 SYNC function 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage differ-
1 ence V2<V1
6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 SYNC function 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency
1 difference f2>f1
6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 SYNC function 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency
1 difference f2<f1
6154 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 SYNC function 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle differ-
1 ence alpha2>alpha1
6155 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 SYNC function 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle differ-
1 ence alpha2<alpha1
7001 FCT 50BF 50BF BkrFailure OFF OFF 50BF Breaker Failure
ON Protection
7004 Chk BRK CONTACT 50BF BkrFailure OFF OFF Check Breaker contacts
ON
7005 TRIP-Timer 50BF BkrFailure 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
7006 50BF PICKUP 50BF BkrFailure 1A 0.03 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A 50BF Pickup current
5A 0.15 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A threshold
7007 50BF PICKUP IE> 50BF BkrFailure 0.03 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A 50BF Pickup earth current
threshold
7008 50BF-2 Delay 50BF BkrFailure 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Delay of 2nd stage for
busbar trip
7101 FCT 79 79M Auto Recl. OFF OFF 79 Auto-Reclose Function
ON
7103 BLOCK MC Dur. 79M Auto Recl. 0.50 .. 320.00 sec; 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after
0 manual close
7105 TIME RESTRAINT 79M Auto Recl. 0.50 .. 320.00 sec 3.00 sec 79 Auto Reclosing reset
time
7108 SAFETY 79 ready 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Safety Time until 79 is
ready

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

7113 CHECK CB? 79M Auto Recl. No check No check Check circuit breaker
Chk each cycle before AR?
7114 T-Start MONITOR 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec; 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring
∞ time
7115 CB TIME OUT 79M Auto Recl. 0.10 .. 320.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB)
Supervision Time
7116 Max. DEAD EXT. 79M Auto Recl. 0.50 .. 1800.00 sec; 100.00 sec Maximum dead time
∞ extension
7117 T-ACTION 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ sec Action time
∞
7118 T DEAD DELAY 79M Auto Recl. 0.0 .. 1800.0 sec; ∞ 1.0 sec Maximum Time Delay of
Dead-Time Start
7127 DEADTIME 1: PH 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Phase Fault
7128 DEADTIME 1: G 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Ground
Fault
Fault
Fault
Fault
7135 # OF RECL. GND 79M Auto Recl. 0 .. 9 1 Number of Reclosing
Cycles Ground
7136 # OF RECL. PH 79M Auto Recl. 0 .. 9 1 Number of Reclosing
Cycles Phase
7137 Cmd.via control 79M Auto Recl. (Setting options none Close command via
depend on configu- control device
ration)
7138 Internal SYNC 79M Auto Recl. (Setting options none Internal 25 synchronisa-
depend on configu- tion
ration)
7139 External SYNC 79M Auto Recl. YES NO External 25 synchronisa-
NO tion
7140 ZONE SEQ.COORD. 79M Auto Recl. OFF OFF ZSC - Zone sequence
ON coordination
7150 50-1 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 50-1
Starts 79
Stops 79
7151 50N-1 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 50N-1
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

7154 51 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 51
Starts 79
Stops 79
7155 51N 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 51N
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
7160 67 TOC 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 67 TOC
Starts 79
Stops 79
7161 67N TOC 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 67N TOC
Starts 79
Stops 79
7163 46 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 46
Starts 79
Stops 79
7164 BINARY INPUT 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence Binary Input
Starts 79
Stops 79
7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK 79M Auto Recl. YES NO 3 Pole Pickup blocks 79
NO
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
Starts 79
Stops 79
7172 67Ns-1 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 67Ns-1
Starts 79
Stops 79

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

7173 67Ns-2 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 67Ns-2
Starts 79
Stops 79
7174 67Ns TOC 79M Auto Recl. No influence No influence 67Ns TOC
Starts 79
Stops 79
7175 bef.1.Cy:67Ns-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67Ns-1
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7177 bef.1Cy:67NsTOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67Ns TOC
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7200 bef.1.Cy:50-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-1
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7201 bef.1.Cy:50N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-1
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7204 bef.1.Cy:51 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 51
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7205 bef.1.Cy:51N 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 51N
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7210 bef.1.Cy:67 TOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67 TOC
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7211 bef.1.Cy:67NTOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N TOC
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
7257 bef.1.Cy:67N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: IE>>>
instant. T=0 directional
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
8001 START Fault Locator Pickup Pickup Start fault locator with
TRIP
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV Meas- OFF ON Measurement Supervision
urem.Superv ON
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT Meas- 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for
urem.Superv Balance Monitoring

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

8103 BAL. FACTOR V Meas- 0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for
urem.Superv Voltage Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT Meas- 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for
urem.Superv 5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A Balance Monitoring
8105 BAL. FACTOR I Meas- 0.10 .. 0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
urem.Superv Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD Meas- 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A Summated Current Moni-
urem.Superv 5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A toring Threshold
8107 Σ I FACTOR Meas- 0.00 .. 0.95 0.10 Summated Current Moni-
urem.Superv toring Factor
8109 FAST Σ i MONIT Meas- OFF ON Fast Summated Current
urem.Superv ON Monitoring
8110A T BAL. V LIMIT Meas- 0 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Balance Factor for
urem.Superv Voltage Monitor
8111A T BAL. I LIMIT Meas- 0 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Current Balance
urem.Superv Monitor
8201 FCT 74TC 74TC TripCirc. ON ON 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervi-
OFF sion
8202 Alarm Delay 74TC TripCirc. 1 .. 30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
8301 DMD Interval Demand meter 15 Min., 1 Sub 60 Min., 1 Sub Demand Calculation Inter-
15 Min., 3 Subs vals
15 Min.,15 Subs
30 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min.,10 Subs
5 Min., 5 Subs
8302 DMD Sync.Time Demand meter On The Hour On The Hour Demand Synchronization
15 After Hour Time
30 After Hour
45 After Hour
8311 MinMax cycRESET Min/Max meter NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset
YES Function
8312 MiMa RESET TIME Min/Max meter 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle
Period
8314 MinMaxRES.START Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle
in
8315 MeterResolution Energy Standard Standard Meter resolution
Factor 10
Factor 100
9000 UDP Port RTD-Box 0 .. 65535 5000 UDP service port in the
RTD box
9001 IP address[0] RTD-Box 0 .. 255 0 IP address[0] of RTD box,
connec. by UDP
connec. by UDP
connec. by UDP
connec. by UDP

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

9011A RTD 1 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected Pt 100 Ω RTD 1: Type
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Oil RTD 1: Location
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage
1 Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected Not connected RTD 2: Type
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Other RTD 2: Location
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE RTD-Box Not connected Not connected RTD10: Type
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
9102A RTD10 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Other RTD10: Location
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD10: Temperature
Stage 1 Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD10: Temperature
Stage 1 Pickup
Stage 2 Pickup
Stage 2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Stage 1 Pickup
Stage 1 Pickup
Stage 2 Pickup
Stage 2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ω
Ni 120 Ω
Ni 100 Ω
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.2 Settings

Stage 1 Pickup
Stage 1 Pickup
Stage 2 Pickup
Stage 2 Pickup

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.3 Information List

Indications for IEC 60 870-5-103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for
IEC 60 870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON.
New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected
to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (“.._Ev”“). Further information on
indications can be found in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1176-C151.
In columns “Event Log”, “Trip Log” and “Ground Fault Log” the following applies:
UPPER CASE NOTATION “ON/OFF”: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation “on/off”: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
In the column “Marked in Oscill. Record” the following applies:

UPPER CASE NOTATION “M”: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation “m”: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
No. Description Function Typ Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
– >Back Light on (>Light Device, SP On * * LED BI BO

on) General Of
f
– Reset LED (Reset LED) Device, IntS On * * LED BO 16 19 1 No
General P 0
– Stop data transmission Device, IntS On * * LED BO 16 20 1 Yes
(DataStop) General P Of 0
f
– Test mode (Test mode) Device, IntS On * * LED BO 16 21 1 Yes
General P Of 0
f
– Feeder GROUNDED Device, IntS * * * LED BO
(Feeder gnd) General P
– Breaker OPENED (Brk Device, IntS * * * LED BO
OPENED) General P
– Hardware Test Mode Device, IntS On * * LED BO
(HWTestMod) General P Of
f
– Clock Synchronization Device, IntS * * *
(SynchClock) General P_E
v
– Error FMS FO 1 (Error Device, OUT On * LED BO
FMS1) General Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
– Error FMS FO 2 (Error Device, OUT On * LED BO

FMS2) General Of
f
– Disturbance CFC Device, OUT On * LED BO
(Distur.CFC) General Of
f
– Fault Recording Start Osc. Fault IntS On * m LED BO
(FltRecSta) Rec. P Of
f
– Setting Group A is active Change IntS On * * LED BO 16 23 1 Yes
(P-GrpA act) Group P Of 0
f
– Setting Group B is active Change IntS On * * LED BO 16 24 1 Yes
(P-GrpB act) Group P Of 0
f
– Setting Group C is active Change IntS On * * LED BO 16 25 1 Yes
(P-GrpC act) Group P Of 0
f
– Setting Group D is active Change IntS On * * LED BO 16 26 1 Yes
(P-GrpD act) Group P Of 0
f
– Controlmode REMOTE Cntrl IntS On * LED BO
(ModeREMOTE) Authority P Of
f
– Control Authority (Cntrl Cntrl IntS On * LED BO 10 85 1 Yes
Auth) Authority P Of 1
f
– Controlmode LOCAL Cntrl IntS On * LED BO 10 86 1 Yes
(ModeLOCAL) Authority P Of 1
f
– 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control CF_ On LED BO 24 16 20
Device D12 Of 0 0
f
– 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control DP On BI CB 24 16 1 Yes
Device Of 0 0
f
– Disconnect Switch Control CF_ On LED BO 24 16 20
(Disc.Swit.) Device D2 Of 0 1
f
– Disconnect Switch Control DP On BI CB 24 16 1 Yes
(Disc.Swit.) Device Of 0 1
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
– Ground Switch Control CF_ On LED BO 24 16 20

(GndSwit.) Device D2 Of 0 4
f
– Ground Switch Control DP On BI CB 24 16 1 Yes
(GndSwit.) Device Of 0 4
f
– Interlocking: 52 Open (52 Control IntS * LED BO
Open) Device P
– Interlocking: 52 Close (52 Control IntS * LED BO
Close) Device P
– Interlocking: Disconnect Control IntS * LED BO
switch Open (Disc.Open) Device P
– Interlocking: Disconnect Control IntS * LED BO
switch Close (Disc.Close) Device P
– Interlocking: Ground Control IntS * LED BO
switch Open (GndSw Device P
Open)
– Interlocking: Ground Control IntS * LED BO
switch Close (GndSw Cl.) Device P
– Unlock data transmission Control IntS * LED BO
via BI (UnlockDT) Device P
– Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control CF_ On LED BO 24 16 20
Device D2 Of 0 2
f
– Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control DP On BI CB 24 16 1 Yes
Device Of 0 2
f
– Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control CF_ On LED BO 24 16 20
Device D2 Of 0 3
f
– Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control DP On BI CB 24 16 1 Yes
Device Of 0 3
f
– Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/ Control CF_ On LED BO 24 17 20
OFF) Device D2 Of 0 5
f
– Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/ Control DP On BI CB 24 17 1 Yes
OFF) Device Of 0 5
f
– >CB ready Spring is Process SP * * * LED BI BO CB
charged (>CB ready) Data
– >Door closed (>Door- Process SP * * * LED BI BO CB
Close) Data

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
– >Cabinet door open Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 10 1 1 Yes

(>Door open) Data Of 1
f
– >CB waiting for Spring Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 10 2 1 Yes
charged (>CB wait) Data Of 1
f
– >No Voltage (Fuse blown) Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 16 38 1 Yes
(>No Volt.) Data Of 0
f
– >Error Motor Voltage Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
(>Err Mot V) Data Of 0 1
f
– >Error Control Voltage Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
(>ErrCntrlV) Data Of 0 2
f
– >SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss) Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
Data Of 0 3
f
– >Error Meter (>Err Meter) Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
Data Of 0 4
f
– >Transformer Tempera- Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
ture (>Tx Temp.) Data Of 0 5
f
– >Transformer Danger Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
(>Tx Danger) Data Of 0 6
f
– Reset Minimum and Min/Max IntS O
Maximum counter meter P_E N
(ResMinMax) v
– Reset meter (Meter res) Energy IntS O BI
P_E N
v
– Error Systeminterface Protocol IntS On * * LED BO
(SysIntErr.) P Of
f
– DCP identify (DCP ident) Protocol IntS * * * LED BO
P
– Threshold Value 1 Thresh.- IntS On LED FK BO CB
(ThreshVal1) Switch P Of TO
f NL
IN
E

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Info
rma
tion
1 No Function configured Device, SP * *

(Not configured) General
2 Function Not Available Device, SP * *
(Non Existent) General
3 >Synchronize Internal Device, SP_ * * LED BI BO 13 48 1 Yes
Real Time Clock (>Time General Ev 5
Synch)
4 >Trigger Waveform Osc. Fault SP * * m LED BI BO 13 49 1 Yes
Capture Rec. 5
(>Trig.Wave.Cap.)
5 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device, SP * * * LED BI BO 13 50 1 Yes
General 5
7 >Setting Group Select Bit Change SP * * * LED BI BO 13 51 1 Yes
0 (>Set Group Bit0) Group 5
8 >Setting Group Select Bit Change SP * * * LED BI BO 13 52 1 Yes
1 (>Set Group Bit1) Group 5
15 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device, SP * * * LED BI BO 13 53 1 Yes
General 5
16 >Stop data transmission Device, SP * * * LED BI BO 13 54 1 Yes
(>DataStop) General 5
51 Device is Operational and Device, OUT On * * LED BO 13 81 1 Yes
Protecting (Device OK) General Of 5
f
52 At Least 1 Protection Device, IntS On * * LED BO 16 18 1 Yes
Funct. is Active (ProtAc- General P Of 0
tive) f
55 Reset Device (Reset Device, OUT On * * 16 4 1 No
Device) General 0
56 Initial Start of Device Device, OUT On * * LED BO 16 5 1 No
(Initial Start) General 0
67 Resume (Resume) Device, OUT On * * LED BO
General
68 Clock Synchronization Device, OUT On * * LED BO
Error (Clock SyncError) General Of
f
69 Daylight Saving Time Device, OUT On * * LED BO
(DayLightSavTime) General Of
f
70 Setting calculation is Device, OUT On * * LED BO 16 22 1 Yes
running (Settings Calc.) General Of 0
f
71 Settings Check (Settings Device, OUT * * * LED BO
Check) General

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Relay
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Info
rma
tion
72 Level-2 change (Level-2 Device, OUT On * * LED BO

change) General Of
f
73 Local setting change Device, OUT * * *
(Local change) General
110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device, OUT On * LED BO 13 13 1 No
General _Ev 5 0
113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device, OUT On * m LED BO 13 13 1 Yes
General 5 6
125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device, OUT On * * LED BO 13 14 1 Yes
General Of 5 5
f
126 Protection ON/OFF (via P.System IntS On * * LED BO
system port) (ProtON/ Data 2 P Of
OFF) f
127 79 ON/OFF (via system 79M Auto IntS On * * LED BO
port) (79 ON/OFF) Recl. P Of
f
140 Error with a summary Device, OUT On * * LED BO 16 47 1 Yes
alarm (Error Sum Alarm) General Of 0
f
144 Error 5V (Error 5V) Device, OUT On * * LED BO
General Of
f
145 Error 0V (Error 0V) Device, OUT On * * LED BO
General Of
f
146 Error -5V (Error -5V) Device, OUT On * * LED BO
General Of
f
147 Error Power Supply (Error Device, OUT On * * LED BO
PwrSupply) General Of
f
160 Alarm Summary Event Device, OUT On * * LED BO 16 46 1 Yes
(Alarm Sum Event) General Of 0
f
161 Failure: General Current Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 16 32 1 Yes
Supervision (Fail I urem.Super Of 0
Superv.) v f
162 Failure: Current Summa- Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 18 1 Yes
tion (Failure Σ I) urem.Super Of 5 2
v f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
163 Failure: Current Balance Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 18 1 Yes

(Fail I balance) urem.Super Of 5 3
v f
167 Failure: Voltage Balance Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 18 1 Yes
(Fail V balance) urem.Super Of 5 6
v f
169 VT Fuse Failure (alarm Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 18 1 Yes
>10s) (VT FuseFail>10s) urem.Super Of 5 8
v f
170 VT Fuse Failure (alarm Meas- OUT On * * LED BO
instantaneous) (VT Fuse- urem.Super Of
Fail) v f
170.00 >25-group 1 activate SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
01 (>25-1 act) tion 1 Of
f
170.00 >25 Synchronization SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
43 request (>25 Sync req.) tion 1 Of
f
170.00 25 Sync. Release of SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
49 CLOSE Command (25 tion 1 Of
CloseRelease) f
170.00 25 Synchronization Error SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
50 (25 Sync. Error) tion 1 Of
f
170.00 25-group 1 is BLOCKED SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
51 (25-1 BLOCK) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Sync. Measuring SYNC func- SP On * LED
07 request of Control (25 tion 1 Of
Measu. req.) f
170.20 >BLOCK 25-group 1 (>BLK SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
08 25-1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Direct Command SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
09 output (>25direct CO) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Start of synchroniza- SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
11 tion (>25 Start) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Stop of synchroniza- SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
12 tion (>25 Stop) tion 1 Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Info
rma
tion
170.20 >25 Switch to V1> and SYNC func- SP On * LED BI

13 V2< (>25 V1>V2<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Switch to V1< and SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
14 V2> (>25 V1<V2>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Switch to V1< and SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
15 V2< (>25 V1<V2<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Switch to Sync (>25 SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
16 synchr.) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25-group 1: measure- SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
22 ment in progress (25-1 tion 1 Of
meas.) f
170.20 25 Monitoring time SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
25 exceeded (25 MonTi- tion 1 Of
meExc) f
170.20 25 Synchronization condi- SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
26 tions okay (25 Synchron) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Condition V1>V2< SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
27 fulfilled (25 V1> V2<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Condition V1<V2> SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
28 fulfilled (25 V1< V2>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Condition V1<V2< SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
29 fulfilled (25 V1< V2<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage difference SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
30 (Vdiff) okay (25 Vdiff ok) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Frequency difference SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
31 (fdiff) okay (25 fdiff ok) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Angle difference SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
32 (alphadiff) okay (25 αdiff tion 1 Of
ok) f
170.20 25 Frequency f1 > fmax SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
33 permissible (25 f1>>) tion 1 Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
170.20 25 Frequency f1 < fmin SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO

34 permissible (25 f1<<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Frequency f2 > fmax SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
35 permissible (25 f2>>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Frequency f2 < fmin SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
36 permissible (25 f2<<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage V1 > Vmax SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
37 permissible (25 V1>>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage V1 < Vmin SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
38 permissible (25 V1<<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage V2 > Vmax SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
39 permissible (25 V2>>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage V2 < Vmin SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
40 permissible (25 V2<<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Vdiff too large SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
90 (V2>V1) (25 V2>V1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Vdiff too large SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
91 (V2<V1) (25 V2<V1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1) SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
92 (25 f2>f1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1) SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
93 (25 f2<f1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 alphadiff too large SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
94 (a2>a1) (25 α2>α1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 alphadiff too large SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
95 (a2<a1) (25 α2<α1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Multiple selection of SYNC func- OUT On LED BO
96 func-groups (25 FG-Error) tion 1 Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
170.20 25 Setting error (25 Set- SYNC func- OUT On LED BO

97 Error) tion 1 Of
f
170.21 Sync-group 1 is switched SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
01 OFF (25-1 OFF) tion 1 Of
f
170.21 >BLOCK 25 CLOSE SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
02 command (>BLK 25 tion 1 Of
CLOSE) f
170.21 25 CLOSE command is SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
03 BLOCKED (25 CLOSE BLK) tion 1 Of
f
170.23 Sync:Synchronization SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
32 cond. f syn (Sync f syn) tion 1 Of
f
171 Failure: Phase Sequence Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 16 35 1 Yes
(Fail Ph. Seq.) urem.Super Of 0
v f
Current (Fail Ph. Seq. I) urem.Super Of 5 1
v f
Voltage (Fail Ph. Seq. V) urem.Super Of 5 2
v f
177 Failure: Battery empty Device, OUT On * * LED BO
(Fail Battery) General Of
f
178 I/O-Board Error (I/O-Board Device, OUT On * * LED BO
error) General Of
f
181 Error: A/D converter (Error Device, OUT On * * LED BO
A/D-conv.) General Of
f
183 Error Board 1 (Error Board Device, OUT On * * LED BO
1) General Of
f
2) General Of
f
3) General Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion

4) General Of
f
5) General Of
f
6) General Of
f
7) General Of
f
191 Error: Offset (Error Offset) Device, OUT On * * LED BO
General Of
f
192 Error:1A/5Ajumper Device, OUT On *
different from setting General Of
(Error1A/5Awrong) f
193 Alarm: NO calibration Device, OUT On * * LED BO
data available (Alarm NO General Of
calibr) f
194 Error: Neutral CT different Device, OUT On *
from MLFB (Error General Of
neutralCT) f
197 Measurement Supervision Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 19 1 Yes
is switched OFF (MeasSup urem.Super Of 5 7
OFF) v f
203 Waveform data deleted Osc. Fault OUT On * LED BO 13 20 1 No
(Wave. deleted) Rec. _Ev 5 3
220 Error: Range CT Ph wrong Device, OUT On *
(CT Ph wrong) General Of
f
234.21 27, 59 blocked via opera- 27/59 O/U IntS On * * LED BO
00 tion (27, 59 blk) Volt. P Of
f
235.21 >BLOCK Function $00 Flx SP On On * * LED BI FK BO
10 (>BLOCK $00) Of Off TO
f NL
IN
E
235.21 >Function $00 instanta- Flx SP On On * * LED BI FK BO
11 neous TRIP (>$00 Of Off TO
instant.) f NL
IN
E

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
235.21 >Function $00 Direct TRIP Flx SP On On * * LED BI FK BO

12 (>$00 Dir.TRIP) Of Off TO
f NL
IN
E
235.21 >Function $00 BLOCK Flx SP On On * * LED BI FK BO
13 TRIP Time Delay (>$00 Of Off TO
BLK.TDly) f NL
IN
E
14 TRIP (>$00 BLK.TRIP) Of Off TO
f NL
IN
E
15 TRIP Phase A (>$00 Of Off TO
BL.TripA) f NL
IN
E
16 TRIP Phase B (>$00 Of Off TO
BL.TripB) f NL
IN
E
17 TRIP Phase C (>$00 Of Off TO
BL.TripC) f NL
IN
E
235.21 Function $00 is BLOCKED Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
18 ($00 BLOCKED) Of Off
f
235.21 Function $00 is switched Flx OUT On * * * LED BO
19 OFF ($00 OFF) Of
f
235.21 Function $00 is ACTIVE Flx OUT On * * * LED BO
20 ($00 ACTIVE) Of
f
235.21 Function $00 picked up Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
21 ($00 picked up) Of Off
f
235.21 Function $00 Pickup Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
22 Phase A ($00 pickup A) Of Off
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion

23 Phase B ($00 pickup B) Of Off
f
24 Phase C ($00 pickup C) Of Off
f
235.21 Function $00 TRIP Delay Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
25 Time Out ($00 Time Out) Of Off
f
235.21 Function $00 TRIP ($00 Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
26 TRIP) Of
f
235.21 Function $00 has invalid Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
28 settings ($00 inval.set) Of Off
f
236.21 BLOCK Flexible Function Device, IntS On * * * LED BO
27 (BLK. Flex.Fct.) General P Of
f
253 Failure VT circuit: broken Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 22 2 Yes
wire (VT brk. wire) urem.Super Of 5 0
v f
255 Failure VT circuit (Fail VT Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 22 2 Yes
circuit) urem.Super Of 5 2
v f
256 Failure VT circuit: 1 pole Meas- OUT On * * LED BO
broken wire (VT b.w. 1 urem.Super Of
pole) v f
pole) v f
pole) v f
264 Failure: RTD-Box 1 (Fail: RTD-Box OUT On * * LED BO
RTD-Box 1) Of
f
268 Supervision Pressure Measure- OUT On * * LED BO
(Superv.Pressure) ment Of
f
269 Supervision Temperature Measure- OUT On * * LED BO
(Superv.Temp.) ment Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
270 Set Point Pressure< (SP. Set OUT On * * LED BO

Pressure<) Points(MV) Of
f
271 Set Point Temp> (SP. Set OUT On * * LED BO
Temp>) Points(MV) Of
f
272 Set Point Operating Hours SetPoint(Sta OUT On * * LED BO 13 22 1 Yes
(SP. Op Hours>) t) Of 5 9
f
273 Set Point Phase A dmd> Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 23 1 Yes
(SP. I A dmd>) Points(MV) Of 5 0
f
274 Set Point Phase B dmd> Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 23 1 Yes
(SP. I B dmd>) Points(MV) Of 5 4
f
275 Set Point Phase C dmd> Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 23 1 Yes
(SP. I C dmd>) Points(MV) Of 5 5
f
276 Set Point positive Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 23 1 Yes
sequence I1dmd> (SP. Points(MV) Of 5 6
I1dmd>) f
277 Set Point |Pdmd|> (SP. | Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 23 1 Yes
Pdmd|>) Points(MV) Of 5 7
f
278 Set Point |Qdmd|> (SP. | Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 23 1 Yes
Qdmd|>) Points(MV) Of 5 8
f
279 Set Point |Sdmd|> (SP. | Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 23 1 Yes
Sdmd|>) Points(MV) Of 5 9
f
284 Set Point 37-1 Undercur- Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 24 1 Yes
rent alarm (SP. 37-1 Points(MV) Of 5 4
alarm) f
285 Set Point 55 Power factor Set OUT On * * LED BO 13 24 1 Yes
alarm (SP. PF(55)alarm) Points(MV) Of 5 5
f
301 Power System fault Device, OUT On On 13 23 2 Yes
(Pow.Sys.Flt.) General Of Off 5 1
f
302 Fault Event (Fault Event) Device, OUT * On 13 23 2 Yes
General 5 2
303 sensitive Ground fault Device, OUT On * ON 13 23 1 Yes
(sens Gnd flt) General Of 5 3
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
320 Warn: Limit of Memory Device, OUT On * * LED BO

Data exceeded (Warn General Of
Mem. Data) f
Parameter exceeded General Of
(Warn Mem. Para.) f
Operation exceeded General Of
(Warn Mem. Oper.) f
New exceeded (Warn General Of
Mem. New) f
335 >GOOSE-Stop (>GOOSE- Device, SP On * LED BI FK BO
Stop) General Of TO
f NL
IN
E
356 >Manual close signal P.System SP * * * LED BI BO 15 6 1 Yes
(>Manual Close) Data 2 0
395 >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
(>I MinMax Reset) meter
396 >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
(>I1 MiMaReset) meter
397 >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
(>V MiMaReset) meter
398 >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (>VphphMiMaRes) meter
399 >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (>V1 MiMa Reset) meter
400 >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
(>P MiMa Reset) meter
401 >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
(>S MiMa Reset) meter
402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
(>Q MiMa Reset) meter
403 >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (>Idmd MiMaReset) meter
404 >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (>Pdmd MiMaR- meter
eset)
405 >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (>Qdmd MiMaR- meter
eset)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
406 >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO

Reset (>Sdmd MiMaR- meter
eset)
407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (>Frq MiMa Reset) meter
408 >Power Factor MIN/MAX Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Buffer Reset (>PF MiMaR- meter
eset)
409 >BLOCK Op Counter Statistics SP On * LED BI BO
(>BLOCK Op Count) Of
f
412 >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (> Θ MiMa Reset) meter
501 Relay PICKUP (Relay P.System OUT ON m LED BO 15 15 2 Yes
PICKUP) Data 2 0 1
502 Relay Drop Out (Relay Device, SP * *
Drop Out) General
510 General CLOSE of relay Device, SP * *
(Relay CLOSE) General
511 Relay GENERAL TRIP P.System OUT ON m LED BO 15 16 2 Yes
command (Relay TRIP) Data 2 0 1
533 Primary fault current Ia (Ia P.System VI ON 15 17 4 No
=) Data 2 OFF 0 7
534 Primary fault current Ib P.System VI ON 15 17 4 No
(Ib =) Data 2 OFF 0 8
535 Primary fault current Ic (Ic P.System VI ON 15 17 4 No
=) Data 2 OFF 0 9
545 Time from Pickup to drop Device, VI ON
out (PU Time) General OFF
546 Time from Pickup to TRIP Device, VI ON
(TRIP Time) General OFF
561 Manual close signal P.System OUT On * * LED BO
detected Data 2 Of
(Man.Clos.Detect) f
916 Increment of active Energy -
energy (WpΔ=)
917 Increment of reactive Energy -
energy (WqΔ=)
1020 Counter of operating Statistics VI
hours (Op.Hours=)
1021 Accumulation of inter- Statistics VI
rupted current Ph A (Σ Ia
=)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion

rupted current Ph B (Σ Ib
=)
rupted current Ph C (Σ Ic
=)
1106 >Start Fault Locator Fault SP On * * LED BI BO 15 6 1 Yes
(>Start Flt. Loc) Locator 1
1114 Flt Locator: primary Fault VI ON
RESISTANCE (Rpri =) Locator OFF
1115 Flt Locator: primary REAC- Fault VI ON
TANCE (Xpri =) Locator OFF
1117 Flt Locator: secondary Fault VI ON
RESISTANCE (Rsec =) Locator OFF
1118 Flt Locator: secondary Fault VI ON 15 18 4 No
REACTANCE (Xsec =) Locator OFF 1
1119 Flt Locator: Distance to Fault VI ON 15 19 4 No
fault (dist =) Locator OFF 1
1120 Flt Locator: Distance [%] Fault VI ON
to fault (d[%] =) Locator OFF
1122 Flt Locator: Distance to Fault VI ON
fault (dist =) Locator OFF
1123 Fault Locator Loop AG (FL Fault OUT ON
Loop AG) Locator
1124 Fault Locator Loop BG (FL Fault OUT ON
Loop BG) Locator
1125 Fault Locator Loop CG (FL Fault OUT ON
Loop CG) Locator
1126 Fault Locator Loop AB (FL Fault OUT ON
Loop AB) Locator
1127 Fault Locator Loop BC (FL Fault OUT ON
Loop BC) Locator
1128 Fault Locator Loop CA (FL Fault OUT ON
Loop CA) Locator
1132 Fault location invalid Fault OUT * On * LED BO
(Flt.Loc.invalid) Locator
1201 >BLOCK 64 (>BLOCK 64) Sens. Gnd SP On * * LED BI BO 15 10 1 Yes
Fault Of 1 1
f
1202 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 (>BLOCK Sens. Gnd SP On * * LED BI BO 15 10 1 Yes
50Ns-2) Fault Of 1 2
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
1203 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 (>BLOCK Sens. Gnd SP On * * LED BI BO 15 10 1 Yes

50Ns-1) Fault Of 1 3
f
1204 >BLOCK 51Ns (>BLOCK Sens. Gnd SP On * * LED BI BO 15 10 1 Yes
51Ns) Fault Of 1 4
f
1207 >BLOCK 50Ns/67Ns (>BLK Sens. Gnd SP On * * LED BI BO 15 10 1 Yes
50Ns/67Ns) Fault Of 1 7
f
1211 50Ns/67Ns is OFF (50Ns/ Sens. Gnd OUT On * * LED BO 15 11 1 Yes
67Ns OFF) Fault Of 1 1
f
1212 50Ns/67Ns is ACTIVE Sens. Gnd OUT On * * LED BO 15 11 1 Yes
(50Ns/67Ns ACT) Fault Of 1 2
f
1215 64 displacement voltage Sens. Gnd OUT * On On * LED BO 15 11 2 Yes
pick up (64 Pickup) Fault Off Off 1 5
1217 64 displacement voltage Sens. Gnd OUT * On On m LED BO 15 11 2 Yes
element TRIP (64 TRIP) Fault Off 1 7
1221 50Ns-2 Pickup (50Ns-2 Sens. Gnd OUT * On On * LED BO 15 12 2 Yes
Pickup) Fault Off Off 1 1
1223 50Ns-2 TRIP (50Ns-2 TRIP) Sens. Gnd OUT * On On m LED BO 15 12 2 Yes
Fault Off 1 3
1224 50Ns-1 Pickup (50Ns-1 Sens. Gnd OUT * On On * LED BO 15 12 2 Yes
Pickup) Fault Off Off 1 4
1226 50Ns-1 TRIP (50Ns-1 TRIP) Sens. Gnd OUT * On On m LED BO 15 12 2 Yes
Fault Off 1 6
1227 51Ns picked up (51Ns Sens. Gnd OUT * On * LED BO 15 12 2 Yes
Pickup) Fault Off 1 7
1229 51Ns TRIP (51Ns TRIP) Sens. Gnd OUT * On m LED BO 15 12 2 Yes
Fault 1 9
1230 Sensitive ground fault Sens. Gnd OUT On On * LED BO 15 13 1 Yes
detection BLOCKED (Sens. Fault Of Off 1 0
Gnd block) f
1264 Corr. Resistive Earth Sens. Gnd VI ON
current (IEEa =) Fault OF
F
1265 Corr. Reactive Earth Sens. Gnd VI ON
current (IEEr =) Fault OF
F
1266 Earth current, absolute Sens. Gnd VI ON
Value (IEE =) Fault OF
F

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
1267 Displacement Voltage Sens. Gnd VI ON

VGND, 3Vo (VGND, 3Vo) Fault OF
F
1271 Sensitive Ground fault Sens. Gnd OUT On On * LED BO 15 17 1 Yes
pick up (Sens.Gnd Pickup) Fault Of Off 1 1
f
1272 Sensitive Ground fault Sens. Gnd OUT On On On * LED BO 16 48 1 Yes
picked up in Ph A (Sens. Fault Of Off 0
Gnd Ph A) f
picked up in Ph B (Sens. Fault Of Off 0
Gnd Ph B) f
picked up in Ph C (Sens. Fault Of Off 0
Gnd Ph C) f
1276 Sensitive Gnd fault in Sens. Gnd OUT On On On * LED BO 16 51 1 Yes
forward direction Fault Of Off 0
(SensGnd Forward) f
1277 Sensitive Gnd fault in Sens. Gnd OUT On On On * LED BO 16 52 1 Yes
reverse direction Fault Of Off 0
(SensGnd Reverse) f
1278 Sensitive Gnd fault direc- Sens. Gnd OUT On On On * LED BO 15 17 1 Yes
tion undefined (SensGnd Fault Of Off 1 8
undef.) f
1403 >BLOCK 50BF (>BLOCK 50BF BkrFai- SP On * * LED BI BO 16 10 1 Yes
50BF) lure Of 6 3
f
1404 >50BF Activate 3I0> 50BF BkrFai- SP On * * LED BI BO
threshold lure Of
(>50BFactiv.3I0>) f
1431 >50BF initiated externally 50BF BkrFai- SP On * * LED BI BO 16 10 1 Yes
(>50BF ext SRC) lure Of 6 4
f
1451 50BF is switched OFF 50BF BkrFai- OUT On * * LED BO 16 15 1 Yes
(50BF OFF) lure Of 6 1
f
1452 50BF is BLOCKED (50BF 50BF BkrFai- OUT On On * LED BO 16 15 1 Yes
BLOCK) lure Of Off 6 2
f
1453 50BF is ACTIVE (50BF 50BF BkrFai- OUT On * * LED BO 16 15 1 Yes
ACTIVE) lure Of 6 3
f
1456 50BF (internal) PICKUP 50BF BkrFai- OUT * On * LED BO 16 15 2 Yes
(50BF int Pickup) lure Off 6 6

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
1457 50BF (external) PICKUP 50BF BkrFai- OUT * On * LED BO 16 15 2 Yes

(50BF ext Pickup) lure Off 6 7
1471 50BF TRIP (50BF TRIP) 50BF BkrFai- OUT * On m LED BO 16 85 2 No
lure 0
1480 50BF (internal) TRIP 50BF BkrFai- OUT * On * LED BO 16 18 2 Yes
(50BF int TRIP) lure 6 0
1481 50BF (external) TRIP 50BF BkrFai- OUT * On * LED BO 16 18 2 Yes
(50BF ext TRIP) lure 6 1
1494 50BF TRIP 2 (50BF TRIP 2) 50BF BkrFai- OUT * On * LED BO
lure
1503 >BLOCK 49 Overload 49 Th.Over- SP * * * LED BI BO 16 3 1 Yes
Protection (>BLOCK 49 load 7
O/L)
1507 >Emergency start of 49 Th.Over- SP On * * LED BI BO 16 7 1 Yes
motors (>EmergencyS- load Of 7
tart) f
1511 49 Overload Protection is 49 Th.Over- OUT On * * LED BO 16 11 1 Yes
OFF (49 O / L OFF) load Of 7
f
1512 49 Overload Protection is 49 Th.Over- OUT On On * LED BO 16 12 1 Yes
BLOCKED (49 O/L BLOCK) load Of Off 7
f
1513 49 Overload Protection is 49 Th.Over- OUT On * * LED BO 16 13 1 Yes
ACTIVE (49 O/L ACTIVE) load Of 7
f
1515 49 Overload Current 49 Th.Over- OUT On * * LED BO 16 15 1 Yes
Alarm (I alarm) (49 O/L I load Of 7
Alarm) f
1516 49 Overload Alarm! Near 49 Th.Over- OUT On * * LED BO 16 16 1 Yes
Thermal Trip (49 O/L Θ load Of 7
Alarm) f
1517 49 Winding Overload (49 49 Th.Over- OUT On * * LED BO 16 17 1 Yes
Winding O/L) load Of 7
f
1521 49 Thermal Overload TRIP 49 Th.Over- OUT * On m LED BO 16 21 2 Yes
(49 Th O/L TRIP) load 7
1580 >49 Reset of Thermal 49 Th.Over- SP On * * LED BI BO
Overload Image (>RES 49 load Of
Image) f
1581 49 Thermal Overload 49 Th.Over- OUT On * * LED BO
Image reset (49 Image load Of
res.) f
1704 >BLOCK 50/51 (>BLK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO
50/51) Overcur.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
1714 >BLOCK 50N/51N (>BLK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO

50N/51N) Overcur.
1718 >BLOCK 50-3 (>BLOCK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO
50-3) Overcur.
1719 >BLOCK 50N-3 (>BLOCK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO
50N-3) Overcur.
1721 >BLOCK 50-2 (>BLOCK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO 60 1 1 Yes
50-2) Overcur.
1722 >BLOCK 50-1 (>BLOCK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO 60 2 1 Yes
50-1) Overcur.
1723 >BLOCK 51 (>BLOCK 51) 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO 60 3 1 Yes
Overcur.
1724 >BLOCK 50N-2 (>BLOCK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO 60 4 1 Yes
50N-2) Overcur.
1725 >BLOCK 50N-1 (>BLOCK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO 60 5 1 Yes
50N-1) Overcur.
1726 >BLOCK 51N (>BLOCK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO 60 6 1 Yes
51N) Overcur.
1730 >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup ColdLoad- SP * * * LED BI BO
(>BLOCK CLP) Pickup
1731 >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup ColdLoad- SP On * * LED BI BO 60 24 1 Yes
stop timer (>BLK CLP Pickup Of 3
stpTim) f
1732 >ACTIVATE Cold-Load- ColdLoad- SP On * * LED BI BO
Pickup (>ACTIVATE CLP) Pickup Of
f
1751 50/51 O/C switched OFF 50/51 OUT On * * LED BO 60 21 1 Yes
(50/51 PH OFF) Overcur. Of
f
1752 50/51 O/C is BLOCKED 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 22 1 Yes
(50/51 PH BLK) Overcur. Of Off
f
1753 50/51 O/C is ACTIVE 50/51 OUT On * * LED BO 60 23 1 Yes
(50/51 PH ACT) Overcur. Of
f
1756 50N/51N is OFF (50N/51N 50/51 OUT On * * LED BO 60 26 1 Yes
OFF) Overcur. Of
f
1757 50N/51N is BLOCKED 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 27 1 Yes
(50N/51N BLK) Overcur. Of Off
f
1758 50N/51N is ACTIVE 50/51 OUT On * * LED BO 60 28 1 Yes
(50N/51N ACT) Overcur. Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
1761 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 84 2 Yes

(50(N)/51(N) PU) Overcur. Off 0
1762 50/51 Phase A picked up 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 64 2 Yes
(50/51 Ph A PU) Overcur. Off 0
1763 50/51 Phase B picked up 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 65 2 Yes
(50/51 Ph B PU) Overcur. Off 0
1764 50/51 Phase C picked up 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 66 2 Yes
(50/51 Ph C PU) Overcur. Off 0
1765 50N/51N picked up (50N/ 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 67 2 Yes
51NPickedup) Overcur. Off 0
1767 50-3 picked up (50-3 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO
picked up) Overcur. Off
1768 50N-3 picked up (50N-3 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO
1769 50-3 TRIP (50-3 TRIP) 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO
Overcur.
1770 50N-3 TRIP (50N-3 TRIP) 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO
Overcur.
1787 50-3 TimeOut (50-3 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO
TimeOut) Overcur.
1788 50N-3 TimeOut (50N-3 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO
TimeOut) Overcur.
1791 50(N)/51(N) TRIP (50(N)/ 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 68 2 No
51(N)TRIP) Overcur. 0
1800 50-2 picked up (50-2 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 75 2 Yes
1804 50-2 Time Out (50-2 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO 60 49 2 Yes
TimeOut) Overcur.
1805 50-2 TRIP (50-2 TRIP) 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 91 2 No
Overcur. 0
1810 50-1 picked up (50-1 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 76 2 Yes
1814 50-1 Time Out (50-1 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO 60 53 2 Yes
TimeOut) Overcur.
1815 50-1 TRIP (50-1 TRIP) 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 90 2 No
Overcur. 0
1820 51 picked up (51 picked 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 77 2 Yes
up) Overcur. Off
1824 51 Time Out (51 Time 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO 60 57 2 Yes
Out) Overcur.
1825 51 TRIP (51 TRIP) 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 60 58 2 Yes
Overcur.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
1831 50N-2 picked up (50N-2 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 59 2 Yes

1832 50N-2 Time Out (50N-2 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO 60 60 2 Yes
TimeOut) Overcur.
1833 50N-2 TRIP (50N-2 TRIP) 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 93 2 No
Overcur. 0
1834 50N-1 picked up (50N-1 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 62 2 Yes
1835 50N-1 Time Out (50N-1 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO 60 63 2 Yes
TimeOut) Overcur.
1836 50N-1 TRIP (50N-1 TRIP) 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 16 92 2 No
Overcur. 0
1837 51N picked up (51N 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 64 2 Yes
1838 51N Time Out (51N 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO 60 65 2 Yes
TimeOut) Overcur.
1839 51N TRIP (51N TRIP) 50/51 OUT * On m LED BO 60 66 2 Yes
Overcur.
1840 Phase A inrush detection 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 10 2 Yes
(PhA InrushDet) Overcur. Off 1
1841 Phase B inrush detection 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 10 2 Yes
(PhB InrushDet) Overcur. Off 2
1842 Phase C inrush detection 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 10 2 Yes
(PhC InrushDet) Overcur. Off 3
1843 Cross blk: PhX blocked 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 10 2 Yes
PhY (INRUSH X-BLK) Overcur. Off 4
1851 50-1 BLOCKED (50-1 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 10 1 Yes
BLOCKED) Overcur. Of Off 5
f
1852 50-2 BLOCKED (50-2 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 10 1 Yes
f
1853 50N-1 BLOCKED (50N-1 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 10 1 Yes
f
1854 50N-2 BLOCKED (50N-2 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 10 1 Yes
f
1855 51 BLOCKED (51 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 10 1 Yes
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
1856 51N BLOCKED (51N 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 11 1 Yes

f
1867 51N Disk emulation 50/51 OUT * * * LED BO
picked up (51N Disk Overcur.
Pickup)
1994 Cold-Load-Pickup ColdLoad- OUT On * * LED BO 60 24 1 Yes
switched OFF (CLP OFF) Pickup Of 4
f
1995 Cold-Load-Pickup is ColdLoad- OUT On On * LED BO 60 24 1 Yes
BLOCKED (CLP BLOCKED) Pickup Of Off 5
f
1996 Cold-Load-Pickup is ColdLoad- OUT On * * LED BO 60 24 1 Yes
RUNNING (CLP running) Pickup Of 6
f
1997 Dynamic settings are ColdLoad- OUT On * * LED BO 60 24 1 Yes
ACTIVE (Dyn set. ACTIVE) Pickup Of 7
f
2603 67N-3 TRIP (67N-3 TRIP) 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO
O/C
2604 >BLOCK 67/67-TOC (>BLK 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO
67/67-TOC) O/C
2605 67N-3 is BLOCKED (67N-3 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO
BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2606 67-3 is BLOCKED (67-3 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO
BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2614 >BLOCK 67N/67N-TOC 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO
(>BLK 67N/67NTOC) O/C
2615 >BLOCK 67-2 (>BLOCK 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO 63 73 1 Yes
67-2) O/C
2616 >BLOCK 67N-2 (>BLOCK 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO 63 74 1 Yes
67N-2) O/C
2617 >BLOCK 67-3 (>BLOCK 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO
67-3) O/C
2618 >BLOCK 67N-3 (>BLOCK 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO
67N-3) O/C
2621 >BLOCK 67-1 (>BLOCK 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO 63 1 1 Yes
67-1) O/C
2622 >BLOCK 67-TOC (>BLOCK 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO 63 2 1 Yes
67-TOC) O/C
2623 >BLOCK 67N-1 (>BLOCK 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO 63 3 1 Yes
67N-1) O/C

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
2624 >BLOCK 67N-TOC 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO 63 4 1 Yes

(>BLOCK 67N-TOC) O/C
2628 Phase A forward (Phase A 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 81 1 Yes
forward) O/C
2629 Phase B forward (Phase B 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 82 1 Yes
forward) O/C
2630 Phase C forward (Phase C 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 83 1 Yes
forward) O/C
2632 Phase A reverse (Phase A 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 84 1 Yes
reverse) O/C
2633 Phase B reverse (Phase B 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 85 1 Yes
reverse) O/C
2634 Phase C reverse (Phase C 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 86 1 Yes
reverse) O/C
2635 Ground forward (Ground 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 87 1 Yes
forward) O/C
2636 Ground reverse (Ground 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 88 1 Yes
reverse) O/C
2637 67-1 is BLOCKED (67-1 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO 63 91 1 Yes
BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2642 67-2 picked up (67-2 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 67 2 Yes
picked up) O/C Off
2646 67N-2 picked up (67N-2 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 62 2 Yes
picked up) O/C Off
2647 67-2 Time Out (67-2 Time 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO 63 71 2 Yes
Out) O/C
2648 67N-2 Time Out (67N-2 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO 63 63 2 Yes
Time Out) O/C
2649 67-2 TRIP (67-2 TRIP) 67 Direct. OUT * On m LED BO 63 72 2 Yes
O/C
2651 67/67-TOC switched OFF 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 10 1 Yes
(67/67-TOC OFF) O/C Of
f
2652 67/67-TOC is BLOCKED 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO 63 11 1 Yes
(67 BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2653 67/67-TOC is ACTIVE (67 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 12 1 Yes
ACTIVE) O/C Of
f
2655 67-2 is BLOCKED (67-2 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO 63 92 1 Yes
BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
2656 67N/67N-TOC switched 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 13 1 Yes

OFF (67N OFF) O/C Of
f
2657 67N/67N-TOC is BLOCKED 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO 63 14 1 Yes
(67N BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2658 67N/67N-TOC is ACTIVE 67 Direct. OUT On * * LED BO 63 15 1 Yes
(67N ACTIVE) O/C Of
f
2659 67N-1 is BLOCKED (67N-1 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO 63 93 1 Yes
BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2660 67-1 picked up (67-1 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 20 2 Yes
picked up) O/C Off
2664 67-1 Time Out (67-1 Time 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO 63 24 2 Yes
Out) O/C
2665 67-1 TRIP (67-1 TRIP) 67 Direct. OUT * On m LED BO 63 25 2 Yes
O/C
2668 67N-2 is BLOCKED (67N-2 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO 63 94 1 Yes
BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2669 67-TOC is BLOCKED (67- 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO 63 95 1 Yes
TOC BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2670 67-TOC picked up (67- 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 30 2 Yes
TOC pickedup) O/C Off
2674 67-TOC Time Out (67- 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO 63 34 2 Yes
TOC Time Out) O/C
2675 67-TOC TRIP (67-TOC 67 Direct. OUT * On m LED BO 63 35 2 Yes
TRIP) O/C
2676 67-TOC disk emulation is 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO
ACTIVE (67-TOC DiskPU) O/C
2677 67N-TOC is BLOCKED 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO 63 96 1 Yes
(67N-TOC BLOCKED) O/C Of Off
f
2678 67-3 TRIP (67-3 TRIP) 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO
O/C
2679 67N-2 TRIP (67N-2 TRIP) 67 Direct. OUT * On m LED BO 63 64 2 Yes
O/C
2681 67N-1 picked up (67N-1 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 41 2 Yes
picked up) O/C Off
2682 67N-1 Time Out (67N-1 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO 63 42 2 Yes
Time Out) O/C

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
2683 67N-1 TRIP (67N-1 TRIP) 67 Direct. OUT * On m LED BO 63 43 2 Yes

O/C
2684 67N-TOC picked up (67N- 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 44 2 Yes
TOCPickedup) O/C Off
2685 67N-TOC Time Out (67N- 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO 63 45 2 Yes
TOC TimeOut) O/C
2686 67N-TOC TRIP (67N-TOC 67 Direct. OUT * On m LED BO 63 46 2 Yes
TRIP) O/C
2687 67N-TOC disk emulation 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO
is ACTIVE (67N-TOC Disk O/C
PU)
2691 67/67N picked up 67 Direct. OUT * On m LED BO 63 50 2 Yes
(67/67N pickedup) O/C Off
2692 67/67-TOC Phase A 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 51 2 Yes
picked up (67 A picked O/C Off
up)
2693 67/67-TOC Phase B picked 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 52 2 Yes
up (67 B picked up) O/C Off
2694 67/67-TOC Phase C picked 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 53 2 Yes
up (67 C picked up) O/C Off
2695 67N/67N-TOC picked up 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO 63 54 2 Yes
(67N picked up) O/C Off
2696 67/67N TRIP (67/67N 67 Direct. OUT * On m LED BO 63 55 2 Yes
TRIP) O/C
2697 67-3 picked up (67-3 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO
picked up) O/C Off
2698 67N-3 picked up (67N-3 67 Direct. OUT * On * LED BO
picked up) O/C Off
2699 67-3 Time Out (67-3 Time 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO
Out) O/C
2700 67N-3 Time Out (67N-3 67 Direct. OUT * * * LED BO
Time Out) O/C
2701 >79 ON (>79 ON) 79M Auto SP On * * LED BI BO 40 1 1 Yes
Recl. Of
f
2702 >79 OFF (>79 OFF) 79M Auto SP On * * LED BI BO 40 2 1 Yes
Recl. Of
f
2703 >BLOCK 79 (>BLOCK 79) 79M Auto SP On * * LED BI BO 40 3 1 Yes
Recl. Of
f
2711 >79 External start of 79M Auto SP * On * LED BI BO
internal A/R (>79 Start) Recl. Off

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
2715 >Start 79 Ground 79M Auto SP * On * LED BI BO 40 15 2 Yes

program (>Start 79 Gnd) Recl.
2716 >Start 79 Phase program 79M Auto SP * On * LED BI BO 40 16 2 Yes
(>Start 79 Ph) Recl.
2720 >Enable 50/67-(N)-2 P.System SP On * * LED BI BO 40 20 1 Yes
(override 79 blk) (>Enable Data 2 Of
ANSI#-2) f
2722 >Switch zone sequence 79M Auto SP On * * LED BI BO
coordination ON (>ZSC Recl. Of
ON) f
2723 >Switch zone sequence 79M Auto SP On * * LED BI BO
coordination OFF (>ZSC Recl. Of
OFF) f
2730 >Circuit breaker READY 79M Auto SP On * * LED BI BO 40 30 1 Yes
for reclosing (>CB Ready) Recl. Of
f
2731 >79: Sync. release from 79M Auto SP * On * LED BI BO
ext. sync.-check Recl.
(>Sync.release)
2753 79: Max. Dead Time Start 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
Delay expired (79 DT Recl.
delay ex.)
2754 >79: Dead Time Start 79M Auto SP On * * LED BI BO
Delay (>79 DT St.Delay) Recl. Of
f
2781 79 Auto recloser is 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO 40 81 1 Yes
switched OFF (79 OFF) Recl.
2782 79 Auto recloser is 79M Auto IntS On * * LED BO 16 16 1 Yes
switched ON (79 ON) Recl. P Of 0
f
2784 79 Auto recloser is NOT 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO 16 13 1 Yes
ready (79 is NOT ready) Recl. Of 0 0
f
2785 79 - Auto-reclose is 79M Auto OUT On On * LED BO 40 85 1 Yes
dynamically BLOCKED (79 Recl. Of
DynBlock) f
2788 79: CB ready monitoring 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
window expired (79 T- Recl.
CBreadyExp)
2801 79 - in progress (79 in 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO 40 10 2 Yes
progress) Recl. 1
2808 79: CB open with no trip 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
(79 BLK: CB open) Recl. Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
2809 79: Start-signal moni- 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO

toring time expired (79 T- Recl.
Start Exp)
2810 79: Maximum dead time 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
expired (79 TdeadMax Recl.
Exp)
2823 79: no starter configured 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
(79 no starter) Recl. Of
f
2824 79: no cycle configured 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
(79 no cycle) Recl. Of
f
2827 79: blocking due to trip 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
(79 BLK by trip) Recl.
2828 79: blocking due to 3- 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
phase pickup (79 BLK:3ph Recl.
p.u.)
2829 79: action time expired 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
before trip (79 Tact Recl.
expired)
2830 79: max. no. of cycles 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
exceeded (79 Max. No. Recl.
Cyc)
2844 79 1st cycle running (79 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO
1stCyc. run.) Recl.
2845 79 2nd cycle running (79 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO
2ndCyc. run.) Recl.
2846 79 3rd cycle running (79 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO
3rdCyc. run.) Recl.
2847 79 4th or higher cycle 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO
running (79 4thCyc. run.) Recl.
2851 79 - Close command (79 79M Auto OUT * On m LED BO 16 12 2 No
Close) Recl. 0 8
2862 79 - cycle successful (79 79M Auto OUT On On * LED BO 40 16 1 Yes
Successful) Recl. 2
2863 79 - Lockout (79 Lockout) 79M Auto OUT On On * LED BO 40 16 2 Yes
Recl. 3
2865 79: Synchro-check 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO
request (79 Recl.
Sync.Request)
2878 79-A/R single phase 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO 40 18 2 Yes
reclosing sequence (79 L- Recl. 0
N Sequence)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
2879 79-A/R multi-phase 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO 40 18 2 Yes

reclosing sequence (79 L- Recl. 1
L Sequence)
2883 Zone Sequencing is active 79M Auto OUT On On * LED BO
(ZSC active) Recl. Of
f
2884 Zone sequence coordina- 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
tion switched ON (ZSC Recl.
ON)
2885 Zone sequence coordina- 79M Auto OUT On * * LED BO
tion switched OFF (ZSC Recl.
OFF)
2889 79 1st cycle zone exten- 79M Auto OUT * * * LED BO
sion release (79 1.CycZo- Recl.
neRel)
2890 79 2nd cycle zone exten- 79M Auto OUT * * * LED BO
neRel)
2891 79 3rd cycle zone exten- 79M Auto OUT * * * LED BO
neRel)
2892 79 4th cycle zone exten- 79M Auto OUT * * * LED BO
neRel)
2896 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE Statistics VI
commands,3pole (79
#Close1./3p=)
2898 No. of higher AR-cycle Statistics VI
CLOSE commands,3p (79
#Close2./3p=)
2899 79: Close request to 79M Auto OUT * On * LED BO
Control Function (79 Recl.
CloseRequest)
4601 >52-a contact (OPEN, if P.System SP On * * LED BI BO
bkr is open) (>52-a) Data 2 Of
f
4602 >52-b contact (OPEN, if P.System SP On * * LED BI BO
bkr is closed) (>52-b) Data 2 Of
f
4822 >BLOCK 66 Motor Startup 48/66 SP * * * LED BI BO
Counter (>BLOCK 66) Motorprot
4823 >66 Mot.St.Cnt: Emer- 48/66 SP On * * LED BI BO 16 51 1 Yes
gency start (>66 Motorprot Of 8
emer.start) f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
4824 66 Motor Startup Counter 48/66 OUT On * * LED BO 16 52 1 Yes

OFF (66 OFF) Motorprot Of 8
f
4825 66 Motor Startup Counter 48/66 OUT On On * LED BO 16 53 1 Yes
BLOCKED (66 BLOCKED) Motorprot Of Off 8
f
ACTIVE (66 ACTIVE) Motorprot Of 8
f
TRIP (66 TRIP) Motorprot Of 8
f
4828 >66 Mot.St.Cnt: Reset 48/66 SP On * * LED BI BO
therm.memory rotor (>66 Motorprot Of
RM th.repl.) f
4829 66 Mot.St.Cnt: therm. 48/66 OUT On * * LED BO
memory rotor reset (66 Motorprot Of
RM th.repl.) f
4834 Rotor thermal overload 48/66 OUT On On * LED BO
TRIP (Rot.overl.TRIP) Motorprot
4835 Rotor thermal overload 48/66 OUT On * * LED BO
alarm (Rot.overl.alarm) Motorprot Of
f
5143 >BLOCK 46 (>BLOCK 46) 46 Negative SP * * * LED BI BO 70 12 1 Yes
Seq 6
5145 >Reverse Phase Rotation P.System SP On * * LED BI BO
(>Reverse Rot.) Data 1 Of
f
5147 Phase rotation ABC (Rota- P.System OUT On * * LED BO 70 12 1 Yes
tion ABC) Data 1 Of 8
f
5148 Phase rotation ACB (Rota- P.System OUT On * * LED BO 70 12 1 Yes
tion ACB) Data 1 Of 9
f
5151 46 switched OFF (46 OFF) 46 Negative OUT On * * LED BO 70 13 1 Yes
Seq Of 1
f
5152 46 is BLOCKED (46 46 Negative OUT On On * LED BO 70 13 1 Yes
BLOCKED) Seq Of Off 2
f
5153 46 is ACTIVE (46 ACTIVE) 46 Negative OUT On * * LED BO 70 13 1 Yes
Seq Of 3
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
5159 46-2 picked up (46-2 46 Negative OUT * On * LED BO 70 13 2 Yes

picked up) Seq Off 8
5165 46-1 picked up (46-1 46 Negative OUT * On * LED BO 70 15 2 Yes
picked up) Seq Off 0
5166 46-TOC picked up (46- 46 Negative OUT * On * LED BO 70 14 2 Yes
TOC pickedup) Seq Off 1
5170 46 TRIP (46 TRIP) 46 Negative OUT * On m LED BO 70 14 2 Yes
Seq 9
5171 46 Disk emulation picked 46 Negative OUT * * * LED BO
up (46 Dsk pickedup) Seq
5203 >BLOCK 81O/U (>BLOCK 81 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 70 17 1 Yes
81O/U) Freq. Of 6
f
5206 >BLOCK 81-1 (>BLOCK 81 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 70 17 1 Yes
81-1) Freq. Of 7
f
81-2) Freq. Of 8
f
81-3) Freq. Of 9
f
81-4) Freq. Of 0
f
5211 81 OFF (81 OFF) 81 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 70 18 1 Yes
Freq. Of 1
f
5212 81 BLOCKED (81 81 O/U OUT On On * LED BO 70 18 1 Yes
BLOCKED) Freq. Of Off 2
f
5213 81 ACTIVE (81 ACTIVE) 81 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 70 18 1 Yes
Freq. Of 3
f
5214 81 Under Voltage Block 81 O/U OUT On On * LED BO 70 18 1 Yes
(81 Under V Blk) Freq. Of Off 4
f
5232 81-1 picked up (81-1 81 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 70 23 2 Yes
picked up) Freq. Off 0

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion

5236 81-1 TRIP (81-1 TRIP) 81 O/U OUT * On m LED BO 70 23 2 Yes
Freq. 4
Freq. 5
Freq. 6
Freq. 7
5951 >BLOCK 50 1Ph (>BLK 50 50 1Ph SP * * * LED BI BO
1Ph)
5952 >BLOCK 50 1Ph-1 (>BLK 50 1Ph SP * * * LED BI BO
50 1Ph-1)
5953 >BLOCK 50 1Ph-2 (>BLK 50 1Ph SP * * * LED BI BO
50 1Ph-2)
5961 50 1Ph is OFF (50 1Ph 50 1Ph OUT On * * LED BO
OFF) Of
f
5962 50 1Ph is BLOCKED (50 50 1Ph OUT On On * LED BO
1Ph BLOCKED) Of Off
f
5963 50 1Ph is ACTIVE (50 1Ph 50 1Ph OUT On * * LED BO
ACTIVE) Of
f
5966 50 1Ph-1 is BLOCKED (50 50 1Ph OUT On On * LED BO
1Ph-1 BLK) Of Off
f
5967 50 1Ph-2 is BLOCKED (50 50 1Ph OUT On On * LED BO
1Ph-2 BLK) Of Off
f
5971 50 1Ph picked up (50 1Ph 50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
Pickup) Off
5972 50 1Ph TRIP (50 1Ph TRIP) 50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
5974 50 1Ph-1 picked up (50 50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
1Ph-1 PU) Off
5975 50 1Ph-1 TRIP (50 1Ph-1 50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
TRIP)
5977 50 1Ph-2 picked up (50 50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
1Ph-2 PU) Off
5979 50 1Ph-2 TRIP (50 1Ph-2 50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
TRIP)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
5980 50 1Ph: I at pick up (50 50 1Ph VI * On

1Ph I:) Off
6401 >QV-Protection Blocked 27/Q SP * * * LED BI BO 74 20 1 Yes
(>27/Q Block) 1
6411 27/Q -Protection off (27/Q 27/Q OUT On * * LED BO 74 21 1 Yes
OFF) Of 1
f
6412 27/Q -Protection blocked 27/Q OUT On On * LED BO 74 21 1 Yes
(27/Q block) Of Off 2
f
6413 27/Q -Protection active 27/Q OUT On * * LED BO 74 21 1 Yes
(27/Q ACT) Of 3
f
6421 27/Q -Protection Gen TRIP 27/Q OUT * On * LED BO 74 22 2 Yes
(27/Q Gen TRIP) Off 1
6422 27/Q -Protection Grid TRIP 27/Q OUT * On * LED BO 74 22 2 Yes
(27/Q Grid TRIP) Off 2
6423 27/Q-Protection PICKUP 27/Q OUT * On * LED BO 74 22 2 No
(27/Q PICKUP) Off 3
6424 Reclosure release (Reclo- 27/Q OUT * On * LED BO 74 22 2 Yes
sure rel.) Off 4
6425 27/Q pickup blocked by 27/Q OUT On On * LED BO 74 22 2 Yes
Inrush (27/Q blk.b.Inr.) Of Off 5
f
6503 >BLOCK 27 undervoltage 27/59 O/U SP * * * LED BI BO 74 3 1 Yes
protection (>BLOCK 27) Volt.
6505 >27-Switch current super- 27/59 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 74 5 1 Yes
vision ON (>27 I Volt. Of
SUPRVSN) f
6506 >BLOCK 27-1 Under- 27/59 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 74 6 1 Yes
voltage protection Volt. Of
(>BLOCK 27-1) f
6508 >BLOCK 27-2 Under- 27/59 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 74 8 1 Yes
voltage protection Volt. Of
(>BLOCK 27-2) f
6509 >Failure: Feeder VT Meas- SP On * * LED BI BO 74 9 1 Yes
(>FAIL:FEEDER VT) urem.Super Of
v f
6510 >Failure: Busbar VT Meas- SP On * * LED BI BO 74 10 1 Yes
(>FAIL: BUS VT) urem.Super Of
v f
6513 >BLOCK 59 overvoltage 27/59 O/U SP * * * LED BI BO 74 13 1 Yes
protection (>BLOCK 59) Volt.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
6530 27 Undervoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 74 30 1 Yes

tion switched OFF (27 Volt. Of
OFF) f
6531 27 Undervoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On On * LED BO 74 31 1 Yes
tion is BLOCKED (27 Volt. Of Off
BLOCKED) f
6532 27 Undervoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 74 32 1 Yes
tion is ACTIVE (27 Volt. Of
ACTIVE) f
6533 27-1 Undervoltage picked 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 33 2 Yes
up (27-1 picked up) Volt. Off
6534 27-1 Undervoltage 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 34 2 Yes
PICKUP w/curr. superv Volt. Off
(27-1 PU CS)
6537 27-2 Undervoltage picked 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 37 2 Yes
up (27-2 picked up) Volt. Off
6538 27-2 Undervoltage 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 38 2 Yes
PICKUP w/curr. superv Volt. Off
(27-2 PU CS)
6539 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP 27/59 O/U OUT * On m LED BO 74 39 2 Yes
(27-1 TRIP) Volt.
6540 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 40 2 Yes
(27-2 TRIP) Volt.
6565 59-Overvoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 74 65 1 Yes
tion switched OFF (59 Volt. Of
OFF) f
6566 59-Overvoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On On * LED BO 74 66 1 Yes
tion is BLOCKED (59 Volt. Of Off
BLOCKED) f
6567 59-Overvoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 74 67 1 Yes
tion is ACTIVE (59 Volt. Of
ACTIVE) f
6568 59-1 picked up (59-1 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 68 2 Yes
picked up) Volt. Off
6570 59-1 TRIP (59-1 TRIP) 27/59 O/U OUT * On m LED BO 74 70 2 Yes
Volt.
6571 59-2 Overvoltage V>> 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO
picked up (59-2 picked Volt. Off
up)
6573 59-2 Overvoltage V>> 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO
TRIP (59-2 TRIP) Volt.
6801 >BLOCK 48 Motor Startup 48/66 SP * * * LED BI BO
Time Supervision Motorprot
(>BLOCK 48)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Relay
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Info
rma
tion
6805 >48/14 Mot.St.Time Sup. 48/66 SP * * * LED BI BO

Rotor locked (>48 Rot. Motorprot
locked)
6811 48 Motor Startup Time 48/66 OUT On * * LED BO 16 51 1 Yes
Supervision OFF (48 OFF) Motorprot Of 9
f
6812 48 Motor Startup Time 48/66 OUT On On * LED BO 16 52 1 Yes
Superv. BLOCKED (48 Motorprot Of Off 9
BLOCKED) f
Supervision ACTIVE (48 Motorprot Of 9
ACTIVE) f
6821 48 Motor Startup Time 48/66 OUT * On m LED BO 16 54 2 Yes
Supervision TRIP (48 TRIP) Motorprot 9
6822 48/14 Mot.St.Time Sup. 48/66 OUT * On * LED BO 16 55 2 Yes
Rotor locked (48 Rotor Motorprot 9
locked)
Superv. picked up (48 Motorprot Of 9
pickup) f
6851 >BLOCK 74TC (>BLOCK 74TC Trip- SP * * * LED BI BO
74TC) Circ.
6852 >74TC Trip circuit superv.: 74TC Trip- SP On * * LED BI BO 17 51 1 Yes
trip relay (>74TC trip rel.) Circ. Of 0
f
6853 >74TC Trip circuit superv.: 74TC Trip- SP On * * LED BI BO 17 52 1 Yes
brk relay (>74TC brk rel.) Circ. Of 0
f
6861 74TC Trip circuit supervi- 74TC Trip- OUT On * * LED BO 17 53 1 Yes
sion OFF (74TC OFF) Circ. Of 0
f
6862 74TC Trip circuit supervi- 74TC Trip- OUT On On * LED BO 15 16 1 Yes
sion is BLOCKED (74TC Circ. Of Off 3
BLOCKED) f
6863 74TC Trip circuit supervi- 74TC Trip- OUT On * * LED BO 15 17 1 Yes
sion is ACTIVE (74TC Circ. Of 3
ACTIVE) f
6864 74TC blocked. Bin. input 74TC Trip- OUT On * * LED BO 17 54 1 Yes
is not set (74TC ProgFail) Circ. Of 0
f
6865 74TC Failure Trip Circuit 74TC Trip- OUT On * * LED BO 17 55 1 Yes
(74TC Trip cir.) Circ. Of 0
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
6903 >block interm. E/F prot. Intermit. EF SP * * * LED BI BO 15 1 1 Yes

(>IEF block) 2
6921 Interm. E/F prot. is Intermit. EF OUT On * * LED BO 15 10 1 Yes
switched off (IEF OFF) Of 2
f
6922 Interm. E/F prot. is Intermit. EF OUT On On * LED BO 15 11 1 Yes
blocked (IEF blocked) Of Off 2
f
6923 Interm. E/F prot. is active Intermit. EF OUT On * * LED BO 15 12 1 Yes
(IEF enabled) Of 2
f
6924 Interm. E/F detection Intermit. EF OUT * * * LED BO
stage Iie> (IIE Fault det)
6925 Interm. E/F stab detection Intermit. EF OUT * * * LED BO
(IIE stab.Flt)
6926 Interm.E/F det.stage Iie> Intermit. EF OUT * On * LED BO 15 13 2 No
f.Flt. ev.Prot (IIE Flt.det 2
FE)
6927 Interm. E/F detected Intermit. EF OUT * On * LED BO 15 14 2 Yes
(Intermitt.EF) Off 2
6928 Counter of det. times Intermit. EF OUT * On * LED BO 15 15 2 No
elapsed (IEF Tsum exp.) 2
6929 Interm. E/F: reset time Intermit. EF OUT * On * LED BO 15 16 2 Yes
running (IEF Tres run.) Off 2
6930 Interm. E/F: trip (IEF Trip) Intermit. EF OUT * On * LED BO 15 17 2 No
2
6931 Max RMS current value of Intermit. EF VI ON * 15 18 4 No
fault = (Iie/In=) OFF 2
6932 No. of detections by stage Intermit. EF VI ON * 15 19 4 No
Iie>= (Nos.IIE=) OFF 2
6951 >Block directional interm. Dir. Interm. SP On * * * LED BI BO
E/F prot. (>dIEF block) EF Of
f
6961 Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is Dir. Interm. OUT On * * * LED BO
switched off (dIEF OFF) EF Of
f
6962 Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is Dir. Interm. OUT On * * * LED BI BO
blocked (dIEF blocked) EF Of
f
6963 Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is Dir. Interm. OUT On * * * LED BI BO
active (dIEF active) EF Of
f
6972 dIEF: pick up (dIEF pick Dir. Interm. OUT * On On * LED BO
up) EF Off Off

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Type
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Info
rma
tion
6973 dIEF: Trip (dIEF TRIP) Dir. Interm. OUT * On On * LED BO

EF Off
6974 dIEF: No. of detected Dir. Interm. VI * On On
forward pulses = EF Off Off
(No.forward=)
reverse pulses = EF Off Off
(No.reverse=)
undefined pulses = EF Off Off
(No.undef.=)
6979 dIEF: Alarm (dIEF ALARM) Dir. Interm. OUT * On On * LED BO
EF Off Off
7551 50-1 InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 80 2 Yes
(50-1 InRushPU) Overcur. Off
7552 50N-1 InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 81 2 Yes
(50N-1 InRushPU) Overcur. Off
7553 51 InRush picked up (51 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 82 2 Yes
InRushPU) Overcur. Off
7554 51N InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 83 2 Yes
(51N InRushPU) Overcur. Off
7556 InRush OFF (InRush OFF) 50/51 OUT On * * LED BO 60 92 1 Yes
Overcur. Of
f
7557 InRush BLOCKED (InRush 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO 60 93 1 Yes
BLK) Overcur. Of Off
f
7558 InRush Ground detected 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 94 2 Yes
(InRush Gnd Det) Overcur. Off
7559 67-1 InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 84 2 Yes
(67-1 InRushPU) Overcur. Off
7560 67N-1 InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 85 2 Yes
(67N-1 InRushPU) Overcur. Off
7561 67-TOC InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 86 2 Yes
(67-TOC InRushPU) Overcur. Off
7562 67N-TOC InRush picked 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 87 2 Yes
up (67N-TOCInRushPU) Overcur. Off
7563 >BLOCK InRush (>BLOCK 50/51 SP * * * LED BI BO
InRush) Overcur.
7564 Ground InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 88 2 Yes
(Gnd InRush PU) Overcur. Off
7565 Phase A InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 89 2 Yes
(Ia InRush PU) Overcur. Off

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
7566 Phase B InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 90 2 Yes

(Ib InRush PU) Overcur. Off
7567 Phase C InRush picked up 50/51 OUT * On * LED BO 60 91 2 Yes
(Ic InRush PU) Overcur. Off
10020 >BLOCK Load Jam Protec- 48/66 SP On LED BI BO
tion (>BLOCK Load Jam) Motorprot Of
f
10021 Load Jam Protection is 48/66 OUT On LED BO
BLOCKED (Load Jam Motorprot Of
BLOCK.) f
OFF (Load Jam OFF) Motorprot Of
f
ACTIVE (Load Jam Motorprot Of
ACTIVE) f
10024 Load Jam Protection 48/66 OUT On * LED BO
alarm (Load Jam alarm) Motorprot Of
f
10025 Load Jam Protection 48/66 OUT On * LED BO
picked up (Load Jam Motorprot Off
pickup)
10026 Load Jam Protection TRIP 48/66 OUT On * LED BO
(Load Jam TRIP) Motorprot Off
10027 Startup Duration 1 (Start- Mot.Statis- VI
Duration1) tics
10028 Startup Current 1 (Star- Mot.Statis- VI
tupCurrent1) tics
10029 Startup Voltage 1 (Star- Mot.Statis- VI
tupVoltage1) tics
10030 Total Number of Motor Mot.Statis- VI
Starts (Nr.of Mot.Start) tics
10031 Total Motor Running Time Mot.Statis- VI
(Motor Run.Time) tics
10032 Total Motor Stopped Time Mot.Statis- VI
(Motor Stop.Time) tics
10033 Motor Percent Running Mot.Statis- VI
Time (Perc.Run.Time) tics
10034 50-3 BLOCKED (50-3 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO
BLOCKED) Overcur. Of Off
f
10035 50N-3 BLOCKED (50N-3 50/51 OUT On On * LED BO
BLOCKED) Overcur. Of Off
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion

Duration2) tics
tupCurrent2) tics
tupVoltage2) tics
Duration3) tics
tupCurrent3) tics
tupVoltage3) tics
Duration4) tics
tupCurrent4) tics
tupVoltage4) tics
Duration5) tics
tupCurrent5) tics
tupVoltage5) tics
14101 Fail: RTD (broken wire/ RTD-Box OUT On * * LED BO
shorted) (Fail: RTD) Of
f
14111 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/ RTD-Box OUT On * * LED BO
shorted) (Fail: RTD 1) Of
f
14112 RTD 1 Temperature stage RTD-Box OUT On * * LED BO
1 picked up (RTD 1 St.1 Of
p.up) f
p.up) f
f
p.up) f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
information number
Data Unit
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion

p.up) f
f
p.up) f
p.up) f
f
p.up) f
p.up) f
f
p.up) f
p.up) f
f
p.up) f
p.up) f
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion

p.up) f
p.up) f
f
p.up) f
p.up) f
f
p.up) f
p.up) f
14201 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/ RTD-Box OUT On * * LED BO
shorted) (Fail: RTD10) Of
f
14202 RTD10 Temperature stage RTD-Box OUT On * * LED BO
1 picked up (RTD10 St.1 Of
p.up) f
p.up) f
f
p.up) f
p.up) f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion

f
p.up) f
p.up) f
14513 >67-3 instantaneously 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO
(>INSTANT. 67-3) O/C
14514 67-3 instantaneously 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO
(67-3 INSTANT.) O/C Of Off
f
14515 >67N-3 instantaneously 67 Direct. SP * * * LED BI BO
(>INSTANT. 67N-3) O/C
14516 67N-3 instantaneously 67 Direct. OUT On On * LED BO
(67N-3 INSTANT.) O/C Of Off
f
16001 Sum Current Exponentia- Statistics VI
tion Ph A to Ir^x (ΣI^x A=)
tion Ph B to Ir^x (ΣI^x B=)
tion Ph C to Ir^x (ΣI^x C=)
16005 Threshold Sum Curr. SetPoint(Sta OUT On * * LED BO
Exponent. exceeded t) Of
(Threshold ΣI^x>) f
16006 Residual Endurance Phase Statistics VI
A (Resid.Endu. A=)
B (Resid.Endu. B=)
C (Resid.Endu. C=)
16010 Dropped below Threshold SetPoint(Sta OUT On * * LED BO
CB Res.Endurance t) Of
(Thresh.R.Endu.<) f
16011 Number of mechanical Statistics VI
Trips Phase A
(mechan.TRIP A=)
Trips Phase B
(mechan.TRIP B=)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion

Trips Phase C
(mechan.TRIP C=)
16014 Sum Squared Current Statistics VI
Integral Phase A (ΣI^2t
A=)
Integral Phase B (ΣI^2t
B=)
Integral Phase C (ΣI^2t
C=)
16018 Threshold Sum Squa. SetPoint(Sta OUT On * * LED BO
Curr. Int. exceeded t) Of
(Thresh. ΣI^2t>) f
16019 >52 Breaker Wear Start P.System SP On * * LED BI BO
Criteria (>52 Wear start) Data 2 Of
f
16020 52 Wear blocked by Time P.System OUT On * * LED BO
Setting Failure (52 Data 2 Of
WearSet.fail) f
16027 52 Breaker Wear Logic blk P.System OUT On * * LED BO
Ir-CB>=Isc-CB (52WL.blk I Data 2 Of
PErr) f
16028 52 Breaker W.Log.blk P.System OUT On * * LED BO
SwCyc.Isc>=SwCyc.Ir Data 2 Of
(52WL.blk n PErr) f
16029 Sens.gnd.flt. 51Ns Sens. Gnd OUT On * * LED BO
BLOCKED Setting Error Fault Of
(51Ns BLK PaErr) f
16030 Angle between 3Vo and Sens. Gnd VI ON
INsens. (φ(3Vo,INs) =) Fault OF
F
16034 50Ns-1 not in tripping Sens. Gnd OUT On * * LED BO
range (50Ns-1n.TRrange) Fault Of
f
16035 50Ns-2 not in tripping Sens. Gnd OUT On * * LED BO
range (50Ns-2n.TRrange) Fault Of
f
17565 >Blocking of the offset Device, SP On * * LED BI BO
supervision (>Blk.offset General Of
s.) f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
17566 Disturbance CFC Source Device, VI O

(Dist.CFC Src) General N
OF
F
18480 Error +/- 12V (Error +/- Device, OUT On * * LED BO
12V) General Of
f
18481 >BLOCK Y0(G0/B0)-1 Adm.E Fault SP On * * LED BI BO 17 23 1 Yes
(>BLK Y0-1) Of 1
f
(>BLK Y0-2) Of 1
f
(>BLK Y0-3) Of 1
f
(>BLK Y0-4) Of 1
f
18485 Y0 G0/B0-1 in forward Adm.E Fault OUT On On * LED BO 17 27 1 Yes
direction (Y0-1 Forward) Of 1
f
18486 Y0 G0/B0-1 in reverse Adm.E Fault OUT On On * LED BO 17 28 1 Yes
direction (Y0-1 Reverse) Of 1
f
f
f
f
f
f
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
18497 Y0(G0/B0)-1 is BLOCKED Adm.E Fault OUT On On * LED BO 17 24 1 Yes

(Y0-1 BLOCKED) Of Off 1
f
f
f
f
18501 Y0(G0/B0)-1 Pickup (Y0-1 Adm.E Fault OUT * On * LED BO 17 25 2 Yes
Pickup) Off 1
Pickup) Off 1
Pickup) Off 1
Pickup) Off 1
18505 Y0(G0/B0)-1 TRIP (Y0-1 Adm.E Fault OUT * On * LED BO 17 26 2 Yes
TRIP) 1
TRIP) 1
TRIP) 1
TRIP) 1
18513 >BLOCK Y0(G0/B0) (>BLK Adm.E Fault SP On * * LED BI BO 17 1 1 Yes
Y0) Of 1
f
18514 Y0(G0/B0) is BLOCKED Adm.E Fault OUT On On * LED BO 17 2 1 Yes
(Y0 BLOCKED) Of Off 1
f
18516 Y0(G0/B0) is OFF (Y0 Adm.E Fault OUT On * * LED BO 17 3 1 Yes
OFF) Of 1
f
18517 Y0(G0/B0) is ACTIVE (Y0 Adm.E Fault OUT On * * LED BO 17 4 1 Yes
ACTIVE) Of 1
f
18518 Failure Ethernet Link Ethernet OUT On * * LED BO
Channel 1 (B1) (Fail B1) Of
f

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
18519 Failure Ethernet Link Ethernet OUT On * * LED BO

Channel 2 (B2) (Fail B2) Of
f
18520 Failure Ethernet Link Port Ethernet OUT On * * LED BO
C (Fail C) Of
f
30053 Fault recording is running Osc. Fault OUT * * * LED BO
(Fault rec. run.) Rec.
31000 Q0 operationcounter= Control VI *
(Q0 OpCnt=) Device
(Q1 OpCnt=) Device
(Q2 OpCnt=) Device
(Q8 OpCnt=) Device
(Q9 OpCnt=) Device

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.4 Group Indications

No. Description Function No. Description
140 Error Sum Alarm 144 Error 5V
145 Error 0V
146 Error -5V
147 Error PwrSupply
177 Fail Battery
178 I/O-Board error
181 Error: A/D converter
183 Error Board 1
184 Error Board 2
185 Error Board 3
186 Error Board 4
187 Error Board 5
188 Error Board 6
189 Error Board 7
191 Error Offset
193 Alarm NO calibr
18480 Error +/- 12V
160 Alarm Sum Event 162 Failure Σ I
163 Fail I balance
167 Fail V balance
175 Fail Ph. Seq. I
176 Fail Ph. Seq. V
264 Fail: RTD-Box 1
161 Fail I Superv. 162 Failure Σ I
163 Fail I balance
171 Fail Ph. Seq. 175 Fail Ph. Seq. I
176 Fail Ph. Seq. V
255 Fail VT circuit 253 VT brk. wire
170 VT FuseFail

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
No. Description Function No. Description

501 Relay PICKUP 1517 49 Winding O/L
5159 46-2 picked up
5165 46-1 picked up
5166 46-TOC pickedup
5971 50 1Ph Pickup
5974 50 1Ph-1 PU
5977 50 1Ph-2 PU
1761 50(N)/51(N) PU
2691 67/67N pickedup
1224 50Ns-1 Pickup
1221 50Ns-2 Pickup
1215 64 Pickup
6423 27/Q PICKUP
511 Relay TRIP 235.2126 $00 TRIP
6821 48 TRIP
1217 64 TRIP
1223 50Ns-2 TRIP
1226 50Ns-1 TRIP
1229 51Ns TRIP
5236 81-1 TRIP
5237 81-2 TRIP
5238 81-3 TRIP
5239 81-4 TRIP
6930 IEF Trip
10026 Load Jam TRIP
5170 46 TRIP
6539 27-1 TRIP
6540 27-2 TRIP
6570 59-1 TRIP
6573 59-2 TRIP
1471 50BF TRIP
1494 50BF TRIP 2
5972 50 1Ph TRIP
1521 49 Th O/L TRIP
4827 66 TRIP
1791 50(N)/51(N)TRIP
2696 67/67N TRIP

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.5 Measured Values
F.5 Measured Values

No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in
Matrix
information number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
– I A dmd> (I Admd>) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– I B dmd> (I Bdmd>) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– I C dmd> (I Cdmd>) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– I1dmd> (I1dmd>) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– |Pdmd|> (|Pdmd|>) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– |Qdmd|> (|Qdmd|>) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– |Sdmd|> (|Sdmd|>) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– Pressure< (Press<) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– Temp> (Temp>) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– 37-1 under current (37-1) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– |Power Factor|< (|PF|<) Set Points(MV) – – – – – CFC CD DD
– Number of TRIPs= (#of TRIPs=) Statistics – – – – – CFC CD DD
– Operating hours greater than SetPoint(Stat) – – – – – CFC CD DD
(OpHour>)
170.20 V1 = (V1 =) SYNC function – – – – – CFC CD DD
50 1
170.20 f1 = (f1 =) SYNC function – – – – – CFC CD DD
51 1
170.20 V2 = (V2 =) SYNC function – – – – – CFC CD DD
52 1
170.20 f2 = (f2 =) SYNC function – – – – – CFC CD DD
53 1
170.20 dV = (dV =) SYNC function – – – – – CFC CD DD
54 1
170.20 df = (df =) SYNC function – – – – – CFC CD DD
55 1
170.20 dalpha = (dα =) SYNC function – – – – – CFC CD DD
56 1
601 Ia (Ia =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 1 CFC CD DD
602 Ib (Ib =) Measurement 160 145 Yes 3 1 CFC CD DD
134 137 No 9 2
603 Ic (Ic =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 3 CFC CD DD
604 In (In =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 4 CFC CD DD
605 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
606 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
621 Va (Va =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 5 CFC CD DD
622 Vb (Vb =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 6 CFC CD DD
623 Vc (Vc =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 7 CFC CD DD
624 Va-b (Va-b=) Measurement 160 145 Yes 3 2 CFC CD DD

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.5 Measured Values

Matrix
information number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
134 137 No 9 8
625 Vb-c (Vb-c=) Measurement 134 137 No 9 9 CFC CD DD
626 Vc-a (Vc-a=) Measurement 134 137 No 9 10 CFC CD DD
627 VN (VN =) Measurement 134 118 No 9 1 CFC CD DD
629 V1 (positive sequence) (V1 =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
630 V2 (negative sequence) (V2 =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
632 Vsync (synchronism) (Vsync =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
641 P (active power) (P =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 11 CFC CD DD
642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 12 CFC CD DD
644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement 134 137 No 9 13 CFC CD DD
645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
661 Threshold of Restart Inhibit (Θ Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
REST. =)
701 Resistive ground current in isol Measurement 134 137 No 9 15 CFC CD DD
systems (INs Real)
702 Reactive ground current in isol Measurement 134 137 No 9 16 CFC CD DD
systems (INs Reac)
805 Temperature of Rotor (Θ Rotor) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
807 Thermal Overload (Θ/Θtrip) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
809 Time untill release of reclose- Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
blocking (T reclose=)
830 INs Senstive Ground Fault Current Measurement 134 118 No 9 3 CFC CD DD
(INs =)
831 3Io (zero sequence) (3Io =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
832 Vo (zero sequence) (Vo =) Measurement 134 118 No 9 2 CFC CD DD
833 I1 (positive sequence) Demand (I1 Demand meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
dmd=)
834 Active Power Demand (P dmd =) Demand meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
835 Reactive Power Demand (Q dmd Demand meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
=)
836 Apparent Power Demand (S dmd Demand meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
=)
837 I A Demand Minimum (IAdmdMin) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
838 I A Demand Maximum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(IAdmdMax)
839 I B Demand Minimum (IBdmdMin) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
840 I B Demand Maximum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(IBdmdMax)
841 I C Demand Minimum (ICdmdMin) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
842 I C Demand Maximum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(ICdmdMax)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.5 Measured Values

Matrix
information number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
843 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
Minimum (I1dmdMin)
844 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
Maximum (I1dmdMax)
845 Active Power Demand Minimum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(PdMin=)
846 Active Power Demand Maximum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(PdMax=)
847 Reactive Power Demand Minimum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(QdMin=)
848 Reactive Power Demand Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
Maximum (QdMax=)
849 Apparent Power Demand Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
Minimum (SdMin=)
850 Apparent Power Demand Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
Maximum (SdMax=)
851 Ia Min (Ia Min=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
852 Ia Max (Ia Max=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
853 Ib Min (Ib Min=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
854 Ib Max (Ib Max=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
855 Ic Min (Ic Min=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
856 Ic Max (Ic Max=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
857 I1 (positive sequence) Minimum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(I1 Min=)
858 I1 (positive sequence) Maximum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(I1 Max=)
859 Va-n Min (Va-nMin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
860 Va-n Max (Va-nMax=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
861 Vb-n Min (Vb-nMin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
862 Vb-n Max (Vb-nMax=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
863 Vc-n Min (Vc-nMin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
864 Vc-n Max (Vc-nMax=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
865 Va-b Min (Va-bMin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
867 Va-b Max (Va-bMax=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
868 Vb-c Min (Vb-cMin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
869 Vb-c Max (Vb-cMax=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
870 Vc-a Min (Vc-aMin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
871 Vc-a Max (Vc-aMax=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
872 V neutral Min (Vn Min =) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
873 V neutral Max (Vn Max =) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
874 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
Minimum (V1 Min =)

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.5 Measured Values

Matrix
information number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
875 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
Maximum (V1 Max =)
876 Active Power Minimum (Pmin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
877 Active Power Maximum (Pmax=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
878 Reactive Power Minimum (Qmin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
879 Reactive Power Maximum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(Qmax=)
880 Apparent Power Minimum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(Smin=)
881 Apparent Power Maximum Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
(Smax=)
882 Frequency Minimum (fmin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
883 Frequency Maximum (fmax=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
884 Power Factor Maximum (PF Max=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
885 Power Factor Minimum (PF Min=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) Energy 133 55 No 205 – CFC CD DD
(Wp(puls))
889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) Energy 133 56 No 205 – CFC CD DD
(Wq(puls))
901 Power Factor (PF =) Measurement 134 137 No 9 14 CFC CD DD
924 Wp Forward (WpForward) Energy 133 51 No 205 – CFC CD DD
925 Wq Forward (WqForward) Energy 133 52 No 205 – CFC CD DD
928 Wp Reverse (WpReverse) Energy 133 53 No 205 – CFC CD DD
929 Wq Reverse (WqReverse) Energy 133 54 No 205 – CFC CD DD
963 I A demand (Ia dmd=) Demand meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
964 I B demand (Ib dmd=) Demand meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
965 I C demand (Ic dmd=) Demand meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
991 Pressure (Press =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
992 Temperature (Temp =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
996 Transducer 1 (Td1=) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
997 Transducer 2 (Td2=) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
1058 Overload Meter Max (Θ/ Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
ΘTrpMax=)
1059 Overload Meter Min (Θ/ΘTrpMin=) Min/Max meter – – – – – CFC CD DD
1068 Temperature of RTD 1 (Θ RTD 1 =) Measurement 134 146 No 9 1 CFC CD DD

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.5 Measured Values

Matrix
information number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
1077 Temperature of RTD10 (Θ RTD10 Measurement 134 146 No 9 10 CFC CD DD
=)
=)
=)
16004 Threshold Sum Current Exponen- SetPoint(Stat) – – – – – CFC CD DD
tiation (ΣI^x>)
16009 Lower Threshold of CB Residual SetPoint(Stat) – – – – – CFC CD DD
Endurance (Resid.Endu. <)
16017 Threshold Sum Squared Current SetPoint(Stat) – – – – – CFC CD DD
Integral (ΣI^2t>)
16031 Angle between 3Vo and INsens. Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
(φ(3Vo,INs) =)
16032 In2 (In2 =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
30701 Pa (active power, phase A) (Pa =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
30702 Pb (active power, phase B) (Pb =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
30703 Pc (active power, phase C) (Pc =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
30704 Qa (reactive power, phase A) (Qa Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
=)
30705 Qb (reactive power, phase B) (Qb Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
=)
30706 Qc (reactive power, phase C) (Qc Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
=)
30707 Power Factor, phase A (PFa =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
30708 Power Factor, phase B (PFb =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
30709 Power Factor, phase C (PFc =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
30800 Voltage VX (VX =) Measurement – – – – – CFC CD DD
17937 Ia (2nd harmonic) = (Ia (2nd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17938 Ib (2nd harmonic) = (Ib (2nd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17939 Ic (2nd harmonic) = (Ic (2nd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17940 Ia (3rd harmonic) = (Ia (3rd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17941 Ib (3rd harmonic) = (Ib (3rd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17942 Ic (3rd harmonic) = (Ic (3rd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17943 Ia (4th harmonic) = (Ia (4th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17944 Ib (4th harmonic) = (Ib (4th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17945 Ic (4th harmonic) = (Ic (4th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17946 Ia (5th harmonic) = (Ia (5th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17947 Ib (5th harmonic) = (Ib (5th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
F.5 Measured Values

Matrix
information number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
17948 Ic (5th harmonic) = (Ic (5th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17961 Ia (THD) = (Ia (THD) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17962 Ib (THD) = (Ib (THD) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17963 Ic (THD) = (Ic (THD) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17949 Va (2nd harmonic) = (Va (2nd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17950 Vb (2nd harmonic) = (Vb (2nd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17951 Vc (2nd harmonic) = (Vc (2nd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17952 Va (3rd harmonic) = (Va (3rd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17953 Vb (3rd harmonic) = (Vb (3rd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17954 Vc (3rd harmonic) = (Vc (3rd) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17955 Va (4th harmonic) = (Va (4th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17956 Vb (4th harmonic) = (Vb (4th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17957 Vc (4th harmonic) = (Vc (4th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17958 Va (5th harmonic) = (Va (5th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17959 Vb (5th harmonic) = (Vb (5th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17960 Vc (5th harmonic) = (Vc (5th) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17964 Va (THD) = (Va (THD) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17965 Vb (THD) = (Vb (THD) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD
17966 Vc (THD) = (Vc (THD) =) Measurement - - - - - cfc CD DD

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Literature
/1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description

E50417-H1176-C151
/2/ SIPROTEC DIGSI, Start UP
E50417-G1176-C152
/3/ DIGSI CFC, Manual
E50417-H1176-C098
/4/ SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual
E50417-H1176-C070
/5/ Additional description for the protection of explosion-protected motors of protection type increased safety “e”
C53000–B1174–C170
/6/ Ethernet Module EN100 for IEC 61850 with electrical/optical 100 MBit Interface, Manual
C53000-G1140-C167-14

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
Bay controllers
Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protective functions.
Bit pattern indication

Bit pattern indication is a processing function by means of which items of digital process information applying
across several inputs can be detected together in parallel and processed further. The bit pattern length can be
specified as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes.
BP_xx
→ Bit pattern indication (Bitstring Of x Bit), x designates the length in bits (8, 16, 24 or 32 bits).
Buffer battery
The buffer battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers and counters are retained retentively.
C_xx
Command without feedback
CF_xx
Command with feedback
CFC
Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphical editor with which a program can be created and configured by
using ready-made blocks.
CFC blocks
Blocks are parts of the user program delimited by their function, their structure or their purpose.
Chatter ON
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, due to a relay contact fault) is switched off after a configurable
monitoring time and can thus not generate any further signal changes. The function prevents overloading of
the system when a fault arises.
Combination devices
Combination devices are bay devices with protection functions and a control display.
Combination matrix
From DIGSI V4.6 onward, up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an
Inter Relay Communication combination (IRC combination). Which device exchanges which information is
defined with the help of the combination matrix.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
Communication branch
A communications branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n users that communicate by means of a
common bus.
Communication reference CR
The communication reference describes the type and version of a station in communication by PROFIBUS.
Component view
In addition to a topological view, SIMATIC Manager offers you a component view. The component view does
not offer any overview of the hierarchy of a project. It does, however, provide an overview of all the SIPROTEC
4 devices within a project.
COMTRADE
Common Format for Transient Data Exchange, format for fault records.
Container
If an object can contain other objects, it is called a container. The object Folder is an example of such a
container.
Control Display
The display which is displayed on devices with a large (graphic) display after you have pressed the control key
is called the control display. It contains the switchgear that can be controlled in the feeder with status display.
It is used to perform switching operations. Defining this display is part of the configuration.
Data pane
The right-hand area of the project window displays the contents of the area selected in the → navigation
window, for example indications, measured values, etc. of the information lists or the function selection for
the device configuration.
DCF77
The extremely precise official time is determined in Germany by the "Physikalisch-Technische-Bundesanstalt
PTB" in Braunschweig. The atomic clock station of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time-signal
transmitter in Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of
approx. 1,500 km from Frankfurt/Main.
Device container
In the Component View, all SIPROTEC 4 devices are assigned to an object of type Device container. This object
is a special object of DIGSI Manager. However, since there is no component view in DIGSI Manager, this object
only becomes visible in conjunction with STEP 7.
Double command
Double commands are process outputs which indicate 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 defined (for example
ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions)
Double-point indication
Double-point indications are items of process information which indicate 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2
defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions).
DP
→ Double-point indication

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
DP_I
→ Double point indication, intermediate position 00
Drag and drop

Copying, moving and linking function, used at graphics user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse,
held and moved from one data area to another.
Earth
The conductive earth whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every point. In the area of earth elec-
trodes the earth can have a potential deviating from zero. The term "Earth reference plane" is often used for
this state.
Earth (verb)
This term means that a conductive part is connected via an earthing system to the → earth.
Earthing
Earthing is the total of all means and measures used for earthing.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function fault-free in a specified
environment without influencing the environment unduly.
EMC
→ Electromagnetic compatibility
ESD protection
ESD protection is the total of all the means and measures used to protect electrostatic sensitive devices.
EVA
Limiting value, user-defined
ExBPxx
External bit pattern indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Bit pattern indication
ExC
External command without feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExCF
Command with feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExDP
External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Double point indication
ExDP_I
External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, intermediate position 00, device-specific →
Double point indication
ExMV
External metered value via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
ExSI
External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Single point indication
ExSI_F
External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, Spontaneous event, device-specific → Fleeting
indication, → Single point indication
Field devices
Generic term for all devices assigned to the field level: Protection devices, combination devices, bay control-
lers.
Fleeting Indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.
FMS communication branch

Within an FMS communication branch, the users communicate on the basis of the PROFIBUS FMS protocol via
a PROFIBUS FMS network.
Folder
This object type is used to create the hierarchical structure of a project.
General interrogation (GI)

During the system start-up the state of all the process inputs, of the status and of the fault image is sampled.
This information is used to update the system-end process image. The current process state can also be
sampled after a data loss by means of a GI.
GOOSE message
GOOSE messages (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) according to IEC 61850 are data packets which
are transferred event-controlled via the Ethernet communication system. They serve for direct information
exchange among the relays. This mechanism implements cross-communication between bay units.
GPS
Global Positioning System. Satellites with atomic clocks on board orbit the earth twice a day on different paths
in approx. 20,000 km. They transmit signals which also contain the GPS universal time. The GPS receiver
determines its own position from the signals received. From its position it can derive the delay time of a satel-
lite signal and thus correct the transmitted GPS universal time.
Hierarchy level
Within a structure with higher-level and lower-level objects a hierarchy level is a container of equivalent
objects.
HV field description
The HV project description file contains details of fields which exist in a ModPara-project. The actual field infor-
mation of each field is stored in a HV field description file. Within the HV project description file, each field is
allocated such a HV field description file by a reference to the file name.
HV project description
All the data is exported once the configuration and parameterization of PCUs and sub-modules using ModPara
has been completed. This data is split up into several files. One file contains details about the fundamental
project structure. This also includes, for example, information detailing which fields exist in this project. This
file is called a HV project description file.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
ID
Internal double point indication → Double point indication
ID_S
Internal double point indication, intermediate position 00 → Double point indication
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission, international standardization body
IEC61850
International communication standard for communication in substations. The objective of this standard is the
interoperability of devices from different manufacturers on the station bus. An Ethernet network is used for
data transfer.
IEC address
Within an IEC bus a unique IEC address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 IEC
addresses are available for each IEC bus.
IEC communication branch

Within an IEC communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the IEC60-870-5-103 protocol via
an IEC bus.
Initialization string
An initialization string comprises a range of modem-specific commands. These are transmitted to the modem
within the framework of modem initialization. The commands can, for example, force specific settings for the
modem.
Inter relay communication

→ IRC combination
IntSP
Internal single point indication → Single point indication
IntSP_Ev
Internal indication Spontaneous event → Fleeting indication, → Single point indication
IRC combination
Inter Relay Communication, IRC, is used for directly exchanging process information between SIPROTEC 4
devices. You require an object of type IRC combination to configure an inter relay communication. Each user
of the combination and all the necessary communication parameters are defined in this object. The type and
scope of the information exchanged between the users is also stored in this object.
IRIG B
Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO 9001
The ISO 9000 ff range of standards defines measures used to assure the quality of a product from the develop-
ment stage to the manufacturing stage.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
LFO-Filter
(Low-Frequency-Oscillation) Filter for low frequency oscillations
Link address
The link address gives the address of a V3/V2 device.
List view
The right window section of the project window displays the names and icons of objects which represent the
contents of a container selected in the tree view. Because they are displayed in the form of a list, this area is
called the list view.
LPS
Line Post Sensor
LV
Limiting value
Master
Masters may send data to other users and request data from other users. DIGSI operates as a master.
Metered value
Metered values are a processing function with which the total number of discrete similar events (counting
pulses) is determined for a period, usually as an integrated value. In power supply companies the electrical
work is usually recorded as a metered value (energy purchase/supply, energy transportation).
MLFB
MLFB is the abbreviation for "MaschinenLesbare FabrikateBezeichnung" (machine-readable product designa-
tion). This is the equivalent of an order number. The type and version of a SIPROTEC 4 device is coded in the
order number.
Modem connection
This object type contains information on both partners of a modem connection, the local modem and the
remote modem.
Modem profile
A modem profile consists of the name of the profile, a modem driver and may also comprise several initializa-
tion commands and a user address. You can create several modem profiles for one physical modem. To do so
you need to link various initialization commands or user addresses to a modem driver and its properties and
save them under different names.
Modems
Modem profiles for a modem connection are stored in this object type.
MV
Measured value
MVMV
Metered value which is formed from the measured value

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
MVT
Measured value with time
MVU
Measured value, user-defined
Navigation pane
The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a folder tree.
Object
Each element of a project structure is called an object in DIGSI.
Object properties
Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to several objects. An object
can also have specific properties.
Off-line
In offline mode a connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device is not required. You work with data which are stored in
files.
On-line
When working in online mode, there is a physical connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device. This connection can be
implemented as a direct connection, as a modem connection or as a PROFIBUS FMS connection.
OUT
Output Indication
OUT_Ev
Output indication Spontaneous event→ Fleeting indication
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. The parameterization is done with DIGSI or sometimes
also directly on the device.
Parameter set
The parameter set is the set of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Phone book
User addresses for a modem connection are saved in this object type.
PMV
Pulse metered value
Process bus
Devices with a process bus interface allow direct communication with SICAM HV modules. The process bus
interface is equipped with an Ethernet module.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard, as specified in the standard EN 50170, Volume
2, PROFIBUS. It defines the functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus.
PROFIBUS address
Within a PROFIBUS network a unique PROFIBUS address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total
of 254 PROFIBUS addresses are available for each PROFIBUS network.
Project
Content-wise, a project is the image of a real power supply system. Graphically, a project is represented as a
number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project consists of a number of
directories and files containing project data.
Protection devices
All devices with a protective function and no control display.
Reorganizing
Frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas that can no longer be used. By reorganizing
projects, you can release these memory areas again. However, a cleanup also reassigns the VD addresses. The
consequence is that all SIPROTEC 4 devices have to be reinitialized.
RIO file
Relay data Interchange format by Omicron.
RSxxx-interface
Serial interfaces RS232, RS422/485
Service interface
Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting DIGSI (for example, via modem).
SICAM PAS (Power Automation System)

Substation control system: The range of possible configurations spans from integrated standalone systems
(SICAM PAS and M&C with SICAM PAS CC on one computer) to separate hardware for SICAM PAS and SICAM
PAS CC to distributed systems with multiple SICAM Station Units. The software is a modular system with basic
and optional packages. SICAM PAS is a purely distributed system: the process interface is implemented by the
use of bay units / remote terminal units.
SICAM Station Unit

The SICAM Station Unit with its special hardware (no fan, no rotating parts) and its Windows XP Embedded
operating system is the basis for SICAM PAS.
SICAM WinCC
The SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system displays the state of your network graphically, visu-
alizes alarms, interrupts and indications, archives the network data, offers the possibility of intervening
manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employee.
Single command
Single commands are process outputs which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at one output.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
Single point indication

Single indications are items of process information which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at
one output.
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC is used for devices implemented on system base V4.
SIPROTEC 4 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC 4 device with all the setting values and process data it contains.
SIPROTEC 4 Variant
This object type represents a variant of an object of type SIPROTEC 4 device. The device data of this variant
may well differ from the device data of the original object. However, all variants derived from the original
object have the same VD address as the original object. For this reason they always correspond to the same
real SIPROTEC 4 device as the original object. Objects of type SIPROTEC 4 variant have a variety of uses, such
as documenting different operating states when entering parameter settings of a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Slave
A slave may only exchange data with a master after being prompted to do so by the master. SIPROTEC 4
devices operate as slaves.
SP
→ Single point indication
SP_W
→ Single point indication Spontaneous event → Fleeting indication, → Single point indication
System interface
Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting to a substation controller via IEC or PROFIBUS.
TI
Transformer Tap Indication
Time stamp
Time stamp is the assignment of the real time to a process event.
Topological view
DIGSI Manager always displays a project in the topological view. This shows the hierarchical structure of a
project with all available objects.
Transformer Tap Indication

Transformer tap indication is a processing function on the DI by means of which the tap of the transformer tap
changer can be detected together in parallel and processed further.
Tree view
The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a folder tree. This area is called the tree view.
Ungrounded
Without any electrical connection to → ground.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Glossary
User address
A user address comprises the name of the user, the national code, the area code and the user-specific phone
number.
Users
From DIGSI V4.6 onward , up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an
Inter Relay Communication combination. The individual participating devices are called users.
VD
A VD (Virtual Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used by a
communication user through services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device or a software
module.
VD address
The VD address is assigned automatically by DIGSI Manager. It exists only once in the entire project and thus
serves to identify unambiguously a real SIPROTEC 4 device. The VD address assigned by DIGSI Manager must
be transferred to the SIPROTEC 4 device in order to allow communication with DIGSI Device Editor.
VFD
A VFD (Virtual Field Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used
by a communication user through services.
VI
VI stands for Value Indication.

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Index
A Commissioning Aids 511

Communication Interfaces 440
Action Time 250 Constructive Designs 444
Alternating Voltage 439 Contact Mode for Binary Outputs 396
Ambient Temperature 172 Control Voltage for Binary Inputs 396
Analog Inputs 438 Controlling Protection Elements 254
ATEX100 150, 172 Coolant Temperature 172
Automatic Reclosing 247, 492 Cross Blocking 68
Auxiliary Voltage 396, 438 CTs
knee-point voltage 117
Cubicle Mounting 412
Current Criterion 127
B Current Inputs 438
Current sum monitoring. 180
Binary Inputs 439 Current Symmetry Monitoring 183
Binary Outputs 439, 439 Current transformers 122
Blocking Time 251
Blocking via FFM 91
Breaker Failure Protection 274, 494
Broken Wire Monitoring 189
D
Buffer Battery 180
Busbar protection 119, 124 Dead Time Start Delay 250
Default Display Selection
Start page 37
Definite-time Overcurrent Protection 446
C Determination of Direction 92
Direct Voltage 438
Cabinet Flush Mounting 513, 514 Direction Check with Load Current 426
Change Setting Group 393 Directional intermittent ground fault protection 242,
Changing Setting Groups 50 491
Checking: Breaker Failure Protection 423 Directional Overcurrent Protection 84, 459
Checking: Direction 426 Directional Time Overcurrent 90
Checking: Phase Rotation 425 Dynamic Blocking 252
Checking: Polarity at Current Input IE 430 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup 110, 462
Checking: Polarity for Voltage Input V4 427
Checking: Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs 421
Checking: Switching the Configured Operating
Devices 434
E
Checking: System Connections 416
Checking: User-Defined Functions 425 Earth fault 124
Checking: Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker Electrical Tests 441
(VT mcb) 425 EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests) 442
Circuit Breaker Maintenance 510 EMC Tests for Noise Emission (Type Test) 442
Circuit Breaker Monitoring 253 Emergency Start 151
Circuit Breaker Status Detection 253 Energy Counter 510
Climatic Stress Tests 443 Equilibrium Time 149
Clock 511 Exchanging Interfaces 396
Command-dependent Messages 36

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Index
F Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection 448
Fault Location Determination 271

Fault Locator 271, 493
L
double ground faults 271
Fault Logging 509
Limits CFC blocks 503
Fault Messages
Limits User-defined Functions 503
Seting notes 37
Line sections 271, 272
Fault Recording 510
Live Status Contact 396
Fault Records 48
Load Jam Protection 475
Final Preparation of the Device 436
Local Measured Value Monitoring 509
Flexible Protection Functions 495
Long-Term Mean Values 508
Frequency protection 162
Frequency Protection 476
Function Blocks 501
M
Malfunction Responses 197
G
Measured Value Telegrams
Setting notes 37
General Device Pickup 322
Mechanical Tests 443
General Tripping 322
Mesurement Monitoring 180
Ground fault 118, 118
Min./Max. Memory 508
measurements cos ϕ 203
Minimum Inhibit Time 149
Ground Fault Check 429
Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts 275
Ground fault detection
Monitoring of the Current Flow 275
Direction determination for cos-ϕ/ sin-ϕ 217
Motor Restart Inhibit 474
Logic with cos-φ/ sin-φ 203
Motor Starting Time Supervision 473
Ground Fault Detection 481
Current Elements with cos-φ/ sin-φ 201
Current Elements with U0/I0–φ 207
Determination of Direction with cos-φ/ sin-φ 201 N
Logic with U0/I0 φ 208
Trip delay with U0/I0 φ 219 Negative Sequence Protection 136
Tripping Area with U0/I0–φ 208 Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time character-
voltage element with cos-φ/ sin-φ 200 istic) 466
Voltage Element with U0/I0-φ 206 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteris-
tics) 467
Nominal Currents 396
Non-Interlocked Switching 364
H
Hardware Monitoring 180
High-impedance Protection 120 O
Srensitivity 122
Stability 121 Offset Monitoring 183
Hours Meter "CB open" 327 Operating Hours Counter 510
Humidity 444 Operational Measured Values 500, 507
Ordering Information 518, 523
Output Relays 439
Overcurrent Protection 56
I
pickup value 120, 124
Rated data of a CT 120
Indication Thresholds of Temperatures 500
single-Phase 120
Inrush Restraint 68, 92, 461
Single-phase 463
Insulation Test 441
time delay 124
Interlocked 364
trip time delay 120
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 236, 490
Overcurrent Protection Single Phase
Inverse Time Overcurrent 62

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Index
Frequency 463 System Interface 440

Overcurrent Protection Single-phase
Current Elements 463
Frequency 463
Overfrequency 162 T
Overload Protection 171
Overvoltage Protection 59 127 Tank leakage protection 119
Tank Leakage Protection 124
sensitivity 124
time delay 124
P Temperature Detection 313, 500
Temperature Detectors 500
Panel Flush Mounting 513, 514 Temperatures 443
Phase Rotation 321 Terminating the Trip Signal 322
Phase Sequence Monitoring 185 Termination of Bus-capable Interfaces 397
Pickup Logic 322 Test fault record 434
Polarity Check for Current Input IE 430 Testing: System Interface 419
Thermal Overload Protection 479
Thermal Replica 171
Thermobox for Temperature Detection 313
R Time Allocation 509
Time Synchronization 511
Rack Mounting 412 Time Synchronization Interface 441
Reclosing Programs 250 Total Time TReclose 150
Regulations 441 Transformer
Reset of Stored LED / Relays 36 Saturation voltage 118
Restart Threshold 149 Triggering Oscillographic Recording 435
Restart Time 149 Trip Circuit Supervision 193, 394, 511
Reverse Interlocking 71 Trip tests with circuit breaker 434
Rotor Overload Detection 149 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating
RTD Box for Temperature Detection 500 Devices 434
Rush stabilisation 92 Tripping Logic 322
Two-phase Overcurrent Protection 70
S
U
Saved Number of Trips 510
Security log 389 Überstromzeitschutz einphasig
Sensitive ground-fault detection Dropout Ratios 463
Directional overcurrent-protection stage with G0 or Underfrequency 162
B0 measurement 226 Undervoltage Consideration 65
Sensitive ground current with Y0 225 Undervoltage Protection 27 128
Service Conditions 444 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/
Service/Modem Interface 440 Q) 477
Setting Group Change 393 User Interface 440
Setting Group Change Option of the Functional User-defined Functions 501
Settings 511
Setting Groups Changing 50
Software Monitoring 183
Spontaneous Fault Indications 36 V
Standard Interlocking 364
Static Blocking 251 Vibration and Shock Stress during Steady-State Opera-
Switchgear controll 360 tion 443
Switching Authority 367 Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport 443
Switching Device Control 512 voltage controlled 65
Switching Mode 368 Voltage Inputs 438
Synchrocheck 303 Voltage limit 119
Synchronization Function 300, 498 Voltage protection 126

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021
Index
Voltage Protection 464

voltage restraint 65
Voltage supply 438
Voltage Symmetry monitoring 184
W
Watchdog 183
Web-Monitor 348

C53000-B1140-C383-B, Edition 09.2021

7SJ66 Manual AB Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7SJ66 Manual AB Us

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7SJ66 Manual AB Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the Manual

• Instructions for Installation and Commissioning → Chapter 3;

• Compilation of the Technical Data → Chapter 4;

Customer Support Center

SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual 3

4 SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

• Proper storage, setup and installation

• Proper operation and maintenance

Selection of Used Symbols on the Device

Nr. Symbol Description

1 Direct current, IEC 60417, 5031

2 Alternating current, IEC 60417, 5032

3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417, 5033

4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417, 5017

5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417, 5019

6 Caution, risk of electric shock

7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000, 0434

8 Protective Insulation, IEC 60417, 5172, Safety Class II devices

SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual 5

Nr. Symbol Description

9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices

10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market

Typographic and Symbol Conventions

Device-internal logical input signal

Device-internal logical output signal

Internal input signal of an analog quantity

Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with address

6 SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual

Analog input variable

AND-gate operation of input values

OR-gate operation of input values

Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the

Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive

Dynamic inputs (edge-triggered) above with positive, below with

Formation of one analog output signal from a number of analog input

Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual 7

SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual 9

2.2.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function............................................................................. 67

10 SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual

2.8 Motor Protection.............................................................................................................143

SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual 11

2.13.4 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................212

12 SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual

2.21.2 Implementation of the Reverse Power Protection....................................................... 295

SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual 13

2.26.6.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 345

14 SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual

2.30.3 Configuration............................................................................................................ 386

3 Mounting and Commissioning................................................................................................................. 391

4 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 437

SIPROTEC 4, Multi-Functional Protective Relay with Local Control, Manual 15

4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests.................................................................................................. 443